JP7350324B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information acquired based on the winning of the game medium in the starting area, and the game performance is performed according to the result of the determination. (For example, see Patent Document 1).

Some of these gaming machines play a game by switching the target between the first starting port and the second starting port.

JP2019-033816A

If the game machine does not allow the game ball to enter the starting slot according to the game state, the result may be disadvantageous for the player and the interest in the game may decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and based on the determination, the first display means ( When the variable display of the symbols (special symbols) executed on the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 reaches a predetermined special result, a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player is executed. A gaming machine (1) that is capable of Based on the establishment of the first starting condition for the opening 45) or the establishment of the second starting condition for the second starting means (second winning opening 47), a second starting condition different from the first display means is displayed. 2 display means (first image display device 70) is capable of performing a fluctuating performance of a plurality of performance symbols (performance symbol 70a), and a stop display that stops displaying the plurality of performance symbols (performance symbol 70a) in the fluctuating performance. The modes include a first stop display mode (for example, simultaneous stop) in which the production symbol (production symbol 70a) is stopped in a first pattern, and a second stop display mode in which the production symbol (production symbol 70a) is stopped in a second pattern different from the first stop display mode. There is a second stop display mode (for example, stopping in order) in which the performance symbols 70a) are stopped, and the variable performance is determined to be a loss based on the first starting condition , which is performed from the maximum number of reservations in the normal gaming state. The second stop display mode (for example, stopping in order) is more likely to be executed in the variable performance in which the loss determination is based on the first starting condition, which is performed from the maximum number of reservations in the specific gaming state, and the performance symbols It is possible to execute a symbol change performance that changes the display size, and from the fluctuation performance that determines a loss based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state, it is possible to perform a losing performance based on the first starting condition in the normal gaming state. The variation production that becomes a judgment has a larger number of patterns of the symbol change production (for example, the number of patterns with different display sizes), and when the variation production starts and/or ends, the variation production A gaming machine capable of executing a special performance that changes symbols into a predetermined manner, and satisfying at least one of the following (i) and (ii). (i) The variable effect based on the first starting condition in the normal gaming state is performed when the variable effect starts, rather than the variable effect based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state. There are many types of special performances. (ii) The variable effect based on the first starting condition in the normal gaming state is performed when the variable effect ends than the variable effect based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state. There are many types of special performances.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of players.

It is a diagram showing an example of a front view of the gaming machine. It is a diagram showing an example of a block diagram of the entire gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing main processing in the main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board. It is a figure showing input control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st starting port detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control process in a main control board. It is a diagram showing the types of commands sent from the main control board to the production control board. It is a diagram showing the types of commands sent from the main control board to the production control board. It is a figure which shows the main processing in a production control part. It is a diagram showing timer interrupt processing in the production control section. It is a diagram showing customer waiting performance processing in the performance control section. It is a figure which shows an example of a demonstration standby time determination table. It is a figure which shows the prefetch type|system|group performance process in a performance control part. It is a figure showing icon change production decision processing in a production control part. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an icon final display mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a change scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows the icon display mode update process in a production control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the change pattern determination table for pending icons. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1 step change pattern determination table for the said icon. It is a figure which shows an example of the two-step change pattern determination table for the said icon. It is a figure which shows an example of the said icon change pattern determination table for the time of a power outage. (a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the frequency of occurrence of the pending icon display mode and the timing of occurrence of a change effect, and (b) is a diagram showing the relationship 1 of the frequency of occurrence between the type of change effect and the timing of occurrence of change effect. (c) is a diagram showing the relationship 2 of the frequency of occurrence between the change production type and the change production generation timing, and (d) is a diagram showing the relationship between the icon display mode and the notification sound when the icon occurs (changes). FIG. It is a figure which shows the continuous preview performance determination process in a performance control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a preview scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows the continuous notice performance execution process in a performance control part. It is a figure which shows an example of an alternative notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows lamp change production execution processing in a production control part. It is a diagram showing jackpot preview performance determination processing in the performance control section. It is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot notice determination table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing main processing in the overall control unit. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating command reception interrupt processing in the overall control unit. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating V blank interrupt processing in the overall control unit. This is a timing chart 1 of a change performance when winning a prize. This is a timing chart 2 of the change performance when winning a prize. It is a diagram showing an example of a presentation that changes when winning a prize. FIG. 1 is a timing chart 1 of a normal change pattern 01. FIG. FIG. 2 is a timing chart 2 of normal change pattern 01. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of the effect of normal change pattern 01. FIG. It is a timing chart 1 of character action change pattern 01. It is a timing chart 2 of character action change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the character action change pattern 01. 43 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 42. FIG. It is a figure which shows the timing chart 1 of the symbol effect change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the timing chart 2 of the symbol effect change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the symbol effect change pattern 01. 47 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 46. FIG. It is a timing chart in which a variable performance is started from a customer waiting state. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance in which a variable performance is started from a customer waiting state. 49 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 49; FIG. It is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during a variable performance. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance in which the number of reservations increases during a variable performance. It is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in which the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing. It is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during a specific reach performance. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance in which the number of reservations increases during a specific reach performance. It is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases and decreases before and after the end of a specific gaming state. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance in which the number of reservations increases and decreases before and after the end of a specific gaming state. 59 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 58. FIG. It is a figure which shows the accessory initial processing in a lamp/drive control part. It is a figure which shows the origin return process in a lamp/drive control part. It is a figure which shows the initial operation process in a lamp/drive control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a board accessory initial movement pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is no recovery abnormality in various accessories after power-on. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example when there is a return abnormality in the second movable member after power is turned on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the 1st movable member has a return abnormality after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the production button has a return abnormality after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is no recovery abnormality in various accessories after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the 2nd movable member has a return abnormality after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the 1st movable member has a return abnormality after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the production button has a return abnormality after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the state after a power supply restoration is in the midst of the variable display of a special symbol, and with reservation memory. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where a power recovery designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where a power-on command (a power-on designation command, a power recovery designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a first example in which power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a second specific example in which power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a third specific example in which power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a fourth specific example in which power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped. It is a figure which shows the modification 1 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped. It is a figure which shows the modification 2 in which only the power supply to a main control board is restarted after stopping. It is a figure which shows the modification when the 2nd movable member has a return abnormality after power-on. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when restarting after the power supply to a gaming machine is stopped during execution of the said icon change performance and lamp change performance. 85 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 84. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when restarting after power supply to a gaming machine is stopped during execution of a continuous notice performance, a pending icon change performance, and a lamp change performance. 87 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 86. FIG. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the connection state of various detection means changes in a customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the accessory initial processing in a lamp/drive control part. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is no recovery abnormality in various accessories after power-on. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example when there is a return abnormality in the second movable member after power is turned on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the 1st movable member has a return abnormality after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the production button has a return abnormality after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is no recovery abnormality in various accessories after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the 2nd movable member has a return abnormality after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the 1st movable member has a return abnormality after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the production button has a return abnormality after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the state after a power supply restoration is in the midst of the variable display of a special symbol, and with reservation memory. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where a power recovery designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where a power-on command (a power-on designation command, a power recovery designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a first example in which power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a second specific example in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped. 11 is a diagram showing a third specific example in which power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a fourth specific example in which power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a timing chart of a first specific example when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the specific example 1 when a command cannot be normally received. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing timing charts of specific examples 2 to 4 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the specific example 2 when a command cannot be normally received. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example of a performance in the specific example 2 when a command cannot be normally received. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the specific example 3 when a command cannot be normally received. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example of a performance in the specific example 3 when a command cannot be normally received. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the specific example 4 when a command cannot be normally received. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example of a performance in the specific example 4 when a command cannot be normally received. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing timing charts of specific examples 5 to 7 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the specific example 5 when a command cannot be normally received. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example of a performance in the specific example 5 when a command cannot be normally received. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the specific example 6 when a command cannot be normally received. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example of a performance in the specific example 6 when a command cannot be normally received. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the specific example 7 when a command cannot be normally received. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example of a performance in the specific example 7 when a command cannot be received normally. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 8 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the specific example 8 when a command cannot be normally received. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example of a performance in the specific example 8 when a command cannot be normally received. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 9 when a command cannot be received normally. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of rendering in specific example 9 when a command cannot be received normally. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing timing charts of specific examples 10 to 12 when commands cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the specific example 10 when a command cannot be normally received. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the specific example 11 when a command cannot be normally received. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the specific example 12 when a command cannot be normally received. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing timing charts of specific examples 13 to 15 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the specific example 13 when a command cannot be normally received. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the specific example 14 when a command cannot be normally received. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the specific example 15 when a command cannot be normally received. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 16 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the specific example 16 when a command cannot be normally received. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 17 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the specific example 17 when a command cannot be received normally. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 18 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the specific example 18 when a command cannot be normally received. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the inspection mode 1 of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the test|inspection mode 2 of a main control board. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a time chart of inspection mode 3 of the main control board. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the inspection mode 4 of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the inspection mode 5 of a main control board. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a timing chart of a first specific example of image change production. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation of the specific example 1 of image change production. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a timing chart of a second specific example of image change production. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation of the specific example 2 of image change production. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a timing chart of a third specific example of image change production. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation of the specific example 3 of image change production. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a timing chart of a fourth specific example of image change production. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation of the specific example 4 of image change production. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of an image change performance. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of an image change performance. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of an image change performance. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of an image change performance. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of an image change performance. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of an image change performance. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of an image change performance. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 1 when conditions are not met in a performance control part. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when conditions are not met in a performance control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 2 when conditions are not met in a performance control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 3 when conditions are not met in a performance control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 4 when conditions are not met in a performance control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 5 when conditions are not met in a performance control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 6 when conditions are not met in a performance control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 7 when conditions are not met in a performance control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 8 when conditions are not met in a performance control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 9 when conditions are not met in a performance control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 10 when conditions are not met in a performance control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 11 when conditions are not met in a performance control part. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing specific example 1 of performance. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing specific example 1 of performance. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the execution rate of presentation using color effects. It is a figure showing the execution rate of zone production. It is a figure which shows the execution rate of change notification sound production. It is a figure which shows the execution rate of the pending icon change effect. It is a figure which shows the execution rate of lamp change effect. It is a figure which shows the execution rate of the operation|movement performance of a 1st movable member. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production example 1. It is a figure which shows the execution rate of a light-guide plate display effect. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the normal game state in the performance example 2. It is a figure showing the normal game state of production example 2. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific game state in the performance example 2. It is a diagram showing a specific game state of specific example 2 of performance. It is a figure which shows the production example 3. It is a figure which shows the production example 3. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a relationship between fluctuation times. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the execution rate of preparation operations. It is a figure showing the execution rate of a stop operation. It is a figure which shows the execution rate of a fluctuation stop pattern. It is a figure which shows the execution rate of a fluctuation start pattern. It is a figure which shows the production example 4. It is a figure which shows the execution rate of the aspect change production of a production pattern. It is a figure showing the execution rate of the display size change effect of the effect design. It is a figure which shows the execution rate of the display size change effect of the reach effect. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 5 of a performance. It is a diagram showing specific example 5 of performance. It is a figure which shows the production example 6. It is a diagram showing the execution rate of notification effects. It is a figure which shows the execution rate of a vibration effect. FIG. 1 is a front view showing an example of a gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing an example of the back side of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the configuration of a game control device included in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a rear view showing a state in which each unit is assembled to the base frame. FIG. 198 is a partially exploded perspective view of FIG. 197; It is an explanatory diagram of various random numbers acquired in the main control board of the pachinko machine. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing in the main control board. 3 is a flowchart showing initial setting processing of the main control board. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the main control board. 12 is a flowchart showing an example of a starting port SW process executed by the CPU of the main control board. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of gate detection SW processing executed by the CPU of the control board. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol processing executed by the CPU of the main control board. It is a flowchart showing an example of a customer waiting setting process executed by the CPU of the main control board. It is a flowchart showing an example of special game determination processing executed by the CPU of the main control board. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern selection process executed by the CPU of the main control board. It is a figure showing an example of a fluctuation pattern table. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an in-stop process executed by the CPU of the main control board. It is a flowchart showing an example of auxiliary symbol processing executed by the CPU of the main control board. It is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening process executed by the CPU of the main control board. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of setting the number of rounds/operation pattern. It is a flowchart showing an example of a game state setting process executed by the CPU of the main control board. It is a flowchart which showed an example of the 2nd starting port opening process performed by CPU of a main control board. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the production control board. It is a flowchart showing an example of command reception processing executed by the CPU of the production control board. It is a flowchart showing an example of production selection processing executed by the CPU of the production control board. It is a flowchart showing an example of the process during the end of the variable performance executed by the CPU of the performance control board. It is a flowchart showing an example of a winning effect selection process executed by the CPU of the effect control board. It is a flowchart showing an example of an ending effect selection process executed by the CPU of the effect control board. It is a figure explaining the main board protection case concerning an example of this embodiment. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the main board protection case including the pedestal. It is a side view which shows the aspect at the time of attaching a main board protection case to a pedestal. It is a figure explaining the main board protection case based on another example of this embodiment. 226 is a rear perspective view of the main board protection case of FIG. 225. FIG. FIG. 226 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the main board protection case of FIG. 225 is removed from the pedestal. It is a figure which shows the modification of the position display part provided in a main board case. It is a figure which shows the modification of the position display part provided in a main board case. It is a figure which shows the modification of the position display part provided in a main board case. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a modification example in which an identification display is formed on the main board case. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a modification example in which an identification display is formed on the main board case. It is a figure which shows the modification of a main board case. FIG. 3 is a diagram of the seal portion and the main ROM viewed diagonally from above. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the structure of a main control board. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the configuration of a printed circuit board used as a main control board. 236 is a diagram showing a main board case that accommodates the main control board shown in FIGS. 235 and 236. FIG. 217 is an exploded perspective view of the main board case including the pedestal of the main board case of FIG. 216. FIG. FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram showing a procedure for assembling a cutting member, a tamper-evident seal, and a cap to the sealing base, focusing on the protruding piece of the upper case piece. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view showing a state immediately before the cutting member, the tamper-proof seal, and the cap are assembled to the sealing base portion 310. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which a tamper-proof seal is adhered to a sealing base. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which a cap is attached to a tamper-evident seal. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the cap is removed and the tamper-proof seal is broken. They are a surface view and a partially enlarged view of an example of a tamper-evident seal. It is a figure showing the component layout of the payout control board in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the composition of a payout control board protection case. It is an exploded perspective view of a payout control board case. It is an exploded perspective view of a payout control board case. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the structure of an image control board. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the configuration of a printed circuit board used for an image control board. FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of a part of a printed wiring board used for an image control board. It is a front view explaining the composition of an effect control board protection case. It is an exploded perspective view of the performance control board case. It is an exploded perspective view of the performance control board case. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining another configuration of the main control board according to the present embodiment. FIG. 256 is a diagram showing the main board case of this embodiment in which the main control board described in FIG. 255 is housed. 256 is an exploded perspective view including the pedestal of the main board case shown in FIG. 255. FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating still another configuration of the main control board according to the present embodiment. 259 is a front view of the main board case of this embodiment when the main control board described in FIG. 258 is housed. 260 is an exploded perspective view of the main board case shown in FIG. 259, including the pedestal. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating display transitions of the image display device and the performance display section when RWM is cleared. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing display transitions of the image display device, performance display section, and setting display section when changing settings in a case where the gaming machine separately includes a performance display section and a setting display section. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing display transitions of the image display device, performance display section, and setting display section when changing settings in a case where the gaming machine separately includes a performance display section and a setting display section. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating display transitions of the image display device and the performance display unit when confirming settings in a case where the gaming machine includes a performance display unit that also serves as a settings display unit. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the display transition of the image display device, the performance display section, and the setting display section at the time of setting confirmation in a case where the gaming machine separately includes a performance display section and a setting display section.

(First embodiment)
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be explained using FIG. 1. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of a gaming machine 1 in this embodiment.

The game machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, A game board 5 is provided in which a game area 5a on which game balls flow down is formed.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion is open in the front and rear directions, and a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of the base frame 2a. ) is fixed via.

The game board mounting frame 3 is removably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism 6 at one end in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported using the first hinge mechanism 6 as a fulcrum. has been done. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated like a door with respect to the outer frame 2, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed to the front, so that various devices installed on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. It becomes possible to carry out maintenance, etc.

The glass frame 4 is removably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism 7 at one end in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported around the second hinge mechanism 7 as a fulcrum. There is. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) that opens in the front-back direction is formed in the approximate center of the upper part of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (glass plate, acrylic plate, etc.) is formed to close the opening 8 from the rear. is attached, making the gaming area 5a visible through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, there is an audio output device 9 consisting of a speaker, a frame illumination device 10 having a plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs), and a game ball put out from a game ball payout device 100 described later. An upper tray 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as balls, a lower tray 12 for receiving and storing game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and have flowed into an overflow ball channel described later, and a lower tray 12 for storing game balls. A firing operation device 13 that can be operated for firing is provided.

The audio output device 9 is provided at two locations on the upper part of the glass frame 4 with an interval between them, and outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc. to perform sound (music, voice) production. It has become. Further, a plurality of frame illumination devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and perform illumination effects by changing the direction and color of light emitted from each lamp (LED). The frame illumination device 10 also includes a notification LED 10a that is controlled to turn on/blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or when a dispensing abnormality, which will be described later, occurs.

In the upper tray 11, the bottom surface of the game ball storage section 11a is sloped downward toward the firing operation device 13 (rightward), and a ball feeding solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward slope. . When the game balls stored in the storage part 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent out one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 side by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

In addition, in the center front side of the upper plate 11, there are a production button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (see FIG. 1) that function as input devices for determining and selecting various productions to be described later. They are arranged side by side on the left and right.

The performance button device 16 includes a performance button 17 (not shown) that can perform a decision operation (operation input), a performance button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 2) that detects an operation on the performance button 17, and a performance button A button driving device 17b (see FIG. 2) for driving the gaming machine 17 is provided, and the player can input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

The production button 17 can emit production light by lighting the production button LED (full color), which is a part of the frame lighting device 10 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emission mode, and the button drive The button driving device 17b may be moved in the vertical direction between a standby position (origin position) located below and a presentation position located above by the driving force of a button driving motor that is a part of the device 17b. It is possible to perform production operations by vibrating in a predetermined vibration mode using the driving force of a button vibration motor, which is a part of the button, and a button position detection sensor (not shown) detects that the button is at the origin position. Ru.

The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (not shown) that can perform operations such as selection operations, and a cross key detection switch 19a (not shown) connected to the cross key 19 to detect operations on the cross key 19. (see FIG. 2) is provided, allowing the player to input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

Further, on the right side of the upper tray 11, there is provided a lending/returning operation unit 20 that allows the user to perform lending operations for game balls and return operations for storage media such as cards storing balances. When the lending button (not shown) of the lending/returning operation unit 20 is operated, the ball rental machine (not shown) attached to the gaming machine 1 subtracts the balance stored in the storage medium accepted and rents out game balls. is carried out, and when a return button (not shown) of the lending/returning operation section 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball rental machine (not shown).

An overflow ball channel (not shown) is formed between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12 for receiving game balls that cannot fit into the upper tray 11 and guiding them to the lower tray 12. In addition, a tray full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 2) is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path to detect when the lower tray 12 is full of game balls. While this is being detected, the payout of game balls by the game ball payout device 100, which will be described later, is stopped.

The firing operation device 13 includes a base body 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a firing handle 15 rotatably provided on the base body 14, and a touch sensor that detects when the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15. 15a (see FIG. 2), a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 2) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the firing handle 15, and a handle light emitting device for causing the firing handle 15 to emit light in a predetermined manner. A device 15c is provided. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the ball feeding solenoid 11b is activated and game balls are sent out one by one.

The handle light emitting device 15c constitutes the front part of the firing handle 15 and is formed in a dome shape that bulges out toward the front, and a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an internal space defined by a lens member that can transmit light. has been done. By emitting light from this LED, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect in which the firing handle 15 emits light in a predetermined manner.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting part 25 for mounting the game board 5, a firing device 26 for firing a game ball toward the gaming area 5a, the game board mounting frame 3, and a glass frame. A locking mechanism 27 for locking the glass frame 4 in a closed state and an open detection switch 31a for detecting opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in the shape of a concave chamber with a front opening at approximately the center near the top of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided at the back of the concave chamber of the game board mounting portion 25, and various devices installed on the back side of the game board 5 can be installed at the rear of the game machine 1 through this opening. Coming.

The firing device 26 includes a firing member 28 for firing a game ball, a firing solenoid 28b (see FIG. 2) for driving the firing member 28, and a solenoid 28b (see FIG. 2) that extends upward from the firing member 28 toward the lower left end of the game board. An inclined firing rail 29 and a stopper 30 for stopping the game ball A at a firing position which is the inclined lower end of the firing rail 29 are provided. When the game ball sent out by the ball sending solenoid 11b is received at the shooting position, the game ball A is shot out toward the game area 5a by the operation of the shooting member 28.

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting part 25, and the front end of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed on the front side of the glass frame 4. Then, when a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

At a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, there are a curved inner rail 35, a curved outer rail 36 located outside the inner rail 35, and a guide member that guides the game ball toward the center of the game area 5a. 37 are provided. A firing ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 for guiding the game ball fired by the firing device 26 to the upstream part of the gaming area 5a. Furthermore, an out port 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the gaming area 5a to guide the game balls that have flown down to the outside of the gaming area (to the collecting section of the gaming board mounting frame 3).

Approximately in the center of the gaming area 5a, a frame-shaped decorative frame 40, called a so-called center case, that restricts the entry of game balls into the interior is provided, and a performance space 40a is formed inside the decorative frame 40. Further, a warp device 41 is provided on the side of the decorative frame 40 to introduce the game balls flowing down the game area 5a into the decorative frame 40, and a warp device 41 is provided at the lower part of the decorative frame 40 to A stage section 42 is provided for rolling the game balls introduced into the interior and making them flow down below the decorative frame 40.

At the bottom of the gaming area 5a, a plurality of (four in this embodiment) general winning holes 43 in which game balls can always be entered are provided at intervals, and these general winning holes When a game ball that has won a prize (entered a ball) in 43 is detected by the general winning hole detection switch 43a (see FIG. 2), a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are awarded from the game ball payout device 100 (not shown). The ball is delivered to the upper tray 11 as a ball.

On both sides (left side area, right side area) of the game area 5a, there are provided normal game gates 44 (normal game starting area) through which the game balls can pass, and the game balls that have passed through the general game gates 44 When detected by the gate detection switch 44a (see FIG. 2), a normal symbol winning lottery (auxiliary game determination) is performed. Note that the winning lottery for normal symbols will be described later.

At the lower part of the gaming area 5a and directly below the stage part 42, a first starting opening 45 (special figure starting area) is provided in which a game ball can always enter a prize (ball), and this first starting opening 45 When a game ball that has won a prize (entered a ball) is detected by the first starting port detection switch 45a (see FIG. 2), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 3 balls) are delivered from the game ball payout device 100 to the upper tray as prize balls. It is set to be paid out on the 11th. In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot lottery (special game determination) of a first special symbol (identification information) to be described later is performed.

Below the first starting port 45, a game ball is placed in a closed state (basic mode) in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a normal symbol winning lottery). A variable starting section 46 is provided which is converted into an open state (special mode) in which winning (ball hitting) is possible or easy.

The variable starting section 46 includes a second starting port 47 (special figure starting area) through which a game ball can enter a prize (ball entering), and a second starting port 47 (special figure starting area) that allows a game ball to enter a prize (entering ball) into the second starting port 47. A starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 2), a movable member 48 that converts (variably) the second starting port 47 between a closed state and an open state, and a second starting port opening/closing solenoid that opens and closes the movable member 48. 48b (see FIG. 2). When the second starting port 47 is in the closed state, it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to win, and when the second starting port 47 is in the open state, the winning of the game ball ( ball entry) becomes possible or easy.

Further, when a game ball that has won (entered) the second starting port 47 is detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are released from the game ball payout device 100 as prize balls. It is arranged to be dispensed onto the upper tray 11. In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot lottery (special game determination) of a second special symbol (identification information) to be described later is performed.

A prize opening lamp NR (not shown) is provided between the first starting port 45 and the variable starting section 46 to illuminate the area around the first starting port 45 and the variable starting section 46 in a predetermined manner. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect by emitting light from a panel illumination device 76 having a plurality of lamps (full color LEDs, etc.).

Above the guiding member 37 and downstream of the right-hand general figure gate 44, there is a closed state in which it is impossible to win a game ball (entering a ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a special symbol jackpot lottery). A variable winning section 49 is provided which is converted from the basic mode to an open state (special mode) in which a game ball can be won.

The variable winning part 49 includes a big winning hole 50 in which a game ball can be won (balls entered), and a big winning hole detection switch 50a (Fig. 2), an opening/closing member 51 for converting (variable) the big winning opening 50 between a closed state and an open state, and a big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b for opening and closing the opening/closing member 51. When the grand prize opening 50 is in a closed state, it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball, and when the grand prize opening 50 is in an open state, winning a game ball (entering a ball) is difficult. ) becomes possible or easy.

Further, when a game ball that has won (entered) the big winning hole 50 is detected by the big winning hole detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15 balls) are sent from the game ball payout device 100 as prize balls to the tray. It will be paid out on 11th.

On the back side of the game board 5, there are a general winning opening 43, a first starting opening 45, a second starting opening 47, and a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, An out ball flow path is provided that receives the game balls detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a and the big winning port detection switch 50a, and the game balls that have flowed into the out port 39, collects them, and allows them to flow down. An out-ball detection switch 52a is provided at the most downstream part of the ball flow path. The game balls flowing down this out ball channel and detected by the out ball detection switch 52a are discharged to the outside of the game machine 1 (island equipment) from the discharge port on the back side of the game machine 1.

Outside the gaming area 5a, there are a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, a normal symbol display 62, a first special symbol reservation display 63, a second special symbol reservation display 64, as well as. A normal symbol holding display 65, a round number display 66 (see FIG. 2) that displays the number of rounds when a jackpot game (special game) to be described later is executed, and a round number display 66 (see FIG. 2) during a jackpot game (special game) or a time-saving game state. A right-handed display 67 (see FIG. 2) that prompts you to fire the game ball toward the right side of the gaming area 5a, and a status confirmation display that indicates that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set. A main information display device 59 consisting of a device 68 (see FIG. 2) is provided.

Further, a winning probability display sticker is attached near the main information display device 59 (not shown). On this winning probability display sticker, the jackpot winning probability (1/285 to 1/300) and set value (4 to 1) of the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment are printed. Note that the position where this winning probability display sticker 200 is pasted is just one example, and is not limited to the vicinity of the main information display device 59, but may be on the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1.

The first special symbol display device 60 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol, which is performed on the condition that a game ball enters the first starting port 45. The second special symbol display device 61 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol, which is performed on the condition that a game ball enters the second starting port 47. The normal symbol display device 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery of the normal symbol, which is performed on the condition that a game ball enters the prize gate 44. It is a vessel.

The jackpot lottery with the first special symbol is a jackpot lottery in which random numbers for jackpot determination, etc. (judgment information) are acquired when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 (ball entered), and the obtained random numbers for jackpot determination and jackpot are obtained. This corresponds to determining whether or not it is a "jackpot" by comparing it with the judgment value. In addition, when the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol is performed, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 60, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a stop display of the first special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. be exposed. That is, the stop display of the first special symbol serves as notification of the lottery result.

The jackpot lottery with the second special symbol is when a game ball enters the second starting hole 47 (enters the ball), a random number value for jackpot determination, etc. (judgment information) is acquired, and the obtained random number value for jackpot determination and jackpot are obtained. This corresponds to determining whether or not it is a "jackpot" by comparing it with the judgment value. In addition, when the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol is performed, a variable display of the second special symbol is performed on the second special symbol display 61, and after a predetermined period of time, a stop display of the second special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. be exposed. That is, the stop display of the second special symbol serves as notification of the lottery result.

The first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and in the variable display of each special symbol, the LEDs of the corresponding display blink at predetermined intervals or in a predetermined order. do. When the special symbols are to be displayed in a stopped state, the LEDs are lit in a manner that indicates the result of each jackpot lottery (jackpot mode, loss mode).

In addition, in this embodiment, "jackpot" means a jackpot game (special game) in the jackpot lottery (special game determination) of the first special symbol or the jackpot lottery (special game determination) of the second special symbol. Refers to the state in which the right to execute has been acquired. The term "jackpot game" refers to a game state in which a round game in which the jackpot 50 is opened in a predetermined manner is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 or 15 times).

In addition, although the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 50 in each round game are predetermined, even before the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time are reached, a predetermined number of game balls can be opened in the big winning opening 50. When (for example, 9 pieces) wins (balls entered), one round game ends. In other words, the "jackpot game (special game)" is a game state that is advantageous for the player in which the player can easily win the prize ball. In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to generate any of a plurality of types of jackpot games that have different degrees of advantage to the player, but details will be described later.

The normal symbol winning lottery is to acquire a random number value for determining a hit when a game ball passes through the regular symbol gate 44, and compare the obtained random number value for determining a hit with the winning determination value to determine whether it is a "win". This corresponds to determining whether or not. In addition, when a winning lottery of a normal symbol is performed, a variable display of the normal symbol is performed on the normal symbol display 62, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, a stop display of the normal symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol serves as notification of the lottery result.

The normal symbol display 62 is composed of one or a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in a predetermined order in the variable display of the normal symbols. When the normal symbols are to be displayed in a stopped state, the LED lights up in a manner that indicates the result of the winning lottery (a winning manner or a losing manner).

In addition, in this embodiment, "winning" refers to a state in which the right to execute a winning state (auxiliary game) is acquired in a winning lottery of normal symbols. The term "winning game (auxiliary game)" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, although the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the winning game (auxiliary game) are predetermined, the second starting port 47 may be opened even before the maximum number of openings or the maximum opening time is reached. The winning game (auxiliary game) ends when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9 balls) win a prize (balls entered). In other words, the "winning game (auxiliary game)" is a game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed (the start condition for the variable display is likely to be satisfied). In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of winning games (auxiliary games) with different degrees of advantage to the player are provided, which will be described in detail later.

The first special symbol holding display 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is a first special symbol jackpot lottery (a first special symbol This is for displaying the number of rights (first reserved memories) for performing a variable display), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of first reserved memories. Note that although up to four first reservation memories are stored, the number may be fewer or more than four.

The second special symbol holding display 64 is constituted by a plurality of LEDs, and is a jackpot lottery of the second special symbol that is stored when a game ball enters the second starting port 47. This is for displaying the number of rights (second pending memory) for performing the variable display), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of second pending memories. In addition, although up to four second reservation memories are stored, it may be fewer or more than four.

The normal symbol holding display 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and has the right to perform a normal symbol winning lottery (fluctuating display of normal symbols) that is stored when a game ball enters (passes) the common symbol gate 44. It is for displaying the number of (Fuzuzu pending memory), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of Fuzuzuzu pending memory. In addition, although up to four ordinary figures are stored in the storage, the number may be smaller or larger than four.

In addition, the 1st special symbol display 60 and/or the 2nd special symbol display 61 can also be comprised with 7 segment LED. For example, if you win a jackpot lottery with a special symbol, "7" will be displayed in a stopped state, and if you lose, "-" will be displayed in a stopped state, and if the variable display is in progress, the light will turn off and "-" will be displayed. ” should be repeated. In addition, before the start of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, the stop result of the previous fluctuation display is displayed by lighting the LED, so when the fluctuation display starts, the fluctuation display can be started by turning off the LED. It becomes easier to understand what has started.

The round number display 66 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game state) occurs. starts lighting up, continues lighting the LED during the jackpot game, and turns off the LED at the end of the jackpot game. For example, if it is a jackpot game with two rounds, only the fourth LED from the left will light up, and if it is a jackpot game with sixteen rounds, all the LEDs will light up.

The right-hand hitting indicator 67 is composed of one LED, and is a right-hand hitting indicator 67 that prompts you to fire the game ball toward the right side gaming area (so-called right-hand hitting) during the jackpot state (special game state) and during the time-saving game state. This is for displaying a winning display, and the LED lights up during the jackpot state (special game state) and during the time-saving game state.

The status confirmation indicator 68 is composed of one LED, and is for indicating that the setting change mode, which will be described later, or the setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set. When the mode shifts to , the LED starts lighting up, and when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends, the LED is turned off. In this way, the status confirmation display 68 indicating that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set is provided on the front (surface) of the gaming machine. It is possible to easily check whether the settings are set or not.

Note that the installation position of the status confirmation display 68 is just an example, and is not limited to the installation position of this embodiment, and may be any position in the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display is displayed in the same manner (lit display) regardless of whether it is set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, but the display is made so that it is possible to recognize which mode it is set to. You may do so. For example, when the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation display 68 may be lit, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status confirmation display 68 may be blinking. When the setting change mode is set, either the status confirmation display 68 or the second game information display device 69 lights up, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status is displayed. Only the confirmation display 68 may be displayed by lighting.

Further, in this embodiment, the status confirmation display 68 is provided as a dedicated display to indicate that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set, but it may also be used as another display. good. For example, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the main information display device 59 and the second game information display device 69, which will be described later, are off, so these display devices may be used. Specifically, one LED of either the main information display device 59 or the second game information display device 69 may be turned on, or one LED of the main information display device 59 or the second game information display device 69 may be turned on. All LEDs may be turned on.

At the lower right inside of the gaming area 5a, there are a sub-first fluctuation display 81, a sub-second fluctuation display 82, a sub-first reservation display 83, a sub-second reservation display 84, and a sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85. A sub-information display device 80 is provided, which includes a sub-normal figure reservation display 86, and a sub-right-hitting display 87 that prompts the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side area of the gaming area 5a (so-called right-handed hitting). Note that the sub-information display device 80 is not provided with a display indicating that the sub-information display device 80 is set to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, such as the status confirmation display 68 described above.

The sub-first variable display 81 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol, and the sub-second variable display 82 is for displaying the result of the jackpot lottery for the second special symbol. (notification), and each is composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of the corresponding special symbol starts, the LED blinks at a predetermined interval (variable display), and when the corresponding special symbol stops being displayed, the result of the jackpot lottery (in the case of a jackpot, it lights up, loses, etc.). ) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the sub-first fluctuation display 81 and the sub-second fluctuation display 82, so that it can be grasped only whether or not the special symbol is being fluctuatedly displayed, it blinks and stops while the special symbol is being fluctuatedly displayed. It may be configured to turn on or off when displayed.

The sub-first holding display 83 is for displaying the number of first holding memories, and the sub-second holding display 84 is for displaying the number of second holding memories. It is composed of two LEDs. When the number of pending memories is "0", the left and right LEDs turn off, and when the number of pending memories is "1", the left LED lights up and the right LED goes out, and the number of pending memories is "2". When the number of pending memories is "3", the left LED flashes and the right LED lights up, and when the number of pending memories is "4", the left and right LEDs flash. .

The sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of the normal symbols is started, the LED blinks at predetermined intervals (variable display). Then, when the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, an aspect indicating the result of the winning lottery (lights on in the case of a win, turns off in the case of a loss) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in order to be able to grasp only whether or not the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the sub-normal symbol fluctuation display 85 is configured to blink while the normal symbol is in the fluctuating display, and to turn on or off when the normal symbol is displayed in a stopped state. It's okay.

The sub-universal figure reservation display 86 is for displaying the number of ordinary figures pending memory, and is constituted by two LEDs arranged on the left and right. Then, when the number of stored general drawings is "0", the left and right LEDs turn off, and when the number of stored general drawings is "1", the left LED lights up and the right LED goes out, and the stored general drawings are held. When the memory number is "2", the left LED blinks and the right LED lights up, and when the number of reserved symbols is "4", the left and right LEDs blink.

A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) made of a liquid crystal display is provided at the back of the production space 40a, and a , a second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is provided, which is a liquid crystal display whose display area is smaller than that of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A first movable member 73 is provided that resembles the same, and a circular second movable member 74 is provided on the right side of the performance space 40a.

The image display device consisting of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) displays various effects according to the progress of the game. Performance displays include customer waiting demonstration performances that are executed during a customer waiting state (standby state where the game is not in progress) where special symbols are not being displayed in a variable manner, and production symbols that are executed while special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. There is a fluctuating effect accompanied by a fluctuating display of 70a.

The display section (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is formed with three columns of variable display areas: a left area, a center area, and a right area. By scrolling the effect pattern 70a vertically (from top to bottom in this embodiment), the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, the production pattern 70a is composed of, for example, a pattern showing numbers from "1" to "9", and is a variable display of special symbols executed on the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61. In response to (synchronization with), a variable display of the effect pattern 70a is performed. That is, in response to the start of the fluctuating display of the special symbol, the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a is started, and before the fluctuating display of the special symbol stops, the performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped (swinging display), and the special symbol is fluctuating. In response to the stop display of the display, the fluctuating display of the effect pattern 70a is stopped (still display). Note that, in addition to the symbols indicating numbers, symbols indicating alphabets such as "A" to "F" may be provided as the effect symbols 70a.

Note that the "temporary stop display" is a display in which the performance symbols 70a are slightly swayed or deformed slightly to make it appear to the player that the performance symbols 70a are stopped (completely stopped). (not done).

In the stop display of the effect pattern 70a, the effect pattern 70a is stopped for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a predetermined mode (loss mode, jackpot mode, etc.) indicating the result of the jackpot lottery. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same performance symbols such as "777" or the combination of regular performance symbols such as "357", and the loss mode is any other format. be. Note that the manner in which the performance symbols 70a are variably displayed is not limited to this, and may be one that scrolls in the left-right direction, or one that rotates (rotates) on the spot.

In addition, during the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, various effect images such as reach effect, background images, characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), depending on the result of the jackpot lottery. By being displayed on the image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), the player's expectations for a jackpot (special game) to be executed (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot winning expectation level") are increased. There is.

Here, "reach performance" is a jackpot game executed for the player in which a part of the combination of performance symbols 70a that informs a jackpot temporarily stops and other performance symbols 70a fluctuate. It means a pattern of variation that is expected to occur. For example, when a combination of 3-digit performance symbols 70a "777" is set as a combination of performance symbols 70a to notify a jackpot (jackpot result mode), two performance symbols 70a are displayed in the left and right regions. 7'', the game stops temporarily, and the remaining performance symbols 70a are fluctuating in the central area.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, there are five types of reach effects: "normal reach effect," "SP reach effect," "SPSP reach effect," and "full rotation reach effect."

"Normal reach effect" means that the background image before the normal reach effect is displayed, two effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the left and right areas, and the remaining effect pattern 70a is stopped in the center area. This is a reach effect that is executed with a fluctuating reach state.

"SP reach effect" is executed after the normal reach effect, and the effect pattern 70a with the reach state formed is displayed in a reduced size at the corner of the screen, and the effect is higher than the normal reach effect (the expectation of a jackpot is high) ) It is a reach effect where a movie (video, animation, etc.) is played.

"SPSP reach performance" is a reach performance that is executed after the normal reach performance or SP reach performance, and a movie (video, animation, etc.) with a higher production effect (higher expectation of a jackpot) than the normal reach performance or SP reach performance is played. It's about the performance.

The "full rotation reach effect" is a reach effect that changes at a low speed when all the combinations of the plurality of effect symbols 70a that notify a jackpot are aligned. In this embodiment, this is a reach effect that is executed only when winning a jackpot lottery.

In this embodiment, the jackpot winning expectation regarding the reach effect is higher in the order of normal reach effect<SP reach effect<SPSP reach effect<full rotation reach effect (jackpot confirmed).

Further, on the display section of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the number of first pending icons corresponding to the first special symbol pending number (U1), which is the current number of first pending memories, is displayed. a first pending icon display area 70B, and a second pending icon display area 70D for displaying a number of second pending icons corresponding to the second special symbol pending number (U2), which is the current number of second pending memories. An icon display area 70C is formed for displaying the icon corresponding to (related to) the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) being executed.

The first pending icon display area 70B is divided into a first display area 70B1, a second display area 70B2, a third display area 70B3, and a fourth display area 70B4 from the side closest to the icon display area 70C. The display units 70B1 to 70B4 display a number of first pending icons corresponding to the first special symbol pending number (U1). In other words, the number of first reserved icons also increases or decreases in response to an increase or decrease in the number of reserved first special symbols (U1).

Specifically, the first display section 70B1 displays a first pending icon H11 indicating the first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is first performed, and the second display section 70B2 displays the first pending icon H11. The first pending icon H12 indicating the first pending memory is displayed on which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed third, and the third display section 70B3 displays the variable display of the first special symbol. A first pending icon H13 indicating the first pending memory is displayed, and the fourth display section 70B4 displays a first pending icon H14 indicating the first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed fourth. be done.

The second pending icon display area 70D is divided into a first display area 70D1, a second display area 70D2, a third display area 70D3, and a fourth display area 70D4 from the side closest to the icon display area 70C. The display units 70D1 to 70D4 display a number of second pending icons corresponding to the second special symbol pending number (U2). In other words, the number of second pending icons also increases or decreases in response to an increase or decrease in the second special symbol pending number (U2).

Specifically, the first display unit 70D1 displays a second hold icon H21 indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is first performed, and the second display unit 70D2 displays the second hold icon H21. A second pending icon H22 indicating a second pending memory is displayed in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed third, and the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed in the third display section 70D3. A second pending icon H23 indicating a second pending memory is displayed, and a second pending icon H24 indicating a second pending memory in which variable display of the second special symbol is executed fourth is displayed on the fourth display section 70D4. be done. In addition, in this embodiment, the "first special symbol reservation number" may be referred to as the "first reservation number" and the "second special symbol reservation number" may be referred to as the "second reservation number".

The icon display area 70C displays the first pending icon or the second pending icon that was displayed on the first display section 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol (production symbol 70a). When the second pending icon displayed on the first display section 70D1 of the pending icon display area 70D moves (shifts), the icon TH is displayed, and at the end of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) The icon TH disappears (erases). Note that the icon may disappear during the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). In addition, in this embodiment, the "first pending icon", the "second pending icon", and "the icon" may be collectively referred to as "icon".

The first movable member 73 is capable of emitting dramatic light by lighting the first movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emission mode. The drive force of the first movable member drive motor, which is a part of the board drive device 75 (see FIG. 2), moves the vertical direction between the standby position (origin position) located above and the presentation position located below. By moving to , it is possible to perform a performance operation, and the first position detection sensor (not shown) detects that it is at the origin position.

The second movable member 74 is capable of emitting dramatic light by lighting the second movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emission mode. The drive force of the second movable member drive motor, which is a part of the board drive device 75 (see FIG. 2), moves between the standby position (origin position) located at the upper right and the production position located at the lower left. It is possible to perform a performance operation by moving diagonally up and down, and a second position detection sensor (not shown) detects that it is at the origin position.

Since the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 partially overlap each other's production positions, basically the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 operate at the same time. By not doing so, they avoid conflict with each other.

Note that if the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 do not collide with each other, when one movable member moves to the production position and returns to a position that does not overlap with the production position of the other movable member, The other movable member may be moved to the presentation position.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, there is a game ball payout device 100 for paying out game balls based on establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize ball, ball rental), island equipment, etc. A main control device 110A (not shown) incorporating a game ball storage unit (not shown) that stores the supplied game balls and supplies them to the game ball payout device 100, and a main control board 110 that centrally controls the progress of the game. A payout control device 120A (not shown) that includes a built-in payout control board 120 that controls the game ball payout device 100 in accordance with payout control commands from the main control board 110, and a production control command from the main control board 110. A production control device 130A (not shown) containing a production control board 130 that controls production according to the performance, a power supply device 160A (not shown) containing a power supply board 160 that supplies power voltage to various control devices, A game information output terminal board 90 (see FIG. 2) is provided for outputting game information (game signals) to the outside of the game machine.

The main control device 110A includes a main control board 110 on which various electronic components are mounted, a transparent resin board case for accommodating the main control board 110 inside, and a board case for regulating opening of the board case. It includes a seal 104 and a transparent resin seal cover member 105 attached to the board case so as to cover the seal 104.

On the front side of the main control board 110, there is a main control unit 110m consisting of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game, and a main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m to clear the memory contents or to indicate the level of advantage of the game. an RWM clear switch 111a that inputs a signal for updating the set value (different advantages); a signal for moving the set value to a state where the set value can be changed or a state where the set value can be confirmed by operation using the setting key; A setting key switch 112a for inputting information, an information display 113 for displaying performance information and setting values that allow the actual performance of the gaming machine 1 to be grasped, and the like are installed.

The information display 113 is for displaying setting values and performance information (normal base values to be described later), and four 7-segment displays (113a to 113d) having decimal points DP are arranged side by side. It consists of: An identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type of performance information (data type) is configured on two 7-segment displays corresponding to the upper two digits, and two 7-segment displays corresponding to the lower two digits. A numerical value segment is configured to display numerical information indicating numerical values of setting values and performance information.

The board case includes a concave-shaped lower case member whose part facing the back side of the main control board 110 is open, and a concave-shaped upper case member whose part facing the front side of the main control board 110 is open. By closing the lower case member and the upper case member, an accommodation space for accommodating the main control board 110 is formed.

On the upper surface of the upper case member, there is a model name sticker printed with the model name (model name) of the gaming machine 1 so as not to overlap with the information display 113, and a management sticker with the management number of the main control board 110 printed on it. Number stickers are attached side by side. Further, an operating member 108 for pressing (ON) the actuator of the RWM clear switch 111a is loosely fitted in a position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 111a. Then, when the operating member 108 is pressed, the RWM clear switch 111a is turned on.

Further, an insertion portion (not shown) for inserting a setting key into a keyhole of the setting key switch 112a is formed at a position corresponding to the setting key switch 112a. This insertion part has an opening for exposing the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a to the outside, and a cylindrical part extending rearward from the opening edge of the opening so as to cover the periphery of the setting key switch 112a. are doing. Then, insert the setting key into the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a through the opening and turn it to the right from the initial position.The setting key switch 112a is turned on and the setting key cannot be removed from the keyhole, and then turn it to the left. When the setting key switch 112a is returned to the initial position, the setting key switch 112a is turned off and the setting key can be removed from the keyhole.

The control number sticker has a colorless and transparent base seal with an opening entry section for writing the name of the person who opened the main control board 110 and an opening date entry section for writing the opening date of the main control board 110. They are arranged side by side on the left and right.

The opening person entry area is provided with four colored (white) entry areas (first to fourth entry areas) lined up at intervals in the vertical direction, and between each entry area, there is a space on the surface of the main control board 110. A transparent window area is provided for visually confirming the mounted electronic components.

The opening date entry section is provided with four colored (white) entry areas (first to fourth entry areas) arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, and is mounted on the surface of the main control board 110 between each entry area. A transparent window area is provided for viewing (visual confirmation) the electronic components.

The first to fourth entry areas of the opening person entry area are adjacent to the first to fourth entry areas of the opening date entry area with a space between them, and the surface of the main control board 110 is spaced between each entry area. A transparent window area is provided for visually checking the electronic components mounted on the board.

Note that as the information display 113, a performance display unit that is a unit of a circuit section consisting of four 7-segment displays and a board may be mounted on the main control board. Even in that case, it is desirable to arrange them so that they do not overlap one another so that visibility is not restricted (shielded) by the model name sticker and management number sticker.

Furthermore, instead of mounting the RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, and information display 113 on the main control board 110, at least one of the RWM clear switch 111a, setting key switch 112a, and information display 113 is mounted on a dedicated board. It may be mounted and connected to the main control board 110 board-to-board so that it is included in the board case of the main control board 110.

Furthermore, regarding the RWM clear switch 111a, instead of mounting it on the main control board 110 or a dedicated board included in the board case of the main control board 110, it may be installed on the power supply board 160 if it is in a position where the player cannot operate it. It may be provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 or on the back side of the glass frame 4. Even in this case, it is preferable that the signal from the RWM clear switch 111a is input to the main control unit 110m.

Moreover, instead of inputting a signal for clearing the memory contents of the main RAM 110c or updating the set value by operating the RWM clear switch 111a, the set value is updated separately from the RWM clear switch 111a. A dedicated setting switch may be provided to input the signal. In this case, the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting switch may be mounted on the main control board 110 or a dedicated board included in the board case of the main control board 110, or the power supply board may be mounted in a position where the player cannot operate the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting switch. 160, on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3, or on the back side of the glass frame 4.

Also, instead of displaying both performance information and setting values on the information display 113, another display may be implemented on the main control board 110 or a dedicated board included in the board case of the main control board 110, and either The performance information may be displayed on one of the display devices, and the set value may be displayed on the other display device.

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically explained using FIG. 2. FIG. 2 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment.

The main control board 110 centrally controls the progress of the game (basic operations). The main control board 110 is a one-chip microcomputer that includes a main CPU 110a that performs calculation processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs, etc., and a main RAM 110c (corresponding to volatile storage means) that serves as a work area during calculation processing. The main control unit 110m has a main control input port, an output port, and the like. The main CPU 110a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the game while utilizing the main RAM 110c as a work area. and transmits predetermined commands based on the results of arithmetic processing to the payout control board 120, the production control board 130, etc.

Here, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to be able to communicate commands (data) in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the production control board 130 is It is configured so that commands (data) can be communicated only in one direction from 110 to the production control board 130.

The input ports of the main control board 110 include a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, a big winning opening detection switch 50a, and an out ball detection switch 52a. , a magnetic detection sensor 53a, a radio wave detection sensor 54a, an RWM clear switch 111a, a setting key switch 112a, an information display 113, a payout control board 120, and the like are connected. When detection signals and the like from various detection switches and various detection sensors are input to the main control board 110 via the input port, control processing is performed according to the detection signals.

The output ports of the main control board 110 include the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, the big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, the first special symbol display 60, the second special symbol display 61, the main information display device 59, and the game information output. A terminal board 90, a payout control board 120, an effect control board 130, etc. are connected. Drive control signals for controlling various solenoids, display control signals for controlling various indicators, and game notifications to the outside of the gaming machine (hall computer, etc.) from the gaming information output terminal board through the output port. Information etc. are output.

The memory area of the main control unit 110m includes a memory area allocated to the main ROM 110b and a memory area allocated to the main RAM 110c.

The memory areas of the main ROM 110b include a gaming ROM area where programs and data related to the progress of the game are stored, and an information ROM area where programs and data related to the performance display of the gaming machine are stored, and access is prohibited. Also, an unused area of 16 bytes or more where "0" is stored, a ROM comment area where data such as the program title and version are stored, and a vector table where the start address of the timer interrupt processing described later is set. The area and the HW parameter area in which parameters such as the start address and end address of the access-prohibited area are set are arranged in this order.

The gaming ROM area includes a gaming program area where programs related to the progress of the game are stored, a first unused area where access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data related to the progress of the game are stored. A game data area to be stored and a second unused area to which access is prohibited and "0" is stored are arranged in this order.

The information ROM area includes an information program area where programs related to performance display of the gaming machine are stored, an unused area where access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data related to the performance display of the gaming machine. Information data areas in which are stored are arranged in order.

In the memory area of the main RAM 110c, a gaming RWM area used as a work (work area) when executing a gaming program and an information RWM area used as a work (working area) when executing an information program are arranged in this order. There is.

The gaming RWM area includes a gaming work area used by gaming programs as work, a first unused area where access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and a temporary area where data being processed by gaming programs is stored. A gaming stack area for saving data and a second unused area where access is prohibited and "0" is stored are arranged in this order.

The gaming work area includes a setting value area for storing setting values, a judgment information area for storing judgment information (checksum to be described later) for judging abnormalities in the RWM area, and a judgment information area that changes as the game progresses. Game data areas for storing game data are arranged in order.

The information RWM area consists of an information work area used by the information program as work, an unused area where access is prohibited and "0" is stored, and data currently being processed by the information program is temporarily saved. Stack areas for information are arranged in order.

In the information work area, a performance information area for storing information related to the performance of the gaming machine 1 and an error information area for storing information related to various error determinations are arranged in this order.

Hereinafter, a gaming area (gaming ROM area, gaming RWM area) that performs processing based on a gaming program and an information area (information ROM area, information RWM area) that performs processing based on an information program will be explained below. Explain the relationship.

When the main CPU 110a performs processing based on a gaming program, it basically refers to the gaming data area and also refers to and updates the contents of the gaming RWM area while using the gaming RWM area as work. ing. Additionally, when performing processing based on an information program, the information data area is basically referenced, and the contents of the information RWM area are referenced and updated while using the information RWM area as work. ing.

However, in the processing based on the gaming program, although the contents of the information RWM area cannot be updated, they can be referenced. Furthermore, in the processing based on the information program, the contents of the gaming RWM area cannot be updated, but they can be referenced.

When performing processing based on the information program, the flag register is saved in the gaming RWM area in the processing based on the gaming program, and then the information program is called to execute the processing based on the information program. The flag register is returned from the gaming RWM area immediately after the processing based on the program is completed and the gaming program is returned.

In addition, immediately after starting the information program, the stack pointer of the gaming stack area is saved to the information RWM area, and then the stack pointer of the information stack area is set, and all registers used in the gaming program are transferred to the information RWM area. All the registers used in the game program immediately before the end of the information program are restored from the information RWM area, and the stack pointer of the game stack area is restored.

By doing this, it is possible to protect the data used by the gaming program when performing processing based on the information program, and prevent inconveniences from occurring when returning from the information program to the gaming program. Things will go away.

The payout control board 120 is a slave control board that controls the payout of game balls based on reception of the payout command from the main control board 110, and also controls the firing of game balls. The payout control board 120 includes a payout control section 121 that drives the game ball payout device 100 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control section 122 that drives the launch device 26 to control the launch of the game balls.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs calculation processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores a payout program, etc., a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, an input port for payout control, an output port, etc. . The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator (not shown), reads a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, performs arithmetic processing related to the payout of game balls while utilizing the payout RAM 121c as a work area, and operates the game ball payout device. 100, and sends predetermined commands based on the results of arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, the production control board 130, etc.

The input port of the payout control unit 121 includes an open detection switch 31a, a tray full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a provided in the game ball payout device 100, a ball presence detection switch 101a provided in the game ball storage unit, etc. is connected to the output port of the payout control unit 121, and a payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device 100 is connected.

When the payout control unit 121 receives the payout command from the main control board 110, it drives the payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device 100 to control the payout of a predetermined number of game balls, and the putout ball detection switch 100a controls the payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device 100. When the payout of a predetermined number of game balls is detected, the control for paying out game balls is ended.

The firing control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input port, an output port, etc. (not shown). A touch sensor 15a and a firing volume 15b are connected to an input port of the firing control unit 122, and a ball feeding solenoid 11b, a firing solenoid 28b, etc. are connected to an output port of the firing control unit 122. ing.

When the firing control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15 based on the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, it allows the ball feeding solenoid 11b and the firing solenoid 28b to be energized. When it is detected that the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 has changed based on the detection signal from the firing volume 15b, the ball feed solenoid 11b is driven and the ball is fired so that the firing intensity corresponds to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15. The game ball is fired by driving the solenoid 28b.

The firing solenoid 28b is composed of a rotary solenoid, and the launching member 28 is directly connected to a rotating shaft, and as the rotating shaft rotates, the launching member 28 rotates and launches the game ball A. . Note that the operation of the firing solenoid 28b is set to approximately 99.9 times/minute based on the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control unit 122, so the firing of the game ball in one minute is approximately 99.9 times per minute. The number is approximately 99.9 (pieces/minute). That is, the game ball will be fired approximately every 0.6 seconds.

The performance control board 130 is a slave control board (slave control means) that controls the performance related to the game (performed in the gaming machine 1) based on the reception of the performance command from the main control board 110. The effect control board 130 includes a sub-CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub-ROM 130b in which an effect control program is stored, a sub-RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an effect control unit 130m, and a first image display device 70 (main display/audio control unit 140 that controls the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), the audio output device 9 (speaker), the frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the button drive device 17b, and the panel It is equipped with a lamp/drive control section 150 that controls the lighting device 76, the board drive device 75, etc., and an input port, an output port, etc. for effect control.

The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the game program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the performance while using the sub RAM 130c as a work area, thereby processing commands received from the main control board 110. Control is performed in order to cause various control units (display/audio control unit 140, lamp/drive control unit 150) to execute various effects in accordance with input signals from the effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a. output data or commands).

A performance button detection switch 17a, a cross key detection switch 19a, a button position detection sensor (not shown), etc. are connected to the input port of the performance control board 130. In the production control board 130, a production button detection signal indicating that the production button 17 has been operated is input from the production button detection switch 17a, and a cross key detection signal indicating that the cross key 19 has been operated is input from the cross key detection switch 19a. When a signal (upper button detection signal, left button detection signal, lower button detection signal, right button detection signal) is input, processing is performed to execute an effect according to the detection signal.

The display/audio control section 140 controls the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display a predetermined image in response to a command from the production control section 130m. and controls the audio output device 9 to output a predetermined audio.

The display/audio control unit 140 includes an overall control unit 141 that includes an overall CPU 142 that performs arithmetic processing, an overall ROM 143 that stores an overall control program, an overall RAM 144 that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and a VDP (as an image processor). An image control unit 145 consisting of a video display processor), a CGROM 146 in which image data etc. are stored, and a frame buffer etc. provided inside the image control unit 145 that temporarily stores drawing data generated from the image data. A VRAM 147, an audio control unit 148 as an audio processor, an audio ROM 149 storing audio data, and input/output ports.

The general CPU 142 receives the operating clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the display control program stored in the general ROM 143, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the general RAM 144 as a work area, thereby executing the operation clock received from the effect control unit 130m. In response to production instruction commands and the like, it controls the image control unit 145 and the audio control unit 148 to execute various productions (outputs data and commands).

The control ROM 143 is composed of a mask ROM, etc., and displays a display control program for displaying images, a display list generation program for generating a display list consisting of a group of drawing control commands, and animation of a production pattern. Anime patterns, anime scene information, etc. are stored.

This animation pattern is referred to when displaying the animation that constitutes the specific content of the image production, and is associated with animation scene information, the display order of each animation scene, etc. The animation scene information includes weight frames (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), drawing parameters (sprite display position, display magnification, transparency, etc.), and drawing method. , the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal).

The image control unit 145 (VDP) is connected to a CGROM 146 in which various image data is stored, and receives commands (display list, drawing commands, etc.) from the overall control unit 141 (overall CPU 142) and the data stored in the CGROM 146. Based on the image data, drawing data that is the source of a video signal (RGB signal, etc.) is generated. The image data includes an image (frame) to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), for example, a production pattern image, a background image forming the background of the production pattern. This is material data representing individual images such as , character images, and dialogue images. On the other hand, the drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of the entire frame, which is formed by combining (overlapping) individual images.

The CGROM 146 is composed of flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, etc., and compresses and stores image data (sprite, movie), etc., which is a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 x 32 pixels). ing. Note that the pixel information is composed of color number information that specifies a color number for each pixel and an α value that indicates the transparency of the image. This CGROM 146 is read out in units of image data by the image control unit 145 (VDP), and image processing is performed in units of image data of this frame.

Further, the CGROM 146 stores, without compression, palette data in which color number information specifying a color number is associated with display color information for actually displaying the color. Note that the CGROM 146 may have a configuration in which only a part of the image data is compressed, rather than all of the image data. Further, as a movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

The VRAM 147 is composed of an SRAM that can write or read image data at high speed. This VRAM 143 includes a display list storage area for temporarily storing a display list output from the overall control unit 141 (main CPU 142), a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and a second image display device 71 (sub It has a frame buffer area etc. corresponding to the liquid crystal display.

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying images, and further includes a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched to a "drawing frame buffer" and a "display frame buffer" each time drawing starts.

Therefore, the image control unit 145 (VDP) transfers the drawing data stored in the CGROM 146 to the “drawing frame buffer” in the frame buffer area of the VRAM 147 based on instructions (display list) from the general control unit 141 (main CPU 142). , reads the drawing data from the "display frame buffer" in the frame buffer area, generates a video signal (RGB signal, etc.) based on the read drawing data, and generates a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), Then, it is output to the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display various images.

Note that the image control unit 145 (VDP) is supplied with an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, and by frequency-dividing this operating clock, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display Generates a synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal/vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and displays the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). Output to. In this embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 145 (VDP) is 30 fps (1/30 second = approximately 33 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 30 times per second. It may be set to 60 fps (1/60 second = approximately 16.6 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 60 times per second.

Also, between the image control unit 145, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), there is a general-purpose device that converts image data into a predetermined image format and outputs it. A substrate 72 is connected. The general-purpose board 72 has a bridge function to convert image data into an image format compatible with the performance of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). For example, the difference in resolution between when a 19-inch SXGA (1280 dots x 1080 dots) liquid crystal display device is connected and when a 17-inch XGA (1024 dots x 768 dots) liquid crystal display device is connected. Absorb.

The audio control unit 148 is connected to the audio output device 9, and controls the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) based on various performance data (including commands) transmitted from the performance control unit 130m. Control is performed to output audio data, music data (BGM, SE), etc. from the audio output device 9 in accordance with the display on the two-image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal).

The lamp/drive control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp/drive control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, input/output ports, and the like.

The lamp CPU 150a receives an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp/drive control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. In response to received performance instruction commands, etc., control is performed to cause controlled devices such as various lighting devices and various driving devices to perform predetermined performances (data and commands are output).

A frame lighting device 10, a handle light emitting device 15c, a button driving device 17b, a board lighting device 76, and a sub-information display device 80 are connected to the input/output port of the lamp/drive control section, and the production control section Based on various performance data (including commands) sent from the sub CPU 130m (sub CPU 130a), various LEDs of the frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the panel lighting device 76, and the sub information display device 80 are lit. It also performs drive control of drive sources such as the button drive device 17b and the motor and solenoid of the panel drive device 75.

The power supply board 160 generates the main power (operating power) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine from the power supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and supplies the main power to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, (the production control board 130 and various electronic components). The power supply board 160 includes a power outage detection circuit 162 that detects whether a power outage (power outage) has occurred and outputs a power outage detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of a power outage (power outage). A backup power supply circuit 163 is provided for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 during a power outage (power outage).

In addition, the power supply board 160 is used to switch between an ON state in which main power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, performance control board 130, and various electronic components) and an OFF state in which the supply of main power is stopped. A power switch is provided so that it can be operated by a clerk at the game parlor, and when the power switch is turned on, supply of main power is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. Note that even if the power switch is in the OFF state, the supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained.

The power outage detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and outputs a power outage detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value. More specifically, the main CPU 110a becomes operational when the power interruption detection signal becomes high level, and the main CPU 110a enters an operational state when the power interruption detection signal becomes low level.

The backup power supply circuit 163 includes a capacitor that stores electricity when power is applied to the gaming machine, and when a power outage (power outage) occurs, the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is transferred to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. supply As a result, even in the event of a power outage (power outage), the memory contents of the main RAM 110c and payout RAM 121c will be retained, and after recovery from the power outage (power outage), the gaming control state will be returned to the state before the power outage (power outage). It can be restored. Note that backup power may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the production control board 130.

(Explanation of gaming status)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be explained. In this embodiment, the states related to the special symbol jackpot lottery include a "low probability game state" and the "high probability game state", and the state related to the movable member 48 of the second starting port 47 is "non-time saving game". ``state'' and ``time-saving gaming state.''

In this embodiment, the following three game states are provided.
(1) A low-probability non-time-saving gaming state that is a "low-probability gaming state" and a "non-time-saving gaming state." (2) A low-probability non-time-saving gaming state that is a "low-probability gaming state" and a "time-saving gaming state." (3) " A high-probability time-saving gaming state that is a “high-probability gaming state” and a “time-saving gaming state.”

Note that the gaming state when the game is started, that is, the initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1, is set to the "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state", and this gaming state is referred to as the "normal gaming state" in this embodiment. ”. In addition, in this embodiment, the "low probability time saving gaming state" and the "high probability time saving gaming state" are gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, so they may be referred to as "specific gaming states". .

In the present embodiment, the "low probability gaming state" means, for example, when the set value (the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery), which is the stage of the advantage of the game, is "1", the first starting port 45 or , refers to a game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is set as low as about 1/300 in a jackpot lottery with a special symbol that is carried out on the condition that a game ball enters the second starting hole 47. On the other hand, in the "high probability gaming state", the probability of winning the jackpot is higher than in the low probability gaming state, and when the setting value is "1", the probability of winning the jackpot is as high as approximately 1/60. Refers to the set gaming state.

Specifically, there are four setting values, ``1'' to ``4.'' When the setting value is ``1,'' the probability of winning the jackpot in the low-probability gaming state is approximately 1/300, which is high. The probability of winning a jackpot in the probability game state is approximately 1/60, and if the setting value is "2", the probability of winning a jackpot in the low probability game state is approximately 1/295, and the probability of winning a jackpot in the high probability game state is approximately 1/295. The probability of winning is approximately 1/59, and if the setting value is "3", the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability gaming state is approximately 1/290, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability gaming state is approximately 1/58. When the set value is "4", the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability gaming state is approximately 1/285, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability gaming state is approximately 1/57.

Therefore, in the "high probability gaming state", it is easier to win a jackpot than in the "low probability gaming state". Further, the low probability gaming state is changed to the high probability gaming state after the jackpot game described later is completed. Therefore, in this embodiment, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the high-probability gaming state is referred to as a "probable jackpot." Further, a jackpot that triggers a transition to a low probability gaming state is referred to as a "normal jackpot."

In this embodiment, the "non-time-saving gaming state" refers to the average fluctuation of the normal symbols corresponding to the lottery result in the winning lottery of the normal symbols that is performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the regular symbol gate 44. This is a game state in which the time is set longer than the "time-saving game state" and the opening time of the second starting port 47 when winning is easily set to be short. For example, when a game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44, a winning lottery for the normal pattern is performed, and a variable display of the normal pattern is performed on the normal pattern display 62, but after the variable display of the normal pattern starts, For example, the display stops after 30 seconds. If the lottery result is a win, the second starting port 47 is controlled to be open for, for example, 0.2 seconds after the normal symbols are stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, the "time-saving gaming state" refers to the average fluctuation time of the normal symbols corresponding to the lottery result in the winning lottery of the regular symbols that is performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the regular symbol gate 44. A gaming state in which the opening time of the second starting port 47 when a winning is won is set to be shorter than the "non-time-saving gaming state" and longer than the "non-time-saving gaming state", for example, 2.5 seconds. say. Furthermore, in the "non-time-saving gaming state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is set as low as, for example, 1/128, and in the "time-saving gaming state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is set to be low, for example, 127. It is set as high as /128. Therefore, in the "time-saving game state", when the game ball passes through the regular game gate 44, the second starting port 47 is more easily controlled in the open mode than in the "non-time-saving game state". As a result, in the "time-saving gaming state", the player can advantageously proceed with the game without consuming game balls.

In addition, in the embodiment, the "time-saving gaming state" is advantageous in the fluctuation time of the normal symbols, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery, compared to the "non-time-saving gaming state". It is set like this. However, the "time-saving gaming state" may be set so that only one of the normal symbol variation time, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is advantageous. . Further, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the probability of winning in the normal symbol winning lottery may be set to, for example, 0/128.

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot in a high probability gaming state is five times the probability of winning a jackpot in a low probability gaming state (common regardless of the setting value). The probability of determining this is not limited to 5 times, but may be set to any value such as 3 times or 8 times as long as it is 10 times or less.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the jackpot lottery, a small win that is less advantageous to the winner than a jackpot is not won, but for example, a small win is set to be won with a probability of about 1/100. It's okay. In this case, it is preferable that the small win probability be the same regardless of whether the set value is "1" to "4".

Also, the larger the setting value is, the more advantageous it becomes to the player (higher jackpot probability), but conversely, the smaller the setting value is, the more advantageous it becomes to the player (higher jackpot probability). You can also do this.

Furthermore, the probability of determining a jackpot in a low probability gaming state and/or a high probability gaming state may be set to be the same for all setting values (1 to 4), or for example, two or three setting values ( 1 and 2, 1 to 3, etc.), the probability of determining a jackpot in the low probability gaming state and/or the high probability gaming state may be set to be the same.

Further, although the setting values in this embodiment are in four stages from 1 to 4, they are not limited to four stages, and may be more or less than four stages.

(Types of jackpot games)
Next, types of jackpot games will be explained.

In this embodiment, the types of jackpot games that can be won in the jackpot lottery based on the winning of game balls in the first starting hole 45 are "first jackpot game", "second jackpot game", and "second jackpot game". 3 jackpot games", and has "first jackpot games" and "second jackpot games" as types of jackpot games that can be won in the jackpot lottery based on the winning of game balls in the second starting slot 47. are doing.

In the "first jackpot game", a round game in which the grand prize opening 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds is executed up to 10 times. In addition, in the round game, one round game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning hole 50 even before the opening time has elapsed.

After the end of the first jackpot game, the highly accurate time-saving game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, considering the jackpot winning probability in the high probability gaming state, the next jackpot is virtually guaranteed.

The "second jackpot game" is a round game that is executed up to 10 times. After the second jackpot game ends, the low-accuracy time-saving game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 100 times.

"Third jackpot" means executing the round game up to four times. After the end of the third jackpot game, the highly accurate time-saving game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, considering the jackpot winning probability in the high probability gaming state, the next jackpot is virtually guaranteed.

In addition, the number of fluctuation displays (in this embodiment, the above-mentioned 100 times or 10,000 times) of the specific gaming state (high probability time saving gaming state, low probability time saving gaming state) set after the jackpot game is referred to as "high probability". It is sometimes expressed as "number of times" or "time-saving number of times."

In this embodiment, there are three types of jackpot games, but the number is not limited to three, and there may be fewer or more than three types. In addition, the opening time of the opening/closing member 51 is set to 29.5 seconds in any jackpot game (first jackpot game to third jackpot game), but the opening time may not be 29.5 seconds, The opening time may vary depending on the round game.

(Type of winning game)
Next, the types of wins will be explained.

In this embodiment, the types of winning games that can be won in the winning lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the regular game gate 44 include a "first winning game" and a "second winning game", If the game is in a non-time saving game state when the winning lottery is executed, it becomes a "first winning game", and if it is in the time saving game state when the winning lottery is executed, it becomes a "second winning game".

The "first winning game" is to open the second starting port 47 for a maximum of 0.2 seconds. In other words, it is a winning game in which the movable member 48 is opened once.

The "second winning game" means that the second starting port 47 is opened for 2.6 seconds, then closed for 1.5 seconds, and then opened again for 2.6 seconds. In other words, it is a winning game in which the movable member 48 is opened twice.

In addition, in the first winning game and the second winning game, the winning game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big prize opening 50 even before the opening time has elapsed.

In this way, in the "time-saving gaming state", it is easier for game balls to enter the second starting port 47, and the player can play the game more advantageously without consuming game balls than in the "non-time-saving gaming state". It is possible to proceed.

Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be explained using a flowchart.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 3. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control board 110. This main processing is performed by inputting a system reset generated by supplying power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a disables all interrupts in step S1, performs initial settings of the CPU such as setting of built-in registers in step S2, and performs startup wait processing for other boards in step S3. Specifically, in order to avoid missing commands from the main control board 110, the CPU waits for one second for the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 to start up.

The main CPU 110a allows access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S4, and transmits a firing permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S5. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs processing to permit the shooting device 26 to shoot the game balls.

In step S6, the main CPU 110a determines whether a backup flag indicating that power has been restored is saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag has been saved, it is assumed that the power has been restored, and the process moves to step S7; if the backup flag has not been saved, it is assumed that the power is turned on for the first time, and the process moves to step S8.

In step S7, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the gaming RWM area (excluding the setting value area) of the main RAM 110c.

The main CPU 110a determines whether a setting change operation has been performed in step S8. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process moves to step S9 as a transition to setting change mode, and if there is no setting change operation, the process moves to step S10.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process in step S9. Specifically, a status confirmation display indicating that the settings are being changed or settings are being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and a setting value area of the gaming RWM area is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. Displays the current setting values saved in and sends a setting change designation command to the production control board 130.

Furthermore, each time the RWM clear switch 111a is operated, the setting value is changed (updated) in the range of "1" to "4", the updated setting value is displayed on the 7-segment LED, and the setting key switch 112a is When there is a setting confirmation operation that changes the setting from the ON state to the OFF state, the changed (updated) setting value is saved in the setting value area to confirm the setting value, and the display of the setting value on the information display 113 is ended. At the same time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 is terminated, and processing for terminating the setting change mode is performed.

In addition, in the production control board 130 which received the setting change designation command, processing for executing setting change notification for notifying that the setting value is being changed will be performed. Specifically, a settings change screen is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71 to indicate that the settings are being changed, and the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are displayed in a predetermined manner while the settings are being changed. All the lights are turned on with the same emission color (for example, white). Note that the audio output device 9 may output a settings change notification sound (“Settings are being changed”) indicating that settings are being changed.

The main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal in step S10. Specifically, it is determined whether the checksum saved in the gaming RWM area matches the checksum calculated in step S7. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the data in the gaming RWM area), the process moves to step S11, and if the checksum is not normal (there is an abnormality in the data in the gaming RWM area), Assuming that it is not possible to normally return to the control state before power-off, the process moves to step S12.

Note that if the backup flag has not been saved, that is, if the power is turned on for the first time, the checksum is determined to be abnormal.

In step S11, the main CPU 110a determines whether the set value in the set value area is within an appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the set value in the set value area is within the appropriate range, the process moves to step S13, and if it is determined that the set value in the set value area is not within the appropriate range, the process moves to step S12. Move.

The main CPU 110a performs unrecoverable error processing in step S12. Specifically, after displaying error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting an irreversible error designation command indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred to the production control board 130. , sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts, and after clearing the output port, outputs a non-recoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of a non-recoverable error from the security signal terminal of the gaming information output terminal board 90. Then, it waits until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, the production control board 130 performs a process for notifying an unrecoverable error.

The "unrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is no longer performed (no transition to game control occurs), and is not canceled unless a setting change process is executed. Therefore, if an unrecoverable error occurs, even if you turn off the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 and then turn on the power switch without changing settings, it will not be canceled and the It is now necessary to turn on the power switch in conjunction with the change operation. Note that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

Note that although the "unrecoverable error" is not cleared unless the setting change process is executed, it may also be cleared when RWM clear is executed without the setting change process.

"Unrecoverable error notification" is a notification to make the user aware that an unrecoverable error has occurred. "), the frame lighting device 10 and panel lighting device 76 are lit in a predetermined color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or an unrecoverable error occurs from the audio output device 9. An unrecoverable error sound ("Unrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) indicating that the error has occurred is output until the power is turned off.
Note that the audio output device 9, the frame illumination device 10, the image display devices 70 and 71, and the board illumination device 76 may be collectively referred to as a "production device."

The main CPU 110a determines whether an RWM clear operation has been performed in step S13. Specifically, it is determined whether the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, it is assumed that RWM clear is to be executed and the process moves to step S14, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process moves to step S16.

The main CPU 110a performs RWM clear processing in step S14. Specifically, processing is performed to initialize the gaming control state (initialize the gaming RWM area other than the setting value area).

In step S15, the main CPU 110a sends a power-on designation command to the payout control board 120 and the power-on designation command indicating that the gaming control state has been initialized and the current gaming state (here, the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state as the normal gaming state). It is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the process moves to step S21. As a result, the production control board 130 performs processing for executing power-on notification.

The "power-on notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has been initialized, and the initial screen (background image and initial effect pattern "135" ), the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are all lit up in a predetermined color (for example, red) for a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds), and the RWM area is displayed from the audio output device 9. This means outputting a power-on notification sound ("RWM has been cleared" + buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) to indicate that the device has been initialized.
Note that in the power-on notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, a display notifying that RWM has been cleared may be displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71.

The main CPU 110a determines whether a setting confirmation operation has been performed in step S16. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process moves to step S17 as a transition to the setting confirmation mode, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power was cut off. The process moves to step S18.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process in step S17. Specifically, a status confirmation display indicating that the settings are being changed or settings are being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and a setting value area of the gaming RWM area is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. Displays the current set values saved in and sends a setting confirmation designation command to the production control board 130.

Furthermore, when there is a confirmation end operation that changes the setting key switch 112a from the ON state to the OFF state, the display of the setting value on the information display 113 is ended, and the state confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 is ended, Performs processing to end setting confirmation mode.

In addition, in the production control board 130 which received the setting confirmation designation command, processing for executing setting confirmation notification for notifying that setting confirmation is being performed will be performed. Specifically, the image display devices 70 and 71 display a setting confirmation screen indicating that the settings are being confirmed, and the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 emit a predetermined light while the settings are being confirmed. Turn on all lights in a color (for example, white). Note that the audio output device 9 may output a setting confirmation notification sound (“Setting values are being confirmed”) indicating that the settings are being confirmed.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a clears (clears to 0) the backup flag and checksum saved in the gaming RWM area, and sets the gaming RWM area when the power is restored. As a result, the progress state (control state) of the game is restored (restored) to the state before the power was turned off, so it is possible to resume the game from the state before the power was turned off.

In step S19, the main CPU 110a transmits to the production control board 130 a power recovery designation command indicating that the gaming control state has been restored and the gaming state before the power outage occurred. As a result, the production control board 130 performs a process for terminating setting confirmation notification, etc., which will be described later, and executing power recovery notification.

"Power restoration notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off, and the initial screen (background image and initial effect The frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 76 are fully illuminated in a predetermined color (e.g. blue) for a predetermined period (e.g. 60 seconds), the audio output device 9 A power restoration notification sound ("power has been restored" + buzzer sound) indicating that the power has been restored (from a power outage) is output for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds).
Note that in the power restoration notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, a display notifying that the power has been restored may be displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a executes other commands (a special symbol storage designation command indicating the number of reserved special symbols (U1) and the number of reserved second special symbols (U2), and the number of reserved regular symbols (G)). A normal symbol storage designation command, etc.) is sent to the production control board 130. As a result, the performance control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved special symbols and the number of reserved regular symbols, and also perform processing for displaying the first reserved icon and the second reserved icon on the first image display device 70. It will be done.

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting value designation command to the production control board 130 in step S21. This makes it possible for the effect control board 130 to grasp the current set value. Note that this setting value designation command may be transmitted to the production control board 130 before the power-on designation command and the power recovery designation command are transmitted. Furthermore, the setting value designation command may be transmitted each time a variable display of special symbols starts, or each time a jackpot game starts.

The main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step S22, and permits all interrupts in step S23.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for special symbol determination to determine the variation mode (variation time) of the special symbol, and in step S25, updates the random number value for determining the special symbol. An initial value random value update process is performed to update the initial value random value, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination.

Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether a power outage (power outage) has occurred in step S26. Specifically, it is determined whether a power outage detection signal is input from the power outage detection circuit of the power supply board 160, and if the power outage detection signal is not input, the process moves to step S24, and the power outage detection is performed. If a signal is input, the process moves to step S27.

The main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts in step S27, clears the output port in step S28, and clears the gaming RWM area (set value area) of the main RAM 110c in step S29. In step S30, a process is performed to save a backup flag in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S31, Processing is performed to prohibit RAM access, and the process waits until the supply of power supply voltage is completely cut off.

In this way, since multiple conditions (operations) are set for setting change operations, it is not possible to change settings easily, which makes it possible to suppress fraudulent acts and improve the security of gaming machines. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, the number of conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation is greater than the conditions (operations) set for the RWM clear operation and setting confirmation operation, making it possible to avoid the most fraudulent setting changes. It is possible to increase the security of events where acts are likely to be committed, and it is possible to effectively prevent fraudulent acts.

In addition, if the checksum is abnormal, unrecoverable error processing is executed and the progress of the game is stopped, causing the game machine to perform unexpected operations and causing inconvenience to the game parlor and players. This eliminates the need for overtime, making it possible to improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

In addition, if the value in the setting value area is not within the appropriate range, in other words, if the previous power-off may have occurred while changing the settings, irreversible error processing will be executed even if the checksum is normal. By stopping the progress of the game, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding with setting values that are not intended by the game parlor, thereby improving the reliability of the game machine. Become.

Also, while changing settings (setting change mode) or checking settings (setting confirmation mode), on the front (surface) of gaming machine 1, there are a status confirmation display 68, image display devices 70 and 71, and a frame lighting device. It is possible to recognize that the settings are being changed by checking the information display 113 on the back side (back side). ing. In other words, it is possible to know whether the settings are being changed from either the front (front) or the back (back) of the gaming machine 1.

Note that the condition for the setting change operation, RWM clear operation, and setting confirmation operation may include that the open detection switch 31a is in the ON state. By doing so, the number of conditions increases, so fraudulent acts can be suppressed, and the security of the gaming machine can be further improved.

In addition, if it is determined that there is no backup flag (this is the first time the power is turned on) and there is no setting change operation, and if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in the subsequent step S10, an unrecoverable error process is performed. is executed, but when it is determined that there is no backup flag, the gaming program initializes the gaming RWM area (clears it to 0) and saves the initial value "1" in the setting value area. Then, the process may be moved to step S13.

Additionally, if it is determined that there is a backup flag (power has been restored) and there is no setting change operation, and if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in subsequent step S10, unrecoverable error processing is executed. However, when the checksum is determined to be abnormal, the gaming program initializes the gaming RWM area (clears it to 0) and saves the initial value "1" in the setting value area. , the process may be moved to step S13.

In addition, the power-on designation command and the power-recovery designation command are sent including information indicating the current gaming state, but after transmitting the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command, the current gaming state Alternatively, a gaming state designation command indicating the game state may be transmitted.

In addition, when the power is turned off or turned on, the gaming program calculates the checksum of the gaming RWM area (excluding the setting value area) of the main RAM 110c, but the information program calculates the checksum. may be calculated. In this case, it is preferable to save the calculated checksum in the information RWM area.

Also, when the power is turned off or turned on, the checksum of the gaming RWM area (excluding the setting value area) is calculated, but even if the checksum of the entire RWM area is calculated. Alternatively, the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area may be calculated separately, and if either checksum is abnormal, the process may proceed to irreversible error processing.

Additionally, a settings change designation command is sent at the start of the settings change process, and a power-on designation command is sent after the settings change process ends, but instead of the settings change designation command, a settings change start designation command is sent. However, instead of the power-on designation command, a setting change end designation command may be sent. In this case, the settings change end designation command may be sent at the end of the settings change process, or may be sent after the settings change process ends.

Further, when a setting change is made, the RWM clearing process is performed after the setting change is made, but the RWM clearing process may be performed before the setting change is made.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board)
The timer interrupt processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 4. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds) in the main control board 110.

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, updates the special symbol time counter, the special game timer counter such as the opening time of special electric accessories, etc. It performs time control processing for updating various timer counters, such as updating processing of , normal symbol time counter updating processing, and updating processing of opening/closing time of the movable member 48 . Specifically, 1 is subtracted from counters such as a special symbol time counter, a special game timer counter, a normal symbol time counter, a starting port opening timer counter, and a starting port closing timer counter.

In step S120, the main CPU 110a determines a random value for determining a jackpot, a random value for determining a special symbol, a random value for determining a special pattern variation pattern, a random value for determining a hit, a random value for determining a normal symbol, and a random value for determining a regular symbol variation pattern. Performs specific random number update processing to update random numbers. Specifically, each random value and random number counter are updated by adding +1. In addition, if the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter completes one cycle), the random number counter is returned to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the cycle, the corresponding The initial value random value is set as a new round initial value, and the random value is newly updated.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a, similarly to step S30, sets the initial value random value for jackpot determination, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination. Perform initial value random value update processing to be updated.

In step S200, the main CPU 110a controls the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, the gate detection switch 44a, the out ball detection switch 52a, etc. It determines whether or not there is an input to each switch, and performs input control processing to set predetermined data if there is an input. The details will be described later using FIG. 5.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol special electric control for performing special symbol memory determination (jackpot determination, etc.), display control of special symbols, opening/closing control of the major prize opening 50 (opening/closing member 51), control of gaming state, etc. Perform processing. The details will be described later using FIG. 7.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs a normal symbol general electric control process for performing normal symbol memory determination (hit determination, etc.), normal symbol display control, opening/closing control of the second starting port 47 (movable member 48), etc. .

It should be noted that the type of winning normal symbol and the type of losing normal symbol determined as a result of the determination of the ordinary symbol determination information performed in the ordinary symbol and electric power control process are the same without changing depending on the setting value. By doing so, the gameplay is not too complicated and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratio of various winning ordinary symbols and the selection ratio of various losing ordinary symbols, which are determined as a result of the determination of the ordinary symbol judgment information performed in the ordinary symbol general electricity control process, do not change depending on the setting value and remain constant. ing. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player will not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Next, in step S500, the main CPU 110a transmits a payout state confirmation command to the payout control board 120 for checking the payout state of the payout control board 120, and sends a prize ball counter (3 prize ball counter, 10 award balls counter, 15 award balls counter), and performs payout control processing for transmitting payout number designation commands corresponding to various winning holes to the payout control board 120. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out prize balls from the game ball payout device 100.

In step S600, the main CPU 110a determines the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality or a radio wave abnormality based on the input signals from the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and issues a magnetic abnormality error specification command and a radio wave abnormality error specification command. Performs magnetic/radio wave abnormality determination processing for transmitting commands to the production control board 130. In addition, when the production control board 130 receives the error designation command for magnetic abnormality or the error designation command for radio wave abnormality, it performs control to perform magnetic abnormality error notification or radio wave abnormality error notification.

In step S700, the main CPU 110a outputs external information data (gaming information) from the gaming information output terminal board 90, starting opening opening/closing data outputting to the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, and large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b. Winning opening/closing data, special symbol display data output to the first special symbol display 60 and second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display data output to the normal symbol display 62, first special symbol pending display 63, and performs data creation processing to create data such as special symbol pending display data to be output to the second special symbol pending display 64 and normal symbol pending display data to be output to the normal symbol pending display 65.

In step S750, the main CPU 110a performs port output processing to output signals such as the external information data, starting opening opening/closing data, and big winning opening opening/closing data created in step S700, special symbol display data, and normal symbol display data. , a display output process that outputs signals such as special symbol pending display data, normal symbol pending display data, etc., and a payout command transmission process that transmits a command set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120. Also, an output control process is performed to execute a production command transmission process for transmitting a command set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the production control board 130.

The main CPU 110a performs information program call processing in step S800. Specifically, after disabling interrupts, the flag register is saved in the gaming RWM area, and processing is performed to call the target information program using a CALL instruction.

The main CPU 110a performs game ball counting processing (information program) in step S810. Specifically, the number of payouts during normal play, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to various winning holes (general winning hole, big winning hole starting hole) during normal gaming state, and the number of outs during normal gaming state. Processing is performed to count the number of normal outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the ball detection switch 52a, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 52a, regardless of the game state.

In addition, the total number of outs, the number of payouts during normal play, and the number of outs during normal play are gaming information that is not affected (unrelated to the setting value) even if the setting value is changed, so these By counting, it becomes possible to calculate performance information (normal base value to be described later) that excludes the influence of the set value, and it becomes possible to use it for understanding the performance of the gaming machine 1.

The main CPU 110a performs performance information calculation processing (information program) in step S830. Specifically, the normal base value ((Number of payouts during normal play ÷ Number of outs during normal play) x 100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs is calculated, and the base storage area set in the information RWM area is calculated. Processing is performed to save the normal base value rounded to the first decimal place in the first area.

The game section is updated every time the total number of outs reaches 60,000, and the base storage area is divided into a first area where the normal base value in the current game section is stored, and a one-time storage area. A second area for storing the normal base value in the previous gaming section, a third area for storing the normal base value in the two previous gaming sections, and a normal base value in the three previous gaming sections. A fourth area for playing the game is provided, and the base values for four game sections including the current one are saved in each area.

The main CPU 110a performs performance display data setting processing (information program) in step S850. Specifically, the normal base value (performance information) for four game sections calculated in the performance information calculation process and saved in the base storage area is displayed on the information display 113 while being switched every 5 seconds. Performs processing to set performance display data.

The main CPU 110a performs test data creation processing (information program) in step S870. Specifically, processing is performed to create test data (test information) to be output to test equipment used when testing the gaming machine 1.

The main CPU 110a performs output control processing (information program) in step S880. Specifically, display output processing is performed to output signals such as performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 above to various indicators, and processing is performed to output signals such as test data created in step S870 above. .

In step S890, the main CPU 110a performs processing upon returning to the gaming program. Specifically, processing is performed to restore the flag register from the gaming RWM area, enable interrupts, and return to the gaming program.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and ends the current timer interrupt process.

In this way, the timer interrupt is not executed in the setting change processing, RWM clear processing, and setting confirmation processing, so it is not possible to count the number of payouts and outs, calculate the performance information of the gaming machine, and perform the processing of the gaming machine. Since the performance information is not displayed, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control board 110.

Although the performance information calculation process was performed in the timer interrupt process of the main control board 110, it may be performed in the main process of the main control board 110. Further, the game ball counting process may also be performed in the main process of the main control board 110. Specifically, it may be performed between step S25 and step S26.

(Input control processing of main control board)
The input control processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 5. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing input control processing in the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a performs general winning opening detection switch input processing in step S210. In this general winning hole detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning hole 43. If there is no detection signal input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the process moves to step S220.

When a detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, the prize ball counter (10 prize balls counter) for the general winning hole used for prize balls is updated by adding data indicating 10 prize balls. Then, after adding "1" to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have entered the winning hole and updating it (D←D+1), the general winning hole detection switch input process is ended.

The main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening detection switch input process in step S220. In this big winning hole detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the big winning hole detection switch 50a, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the big winning hole 50. If there is no detection signal input from the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the process moves to step S230.

When the detection signal from the big winning opening detection switch 50a is input, data indicating 15 winning balls is added to the winning ball counter (15 winning balls counter) for the big winning opening used for winning balls. Update and add "1" to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that entered the winning slot and update (D←D+1) to determine whether the current jackpot game (special game) is in progress. Determine whether If you are currently playing a jackpot game, add "1" to the round winning counter (C) for counting the game balls that have entered the big winning hole 50 and update it (C←C+1). Detection switch input processing ends.

If the current gaming state is not a special gaming state, the number of illegal winning balls that have won (balls entered) in the specific winning opening (second starting opening 47, big winning opening 50) outside the winning winning period. Add "1" to the counter (E) and update it (E←E+1), determine whether the value of the illegal winning ball counter (E) is greater than the specified number (for example, 10), and If the value of the ball counter (E) is less than or equal to the specified number, the big winning opening detection switch input process is ended.

If the value of the illegal prize winning ball counter (E) is greater than the specified number, an illegal prize winning (unauthorized winning ball) in which a game ball wins a prize (balls entered) outside the winning period has occurred, and an error for fraudulent prize winning is designated. Set the command to the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, an error specifying command for fraudulent winning is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 issues a fraudulent winning error notification to notify that a fraudulent winning has occurred.

Then, external information data (output data) for outputting an illegal winning signal from the game information output terminal board 90 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, the illegal winning ball counter (E) is cleared, and the big winning opening is detected. End switch input processing. As a result, a fraudulent winning signal is output from the game information output terminal board 90, and it becomes possible for an external device to grasp (specify) that a fraudulent winning has occurred.

The main CPU 110a performs a first starting port detection switch input process in step S230. In this first starting port detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a has been input, that is, whether the game ball has entered the first starting port 45 or not. The details will be described later using FIG. 6.

The main CPU 110a performs second starting port detection switch input processing in step S240. In this second starting port detection switch input process, substantially the same process as the first starting port detection switch input process shown in FIG. 6, which will be described later, is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing in step S250. In this gate detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a has been input, that is, whether the game ball has passed through the regular figure gate 44 or not. If no detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, the input control process ends.

When a detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, it is determined whether or not the number of regular symbols held, which is the number of regular symbols stored in the normal symbol reserved storage area, is less than four. If the number of reserved general drawings is not less than 4, the input control process is ended.

If the number of reserved symbols is less than 4, the number of reserved symbols is updated by adding "1", and the ordinary symbol judgment information (random value for hit determination, random value for determining ordinary symbols, fluctuation pattern of ordinary symbols) is updated. Random value for determination) is acquired, and the vacant storage sections are searched in order from the first storage section in the normal symbol storage area, and the acquired ordinary symbol determination information is stored in the empty storage section and input. Control processing ends.

(Input processing of the first starting port detection switch on the main control board)
The first starting port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 6. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the first starting port detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a has been input. If the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is input, the process moves to step S230-2, and if the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is not input, the current 1 Finish the starting port detection switch input process.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the 3-prize ball counter used for prize balls by adding data indicating 3 prize balls, and in step S230-3, the main CPU 110a updates the 3-prize ball counter used for prize balls. A random number value for determining a jackpot, a random number value for determining a special symbol, a random number value for determining a reach, a random number value for determining a special pattern variation pattern) is obtained.

In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the first special symbol reservation number (U1) stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area is less than four. If the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is less than 4, the process moves to step S230-5, and if the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is not less than 4, the current first start The mouth detection switch input process ends.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) and updating it (U1←U1+1), and in step S230-6, A first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the number of reserved symbols (U1) is set in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the first special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 can grasp the number of first special symbols pending.

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a sequentially searches for empty storage sections starting from the first storage section in the first special symbol reservation storage area, and stores the acquired special symbol determination information in the empty storage sections. Remember.

As a result of the above, the predetermined storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area stores special symbol determination information (random value for jackpot determination, random value for special symbol determination, random value for reach determination, and special symbol fluctuation pattern determination). A first pending memory consisting of random numbers, etc.) will be stored.

The main CPU 110a performs a first preliminary determination process in step S230-8. In this first preliminary determination process, the preliminary determination table (not shown) is referred to, and the currently acquired special symbol determination information (first pending memory) is stored before the special symbol fluctuation display based on the determination information is performed. A planned variation pattern, which is a variation pattern scheduled to be executed, is determined.

In step S230-9, the main CPU 110a sets the first starting opening winning designation command corresponding to the scheduled fluctuation pattern determined in the first preliminary determination process in step S230-8 in the performance transmission data storage area, and The first starting port detection switch input process ends.

As a result, the planned fluctuation pattern can be transmitted to the production control board 130 as a first starting slot winning designation command, and the sub CPU 130a of the production control board 130 that has received the first starting slot winning designation command Analyzes the specified command and performs a predetermined preview effect over one or more variable displays that are executed from before the start of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the first starting opening winning designation command. It is possible to execute a look-ahead preview effect that executes. Note that the pre-read preview effect is performed using one or more of the image display device, the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, and the panel lighting device 76. This is done using

In addition, regarding the second starting opening detection switch input process, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the first special symbol retention storage area, the first retention memory, the first special symbol retention number (U1), and the first special symbol storage designation. The command, the first advance judgment process, and the first starting opening winning designation command are respectively sent to the second starting opening detection switch 47a, the second special symbol retention storage area, the second retention memory, the second special symbol retention number (U2), and the second special symbol retention storage area. It may be read as the 2 special symbol storage designation command, the 2nd preliminary determination process, and the 2nd starting opening winning designation command.

(Special figure special electric control processing of main control board)
The special figure special electric control process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the special figure special electric control process in the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a loads the special figure special electric line processing data in step S301, refers to the branch destination address from the loaded special figure special electric line processing data in step S302, and if the special figure special electric line processing data = 0, the special figure memory is stored. The process moves to the determination process (step S310), and if the special figure/telephone processing data=1, the process moves to the special symbol variation process (step S320), and if the special figure/telephone processing data=2, the process moves to the special symbol stop process (step S320). If the special figure special electric line processing data = 3, the process moves to the jackpot game process (step S340), and if the special figure special electric line processing data = 4, the process moves to the jackpot game end process (step S350). Move.

This "special figure special electric line processing data" is set as necessary in each subroutine of the special figure special electric control process as described later, so the subroutines necessary for the game will be processed as appropriate. .

In step S310, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol storage determination process that determines a jackpot, determines the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed, and determines the fluctuation time of the special symbol.

Specifically, first, the main CPU 110a determines whether the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is "1" or more, and if the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is not "1" or more. , it is determined whether the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is "1" or more, and if the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is not "1" or more ("0"), , the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the customer waiting state determination flag for determining whether or not the customer waiting state in which a jackpot game is not being executed (the waiting state in which no game is in progress) is set to "0". ”.

If the customer waiting state determination flag is "0", it is assumed that the customer waiting state has started, and a customer waiting state designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area, while maintaining the special figure special electric processing data = 0, If the current special symbol memory determination process is finished and the customer waiting state determination flag is not "0", it is assumed that the customer waiting state has already started, and the special symbol special electric processing data = 0 is maintained and the current The special symbol memory determination process ends.

If the second special symbol retention number (U2) is "1" or more, "1" is subtracted from the value stored in the second special symbol retention storage area, and then the value is stored in the second special symbol retention storage area. Shift various random numbers (special symbol determination information) stored in a certain first storage section to fourth storage section to the previous storage section, and select the number corresponding to the second special symbol reservation number (U2) after subtraction. 2 Set the special symbol storage designation command in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, the second special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 can grasp the number of second special symbols pending.

Then, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game. Specifically, random numbers for special symbol determination among various random numbers (special symbol determination information) shifted from the first storage section to the zeroth storage section of the second special symbol reservation storage area, A jackpot game is executed based on the setting values (here, 1 to 4) stored in the setting value area and the current probability gaming state (low probability gaming state, high probability gaming state). ” or a “loss”.

On the other hand, if the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is not "1" or more, and the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is "1" or more, the first special symbol reservation storage area is After subtracting "1" from the stored value, shift the various random numbers stored in the first to fourth storage parts in the first special symbol storage area to the previous storage part, A first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) after the subtraction is set in the presentation transmission data storage area. As a result, the first special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 can grasp the number of first special symbols pending.

Then, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination (jackpot lottery) for determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game. Specifically, the random number for special symbol determination among various random numbers (special symbol determination information) shifted from the first storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area to the 0th storage section, and the random number of the RWM area for gaming. A jackpot game is executed based on the setting values (here, 1 to 4) stored in the setting value area and the current probability gaming state (low probability gaming state, high probability gaming state). ” or a “loss”.

Then, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol determination process to determine the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed. Specifically, when a jackpot determination is made based on the random number value for special symbol determination stored in the 0th storage section of the second special symbol reservation storage area, the special symbol determination random number value stored in the 0th storage section is A jackpot special symbol or a loss special symbol is determined based on the random number value for the jackpot symbol, and a performance symbol designation command corresponding to the determined special symbol is set in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, an effect design designation command is sent to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

In addition, when a jackpot determination is made based on the random number value for special symbol determination stored in the 0th storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area, the jackpot symbol stored in the 0th storage section A special symbol (big hit special symbol, loss special symbol) is determined based on the random number value, and a performance symbol designation command corresponding to the determined special symbol is set in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, an effect design designation command is sent to the effect control board 130, and the effect control board 130 can grasp the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

Next, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process for determining a special symbol fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). Specifically, when a jackpot determination is made based on the random number value for special symbol determination stored in the 0th storage section of the second special symbol reservation storage area, the special symbol determination random number value stored in the 0th storage section is Based on the random number for reach determination and the random number for special symbol variation, determine the variation pattern of the special symbol, set the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the special symbol time counter, and set the variation pattern to the determined variation pattern. Set the corresponding variation pattern designation command in the production transmission data storage area. As a result, a variation pattern designation command is sent to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 can grasp the variation pattern of the special symbol.

In addition, when a jackpot determination is made based on the random number value for special symbol determination stored in the 0th storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area, the reach determination value stored in the 0th storage section A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random number value and the random number value for special symbol variation, a variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set in the special symbol time counter, and a variation pattern corresponding to the determined variation pattern is determined. Sets the specified command in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, a variation pattern designation command is sent to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 can grasp the variation pattern of the special symbol.

Then, the main CPU 110a sets variable display data in a predetermined processing area for causing the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 to display a variable display of the special symbol (blinking of the LED). .

As a result, when the variable display data is set in a predetermined processing area, data for turning on or off the LED is created as appropriate in step S600, and the created data is output in step S700. A variable display of special symbols is performed on the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61.

Then, the special figure special electric line processing data = 0 is set to the special figure special electric line processing data = 1 to prepare for moving to the subroutine of the special symbol variation process, and the current special symbol memory determination process is ended.

In step S320, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol variation processing to determine whether the special symbol variation time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol variation time set in step S310 has elapsed (special symbol time counter=0). If the variation time has not elapsed, the current special symbol variation process is ended while maintaining the special symbol special electricity processing data=1.

If the variable time has elapsed, the jackpot special symbol or the lose special symbol determined in step S310 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61, and the predetermined The stop time (0.5 seconds) of the special symbol is set in the special symbol time counter. As a result, the player is informed of the result of the jackpot determination.

Then, the special symbol/special electrical processing data = 1 is set to the special symbol/special electrical processing data = 2, preparations are made to proceed to the subroutine of the special symbol stop processing, and the current special symbol variation processing is ended.

In step S330, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol stop processing to determine whether the special symbol stop time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop time set in step S320 has elapsed (special symbol time counter=0). If the stop time has not elapsed, the current special symbol stop process is ended while maintaining the special symbol special electric process data=2.

When the stop time has elapsed, if the number of time savers > 0, the time saver counter is decremented by 1 and updated; if the number of time savers = 0, the time saver game flag is cleared; and if the high probability number > 0, the time saver game flag is cleared. The probability count counter is updated by subtracting 1, and when the high probability count becomes 0, the high probability game flag is cleared.

Then, the main CPU 110a determines whether the stopped and displayed special symbol is a jackpot special symbol. If it is a jackpot special symbol, clear the time-saving game flag, high-probability game flag, time-saving number counter, and high-probability number counter, and set the special figure special electric processing data = 2 to special figure special electric processing data = 3. Then, preparations are made to proceed to the jackpot game processing subroutine, and the current special symbol stop processing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is a losing special symbol, the special symbol special electrical processing data = 2 is set to the special symbol special electrical processing data = 0, preparations are made to move to the subroutine of special symbol storage judgment processing, and the current special symbol stop processing is performed. end.

In step S340, the main CPU 110a executes the first jackpot game, the second jackpot game, or the third jackpot game based on the type of jackpot special symbol (stop symbol data) set in step S310. Perform jackpot game processing.

Specifically, the opening time of the opening/closing member 51 corresponding to the type of jackpot game is set in the special game timer counter, and drive data for the jackpot opening/closing solenoid 51b is output to open the opening/closing member 51. At this time, 1 is added to the round game number (R) storage area.

If a specified number of game balls win (enter) during this opening, or the opening time of the grand prize opening has elapsed (round winning counter (C) = 10, or special game timer counter = 0), The output of the drive data of the winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b is stopped to close the opening/closing member 51. This completes one round game. Also, the counter value of the round winning counter (C) is cleared.

When a predetermined number of round games (in this embodiment, 4 or 16 times) is completed, the data stored in the round game number (R) storage area is cleared, and the special figure special electric processing data = 3 Then, the special figure special electric processing data is set to 4, preparations are made to proceed to the subroutine of the jackpot game end processing, and the current jackpot game processing is ended.

In step S350, the main CPU 110a determines a probability gaming state, either a high probability gaming state or a low probability gaming state, and also determines a gaming state, a time saving gaming state or a non-time saving gaming state. Perform jackpot game end processing.

Specifically, based on the type of jackpot special symbol (stopped symbol data) set in step S310, a high probability game flag, a high probability number of times, a time saving game flag, and a time saving number of times are set. Then, the special figure/special electric line processing data = 4 is set to the special figure/special electric line processing data = 0, preparations are made to proceed to the subroutine of the special symbol memory determination processing, and the current jackpot game end processing is ended.

(Explanation of commands related to the production control board)
The types of commands sent from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 will be explained using FIGS. 8 and 9. 8 and 9 are diagrams showing the types of commands sent from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130.

The "first special symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of reserved first special symbols (U1), and is stored in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases or decreases. It is set and transmitted to the production control board 130.

The "second special symbol storage designation command" indicates the second special symbol retention number (U2), and when the second special symbol retention number (U2) increases or decreases, it is stored in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. It is set and transmitted to the production control board 130.

In addition, in this embodiment, the "first special symbol storage designation command" and the "second special symbol storage designation command" may be collectively referred to as the "special symbol storage designation command".

The "production design designation command" indicates the type (type) of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, and is transmitted to the main RAM 110c for production when various special symbols are determined and the variable display of the special symbol is started. It is set in the data storage area and transmitted to the production control board 130.

In addition, since the type of special symbol ultimately determines the type of jackpot game and the gaming state after the jackpot game ends, the performance symbol designation command is used to indicate the jackpot type and the gaming state after the jackpot ends. You can say that.

The “first special symbol variation pattern designation command” indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, and indicates the variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 60. When this is started, it is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The “second special symbol variation pattern designation command” indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol on the second special symbol display 61, and indicates the variation display of the special symbol on the second special symbol display 61. When this is started, it is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

In this embodiment, the "first special symbol variation pattern designation command" and the "second special symbol variation pattern designation command" may be collectively referred to as the "variation pattern designation command."

The "special symbol confirmation command" indicates that the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61, it is sent to the main RAM 110c. is set in the performance transmission data storage area of , and transmitted to the performance control board 130.

The "normal symbol confirmation command" indicates that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 62, and is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. It is transmitted to the control board 130.

The “starting hole winning designation command” is for notifying the performance control board 130 in advance of the result of the jackpot determination (lottery), and the game ball wins in the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47. At that time, it is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmitted to the effect control board 130.

The "jackpot opening designation command" indicates the start of a jackpot game (special game), and is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when various jackpot games start, and is sent to the production control board. 130.

The “round designation command” indicates the number of rounds of the jackpot game, and is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the round game of the jackpot game is started, and is transmitted to the performance control board 130. .

The "jackpot ending specification command" indicates the end of the jackpot game, and is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when various jackpot games end, and is transmitted to the performance control board 130. Ru.

The "normal symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of reserved symbols (G1), and when the value stored in the reserved number of regular symbols (G1) storage area increases or decreases, the main RAM 110c stores the production transmission data. It is set in the area and transmitted to the production control board 130.

The "normal symbol designation command" indicates the type of normal symbol to be stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 62, and when various normal symbols are determined and the fluctuating display of the normal symbols is started, the command is used in the main RAM 110c. It is set in the performance transmission data storage area and transmitted to the performance control board 130.

The "common pattern variation designation command" indicates the variation time of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 62, and is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the variation display of the normal symbol starts. , is transmitted to the production control board 130.

The "winning opening designation command" indicates the start of a winning game (auxiliary game), and is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the winning game starts, and is set in the production transmission data storage area of the production control board 130. sent to.

The "winning ending designation command" indicates the end of various auxiliary games, and is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmitted to the production control board 130 when the winning game ends. Ru.

The "gaming state specification command" indicates whether or not it is a time-saving gaming state or not, and whether it is a high-probability gaming state. time) and at the end of the jackpot, it is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c and transmitted to the production control board 130.

The "power-on designation command" and the "power restoration designation command" indicate whether or not power-on to the gaming machine 1 is accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c. When turned on, a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation command corresponding to the presence or absence of initialization of the main RAM 110c and the gaming state is transmitted to the production control board 130.

The "Customer Waiting State Designation Command" indicates that the special symbol is in a customer waiting state where variable display is not performed, and is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c when the customer waiting state is entered. and transmitted to the production control board 130.

The "error specification command" indicates that an error has occurred in the gaming machine 1 and the type of error. When it is determined that an illegal winning has occurred in the above-mentioned big winning opening detection switch input process or the above-mentioned second starting opening detection switch input process, it is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the production control board 130 sent to.

Also, when the payout control board 120 detects that the game board mounting frame 3 or the glass frame 4 is open, the lower tray 12 is full, or a payout abnormality is detected, the data is set in the production transmission data storage area of the payout RAM 121c, and the production control board 130.

The "error cancellation designation command" indicates that the error that occurred in the gaming machine 1 has been resolved, and is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c or payout RAM 121c when the resolution of various abnormalities is detected. and transmitted to the production control board 130.

The "setting value specification command" indicates the setting value set in the gaming machine 1, and specifically, after the gaming machine 1 is powered on, a power-on specification command or a power recovery specification command is executed. After being transmitted, it is transmitted to the production control board 130.

(Main processing of the production control section)
Next, the main processing of the production control section 130m will be explained using FIG. 10. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the production control section 130m.

When power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts in step E10, and performs initialization processing in step E20. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the main processing program is read from the sub ROM 130b, flags etc. stored in the sub RAM 130c are initialized, and processing such as initial settings is performed.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt permission to permit timer interrupts in step E30, and performs sub random number update processing in step E40. Specifically, processing is performed to update various random numbers stored in the sub-RAM 130c. Thereafter, the process of step E40 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control section)
The timer interrupt process of the production control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 11. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds) in the production control unit 130m.

The sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area in step E100, and performs timer update processing in step E120. In this timer update process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various timers.

The sub CPU 130a performs input control processing in step E130. Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the performance button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, and when there is an input, processing is performed to set predetermined data.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E150. Specifically, the process determines whether or not various commands are being transmitted from the main control board 110, and stores the received commands in the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c when various commands are being transmitted. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs a setting change/confirmation process in step E170. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a setting change designation command or a setting confirmation designation command has been received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and if a setting change designation command has been received, the above-mentioned settings are A process for executing change notification is performed, and if a setting confirmation designation command is received, a process for executing the above-mentioned setting confirmation notification is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs power-on processing in step E200. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power-on designation command has been received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and if the power-on designation command has been received, processing is performed to execute a power-on notification. Specifically, a power-on notification command is sent to the display/audio control unit 140 to display a power-on screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), For example, the audio output device 9 outputs a power-on sound.

The sub CPU 130a performs power failure recovery processing in step E250. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power restoration designation command has been received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and if the power restoration designation command has been received, processing is performed to execute a power failure restoration notification. Specifically, a power recovery notification command is sent to the display/audio control unit 140 to display a power recovery screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), For example, the audio output device 9 outputs a power restoration sound. In addition,

The sub CPU 130a performs customer waiting effect processing in step E300. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether or not a customer waiting state designation command has been received, and if a command has been received, performs processing to perform a customer waiting demonstration effect after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. conduct. Specifically, a customer waiting production command is sent to the display/audio control unit 140 to display a customer waiting demonstration screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). , the voice output device 9 outputs customer waiting demonstration sound. The details will be described later using FIG. 12.

The sub CPU 130a performs a gaming state update process in step E350. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether or not a gaming state designation command has been received, and if it has been received, updates the gaming state information stored in the sub-RAM 130c. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs pending information update processing in step E400. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a special symbol storage designation command or a normal symbol storage designation command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. Processing is performed to update the number of reserved 1st special symbols, the number of reserved 2nd special symbols, the number of reserved regular symbols, etc.

In step E500, the sub CPU 130a performs a prefetch effect process. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referred to to determine whether or not a starting opening prize designation command or a fluctuation pattern designation command is received, and if so, the icon changes as a look-ahead effect. Performs processing related to production, continuous preview production, and lamp change production. The details will be described later using FIG. 14.

The "icon change performance" is a type of pre-read preview performance that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be executed by changing the pending icon and the display mode of the icon. In this embodiment, an icon change effect for a pending icon may be referred to as a "hold icon change effect" and an icon change effect for the icon may be referred to as "the icon change effect."

The "continuous notice performance" is a type of advance notice performance that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be executed by executing a predetermined performance over one or more variable performances.
The "lamp change performance" is a type of advance notice performance that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be executed by changing the light emission mode of the winning slot lamp over one or more variable performances.

The sub CPU 130a performs special figure special electric production processing in step E600. Specifically, with reference to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, a performance symbol designation command, a special symbol variation pattern designation command, a special symbol confirmation command, a jackpot opening designation command, a round designation command, a jackpot ending designation command, etc. It is determined whether or not the received command is received, and if the received command is received, processing is performed to execute the effect corresponding to the received command.

In step E800, the sub CPU 130a performs a general figure and general electric display process. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c and determines whether or not a normal pattern designation command, a normal pattern fluctuation designation command, a normal pattern confirmation command, a winning opening designation command, a winning ending designation command, etc. If the received command is received, processing is performed to execute the effect corresponding to the received command.

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E850. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether an error designation command or an error cancellation designation command has been received, and if so, an error notification effect corresponding to the received error designation command is performed. , or terminate the error notification effect corresponding to the received error cancellation designation command.

The sub CPU 130a performs output control processing in step E900. Specifically, it performs processes such as outputting signals such as predetermined data and transmitting various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the display/audio control section 140 and the lamp/drive control section 150. .

In step E950, the sub CPU 130a restores the information saved in step E100 to the register of the sub CPU 130a, and ends the current timer interrupt process.

(Customer waiting performance processing by the performance control department)
The customer waiting performance processing of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 12. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the customer waiting performance processing in the performance control section 130m.

In step E300-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether a customer waiting state designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the customer waiting state designation command has not been received, the process moves to step E300-4, and if the customer waiting state designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step E300-2 until the start of the customer waiting demonstration performance. Select the demonstration standby time determination table (see FIG. 13) for determining the standby time of . Note that details of the demonstration standby time determination table will be described later.

In step E300-3, the sub CPU 130a determines the demo standby time and sets it in the demo standby timer. Specifically, with reference to the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 13, one demonstration standby time is determined from among a plurality of demonstration standby times based on the current gaming state and the current state.

In step E300-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is on standby for a demonstration. Specifically, it is determined whether a demonstration standby timer is set. If the demo is not on standby, the current customer waiting performance processing is terminated as not to execute the customer waiting demonstration performance, and if the demo is on standby, the demo waiting timer is updated by -1 in step E300-5. .

The sub CPU 130a determines whether the demo standby timer=0 in step E300-6. If the demo standby timer is not 0, it is assumed that the customer waiting demonstration performance has not yet been executed, and the current customer waiting performance processing is terminated.If the demo waiting timer = 0, the customer waiting demonstration performance is executed in step E300-7. The command is set in the transmission buffer and the current customer waiting performance process is ended. As a result, a customer waiting demonstration performance command is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and a customer waiting demonstration performance that appeals to the player to play the game is executed.

(Demo standby time determination table)
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a demonstration waiting time determination table that is referred to when determining the waiting time until the start of the customer waiting demonstration production.

In the demo standby time determination table shown in FIG. 13, the gaming state, the current state, and the selected demo standby time are associated with each other. Four types of demonstration standby times from 30 seconds to 70 seconds are set for the demonstration standby time in the normal gaming state, and four types of demonstration standby times from 35 seconds to 75 seconds are set for the demonstration standby time in the specific gaming state. is set.

The first feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is the demonstration standby time after the performance symbols are statically displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is turned on, and the demonstration symbols are displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is restored. The demonstration waiting time after the is displayed statically, the demonstration waiting time after the fluctuating display of the production symbol ends (the fluctuation time has elapsed) and the production symbol is statically displayed, and the demonstration symbol after the end of the customer waiting demo production. The difference is that the waiting time for the demonstration after it is displayed statically is different. By doing this, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time depending on the current state, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

The second feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is that the fluctuating display of the performance symbols ends (variation The point is that the demonstration waiting time is longer after the performance pattern is displayed statically after the time has elapsed. By doing this, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration performance at an appropriate time depending on the probability that the player is playing the game, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The third feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. The difference is that the demonstration pattern waits for a longer time after the performance symbols are displayed statically on the image display device. By doing this, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration performance at an appropriate time depending on the probability that the player is playing the game, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The fourth feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. The difference is that the waiting time for the demonstration after the design is statically displayed is longer. By doing this, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration performance at an appropriate time depending on the probability that the player is playing the game, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

A fifth feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is that the demonstration standby time is the shortest after the performance symbols are statically displayed after the end of the customer waiting demonstration performance. By doing so, it is possible to effectively increase the appeal of the game to players, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The sixth feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 13 is that each demonstration standby time in a specific gaming state (low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state) is longer than each demonstration waiting time in the normal gaming state. The point is that it is longer. By doing this, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demonstration performance at an appropriate time depending on the probability that the player is playing the game, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

(Pre-reading performance processing by the performance control unit)
Using FIG. 14, the pre-reading performance processing of the performance control unit 130m will be explained. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the pre-reading performance processing in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E510, the sub CPU 130a performs an icon change effect determination process for determining whether or not to perform the icon change effect, the mode of effect of the icon change effect, and the like. The details will be described later using FIG. 15.

In step E520, the sub CPU 130a determines the icon display mode for executing the icon change effect determined to be executed in the icon change effect determination process (changing the already displayed pending icon or the display mode of the icon). Perform update processing. The details will be described later using FIG. 18.

In step E530, the sub CPU 130a performs a continuous preview performance determination process for determining whether to execute the continuous preview performance, the presentation mode of the continuous preview performance, and the like. The details will be described later using FIG. 24.

In step E540, the sub CPU 130a performs a continuous preview performance execution process for executing the continuous preview performance determined to be executed in the continuous preview performance determination process. The details will be described later using FIG. 26.

In step E550, the sub CPU 130a performs a lamp change effect execution process to execute a lamp change effect (lights up the prize opening lamp NR in a light emission mode corresponding to the icon whose display mode has changed), and The prefetching performance processing ends. The details will be described later using FIG. 28.

(Icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit)
The icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 15. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing icon change performance determination processing in the performance control section 130m.

In step E510-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a starting opening winning designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the starting slot winning designation command is received, the process moves to step E510-2, and if the starting opening winning designation command is not received, the current icon change effect determination process is ended.

In step E510-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received starting opening winning designation command and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the production content (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E510-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current period is an executable period for the icon change effect. If it is the executable period for the icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-4, and if it is not the executable period for the icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-8.

The "executable period of icon change performance" refers to a case where a jackpot game is not being executed, an icon change performance is not being executed, or an icon change performance is not scheduled to be executed. Note that any one of the above three conditions or only two conditions may be provided. In addition, if the received starting opening winning designation command is based on winning in the first starting opening 45, it means that the normal gaming state is in effect, and the received starting opening winning designation command is based on winning in the second starting opening 47. If the game is based on the above, it may be provided that the game is in a specific gaming state (a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state), etc.

In step E510-4, the sub CPU 130a determines that all the preliminary determination results of the advance reservation (the reservation memory corresponding to the starting opening winning designation command received earlier) are below the normal reach, that is, all the preliminary determination results of the advance reservation are normal fluctuations. Determine whether there is shortening variation or normal reach. If all are below the normal reach, the process moves to step E510-5, and when all are not below the normal reach, the process moves to step E510-8.

In step E510-5, the sub CPU 130a acquires a random value for determining the icon display mode for determining the final display mode of the icon to be additionally displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and in step E510-6. , selects the icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 16) for determining the final display mode of the icon. Note that details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the final icon display mode in step E510-7. Specifically, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. , one final icon display mode is determined from among the plurality of icon final display modes.

In step E510-8, the sub CPU 130a determines the normal icon (CD icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E510-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined final icon display mode is a display mode (special icon) that executes an icon change effect. If the display mode is such that an icon change effect is executed, the process moves to step E510-10, and if the display mode is not a display mode that executes an icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-13.

In step E510-10, the sub CPU 130a selects a change scenario determination table (see FIG. 17) for determining a change scenario for the icon change effect. Note that details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from when the pending icon appears until it disappears.

In step E510-11, the sub CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, with reference to the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 17, the final icon display mode, the number of reserved memories of special symbols corresponding to the starting opening winning designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each change scenario are determined. Then, one change scenario is determined from among the plurality of change scenarios.

In step E510-12, the sub CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the icon display mode initially displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), from the determined change scenario, and displays the icon of the winning icon. The display command is set in the transmission buffer, and the current icon change effect determination process is completed. As a result, the icon display command is sent to the display/audio control section 140 and the lamp/drive control section 150, and the pending icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the winning icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). or a predetermined sound effect (the first winning sound when displayed as a normal icon, the second winning sound when displayed as a special icon) is output.

In step E510-13, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets it in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E510-14, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and ends the current icon change effect determination process. As a result, the icon display command is sent to the display/audio control section 140 and the lamp/drive control section 150, and the reserved icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command for the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). and a predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) will be output.

In addition, in the icon change effect determination process of this embodiment, the icon change effect (the pending icon change effect, the icon change effect) is executed when all preliminary determination results of advance hold are below the normal reach. The icon change performance may be executed when the preliminary determination result of advance suspension is that the ready-to-win performance is not performed, and the icon change performance may not be performed when the ready-to-reach performance is performed. In this way, the display mode of the hold icon will not change during the variable performance corresponding to the advance hold in which the reach effect is executed, and the hold icon will not change during the variable effect corresponding to the advance hold in which the reach effect is not executed. A change in the display mode will now occur, and the icon change performance will no longer impede the reach performance, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the preliminary determination result of advance hold includes one that performs a reach effect, the icon change effect may be executed; If there is no icon change effect, the icon change effect may be executed more easily (performed at a higher rate) than if it includes one that performs a reach effect.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table that is referred to when determining the icon final display mode.

The icon final display mode determination table associates the scheduled fluctuation pattern indicated by the starting opening prize designation command, the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the icon final display mode to be selected.

The final icon display mode includes a CD icon as a normal icon, a blue character icon, a red character icon, and a rainbow character as special icons that indicate the possibility of a jackpot (a jackpot game will be executed). An icon has been set.

The jackpot winning expectation for special icons is higher in the order of (CD icon <) blue character icon < red character icon < rainbow character icon, and the rainbow character icon is an icon that is guaranteed to be a jackpot. .

Here, the main feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 16 is that the selection rate of the icon final display mode is varied according to the scheduled variation pattern. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the planned variation pattern is SP reach or SPSP reach, the special icon is displayed at a higher rate than when the planned variation pattern is normal variation, shortened variation, or normal reach that does not result in reach. It will be selected.

In addition, in the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 16, in the case of a jackpot, the normal icon (CD icon) is not selected as the icon final display mode, but it may be selected. .

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a change scenario determination table that is referred to when determining a change scenario.

The change scenario determination table is associated with the icon final display mode, the number of reserved memories of special symbols corresponding to the starting opening winning designation command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the change scenario to be selected. , For reference, the preliminary variation in each change scenario and the update mode of the icon in the variation are described.

"Pre-variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on special figure judgment information stored earlier than the special figure judgment information corresponding to the newly received starting opening winning designation command. , "The said variation" is a variation display (variation performance) executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received starting opening winning designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the preliminary change (the pending icon change effect is not executed), but changes during the execution of the change (the icon change effect is executed). The scenario (for example, scenario 01, etc.) or the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of the preliminary variation (the pending icon change effect is executed), but does not change during the execution of the variation (the icon change effect is Scenarios (for example, Scenario 02, etc.) that are not executed) or the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of the preliminary variation and during the execution of the variation (pending icon change effect and the icon change effect is executed) ) scenario (for example, scenario 15, etc.) is set.

In addition, in the change scenario determination table of this embodiment, a scenario is determined in which the display mode of the icon is changed regardless of whether or not a reach effect (a reach other than a normal reach may be performed) is executed in advance variation. However, the display mode of the icon is changed by a change scenario determination table that uses as a determining factor whether or not a reach effect that suggests that a jackpot game may be executed in advance variation is executed. Alternatively, the scenario in which the When using such a change scenario determination table, the icon display mode does not change during the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed, and the icon display mode does not change during the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed. It is advisable to set various scenarios so that changes in the display mode occur. In addition, the display mode of the icon changes during the pre-variation in which a reach effect is executed, and the pre-variation in which a reach effect is not executed, but the reach effect is lower than during the pre-variation in which a reach effect is executed. Various scenarios may be set in such a way that changes in the display mode of the icon occur at a higher rate during the execution of the pre-variation in which the change is not executed.

(Icon display mode update process of production control unit)
The icon display mode update process of the production control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 18. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the icon display mode update process in the production control section 130m.

In step E520-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether a variation pattern designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the variation pattern designation command has been received, the process moves to step E520-2, and if the variation pattern designation command has not been received, the current icon display mode update process is ended.

In step E520-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon change scenario stored in the prefetch information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and in step E520-3, determines whether the icon change scenario is stored. . If the icon change scenario is not stored, it is assumed that a power restoration has occurred which clears the change scenario from the sub-RAM 130c, and the process moves to step E520-10; if the icon change scenario is stored, , the process moves to step E520-4.

In step E520-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not there is a pending icon whose display mode is to be changed (updated) in the current variable performance. If there is a pending icon that changes the display mode, the process moves to step E520-5, and if there is no pending icon that changes the display mode, the process moves to step E520-8.

In step E520-5, the sub CPU 130a selects a change pattern determination table for hold icons (see FIG. 19) for determining a change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the hold icon to be changed. Note that details of the change pattern determination table for pending icons will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines a pending icon change pattern in step E520-6. Specifically, with reference to the change pattern determination table for pending icons shown in FIG. 19, one of the multiple pending icon change patterns is selected based on the mode of pending icon change in the current variation performance and the selection rate (%). One pending icon change pattern is determined from the following.

In step E520-7, the sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined pending icon change pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the change production command is sent to the display/audio control section 140 and the lamp/drive control section 150, and the first image display device 70 changes the change timing according to the pending icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing. The display mode of the hold icon displayed on the (main liquid crystal) changes, or a predetermined sound effect (changing sound) is output.

In step E520-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether there is an icon whose display mode is to be changed (updated). If there is an icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process moves to step E520-9, and if there is no icon whose display mode is to be changed, the current icon display mode update process is ended.

In step E520-9, the sub CPU 130a selects from among the change pattern determination tables for a plurality of icons for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the icon to be changed in the current variation performance. A change pattern determination table (see FIGS. 20 and 21) for the icon corresponding to the change stage at which the icon changes is selected. Note that details of the change pattern determination table for the icon according to the change stage will be described later.

In step E520-10, the sub CPU 130a performs a power outage process to determine whether or not to execute the icon change effect as compensation for the icon change effect that may not have been executed due to the occurrence of power restoration. Select the icon change pattern determination table (FIG. 22). Note that the details of the icon change pattern determination table for use during power outage will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the icon change pattern in step E520-11. Specifically, with reference to the change pattern determination table for the selected icon, multiple icons are selected based on the mode of icon change in the current variation performance and the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern. One icon change pattern is determined from among the change patterns.

In step E520-12, the sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined icon change pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends the current icon display mode update process. As a result, a change production command is transmitted to the display/audio control section 140 and the lamp/drive control section 150, and the first image display device 70 changes the change timing according to the icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing. The display mode of the icon displayed on the (main liquid crystal) changes, or a predetermined sound effect (changing sound) is output.

As described above, according to the icon display mode update process shown in FIG. 18, if the power is restored while the icon change effect is being executed, and if the icon change effect is executed again in the fluctuating effect that starts after the power is restored, There is now. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the feeling of dissatisfaction caused by the termination of the icon change performance due to the occurrence of power restoration, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the icon display mode update process shown in FIG. 18, even if the icon change effect is executed again in the variation effect that starts after power is restored, the icon change effect is produced based on the current variation pattern. By newly determining the mode, the change scenario before the power restoration (the stage suggested before the power supply was stopped) will not be executed from the continuation of the change scenario. By doing this, it is possible to execute the icon change performance in accordance with the contents of the current variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the power is restored while the icon change effect is being executed, in the variable effect that starts after the power is restored, the pending memory (special figure judgment information) that was earlier than the held memory (special figure judgment information) that triggered the execution of the icon change effect will be The icon change performance may not be executed in the variation performance corresponding to the special figure determination information), but may be made possible to be performed with the variation performance corresponding to the pending memory that triggered the execution of the icon change performance.

(Change pattern determination table for pending icon)
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for hold icons that is referred to when determining a change pattern for hold icons.

The pending icon change pattern determination table is associated with the pending icon change mode in the current variation performance, the selection rate (%) of each pending icon change pattern, and the selected pending icon change pattern. For reference, the timing of occurrence of a pending icon change effect and the change stage in each pending icon change pattern are described.

The hold icon change pattern includes normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes with the output of a sound effect when the hold icon is shifted and displayed (at the start of variation) in response to the icon disappearing. , normal change pattern 02 in which the display mode of the pending icon changes while changing with the output of a sound effect, and the display of the icon as a character appears and an action effect that acts on the icon from the character as a starting point is performed. A character action change pattern 01 in which the aspect changes, and a change notification pattern indicating that the display form of the icon changes as a result of the fluctuation effect are temporarily stopped and displayed, and an effect effect that acts on the pending icon using the change notification pattern as a starting point. A symbol effect change pattern 01 is set in which the display mode of the pending icon changes as a result of this change.

The timing at which the pending icon change effect occurs is classified in relation to the progress state of the variable effect: when the variable effect starts (at the start of the change), when the change effect is being executed (during change), and when the change effect occurs during the change effect. There are times when the 70a temporarily stops ((temporarily) stopped).

The change stage of the pending icon includes 1UP where the jackpot winning expectation level changes to a display mode one level higher (for example, a change from a CD icon to a blue character icon, a change from a blue character icon to a red character icon), and a jackpot change. 2UP (for example, change from CD icon to red character icon) is set to change the display mode to a level two levels higher in the winning expectation level.

Note that, although the change effect generation timing of the pending icon is set to the above three timings, it is not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it may be provided that a variable performance is being executed (during variation) until a reach is established, a normal reach is being executed, an SP (SPSP) reach is being executed, etc.

(Change pattern determination table for the icon)
20 and 21 are diagrams showing change pattern determination tables for the icon that are referred to when determining the change pattern of the icon, and FIG. 20 shows the change pattern determination table for the icon that changes the display mode of the icon by one step. FIG. 21 is a table that is referred to when changing the display mode of the icon in two steps.

The change pattern determination table for the icon is associated with the mode of the icon change in the current variation performance, the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern, and the icon change pattern to be selected. For reference, the timing at which the icon change effect occurs and the change stage in each icon change pattern are described.

The icon change patterns include normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the pending icon changes at the start of the variation accompanied by the output of a sound effect, and normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the pending icon changes during the variation accompanied by the output of a sound effect. A change pattern 02 and a character effect change pattern 01 are set in which a character appears and an action effect is performed that acts on the icon starting from the character and the display mode of the icon changes.

The timing at which the change effect of the icon occurs is classified in relation to the progress state of the change effect, and is classified as when the change effect is started (at the start of change), during the execution of the change effect (during change), and when the change effect is in progress. There are times when the 70a temporarily stops ((temporarily) stopped).

The icon change stage includes 1UP, where the jackpot winning expectation level changes to a display mode one level higher (for example, a change from a CD icon to a blue character icon, a change from a blue character icon to a red character icon), and a jackpot change. 2UP is set to change the display mode to a display mode two levels higher in winning expectation (for example, change from a CD icon to a red character icon, or from a blue character icon to a rainbow character icon).

In addition, in the change pattern determination table for the icon of this embodiment, the symbol effect change pattern 01 is not selected, but may be selected. For example, in a fluctuating performance that performs a pseudo-continuous performance, when the temporary stop display of the performance symbol 70a before the pseudo-variation is performed, the change notification symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed.

"Pseudo continuous performance" is a fluctuating display of performance symbols as if multiple times in response to a jackpot determination based on winning (ball landing) in one starting hole (first starting hole 45, second starting hole 47). In order to make it appear as if the game has been executed, all prizes will be awarded within the special figure fluctuation time determined for each winning (ball entering) into the starting hole (first starting hole 45, second starting hole 47). This is a special form of fluctuating display of the performance symbol in which a re-fluctuation display in which the performance symbol 70a temporarily stops and then starts fluctuating again is performed once or multiple times.

In addition, although the change effect generation timing of the said icon was set to the above-mentioned two timings, it is not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it may be provided that a variable performance is being executed (during variation) until a reach is established, a normal reach is being executed, an SP (SPSP) reach is being executed, etc.

(Icon change pattern determination table for power outage)
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the icon change pattern determination table for power outage, which is referred to when determining the change pattern of the icon.

The icon change pattern determination table for power outage includes the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern specification command, the final display mode of the icon, the selection rate (%) of the icon change pattern, and the selected icon. The final display mode of and the icon change pattern to be selected are associated with each other, and for reference, the timing of occurrence of the change effect of the icon in each icon change pattern and the change stage are described.

Note that each of the icon change patterns, the timing of occurrence of change effects for the icon, and the change stages of the icon are the same as those explained in the change pattern determination table for the icon described above, so their explanations are omitted here. do.

(Relationship between the display mode of the pending icon and the timing of occurrence of change effects and the frequency of occurrence of change effects)
FIG. 23(a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the display mode of the pending icon and the timing of generation of change effects.

When the display mode of the pending icon changes to a blue character icon, the change effect occurs more frequently at the frame update timing in response to the reception of a predetermined command than at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the fluctuation pattern designation command. ing.

In addition, when the display mode of the pending icon changes to a blue character icon, the change effect occurs more frequently at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command than at the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command. It's getting lower.

In other words, when the icon change effect is executed at the frame update timing according to the reception of a predetermined command, the icon change effect is better than when the icon change effect is executed at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the fluctuation pattern designation command. It can be said that the display mode of the icon changes easily to a blue character icon.

On the other hand, when the display mode of the pending icon changes to a red character icon, the change effect occurs more frequently at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command than at the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command. It's getting expensive.

In addition, when the display mode of the pending icon changes to a red character icon, the change effect occurs more frequently at the frame update timing in response to receiving a predetermined command than at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the fluctuation pattern designation command. It's getting lower.

In other words, when the icon change effect is executed at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, the icon change effect is better than when the icon change effect is executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command. It can be said that the display mode of the icon changes easily to a red character icon. In addition, this predetermined command is a starting opening prize designation command or a fluctuation pattern designation command.

Specifically, the change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to reception of a predetermined command is when a game ball enters the starting port (first starting port 45, second starting port 47) and a pending icon is displayed. These are a change effect (change effect at the time of prize winning) in which a pending icon is displayed as a special icon at the timing when the change is made, and a normal change pattern 01.
Further, the change effects that occur at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command are normal change pattern 02, character effect change pattern 01, and symbol effect change pattern 01.

Since the relationship between the pending icon display mode and the change effect generation frequency is as described above, the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specification command is better than the predetermined command. Since the change effect that changes to a red character icon with a higher expectation of winning a jackpot occurs more frequently than the frame update timing in response to the reception of the change effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the change effect occurrence timing, improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, since the change effect that changes to a blue character icon occurs more frequently at the frame update timing in response to receiving a predetermined command than at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, the change effect in which the character icon changes to blue occurs more frequently, so the change effect occurs earlier. In addition, although it is difficult to change to a red character icon, which has a high expectation of winning a jackpot, it is easy to change to a blue character icon, so it is possible to draw the player's attention to the subsequent fluctuating performance, and improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

(Relationship between change performance type and change performance occurrence timing and change performance occurrence frequency 1)
FIG. 23(b) is a diagram showing the relationship 1 of the frequency of occurrence of change effects between the type of change effects and the timing of occurrence of change effects.

When a change effect occurs at a frame update timing in response to reception of a predetermined command, the change effect occurrence frequency is higher for the pending icon change effect than for the icon change effect.

Further, when a change effect occurs at the frame update timing in response to reception of a predetermined command, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is lower for the icon change effect than for the pending icon change effect.

Since the relationship between the change performance type and the change performance occurrence frequency is as described above, the hold icon is more likely to change at the early stage of the change performance, so the game It is possible to keep people's expectations for a jackpot game for a long period of time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, this predetermined command is a starting opening prize designation command or a fluctuation pattern designation command.

(Relationship between change performance type and change performance occurrence timing and change performance occurrence frequency 2)
FIG. 23(c) is a diagram showing the relationship 2 of the frequency of occurrence of change effects between the type of change effects and the timing of occurrence of change effects.

When a change effect occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is higher for the icon change effect than for the pending icon change effect.

Furthermore, when a change effect occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after reception of the change pattern designation command, the change effect occurrence frequency of the pending icon change effect is lower than that of the icon change effect.

Since the relationship between the change performance type and the change performance generation frequency is as described above, the icon is more likely to change during the late period of the change performance, so the game It is possible to improve the interest of the game by keeping the player's expectations for the jackpot game until the late period of the variable performance.

(Relationship between icon display mode and notification sound when icon occurs (changes))
FIG. 23(d) is a diagram showing the relationship between the icon display mode and the notification sound when the icon occurs (changes).

When a CD icon is generated as a hold icon, the first generated notification sound is output as the notification sound when the icon is generated, and when a hold icon and a blue character icon are generated (changed to) as the icon, A second generation notification sound (change notification sound) is output as a notification sound when an icon occurs (changes), and when a red character icon is generated (changed to) as a pending icon or the relevant icon, an icon generation (change) is output. When the icon changes to a rainbow character icon, the fourth notification sound (change notification sound) is output as the notification sound when the icon changes. is set to be output.

In this embodiment, different notification sounds are set for each of the plurality of icon display modes (4 types), but the notification sound when a CD icon is generated, the blue character icon, and the red character icon are different. , and a change notification sound when the icon changes to a rainbow character icon.Alternatively, the notification sound is not output when the CD icon occurs, and the notification sound is output only when the icon changes to one of the modes. It may also be output. Further, for the rainbow character icon that is certain to be a jackpot, a dedicated change notification sound may be provided and there may be three types.

(Continuous preview production decision processing by production control unit)
The continuous preview performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing continuous preview performance determination processing in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E530-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a starting opening winning designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the starting slot winning designation command has been received, the process moves to step E530-2, and if the starting opening winning designation command has not been received, the current continuous preview performance determining process is ended.

In step E530-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received starting slot winning designation command and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the presentation content (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E530-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current period is an executable period for the continuous preview performance. If it is the executable period for continuous preview performances, the process moves to step E530-4, and if it is not the executable period for continuous preview performances, it is assumed that the continuous preview performances will not be performed, and the process moves to step E530-6. .

The "executable period for continuous notice performance" means a case where a jackpot game is not being executed, a continuous notice performance is not being executed, or a continuous notice performance is not scheduled to be executed. Note that any one of the above three conditions or only two conditions may be provided. In addition, if the received starting opening winning designation command is based on winning in the first starting opening 45, it means that the normal gaming state is in effect, and the received starting opening winning designation command is based on winning in the second starting opening 47. If the game is based on the above, it may be provided that the game is in a specific gaming state (a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state), etc.

In step E530-4, the sub CPU 130a selects the preview scenario determination table (see FIG. 25) for determining the preview scenario of the continuous preview performance. Note that details of the advance notice scenario determination table will be described later. This preview scenario indicates the transition of the preview performance over one or more variable performances.

In step E530-5, the sub CPU 130a determines a preview scenario and sets it in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c, and ends the current continuous preview performance determination process. Specifically, with reference to the preview scenario determination table shown in FIG. 25, the number of reserved memories of special symbols corresponding to the starting slot winning designation command, the type of starting slot winning designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each preview scenario are determined. Based on this, one advance notice scenario is determined from among a plurality of advance notice scenarios (including non-forecast scenarios). Note that details of the advance notice scenario determination table will be described later.

In step E530-6, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-previous scenario in which the continuous preview performance is not executed, sets it in the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the pending storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c, and ends the current continuous preview performance determination process. do.

(Notice scenario determination table)
FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a preview scenario determination table that is referred to when determining a preview scenario for a continuous preview performance.

The preview scenario determination table includes the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the starting slot winning designation command, the scheduled fluctuation pattern indicated by the starting slot winning designation command, the selection rate (%) of each preview scenario, and the selected preview scenario. are associated with each other, and for reference, the advance variation in each preview scenario and the performance mode of the preview performance in the variation are described.

The preview scenario includes a non-previous scenario (for example, scenario 00) in which the preview effect is not executed, in which an effect image is displayed around the effect image 70a at the start of the variation effect, and an effect image is displayed around the effect image 70a at the start of the preliminary variation. is not displayed, but an effect image is displayed around the effect image 70a at the start of the variation (for example, scenario 01), an effect image is displayed around the effect image 70a at the start of the preliminary variation, and at the start of the variation. A scenario (for example, scenario 02, etc.) in which the image is displayed is set.

(Continuous preview performance execution processing by the performance control unit)
The continuous notice performance execution process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 26. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing continuous preview performance execution processing in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E540-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether a variation pattern designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the fluctuation pattern designation command is received, the process moves to step E540-2, and if the fluctuation pattern designation command is not received, the current continuous preview performance execution process is ended.

In step E540-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the preview scenario of the continuous preview performance stored in the prefetch information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and in step E540-3, determines whether the preview scenario is stored. . If the migration advance notice scenario is stored, the process moves to step E540-4; if the advance notice scenario is not stored, it is assumed that a power restoration has occurred that will clear the advance notice scenario from the sub-RAM 130c, and the process proceeds to step E540-4. Process it on E540-6.

In step E540-4, the sub CPU 130a determines a continuous notice pattern (presentation mode) according to the notice scenario, and in step E540-5, sets a continuous notice performance command corresponding to the determined continuous notice pattern in the transmission buffer. . As a result, a continuous notice production command is sent to the display/audio control section 140 and the lamp/drive control section 150, and a continuous notice production is executed according to the continuous notice pattern, so that when the variable production starts, the production pattern 70a An effect image is displayed around the , or a predetermined sound effect is output.

In step E540-6, the sub CPU 130a creates an alternative notice pattern determination table (Fig. 27) to determine the notice pattern. Specifically, the selected alternative notice pattern determination table is referred to, and one alternative is selected from among the plurality of alternative notice patterns based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern specification command and the selection rate (%) of each alternative notice pattern. Determine the notice pattern. Note that details of the alternative notice pattern determination table will be described later.

"Alternative preview performance" is a performance to compensate for the continuous preview performance that may not be executed due to the occurrence of power restoration (power outage), and is a performance that is performed to compensate for the continuous preview performance that may not be executed due to the occurrence of power restoration (power outage). This is a type of preview performance that makes the player expect that a jackpot game will be executed by displaying one of these.

In step E540-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the determined alternative notice pattern is one for executing an alternative notice effect. If the alternative notice performance is not to be executed, the current continuous notice performance execution process is terminated as not to execute the alternative notice performance, and if the alternative notice performance is to be executed, the process is executed according to the alternative notice pattern. An alternative preview performance command is set in the transmission buffer, and the current continuous preview performance execution process is ended. As a result, an alternative preview production command is sent to the display/audio control section 140 and the lamp/drive control section 150, and an alternative notice production is executed according to the alternative notice pattern. is displayed, or a predetermined sound effect is output.

As described above, according to the continuous preview performance execution process shown in FIG. 26, if power is restored (power outage) occurs while the continuous preview performance is being executed, the continuous preview performance is restarted in the variable performance that starts after the power is restored. Instead, an alternative preview performance that is different from the continuous preview performance may be executed. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the feeling of dissatisfaction caused by the termination of the continuous preview performance due to the occurrence of power restoration (power cutoff), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Alternative notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 27 is a diagram showing an alternative notice pattern determination table that is referred to when determining an alternative notice pattern.

In the alternative notice pattern determination table, the type of variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern specification command, the selection rate (%) of each alternative notice pattern, and the selected alternative notice pattern are associated, and each alternative notice is used as a reference. The performance aspect of the pattern is described.

The alternative preview patterns include pattern 00 in which the alternative preview effect is not executed, pattern 01 in which mini character A is displayed on the image display device, pattern 02 in which mini character B is displayed on the image display device, and pattern 02 in which mini character C is displayed on the image display device. A pattern 03 in which the mini-character D is displayed on the image display device, and a pattern 04 in which the mini-character D is displayed on the image display device are set.

The jackpot winning expectation for the mini-characters increases in the order of mini-character A<mini-character B<mini-character C<mini-character D, and mini-character D is a mini-character that is guaranteed to win the jackpot.

The first feature of the alternative notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 27 is that a variation pattern with a high expectation of winning a jackpot is more likely to be used as an alternative notice effect than a variation pattern with a low expectation of winning a jackpot. One point is that the pattern is easy to determine. By doing this, the more likely it is that a continuous preview performance was being executed before the power is restored, the more likely the alternative preview performance will be executed, reducing the feeling of dissatisfaction caused by the end of the continuous preview performance. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the alternative notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 27 is that when the variable performance corresponding to the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous notice performance is executed, the trigger for the execution of the continuous notice performance is One point is that an alternative notice pattern in which an alternative notice performance is executed is easier to be determined than when a variable performance corresponding to a hold that has not triggered the execution of a continuous notice performance before the hold is executed. By doing this, after the power is restored, it becomes easier to understand which variable performance corresponds to the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous notice performance, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game. .

In addition, in the variable performance that is executed after the power is restored, it is decided whether or not to execute the jackpot preview performance (line preview performance, step-up preview performance) described later, so the execution of the jackpot preview performance The alternative preview presentation may not be executed by increasing the probability higher than usual.

Even in this case, if the variable performance corresponding to the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous preview performance is executed, it is better to perform the execution trigger of the continuous preview performance before the hold that triggered the execution of the continuous preview performance. It is preferable to make it easier to execute a jackpot preview performance than when a variable performance corresponding to a hold that has not been achieved is executed. In this way, after the power is restored, it becomes easier to understand which variable performance corresponds to the suspension that triggered the execution of the continuous notice performance, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Lamp change effect execution processing of the effect control unit)
The lamp change effect execution process of the effect control unit 130m will be described using FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the lamp change effect execution process in the effect control section 130m.

In step E550-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether an icon change scenario is stored in the prefetch information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. If the icon change scenario is stored, it is assumed that an icon change effect is to be executed and the process moves to step E550-2; if the icon change scenario is not stored, the change scenario is stored from the sub-RAM 130c. The process moves to step E550-6 on the assumption that a power supply recovery that results in clearing has occurred.

In step E550-2, the sub CPU 130a determines whether it is time for the icon to change. If it is the icon change timing, the process moves to step E550-3, and if it is not the icon change timing, the current lamp change effect execution process is ended.

In step E550-3, the sub CPU 130a sets a lamp effect command corresponding to the color after the icon change in the transmission buffer. As a result, a lamp effect command is sent to the lamp/drive control unit 150, and a lamp change effect is executed by changing the lighting mode (emission color, lighting/blinking) of the winning slot lamp NR in response to the color change of the icon. will be done.

In step E550-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether a lamp changing flag indicating that a lamp changing effect is being executed is set in the sub RAM 130c. If the lamp changing flag is set, the current lamp change performance execution process ends; if the lamp changing flag is not set, the lamp changing flag is set, and the current lamp change performance is executed. End the execution process.

In step E550-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the lamp changing flag is set in the sub RAM 130c. If the lamp changing flag is set, the process moves to step E550-7, and if the lamp changing flag is not set, the current lamp changing effect execution process is ended.

In step E550-7, the sub CPU 130a clears the lamp changing flag set in the sub RAM 130c, and in step E550-8, sets a lamp effect end command in the transmission buffer, and executes the current lamp change effect execution process. finish. As a result, the lamp effect command is transmitted to the lamp/drive control section 150, and the lamp change effect that was being executed is ended.

As described above, according to the lamp change effect execution process shown in FIG. 28, the lamp change is performed by changing the light emitting mode (emission color, lighting/blinking) of the winning opening lamp NR in response to the change of the icon in the icon change effect. It is designed to perform a performance. By doing this, the presentation effect can be enhanced by the synergistic effect with the icon change presentation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the lamp change effect execution process shown in FIG. 28, unlike the icon change effect or the continuous notice effect, even if the power is restored while the lamp change effect is being executed, the lamp change effect is executed again. The system is designed to prevent users from playing the game or performing alternative preview effects. By doing this, it is possible to ensure the rarity of the lamp change effect while reducing the control burden, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that when power is restored, such as in the icon change performance, the lamp change performance may be executed again in the variable performance that is started after the power is restored. In this case, it is preferable to perform the lamp change effect so as to correspond to the icon change effect that is started after the power is restored.

In addition, instead of executing the lamp change effect in response to the icon change effect, the final lighting mode of the prize opening lamp NR, the light emission scenario from the preliminary change to the relevant change, etc. are determined by lottery and the lamp change effect is executed. You can do it like this.

(Jackpot preview production decision process by production control department)
The jackpot preview performance determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the jackpot preview effect determination process in the effect control unit 130m, and this process includes the variable effect pattern determination process (determines the variable effect pattern based on the variable pattern designation command) in the above-mentioned special figure/special electric effect effect process. processing).

In step E650-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the variable performance pattern to be executed in the current variable performance, and in step E650-2, the sub CPU 130a creates a preview pattern of a jackpot preview performance that makes the player expect that a jackpot game will be executed. The jackpot notice determination table (see FIG. 30) for determining the winning notice pattern is selected, and the notice pattern is determined. Specifically, with reference to the jackpot notice determination table shown in FIG. 30, multiple notice patterns (non-announcement pattern ), one notice pattern is determined. The details of the jackpot notice determination table will be described later.

In step E650-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the preview pattern is for executing a dialogue preview effect. If the preview pattern is to execute a dialogue preview performance, the process moves to step E650-4, and if it is not a preview pattern to execute a dialogue preview performance, the process moves to step E650-6.

"Speech preview performance" means that in response to the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period that occurs during the variable performance, a dialogue image that suggests the expectation of a jackpot is displayed on the image display device, and a voice output device This is a type of jackpot preview performance in which a voice corresponding to the dialogue image is output from 9. Specifically, lines with relatively high expectations are displayed when a jackpot game is executed (high expectation of jackpot) than when a jackpot game is not executed. When a relatively highly anticipated line is displayed, the production button 17 is configured to vibrate for, for example, only one second.

In step E650-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a dialogue pattern determination table (not shown) for determining a dialogue pattern in the dialogue preview performance, and determines the dialogue pattern. Specifically, with reference to the dialogue pattern determination table, one dialogue pattern is selected from among multiple dialogue patterns based on the jackpot lottery result, the type of variable effect pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each dialogue pattern. decide.

In step E650-5, the sub CPU 130a sets a dialogue preview production command corresponding to the dialogue pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, a line preview production command is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and a line preview production according to the dialog pattern is executed, so that a dialog image is displayed on the first image display device 70. is displayed, or the audio output device 9 outputs audio corresponding to the dialogue image.

In step E650-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the preview pattern is for executing a step-up preview effect. If the notice pattern is to execute a step-up notice performance, the process moves to step E650-7, and if it is not a notice pattern to execute a step-up notice performance, the current jackpot notice performance determination process is ended.

"Step-up preview performance" is a jackpot preview performance that executes step performances in a predetermined order until reaching any of multiple steps (stages) from the first step (first stage) to the final step (final stage). It is one of a kind. Specifically, more step performances are more likely to be executed when a jackpot game is executed (the jackpot expectation level is high) than when a jackpot game is not executed.

In step E650-7, the sub CPU 130a selects a step-up pattern determination table (not shown) for determining a step-up pattern in the step-up preview performance, and determines the step-up pattern. Specifically, with reference to the step-up pattern determination table, one step-up pattern is selected from among multiple step-up patterns based on the jackpot lottery result, the type of variable effect pattern, and the selection rate (%) of each step-up pattern. Determine step-up pattern.

In step E650-8, the sub CPU 130a sets a step-up preview performance command corresponding to the step-up pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends the current jackpot preview performance determination process. As a result, a step-up notice production command is transmitted to the display/audio control section 140 and the lamp/drive control section 150, and a step-up notice production according to the step-up pattern is executed. A step image is displayed, and a sound effect corresponding to the step image is output from the audio output device 9.

(Jackpot notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a jackpot preview effect determination process that is referred to when determining a notice pattern for the jackpot preview effect.

The jackpot lottery result, the type of variable effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each notice pattern, and the selected notice pattern are associated with the jackpot notice determination table.

The notice patterns include a notice pattern with no notice, a notice pattern with a dialogue notice performance, and a notice pattern with a step-up notice performance. The expectation level of winning the jackpot is higher when the up preview effect is executed.

(Main processing of the overall control unit)
The main processing of the overall control unit 141 will be explained using FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the overall control unit 141.

When power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the central CPU 142, and the central CPU 142 performs the following main processing.

First, the supervising CPU 142 sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts in step T1, and performs initialization processing in step T2. Specifically, it reads the main processing program from the general ROM 143, initializes flags, etc. stored in the general RAM 144, and performs processing such as initial settings.

In step T3, the supervising CPU 142 sets interrupt permission to permit timer interrupts, and in step T4, refers to the reception buffer of the supervising RAM 144 to determine whether or not a production instruction command has been received from the production control unit 130m. If it has not been received, the process moves to step T7, and if it has been received, in step T5, an animation pattern is determined and set from the type of animation group corresponding to the received production instruction command. Performs animation pattern setting processing.

Note that the performance instruction commands include a customer waiting performance command, an icon display command, a changing performance command, a variable performance pattern command, a symbol stop pattern command, an opening performance pattern command, a round performance pattern command, an ending performance pattern command, etc.

An animation group also includes the types of objects that make up the effect image, the scene (timing) and wait frame (display time) in which the effect image is displayed, target data (sprite image identification number, transfer source address, etc.), One or more animation patterns whose information specifies (specifies) parameters (sprite image display position, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, information specifying the image display device for displaying the effect image, etc. are bundled. It is a group formed by

The types of animation groups include, for example, a production pattern group for displaying the animation of the production pattern 70a, an icon group for displaying a pending icon or animation of the icon, and a production pattern group for displaying a variable production animation such as a background or a character. Examples include a variable performance group, a preview performance group for displaying animations such as previews, and a special game performance group for displaying animations of special game performances.

In step T6, the supervising CPU 142 performs a sound setting process to determine and set a sound pattern from the type of sound group corresponding to the received production instruction command, and in step T7, updates the production image to be displayed on the image display device. It is determined whether there is a frame switching flag indicating that it is frame update timing (to draw a new effect image), and if there is no frame switching flag, the process moves to step T4, and the frame switching flag is If so, the frame switching flag is cleared in step T8.

In step T9, the supervising CPU 142 generates a display list made up of a group of drawing control commands, and performs display list generation/output processing to output the generated display list to the image control unit 145 (VDP).

Here, the display list is image shaping information for molding the effect image to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and includes 1 unit, Alternatively, it is generated for each frame of multiple units (frame update timing), and in this embodiment, the display list is generated for each frame.

Specifically, since the animation scene information (address) is updated for each set animation pattern in the animation control process described later, drawing control commands are set according to the contents of the animation scene information for each set animation pattern. A display list for one frame corresponding to the current number of frames is generated. Note that the drawing control commands are set in order from the anime pattern of the lowest priority anime group to the anime pattern of the highest priority anime group according to the priority order (drawing order) set for the anime group to which each anime pattern belongs. However, the reverse is also possible.

In step T10, the supervising CPU 142 performs drawing command processing to instruct the image control unit 145 (VDP) to draw an effect image based on the output display list. By performing this drawing command processing, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the effect image based on the display list on the drawing frame buffer, and transfers the effect image drawn on the display frame buffer to the first image display device. 70 (main liquid crystal) and a second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal).

In step T11, the supervising CPU 142 generates a sound list composed of a group of sound control commands, and performs a sound list generation/output process of outputting the generated sound list to the audio control unit 148.

Here, the sound list is audio output information for specifying sounds (BGM, sound effects, etc.) such as audio data and music data to be output from the audio output device 9, and is used when outputting new sounds. It is generated based on the drawing frame.

In step T12, the supervising CPU 142 performs a sound output command process to instruct the audio control unit 148 to output a sound based on the output sound list. By performing this sound output command processing, the audio control unit 148 causes the audio output device 9 to output a sound based on the sound list.

Therefore, the output of various sounds from the audio output device 9 is started in synchronization (synchronization) with the frame update timing by the image control unit 145 (VDP), and also in synchronization (synchronization) with the frame update timing. Output from the audio output device 9 is ended.

Note that although the audio output device 9 starts outputting various sounds in synchronization with the frame update timing, the audio output device 9 starts outputting various sounds so as not to synchronize with the frame update timing. may be stopped, or vice versa.

In step T13, the supervising CPU 142 performs animation control processing to update animation scene information (address) for each set animation pattern in preparation for creating a display list for the next frame, and then performs processing in step T4. Thereafter, the processes from step T4 to step T13 are repeated in a loop.

(General control unit command reception interrupt processing)
The command reception interrupt processing of the overall control unit 141 will be explained using FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the command reception interrupt process of the overall control unit 141, and this process is executed by receiving the production instruction command transmitted from the production control unit 130m.

In step T20, the overall CPU 142 performs a command reception process to receive the production instruction command transmitted from the production control unit 130m. Specifically, a process is performed to store the performance instruction command transmitted from the performance control unit 130m in the reception buffer of the general RAM 144, and the current command reception interrupt process is ended.

(V blank interrupt processing of general control unit)
The V blank interrupt processing of the overall control unit 141 will be explained using FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the V blank interrupt process of the general control unit 141, and the V blank interrupt process is performed when the image control unit 145 (VDP) finishes displaying one frame of effect image (1/30 This is executed every time a V blank signal is received (1/30 second = approximately 33 ms), which is transmitted every 1/30 second (approximately 33 ms).

In step T30, the supervising CPU 142 performs a counter update process of updating various counters (scene switching counter, wait frame counter, frame counter, etc.) by a predetermined number (for example, adding "1"), and in step T31, the image control unit 145 ( A frame buffer switching command process is performed to instruct the VDP (VDP) to switch between the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area of the VRAM 147.

As a result, each time the V blank interrupt processing is executed every 1/30 seconds (approximately 33 ms), the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are converted into a "drawing frame buffer" and a "display frame buffer". It will alternate between.

In step T32, the supervising CPU 142 sets a frame switching flag indicating that the drawing (display) frame has been switched, and ends the current V blank interrupt process. Since this frame switching flag is referred to in step T7, the processes in steps T8 to T13 are executed every time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

(Timing chart of change performance when winning a prize)
34 and 35 are timing charts showing various timings when the display mode of the first reservation icon is displayed (changed to) as a blue character icon when a game ball enters the first starting port 45.

The timing of T1 is the 280th frame after the start of the fluctuation performance, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period in which the normal fluctuation of the performance symbol 70a is performed. At this timing, drawing of image data b (background images, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the drawing of image data a to the second frame buffer is started. Display on the image display device starts, and the image display device enters a state in which the normal variable effect display screen a is displayed.

The timing of T2 is a timing in the middle of the 280th frame after the start of the variable effect. At this timing, based on the game ball winning in the first starting opening 45, a starting opening winning designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the performance control unit 130m.

The timing of T3 is the 281st frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, it has been decided that the first pending icon will be displayed as a blue character icon when winning a prize, but the blue character icon is not displayed on the image display device, and the second occurrence notification sound is output from the audio output device 9. output is not started either.

Also, at timing T3, drawing of image data c (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image that had been drawn to the first frame buffer is started. The display of data b on the image display device is started, and the image display device enters a state in which the normal variable effect display screen b is displayed.

The timing of T4 is the 282nd frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data d (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the drawing of the image data c that had been drawn to the second frame buffer is started. Display on the image display device is started, the normal variable effect display screen c (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and output of the second occurrence notification sound is started from the audio output device 9. . The timing of T4 corresponds to the frame update timing in response to reception of a predetermined command.

The timing T5 is the 283rd frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of image data e (background images, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image data d drawn to the first frame buffer is The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variable effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second occurrence notification sound from the audio output device 9 is continued. Ru.

The timing of T6 is the 284th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data f (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the drawing of the image data e that had been drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variable effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second occurrence notification sound from the audio output device 9 is continued. Ru.

The timing T7 is the 296th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, variable effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image of the image data g that had been drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display on the display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen g (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second occurrence notification sound from the audio output device 9 is continued.

The timing of T8 is the 297th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, the output of the second occurrence notification sound that has been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped. In addition, drawing of image data i (background image, variable effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image display device of the image data h that had been drawn to the first frame buffer The image display device starts displaying the normal variable effect display screen h (blue character icon display).

The timing T9 is the 298th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of image data j (background image, variable effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and image display of image data i that had been drawn to the second frame buffer is started. Display on the device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal variable effect display screen i (blue character icon display) is displayed.

In this way, the output of the second occurrence notification sound is started from the audio output device 9 in synchronization with (in synchronization with) the frame update timing when the blue character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Compared to the case where the frame update timing between the display of the blue character icon and the output of the second occurrence notification sound is shifted, it is possible to reduce the discomfort felt by the player and improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, whereas the output of the second occurrence notification sound started in synchronization with (synchronized with) the frame update timing when the blue character icon is displayed, the blue character icon is erased and the second occurrence notification sound is output. Since this is done at a different frame update timing than when the blue character icon is stopped, the output of the second occurrence notification sound can be stopped without being constrained by the timing of erasing the blue character icon, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

(Example of change performance when winning a prize)
FIG. 36 is a diagram illustrating an example of the effect when the display mode of the first reservation icon is displayed (changed to) as a blue character icon when a game ball enters the first starting port 45.

As shown in FIG. 36(a), the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a variable manner in a state where the first pending icon and the second pending icon are not displayed, that is, in a state where no pending memory is stored. A normal variation effect is being executed.

Here, based on the fact that the game ball has won in the first starting hole 45, a starting hole winning designation command is sent from the main control board 110 to the production control section 130m, and an icon change production determination process is executed, and as a change scenario. It is assumed that "Scenario 02" (displaying the first pending icon as a blue character icon when winning a prize) is determined.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 36(b), in response to the game ball winning in the first starting port 45, the first holding icon (blue character Icon) H11 is displayed, and the second occurrence notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 for 0.5 seconds.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36(c), the effect pattern 70a that has been displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed in the combination (here, "234") indicating that it is a loss, and is displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon (CD icon) TH that was previously displayed is deleted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 36(d), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the first pending icon (blue character icon) H11 of the first display section 70B1 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C. be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 36(e), while the effect pattern 70a of "2" is stopped (temporarily stopped) displayed in the left and right variable display areas of the effect pattern 70a that was being displayed in a variable manner, the center variable display area is A reach effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a variable manner.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36(f), the "3" effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed in the central variable display area, thereby ending the ready-to-win effect and ending the variable display. Here, since the variable display has ended, the icon (blue character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

Although not shown, BGM, sound effects, etc. are output from the audio output device 9 during the variable performance. The same applies to subsequent FIGS. 39, 42, 43, 46, and 47.

(Timing chart of normal change pattern 01)
37 and 38 are timings showing various timings when the normal change pattern 01 is determined as the pending icon change pattern and the display mode of the first pending icon is changed to the blue character icon in the icon display mode update process. It is a chart.

The timing of T1 is the 600th frame after the start of the variable performance, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol stop period in which the performance symbols 70a are stopped and displayed. At this timing, drawing of image data b (background images, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the drawing of image data a to the second frame buffer is started. Display on the image display device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the stop effect display screen a is displayed.

The timing of T2 is a timing in the middle of the 600th frame after the start of the variable effect. At this timing, a variation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the production control section 130m.

The timing of T3 is the 601st frame after the start of the variable performance, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol stop period. At this timing, it has been decided to execute the normal change pattern 01 that changes the first pending icon to a blue character icon, but the blue character icon is not displayed on the image display device, and the second signal is generated from the audio output device 9. The output of the notification sound also does not start.

Also, at timing T3, drawing of image data c (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image that had been drawn to the first frame buffer is started. The display of the data b on the image display device is started, and the image display device enters a state in which the stop effect display screen b is displayed.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the first frame after the start of the next variable effect (timing at which the variable effect is started). At this timing, drawing of the image data d (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the drawing of the image data c that had been drawn to the second frame buffer is started. Display on the image display device is started, the normal variable effect display screen c (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and output of the second occurrence notification sound is started from the audio output device 9. . The timing of T4 corresponds to the frame update timing in response to reception of a predetermined command.

The timing T5 is the second frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of image data e (background images, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image data d drawn to the first frame buffer is The display on the image display device is started, the normal variable effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second occurrence notification sound from the audio output device 9 is continued. .

The timing T6 is the third frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data f (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the drawing of the image data e that had been drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, the normal variable effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second occurrence notification sound from the audio output device 9 is continued. .

The timing T7 is the 15th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, variable effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image of the image data g that had been drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display on the display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen g (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second occurrence notification sound from the audio output device 9 is continued.

The timing of T8 is the 16th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, the output of the second occurrence notification sound that had been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, and the image data i (background image, variable effect image, various symbols) is transferred to the second frame buffer. images, various icon images, etc.), the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer starts to be displayed on the image display device, and the image display device normally displays a variable effect display screen h (blue character icon display) is displayed.

The timing of T9 is the 17th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of image data j (background image, variable effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and image display of image data i that had been drawn to the second frame buffer is started. Display on the device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal variable effect display screen i (blue character icon display) is displayed.

In this way, the output of the second occurrence notification sound is started from the audio output device 9 in synchronization with (in synchronization with) the frame update timing when the blue character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Compared to the case where the frame update timing between the display of the blue character icon and the output of the second occurrence notification sound is shifted, it is possible to reduce the discomfort felt by the player and improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, whereas the output of the second occurrence notification sound started in synchronization with (synchronized with) the frame update timing when the blue character icon is displayed, the blue character icon is erased and the second occurrence notification sound is output. Since this is done at a different frame update timing than when the blue character icon is stopped, the output of the second occurrence notification sound can be stopped without being constrained by the timing of erasing the blue character icon, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

(Example of production of normal change pattern 01)
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of the effect when the display mode of the first hold icon is changed to a blue character icon at the start of variation (at the time of shift) (normal change pattern 01).

As shown in FIG. 39(a), when the first pending icons (CD icons) H11 and H12 are displayed on the first display section 70B1 and the second display section 70B2 of the first pending icon display area 70B, , it is assumed that a stop display of a performance symbol indicating a loss is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 39(b), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the first pending icon (CD icon) is displayed on the first display section 70B1 and the second display section 70B2. H11 and H12 are shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display section 70B1, respectively.

Here, when the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 displayed on the second display section 70B2 is shifted and displayed on the first display section 70B1, the display mode changes to a blue character icon and is displayed. . Further, the CD icon is displayed as a blue character icon, and the second occurrence notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 for 0.5 seconds.

After that, as shown in FIG. 39(c), the effect pattern 70a that has been displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed in the combination (here, "164") indicating that it is a loss, and is displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon (CD icon) TH that was previously displayed is deleted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 39(d), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the first pending icon (blue character icon) H11 of the first display section 70B1 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C. be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 39(e), while the effect pattern 70a of "2" is stopped (temporarily stopped) displayed in the left and right variable display areas of the effect pattern 70a that was being displayed in a variable manner, the center variable display area is A reach effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a variable manner.

Then, as shown in FIG. 39(f), the "3" effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed in the central variable display area, thereby ending the ready-to-win effect and ending the variable display. Here, since the variable display has ended, the icon (blue character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

(Timing chart of character action change pattern 01)
40 and 41 are timings showing various timings when character effect change pattern 01 is determined as the icon change pattern and the display mode of the icon TH is changed to a red character icon in the icon display mode update process. It is a chart.

The timing of T1 is the first frame timing after the start of the fluctuation performance (the timing at which the fluctuation performance is started), and is the frame update timing at the start of the normal fluctuation period in which the normal fluctuation of the performance symbol 70a is performed. . At this timing, drawing of image data b (background images, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the drawing of image data a to the second frame buffer is started. Display on the image display device starts, and the image display device enters a state in which the normal variable effect display screen a is displayed.

The timing T2 is the 61st frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, the production control unit 130m has decided to execute the character effect change pattern 01 that changes the display mode of the icon TH to a red character icon, but the character etc. is not displayed on the image display device and the sound The output of the third occurrence notification sound from the output device 9 is also not started.

Also, at timing T2, drawing of image data d (background images, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, character images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the drawing to the first frame buffer is started. Display of the image data c that had been displayed on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen c is displayed on the image display device.

The timing T3 is the 62nd frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data e (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, character images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image that had been drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display of the data d on the image display device is started, and the normal variable effect display screen d (character display) is displayed on the image display device, but the third generation notification sound is not output from the audio output device 9. Will not start.

The timing T4 is the 63rd frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data f (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, character images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image that had been drawn to the first frame buffer is started. The display of the data e on the image display device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal variable effect display screen e (character display) is displayed, but the audio output device 9 does not output the third occurrence notification sound. will continue.

The timing T5 is the 64th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of image data g (background images, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, character images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image that had been drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display of the data f on the image display device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal variable effect display screen f (character display) is displayed, but the audio output device 9 does not output the third occurrence notification sound. will continue.

The timing T6 is the 91st frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of image data h (background images, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the drawing of image data g that had been drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal variable effect display screen g (character display) is displayed, but the non-output of the third generation notification sound from the audio output device 9 continues. Ru.

The timing T7 is the 92nd frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of image data i (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the drawing of image data h that had been drawn to the first frame buffer is started. Display on the image display device is started, the normal variable effect display screen h (red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and output of the third occurrence notification sound is started from the audio output device 9. . The timing of T7 corresponds to the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command.

The timing T8 is the 106th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, the audio output device 9 continues to output the third occurrence notification sound, and the image data j (background image, variable effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is drawn to the first frame buffer. is started, the image data i drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the normal variable effect display screen i (red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device. Become.

The timing T9 is the 107th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, the output of the third occurrence notification sound that had been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, and the image data k (background image, variable effect image, various symbols) is transferred to the second frame buffer. images, various icon images, etc.), the image data j drawn in the first frame buffer starts to be displayed on the image display device, and the image display device normally displays a variable effect display screen j (red character icon display) is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the 108th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of image data l (background image, variable effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and image display of image data k that had been drawn to the second frame buffer is started. Display on the device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal variable effect display screen k (red character icon display) is displayed.

In this way, the output of the third occurrence notification sound is started from the audio output device 9 in synchronization with the frame update timing when the red character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Compared to the case where the frame update timing between the display of the red character icon and the output of the third occurrence notification sound is shifted, it is possible to reduce the discomfort felt by the player and improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, while the output of the third occurrence notification sound started in synchronization with the frame update timing when the red character icon is displayed, the deletion of the red character icon and the output of the third occurrence notification sound Since this is done at a frame update timing that is different from when the output is stopped, the output of the third occurrence notification sound can be stopped without being constrained by the timing of erasing the red character icon, which can improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

(Example of production of character action change pattern 01)
FIG. 42 and FIG. 43 are diagrams showing an example of the effect when the display mode of the icon TH is changed to a red character icon during the variable effect (character effect change pattern 01).

As shown in FIG. 42(a), the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a variable manner when the first hold icon and the second hold icon are not displayed, that is, when no hold memory is stored. A normal variation effect is being executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 42(b), after the character C1 is displayed, as shown in FIG. There will be a demonstration of flying towards.

Then, when the heart H hits the icon TH, as shown in FIG. is output for 0.5 seconds.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43(a), the effect pattern 70a of "2" is stopped (temporarily stopped) displayed in the left and right variable display areas of the effect pattern 70a that was being displayed in a variable manner, and the center variable display area is A reach effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a variable manner.

Then, when the SP reaches reach, as shown in FIG. 43(b), an effect in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other is started. In addition, when it develops into SP reach, the performance symbol 70a is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the second pending icon display area 70D are erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 43(c), the ally character C2 wins over the enemy character C3, suggesting a jackpot, and the fluctuating performance symbol 70a shows a combination ( Here, the display is stopped at "222").

Then, as shown in FIG. 43(d), the effect pattern 70a returns to its original size from the reduced display and is stopped and displayed at the center of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Here, since the variable display has ended, the icon (red character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

(Timing chart of symbol effect change pattern 01)
44 and 45 show various timings when the symbol effect change pattern 01 is determined as the pending icon change pattern and the display mode of the first pending icon is changed to the red character icon in the icon display mode update process. This is a timing chart.

The timing of T1 is the first frame timing after the start of the fluctuation performance (the timing at which the fluctuation performance is started), and is the frame update timing at the start of the normal fluctuation period in which the normal fluctuation of the performance symbol 70a is performed. . At this timing, drawing of image data b (background images, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the drawing of image data a to the second frame buffer is started. Display on the image display device starts, and the image display device enters a state in which the normal variable effect display screen a is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the 299th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, it has been decided to execute the character action change pattern 01 that changes the display mode of the first pending icon to a red character icon, but no change symbol is displayed on the image display device, and the audio output device 9 The output of the third occurrence notification sound is also not started.

Also, at timing T2, drawing of image data d (background images, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and drawing is started to the first frame buffer. The display of the image data c that had been displayed on the image display device is started, and the normal variable effect display screen c is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T3 is the 300th frame after the start of the variable performance, and is the frame update timing of the temporary stop period of the design during which the temporary stop display of the performance symbol 70a is performed. At this timing, drawing of image data e (background images, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) to the first frame buffer was started, and the image data e was drawn to the second frame buffer. The image data d starts to be displayed on the image display device, and the temporary stop effect display screen d (changing symbol display) is displayed on the image display device, but the third generation notification sound is not output from the audio output device 9. No output is started.

The timing of T4 is the 301st frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data f (background images, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) to the second frame buffer was started, and the image data was being drawn to the first frame buffer. The display of the image data e on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen e (changing symbol display) is displayed on the image display device, but the third generation notification sound of the audio output device 9 is No output continues.

The timing of T5 is the 302nd frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data g (background images, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) to the first frame buffer was started, and the image data g was drawn to the second frame buffer. The display of the image data f on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen f (changing symbol display) is displayed on the image display device, but the third generation notification sound of the audio output device 9 is No output continues.

The timing of T6 is the 330th frame after the start of the variable performance, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data h (background images, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) to the first frame buffer was started, and the image data h was being drawn to the second frame buffer. The display of the image data g on the image display device starts, and the temporary stop effect display screen g (changing symbol display) is displayed on the image display device, but the third generation notification sound of the audio output device 9 No output continues.

The timing of T7 is the 331st frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data i (background image, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image data i is drawn to the first frame buffer. The display of the image data h on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen h (changing symbol & red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the third occurrence notification is issued from the audio output device 9. Sound output begins. The timing of T7 corresponds to the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command.

The timing of T8 is the 345th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data j (background image, stop performance image, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image that had been drawn to the second frame buffer is The display of data i on the image display device is started, the temporary stop effect display screen i (changing symbol & red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the third generation notification sound of the audio output device 9 is displayed. continues to be output.

The timing of T9 is the 346th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the pattern temporary stop period. At this timing, the output of the third occurrence notification sound that had been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, and the image data k (background image, stop effect image, various symbols) is transferred to the second frame buffer. images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.), the image data j drawn in the first frame buffer starts to be displayed on the image display device, and a temporary stop effect display screen is displayed on the image display device. j (changing pattern & red character icon display) is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the 347th frame after the start of the variable performance, and is the timing in the middle of the pattern temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data l (background image, variable effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and image display of image data k that had been drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display on the device is started, and the image display device is in a state where a temporary stop effect display screen k (changing symbol & red character icon display) is displayed.

In this way, the output of the third occurrence notification sound is started from the audio output device 9 in synchronization with the frame update timing when the red character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Compared to the case where the frame update timing between the display of the red character icon and the output of the third occurrence notification sound is shifted, it is possible to reduce the discomfort felt by the player and improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, while the output of the third occurrence notification sound started in synchronization with the frame update timing when the red character icon is displayed, the deletion of the red character icon and the output of the third occurrence notification sound Since this is done at a frame update timing that is different from when the output is stopped, the output of the third occurrence notification sound can be stopped without being constrained by the timing of erasing the red character icon, which can improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

(Example of production of pattern effect change pattern 01)
FIGS. 46 and 47 are diagrams showing an example of the effect when the display mode of the pending icon is changed to a red character icon while the effect pattern 70a is stopped (temporarily stopped) (symbol effect change pattern 01).

As shown in FIG. 46(a), in a state where the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display section 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B, the normal variation in which the production symbol 70a is displayed in a variable manner The performance is being performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 46(b), the effect pattern 70a of "2" in the left variable display area, "3" in the right variable display area, and "change" in the center variable display area is displayed (temporarily). (stop display), a lightning-like effect appears from the change symbol stopped (temporarily stopped) displayed in the central variable display area toward the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 of the first display section 70B1, When a hit occurs, the display mode of the first hold icon H11 changes from a CD icon to a red character icon, and a third occurrence notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 for 0.5 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46(c), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the first pending icon (red character icon) H11 of the first display section 70B1 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C. be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 47(a), while the effect pattern 70a of "2" is stopped (temporarily stopped) displayed in the left and right variable display areas of the effect pattern 70a that was being displayed in a variable manner, the center variable display area is A reach effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a variable manner.

Then, when the SP reaches, as shown in FIG. 47(b), an effect in which the friendly character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other is started. In addition, when it develops into SP reach, the effect pattern 70a is reduced and displayed at the upper left, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the second pending icon display area 70D are erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 47(c), the ally character C2 wins over the enemy character C3, suggesting a jackpot, and the fluctuating performance symbol 70a shows a combination ( Here, the display is stopped at "222").

Then, as shown in FIG. 47(d), the effect pattern 70a returns to its original size from the reduced display and is stopped and displayed at the center of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Here, since the variable display has ended, the icon (red character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, there are two cases in which the effect control unit 130m executes a change effect at a frame update timing in response to reception of a predetermined command (starting slot winning designation command or variation pattern designation command); Since the performance control unit 130m may execute the change performance at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by increasing the variations of the change performance. Become.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect is such that the final display mode and scenario are determined when the effect control unit 130m receives the starting opening prize designation command, but the final display mode and scenario are not limited to this method of determination. . For example, each time it is possible to change the display mode of an icon (the icon, the pending icon), it may be determined whether or not to change the display mode. In addition, only the final display mode is determined when the production control unit 130m receives the starting entrance prize designation command, and how it changes is determined by the timing at which the display mode of the icon (the icon, the pending icon) can be changed. If so, it may be determined each time.

In addition, in this embodiment, there are four display modes of the icon (the icon, the hold icon): a CD icon as a normal icon, a blue character icon, a red character icon, and a rainbow character icon as special icons. However, the number of types is not limited to four, and there may be more or fewer types.

For example, a special icon (blinking CD icon) may be provided that indicates that the expectation of winning a jackpot is lower than that of the blue character icon and that there is a possibility of changing to a special icon. When providing such a special icon, the expectation of winning a jackpot is lower than that of a blue character icon, so normal change pattern 02, character action change pattern 01, and symbol action change pattern 01 (after receiving the fluctuation pattern designation command) It is desirable to prevent the icon from changing to a special icon (change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing). By doing this, the normal change pattern 02, character effect change pattern 01, and symbol effect change pattern 01 (predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command This eliminates the possibility of the icon changing into a special icon due to the change effect that occurs in the game, so it is possible to prevent the player from being disappointed, and it is possible to increase the variation in the display mode of the icon, which improves the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

Further, in addition to the four types of this embodiment, the above-mentioned special icon and green character icon may be provided. In this case, the expectation of winning a jackpot for the icons (the icon, the pending icon) is in the following order: (CD icon <) Flashing CD icon < Blue character icon < Green character icon < Red character icon < Rainbow character icon Just make sure it is high.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the character action change pattern 01 or the symbol action change pattern 01, if the character C1 or the change symbol is displayed, the display mode of the icon (the icon, the pending icon) is always changed. However, a case may be provided in which the character C1 or the changing pattern is not changed even if it is displayed (so-called fake effect). When providing such a false effect, the false effect for the normal change pattern 02, the character effect change pattern 01, and the symbol effect change pattern 01 (change effects that occur at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command) The execution rate is higher than that of the winning change effect and the fake effect for normal change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to reception of a predetermined command), or normal change pattern 02, character action change. It is desirable that only fake effects can be executed for pattern 01 and symbol effect change pattern 01 (change effects that occur at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving a variation pattern designation command).

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect is not executed multiple times during one variation effect, but it may be executed multiple times. In this case, the winning change effect and the normal change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to reception of a predetermined command) occur only once during the variable effect, so the normal change Pattern 02, character effect change pattern 01, and symbol effect change pattern 01 (change effects that occur at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving a variation pattern designation command) may be executed multiple times. By doing so, the display mode of the icon (the icon, the pending icon) may change multiple times in one variable performance, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the execution timing of the change effect (change effect at the time of winning and normal change pattern 01) that occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of a predetermined command is determined by the predetermined command (starting opening winning designation). The frame update timing was set to be two frames after the number of frames received (command or fluctuation pattern specification command), but it is not limited to two frames, and can be updated several frames after receiving a predetermined command as long as it is not extremely late. It can be done after the frame.

Further, in this embodiment, the symbol effect change pattern 01 is not provided as the icon change pattern, but it may be provided.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when executing the "normal change pattern 01", the change effect is executed at the frame update timing according to the reception of the change pattern designation command, but the change effect is not limited to this timing. The changing effect may be executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the symbol storage designation command or the performance design designation command.

In addition, in this embodiment, when executing "normal change pattern 02", "character effect change pattern 01", and "symbol effect change pattern 01", at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command. Although the change effect is executed, the change effect is not limited to this timing, and the change effect may be executed at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving another predetermined command.

In addition, in this embodiment, when an icon (the icon, the hold icon) changes, an icon generation (change) notification sound is output as an effect to notify that the icon (the icon, the hold icon) has changed. However, in addition to outputting the icon occurrence (change) notification sound, the board lighting device 76 and/or the frame lighting device 10 are used to display the changed icon (the icon, the pending The lamp may be made to emit light in the same color as the display mode of the icon). In this case, in the same way as the icon generation (change) notification sound is output, the frame update timing at which the changed icon (the icon, the pending icon) is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) The lamps of the board lighting device 76 and/or the frame lighting device 10 may start emitting light at the same time (synchronized), and the timing of ending the light emission of the lamps may be such that the light emission ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. Alternatively, the process may be terminated in synchronization with (synchronized with) the frame update timing at which the icon (the icon, the pending icon) is erased.

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon and the pending icon are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), but they are now displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). Good too.

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution of the icon change effect is not limited depending on the gaming state, but the execution of the icon change effect may be limited depending on the gaming state. For example, in the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state, the winning change performance and the normal change pattern 01 (change performance that occurs at the frame update timing in response to reception of a predetermined command) can be executed. However, the normal change pattern 02, the character effect change pattern 01, and the symbol effect change pattern 01 (change effects that occur at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command) may not be executable. By doing this, since the first specific game state and the second specific game state have a short variation time, the normal change pattern 02, character action change pattern 01, and , by restricting the execution of symbol effect change pattern 01 (a change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving a variation pattern designation command), the gameplay of the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state can be improved. It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game without spoiling it.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect changes the display mode (shape and color) of the pending icon or the icon itself, but is not limited to such changes. Without changing the appearance (the CD icon remains the same), a color effect indicating the expectation of winning a jackpot may be displayed around the pending icon or the icon, or around (near) the pending icon or the icon. A character indicating the level of expectation of winning a jackpot may be displayed, or a pending icon or a character image (nearby) indicating the performance scheduled to be performed (such as "SP" or "pseudo-ren") may be displayed. may be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when determining a change scenario, the change scenario is determined regardless of whether a jackpot is won or not, but the change scenario may be determined by referring to a jackpot. Specifically, one change scenario may be determined from among a plurality of change scenarios based on the final icon display mode, the current number of reservations, the jackpot win or loss, and the selection rate (%). .

In this way, when determining the change scenario by referring to jackpot wins and losses, if you have won a jackpot and the character icon changes to red, it will be more likely that the change scenario will be changed than when the current pending number is "1" or "2". 3" or "4", the selection rate (%) may be set so that the change scenario that changes to a red character icon when winning a prize is more likely to be selected.
In other words, if you have won a jackpot and the icon changes to a red character icon, it is better to have the red character icon when you win the prize when the current pending number is "1" or "2" than when it is "3" or "4". This can also be said to be the selection rate (%) at which a change scenario that changes to an icon is less likely to be selected.
In addition, if you have not won the jackpot, that is, if you are a loser and the character icon changes to red, the change scenario in which the icon changes to red at the time of winning is better than the case where the icon changes to red when you win the jackpot. What is necessary is to set the selection rate (%) so that it is difficult to select.

In addition, in this embodiment, when determining the hold icon change pattern, it is determined regardless of the current number of holds or whether the jackpot is won or lost, but the change pattern is determined by referring to the current number of holds or whether the jackpot is won or lost. You can. Specifically, one pending icon will be selected from among multiple pending icon change patterns based on the mode of pending icon change in this fluctuating performance, the current number of pending items, jackpot win/loss, and selection rate (%). What is necessary is to determine the change pattern.

In this way, when determining the pending icon change pattern by referring to the current pending number and jackpot wins and losses, if you win a jackpot and change to a red character icon, the current pending number is "1" or " The selection rate (%) may be set so that the "normal change pattern 01" is more likely to be selected as the pending icon change pattern when the icon is "3" or "4" than when the icon is "2".
In other words, if you win a jackpot and change to a red character icon, the pending icon change pattern is better when the current pending number is "1" or "2" than when it is "3" or "4". This can also be said to be the selection rate (%) at which "normal change pattern 01" is difficult to be selected.
In addition, if you have not won the jackpot, that is, if you are a loser and the character icon changes to red, the pending icon change pattern is "Normal change pattern 01" than if you have won the jackpot and the icon changes to red. ” should be set to a selection rate (%) that makes it difficult to select.

As mentioned above, when the character icon changes to red in the winning change effect and normal change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to reception of a predetermined command), the current pending number is "1". Since the expectation of winning a jackpot is higher when the number is ``3'' or ``4'' than when the number is ``2'' or ``2'', it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Modified example of the first embodiment)
Hereinafter, a modification of the first embodiment will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

In a modification of the first embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that a special symbol display area for displaying the symbol TZ is provided.

Further, at the left end of the display section of the first image display device 70, there is a first reservation number display area 70E for displaying a first reservation number indicating the current first special symbol reservation number (U1), and a first reservation number display area 70E for displaying the first reservation number indicating the current first special symbol reservation number (U1). This embodiment is also different from the first embodiment in that a second reservation number display area 70F for displaying a second reservation number indicating the number of reserved 2 special symbols (U2) is provided.

Note that the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number displayed in the second pending number display area 70F correspond to the first pending information, and the first pending number display area 70E corresponds to the first pending number display area 70E. The first hold icon displayed in 70B and the second hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D correspond to second hold information, and the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C corresponds to execution information. corresponds to

(Specific example when variable performance starts from customer waiting state)
A specific example of when a variable effect is started from a customer waiting state will be explained using FIGS. 48 to 50. FIG. 38 is a timing chart in which the variable performance is started from the customer waiting state, and FIGS. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance corresponding to.

First, the timing T0 is the 0th frame after the start of the customer waiting state. At this timing, subtraction of the waiting time (30 seconds) for starting the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(a), on the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are in a stopped display state. Further, "0" is displayed in the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number display area 70F, and the pending icon and the icon TH are not displayed.

The timing of T1 is the timing when the first special symbol pending number (U1) increases from "0" to "1" (4th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the first pending digit is displayed with a non-animated increase, and the first pending icon is displayed with a non-animated increase (completed in one frame), and the first occurrence notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is performed. starts outputting.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(b), in the first image display device 70, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1". At the same time, a first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed in normal size on the first display section 70B1. Further, the audio output device 9 outputs a first occurrence notification sound (picot).

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special symbol pending number (U1) decreases from "1" to "0" and the variable performance (variable display of special symbols) based on the normal variable pattern starts (start of customer waiting state). 5th frame). At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ, the non-animated decreasing display of the first pending number, and the display (decreasing display) of the first pending icon changing to the corresponding icon due to animation are started. Ru.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(c), in the first image display device 70, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0". At the same time, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 displayed on the first display section 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the performance symbol 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size without being scrolled (updated to another performance symbol), and the special symbol TZ starts to scroll.

The timing of T3 is the 10th frame after the output of the first notification sound starts (the 14th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the output of the first occurrence notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(d), in the first image display device 70, the movement (shift) of the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 to the icon display area 70C continues, and the presentation The reduced display of the symbol 70a continues.

The timing of T4 is the 20th frame after the first hold icon starts to be displayed (decreased) (the 25th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the display by changing to the first pending icon ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(e), in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon H11 that has moved from the first display section 70B1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C, and When the icon becomes TH, the reduced display of the effect pattern 70a stops.

The timing of T5 is the 40th frame after the start of the variable effect (45th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(f), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the left variable display area, the center variable display Scroll (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the area is started.

The timing of T6 is the 50th frame after the start of the variable effect (55th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(g), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the center variable display area, the right variable display Scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the area is started, and the effect pattern 70a is in a scrolling state in all the variable display areas.

The timing of T7 is the 225th frame from the start of the variable effect (230th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(h), in the first image display device 70, the "3" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped (in a swinging state) in the left variable display area, and The effect pattern 70a continues to scroll in the center and right side variable display areas.

The timing of T8 is the 255th frame after the start of the variable effect (260th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(i), in the first image display device 70, the "5" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped (in a swinging state) in the right-hand variable display area, and The effect pattern 70a continues to scroll in the central variable display area.

The timing of T9 is the 285th frame after the start of the variable effect (290th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(j), in the first image display device 70, the "6" effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped (in a swinging state) in the central variable display area, and the result is a loss. A state is reached in which a combination of effect patterns 70a indicating a certain thing is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the 300th frame after the start of the variable effect (305th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50(k), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a that had been temporarily stopped in the left-center right variable display area is stopped and displayed, and the special pattern TZ is also displayed. It is stopped and displayed at the same combination "365" as the symbol 70a. Furthermore, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, when the number of special symbols on hold increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for a customer, the non-animated increase display of the number on hold and the icon on hold will be displayed for the shortest time, 1 frame. Since the game ends in a period (hour) of minutes, it is possible to immediately shift to a variable performance (display of a decrease in the pending number and display by changing to a pending icon) so as not to delay the game, thereby improving the interest of the game. becomes possible.

In addition, the occurrence notification sound that is output in synchronization with the start of the increasing display of the pending digits and the pending icon is a frame after the timing (frame update) at which the increasing display of the pending digits and the pending icon ends (frame update). Since this continues until the update timing, the player can be made sure to recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of special symbols on hold decreases (changes from "1" to "0"), the number on hold is displayed as a non-animated decrease, and the hold icon changes to the corresponding icon using animation. Therefore, the player can be made to reliably recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has decreased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the timing at which the display of the pending number decrease is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing at which the display of the pending icon to change to the corresponding icon is completed (frame update), the special symbol is pending. While presenting the change in the number, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the number of reserved special symbols has decreased due to the reserved numbers, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, until the display of the pending icon changing to the corresponding icon is completed, the effect design will not scroll (not updated to the next effect pattern), and the effect will be executed at the timing when the display due to the change of the pending icon is completed (frame update). Since the scrolling of the symbols (updating to the next production symbol) starts, it becomes easier to understand the progress of the game, in which the variable production starts after the number of pending memories decreases, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

In addition, when the number of special symbols on hold increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for a customer, instead of displaying an increase in the number of pending icons without animation, The animation may be executed over multiple frames (for example, 5 frames) so as to continue for a long time. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to understand the increase in the number of reserved special symbols, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of starting the display of the decrement of the pending number and the display of the pending icon changing to the corresponding icon (decreasing display) at the same timing (frame update), the timing when the decrementing display of the pending number is completed (frame update) is changed. You can start either one first, if it's faster. By doing so, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the number of reserved special symbols has decreased while improving the degree of freedom in display control, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of starting scrolling (updating to the next production symbol) of the production symbol (updating to the next production symbol) at the timing when the display due to the change of the pending icon is completed (frame update) (the start is delayed than usual), It is also possible to start scrolling the effect pattern (update to the next effect pattern) at a timing slightly before the display is completed (frame update).

(Specific example when the number of reservations increases during variable performance)
A specific example when the number of reservations increases during a variable performance will be explained using FIGS. 51 and 52. FIG. 51 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during a variable performance, and FIGS. 52(a) to 52(c) are diagrams showing performance examples corresponding to (a) to (c) in FIG. 51.

First, the timing T1 is the 50th frame after the start of the variation effect based on the normal variation pattern. At this timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are scrolled (moved downward). Further, "0" is displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E and the second reservation number display area 70F, and the corresponding icon (CD icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special symbol reservation number (U1) increases from "0" to "1" (60th frame from the start of the variable performance). At this timing, non-animated increasing display of the first pending number and animated increasing display of the first pending icon are started, and output of the first occurrence notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52(b), in the first image display device 70, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1". At the same time, a first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed in an extremely small size on the first display section 70B1, and enlarged display is started. Further, the audio output device 9 outputs a first occurrence notification sound (picot).

The timing of T3 is the 10th frame after the start of increasing display of the first pending icon (70th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the increasing display of the first hold icon ends, and the output of the first occurrence notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52(c), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first pending icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display section 70B1 is finished, and the first pending icon (CD icon) is displayed in the normal size. Is displayed.

In this way, when the number of special symbols on hold increases, the number on hold is displayed non-animated, and the number on hold is displayed as an animation. This makes it possible to make the game more interesting.

Also, since the timing at which the increase in the number of pending numbers is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing at which the increase in the number of pending icons is completed (frame update), the number of special symbols pending changes. While presenting this effect, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the number of reserved special symbols has increased due to the reserved numbers, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of special symbols on hold increases during the execution of a variable performance, the increased display of the pending icon will be executed for a longer period of time compared to the case where the number of special symbols on hold increases while waiting for a customer. Therefore, the player can be made to reliably recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the notification sound that is output in synchronization with the start of the increasing display of the pending number and the pending icon ends in synchronization with the timing when the increasing display of the pending icon ends (frame update), so the special symbol is pending. It is possible to effectively represent the increase in the number of games, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the period for displaying an increase in the number of pending icons (10 frames) is shorter than the period for displaying the pending icon changing to the corresponding icon (20 frames), so it is difficult to predict that the variable effect will start. This makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of starting the increasing display of the pending digits and the increasing display of the pending icon at the same timing (frame update), if the timing for the increasing display of the pending digits to complete (frame updating) is earlier, which one? may be started first. By doing so, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the number of reserved special symbols has increased while improving the degree of freedom in display control, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, instead of making the period for displaying an increasing number of pending icons shorter than the period for displaying a pending icon changing to the corresponding icon, the period for displaying an increasing number of pending icons may be made longer. By doing so, it is possible to emphasize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, instead of making the period related to the display of an increasing number of pending icons shorter than the period related to the display of the pending icon changing to the corresponding icon, both periods may be made to have the same length.

(Specific example when the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing)
A specific example in which the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing will be explained using FIGS. 53 and 54. FIG. 53 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing, and FIGS. 54(a) to 54(f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (f) in FIG. 53.

First, the timing T0 is the fifth frame after the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed. At this timing, the stop display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(a), on the first image display device 70, the performance symbols 70a of "4", "6", "8" indicating a loss, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state. It becomes. Further, "2" is displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second reservation number display area 70F. Further, a first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display section 70B1, a first hold icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed on the second display section 70B2, and the icon TH is not displayed. It is in a state.

The timing of T1 is the timing at which the variable performance (variable display of special symbols) based on the normal variation pattern is started (the 20th frame after the performance symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a variable manner, the first pending number is displayed as decreasing due to non-animation, the first pending icon is displayed as changing to the corresponding icon due to animation, and the animation of the first pending icon is displayed. The decrease display will start.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(b), in the first image display device 70, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1". . Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 displayed on the first display section 70B1 starts to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C, and the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 that was displayed on the second display section 70B2 1 hold icon (CD icon) H12 starts moving (shifting) toward the first display section 70B1. Further, the performance symbol 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size without being scrolled (updated to another performance symbol), and the special symbol TZ starts to scroll.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special symbol reservation number (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (30th frame after the performance symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the non-animated increasing display of the first pending number starts, but since the first pending icon is being displayed by changing and the decreasing display is being executed, the first pending icon is increasing and the icon is generated. The output of the occurrence notification sound, which is the notification sound of the time, is put on standby.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(c), in the first image display device 70, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". At the same time, the reduced display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the 20th frame after the start of the display due to the change of the first pending icon and the decrease display (40th frame after the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the display due to the change in the first pending icon and the display of the decrease end. Further, the animation of the first pending icon that has been on standby starts to be displayed in increasing numbers, and the output of the first occurrence notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(d), in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon H11 that has been moved from the first display section 70B1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C, and At the same time as the icon TH, the first pending icon H12 that has moved from the second display section 70B2 is located at the center of the first display section 70B1, and the reduced display of the performance symbol 70a stops. Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H13 is displayed in an extremely small size on the second display section 70B2 and starts to be enlarged, and at the same time, the output of the first occurrence notification sound (picot) from the audio output device 9 is started. Ru.

The timing of T4 is the 5th frame after the start of increasing display of the first pending icon (45th frame after the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the increasing number of the first hold icons and the output of the first occurrence notification sound continue.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(e), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon (CD icon) H13 is displayed in a small size on the second display section 70B2, and the enlarged display continues. At the same time, the output of the first occurrence notification sound (pico) from the audio output device 9 continues. Further, scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the left variable display area is started.

The timing of T5 is the 10th frame after the start of increasing display of the first pending icon (50th frame after the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the increasing display of the first hold icon ends, and the output of the first occurrence notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54(f), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first pending icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display section 70B1 is finished, and the first pending icon (CD icon) is displayed in the normal size. Is displayed. Further, scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the central variable display area is started.

In this way, if the number of special symbols on hold increases during the display of the pending icon changing to the corresponding icon and the display of decreasing the pending icon, the display due to this change and the decreasing display will be completed. Even before the frame update timing, the number of pending numbers starts to increase, so even when the pending icon changes, it is displayed that the number of special symbols pending has increased even while the decreasing number is being displayed. The player can be made aware of this, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of special symbols on hold increases while displaying a change in the holding icon to the relevant icon or displaying a decrease in the number of holding icons, an increase in the number of holding icons will be displayed and the output of the occurrence notification sound will be on standby. (Limit), and at the timing when the change in the hold icon and the display of the decrease are completed (frame update), the increase in the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound will start, so the number of special symbols held It is possible to prevent the transition from becoming difficult to grasp, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of outputting the occurrence notification sound in synchronization with the increase display of the hold icon that is executed after the increase display of the hold number, the occurrence notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the hold number. Good too.

Also, instead of displaying an increase in the number of pending icons and starting the output of the occurrence notification sound (starting later than usual) at the timing when the display due to the change in the pending icon and the decreasing display are completed (frame update). , the display by changing the hold icon, and the display of an increase in the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound may be started at a timing (frame update) slightly before the display of the hold icon is completed and the decrease is completed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the transition of the number of reserved special symbols from becoming difficult to grasp, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the number of special symbols held increases while the number of held icons is increasing, the number of held icons will be increased and the occurrence notification sound will be output in the same way as when the number of held icons is changing or decreasing. While waiting (limiting), it is sufficient to start displaying an increasing number of pending digits, and at the timing when the increasing display of pending icons is completed (frame update), to start displaying an increasing number of pending icons and to output an occurrence notification sound.

(Specific example when the number of reservations increases during a specific reach performance)
A specific example when the number of reservations increases during a specific reach performance will be explained using FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during a specific reach effect, and FIGS. 56(a) to (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (f) in FIG. 55. .

First, the timing T1 is the 400th frame after the start of the variation effect based on the SP reach variation pattern. At this timing, the normal reach effect executed before the SP reach effect and the variable display of the special symbol TZ continue.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a of "7" is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the center variable display area. The variable display of 70a continues. Further, "1" is displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second reservation number display area 70F. Further, a first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display section 70B1, and the icon (CD icon) TH is also displayed.

The timing of T2 is the 90th frame from the start of the normal reach effect (430th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the development performance for developing into the SP reach performance is started.

Specifically, in the first image display device 70, the "7" effect pattern 70a temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and the effect pattern 70a scrolling in the center variable display area are displayed on the screen. Start moving to the upper left and reducing the display.

The timing of T3 is the 15th frame after the start of the development effect (the 445th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the development performance for developing into the SP reach performance is continuing.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(b), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "7" temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and the effect symbol 70a in the center variable display area. The scrolling performance pattern 70a is displayed at a position close to the upper left of the screen, and is also displayed in a smaller size than the normal size.

The timing of T4 is the 30th frame after the start of the development effect (460th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, while the development performance ends, the SP reach performance starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(c), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a in the variable display area at the center left is displayed in a reduced size at the top left of the screen, and at the center of the screen. A confrontation performance in which an ally character C2 and an enemy character C3 confront each other begins. In addition, the pending icons (here, (only the first hold icon) is hidden together with the hold icon display area. Furthermore, the special symbol TZ becomes a ready-to-reach state with the same “7” symbol as the performance symbol 70a.

The timing of T5 is the timing when the first special symbol reservation number (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (820th frame after the start of the variable performance). At this timing, the non-animated increasing display of the first pending number starts, but since the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) is being executed, the increasing display of the first pending icon and the icon generation are performed at this timing. The generated notification sound, which is the notification sound, will not be output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(d), in the first image display device 70, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". At the same time, the final performance of the confrontation performance (a decisive performance to notify whether or not it is a jackpot) is being executed.

The timing of T6 is the 420th frame after the start of the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) (880th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result of the final performance (decisive performance) of the confrontation performance is derived.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(e), on the first image display device 70, an effect is performed in which the ally character C2 wins against the enemy character C3, and the effect pattern 70a that is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen is displayed. The game will temporarily stop (it will be in a swaying state) at the combination ("777") that indicates a jackpot.

The timing of T7 is the 450th frame after the start of the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) (910th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) ends, and the first pending icon is returned to the non-animated state and is displayed in an increased manner.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56(f), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a that had been displayed in a reduced size at the top left of the screen is enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen and temporarily stopped (in a swaying state). become). Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is redisplayed on the first display section 70B1, and the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed in normal size on the second display section 70B2.

Finally, the effect pattern 70a which has been temporarily stopped in the left center right variable display area is stopped and displayed, and the special pattern TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination as the effect pattern 70a, "777". Furthermore, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, if the number of special symbols on hold increases during the execution of a specific performance (SP reach performance), even before the timing when this specific performance ends (frame update), the number of pending numbers will increase. Since the increase display starts, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of special symbols on hold increases during the execution of a specific effect (SP reach effect), the execution of the increase display of the pending icon is waited (restricted), and the specific effect ends (reduced display is displayed). Since the number of pending icons starts to be increased at the timing when the loss effect symbol or the jackpot effect symbol is enlarged (frame updated), it is possible to prevent the change in the number of special symbols pending from becoming difficult to grasp, improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, when starting to display an increase in the number of pending icons at the timing when a specific production (SP reach production) ends, the number of pending icons is increased by non-animation that can be completed in one frame, so the timing when the number of special symbols pending increases Even if there is an extreme lag between the timing of displaying an increased number of pending icons and the timing of displaying an increased number of pending icons, it is possible to reduce the player's discomfort and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when starting to display an increase in the number of pending icons at the timing when a specific performance (SP reach performance) ends, the occurrence notification sound is not output, so the number of special symbols on hold increases at the timing when the specific performance ends due to the occurrence notification sound. This makes it difficult for players to misunderstand that they have played the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the number of special symbols on hold increases multiple times during the execution of a specific performance (SP reach performance), while the number of pending numbers increases, the system waits for the number of pending icons to increase (restriction). It is preferable to display the increased number of pending icons in one frame at the timing when the specific effect is finished (frame update).

Also, if the number of special symbols on hold increases during the execution of a specific performance (SP reach performance), instead of not outputting the occurrence notification sound, the occurrence notification sound is output in synchronization with the display of the increase in the number on hold. Good too.

Moreover, although the SP reach-to-reach performance has been illustrated as the specific performance, the specific performance may include the SPSP reach-to-reach performance or may include the full-rotation reach-to-reach performance.

(Specific example of when the number of reservations increases or decreases before and after the end of a specific gaming state)
A specific example in which the number of reservations increases or decreases before and after the end of a specific gaming state will be explained using FIGS. 57 to 59. FIG. 57 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases and decreases before and after the end of a specific gaming state, and FIGS. 58(a) to 58(f) and FIGS. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance corresponding to (i).

First, the timing T1 is the 400th frame after the last (100th) variable performance in the specific gaming state is started. At this timing, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(a), "1" is displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E, and "4" is displayed in the second reservation number display area 70F. In addition, the first pending icon display area 70B is erased, and second pending icons (CD icons) H21 to H24 are displayed in the first display section 70D1 to fourth display section 70D4 of the second pending icon display area 70D, respectively. and the icon TH is displayed. Furthermore, at the top of the screen, the number of variable effects that can be performed in a specific gaming state (here, "0 times remaining") is displayed, and at the top right of the screen, the game ball is displayed toward the right area of the game area 5a. A right-handed image MU is displayed that encourages firing.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special symbol reservation number (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (415th frame after the start of the variable performance). At this timing, non-animated increasing display of the first pending number starts, but since the first pending icon display area 70B has been erased, the first pending icon is displayed in an increasing number or the notification sound is generated when the icon is generated. The occurrence notification sound will not be output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(b), in the first image display device 70, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". At the same time, the scrolling of the effect pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the 430th frame after the start of the variable effect. At this timing, the performance symbols 70a that have been variably displayed in the left-center-right variable display area temporarily stop at the same time.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(c), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "285" is temporarily stopped (in a swaying state) in the variable display area at the center left, and A state is reached in which a combination of performance symbols 70a indicating a loss is displayed.

The timing of T4 is the 15th frame after the effect pattern 70a temporarily stops (445th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, a result display is started showing the results of the game during a predetermined advantageous period (while the jackpot game and the specific game state continue).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(d), in the first image display device 70, the background image HG becomes dark, and "Special Time End" indicating the end of the specific gaming state and a predetermined advantageous period are displayed. The characters "Jackpot x 1" are displayed, indicating the number of jackpot games played during the game. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen.

The timing of T5 is the 15th frame after the start of the result display (460th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result display continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(e), the first image display device 70 displays the words "TOTAL 1200pt" indicating the number of game balls acquired (paid out) during a predetermined advantageous period. Additional information will be displayed.

The timing of T6 is the 30th frame after the start of the result display (475th frame from the start of the variable performance). At this timing, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(f), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a that had been temporarily stopped at the upper left of the screen moves to the center of the screen and is stopped, and the special pattern TZ It is stopped and displayed at the same combination "285" as the production pattern 70a. Furthermore, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

The timing of T7 is the timing when the last (100th) variable performance in the specific gaming state ends and the first variable performance in the normal gaming state starts (490th frame from the start of the variable performance). At this timing, the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a variable manner, the second pending number is decreased by non-animation, the second pending icon is changed to the corresponding icon by animation, and the second pending icon is displayed by animation. A decreasing display, a non-animated return display of the first pending icon, and a non-animating increasing display of the first pending icon are started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59(g), in the first image display device 70, the second pending number displayed in the second pending number display area 70F changes from "4" to "3". At the same time, the second hold icon (CD icon) H21 displayed on the first display section 70D1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C, and the second display section 70D2 to fourth display section 70D4 The second hold icons (CD icons) H22 to H24 that were being displayed start moving (shifting) toward the next display section.

In addition, the first pending icon display area returns and the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is restored and displayed on the first display section 70B1, and the first pending icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed on the second display section 70B2. Displayed in normal size. Further, the performance symbol 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size without being scrolled (updated to another performance symbol), and the special symbol TZ starts to scroll. Further, a left-handed hitting image HU is displayed at the upper left of the screen, which prompts the user to shoot the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a.

The timing of T8 is the 20th frame after the start of the display due to the change of the second hold icon and the start of the decrease display (510th frame from the start of the previous fluctuating effect). At this timing, the display due to the change in the second pending icon and the display of the decrease end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59(h), in the first image display device 70, the second pending icon H21 that has moved from the first display section 70D1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C and At the same time as the icon TH, the second pending icons H22 to H24 that have been moved from the second display section 70D2 to the fourth display section 70D4 are located at the center of the adjacent display section, and the reduced display of the performance symbol 70a stops.

The timing of T9 is the 10th frame after the end of the display due to the change of the second pending icon and the decrease display (520th frame from the start of the previous variable effect). At this timing, the scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59(i), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling of the effect pattern 70a in the left variable display area, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled in the center variable display area. Scrolling (downward movement) is started.

In this way, when the first special symbol pending number (U1) increases during a specific gaming state, while waiting (restricting) the display of an increasing number of first pending icons, the system starts displaying an increasing number of first pending numbers. Therefore, the player can be made aware that the number of reserved special symbols has increased even during execution of a specific performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of first special symbols pending (U1) increases during a specific gaming state, the number of first pending icons will be increased and displayed at the timing when the specific gaming state (the last variable effect) ends (frame update). Even if you miss the increase display of the first reserved number that was executed before, you can recognize that the first special symbol reserved number has increased, which improves the interest of the game. becomes possible.

In addition, when starting to display an increasing number of first pending icons at the timing when a specific gaming state (the last variable performance in) ends, special symbol pending is displayed in order to display an increasing number of pending icons using non-animation that can be completed in one frame. Even if there is an extreme difference between the timing at which the number increases and the timing at which the display of an increased number of pending icons is executed, the player's sense of discomfort can be reduced and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when starting to display an increasing number of pending icons at the timing when a specific gaming state (the last variable effect) ends, the occurrence notification sound is not output, so the special symbol will be displayed at the timing when the specific gaming state ends due to the occurrence notification sound. This makes it difficult to mislead people into thinking that the number of reservations has increased, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, until the display due to the change of the pending icon to the relevant icon is completed, the production pattern will not scroll (not updated to the next production pattern), and at the timing when the display due to the change of the pending icon is completed (frame update). Since scrolling of the performance symbols (updating to the next performance symbol) is started, it becomes easier to grasp the progress of the performance during the variable performance, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the number of first special symbols on hold increases by a plurality of numbers during a specific gaming state, while executing the display of an increase in the number of pending numbers, the execution of the display of an increase in the number of pending icons is on standby (restricted). It is only necessary to display an increase in the number of pending icons in one frame at the timing when the specific game state (the last variable effect) ends (frame update).

Furthermore, when the number of first special symbols on hold increases during a specific gaming state, the generation notification sound may be output in synchronization with the display of an increase in the number of pending numbers instead of not outputting the generation notification sound.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the first pending icon display area 70B and the second pending icon display area 70D are set (displayed), but the second pending icon display area 70D is set (displayed). Alternatively, only the first pending icon display area 70B may be set (displayed) without displaying the icon.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the icon display area 70C is set (displayed) regardless of whether or not a specific performance (SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, full rotation reach performance) is executed during the variable performance. However, the icon may be hidden without setting (displaying) the icon display area 70C during the execution of a specific performance, or the icon display area 70C may not be set (displayed) during the execution of the specific performance. The icon may be hidden.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number display area 70F are set (displayed) on the first image display device 70, but they are set (displayed) on the second image display device 71. It may be set (displayed) on a dedicated display (for example, a 7-segment LED, a dot matrix, a dedicated LED, etc.) that is different from the image display device. When setting it to a dedicated LED, it is preferable to display the number of special symbols reserved by the lighting color and lighting/blinking mode of the LED.

(Initial processing of accessories in the lamp/drive control section)
Accessory initial processing by the lamp/drive control section 150 will be explained using FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing accessory initial processing by the lamp/drive control unit 150, and this process is performed within the timer interrupt process executed every predetermined period (4 milliseconds) in the lamp/drive control unit 150. executed.

In step R101, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) has been received from the main control board 110. If the power-on command has been received, the process moves to step R102, and if the power-on command has not been received, the process moves to step R103.

In step R102, the lamp CPU 150a executes the return-to-origin process for the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) at the initial processing number updated in each process of the accessory initialization process. Set "1".

In step R103, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the initial processing number is "1". If the initial process number is not "1", it is assumed that the origin return process of the accessory is not executed and the process moves to step R105, and if the initial process number is "1", the origin return process is executed in step R104. and complete the initial processing of this accessory. Specifically, based on the input signal from the position detection sensor, the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) is returned to its original position, and the initial processing number is Perform processing such as setting it to "2". Note that the details of the origin return process will be described later.

In step R105, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the initial processing number is "2". If the initial processing number is not "2", the initial processing for the accessory is not performed and the current initial processing for the accessory is terminated, and if the initial processing number is "2", the initial action processing is performed. , this time the accessory initial processing ends. Specifically, processing is performed such as performing an initial operation and initial light emission to check whether the accessory works normally or not, and setting the initial processing number to "0". Note that details of the initial operation processing will be described later.

As described above, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. It is designed so that it is not executed at the same time as action processing. By doing this, the movement of returning various accessories to their original positions and the initial movements and initial light emission of various objects do not coexist, and the return movement, initial movement, and initial light emission can be checked separately. becomes possible.

Further, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 60, the origin return processing is executed before the initial movement processing. By doing this, the various accessories will initially move from the origin position, making it easier to understand whether there is an abnormality in the operation of the various accessories.

(Lamp/drive control unit return-to-origin processing)
The origin return process of the lamp/drive control section 150 will be explained using FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the origin return process in the lamp/drive control section 150.

In step R105-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the origin return status of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is "0". do. If the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process moves to step R105-3, and if the board accessory processing number is "0", in step R105-2, the drive target to be returned to the origin is set to the first point. 1 movable member 73, and the process moves to step R105-5.

In step R105-3, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number is "1". If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process moves to step R105-12, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", in step R105-4, the drive target to be returned to the origin is The second movable member 74 is set, and the process moves to step R105-5.

In step R105-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the movable member to be driven is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that each movable member is at the original position is determined. If the movable member to be driven is not at the origin position, the process moves to step R105-6, and if the movable member to be driven is at the origin position, the process moves to step R105-11.

In step R105-6, the lamp CPU 150a drives a drive motor for moving the movable member to be driven so that the movable member to be driven returns to the origin position, and in step R105-7, the movable member moves for a predetermined time. The board accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of a return abnormality in which the board does not return to the original position within a certain period of time is updated by +1.

In step R105-8, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the updated board accessory abnormality determination timer is at an upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). When the board accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that a return abnormality has occurred in the movable member to be driven, and the process is moved to step R105-9, and when the board accessory abnormality determination timer is not at the upper limit value, the process is moved to step R105-9. , the process moves to step R105-12.

In step R105-9, the lamp CPU 150a sets return error information (first movable member return error information, second movable member return error information) indicating that a return error has occurred in the movable member to be driven, in the lamp RAM 150c. , In step R105-10, the board accessory abnormality determination timer is cleared.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-11. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to make the second movable member 74 the drive target, and the board accessory processing number is changed to "1". If it is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" to end the process of returning the board accessory (first movable member, second movable member) to the origin.

In step R105-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the frame accessory processing number indicating the transition of the origin return status of the frame accessory (production button 17) is "0". If the frame accessory processing number is "0", the process moves to step R105-13, and if the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process moves to step R105-20.

In step R105-13, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the production button 17 is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that the production button 17 is at the origin position is determined. When the effect button 17 is not at the origin position, the process moves to step R105-14, and when the effect button 17 is at the origin position, the process moves to step R105-19.

In step R105-14, the lamp CPU 150a drives the production button drive motor for moving the production button 17 so that the production button 17 returns to the origin position, and in step R105-15, the production button 17 is moved within a predetermined time. The frame accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of a return abnormality that does not return to the origin position is updated by +1.

In step R105-16, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the updated frame accessory abnormality determination timer is at an upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the frame accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that a return abnormality has occurred in the production button 17, and the process moves to step R105-17. If the frame accessory abnormality determination timer is not at the upper limit value, the current The return-to-origin process ends.

In step R105-17, the lamp CPU 150a sets return abnormality information indicating that a return abnormality has occurred in the production button 17 in the lamp RAM 150c, and in step R105-18, clears the frame accessory abnormality determination timer.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-19. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to end the process of returning the frame accessory (performance button 17) to the origin.

In step R105-20, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "1". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process moves to step R105-21, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current origin return process is terminated.

In step R105-21, the lamp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number, and in step R105-22, the lamp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number, and in step R105-22, sets the above-mentioned initial processing number to the initial operation processing of the accessory. Set "2" and end the current return-to-origin process.

As described above, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. (in the order of member 73→second movable member 74), the movable member 73 is returned to the original position. By doing this, it becomes possible to easily confirm whether the various board accessories have returned to their original positions. Furthermore, when the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in contact with each other in a manner that makes it difficult to separate them, it is possible to prevent both movable members from applying loads to each other, and to prevent both movable members from being damaged at the same time. This makes it possible to suppress such inconveniences.

Further, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 61, the operation of returning the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) to the origin position and the origin position of the frame accessory (direction button 17) It is possible to perform the return operation at the same time (at the same time). By doing this, it is possible to shorten the time required for the return operation of various accessory objects, and it becomes possible to smoothly transition to the initial operation of the various accessory objects to be executed next.

Further, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 61, an upper limit is set on the time required for each accessory object to return to its origin position. By doing this, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the return operation of various accessories does not end forever. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation where the various accessories are performing return operations even during the variable performance and the performance operation is not performed, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 61, the operation of returning the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) to the origin position and the origin position of the frame accessory (direction button 17) When both of the return operations are completed, processing for transitioning to initial operation processing is performed. By doing this, the return movements of various accessories to their origin positions and the initial movements of various accessories are not executed at the same time, and the return movements and initial movements of various accessories can be checked separately. becomes possible.

Note that the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are designed to return to the origin position in a predetermined order (first movable member 73 → second movable member 74), but at the same time, the origin position It is also possible to start an operation to return to . In this way, the time required for the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 can be shortened, and it is possible to smoothly transition to the initial motion of various accessories to be executed next. becomes.

(Initial operation processing of lamp/drive control unit)
The initial operation process of the lamp/drive control section 150 will be explained using FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the initial operation process of the lamp/drive control section 150.

In step R107-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the initial operating status of the board accessory is "0". If the board accessory processing number is "0", the process moves to step R107-2, and if the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process moves to step R107-7.

In step R107-2, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether return abnormality information for the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, the process moves to step R107-4 assuming that the initial operation and initial light emission of the board accessory is performed, and if the return abnormality information is set, the process moves to step R107-3. In step R107-7, the board accessory processing number is set to "2", assuming that the initial movement of the board accessory is not performed.

In step R107-4, the lamp CPU 150a selects the board accessory initial motion pattern determination table (see FIG. 63) for determining the initial motion pattern of the board accessory. Note that details of the board accessory initial movement pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, with reference to the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Determine the movement pattern.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-6. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to execute the initial operation of the board accessory.

In step R107-7, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number is "1". If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process moves to step R107-11, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", the board is set in the lamp RAM 150c in step R107-8. The initial motion of the board accessory is executed according to the initial motion pattern of the board accessory.

In step R107-9, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether all the initial operations of the board accessories have been completed. If all steps of the initial movement of the board accessory have not been completed, the process moves to step R107-11, and if all steps of the initial movement of the board accessory have been completed, in step R107-10, the process moves to step R107-11. Update the processing number by +1. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the initial operation process of the board accessory.

In step R107-11, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the frame accessory processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation status of the frame accessory (production button 17) is "0". If the frame accessory processing number is "0", the process moves to step R107-12, and if the frame accessory processing number is not "0", the process moves to step R107-17.

In step R107-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether return abnormality information for the production button 17 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, the process moves to step R107-14 assuming that the initial movement of the frame accessory is performed, and if the return abnormality information is set, in step R107-13, the frame Assuming that the initial movement of the accessory is not performed, the frame accessory processing number is set to "2", and the process moves to step R107-17.

In step R107-14, the lamp CPU 150a selects the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table (see FIG. 64) for determining the initial movement pattern of the frame accessory. Note that details of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-15, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the frame accessory (performance button 17) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, with reference to the frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64, one initial motion pattern is determined from among a plurality of initial motion patterns based on the type of power-on command.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-16. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the frame accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to execute the initial operation of the frame accessory.

In step R107-17, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the frame accessory processing number is "1". If the frame accessory processing number is not "1", the process moves to step R107-21, and if the frame accessory processing number is "1", the frame accessory processing number is set in the lamp RAM 150c in step R107-18. The initial motion of the frame accessory is executed in accordance with the initial motion pattern of the frame accessory.

In step R107-19, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether all steps of the initial motion of the frame accessory have been completed. If the initial motion of the frame accessory has not completed all steps, the process moves to step R107-21, and if the initial motion of the frame accessory has completed all steps, in step R107-20, the frame accessory Update the processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "1", the frame accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the initial operation process of the frame accessory.

In step R107-21, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "2". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process moves to step R107-22, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current initial operation process is terminated.

The lamp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number in step R107-22, clears the above-mentioned initial processing number in step R107-23, and ends the current initial operation processing. .

In this way, according to the initial motion processing shown in FIG. 62, the initial motion of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and the initial motion of the frame accessory (production button 17) are controlled. They can be executed at the same time (at the same time). By doing this, it is possible to shorten the time required for the initial movements of various accessories, and it is possible to prevent the production operations of various accessories during the game from being inhibited.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 62, if there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 that constitute the board accessory, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, The initial operation of the second movable member 74 is not performed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the movable member from being completely broken down or damaged by forcing the movable member in which the return abnormality has occurred to undergo an initial operation.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 62, if there is a return abnormality in the effect button 17 forming the frame accessory, the initial operation of the effect button 17 is not executed. By doing this, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as complete malfunction or damage of the performance button 17 by forcing the performance button 17 in which a return abnormality has occurred to be initially operated.

In addition, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 62, even if the initial operation of the board accessory in which the return error has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the frame accessory in which the return error has not occurred is executed, and the return error is performed. Even if the initial motion of the frame accessory in which the error has occurred is not executed, the initial motion of the board accessory in which the return abnormality has not occurred is executed. By doing this, it becomes possible to check whether there is any abnormality in the operation of the accessory object in which the return abnormality has not occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 62, both the initial operation of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and the initial operation of the frame accessory (production button 17) are completed. In this case, the initial operation process ends. By doing this, even though one of the board and frame characters is performing an initial action, the other is performing a performance action, making it unclear whether it is an initial action or a performance action. will no longer occur.

(Board accessory initial movement pattern determination table)
FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a board accessory initial motion pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the initial motion pattern of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74).

The board accessory initial operation pattern determination table associates the type of power-on command, the presence or absence of return error information, and the initial operation pattern to be selected.For reference, the operation mode at the initial operation and the initial operation The number of steps is listed.

Initial operation patterns include patterns 01 to 03 that are determined when a power-on designation command is received, and patterns 01 to 03 that are determined when a first power restoration designation command indicating that the device is waiting for a customer is received. Patterns determined when receiving patterns 04 to 06, the second power recovery designation command indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, or the third power recovery designation command indicating that the jackpot game is in progress. 07 to 09 are set.

"Initial operation pattern 01" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and the first movable member 73 moves in the order of small descent → return to origin → large descent → return to origin After operating, the second movable member 74 operates in the order of movement→return to the origin, and during this period, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED light up (light emit light) in blue and white.
"Initial operation pattern 02" is determined when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73, in which the first movable member 73 does not operate and the second movable member 74 operates in the order of movement → return to origin, During that period, the second movable member LED lights up (lights up) in blue and white.
"Initial operation pattern 03" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and after the first movable member 73 operates in the order of small descent → return to origin → large descent → return to origin, the second movable member 74 does not operate, and during that period, the first movable member LED lights up (lights up) in blue and white.

"Initial operation pattern 04" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and the initial operation is performed except that the second movable member LED lights up (lights up) only in blue. This is the same as pattern 01.
"Initial operation pattern 05" is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality, and is the same as initial operation pattern 02 except that the second movable member LED lights up (lights up) only in blue.
"Initial operation pattern 06" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and since the second movable member LED does not light up in blue, it is ultimately the same as initial operation pattern 03.

"Initial operation pattern 07" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and except for the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED being turned off, This is the same as initial operation pattern 01 or initial operation pattern 04.
“Initial operation pattern 08” is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality, and is the same as initial operation pattern 02 or initial operation pattern 05 except that the second movable member 74 is turned off.
"Initial operation pattern 09" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and is the same as initial operation pattern 03 or initial operation pattern 06 except that the first movable member 73 is turned off.

Note that in initial operation pattern 02, initial operation pattern 05, and initial operation pattern 08, the lighting color of the first movable member LED is not described. This is because the component LED flashes red to notify of an abnormality.

In addition, in the initial operation pattern 03, the initial operation pattern 06, and the initial operation pattern 09, the lighting color of the second movable member LED is not described, but this point is caused by the return abnormality of the second movable member 74. This is because the component LED flashes red to notify of an abnormality.

The first feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the board accessory One point is that the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of (the first movable member, the second movable member) is the same. By doing this, it becomes possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the board accessory, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored.

In addition, the movement mode of the initial movement is the same as long as at least the movement pattern of the board accessory in each process is the same, the movement time in each process may be the same, or the movement time in each process is the same. May be different.

Further, the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 may be made different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. The operation modes (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operations of both the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 may be made different. In this way, it is possible to easily determine whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). becomes.

In addition, when the initial operation mode (number of processes, operation of each process) of the first movable member 73 and/or the second movable member 74 is to be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, it is possible to An operation that is not included in the initial operation when the power is restored may be executed in the initial operation when the power is restored, or an operation that is not included in the initial operation when the power is restored may be executed in the initial operation when the power is turned on. In this way, it is easier to understand whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). It becomes possible.

A second feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the board accessory (first movable member 73, second The difference is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the movable member 74) is different. By doing this, it is possible to determine whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or whether it is the initial operation due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). becomes.

The third feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Although they are the same, there is a difference in the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED. By doing this, it is possible to determine whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or whether it is the initial operation due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). becomes.

It should be noted that while the light emitting manner of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to return to the customer waiting state, the light emitting manner of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is different. However, on the contrary, the initial light emission mode of the first movable member LED is different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state, while the light emission mode of the second movable member LED is different. The light emission mode of the initial light emission may be the same.

Furthermore, both the light emission mode of the first movable member LED and the light emission mode of the second movable member LED are made different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to return to the customer waiting state. Good too. In this way, it is possible to easily understand whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to the power being restored (the control state of the game has been restored). becomes.

The fourth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the board accessory The difference is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. By doing this, it is possible to determine whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or whether it is the initial operation due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). becomes.

The fifth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that when the power is restored to the customer waiting state, and when the power is restored when the special symbol is being displayed in fluctuation or during a jackpot game. The difference is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (first movable member, second movable member) is different. By doing this, it is possible to determine whether the initial operation is due to power restoration to return to the customer waiting state, or whether the initial operation is due to power restoration while special symbols are being displayed in fluctuations, or during a jackpot game. It becomes possible.

In addition, during the variable display of special symbols or when the power is restored during a jackpot game, both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned off, but the first movable member LED The member LED and the second movable member LED may be lit in the same light emitting manner as when the power is restored to return to the customer waiting state.

The sixth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. When there is no return abnormality in the movable member 74, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is performed without performing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, and when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73, the second movable member If there is a return abnormality in 74, the initial movement of the first movable member 73 is performed and the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is not performed. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation depending on the presence or absence of a recovery abnormality.

(Frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table)
FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the initial motion pattern of the frame accessory (production button 17).

In the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table, the type of power-on command and the initial operation pattern to be selected are associated with each other, and the operation mode at the initial operation and the number of steps for the initial operation are listed for reference. ing.

"Initial operation pattern 01" is determined when a power-on designation command is received, and the production button 17 operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → return to origin → intermittent vibration, and during that period, the production button LED is Lights up (lights up) in the order of red → green → blue.
"Initial operation pattern 02" is determined when the first power recovery designation command indicating that the customer is waiting is received, and the production button operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → return to origin, During that period, the production button lights up (lights up) in blue.
"Initial operation pattern 03" is determined when a second power restoration designation command indicating that a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner or a third power restoration designation command indicating that a jackpot game is in progress is received; The production button operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → return to origin, and the production button LED turns off during this period.

In addition, the continuous vibration time (2 seconds) and the intermittent vibration time (2 seconds) of the production button 17 are executed by operating the production button 17 during the valid period that occurs during the execution of the variable production. The time during which the performance button 17 vibrates during the operation performance (1 second vibration if it is a valid period for a jackpot notice that makes you expect a jackpot, 5 seconds if it is a valid period for a decisive performance that announces whether or not it is a jackpot) The time is different from the second oscillation).

The first feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the frame accessory The difference is in the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of (production button 17). By doing this, it is possible to easily understand whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). becomes possible.

The second feature of the frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the initial motion of the performance button 17 when the power is turned on includes an action that is not present in the initial motion of the performance button 17 when the power is restored. One of the points is that it is designed to allow By doing this, it is easier to understand whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). becomes possible.

Note that the initial operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the production button 17 may be the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. In this way, it becomes possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame accessory, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored.

The third feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The difference lies in the light emission mode of the initial light emission. By doing this, it is possible to determine whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or whether it is the initial operation due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). becomes.

The fourth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the board accessory The difference is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. By doing this, it is possible to determine whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or whether it is the initial operation due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). becomes.

In addition, the performance button LED is designed to turn off when the power is restored while the special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner or during a jackpot game, but this is the same as when the power is restored to restore the performance button LED to the customer waiting state. It may be made to light up in a light emitting manner.

The fifth feature of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that the numbers are different. By doing this, it is easier to understand whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). becomes possible.

Note that the number of colors emitted in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is greater than the number of emitted light colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored, but this may be reversed.

As a sixth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that it includes luminescent colors that are not present in other models. By doing this, it is easier to understand whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). becomes possible.

Note that the light emitting color in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored may include a light emitting color that is not included in the light emitting color in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on.

The seventh feature of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. This differs from the time during which the performance button 17 vibrates during the operation performance performed when the button 17 is operated. By doing this, it becomes possible to understand that the vibration is caused by the initial operation of the effect button 17.

The eighth feature of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that the process is executed over the initial operation of the effect button 17 in which the detection of the process is performed. By doing this, the operation of the production button 17 and the button vibration motor can be checked at the same time, and the time required for operation confirmation can be shortened.

(Specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power is turned on)
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) after power-on accompanied by initialization of main RAM 110c.

Note that power-on with initialization of the main RAM 110c includes power-on where the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change process is performed, and power-on where the main RAM 110c is initialized without the setting change process being performed. However, here, a case will be described in which the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without any setting change processing being performed.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives the power-on designation command sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and production button 17 are returned to their origin positions. The operation begins.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and A first standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the LED lights are turned on while waiting for a customer (lighted white). ), and when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound elapses at timing T8, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

At timing T9, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound. “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T10, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0" and the fluctuation starts. The performance (fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "0".

(Specific example when there is a return error in the second movable member after power is turned on)
FIG. 66 is a diagram illustrating a specific example where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, a case will be described in which the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without any setting change processing being performed.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives the power-on designation command sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and production button 17 are returned to their origin positions. The operation begins.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and A first standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T4, when the return-to-origin process ends with a return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the second movable member LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality, and the initial The operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation process ends without performing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED ends and turns on (lights white) while waiting for a customer.

At the timing T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing T8, the game ball is not inserted into the first starting port 45. When the first special symbol storage designation command based on winning (first pending number = 1) is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first pending icon display area 70B is displayed. At the same time as the first hold icon is displayed, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon♪".

At timing T9, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0" and the fluctuation starts. The performance (fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED It lights up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when there is a return error in the first movable member after power is turned on)
FIG. 67 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, a case will be described in which the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without any setting change processing being performed.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives the power-on designation command sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and production button 17 are returned to their origin positions. The operation begins.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and A first standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where a return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the first movable member LED notifies the occurrence of the return abnormality. The second movable member 74 starts blinking in red (abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the production button LED maintain a state in which the lights are turned off.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T6, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends. Then, the initial operation process ends without the initial operation of the first movable member 73 being performed, and the initial light emission of the second movable member LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights up white).

At the timing T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing T8, the game ball is not inserted into the first starting port 45. When the first special symbol storage designation command based on winning (first pending number = 1) is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first pending icon display area 70B is displayed. At the same time as the first hold icon is displayed, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon♪".

At timing T9, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0" and the fluctuation starts. The performance (fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED It lights up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example of a case where there is a return error in the production button after the power is turned on)
FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a specific example in the case where there is a return abnormality in the production button 17 after the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives the power-on designation command sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and production button 17 are returned to their origin positions. The operation begins.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and A first standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed with a return error occurring in the production button 17, the production button LED flashes red ( abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED remain in the off state.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. The operation will not start. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission.

When the initial movement of the first movable member 73 ends at timing T5, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 starts, and when the initial movement of the second movable member 74 ends at timing T6, the initial movement process ends. Then, the initial light emission ends in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the light is turned on while waiting for a customer (white light), and at the timing of T7, the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound starts. After the time has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the state becomes silent.

At timing T8, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound. “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T9, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0" and the fluctuation starts. The performance (fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the production button LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED are fluctuating. The light is turned on, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

Note that in the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 68, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized when the power is turned on without the setting change processing being performed has been described; however, the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change is performed. In the case of power-on, after the initial screen is displayed, the production control board 130 receives a setting change designation command, and the setting changing screen is displayed, and then the production control board 130 receives the power-on designation command. By doing so, the first standby screen is displayed and the return operations and initial operations of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) are started. Note that the first standby screen may be displayed by receiving the setting value designation command.

(Specific example when there is no abnormality in various accessories returning after power is restored)
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) after power restoration without initialization of main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the return-to-origin process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are activated. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and A second standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 maintains silence.

In addition, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the LED lights are turned on while waiting for a customer (lighted white). ).

At timing T8, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound. “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T9, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0" and the fluctuation starts. The performance (fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "0".

(Specific example when there is an abnormality in the second movable member returning after power is restored)
FIG. 70 is a diagram illustrating a specific example where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the return-to-origin process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are activated. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and A second standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 maintains silence.

In addition, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T4, when the return-to-origin process ends with a return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the second movable member LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality, and the initial The operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation process ends without performing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED ends and turns on (lights white) while waiting for a customer.

At timing T7, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 emits the winning sound " "Pon ♪" is output.

At timing T8, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0" and the fluctuation starts. The performance (fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED It lights up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when there is an abnormality in the first movable member returning after power is restored)
FIG. 71 is a diagram illustrating a specific example where there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 after the power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the return-to-origin process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are activated. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and A second standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 maintains silence.

In addition, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where a return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the first movable member LED notifies the occurrence of the return abnormality. The second movable member 74 starts blinking in red (abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the production button LED maintain a state in which the lights are turned off.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the production button LED light up in blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T6, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends. Then, the initial operation process ends without the initial operation of the first movable member 73 being performed, and the initial light emission of the second movable member LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights up white).

At timing T7, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub-first pending display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 emits the winning sound " "Pon ♪" is output.

At timing T8, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0" and the fluctuation starts. The performance (fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED It lights up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when there is an abnormality in the production button returning after power is restored)
FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there is a return abnormality in the production button 17 after power-on without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the return-to-origin process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are activated. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and A second standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 maintains silence.

In addition, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed with a return error occurring in the production button 17, the production button LED flashes red ( abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED remain in the off state.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. The operation will not start. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission.

When the initial movement of the first movable member 73 ends at timing T5, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 starts, and when the initial movement of the second movable member 74 ends at timing T6, the initial movement process ends. Then, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED end their initial light emission and turn on (white light) while waiting for a customer.

At timing T7, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound. “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T8, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0" and the fluctuation starts. The performance (fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the production button LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED are fluctuating. The light is turned on, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when the state after the power is restored is that the special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner and there is a pending memory)
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a specific example where the state after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c is in the special symbol fluctuation display (loss fluctuation display) and with pending memory.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for special figure fluctuations transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays a recovery screen including the words "Please resume the game." , the audio output device 9 maintains silence.

In addition, when a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 3, second pending number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the first pending number is displayed on the image display device. A state in which no pending numbers are displayed in the display area 70E or the second pending number display area 70F is maintained.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 has a display mode showing "3", and the sub-second hold display 84 has a display mode showing "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED maintain a state of being turned off.

At timing T5, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at timing T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at timing T7, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started. When the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED maintain the extinguished state.

At timing T8, when a special symbol confirmation command is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the "753" production symbol 70a, which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ in a stopped state (still display). A stop screen (same as the second standby screen) is displayed, and a stop sound "Don♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At this time, the three first pending icons are displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, but the icon display area 70C is secured in a state where the display area can display an effect image such as a background image ( (the pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

At timing T9, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "2" and the fluctuation starts. The performance (fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "2".

In addition, if the state after the power is restored is in the special symbol fluctuation display (loss fluctuation display) and there is no hold memory, "0" is displayed on the sub-first hold display 83 at the timing of T2, and at the timing of T9. The basic flow of operations from the timing T1 to the timing T8 described above is the same, except that the variable performance is not started upon receipt of the customer waiting state designation command.

(Specific example of when the power-on designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. Here, a case will be described in which the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without any setting change processing being performed.

A case where the power-on designation command cannot be received normally means that power is being supplied to the production control board 130, but the power line of the main control board 110 is disconnected or the connector of the power line is not connected ( A first case in which power (main power supply and backup power supply) is not supplied due to the situation (including a half-plugged state), a second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 is disconnected, and the command Although there is a third case in which the communication line connector is in an unconnected state (including a half-plugged state), the first case will be described here.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, power is not supplied to the main control board 110, but power supply to the performance control board 130 is started. At this time, as an initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen displaying the words "Loading" is displayed, and after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the production control board 130 responds to the command. A control state is entered in which the performance can be executed.

At timing T2, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing is performed to initialize the control state of the game, and a power-on designation command is transmitted. Then, when the production control board 130 receives the power-on designation command, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 , and the operation of returning the production button 17 to its original position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and A first standby screen is displayed in which the special symbol TZ is displayed in a stopped state (stationary display). Further, the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the LED lights are turned on while waiting for a customer (lighted white). ). Thereafter, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the system becomes silent.

In addition, when the production control board 130 received the power-on designation command, the first standby screen was displayed, but instead of displaying the first standby screen immediately, a dark color display screen was displayed as a type of initial screen. The first standby screen may be displayed after being displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of displaying the dark color display screen, or may be output from the start of displaying the first standby screen.

(Specific example of when the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 75 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where a power recovery designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

A case where the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally means that power is being supplied to the production control board 130, but the power line of the main control board 110 is disconnected or the connector of the power line is disconnected ( A first case in which power (main power only) is not supplied due to a situation (including a half-plugged state), a second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 is disconnected, and a command communication line Although there is a third case in which the connector is in an unconnected state (including a half-plugged state), the first case will be described here.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, power is not supplied to the main control board 110, but power supply to the performance control board 130 is started. At this time, as an initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen displaying the words "Loading" is displayed, and after a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the production control board 130 responds to the command. It becomes a control state in which it is possible to execute the desired effect.

At timing T2, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing is performed to restore the control state of the game, and a power restoration designation command for waiting for a customer is transmitted. Then, when the production control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command, a return-to-origin process is started, and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and A second standby screen is displayed in which the special symbol TZ is displayed in a stopped state (still display). Furthermore, the audio output device 9 becomes silent.

In addition, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the LED lights are turned on while waiting for a customer (lighted white). ).

In addition, when the production control board 130 received the power recovery designation command, the second standby screen was displayed, but instead of displaying the second standby screen immediately, it displayed a dark color display screen as a type of initial screen. The second standby screen may be displayed after being displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of displaying the dark color display screen, or may be output from the start of displaying the second standby screen.

In addition, the audio output device 9 was configured to be silent when receiving the power restoration designation command, but it now outputs a notification sound (alarm, etc.) indicating that the power has been turned on (so that it can be understood). You can do it like this. In this case, the alarm may be the same as when the power-on designation command is received, or it may be a different alarm.

(Specific example of when the power-on command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 76 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

The case where the command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on is the first case where power is supplied to the production control board 130 but not to the main control board 110, and the production control is not performed from the main control board 110. Examples include a second case in which the command communication line to the board 130 is disconnected, and a third case in which the connector of the command communication line is in an unconnected state (including a half-plugged state). Case 3 will be explained.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, power supply to the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130 is started. At this time, as an initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed.

At the timing of T2, the special symbol storage designation command (first pending number, , second pending number = 0), the image display device maintains the state where the initial screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the initial screen is displayed on the image display device. However, the sub-first hold display 83 changes to a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon♪".

At timing T4, when a fluctuation start command (effect pattern specification command, variation pattern specification command) is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the effect pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and , the second standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (stationary display) is displayed for a moment, and then a variable production (variable display of the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or movement to the icon) change, BGM output) starts.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "0".

(Specific example 1 when restarting after only power supply to the main control board is stopped)
FIG. 77 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the production control board 130) after the return-to-origin process and the initial operation process have already been completed. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a first specific example in which the system is restarted after being stopped.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped is a case where the power line (main power line, backup power line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is disconnected and then comes into contact with it due to an external factor. , the case where the connector of the power line (main power line, backup power line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 becomes connected after being disconnected (including half-plugged). Can be mentioned.

Here, during a customer waiting state (including execution of a customer waiting demonstration performance), which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the main control board 110 is A case will be described in which the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is restarted after the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) has stopped.

At the timing of T1, the various accessories have already finished their return operations, initial operations, and output of the initialization notification sound, and are now waiting for customers, and the image display device shows the initial pattern when the power is restored. A second standby screen or a customer waiting demo performance screen is displayed in which the production pattern 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped (statically displayed), and the first movable member LED and the second movable The member LED and the performance button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, if the timing of T1 is the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the customer waiting state after the end of the variable performance that was executed after the output of the initialization notification sound, the image display device In this case, a standby screen or a customer-waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed in which the losing effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped and displayed (statically displayed).

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T2, when only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed. , sub-information display device 80 (sub-first fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-general figure fluctuation display 85, sub-general figure The hold display 86) also maintains the displayed content.

Note that even if only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the customer waiting state designation command can be executed while the standby screen is being displayed (regardless of whether or not after the fluctuating effect has finished). If the demonstration standby time has elapsed after the reception (or after the end of the previous customer waiting demonstration performance), the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

At timing T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is initialized and the game control state is initialized. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first hold display 83, the second sub-hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure pending display 86) also maintain their display contents.

At timing T4, when the production control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and production button 17 are returned to their origin positions. The operation begins.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays the power supply instead of the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen. A first standby screen is displayed in which the production symbol 70a of "135" which is the initial symbol at the time of insertion and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the audio output device 9 outputs an alarm and "RAM An initialization notification sound consisting of a voice saying "It's clear" is output.

In addition, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At timing T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the LED lights are turned on while waiting for a customer (white light is lit). ), and when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed at timing T10, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, if the return movement, initial movement, or initialization notification sound output of various characters has already been completed, a variable effect (loss variable effect) is in progress, or a jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is in progress. The timing of T4 also applies when restarting after only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped during a control state in which the performance control board is able to execute a performance according to a command, such as during execution. The screens displayed on the image display device until the power-on designation command is received in ), except that the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped while waiting for a customer, and various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button The return operation and initialization operation described in step 17) are performed, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound.

In addition, when there is a recovery abnormality in various accessories, the initial operation of various accessories and the light emission (flashing red) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 66, 67, or 68. will be held.

(Specific example 2 when restarting after only the power supply to the main control board has stopped)
FIG. 78 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the production control board 130) after the return-to-origin process and the initial operation process have already been completed. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a second specific example in which the system is restarted after being stopped.

Here, during a customer waiting state (including execution of a customer waiting demonstration performance), which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the main control board 110 is A case will be described in which the main power supply is restarted after the main power supply has stopped and the backup power supply continues.

At the timing of T1, the various accessories have already finished their return operations, initial operations, and output of the initialization notification sound, and are now waiting for customers, and the image display device shows the initial pattern when the power is restored. A second standby screen or a customer waiting demo performance screen is displayed in which the production pattern 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped (statically displayed), and the first movable member LED and the second movable The component LED and the production button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, when the image display device is waiting for a customer after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories have finished, the image display device will display a message indicating the loss. A standby screen or a customer-waiting demonstration performance screen in which the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ shown in FIG.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state where the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and displays the sub information. Device 80 (sub first fluctuation indicator 81, sub second fluctuation indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub general figure fluctuation indicator 85, sub general figure pending indicator 86 ) also maintains the displayed content.

Note that even if the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is being displayed (regardless of whether or not after the completion of the variable performance, after receiving the customer waiting state designation command, or If the demonstration standby time has elapsed (after the end of the previous customer waiting demonstration performance), the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

At timing T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and processing is performed to restore the gaming control state. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first hold display 83, the second sub-hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure pending display 86) also maintain their display contents.

At timing T4, when the performance control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are activated. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays a standby screen or a customer waiting demonstration performance screen when the power is restored. A second standby screen is displayed in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (still display), and the audio output device 9 becomes silent.

In addition, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in blue as initial light emission.

At timing T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the LED lights are turned on while waiting for a customer (white light is lit). ).

In addition, when there is a recovery abnormality in various accessories, the initial operation of various accessories or light emission (flashing red) in the abnormality notification mode is similar to the specific example shown in FIG. 70, FIG. 71, or FIG. 72. will be held.

(Specific example 3 where power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped)
FIG. 79 shows the power supply to the main control board 110 during the execution of the fluctuation effect after the return-to-origin process and the initial operation process (while power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130). It is a figure which shows the specific example 3 in the case where only supply is restarted after being stopped.

Here, during execution of a variable performance, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply is turned on. A case will be explained in which the supply of main power is restarted while the supply of power continues.

At timing T1, a variable effect is being executed, a variable effect screen is displayed on the image display device, and variable effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) are output from the audio output device 9. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are lit during fluctuation. Further, a variable display is performed on the sub-first variable display 81, and a pending number “1” is displayed on the sub-first pending display 83.

At timing T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power source) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the fluctuation effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-routine fluctuation display 85, sub-routine reservation display 86) also maintain the display contents. .

At timing T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and processing is performed to restore the gaming control state. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the variable effect screen is displayed, and the sub-information display device 80 (sub-first variable display 81, sub-second variable display 82, sub-first pending display 83, The sub-second hold display 84, the sub-normal pattern fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal pattern pending display 86) also maintain their display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the production control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for the special figure fluctuation transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays a recovery screen that includes the words "Please resume the game." The audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, second sub variable display 82, first sub hold indicator 83, second sub hold indicator 84, The sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 and the sub-normal figure pending display 86) maintain the display contents.

At timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial emission of light in the production button LED is completed and the light is turned off. At the timing T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the second movable member 73 is turned off. Initial operation of member 74 begins.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED end their initial light emission and turn off.

At timing T10, when the production control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110, a confirmation display is performed in case of a loss of the variable production. At this time, the image display device displays a stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (still display). is displayed, and the stop sound "Don♪" is output from the audio output device 9. Further, "1" is displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second reservation number display area 70F. Further, the sub-first variable display 81 takes a loss display mode (non-display mode) indicating that it is a loss.

In addition, when the result of the current variable performance is a jackpot, when the special symbol confirmation command is received by the performance control board 130, a confirmation display for the jackpot of the variable performance is performed. At this time, the image display device displays a finalization screen in which the jackpot effect pattern 70a such as "777" and the special pattern TZ are stopped (statically displayed), and the sub-first variable display 81 Now, it becomes a jackpot display mode indicating that it is a jackpot.

At timing T11, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "0".

In addition, at the timing of T6, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED become the initial light emission mode when the power is restored, but they are turned off or have special light emission that is different from the initial light emission mode when the power is restored. In this manner, it may be possible to understand that a power recovery designation command has been received during a variable performance.

In addition, when there is a recovery abnormality in various accessories, the initial operation of various accessories and the light emission (flashing red) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 70, 71, or 72. will be held.

Further, even if the execution time of the variable performance recognized by the performance control board 130 has elapsed before receiving the special symbol confirmation command, the temporary stop display or stop display of the performance symbol 70a is not performed, The variable display on the sub-first variable display and the sub-second variable display will not end either.

(Specific example 4 when restarting after only the power supply to the main control board has stopped)
FIG. 80 shows the power supply to the main control board 110 during the execution of the jackpot effect after the return-to-origin process and the initial operation process have been completed (while power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130). It is a figure which shows the specific example 4 in the case where only supply is restarted after being stopped.

Here, during the execution of a jackpot performance, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply is turned on. A case will be explained in which the supply of main power is restarted while the supply of power continues.

At the timing of T1, the jackpot effect (here, the first round effect) is being executed, and the image display device displays the jackpot effect (round effect) screen, and the right hit effect is displayed at the top right of the screen. A suggestive right-hitting display image MG is displayed, and a jackpot special symbol TZ ("777") is displayed in a stopped state (stationary display) at the lower right of the screen. Further, "1" is displayed as the pending number in the first pending number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the pending number in the second pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot. In addition, a jackpot display (lighting) is performed on the sub-first variable display 81.

At timing T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-routine fluctuation display 85, sub-routine reservation display 86) also maintain the display contents. .

At timing T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and processing is performed to restore the gaming control state. At this time, the image display device maintains the state where the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first pending display 83, The sub-second hold display 84, the sub-normal pattern fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal pattern pending display 86) also maintain their display contents.

At timing T4, when the production control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for jackpots transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and production button 17 return to their origin. A return operation to the position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays a jackpot that includes the words "Please restart the game (jackpot in progress)". The intermediate recovery screen is displayed, and the audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first hold display 83, The sub-second hold display 84, sub-normal pattern fluctuation display 85, and sub-normal pattern pending display 86) maintain their display contents.

In addition, instead of displaying the returning screen during jackpot, the same returning screen as when the power supply to the main control board 110 (only the main power supply) is stopped during the fluctuating performance shown in FIG. 79 is displayed. You can do it like this.

At timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial emission of light in the production button LED is completed and the light is turned off. At the timing T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the second movable member 73 is turned off. Initial operation of member 74 begins.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED end their initial light emission and turn off.

At timing T10, when the performance control board 130 receives a round designation command for the second opening (second round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the jackpot performance (round performance) is restarted. At this time, the image display device displays a special jackpot effect (round effect) screen instead of a normal jackpot effect screen, and the jackpot special symbol TZ ("777") is not displayed.

Further, "1" is displayed as the pending number in the first pending number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the pending number in the second pending number display area 70F. Furthermore, jackpot performance sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) are output from the audio output device 9, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED light up during the jackpot.

After that, when the production control board 130 receives a round designation command for the third opening (third round) transmitted from the main control board 110, a special jackpot production (round production) screen is displayed on the image display device. , the normal jackpot effect (round effect) screen is displayed.

In addition, when the production control board 130 receives the ending specification command instead of when the production control board 130 receives the round designation command while displaying the special jackpot production screen, the normal ending production screen is displayed. will be displayed.

In addition, if a round designation command is received while a special jackpot production screen is displayed, instead of switching to the normal jackpot production screen, the special jackpot production screen is displayed until the production control board 130 receives an ending specification command. Alternatively, the special jackpot effect screen may be continued until the effect control board 130 receives a customer waiting state designation command or a fluctuation start command after the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, at the timing of T6, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED become the initial light emitting mode when the power is restored, but the light is turned off or the special light emitting mode is different from the initial light emitting mode when the power is restored. It may also be possible to make it possible to recognize that a power restoration designation command has been received during a fluctuation performance.

In addition, when there is a recovery abnormality in various accessories, the initial operation of various accessories and the light emission (flashing red) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 70, 71, or 72. will be held.

In addition, in FIGS. 77 to 80, the various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) were performing the return operation when the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command was received. However, the initial motion of various accessories may be performed without performing the return motion.

In this way, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the control state of the game is initialized, the identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in the plurality of performance symbols 70a are set to the first combination. When the first initial effect symbol ("135") is displayed and the control state of the game is restored, the second initial effect symbol ("135") in which the identification characters in the plurality of effect symbols 70a are the second combination is displayed. 753'') is displayed. By doing this, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the gaming control state has been initialized or whether the gaming control state has been restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the control state of the game is restored, a specific display suggesting that the power supply is to be resumed is performed before displaying the effect pattern 70a on the image display device. is possible, and the display mode of the specific display displayed on the image display device when restoring to the customer waiting state (initial screen display only), and the restoration to the state where the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner and there is no pending memory/with pending memory. The display mode of the specific display later displayed on the image display device (initial screen + display of the returning screen) is made to be different. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing when the stopped power supply is restarted and the game control state is restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D) and the sub hold indicator (sub first hold display It is possible to perform a hold display indicating the number of held memories on each of the sub-second hold display 84), and the power supply that was stopped while there is a held memory is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. In this case, when the image display device is displaying a specific display (resuming screen display) indicating that the power supply is to be resumed, the hold icon display area does not display the hold icon, but the sub hold display displays the hold display. It is possible. By doing this, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to know the number of pending memories before the end of the specific display, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. It becomes possible to suppress this.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the power supply that was stopped during the customer waiting demonstration performance is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the customer waiting demonstration performance screen is displayed again. Instead, a second standby screen is displayed in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, is displayed in a stopped state (still display). By doing this, there is no need to be aware of whether or not the state before the power supply was stopped was during a demonstration while waiting for customers, and the display control when restoring the control state of the game after the power supply was resumed. It becomes possible to reduce such processing load.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the power supply that was stopped during the fluctuation performance is restarted for the sub-variation display devices (sub-first fluctuation display device 81, sub-second fluctuation display device 82). When the control state of the game is restored, even if the special symbol is being fluctuated (returning screen is displayed), if the special symbol is being fluctuated, the fluctuating display ( (blinking display). By doing so, it becomes possible to reduce the processing load when restoring the control state of the game after the power supply is resumed.

In addition, when the control state of the game is restored and the special symbol fluctuation display is executed (returning screen is displayed), the sub fluctuation display (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82), a variable display (blinking display) may be performed. In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it becomes easy to understand that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, for the sub-hold display (the first sub-hold display 83, the second sub-hold display 84), the returning screen is displayed on the image display device. (before the variable display is performed on the sub variable display and at the time of receiving the special symbol storage designation command), the display mode is designed to show the pending number. By doing this, the player can be made aware of the number of pending games immediately after the control state of the game is restored, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, when performing a variable display (blinking display) on the sub-variable display (sub-first variable display 81, sub-second variable display 82) while the recovery screen is displayed on the image display device, Alternatively, the sub-hold indicators (first sub-hold indicator 83, second sub-hold indicator 84) may be configured to display the number of holds in accordance with the start of this variable display. In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to easily understand that the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner and the number of reservations at that time.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. The return operation of various accessories is performed at the same timing as in the case, that is, from the timing when the effect pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device (timing when the initial screen ends). By doing this, the control related to the return operation of various accessories does not become complicated, and it becomes possible to reduce the processing load related to the return operation of various accessories.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, various accessories (first movable member 73, During the return operation of the second movable member 74 and the production button 17), the light emitting parts of various accessories (the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED) are turned off. ing. By doing this, it is possible to distinguish it from the initial motion of various accessories, and it becomes possible to understand that it is in the process of returning to its original state.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when there is a return abnormality in any of the various accessories, the light-emitting part of the accessory that has the return error flashes in red (abnormality notification mode). By doing so, an abnormality is notified. By doing this, it becomes possible to know which accessory has had a return abnormality.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, if the abnormality is notified by flashing red on the light-emitting part of the accessory that has returned abnormally, until the next variable effect starts. Abnormality notifications continue. By doing this, it becomes possible to reliably notify the user of the accessory in which the return abnormality has occurred.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the accessory, a return operation may be performed to return the accessory with the return abnormality to the original position at the timing when the next fluctuating performance is started. Further, in a case where the abnormality notification is performed by blinking the light emitting part of the accessory in which the recovery abnormality occurred in red, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the power supply that was stopped during the customer waiting state is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the effect pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device. The initial motion of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) is started from the timing after the return operation is completed (when the return operation is completed immediately, the timing at which the production pattern 70a is displayed). However, if the power supply that was stopped during the variable display of the special symbol is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the timing before the effect symbol 70a is displayed on the image display device (the display of the recovery screen (Middle), the initial movements of various accessories are performed. By doing this, it becomes possible to perform the initial operation of various accessories at appropriate timings depending on the state when power supply occurs.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, for the board accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74), power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, and initialization of the main RAM 110c is performed. In the case of a power recovery without a power recovery, when the recovery screen is displayed on the image display device (during the special symbol fluctuation display and before the production symbol 70a is displayed), the sub-hold display (sub-first pending display 83 , the initial operation is performed after the sub-second hold display 84) changes to a display mode showing the number of holds. By doing this, it is possible to perform the initial movements of the board objects after the player has grasped the number of reservations (future progress of the game), and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game. Become.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the frame accessory (effect button 17) is activated when the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or when the power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c. , When the returning screen is displayed on the image display device (during the special symbol fluctuation display and before the production symbol 70a is displayed), the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84) ) is designed to perform the initial operation after the display format changes to indicate the number of reservations. By doing this, the initial movement of the frame accessory can be performed after the player understands the number of reservations (future progress of the game), and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. Become.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, when the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, the power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. From the same timing as when the performance pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device (in case the return operation is completed immediately, the timing when the performance pattern 70a is displayed) to the initial stage of the various accessories It is designed to take action. By doing this, the control related to the initial movements of various accessories does not become complicated, and it becomes possible to reduce the processing load related to the initial movements of various accessories.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even if the stop screen is displayed after the returning screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect pattern 70a is output. By doing this, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the variable performance that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game. Become.

In addition, when displaying the stop screen after displaying the returning screen, the stop sound of the effect pattern 70a may not be output.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, if the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, various accessories can be restored by simply displaying the initial screen. The operation, initial operation, and initial light emission are not executed. By doing this, it becomes possible to understand that an abnormality has occurred in which the power-on command cannot be received.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even if the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the When the control board 130 receives a special symbol memory designation command based on winning of a game ball to the starting port from the main control board 110 when it is in a control state where it can execute a performance according to the command, it outputs a winning sound. It is supposed to be done. By doing this, even when the initial screen is displayed, it is possible to accurately notify that a game ball has entered the starting hole.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even if the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the If the control board 130 receives a variation start command from the main control board 110 while it is in a control state in which it can execute a production according to the command, the variation production will be executed without displaying the standby screen. There is. By doing this, the start of the variable presentation is executed without delay, and it becomes possible to execute the variable presentation from beginning to end within the range of the varying time of the special symbol.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even if the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the If the control board 130 receives a fluctuation start command from the main control board 110 when it is in a control state in which it can execute a performance according to a command, the fluctuation performance will start without performing the return movement or initial movement of various accessories. is designed to be executed. By doing this, it becomes possible to perform performances using various accessories without being hindered by the return action or initial action during execution of the variable performance.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the production control board 130 is in a state of waiting for a customer after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have already been completed. Even in the control state where the corresponding performance can be executed, the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation. When the command is received again, the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are executed again. By doing this, the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130 are different, the difference is It becomes possible to eliminate the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the effect control board 130 responds to commands, such as during a variable effect after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are completed. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a performance, the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and the power supply command or power recovery designation command is issued from the main control board 110. When received again, the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are executed again. By doing this, the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130 are different, the difference is It becomes possible to eliminate the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, even during a jackpot game after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have been completed, the main control board 11 When the power supply to the main control board 110 is received again from the main control board 110, such as by restarting the power supply after stopping, the restoration operation of various accessories and the initial operation ( (including initial light emission). By doing this, the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130 are different, the difference is It becomes possible to eliminate the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, it is possible for the performance control board 130 to execute a performance according to a command, such as during a customer waiting state after the initialization notification sound has already been output. Even in the control state, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is supposed to be done. By doing this, the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130 are different, the difference is It becomes possible to eliminate the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, control allows the performance control board 130 to execute a performance according to a command, such as during a variable performance after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished. Even in this state, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed, and a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It looks like this. By doing this, the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130 are different, the difference is It becomes possible to eliminate the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the performance control board 130 responds to the command during a jackpot game (opening performance, round performance, ending performance) after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished. Even if the main control board 110 is in a control state where it is possible to execute a performance, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110. , the initialization notification sound is output again. By doing this, the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130 are different, the difference is It becomes possible to eliminate the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

Note that when a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 instead of performing the return operation and initial operation (including initial light emission) of various accessories. You can just output .

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the production control board 130 is in a state of waiting for a customer after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have already been completed. Even if the controller is in a control state in which it is possible to execute the corresponding performance, the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110. In this case, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and when the power recovery designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. It looks like this. By doing this, the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130 are different, the difference is It becomes possible to eliminate the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

In addition, even if the performance control board 130 is in a control state in which it is possible to execute a performance according to a command, such as during a variable performance after the output of the initialization notification sound has finished or during a jackpot game, the main control board 130 When the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, the first standby screen is displayed instead of the initial screen. ing. By doing this, the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130 are different, the difference is It becomes possible to eliminate the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the effect control board 130 responds to commands, such as during a variable effect after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are completed. Even in a control state where it is possible to execute a performance, the main control board 110 may issue a power recovery designation command by stopping and restarting only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110. When received, the returning screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing this, the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130 are different, the difference is It becomes possible to eliminate the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the performance control board 130 responds to commands such as during a jackpot performance after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have been completed. Even in a control state where it is possible to execute a performance, the main control board 110 may issue a power recovery designation command by stopping and restarting only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110. When received, the returning screen for jackpots is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing this, the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130 are different, the difference is It becomes possible to eliminate the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, the performance control board 130 may execute a performance according to a command, such as during a variable performance or during a jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished. Even in a control state where power is enabled, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed, and a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110 again, the initial screen will be displayed. If the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen and a power recovery designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing this, the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130 are different, the difference is It becomes possible to eliminate the problem, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, in a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the performance control board 130 Even if the power supply to the main control board 130 is stopped while the power supply to the board 130 continues, the previous display screen can continue to be displayed. By doing this, the player will not feel uncomfortable when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 65 to 80, in a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the performance control board 130 Even if the power supply to the main control board 130 is restarted after the power supply to the main control board 130 is stopped while the power supply to the board 130 is continued, the display screen up to that point can be continuously displayed. By doing this, when the power supply to the main control means is resumed, the player will not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

(Modification 1 when only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped)
FIG. 81 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the production control board 130) after the return-to-origin process and the initial operation process have already been completed. It is a figure which shows the modification 1 when restarting after stopping.

Here, during the customer waiting state, which is one of the control states in which the production control board 130 can execute production according to commands, only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is turned off. A case will be described in which the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped.

At the timing of T1, the various accessories have already finished their return operations, initial operations, and output of the initialization notification sound, and are now waiting for customers, and the image display device shows the initial pattern when the power is restored. A second standby screen is displayed in which a certain "753" production symbol 70a and special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED are displayed. The lights are on while waiting for customers.

In addition, if the timing of T1 is the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the customer waiting state after the end of the variable performance that was executed after the output of the initialization notification sound, the image display device In this case, a standby screen is displayed in which the loss effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped (statically displayed).

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T2, when only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen and displays the sub Information display device 80 (sub-first fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-general fluctuation display 85, sub-general reservation display 86) also maintains the displayed content.

Note that even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is being displayed (regardless of whether or not after the completion of the variable effect, after receiving the customer waiting state designation command, or If the demonstration standby time has elapsed (after the completion of the customer waiting demonstration performance), the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

At timing T3, when power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, the image display device displays an initial screen containing the words "Loading" instead of the second standby screen, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED are turned off. do.

At this time, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84, sub regular fluctuation display 85, sub The general figure holding display 86) is hidden.

At timing T4, when the production control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and production button 17 are returned to their origin positions. The operation begins.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain off, and instead of the initial screen, "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, is displayed on the image display device. A first standby screen is displayed in which the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped (statically displayed), and the audio output device 9 issues an initialization notification consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared". Sound is output.

In addition, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At timing T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the LED lights are turned on while waiting for a customer (white light is lit). ), and when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed at timing T10, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, during the execution of the customer waiting demonstration performance after the return operation of various characters, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, or during the execution of variable effects (loss variable effect, jackpot variable effect), or jackpot Even in the case where the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed during the performance (opening, round game, ending), the screen displayed on the image display device at the timing of T3 is The example shown in FIG. 77 is the same as the example shown in FIG. 77, except that it is a customer waiting demonstration production screen, a variable production screen (loss variation production screen, jackpot variation production screen), and a jackpot production screen (opening production screen, round game production screen, ending production screen). is basically the same.

(Modification 2 when only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped)
FIG. 82 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the production control board 130) after the return-to-origin process and the initial operation process have already been completed. It is a figure which shows the modification 2 when restarting after stopping.

Here, during a customer waiting state, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply is turned off. A case will be described in which the main power supply is restarted while the supply continues.

At the timing of T1, if the various accessories are already waiting for customers after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound have finished, the image display device will display the initial symbol when the power is restored. A second standby screen or a customer waiting demo performance screen is displayed in which the production pattern 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped (statically displayed), and the first movable member LED and the second movable member The LED and the performance button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, when the image display device is waiting for a customer after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories have finished, the image display device will display a message indicating the loss. A standby screen or a customer-waiting demonstration performance screen in which the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ shown in FIG.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state where the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and displays the sub information. Device 80 (sub first fluctuation indicator 81, sub second fluctuation indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub general figure fluctuation indicator 85, sub general figure pending indicator 86 ) also maintains the displayed content.

Note that even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is being displayed (regardless of whether or not after the completion of the variable effect, after receiving the customer waiting state designation command, or If the demonstration standby time has elapsed (after the completion of the customer waiting demonstration performance), the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

At timing T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and processing is performed to restore the control state of the game. At this time, the image display device displays an initial screen including the words "Reading", and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are turned off.

At this time, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84, sub regular fluctuation display 85, sub The general figure holding display 86) is hidden.

At timing T4, when the performance control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are activated. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain off, and instead of the initial screen, "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, is displayed on the image display device. A second standby screen is displayed in which the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (still display).

In addition, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in blue as initial light emission.

At timing T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the LED lights are turned on while waiting for a customer (white light is lit). ).

In addition, during the execution of the customer waiting demonstration performance after the return operation of various characters, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, or during the execution of variable effects (loss variable effect, jackpot variable effect), or jackpot Even if the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding backup power supply) is stopped and restarted during the performance (opening, round game, ending), the screen displayed on the image display device at the timing of T3 is The screens are shown in FIGS. 78 to 80, except that they are customer waiting demonstration performance screens, variable performance screens (loss variable performance screen, jackpot variable performance screen), and jackpot performance screens (opening performance screen, round game performance screen, ending performance screen). This is basically the same as the example above.

In addition, in FIGS. 81 and 82, various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) were performing the return operation when receiving the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command. However, the initial motion of various accessories may be performed without performing the return motion.

In this way, according to the modification shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed, the standby screen on which the effect pattern 70a is displayed is different from the standby screen. It is designed to switch to the initial screen. By doing this, it becomes possible to understand that the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped (there is an abnormality in the main control board 110).

Further, according to the modification shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are , and turn off the performance button LED. By doing this, it becomes easier to understand that the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped (there is an abnormality in the main control board 110).

In addition, the initial movements of various accessories do not start from the timing when the initial screen switches to the standby screen, but from the timing when the initial screen switches to the initial screen, or from the timing before switching from the initial screen to the standby screen. The initial operation may be started.

In addition, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the standby screen is switched to the initial screen when a power-on command (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command) is received. It may also be possible to switch to a screen. In this case, the initial movements of various accessories may be started at the timing when the standby screen switches to the initial screen, or at the timing before switching from the initial screen to the standby screen, or from the initial screen to the standby screen. The initial movements of various accessories may be started at the switched timing.

Further, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the initial screen may be displayed after switching from the standby screen to the non-display state. In this case, the initial movements of various accessories may be started from the timing when the hidden state is switched to the initial screen, or from the timing before switching from the initial screen to the standby screen, or from the initial screen to the standby screen. The initial motion of various accessories may be started at the timing when the switch is made.

(Modified example when there is a return error in the second movable member after power is turned on)
FIG. 83 is a diagram illustrating a modification in the case where there is a return abnormality in the second movable member 74 after power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives the power-on designation command sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and production button 17 are returned to their origin positions. The operation begins.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and A first standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T4, when the return-to-origin process ends with a return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED flash red to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality. (abnormality notification mode), the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the performance button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial emission of light in the production button LED is completed and the lighting is turned on while waiting for a customer (white lighting), and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is completed. The initial operation process ends without any operation being performed.

At the timing T6, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing T7, the game ball is not inserted into the first starting port 45. When the first special symbol storage designation command based on winning (first pending number = 1) is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "1", and the first pending icon display area 70B is displayed. At the same time as the first hold icon is displayed, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon♪".

At timing T8, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0" and the fluctuation starts. The performance (fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member The LED and the performance button LED light up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

Note that even if there is a return error in the first movable member 73 when the power is turned on, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED will blink red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return error. , the first movable member 73, and the second movable member 74 are configured to complete the initial motion processing without performing the initial motion.

Furthermore, even when the power is restored, if there is a return error in the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED will notify the occurrence of the return error. In order to do so, it flashes in red (abnormality notification mode), and the initial operation process ends without performing the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74.

In this way, according to the modification shown in FIG. 83, when there is a return abnormality in one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, the return abnormality is detected not only in the movable member with the return abnormality. Initial operations are also not performed for movable members that are not present. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that one movable member collides with the other movable member and breaks down. In addition, it is possible to prevent the movable members (especially the movable member in which the return abnormality has not occurred) from ceasing to operate during the execution of the game (variable performance, jackpot game), thereby reducing the interest in the game. This makes it possible to prevent

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 83, when there is a return abnormality in one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED will flash red to notify you of a recovery error. By doing this, it becomes easier to understand that there is an abnormality in the movable member, compared to a case where only the movable member LED provided on one of the movable members having the return abnormality blinks red.

Furthermore, according to the modification shown in FIG. 83, even if one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the first movable member 73 and the second The initial operation is performed for the effect buttons 17 that have no risk of colliding with the member 74. By doing this, it is possible to check the operation of the performance button 17, and it becomes possible to understand an abnormality in the performance button 17.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 83, even if there is a return abnormality in one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, the production button LED provided on the production button 17 is restored. It is designed to emit an initial light without flashing red to notify of an abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to easily understand that there is no return abnormality in the production button 17.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74, the initial operation process may be completed without performing the initial operation for the production button 17 as well. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED may blink red to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

Further, when there is a return abnormality in the production button 17, the initial operation process may be completed without performing the initial operation for the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 as well. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED may blink red to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

(Example of a performance when restarting after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped during execution of the icon change performance and lamp change performance)
FIG. 84 and FIG. 85 are diagrams showing an example of a performance when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restarted after being stopped during execution of the icon change performance and the lamp change performance.

As shown in FIG. 84(a), when the first pending icon (CD icon) is displayed on the first display section 70B1 and the second display section 70B2 of the first pending icon display area 70B, "728 ” is displayed in a stopped state.

After that, when the variable effect in which the SPSP reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. The first pending icon (CD icon) displayed in the area 70B2 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display area 70B1, respectively.

Here, the display mode of the icon shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red character icon, thereby starting the icon change effect, and accordingly, the winning opening lamp NR is turned off. The lamp change effect starts when the lamp changes to a blinking red state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 84(c), while the effect pattern 70a of "3" is stopped (temporarily stopped) displayed in the left and right variable display areas of the effect pattern 70a that was being displayed in a variable manner, the center variable display area is A reach effect (normal reach) in which the effect pattern 70a is displayed variably is executed.

Then, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. 84(d), the SP reach effect is started, and the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the second The pending icon display area 70D is erased together with the pending icon.

Thereafter, when the SPSP reaches reach, as shown in FIG. 84(e), the SPSP reach effect is started and the icon display area 70C in which the icon is displayed is erased together with the icon. At this time, the winning a prize opening lamp NR does not turn off as the icon disappears, and the lamp change performance in the winning a prize opening lamp NR continues.

When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, as shown in FIG. 84(f), the image display device becomes non-display and the winning slot lamp NR is turned off.

After that, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. 85(g), an initial screen including the words "Loading" is displayed on the image display device, but the winning slot lamp NR is turned off. maintain the condition.

Then, when the production control board 130 receives the second power restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, as shown in FIG. The returning screen including is displayed over the execution period of the SPSP reach effect (including the execution period of the promotion effect to determine whether or not the temporarily stopped jackpot effect symbol is promoted to a jackpot effect symbol with higher value for the player). However, even here, the winning slot lamp NR remains off.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect that results in a loss ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special symbol confirmation command indicating a loss), as shown in FIG. 85(i), a temporary stop display (shaking A stop screen (second standby screen) is displayed in which the production pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are stopped (statically displayed) without performing any fluctuation), The variable effect ends without restarting the lamp change effect.

At this time, the same CD icon as before the power supply was stopped is displayed on the first display section 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, but the rectangular By displaying the area image, a display space (display area) for the icon is secured in a state where an effect image such as a background image can be displayed.

After that, when the next variable effect is started, as shown in FIG. 85(j), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started and is displayed on the first display section 70B1 and the second display section 70B2. The first pending icon (CD icon) that is displayed is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display section 70B1.

On the other hand, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect that results in a jackpot ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special symbol confirmation command indicating a jackpot), as shown in FIG. The jackpot effect pattern 70a of "777" (the "3" that formed the reach state before the power cutoff) indicates the type of the current jackpot game (here, the first jackpot game) without performing any fluctuating/oscillating display). A combination of production symbols different from the reach combination according to the production symbol ↓3) and a stop screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) will be displayed, and the lamp change production will be resumed with the winning opening lamp NR. The variable performance ends without any change.

In addition to the variation production in which the SPSP reach performance is executed, other variation productions (variation production in which a normal variation is executed, variation production in which a shortened variation is executed, variation production in which a normal reach production is executed, SP reach production) Regarding the fluctuating performance), when the power supply that was stopped during the execution is restarted and the execution period of the performance ends, the temporary stop display (swinging fluctuation/swinging display) of the performance pattern 70a is not performed and "753'' loss effect pattern 70a, or a jackpot effect pattern that is the same combination of effect patterns or a combination of different effect patterns as the reach combination based on the effect patterns that formed the reach state before the power cut-off is displayed in a stopped state (static display). will be done.

In addition, regarding the special symbol TZ, it depends on whether the game control state is initialized or restored, whether the subsequent state is the normal gaming state, or the specific gaming state (low accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state). Regardless of whether there is a special symbol TZ, the special symbol TZ has the same display mode (shape, design) and is statically displayed (statically displayed) with numbers that are the same combination as the performance symbol 70a.

After that, when the opening of the jackpot game starts, as shown in FIG. 85(l), the image display device displays information indicating the type of jackpot game ("MAX jackpot" indicating that it is the first jackpot game). The opening performance including the first pending icon display area 70B, the second pending icon display area 70D, and the icon display area 70C are erased together with the icons.

Although the winning slot lamp NR remains off while the initial screen and/or returning screen is displayed, the lighting mode (for example, white lighting) that is not used in the lamp change effect (does not indicate the level of expectation of winning a jackpot) ) may turn on the winning opening lamp NR.

As described above, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the power supply that was stopped during execution of the fluctuating production in which the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped and displayed (shaking variation) and then stopped is restarted. After the control state of the game is restored, the special symbol confirmation command after the special symbol fluctuation time has elapsed (if the special symbol confirmation command is missed and the transition to the customer waiting state is subsequently made, the customer waiting state designation is executed) When a command) is received, the performance pattern 70a is not temporarily stopped (swaying fluctuation/swinging display) but is displayed stopped (still display). By doing this, the player can be made aware that the variable performance that was being executed at the time the power supply was stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the production symbols 70a are displayed in a stopped state (static display) after the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the loss variation production is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. In this case, the combination of performance symbols that are the initial symbols when the power is restored is displayed in a stopped state (stationary display) instead of the normal loss performance symbols. By doing this, there is no need to perform a complicated process such as determining by lottery the performance symbols to be displayed in a stopped state (stationary display), and the power supply is restored to restore the control state of the game, and the power supply is It becomes possible to know that the variable performance that was being executed at the time of stopping has ended.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the production symbols are stopped and displayed (stationary display) after the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation production is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. In this case, the jackpot effect symbol combination is displayed in a stopped state (static display). By doing this, it is possible to understand that the power supply is restored to restore the control state of the game, and that the fluctuating performance that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped was a jackpot fluctuating performance. Become.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, when the combination of jackpot production symbols is displayed in a stopped state (static display) after the control state of the game is restored, a ready-to-reach state is formed before the power supply is stopped. It is possible to stop display (still display) a combination of jackpot effect symbols that is different from the reach combination based on the effect patterns that were previously used. By doing this, it is not necessary to be aware of the jackpot effect symbols that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed before the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to display control after the power supply is restarted.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, if the fluctuating production that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped includes the execution period of the promotion production described above, the power supply is resumed and the control is performed. After the state is restored, the jackpot effect symbols are stopped and displayed (stationary display) without executing the promotion effect. By doing this, unnecessary effects are not performed before the effect symbols are stopped and displayed (statically displayed), so it is possible to avoid the possibility that the variable effect that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped was a jackpot variable effect. It becomes possible for the player to immediately understand the

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, there are two cases in which the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the loss variation production is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, and a case where the power supply that stopped during the execution of the jackpot variation production is restored. The display mode (type of display screen, display order of display screens) of the image display device after power supply is restarted is the same as when power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. By doing this, it is possible to perform simple display control without being aware of whether a loss fluctuation effect or a jackpot fluctuation effect is being executed, and the display after power supply is resumed. It becomes possible to reduce the processing load related to control.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the special symbol TZ will be displayed in the same manner as before the power supply was stopped after the power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. Then, numbers that are in the same combination as the effect pattern 70a are displayed in a stopped state (statically displayed). By doing this, it becomes easier to understand that the fluctuating effect that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped has ended.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, if the power supply that was stopped while the icon was being displayed is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the next screen will be displayed after the display of the returning screen is finished. Until the fluctuation effect (scrolling of the effect pattern 70a) starts, a rectangular area image is displayed in the icon display area 70C, so that the display space (display area) of the icon is changed to a background image, etc. The effect image is secured in a state where it can be displayed, but the icon is not displayed. By doing this, the player can be made aware that the variable performance that was being executed at the time the power supply was stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the example effects shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, if the power supply that was stopped while the hold icon was displayed is restarted and the game control status is restored, the next Until the fluctuation effect starts, a rectangular area image is displayed in the hold icon display area, so that the display space (display area) of the hold icon is in a state where it is possible to display a effect image such as a background image. It is now reserved and a pending icon is displayed. By doing this, even if the power supply is interrupted, it is possible to know that the suspended variable effects have not disappeared, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. becomes.

In addition, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the variation production (winning opening lamp NR) corresponding to the icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change production is changed to the lighting color (blue, red, etc.) with high expectation of winning the jackpot. If the power supply that was stopped during the memorization of the special figure judgment information that will change to , rainbow) is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the winning opening lamp NR will be hit as a jackpot without restarting the lamp change effect. The notification mode (lights off or lit in white) does not indicate the degree of expectation of winning. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is resumed, and to avoid a situation where the player is confused, such as when the lamp change effect is restarted even though the variable effect has not been executed. It becomes possible.

In addition, after the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect ends, a stop screen with the jackpot effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ stopped is displayed, but as in the case of a loss, when the power is restored, A second standby screen may be displayed in which the initial symbol "753" production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (still display).

In addition, after the execution period of the jackpot fluctuating effect ends, a stop screen in which the jackpot effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped and displayed is displayed, but the jackpot effect pattern 70a is displayed without displaying the stop screen. It is also possible to start an opening performance of a jackpot game in which the is not displayed. In addition, information indicating the type of jackpot game may be displayed in the opening performance, a jackpot special symbol TZ of "777" may be displayed, or a special symbol "753" which is the initial symbol when the power is restored. TZ may also be displayed.

In addition, after the execution period of the loss fluctuation performance ends, the performance symbol 70a, which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ are displayed, and after the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation performance ends, the jackpot The opening performance of the jackpot game may be started without displaying the stop screen in which the performance symbols 70a and the special symbols TZ are stopped and displayed.

In addition, if it is possible to perform a specific performance that incites whether or not a jackpot game will be executed without displaying the production symbol 70a in a reach state in a variable production (makes people expect that a jackpot game will be executed), the specification After the power supply that was stopped during execution of the performance is resumed and the control state is restored, if it is a loss, the performance symbol 70a which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration is stopped (statically displayed), and if it is a jackpot, the performance symbol 70a is displayed in a stopped state (static display). The jackpot effect pattern 70a may be displayed in a stopped state (stationary display).

In addition, when the combination of jackpot effect symbols is stopped and displayed (statically displayed) after the control state of the game is restored, one of the combinations of jackpot effect symbols corresponding to the type of jackpot game to be executed thereafter. may be stopped and displayed.

In this case, for example, the combination of jackpot effect symbols suggesting execution of the first jackpot game is "333" and "777", and the combination of jackpot effect symbols suggesting execution of the second jackpot game is "222" and " 444'', ``666'', and ``888'', and the combination of jackpot effect symbols suggesting execution of the third jackpot game is ``111'', ``555'', and ``999''.

If the reach combination before the power supply is stopped is "1↓1" which constitutes a part of the jackpot effect symbol combination that suggests the execution of the third jackpot game, then the jackpot game to be executed after that is the first jackpot game. In the case of a jackpot game, either "333" or "777" (a combination of jackpot effect symbols that is different from the reach combination based on the effect symbols that formed the reach state) is stopped and displayed, and then the game is executed. If the jackpot game is the third jackpot game, any one of "111", "555", and "999" (a combination of jackpot effect symbols that is the same as or different from the reach combination of the effect symbols that formed the reach state) It is a good idea to stop and display the .

In addition, regarding the special symbol TZ, after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, instead of being displayed in a stopped state (stationary display) with numbers that are the same combination as the production symbol 70a, it becomes a combination different from the production symbol 70a. The display may be displayed in a stopped state (stationary display) using numbers.

In addition, if the normal gaming state and the customer waiting state occur after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (stationary display), while the power supply is stopped. After restarting and restoring the control state, if the specific gaming state (low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state) and customer waiting state, the production pattern 70a is not displayed in a stopped state (static display), The special symbol TZ may be displayed in a stopped state (stationary display).

(Example of a performance when restarting after power supply to the gaming machine is stopped during execution of a continuous notice performance, a pending icon change performance, and a lamp change performance)
FIGS. 86 and 87 are diagrams illustrating an example of a performance when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the continuous preview performance, the pending icon change performance, and the lamp change performance.

As shown in FIG. 86(a), the first pending icon (CD icon) is displayed on the first display section 70B1, second display section 70B2, and third display section 70B3 of the first pending icon display area 70B. Suppose that the loss effect pattern 70a of "728" is stopped and displayed when the player is in the game.

After that, when the pre-variation variation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 86(b), the variation display of the production pattern 70a is started, and the first display section 70B1, the second display section 70B2, and The first hold icon (CD icon) displayed on the third display section 70B3 is shifted and displayed on the icon display area 70C, the first display section 70B1, and the second display section 70B2, respectively.

Here, the first performance of the continuous notice performance is started by displaying the effect image EF around the performance symbol 70a that starts the variable display, and the first pending icon ( By changing the display mode of the final icon display mode (red character icon) to a blue character icon, the pending icon change effect is started, and along with this, the prize opening lamp NR changes from an extinguished state to a blinking blue state. By doing so, the lamp change effect will start.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86(c), the effect image EF displayed around the effect pattern 70a is erased, and the effect image 70a starts scrolling at high speed. Then, when the variable time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 86(d), after the performance symbol 70a indicating a loss is temporarily stopped and displayed, the loss performance symbol 70a of "259" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. .

After that, when the pre-variation variation effect is started, as shown in FIG. The displayed first pending icon is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display section 70B1, respectively.

Here, the second effect of the continuous notice effect is started by displaying the effect image EF around the effect image 70a that starts the variable display, and the pending icon change effect and the lamp change effect continue. Become.

Then, as shown in FIG. 86(f), the effect image EF displayed around the effect pattern 70a is erased, and the effect image 70a starts scrolling at high speed. When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, as shown in FIG. 86(g), the image display device becomes non-display and the winning slot lamp NR is turned off.

After that, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. To maintain a state where the lights are turned off without restarting the change performance.

Then, when the production control board 130 receives the second power restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, as shown in FIG. A returning screen including the above is displayed during the execution period of the advance variation, but the winning a prize opening lamp NR remains in the off state here as well.

After that, when the execution period of the advance variation ends (the production control board 130 receives a special symbol confirmation command indicating a loss), as shown in FIG. 87(j), a temporary stop display (shaking variation) of the production symbol 70a is performed. A stop screen is displayed in which the initial symbol 753, the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (statically displayed), and the lamp change effect does not restart and changes in advance. ends.

At this time, a CD icon that is not the blue character icon before the power supply is stopped is displayed on the first display section 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C. However, by displaying a rectangular area image, a display space (display area) for the icon is secured in a state where an effect image such as a background image can be displayed.

After that, when the variable effect in which the SPSP reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 87(k), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the 1 pending icon (CD icon) is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C.

Here, if a lottery regarding the newly executed icon change effect is won, the display mode of the icon shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C is changed to a blue character icon according to the result. The icon change effect is started. On the other hand, since the lottery related to the lamp change effect is not newly executed, the prize opening lamp NR remains in the off state and the lamp change effect is not restarted.

In addition, if you win the lottery regarding the alternative preview performance that will be held when the power supply is resumed, the mini character MCB will be displayed on the image display device according to the result, and the mini character MCB will move out of the frame and replace it. A preview performance is performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 87(l), the lines uttered by ally A are displayed in the lines window displayed on the image display device, and the voice output device 9 emits a voice corresponding to the lines, "Your chance has arrived!" When the is displayed, the dialogue preview performance is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 87(m), the effect pattern 70a of "3" is stopped displayed (temporarily stopped) in the left and right variable display areas of the effect pattern 70a that was being displayed in a variable manner, and the center variable display area is A reach effect (normal reach) in which the effect pattern 70a is displayed variably is executed.

After that, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. 87(n), the SP reach effect is started, and the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the second The pending icon display area 70D is erased.

Then, when the SPSP reaches reach, as shown in FIG. 87(o), the SPSP reach effect is started and the icon display area 70C is erased together with the icon.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect that becomes a jackpot ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special symbol confirmation command indicating a jackpot), as shown in FIG. 87(p), the current jackpot game (here, the first The jackpot effect pattern 70a of "333" indicating the type of jackpot game) and the special pattern TZ are temporarily stopped and displayed (fluctuation fluctuation) and then stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation performance ends.

Although the winning slot lamp NR remains off while the initial screen and/or returning screen is displayed, the lighting mode (for example, white lighting) that is not used in the lamp change effect (does not indicate the level of expectation of winning a jackpot) ) may turn on the winning opening lamp NR.

In addition, if the special symbol confirmation command cannot be received during the fluctuation performance (temporary stop display (shaking fluctuation) of the performance pattern 70a), the performance pattern 70a that is temporarily stopped displaying (shaking fluctuation) will not be displayed stop. The temporary stop display (shaking fluctuation) will continue.

As described above, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the continuous notice production is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the special figure that was stored at the time of recovery is restored. In the variable performance corresponding to the determination information, an alternative preview performance different from the continuous preview performance can be executed without restarting the continuous preview performance. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player due to the termination of the continuous preview performance due to the stoppage of power supply, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, when the icon is displayed as a special icon (including cases where the final display mode has not changed and cases where the final display mode has changed) When the power supply that was stopped while the icon was being displayed is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the pending icon that was displayed as a special icon is displayed as a normal icon. By doing this, the user does not need to be aware of the display mode of the pending icon when the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to display control after the power supply is restarted.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the icon change production is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the special figure determination information that was stored at the time of recovery In the variable performance corresponding to , the pending icon change performance is not executed, but the icon change performance can be executed again. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction caused by the termination of the icon change performance due to the stoppage of power supply, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, even when the icon change production is executed again while the variation production corresponding to the special figure determination information stored at the time of restoration is being executed, The process will no longer continue from the stage that was suggested before the power supply was cut off. By doing this, it is possible to execute the icon change performance in accordance with the contents of the current variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 86 and 87, the variable production (winning opening lamp NR) corresponding to the pending icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change production is changed to the lighting color (blue, red, etc.) with high expectation of winning the jackpot. Even if the power supply that was stopped during the memorization of the special figure judgment information that will cause the lamp to change to a rainbow) is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the winning slot will not restart without restarting the lamp change effect. The lamp NR is set in a notification mode (unlit or lit white) that does not suggest the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is resumed, and to avoid a situation where the player is confused, such as when the lamp change effect is restarted even though the variable effect has not been executed. It becomes possible.

(Specific example when the connection status of various detection means changes)
FIGS. 88(a) and 88(b) are diagrams showing specific examples when the connection states of various detection means change during the customer waiting state.

Here, the wiring from the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are combined into one connector, and this connector is connected to the connector of the main control board 110. shall be.

First, FIG. 88(a) will be explained.
FIG. 88(a) is a diagram showing a specific example when the connection state of the first starting port detection switch 45a changes during the customer waiting state.

It is assumed that the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are normally connected to the main control board 110 at timing T1. At this time, the image display device displays a first standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display). .

At timing T2, for example, if the connector connected to the main control board 110 becomes half-plugged and only the first starting port detection switch 45a becomes unconnected, the main control board 110 detects the occurrence of a connection error. Then, connection error notification is executed by the production control board 130.

At this time, the image display device displays an error notification image EG including the words "Connection error detected" indicating that a connection error has occurred, and the audio output device 9 outputs an alarm and a message "Connection error detected." A connection error notification sound consisting of the voice is output.

At timing T3, when the half-insertion of the connector connected to the main control board 110 is released and the first starting port detection switch 45a returns to the connected state, the main control board 110 detects that the connection error has been released. However, the connection error notification continues until the gaming machine 1 is powered off.

Next, FIG. 88(b) will be explained.
FIG. 88(b) is a diagram showing a specific example when the connection state of the first starting port detection switch 45a, magnetic detection sensor 53a, and radio wave detection sensor 54a changes during the customer waiting state.

It is assumed that the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are normally connected to the main control board 110 at timing T1. At this time, the image display device displays a first standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display). .

At timing T2, for example, if the connector connected to the main control board 110 is in a half-plugged state and the first starting port detection switch 45a, magnetic detection sensor 53a, and radio wave detection sensor 54a are in an unconnected state, The main control board 110 detects the occurrence of a magnetic error, a radio wave error, and a connection error, and the production control board 130 executes a magnetic error notification, a radio wave error notification, and a connection error notification.

At this time, the image display device displays the words "Magnetic error detected" indicating the occurrence of a magnetic error, the words "Radio wave error detected" indicating the occurrence of a radio wave error, and the words "Connection error detected" indicating the occurrence of a connection error. An error notification image EG including the words ``Detection'' is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs a magnetic error notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying ``Magnetic error.''

At timing T3, when the half-insertion of the connector connected to the main control board 110 is released and the magnetic detection sensor 53a, the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and the first starting port detection switch 45a return to the connected state, the main control board 110, it is detected that the magnetic error, radio wave error, and connection error have been canceled, but various error notifications continue until the gaming machine 1 is powered off.

Note that if the signal line for command communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 changes from a connected state to an unconnected state, the main control board 110 will not detect the occurrence of a connection error and will not issue an error. Notification is not executed.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 88, specific detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection When the sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a change from a connected state to a disconnected state, an error notification is performed. By doing this, it is possible to detect the occurrence of an abnormality (partially inserted connector, disconnection, fraudulent activity), and to take prompt action.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 88, specific detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a) for detecting a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) is non-operating. Even when the connected state is restored from the connected state, error notification of magnetic errors and radio wave errors continues until the gaming machine 1 is powered off. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts against the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 88, even if the payout control board 120 changes from a connected state to an unconnected state, no error notification is performed. By doing this, the game can be continued as is in cases where the possibility of fraudulent activity is low, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

Note that this also applies when power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started while the specific detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a) connected to the main control board 110 is not connected. , various error notifications (connection error notification, magnetic error notification, in the same notification mode as in FIG. Radio wave error notification) may also be performed.

In this case, even if the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a change from the unconnected state to the connected state, the error notification (magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification) continues, but the first starting port detection switch 45a The connection error notification may be canceled when the state changes from the unconnected state to the connected state. In this way, the game can be continued as is in cases where the possibility of fraudulent activity is low, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

In addition, the radio wave error notification sound related to a radio wave error that has a lower priority (importance) than a magnetic error, and the connection error notification sound related to a connection error that has a lower priority (importance) than a radio wave error, are considered to be magnetic errors. Although the notification sounds are not output when they occur simultaneously, the notification sounds related to the errors that have occurred may be output in order.

Furthermore, in magnetic error notification, radio error notification, and connection error notification, an error notification sound may be output without displaying the error notification image EG, or an error notification sound may be output while the error notification image EG is displayed. You may also choose not to output it.

(Second embodiment)
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Initial processing of accessories in the lamp/drive control section)
Accessory initial processing by the lamp/drive control section 150 will be explained using FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing accessory initial processing by the lamp/drive control section 150.
In addition, here, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same process as the accessory initial process of 1st Embodiment, description is abbreviate|omitted, and different process is demonstrated.

In step R101A, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether there is a power ON flag set in the lamp RAM 150c at the time of starting power supply. If there is no power ON flag, the process moves to step R102A, and if there is a power ON flag, the power ON flag is cleared in step R101B.

In step R102A, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 has been received. Then, the process moves to step R102B, and if the power-on command has not been received, the process moves to step R104.

In step R102B, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the power was turned on. If a predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, 60 seconds after the last power ON, when the return operation and initial operation should have been completed), the process moves to step R103, and if the predetermined time has not elapsed. If so, the process moves to step R104.

In step R103, the lamp CPU 150a executes the origin return process of the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) at the initial processing number updated in each process of accessory initial processing. Set "1".

As described above, according to the modified example of the accessory initialization process shown in FIG. 89, when power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started, the return operation and initial operation of various accessories are started. It has become. By doing this, there is no need to be aware of whether the control state of the game is initialized or the control state of the game is restored. It becomes possible to reduce the processing load related to the operation.

Furthermore, according to the modified example of the accessory initialization process shown in FIG. 89, the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) is received, the restoration operation of various accessories and the initial operation are performed again. By doing this, the main control board 110 did not start up normally and the power-on command was sent later than usual (an abnormality related to the power line from the power board 160 to the main control board 110 occurred). This makes it possible to understand what is being done.

In addition, when a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) is received, the return operation of various accessories and , the initial operation may be performed. In this way, the player does not need to be aware of the period of time that has elapsed since power supply to the gaming machine 1 was started, and it becomes possible to simplify the process when the power-on command is received.

(Specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power is turned on)
FIG. 90 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) after power-on accompanied by initialization of main RAM 110c.

Note that power-on with initialization of the main RAM 110c includes power-on where the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change process is performed, and power-on where the main RAM 110c is initialized without the setting change process being performed. However, here, a case will be described in which the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without any setting change processing being performed.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. Further, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in red and white. Then, the lighting mode of the production button LED changes and lights up in the order of red → green → blue.

At this time, the image display device displays a first standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the sound The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

Furthermore, upon receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At the timing T4, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are lit while waiting for a customer (lights white). Become. At timing T7, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

At timing T8, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound. “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T9, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0" and the fluctuation starts. The performance (fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "0".

(Specific example when there is a return error in the second movable member after power is turned on)
FIG. 91 is a diagram illustrating a specific example where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, a case will be described in which the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without any setting change processing being performed.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. In addition, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T3, when the origin return process ends with a return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. . Further, the second movable member LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in red and white, and the production button LED changes from red to white. Lights up in the order of green → blue.

At this time, the image display device displays a first standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the sound The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

Furthermore, upon receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T4, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at timing T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation processing is performed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74. finish.

At timing T6, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state occurs.

At timing T7, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound. “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T8, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0" and the fluctuation starts. The performance (fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED It lights up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when there is a return error in the first movable member after power is turned on)
FIG. 92 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 after power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, a case will be described in which the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without any setting change processing being performed.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. In addition, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where a return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the production button 17 is started.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 as a power-on command, the light emitting mode of the second movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in red and white. , the lighting mode of the production button LED changes and lights up in the order of red → green → blue.

At this time, the image display device displays a first standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the sound The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

Furthermore, upon receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At the timing T4, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T5, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is performed without the initial operation of the first movable member 73 being performed. finish.

At timing T7, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound. “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T8, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0" and the fluctuation starts. The performance (fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED It lights up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example of a case where there is a return error in the production button after the power is turned on)
FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a specific example where there is a return abnormality in the production button 17 after the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, a case will be described in which the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without any setting change processing being performed.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. In addition, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where a return abnormality has occurred in the production button 17, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the performance button LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a recovery abnormality.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. The operation will not start.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in red and white. do.

At this time, the image display device displays a first standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the sound The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

Furthermore, upon receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T4, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are lit (white) while waiting for a customer. At timing T6, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state occurs.

At timing T7, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound. “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T8, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0" and the fluctuation starts. The performance (fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the production button LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED are fluctuating. The light is turned on, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

In addition, in the specific example shown in FIGS. 90 to 93, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without any setting change processing is described when the power is turned on, but the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change is performed. In the case of power-on, after a dark screen (initial screen) is displayed, the production control board 130 receives a setting change designation command, and a setting changing screen is displayed, and then the power-on designation command is sent to production control. When the board 130 receives the signal, a first standby screen is displayed and the return operations and initial operations of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) are started. . Note that the first standby screen may be displayed by receiving the setting value designation command.

(Specific example when there is no abnormality in various accessories returning after power is restored)
FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) after power restoration without initialization of main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. Further, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives the first power recovery designation command as the power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in blue and white. At the same time, the light emitting manner of the second movable member LED and the performance button LED changes and lights up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays a second standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (still display).

Furthermore, upon receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At the timing T4, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are lit while waiting for a customer (lights white). Become.

At timing T7, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound. “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T8, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0" and the fluctuation starts. The performance (fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "0".

(Specific example when there is an abnormality in the second movable member returning after power is restored)
FIG. 95 is a diagram illustrating a specific example where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. In addition, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T3, when the origin return process ends with a return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. . At this time, the second movable member LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality.

Furthermore, when the performance control board 130 receives a power restoration designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in blue and white, and the performance The light emission mode of the button LED changes and lights up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays a second standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (still display).

Furthermore, upon receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T4, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at timing T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation processing is performed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74. When the process is finished, the first movable member LED and the performance button LED are lit (white) while waiting for the customer.

At timing T6, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound. “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T7, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0" and the fluctuation starts. The performance (fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED It lights up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when there is an abnormality in the first movable member returning after power is restored)
FIG. 96 is a diagram illustrating a specific example where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off.
In addition, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where a return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED blinks in red to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality (abnormality notification mode), and the second movable member LED and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the production button 17 is started.

Furthermore, when the performance control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting manner of the second movable member LED and the performance button LED changes and lights up in blue. .

At this time, the image display device displays a second standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (still display).

Furthermore, upon receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At the timing T4, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T5, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is performed without the initial operation of the first movable member 73 being performed. When the process is finished, the first movable member LED and the performance button LED are lit (white) while waiting for the customer.

At timing T6, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound. “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T7, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0" and the fluctuation starts. The performance (fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED It lights up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when there is an abnormality in the production button returning after power is restored)
FIG. 97 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is a return abnormality in the production button 17 after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. In addition, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where a return abnormality has occurred in the production button 17, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the production button LED flashes red to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality (abnormality notification mode), and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED maintain the off state.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. The operation will not start.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power restoration designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in blue and white. 2 The light emitting mode of the movable member LED changes and lights up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays a second standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (still display).

Furthermore, upon receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T4, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are lit (white) while waiting for a customer.

At timing T6, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is received. The number becomes "1", the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, the sub first pending display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound. “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T7, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0" and the fluctuation starts. The performance (fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the production button LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED are fluctuating. The light is turned on, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when the state after the power is restored is that the special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner and there is a pending memory)
FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a specific example where the state after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c is during special symbol fluctuation display (loss fluctuation display) and with pending memory.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. Further, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for special figure fluctuations transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in blue and white, The light emitting manner of the second movable member LED and the production button LED changes and lights up in blue. At this time, the image display device displays a returning screen including the words "Please resume the game," and the audio output device 9 remains silent.

In addition, when a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 3, second pending number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the first pending number is displayed on the image display device. A state in which no pending numbers are displayed in the display area 70E or the second pending number display area 70F is maintained.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the first sub-holding display 83 has a display mode showing "3", and the second sub-holding display 84 and the sub-universal drawing holding display 86 have a display mode showing "0".

At the timing T4, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are turned off.

At timing T7, when a special symbol confirmation command is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the "753" effect symbol 70a, which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ in a stopped state (still display). A stop screen (same as the second standby screen) is displayed, and a stop sound is output from the audio output device 9.

At this time, the three first pending icons are displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, but the icon display area 70C is secured in a state where the display area can display an effect image such as a background image ( (the pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

At timing T8, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E becomes "2" and changes. The performance (fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "2".

(Specific example of when the power-on designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 99 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

A case where the power-on designation command cannot be received normally means that power is being supplied to the production control board 130, but the power line of the main control board 110 is disconnected or the connector of the power line is not connected ( A first case in which power (main power supply and backup power supply) is not supplied due to the situation (including a half-plugged state), a second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 is disconnected, and the command Although there is a third case in which the communication line connector is in an unconnected state (including a half-plugged state), the first case will be described here.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, power is not supplied to the main control board 110, but when power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73, Then, the operation of returning the production button 17 to its original position is started.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. In addition, a sub-first fluctuation indicator 81, a sub-second fluctuation indicator 82, a sub-first hold indicator 83, a sub-second hold indicator 84, a sub-normal figure fluctuation indicator 85, and a sub-normal figure hold indicator. 86 is in a non-display state.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started, and then the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed. At the timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, at the timing T5, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing T6, the second movable member 74 is started. When the initial operation of the member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the effect control board 130 enters a control state in which it is possible to execute the effect according to the command.

At timing T7, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, a process for initializing the control state of the game is performed and a power-on designation command is transmitted. Then, when the production control board 130 receives the power-on designation command, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 , and the operation of returning the production button 17 to its original position is started.

At this time, the image display device displays a first standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the sound The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

Thereafter, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T8, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are lit alternately in red and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED is lit in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At timing T9, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at timing T10, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T11, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED ends, and the system is waiting for customers. When the initialization notification sound output period (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, when the production control board 130 received the power-on designation command, the first standby screen was displayed, but instead of displaying the first standby screen immediately, a dark color display screen was displayed as a type of initial screen. The first standby screen may be displayed after being displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of displaying the dark color display screen, or may be output from the start of displaying the first standby screen.

(Specific example of when the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 100 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where a power recovery designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

A case where the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally means that power is being supplied to the production control board 130, but the power line of the main control board 110 is disconnected or the connector of the power line is disconnected ( A first case in which power (main power only) is not supplied due to a situation (including a half-plugged state), a second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 is disconnected, and a command communication line Although there is a third case in which the connector is in an unconnected state (including a half-plugged state), the first case will be described here.

Note that since the timing from T1 to T7 is the same as the timing from T1 to T7 in FIG. 99, the explanation here will be omitted, and the timing after T7 will be explained.

At timing T7, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing for restoring the control state of the game is performed and a power restoration designation command is transmitted. Then, when the production control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 , and the operation of returning the production button 17 to its original position is started.

At this time, the image display device displays a second standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the sound The output device 9 maintains a silent state.

Thereafter, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T8, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the second movable member LED and the production button LED light up in blue as initial light emission.

At timing T9, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at timing T10, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T11, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED ends, and the system is waiting for customers. It lights up (white light).

In addition, when the production control board 130 received the power recovery designation command, the second standby screen was displayed, but instead of displaying the second standby screen immediately, it displayed a dark color display screen as a type of initial screen. The second standby screen may be displayed after being displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds).

In addition, the audio output device 9 was set to be silent when receiving the power restoration designation command, but a notification sound (alarm, etc.) indicating that the power has been turned on (so that it can be understood) is emitted for a predetermined period of time. (For example, it may be output for 30 seconds). In this case, the alarm may be the same as when the power-on designation command is received, or it may be a different alarm.

In addition, in FIGS. 99 to 100, various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) were performing the return operation when the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command was received. However, the initial motion of various accessories may be performed without performing the return motion.

(Specific example of when the power-on command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 101 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

Cases in which the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally include cases in which power is not supplied to the main control board 110, cases in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 is disconnected, and cases in which the command communication line Examples include cases where the connector is in an unconnected state (including a half-plugged state).

Note that the timing from T1 to T5 is the same as the timing from T1 to T5 in FIG. 99, so the explanation here will be omitted, and the timing after T5 will be explained.

At the timing of T5, the special symbol storage designation command (the first pending number and the second When receiving the pending number=0, the image display device maintains the state where the initial screen is displayed.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the display modes of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED change and are turned off. becomes.

At timing T7, when the first special symbol storage designation command (first pending number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the initial screen remains displayed on the image display device. However, the sub-first hold display 83 changes to a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon♪".

At timing T8, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and , the second standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (stationary display) is displayed for a moment, and then a variable production (variable display of the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or movement to the icon) change, BGM output) starts.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "0".

(Specific example 1 when restarting after only power supply to the main control board is stopped)
FIG. 102 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the production control board 130) after the return-to-origin process and the initial operation process have already been completed. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a first specific example in which the system is restarted after being stopped.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped is a case where the power line (main power line, backup power line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is disconnected and then comes into contact with it due to an external factor. , the case where the connector of the power line (main power line, backup power line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 becomes connected after being disconnected (including half-plugged). Can be mentioned.

Here, during a customer waiting state (including execution of a customer waiting demonstration performance), which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the main control board 110 is A case will be described in which the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is restarted after the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) has stopped.

At the timing of T1, various accessories are already in the state of waiting for customers after the return operation and initial operation are completed, and the image display device shows the production symbol "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored. 70a, and a second standby screen or a customer waiting demonstration performance screen with the special design TZ being stopped and displayed (stationary display), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button are displayed. The LED lights up while waiting for customers.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub 1 fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-general fluctuation display 85, sub-general reservation display 86) also display contents. maintain.

At timing T3, when power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first hold display 83, the second sub-hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure pending display 86) also maintain their display contents.

At timing T4, when the production control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are lit alternately in red and white as initial light emission, the production button LED is lit in white as initial light emission, and the image display device is powered on. A first standby screen is displayed in which the production symbol 70a of "135" which is the initial symbol at the time of insertion and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the audio output device 9 outputs an alarm and "RAM An initialization notification sound consisting of a voice saying "It's clear" is output.

In addition, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At the timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing T6, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is finished. Then, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

At the timing T7, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the LED lights are turned on while waiting for a customer (white light is lit). ), and when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed at timing T10, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, if the return movement, initial movement, or initialization notification sound output of various characters has already been completed, a variable effect (loss variable effect) is in progress, or a jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is in progress. The timing of T4 also applies when restarting after only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped during a control state in which the performance control board is able to execute a performance according to a command, such as during execution. The screens displayed on the image display device until the power-on designation command is received in ), except that the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped while waiting for a customer, and various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button The return operation and initialization operation described in step 17) are performed, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound.

In addition, when there is an abnormality in various accessories, the initial operation of the various accessories and the light emission (flashing red) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 91, 92, or 93. It will be done.

(Specific example 2 when restarting after only the power supply to the main control board has stopped)
FIG. 103 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the production control board 130) after the return-to-origin process and the initial operation process have already been completed. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a second specific example in which the system is restarted after being stopped.

Here, during a customer waiting state (including execution of a customer waiting demonstration performance), which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the main control board 110 is A case will be described in which the main power supply is restarted after the main power supply has stopped and the backup power supply continues.

At the timing of T1, if the various accessories are already waiting for customers after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound have finished, the image display device will display the initial symbol when the power is restored. A second standby screen or a customer waiting demo performance screen is displayed in which the production pattern 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped (statically displayed), and the first movable member LED and the second movable member The LED and the performance button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, when the image display device is waiting for a customer after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories have finished, the image display device will display a message indicating the loss. A standby screen or a customer-waiting demonstration performance screen in which the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ shown in FIG.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state where the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and displays the sub information. Device 80 (sub first fluctuation indicator 81, sub second fluctuation indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub general figure fluctuation indicator 85, sub general figure pending indicator 86 ) also maintains the displayed content.

At timing T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, processing for restoring the control state of the game is performed. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first hold display 83, the second sub-hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure pending display 86) also maintain their display contents.

Note that even if the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is being displayed (regardless of whether or not after the completion of the variable performance, after receiving the customer waiting state designation command, or If the demonstration standby time has elapsed (after the end of the previous customer waiting demonstration performance), the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

At timing T4, when the production control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and production button 17 The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in white as initial light emission, On the image display device, instead of the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen, the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display). A second standby screen of the status is displayed.

In addition, when receiving a special symbol storage designation command (first pending number and second pending number = 0) as a power-on command, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number of the image display device are displayed. "0" is displayed as a pending number in each of the display areas 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is performed. After that, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

At timing T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started.

At the timing T7, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED, and the system is waiting for customers. It lights up (white light).

In addition, in the case where various accessory objects have a return abnormality, the initial operation and initial light emission of the various accessory objects will be performed in the same way as the specific example shown in FIG. 95, FIG. 96, or FIG. 97.

(Specific example 3 where power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped)
FIG. 104 shows the power supply to the main control board 110 during the execution of the variation effect after the return-to-origin process and the initial operation process (while power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130). It is a figure which shows the specific example 3 in the case where only supply is restarted after being stopped.

Here, during execution of a variable performance, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply is turned on. A case will be explained in which the supply of main power is restarted while the supply of power continues.

At timing T1, a variable effect is being executed, a variable effect screen is displayed on the image display device, and variable effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) are output from the audio output device 9. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are lit during fluctuation. Further, a variable display is performed on the sub-first variable display 81, and a pending number “1” is displayed on the sub-first pending display 83.

At timing T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power source) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the fluctuation effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-routine fluctuation display 85, sub-routine reservation display 86) also maintain the display contents. .

At timing T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and processing is performed to restore the gaming control state. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the variable effect screen is displayed, and the sub-information display device 80 (sub-first variable display 81, sub-second variable display 82, sub-first pending display 83, The sub-second hold display 84, the sub-normal pattern fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal pattern pending display 86) also maintain their display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the production control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for the special figure fluctuation transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in white as initial light emission, The image display device displays a return screen including the words "Please resume the game," and the audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub The second fluctuation display 82, the first sub-pending display 83, the second sub-pending display 84, the sub-privilege fluctuation display 85, and the sub-pending pending display 86) maintain their display contents.

At the timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing T6, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is finished. Then, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

At the timing T7, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED end the initial light emission and turn off. becomes.

At timing T10, when the production control board 130 receives the special symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main control board 110, a confirmation display is performed in case of a loss of the variable production. At this time, the image display device displays a stop screen in which the production symbol 70a of “753”, which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (statically displayed), and the audio output device 9 A stop sound is output. Further, "1" is displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second reservation number display area 70F. Further, the sub-first variable display 81 takes a loss display mode (non-display mode) indicating that it is a loss.

In addition, when the result of the current variable performance is a jackpot, when the special symbol confirmation command is received by the performance control board 130, a confirmation display for the jackpot of the variable performance is performed. At this time, the image display device displays a stop screen in which the jackpot effect pattern 70a such as "777" and the special pattern TZ are stopped (statically displayed), and the sub-first variable display 81 In this case, the jackpot display mode shows that it is a jackpot, and a stop sound is output from the audio output device 9.

At timing T11, when a fluctuation start command (effect design designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, the variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "0".

Note that at the timing of T4, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED become the initial light emitting mode when the power is restored, but they must be turned off or have a special light emitting mode different from the initial light emitting mode when the power is restored. It may also be possible to make it possible to recognize that a power restoration designation command has been received during a fluctuation performance.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various accessories, the initial operation of various accessories and the light emission (flashing red) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 95, 96, or 97. It will be done.

Further, even if the execution time of the variable performance recognized by the performance control board 130 has elapsed before receiving the special symbol confirmation command, the temporary stop display or stop display of the performance symbol 70a is not performed, The variable display on the sub-first variable display and the sub-second variable display will not end either.

(Specific example 4 when restarting after only the power supply to the main control board has stopped)
FIG. 105 shows the power supply to the main control board 110 during the execution of the jackpot effect after the return-to-origin process and the initial operation process (while power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130). It is a figure which shows the specific example 4 in the case where only supply is restarted after being stopped.

Here, during the execution of a jackpot performance, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply is turned on. A case will be explained in which the supply of main power is restarted while the supply of power continues.

At the timing of T1, the jackpot effect (here, the first round effect) is being executed, and the image display device displays the jackpot effect (round effect) screen, and the jackpot special symbol TZ ("777") is displayed in a stopped state (static display). Further, "1" is displayed as the pending number in the first pending number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the pending number in the second pending number display area 70F.

At this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot. In addition, a jackpot display (lighting) is performed on the sub-first variable display 81.

At timing T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-routine fluctuation display 85, sub-routine reservation display 86) also maintain the display contents. .

At timing T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and processing is performed to restore the gaming control state. At this time, the image display device maintains the state where the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first pending display 83, The sub-second hold display 84, the sub-normal pattern fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal pattern pending display 86) also maintain their display contents.

At timing T4, when the production control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for jackpots transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and production button 17 return to their origin. A return operation to the position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in white as initial light emission, The image display device displays a returning screen for jackpots that includes the words "Please restart the game (during jackpots)", and the audio output device 9 becomes silent. In addition, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84, sub general figure fluctuation display 85, sub ordinary The figure pending display 86) maintains the displayed content.

In addition, instead of displaying the returning screen during jackpot, the same returning screen as when the power supply to the main control board 110 (only the main power supply) is stopped during the fluctuating performance shown in FIG. 104 is displayed. You can do it like this.

At the timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing T6, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is finished. Then, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

At the timing T7, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED end the initial light emission and turn off. becomes.

At timing T10, when the performance control board 130 receives a round designation command for the second opening (second round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the jackpot performance (round performance) is restarted. At this time, the image display device displays a special jackpot effect (round effect) screen instead of a normal jackpot effect screen, and the jackpot special symbol TZ ("777") is not displayed.

Further, "1" is displayed as the pending number in the first pending number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the pending number in the second pending number display area 70F. Furthermore, jackpot performance sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) are output from the audio output device 9, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED light up during the jackpot.

After that, when the production control board 130 receives a round designation command for the third opening (third round) transmitted from the main control board 110, a special jackpot production (round production) screen is displayed on the image display device. , the normal jackpot effect (round effect) screen is displayed.

In addition, when the production control board 130 receives the ending specification command instead of when the production control board 130 receives the round designation command while displaying the special jackpot production screen, the normal ending production screen is displayed. will be displayed.

In addition, if a round designation command is received while a special jackpot production screen is displayed, instead of switching to the normal jackpot production screen, the special jackpot production screen is displayed until the production control board 130 receives an ending specification command. Alternatively, the special jackpot effect screen may be continued until the effect control board 130 receives a customer waiting state designation command or a fluctuation start command after the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, at the timing of T4, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED become the initial light emitting mode when the power is restored, but they are turned off or have a special light emitting mode different from the initial light emitting mode when the power is restored. In this case, it may be possible to recognize that a power restoration designation command has been received during a fluctuation performance.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various accessories, the initial operation of various accessories and the light emission (flashing red) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 95, 96, or 97. It will be done.

In addition, in FIGS. 102 to 105, various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) were performing the return operation when receiving the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command. However, the initial motion of various accessories may be performed without performing the return motion.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when the control state of the game is initialized, the identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in the plurality of performance symbols 70a are set to the first combination. When the first initial effect symbol ("135") is displayed and the control state of the game is restored, the second initial effect symbol ("135") in which the identification characters in the plurality of effect symbols 70a are the second combination is displayed. 753'') is displayed. By doing this, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the gaming control state has been initialized or whether the gaming control state has been restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when the control state of the game is restored, a specific display indicating that the power supply should be restarted is performed before displaying the effect pattern 70a on the image display device. is possible, and the display mode of the specific display displayed on the image display device when restoring to the customer waiting state (initial screen display only), and the restoration to the state where the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner and there is no pending memory/with pending memory. The display mode of the specific display later displayed on the image display device (initial screen + display of the returning screen) is made to be different. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing when the stopped power supply is restarted and the game control state is restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D) and the sub hold display (sub first hold display It is possible to perform a hold display indicating the number of held memories on each of the sub-second hold display 84), and the power supply that was stopped while there is a held memory is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. In this case, when the image display device is displaying a specific display (resuming screen display) indicating that the power supply is to be resumed, the hold icon display area does not display the hold icon, but the sub hold display displays the hold display. It is possible. By doing this, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to know the number of pending memories before the end of the specific display, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. It becomes possible to suppress this.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when the power supply that was stopped during the customer waiting demonstration performance is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the customer waiting demonstration performance screen is displayed again. Instead, a second standby screen is displayed in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, is displayed in a stopped state (still display). By doing this, there is no need to be aware of whether or not the state before the power supply was stopped was during a demonstration while waiting for customers, and the display control when restoring the control state of the game after the power supply was resumed. It becomes possible to reduce such processing load.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the power supply that was stopped during the fluctuation performance is restarted for the sub fluctuation display devices (sub first fluctuation display device 81, sub second fluctuation display device 82). When the control state of the game is restored, even if the special symbol is being fluctuated (returning screen is displayed), if the special symbol is being fluctuated, the fluctuating display ( (blinking display). By doing so, it becomes possible to reduce the processing load when restoring the control state of the game after the power supply is resumed.

In addition, when the control state of the game is restored and the special symbol fluctuation display is executed (returning screen is displayed), the sub fluctuation display (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82), a variable display (blinking display) may be performed. In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it becomes easy to understand that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, for the sub-hold display (the first sub-hold display 83, the second sub-hold display 84), the returning screen is displayed on the image display device. (before the variable display is performed on the sub variable display and at the time of receiving the special symbol storage designation command), the display mode is designed to show the pending number. By doing this, the player can be made aware of the number of pending games immediately after the control state of the game is restored, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, when a variable display (blinking display) is performed on the sub variable display (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82) while the recovery screen is displayed on the image display device, Alternatively, the sub-pending indicators (first sub-pending display 83, second sub-pending display 84) may display the number of pending items in accordance with the start of this variable display. In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it becomes possible to easily understand that the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner and the number of reservations at that time.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. The return operation of various accessories is performed at the same timing as in the previous case, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (the timing at which the initial screen is displayed). By doing this, the control related to the return operation of various accessories does not become complicated, and it becomes possible to reduce the processing load related to the return operation of various accessories.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, various accessories (first movable member 73, During the return operation of the second movable member 74 and the production button 17), the light emitting parts of various accessories (the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED) are turned off. ing. By doing this, it is possible to distinguish it from the initial motion of various accessories, and it becomes possible to understand that it is in the process of returning to its original state.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, if any of the various ornaments has a return abnormality, the light-emitting part of the accessory with the return error flashes in red (abnormality notification mode). By doing so, an abnormality is notified. By doing this, it becomes possible to know which accessory has had a return abnormality.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, if the abnormality is notified by flashing red on the light-emitting part of the accessory that has returned abnormally, until the next fluctuating effect is started. Abnormality notifications continue. By doing this, it becomes possible to reliably notify the user of the accessory in which the return abnormality has occurred.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the accessory, a return operation may be performed to return the accessory with the return abnormality to the original position at the timing when the next fluctuating performance is started. Further, in a case where the abnormality notification is performed by blinking the light emitting part of the accessory in which the recovery abnormality occurred in red, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. The initial operations of various accessories are performed at the same timing as in the previous case, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (the timing at which the initial screen is displayed). By doing this, the control related to the initial movements of various accessories does not become complicated, and it becomes possible to reduce the processing load related to the initial movements of various accessories.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, for the board accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74), power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, and initialization of the main RAM 110c is performed. In the case of power restoration without a power recovery, the sub-hold display (the first sub-hold display 83, the second sub-hold display 84) changes to a display mode showing the number of holds (the image display device does not display the recovery screen). Initial operations are performed before By doing this, it becomes easier to avoid inconveniences such as the progress of the production being hindered by the initial movements of the board accessories. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the frame accessory (effect button 17) is activated when the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or when the power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c. , performs an initial operation before the sub-hold display (first sub-hold display 83, second sub-hold display 84) changes to the display mode indicating the number of holds (returning screen is displayed on the image display device). It looks like this. By doing this, it becomes easier to avoid inconveniences such as the progress of the production being hindered by the initial movements of the frame accessories. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even if the stop screen is displayed after the returning screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect pattern 70a is output. By doing this, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the variable performance that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game. Become.

In addition, when displaying a stop screen after displaying the returning screen, the stop sound of the effect pattern 70a may not be output.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even if the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the return operation, initial operation, etc. of various accessories, Then, while performing initial light emission, the initial screen continues to be displayed. By doing this, it becomes possible to understand that an abnormality has occurred in which a command cannot be received when the power is turned on.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even if the initial screen continues to be displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, When the production control board 130 is in a control state where it can execute the production according to the command and receives a special symbol storage designation command based on the winning of the game ball to the starting hole from the main control board 110, the winning sound is emitted. It is designed to output . By doing this, even when the initial screen is displayed, it is possible to accurately notify that a game ball has entered the starting hole.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, even if the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command) cannot be received, the When the control board 130 receives a fluctuation start command from the main control board 110 after being in a control state in which it can execute a performance according to the command, the fluctuation performance is executed without displaying the standby screen. There is. By doing this, the start of the variable presentation is executed without delay, and it becomes possible to execute the variable presentation from beginning to end within the range of the varying time of the special symbol.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the production control board 130 is in a state of waiting for a customer after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have been completed. Even in a control state where the corresponding performance can be executed, the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and the main control board 110 issues a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation. When the command is received again, the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (initial light emission) are executed again. By doing this, the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130 are different, the difference is It becomes possible to eliminate the problem.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control board 130 responds to commands, such as during a variable effect after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have been completed. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a performance, the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and the power supply command or power recovery designation command is issued from the main control board 110. When received again, the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (initial light emission) are executed again. By doing this, the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130 are different, the difference is It becomes possible to eliminate the problem.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the performance control board 130 responds to commands during a jackpot game after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have already been completed. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a performance, the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and the power supply command or power recovery designation command is issued from the main control board 110. When received again, the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are executed again. By doing this, the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130 are different, the difference is It becomes possible to eliminate

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, it is possible for the performance control board 130 to execute a performance in response to a command, such as during a customer waiting state after the initialization notification sound has already been output. Even in the control state, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is supposed to be done. By doing this, the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130 are different, the difference is It becomes possible to eliminate the problem.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, control allows the performance control board 130 to execute a performance according to a command, such as during a variable performance after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished. Even in the state, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed, and a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It looks like this. By doing this, the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130 are different, the difference is It becomes possible to eliminate the problem.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, control allows the production control board 130 to execute a production according to a command, such as during a jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished. Even in the state, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is supposed to be done. By doing this, the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130 are different, the difference is It becomes possible to eliminate the problem.

Note that when the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 instead of executing the return operation, initial operation, and initial light emission of various accessories. You can just do it.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the production control board 130 is in a state of waiting for a customer after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have been completed. Even if the controller is in a control state in which it is possible to execute the corresponding performance, the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110. In this case, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and when the power recovery designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. It looks like this. By doing this, the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130 are different, the difference is It becomes possible to eliminate the problem.

In addition, the performance control board 130 is capable of executing a performance according to a command, such as during a variable performance or a jackpot performance after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have ended. Even in this state, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initial screen is not displayed. The first standby screen is displayed. By doing this, the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130 are different, the difference is It becomes possible to eliminate the problem.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the effect control board 130 responds to commands, such as during a variable effect after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have been completed. Even in a control state where it is possible to execute a performance, the main control board 110 may issue a power recovery designation command by stopping and restarting only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110. When received, the returning screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing this, the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130 are different, the difference is It becomes possible to eliminate the problem.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the production control board 130 responds to commands, such as during a jackpot production after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have been completed. Even in a control state where it is possible to execute a performance, the main control board 110 may issue a power recovery designation command by stopping and restarting only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110. When received, the returning screen for jackpots is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing this, the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130 are different, the difference is It becomes possible to eliminate the problem.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, the performance control board 130 may execute a performance according to a command, such as during a fluctuating performance or during a jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished. Even in a control state where power is enabled, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initial screen will be displayed. If the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen and a power recovery designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. By doing this, the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, so even if the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130 are different, the difference is It becomes possible to eliminate the problem.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, in a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the performance control board 130 Even if the power supply to the main control board 130 is stopped while the power supply to the board 130 continues, the previous display screen can continue to be displayed. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 90 to 105, in a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the performance control board 130 Even if the power supply to the main control board 130 is restarted after the power supply to the main control board 130 is stopped while the power supply to the board 130 continues, the previous display screen can be continuously displayed. By doing so, when the power supply to the main control means is resumed, the player will not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Note that the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute performances according to commands are a customer waiting state, a fluctuating performance, and a jackpot performance. A state of waiting for a command (for example, while an initial screen is being displayed) may also be included in the control state in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command.

In this embodiment, the production pattern 70a is composed only of numbers (identification characters) from "1" to "9", but it may also be composed of numbers (identification characters) + characters (decoration part). In this case, it is preferable to use a different character for each number, such as "1" and character A, "2" and character B, and so on. In addition, in the normal game state, the production pattern 70a is displayed with numbers + characters, and in the specific game state (low accuracy time saving game state, high accuracy time saving game state), the production pattern 70a is displayed with only numbers or numbers + characters smaller than the normal game state. It may be displayed as

Further, three types of performance modes A to C may be provided in the normal game state, and at least one of the design of the numbers and the design of the character of the performance symbol 70a may be different for each performance mode. Furthermore, two types of production modes D to E in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state may be provided, and at least one of the design of the numbers and the design of the characters of the production pattern 70a may be made different for each production mode. Further, two types of performance modes F to G in the low-accuracy time-saving game state may be provided, and at least one of the design of the numbers and the design of the character of the performance pattern 70a may be different for each performance mode.

In this case, if the power supply is stopped in any of the production modes A to C in the normal gaming state, and then the power supply is restarted and the game control state is restored, production mode A is always set. At the same time, after the display of the initial screen or the returning screen ends, the effect pattern 70a corresponding to the effect mode A is displayed statically without being oscillated. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, production mode A is always set, and after the initial screen is displayed, the production pattern 70a corresponding to production mode A is displayed statically without swinging. That will happen.

Then, when the power supply is stopped in any of the production modes D to E in the high-accuracy time-saving gaming state, and then the power supply is restarted and the game control state is restored, the production mode D is always selected. At the same time, after the display of the initial screen or the returning screen ends, the effect pattern 70a corresponding to the effect mode D is displayed statically without being oscillated. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, production mode A is always set, and after the initial screen is displayed, the production pattern 70a corresponding to production mode A is displayed statically without swinging. That will happen.

Furthermore, when the power supply is stopped in any of the production modes F to G in the low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, and then the power supply is restarted and the gaming control state is restored, the production mode F is always selected. At the same time, after the display of the initial screen or the returning screen ends, the effect pattern 70a corresponding to the effect mode F is displayed statically without being oscillated. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, production mode A is always set, and after the initial screen is displayed, the production pattern 70a corresponding to production mode A is displayed statically without swinging. That will happen.

In addition, when displaying the performance symbol 70a in a reduced size in the SP reach performance or SPSP reach performance in the normal gaming state, the performance symbol 70a is changed to only numbers, and the performance symbol 70a is temporarily displayed after the SP reach performance or SPSP reach performance ends. When the display is stopped (swinging), the effect pattern 70a may be returned to numbers + characters.

In this case, the power supply is stopped during SP reach or SPSP reach in the normal gaming state, that is, when the production symbol 70a is changed to only numbers, and then the power supply is restarted and the game control state is restored. In this case, after the display of the returning screen is finished, the number + character effect pattern 70a is displayed statically without being oscillated. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, after the display of the initial screen ends, the performance symbols 70a of numbers and characters are displayed statically without being oscillated.

Furthermore, the power supply is stopped during SP reach or SPSP reach in a specific gaming state (low accuracy time saving gaming state, high accuracy time saving gaming state), that is, when the production symbol 70a is only a number, and then the power supply is stopped. When the control state of the game is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, after the display of the returning screen is finished, the effect pattern 70a consisting only of numbers will be displayed statically without being oscillated. On the other hand, when the control state of the game is initialized, after the display of the initial screen ends, the performance symbols 70a of numbers and characters are displayed statically without being oscillated.

<Contents 1 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, when a starting condition is established, determination information on whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player is acquired and the determination information is stored. Then, when the determination condition is met, the stored determination information is determined, and a variable performance is executed according to the result of the determination, and when the variable performance results in a special result, a special game is executed. Some of these gaming machines display a pending image corresponding to undetermined determination information (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-33530). Furthermore, the gaming machine improves the interest of the game by changing the normal pending image to a pending image with a display mode that suggests the possibility that the variable performance may result in a special result. However, there is still room for improvement in the gaming machine described above in order to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problems, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control means. In the gaming machine, the main control means performs a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. The slave control means includes a determination means (main CPU 110a) that makes a determination as to whether or not the right is reserved, and a suspension means (main RAM 110c) that can suspend the right of the determination. An image display means (display/audio control section 140) that displays a (holding icon) on a display means (first image display device 70), and a predetermined notification effect ( an effect execution means (display/audio control unit 140) that causes an icon generation (change) notification sound), and the image display means displays an image to be displayed on the display means every time a predetermined frame update timing is reached. It is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) that changes the pending image to a special pending image indicating the possibility of whether or not to play the special game. A first change performance (change performance at winning time) executed at a frame update timing in response to reception of a command indicating that the right has occurred (starting opening winning designation command) transmitted from the main control means, and the main control means The second change production (normal change pattern 02, character effect change pattern 01, and symbol effect change pattern 01), the effect executing means starts the notification effect at a frame update timing when the first change effect is started, and a frame update timing different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends. The notification performance is ended with . By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control means. In the gaming machine, the main control means performs a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. A determining means (main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to accept the decision, a suspending means (main RAM 110c) capable of suspending the right of said determination, and a system that displays symbols in a variable manner and then stops displaying the symbols based on the result of said determination. and a fluctuation control means for displaying a reserved image (reserved icon) corresponding to the reserved right on a display means (first image display device 70). a sound control unit 140), a performance execution means (display/sound control unit 140) that causes the performance means (sound output device 9) to execute a predetermined notification performance (icon generation (change) notification sound) during the progress of the game; The image display means is configured to update the image to be displayed on the display means every time a predetermined frame update timing is reached, and the image display means is configured to update the image displayed on the display means at a predetermined frame update timing, and the image display means is configured to update the image displayed on the display means at each predetermined frame update timing, and the special game indicating the possibility of playing the special game based on the suspended image. It is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) that changes the image to a pending image, and the change effect is based on a command (fluctuating pattern designation command) indicating that a variable display of the symbol is to be started, which is transmitted from the main control means. ) is executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the first change effect (normal change pattern 01), and a predetermined change effect after receiving the command (variation pattern designation command) indicating the result of the determination transmitted from the main control means. a second change effect (normal change pattern 02, character effect change pattern 01, and symbol effect change pattern 01) executed at the frame update timing of , and the effect executing means starts the first change effect. The notification performance is started at a frame update timing, and is ended at a frame update timing different from the frame update timing at which the first change performance ends. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control means In the gaming machine, the main control means performs a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. A determining means (main CPU 110a) that determines whether or not to accept the decision, a suspending means (main RAM 110c) capable of suspending the right of said determination, and a system that displays symbols in a variable manner and then stops displaying the symbols based on the result of said determination. and a fluctuation control means (main CPU 110a) for controlling the rights, and the slave control means displays a pre-judgment pending image (pending icon) corresponding to the reserved right, and a fluctuation control means (main CPU 110a) that displays a pre-judgment pending image (pending icon) corresponding to the reserved right, and An image display means (display/audio control unit 140) that displays a post-judgment pending image (the icon) corresponding to the right on the display means (first image display device 70), and a production means ( a presentation execution means (display/audio control section 140) for causing the audio output device 9) to execute a predetermined notification presentation (icon generation (change) notification sound); The image to be displayed on the display means is updated each time the pre-determination pending image or the post-judgment pending image is used to indicate the possibility of whether or not to play the special game. It is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) that changes the image to a special reserved image, and the change effect is based on a command (variation pattern designation command) sent from the main control means when the variable display of the symbol starts. ) and a first change effect (normal change pattern 01) executed at a frame update timing according to and a second change effect (normal change pattern 02, character effect change pattern 01, and symbol effect change pattern 01) that is executed at a predetermined frame update timing, and the effect executing means is configured to start the first change effect. than the case where the notification effect is started at a frame update timing at which the first change effect ends, the notification effect is ended at a frame update timing different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends, and the image is changed to the pre-judgment special hold image. When the image is changed to the post-judgment special hold image, the second change effect is executed at a higher rate. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a signal from the main control means In the gaming machine, the main control means performs a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. The slave control means is provided with a determining means (main CPU 110a) for determining whether or not to make a decision, and a suspending means (main RAM 110c) capable of suspending a predetermined number of rights for the determination, and the slave control means corresponds to the rights being reserved. An image display means (display/audio control section 140) that displays a reserved image (reserved icon) on a display means (first image display device 70), and a predetermined notification to a presentation means (audio output device 9) during the progress of the game. A presentation execution means (display/audio control section 140) for executing a presentation (icon generation (change) notification sound), and the image display means causes the display means to display the image at each predetermined frame update timing. It is configured to update the image, and it is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) that changes the pending image to a special pending image indicating the possibility of whether or not to play the special game, and the change effect is , executed at a frame update timing according to a command (starting opening winning designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command, special symbol storage designation command) transmitted from the main control means when the number of the reserved rights changes. A predetermined frame update after receiving the first change effect (change effect when winning a prize, normal change pattern 01) and a command (variation pattern designation command) indicating the result of the determination transmitted from the main control means. It includes a second change effect (normal change pattern 02, character effect change pattern 01, and symbol effect change pattern 01) executed at the timing, and the display mode of the special reserved image is the first display mode (blue character icon). and a second display mode (red character icon) in which the possibility of playing the special game is higher than that of the first display mode, and the effect execution means is configured to determine the frame update timing at which the first change effect is started. The notification effect is started at a frame update timing different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends, and the second change effect is completed at a frame update timing that is different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends. It is easier to change to the second display mode when is executed, and when the first change effect changes to the second display mode, when the number of reserved rights is the first number. The possibility of playing the special game is higher when the second number is greater than the first number. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, "special pending images" and "special pending images before judgment" are images that have a different shape or color from the normal pending icons, or images that have a color around the pending icon that indicates the expectation of winning a jackpot. Those that display effects, those that display characters around (nearby) the pending icon that indicate the level of expectation of winning a jackpot, and those that display a character image (for example, "SP") that indicates the performance that is scheduled to be performed around (near) the pending icon. ``Pseudo-connections,'' etc.).

In addition, "post-judgment special pending images" are images that have a different shape or color from the normal icon, or images that display a color effect around the icon that indicates the expectation of winning a jackpot. Displaying characters around (near) the icon that indicate the level of expectation of winning a jackpot, and character images (for example, "SP", "pseudo-ren", etc.) that indicate the performance that is scheduled to be performed around (near) the icon. ).

Further, the "first display mode" includes a special icon (blinking CD icon), a blue character icon, a green character icon, and the like.
Furthermore, the "second display mode" includes a red character icon, a rainbow character icon, and the like.

In addition, "post-judgment pending images" and "post-judgment special pending images" are those that are displayed from the start of the variable effect until the end, those that are displayed only for a predetermined period after the start of the variable effect, and the images that are displayed after the variable effect starts. Specific periods during performance (SP Reach, SPSP Reach, etc.) include times when the display is erased.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 2>
In conventional gaming machines, determination information acquired when acquisition conditions are met is stored as a reserved memory, and based on the determination information, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player, and based on the determination result. It is common to perform variable effects based on this. Some of these gaming machines display an increase or decrease in the number of pending images corresponding to each pending memory, or display an execution image corresponding to a pending memory in which a variable performance has been executed. There are some that allow players to grasp the progress of the game (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-018225). However, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 has a problem in that when the number of pending memories changes, it is difficult to immediately grasp the number of pending memories.

◆The first configuration for solving the above problems includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a game effect that controls the performance of the game based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a slave control means (production control board 130), the main control means controls judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entering of a game ball into a starting hole). ), a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a reserved memory; The slave control means includes a variable effect execution means that can execute a variable effect on an image display means (image display device) according to the result of the determination, and first hold information (hold information) indicating the number of hold memories. information display means capable of displaying second reservation information (reservation icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the reservation memories, and the image display means is configured to display information at a predetermined frame update timing (1/1). The display image is updated every 30 ms), and the information display means is capable of displaying a decrease in the first pending information and a decreasing display of the second pending information when the number of pending memories decreases. The display of the first pending information is decreased (subtracted by 1) before the frame update timing at which the decreased display of the second pending information (movement to the center of the adjacent display area in the pending icon display area) is completed. The frame update timing at which the update (update to the pending number) is completed is earlier. By doing this, it becomes easier to grasp the number of reserved memories.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance is controlled based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a slave control means (production control board 130), the main control means controls judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entering of a game ball into a starting hole). ), a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a reserved memory; The slave control means includes a variable effect execution means that can execute a variable effect on an image display means (image display device) according to the result of the determination, and first hold information (hold information) indicating the number of hold memories. information display means capable of displaying second reservation information (reservation icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the reservation memories, and the image display means is configured to display information at a predetermined frame update timing (1/1). The display image is updated every 30 ms), and when the number of pending memories decreases, the information display means displays a decrease in the first pending information and displays the second pending information on which the fluctuating effect has started. It is possible to display a change to the execution information (the icon), and the change display of the second pending information to the execution information (movement from the pending icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed. The frame update timing at which the reduction display of the first pending information (updating to the pending number subtracted by 1) is completed is earlier than the corresponding frame update timing. By doing this, it becomes easier to grasp the number of reserved memories.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance is controlled based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a slave control means (production control board 130), the main control means controls judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entering of a game ball into a starting hole). ), a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not yet been performed as a reserved memory; The slave control means includes a variable effect execution means capable of executing a variable effect on an image display means (image display device) according to the result of the determination, and first hold information (hold information) indicating the number of hold memories. information display means capable of displaying second reservation information (reservation icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the reservation memories, and the image display means is configured to display information at a predetermined frame update timing (1/1). The display image is updated every 30 ms), and when the number of pending memories decreases, the information display means is capable of displaying a decrease in the first pending information and a decreasing display of the second pending information. When the number of pending memories increases, it is possible to display an increase in the first pending information and an increase in the second pending information. If the number increases, even before the frame update timing at which the reduction display of the second hold information (movement to the center of the adjacent display section in the hold icon display area) is completed, the first hold information Incremental display of information (updating to the pending number by adding 1) is started. By doing this, it becomes easier to grasp the number of reserved memories.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance is controlled based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a slave control means (production control board 130), the main control means controls judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entering of a game ball into a starting hole). ), a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a reserved memory; The slave control means includes a variable effect execution means that can execute a variable effect on an image display means (image display device) according to the result of the determination, and first hold information (hold information) indicating the number of hold memories. information display means capable of displaying second reservation information (reservation icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the reservation memories, and the image display means is configured to display information at a predetermined frame update timing (1/1). The display image is updated every 30 ms), and when the number of pending memories decreases, the information display means displays a decreasing display of the first pending information and displays the second pending information for which the variable display has started. It is possible to display a change in execution information (the icon), and when the number of pending memories increases, it is possible to display an increase in the first pending information and to display an increase in the second pending information. Yes, and if the number of pending memories increases during the change display of the second pending information, the reduction display of the second pending information (movement from the pending icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed. Even before the frame update timing becomes, the display of an increase in the first reservation information (updating to a reservation number incremented by 1) is started. By doing this, it becomes easier to grasp the number of reserved memories.

◆As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance is controlled based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a slave control means (production control board 130), the main control means controls judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entering of a game ball into a starting hole). ), a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not yet been performed as a reserved memory; The slave control means includes a variable effect execution means capable of executing a variable effect on an image display means (image display device) according to the result of the determination, and first hold information (hold information) indicating the number of hold memories. information display means capable of displaying second reservation information (reservation icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the reservation memories, and the image display means is configured to display information at a predetermined frame update timing (1/1). The display image is updated every 30 ms), and the information display means is capable of displaying an increase in the first pending information and an increasing display of the second pending information when the number of pending memories increases. Yes, and if the number of pending memories increases during the execution of the fluctuating effect, the display of an increase in the second pending information (enlargement of the pending icon additionally displayed in the pending icon display area to a normal size) is completed. The frame update timing at which the increment display of the first pending information (updating to the pending number added by 1) is completed is earlier than the frame update timing at which the first pending information is displayed. By doing this, it becomes easier to grasp the number of reserved memories.

◆As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance is controlled based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a slave control means (production control board 130), the main control means controls judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entering of a game ball into a starting hole). ), a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a reserved memory; The slave control means includes a variable effect execution means that can execute a variable effect on an image display means (image display device) according to the result of the determination, and first hold information (hold information) indicating the number of hold memories. information display means capable of displaying second hold information (hold icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the hold memories, and the fluctuating effect execution means is configured to It is possible to execute a specific performance (SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, full rotation reach performance) that makes the execution of the special game expected, and when the number of the pending memories increases, the information display means displays the first pending information. It is possible to display an increase in the number of pending memories and to display an increase in the second pending information, and when the number of pending memories increases during execution of the specific effect, an increased display of the first pending information (one added (updating to the pending number) is executed, but the increasing display of the second pending information is executed until a predetermined condition is satisfied (the specific effect is completed, the loss effect symbol or the jackpot effect symbol that was displayed in a reduced size is displayed in an enlarged manner) It is designed so that it will not happen. By doing this, it becomes easier to grasp the number of reserved memories.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance is controlled based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a slave control means (production control board 130), the main control means controls judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entering of a game ball into a starting hole). ), a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a reserved memory; A game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and the slave control means controls an image of a variable performance according to the result of the determination. A variable performance execution means executable by a display means (image display device), first reservation information (reservation number) indicating the number of said reservation memories, and second reservation information (representing an identifier corresponding to each of said reservation memories). and information display means capable of displaying a hold icon), and when the number of hold memories increases, the information display means displays an increase in the first hold information and an increase in the second hold information. The storage means stores the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the first starting port) as a first pending memory, and the storage means stores the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the first starting port), and The judgment information based on (entering the game ball into the second starting port) is stored as a second pending memory, and when the number of the first pending memories increases in the specific gaming state, the first pending memory The increase display (update to the pending number added by 1) is executed, but the predetermined condition is satisfied for the increase display of the second pending information (the last variable performance in the specific gaming state is completed, and the normal gaming state is returned) It will not be executed until By doing this, it becomes easier to grasp the number of reserved memories.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 3)
Conventional gaming machines are generally capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and executing the special game according to the result of the determination. Among these gaming machines, there were gaming machines that initialized the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or restored it to the state before the power supply was stopped (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189604 (see publication). However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document has a problem in that it is difficult to determine whether the gaming control state has been initialized or whether the gaming control state has been restored.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine that can play games, movable presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 73, member 74, production button 17), and initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before power supply was stopped. , an effect control capable of performing an initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing an effect operation (presentation operation, effect light emission) of the movable effect means during the execution of the game. means (effect control board 130), and the effect control means controls the operation mode of the initial operation (operation) when the control state of the game is initialized and when the control state of the game is restored. mode, light emission mode, etc.). By doing this, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the gaming control state has been initialized or whether the gaming control state has been restored.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, there is provided an operating means (effect button 17) that can be operated by the player and that can emit light in a predetermined manner, and an electric power Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the stop of power supply; and the operation means after the start of power supply. A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing initial light emission and effect light emission of the operation means during execution of the game, and the performance control means is configured to initialize the control state of the game. The light emission mode (light emission mode, etc.) of the initial light emission is made different depending on the case where the control state of the game is restored and the case where the control state of the game is restored. By doing this, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the gaming control state has been initialized or whether the gaming control state has been restored.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine that can play games, a movable effect means (first movable member 73 , a second movable member 74), and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before power supply was stopped. , an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing the initial operation and initial light emission of the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing the effect operation and effect emission of the movable effect means during the execution of the game; ), and the performance control means is configured to control the initial operation mode (number of steps and Although the operation mode, etc. of each step is the same, the light emission mode (light emission mode, etc.) of the initial light emission of the movable presentation means is made different. By doing this, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the gaming control state has been initialized or whether the gaming control state has been restored.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, a movable effect means (first movable member 73 , a second movable member 74), and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before power supply was stopped. , effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing initial light emission of the movable effect means after the start of power supply and effect light emission of the movable effect means during execution of a game, The performance means includes a first movable performance means (first movable member 73) and a second movable performance means (second movable member 74), and the performance control means is configured to control the performance when the control state of the game is initialized. and when the control state of the game is restored, at least a part of the light emission mode of the initial light emission in the first movable effect means is the same, but the light emission mode of the initial light emission in the second movable effect means are designed to differ. By doing this, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the gaming control state has been initialized or whether the gaming control state has been restored.

◆As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the acquisition condition is satisfied, A determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game), and initializing the control state of the game after starting power supply, or stopping power supply. An initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of restoring to the previous state, and a variable display of a plurality of effect symbols displayed on a display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a fluctuating performance accompanied by the performance; each of the plurality of performance patterns includes identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) that enable each to be identified; When the control state of the game is initialized, the control means sets the identification characters in the plurality of performance symbols displayed on the display means to a first combination (for example, "135"), and adjusts the control state of the game. is restored, the identification characters in the plurality of effect patterns displayed on the display means are set to a second combination (for example, "753"). By doing this, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the gaming control state has been initialized or whether the gaming control state has been restored.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 4)
Conventional gaming machines generally initialize the gaming control state after the start of power supply, or restore it to the state before power supply was stopped. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine that caused the movable performance means to perform an initial operation after the start of power supply (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-187648). However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document has a problem in that the movable presentation means may not be able to perform a suitable initial operation.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, there are a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70). The movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between an initial processing means (main control board 110) that can perform the initial operation of the movable performance means after the start of power supply, and a performance that can perform the performance operation of the movable performance means during the execution of the game. and a control means (effect control board 130), wherein the effect control means is such that the movable effect means is in the second position at the time of start of power supply (power restoration) when the control state of the game is restored. In this case, the initial operation is performed after the movable presentation means returns to the first position. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable presentation means.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, there are a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70). The movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between an initial processing means (main control board 110) that can perform the initial operation of the movable performance means after the start of power supply, and a performance that can perform the performance operation of the movable performance means during the execution of the game. and a control means (effect control board 130), wherein the effect control means is such that the movable effect means is in the second position at the time of start of power supply (power restoration) when the control state of the game is restored. In this case, an operation is performed to return the movable presentation means to the first position, and when the movable presentation means returns to the first position, the initial operation is performed, but when the movable presentation means does not return to the first position, The above-mentioned initial operation is not performed. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable presentation means.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, there are a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70). The movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between an initial processing means (main control board 110) that can perform the initial operation of the movable performance means after the start of power supply, and a performance that can perform the performance operation of the movable performance means during the execution of the game. control means (effect control board 130), the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74), The effect control means is configured such that the first movable effect means is in the second position and the second movable effect element is in the first position at the start of power supply (power restoration) when the control state of the game is restored. If the first movable presentation means does not return to the first position, the initial operation of the first movable presentation means is Instead, the initial operation of the second movable effect means is performed. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable presentation means.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, there are a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70). The movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between an initial processing means (main control board 110) that can perform the initial operation of the movable performance means after the start of power supply, and a performance that can perform the performance operation of the movable performance means during the execution of the game. control means (effect control board 130), the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74), The effect control means is configured such that the first movable effect means is in the second position and the second movable effect element is in the first position at the start of power supply (power restoration) when the control state of the game is restored. If the first movable presentation means does not return to the first position, perform the initial operation of the second movable presentation means. It is designed not to do this. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable presentation means.

◆As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, there are a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70). The movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between an initial processing means (main control board 110) that can perform the initial operation of the movable performance means after the start of power supply, and a performance that can perform the performance operation of the movable performance means during the execution of the game. control means (effect control board 130), the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74), The effect control means is configured such that the first movable effect means is in the second position and the second movable effect means is in the first position when power supply is started (power is turned on) to initialize the control state of the game. position, the first movable presentation means performs a return operation to the first position, and when the first movable presentation means does not return to the first position, the first movable presentation means initializes. Instead, the initial operation of the second movable presentation means is performed. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable presentation means.

◆As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, there are a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70). The movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between an initial processing means (main control board 110) that can perform the initial operation of the movable performance means after the start of power supply, and a performance that can perform the performance operation of the movable performance means during the execution of the game. A control means (effect control board 130), the movable effect means has a first movable effect means (first movable member 73), a second position of the first movable effect means, and a second position of the first movable effect means. and a second movable presentation means (second movable member 74) which has an overlapping portion, and the presentation control means is configured to perform the above operation at the time of start of power supply (power-on) to initialize the control state of the game. When the first movable presentation means is at the second position and the second movable presentation means is at the first position, the first movable presentation means performs a return operation to the first position, and If the presentation means does not return to the first position, the initial operation of the second movable presentation means is not performed. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable presentation means.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 5)
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among these gaming machines, there were gaming machines that initialized the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or restored it to the state before the power supply was stopped (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189604 (see publication). However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the power supply that was stopped during the variable performance is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, and the interest in the game decreases. The problem was that it could happen.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when acquisition conditions are satisfied, A determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game), and initializing the control state of the game after starting power supply, or stopping power supply. An initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of restoring to the previous state, and a fluctuation accompanied by a fluctuating display of the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a performance is provided, and in the fluctuating performance, the performance symbol being displayed in a fluctuating manner is oscillatedly displayed (temporarily stopped display) and then statically displayed ( When the power supply that was stopped during execution of the fluctuating performance in which the performance symbols are oscillatedly displayed is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the performance control means performs a predetermined display. At the timing of (when receiving a special symbol confirmation command, when receiving a customer waiting command), the production symbol can be displayed statically on the display means without being oscillatedly displayed. By doing this, the player can be made aware that the variable performance that was being executed at the time the power supply was stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment a determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the information); An initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing or restoring to the state before the power supply was stopped, and a display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of displayed performance symbols; The effect control means includes a reach variation effect in which a reach effect is executed by forming a formation display, and the effect control means controls a reach effect at a predetermined timing ( When the special symbol confirmation command is received, when the customer wait command is received), a combination of the performance symbols that is different from the reach combination based on the production symbols that formed and displayed the reach state can be displayed in a static state on the display means. . By doing this, the player can be made aware that the variable performance that was being executed at the time the power supply was stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

(Contents 6 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among these gaming machines, there were gaming machines that initialized the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or restored it to the state before the power supply was stopped (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189604 (see publication). However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game will decrease. There was a problem that there was.

◆As a first configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) as a pending memory; and a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) based on the determination information. a main control board 110), an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and a determination by the determination means. A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the result, are a customer waiting state in which the fluctuating performance is not executed, a first state that is an execution period of the fluctuating performance without the pending memory, and an execution period of the fluctuating performance in a state with the pending memory. and a second state, and the performance control means is capable of performing a specific display (displaying an initial screen, etc.) before displaying the performance symbols on the display means when the control state of the game is restored. and the mode of the specific display (display of the initial screen only) when the power supply that was stopped in the customer waiting state is restarted and the power supply is restored to the customer waiting state, and the power supply is stopped in the first state or the second state. The display mode of the specific display (initial screen + display of the returning screen) is made different when the power supply is resumed and the first state or the second state is restored. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored.

(Contents 7 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine that performs a customer waiting effect on a display unit when a player is not playing a game (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-064835). However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document has a problem in that the customer waiting effect is not executed at an appropriate time depending on the state of the gaming machine.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment A determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the information), and a determining means (main control board 110) that can determine the control state of the game after the start of power supply. An initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing or restoring to the state before power supply was stopped, and a display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of the displayed performance pattern, and the performance control means is configured to perform a static display of the performance pattern on the display means. When a predetermined period of time has elapsed, it is possible to execute a customer waiting performance (customer waiting demonstration performance) on the display means, and when the performance pattern is displayed statically after the elapse of the variable time of the variable performance, and when the control state It is possible to make the period until the customer waiting performance is executed different depending on the case where the performance pattern is statically displayed after the initialization or after the recovery of the control state. By doing so, the customer waiting effect can be executed at an appropriate time depending on the state of the gaming machine, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

(Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 8)
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays execution information on a display means corresponding to determination information on whether a variable performance is being executed (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-064835). However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game will decrease. There was a problem that there was.

◆As a first configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment a determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the information); Initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing or restoring to the state before the power supply was stopped, and an effect displayed on a display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a fluctuating display of symbols, and when the control state of the game is restored, the performance control means displays the performance on the display means. It is possible to perform a specific display (displaying an initial screen, etc.) before displaying a symbol, and to display the determination information during execution of the variable effect in a predetermined display area (the icon display area 70C) of the display means. It is possible to display the corresponding execution information (the relevant icon), and if the power supply that was stopped while the execution information was displayed is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the next from the end of the specific display Until the variable display starts, the predetermined display area is secured in a predetermined state (a state in which an effect image such as a background image can be displayed), but the execution information is not stored in the predetermined display area. It is not displayed. By doing this, the player can be made aware that the variable performance that was being executed at the time the power supply was stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

(Contents 9 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among these gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a pre-read preview performance that spans multiple variable performances based on the preliminary determination result of the determination information (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-143904 reference). However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document has a problem that the interest in the game may be reduced when the power supply that was stopped during the pre-read preview performance is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. there were.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment It is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) and the determination information. A determining means (main control board 110), a preliminary determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before the determination by the determining means, and initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply. or initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring the state to the state before the power supply was stopped; A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a fluctuating performance accompanied by a fluctuating display; It is possible to execute a predetermined pre-reading notice performance (continuous notice performance) over a period of time, and if the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the above-mentioned pre-reading notice performance is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the above-mentioned pre-reading notice performance In the variable performance that is executed next to the variable performance in which the power supply is stopped without restarting the power supply, a different preview performance (for example, an alternative preview performance) from the prefetched preview performance can be executed. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player due to the termination of the continuous preview performance due to the stoppage of power supply, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Contents 10 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among these gaming machines, there was a gaming machine that executed a specific performance that gradually indicated the degree of expectation that the special game would be executed over multiple variable performances (for example, (Refer to Publication No.-143904). However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document has a problem in that when the power supply that was stopped during a specific performance is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the interest in the game may decrease. Ta.

◆As a first configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment It is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) and the determination information. A determining means (main control board 110), a preliminary determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before the determination by the determining means, and initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply. or an initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring the state to the state before the power supply was stopped; A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display; It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, an icon change effect) suggested by Although the specific performance can be executed in the variable performance that is executed next to the stopped variable performance, it is not executed from the continuation of the stage that was suggested before the power supply was stopped. By doing this, it is possible to execute the icon change performance in accordance with the contents of the current variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Contents 11 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among these gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a specific effect that gradually changes the display mode of identification information that is displayed corresponding to each piece of judgment information for which execution of the variable effect has not been completed. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-061728). However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, when the power supply that was stopped during a change performance is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the processing load related to display control after the power supply is restarted is high. There was a possibility that something would happen.

◆As a first configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment It is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) and the determination information. A determining means (main control board 110), a preliminary determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before the determination by the determining means, and initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply. or an initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring the state to the state before the power supply was stopped; A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a fluctuating performance accompanied by a fluctuating display; It is possible to display identification information (the icon, the pending icon) corresponding to each piece of the judgment information that has not been started, and the special game can be executed by changing the display mode of the identification information in stages. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, an icon change effect) that suggests the degree of expectation for character icon) and a third stage mode (red character icon), and the power supply that was stopped during the display of the identification information in the second stage mode that changes up to the third stage mode is resumed and the game is started. When the control state is restored, the identification information that was displayed in the second stage mode is displayed in the first stage mode. By doing this, the user does not need to be aware of the display mode of the pending icon when the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to display control after the power supply is restarted.

(Contents 12 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine that displayed the number of pending memories, which is determination information that has not yet been determined, in a display area (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-061728). However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it takes time to grasp the number of suspended memories, which reduces the interest in the game. There was a problem that there was a possibility that the

◆As a first configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) as a pending memory; and a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) based on the determination information. a main control board 110), an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and a determination by the determination means. A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the result, and the control state of the game is controlled. In the case of restoration, it is possible to perform a specific display (display of the initial screen, etc.) before displaying the effect design on the display means, and the first display area (sub-first hold display 83, sub-second A hold display indicating the number of hold memories is displayed in each of a hold indicator 84) and a second display area different from the first display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D). If the control state of the game is restored by restarting the power supply that was stopped while the suspended memory exists, the suspended display may be executed in the second display area while the specific display is being executed. However, the suspended display can be executed in the first display area. By doing this, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the number of pending memories can be known before the end of the specific display, and the interest in the game will not decrease. It becomes possible to suppress the

(Contents 13 of the invention described in this embodiment)
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among these gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a performance that suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-143904). However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, when the power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored after being stopped during a performance that indicates the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed, the interest in the game is lost. There was a problem that there was a possibility of a decline.

◆As a first configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment It is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) and the determination information. A determining means (main control board 110), a preliminary determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before the determining means, and initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply. or an initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring the state to the state before the power supply was stopped; The performance control means includes a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display, and a light emitting means (winning hole lamp NR) that can be changed to any of a plurality of notification modes, The means is capable of executing a change effect (lamp change effect) that suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed by changing the light emitting means to a specific notification mode, and during execution of the change effect. When the power supply that has been stopped is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the light emitting means is set to a different notification mode (white lighting or extinguishment) from the specific notification mode. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is resumed, and to avoid a situation where the player is confused, such as when the lamp change effect is restarted even though the variable effect has not been executed. This makes it possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

(Contents 14 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Conventional gaming machines are equipped with a main control means that can control the progress of the game, and a performance control means that can control performances according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. is common. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine equipped with a movable performance means that can operate in a predetermined manner (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-187648). However, such gaming machines do not take into consideration the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means deviate from each other.

◇The first configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance, movable performance means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means executes an initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable production means and a production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means. is possible, and a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command etc.), it is possible to carry out said initial operation. By doing this, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the production control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the production control means. Become.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command etc.) from the main control means are provided. In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance, movable performance means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means executes an initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable production means and a production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means. It is possible to perform a customer waiting effect in a standby state (a customer waiting state) in which no game is in progress, and during the execution of the customer waiting effect, a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.), the initial operation can be performed. By doing this, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the production control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the production control means. Become.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means are provided. In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance, movable performance means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means executes an initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable production means and a production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means. It is possible to execute a variable effect for informing the player whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and during execution of the variable effect, the main control means When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received, the initial operation can be performed. By doing this, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the production control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the production control means. Become.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means are provided. In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance, movable performance means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means executes an initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable production means and a production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means. It is possible to perform a special game performance (jackpot performance, opening performance, round performance, ending performance) during the execution of a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to perform special game performances (jackpot performance, opening performance, round performance, ending performance), and If a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during execution, the initial operation can be performed. By doing this, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the production control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the production control means. Become.

◆As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling , a second movable member 74), and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before power supply was stopped. , the effect control means is capable of performing an initial operation and an initial light emission of the movable effect means, and is also capable of executing a effect operation and an effect light emission of the movable effect means. , The operation mode of the initial operation of the movable presentation means (operation mode such as the number of steps and the movement of each step) is the same when the control state of the game is initialized and when the control state of the game is restored. However, by changing the light emission mode (emission color, light emission pattern, etc.) of the initial light emission of the movable effect means, a control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot If a predetermined signal (a power-on designation command, a power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during the production (presentation), it is possible to execute the initial operation of the movable production means. By doing this, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the production control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the production control means. Become.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) that can control the performance, a performance means (first movable member 73) that can operate in a predetermined manner (operation, light emission, sound output, image display). , second movable member 74, production button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (game ball winning in the starting hole). ), a determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply. or initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of restoring the state to the state before the power supply was stopped, and the effect control means is configured to control the initial operation (initial operation) of the effect means. (initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and production operation of the movable production means (production operation, production light emission, production sound output, production image display), and the judgment of the judgment means Depending on the result, it is possible to execute a fluctuating performance accompanied by a fluctuating display of the performance symbols displayed on the display means (image display device), and in the fluctuating performance, the fluctuating performance symbol is shaken. It is possible to perform a static display (stop display) after a dynamic display (temporary stop display), and the production control means is capable of restarting the power supply that was stopped during execution of the fluctuating production in which the production symbols are displayed in an oscillating manner. When the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to display the performance symbols statically on the display means without oscillating the display at a predetermined timing (when receiving the special symbol confirmation command, when receiving the customer waiting command). A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is sent from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuating performance, jackpot performance) in which it is possible to execute a performance according to the signal. is received, it is possible to carry out said initial operation. By doing this, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the production control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means. Become.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) that can control the performance, a performance means (first movable member 73) that can operate in a predetermined manner (operation, light emission, sound output, image display). , second movable member 74, production button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and determination information (special figure determination a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) as a pending memory; and a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) based on the determination information. a main control board 110), and an initial processing means (main control board 110) that initializes the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restores it to the state before the stop of power supply, and The control means controls the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). According to the judgment result of the judgment means, it is possible to execute a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of the effect symbols displayed on the display means (image display device), and the The states include a customer waiting state in which the fluctuating performance is not executed, a first state that is an execution period of the fluctuating performance without the pending memory, and an execution period of the fluctuating performance in a state with the pending memory. and a second state in which the performance control means performs a specific display (displaying an initial screen, etc.) before displaying the performance symbols on the display means when the control state of the game is restored. is possible, and the display mode of the specific display (display of the initial screen only) when the power supply that was stopped during the customer waiting state is restarted and the customer waiting state is restored, and the first state or the first state The display mode of the specific display (initial screen + display of the returning screen) when the power supply that was stopped during the second state is restarted and the first state or the second state is restored is made different from the display mode (display of the initial screen + returning screen), and according to the signal. If a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuating performance, jackpot performance) in which the performance can be executed, the initial It is possible to perform the actuation. By doing this, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the production control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the production control means. Become.

◆An eighth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) that can control the performance, a performance means (first movable member 73) that can operate in a predetermined manner (operation, light emission, sound output, image display). , second movable member 74, production button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and determination information (special figure determination a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) as a pending memory; and a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) based on the determination information. a main control board 110), and an initial processing means (main control board 110) that initializes the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restores it to the state before the stop of power supply, and The control means controls the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). According to the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to perform a fluctuating performance accompanied by a fluctuating display of the performance symbols displayed on the display means (image display device), and the display means When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after statically displaying the performance design, it is possible to perform a customer waiting performance (customer waiting demonstration performance) on the display means, and after the variable time of the variable performance has elapsed, the performance design can be displayed. The period until the customer waiting performance is executed can be made different between when the performance pattern is statically displayed and when the performance pattern is statically displayed after the control state is initialized or after the control state is restored; A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which a performance can be executed in accordance with the signal. In this case, it is possible to carry out the initial operation. By doing this, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the production control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the production control means. Become.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) that can control the performance, a performance means (first movable member 73) that can operate in a predetermined manner (operation, light emission, sound output, image display). , second movable member 74, production button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and determination information (special figure determination a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) as a pending memory; and a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) based on the determination information. a main control board 110), and an initial processing means (main control board 110) that initializes the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restores it to the state before the stop of power supply, and The control means controls the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). According to the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to perform a fluctuating performance accompanied by a fluctuating display of the performance design displayed on the display means (image display device), and the above-mentioned advance Based on the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to execute a predetermined pre-read notice effect (continuous notice effect) over the plurality of fluctuation effects, and the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the pre-read notice effect is restarted. When the control state of the game is restored, the prefetched preview performance is not restarted, and a different preview performance from the prefetched preview performance (for example, When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command , power restoration designation command, etc.), the initial operation can be performed. By doing this, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the production control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the production control means. Become.

◆A tenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) that can control the performance, a performance means (first movable member 73) that can operate in a predetermined manner (operation, light emission, sound output, image display). , second movable member 74, production button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and determination information (special figure determination a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) as a pending memory; and a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) based on the determination information. a main control board 110), and an initial processing means (main control board 110) that initializes the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restores it to the state before the stop of power supply, and The control means controls the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). According to the judgment result of the judgment means, it is possible to execute a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device), It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, an icon change effect) that gradually indicates the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed over the variable effect, and the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the specific effect is restarted. When the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to execute the specific performance in the variable performance that is executed next to the variable performance for which the power supply has stopped, but the specific performance has been suggested before the power supply was stopped. A predetermined signal (a power-on designation command, When a power restoration designation command, etc.) is received, the initial operation can be performed. By doing this, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the production control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the production control means. Become.

◆An eleventh configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling (Operation, light emission, sound output, image display) Possible production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and fulfillment of acquisition conditions A storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing the judgment information (special figure judgment information) obtained by (entering the game ball into the starting hole) as a reserved memory, and A determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether to execute an advantageous special game (jackpot game), and initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or before the power supply is stopped. initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring to the state of It is possible to execute the production operation of the means (production operation, production light emission, production sound output, production image display), and it is expected that the special game will be executed by changing the light emission means to a specific notification mode. It is possible to execute a change effect (lamp change effect) that suggests the degree of change, and when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the change effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the light emitting means is The main control is performed during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuating performance, jackpot performance) in which it is possible to control a notification mode (white lighting or turning off) different from a specific notification mode and execute a performance according to the signal. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the means, the initial operation can be performed. By doing this, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the production control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the production control means. Become.

◆As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the game, a sound output means (sound output device 9) capable of outputting game performance sound (BGM, SE, etc.) The production control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the audio output means, and is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) from the audio output device, and If a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state in which the performance can be executed (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance), the predetermined signal It is possible to output notification sound. By doing this, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the production control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the production control means. Become.

◆As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance, a sound output means (sound output device 9) capable of outputting game performance sound (BGM, SE, etc.) The performance control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the audio output means, and is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound indicating the start of power supply (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.), and is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound indicating the start of power supply from the audio output device, and is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) when the game is in progress. It is possible to execute a customer waiting effect in a standby state (a customer waiting state) in which there is no customer waiting, and a predetermined signal (a power-on designation command, a power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means while the customer waiting performance is being executed. In this case, it is possible to output the predetermined notification sound. By doing this, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the production control means, and it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the production control means. Become.

◆As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the game, a sound output means (sound output device 9) capable of outputting game performance sound (BGM, SE, etc.) The performance control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the audio output means, and is advantageous to the player. It is possible to execute a fluctuating performance to notify whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game), and during execution of the fluctuating performance, a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration command, etc.) is sent from the main control means. When a specified command, etc.) is received, the predetermined notification sound can be output. By doing this, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the production control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the production control means. Become.

◆As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the game, a sound output means (sound output device 9) capable of outputting game performance sound (BGM, SE, etc.) The performance control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, and is advantageous to the player. It is possible to execute a special game performance (jackpot performance, opening performance, round performance, ending performance) while a special game (jackpot game) is being executed, and a predetermined signal is sent from the main control means during execution of the special game performance. When receiving a command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.), it is possible to output the predetermined notification sound. By doing this, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the production control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the production control means. Become.

(Contents 15 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Conventional gaming machines are generally equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a performance control means for controlling the performance according to commands from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying an effect image (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-187648). However, such gaming machines do not take into consideration the case where the power supply to the main control means is stopped while the power supply to the performance control means continues.

◆The first configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and an effect according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. The gaming machine is equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance, and is equipped with display means (image display devices 70, 71) capable of displaying performance images (variable performance, jackpot performance, etc.). , the performance control means is capable of displaying a game standby screen (a static display screen of performance symbols) on the display means in a standby state (a customer waiting state) in which a game is not in progress, If power supply to the main control means is stopped during display, it is possible to continue displaying the game standby screen. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

(Contents 16 of the invention described in this embodiment)
Conventional gaming machines are generally equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a performance control means for controlling the performance according to commands from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there are those that execute an abnormality notification based on an input signal from a predetermined detection means (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-113441). However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, there is a possibility that an abnormality notification may not be properly performed.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine that can play games, detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), and control means (main control board 110 and/or performance control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on input signals from the detection means. and, if the control means and the detection means are in a disconnected state (connector disconnected, disconnection, etc.) when power supply to the gaming machine is started, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.). By doing so, it becomes possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine that can play games, detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), and a control means (main control board 110 and/or production control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means. If the control means and the detection means are in a disconnected state (connector disconnected, wire breakage, etc.) when power supply to the gaming machine is started, a predetermined abnormality notification (wire disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification , radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and if the control means and the detection means are connected during the execution of the predetermined abnormality notification, for a predetermined period (30 seconds elapsed, until the power is turned off, etc.) The execution of the predetermined abnormality notification is continued. By doing so, it becomes possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine that can play games, detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), and a control means (main control board 110 and/or production control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means. If the control means and the detection means become disconnected (connector disconnected, disconnection, etc.) while power is being supplied to the gaming machine, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification) will be issued. notifications, etc.) was made possible. By doing so, it becomes possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), and a control means (main control board 110 and/or production control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means. If the control means and the detection means become disconnected (connector disconnected, disconnection, etc.) while power is being supplied to the gaming machine, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification) will be issued. notification, etc.), and if the control means and the detection means are connected while the predetermined abnormality notification is being executed, the predetermined notification will continue for a predetermined period of time (30 seconds elapse, until the power is turned off, etc.). Continue to perform abnormality notification. By doing so, it becomes possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

Note that the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, but can also be used for a reel-type gaming machine (so-called slot machine). Furthermore, it can also be used in a jankyu game machine or an arranged ball game machine.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured to shift to a high probability gaming state a predetermined number of times after all jackpot games are completed, but the game ball passes through a specific area in a specific round of jackpot games. In this case, the gaming machine may be configured to shift to a high probability gaming state a predetermined number of times after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, after all the jackpot games are finished, the game is moved to a high probability game state, and if the player wins the falling lottery that is executed at the start of the special symbol fluctuation display in the high probability game state, the high probability game state is ended and the normal It is also possible to use a gaming machine that returns to a gaming state.

In addition, if the type of jackpot special symbol is a normal symbol, it will be shifted to a low probability gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, and if the type of the jackpot special symbol is a specific symbol, the next time will be changed after the end of the jackpot game. It may be a gaming machine that shifts to a high probability gaming state that continues until a jackpot game.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed simultaneously (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol is given priority. Although it is assumed that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed at the same time (in parallel), a gaming machine may be used.

Further, the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative in all respects and should be considered not to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description, and it is intended that equivalent meanings to the claims and all changes within the scope be included.

(If the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Next, a case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described. The case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command means, for example, that the command is not received due to a disconnection, half-disconnection, or disconnection of the command line connecting the main control board 110 and the production control board 130, or the like. , communication abnormalities such as abnormal reception of commands due to garbled commands due to noise or half-disconnection are possible. In addition, in the following explanation, when a predetermined state in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command occurs, it is expressed with an "x" in the figure. During a predetermined period from when a predetermined state in which a command cannot be received normally occurs until before a command can be received normally, one or more commands of the same type and/or different types may not be received normally. . In addition, the command is written as "cd" in the figure.

The effect pattern 70a displayed on the first image display device 70 in the normal gaming state includes a rectangular base image, a character image CG consisting of a predetermined character, a bar-shaped image SG that is a part of the character, and a background of the character. It is assumed that it is composed of a decoration section consisting of a decorative pattern effect image ZE, and an identification section consisting of a hexagonal base image and a numeric section (identification characters). Further, it is assumed that the effect pattern 70a displayed on the first image display device 70 in a specific game state is composed only of an identification part consisting of a number part (identification character).

Further, in the normal gaming state, it is assumed that the background images corresponding to each of the production modes A to C are scrolling left and right (reciprocating motion). Further, in the specific game state, it is assumed that the background images corresponding to each of the production modes D to E are scrolling left and right (reciprocating motion).

In addition, if the connector of a predetermined detection sensor (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) is disconnected, an abnormality notification (error notification) is immediately performed. On the other hand, in the case of a command abnormality due to disconnection of the connector of the command line for communication between the main control board 110 and the production control board 130, no abnormality notification is performed.

In the following specific example, a case will be explained in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive commands in the normal gaming state, but even if the gaming state is a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state), the basic The flow is similar to the normal game state.

Specifically, the first reservation number, the first special symbol storage designation command, the first special symbol, the first special symbol display 60, the first special symbol reservation display 63, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-first 1 pending display 83, 1st pending number display area 70E, 1st pending icon display area 70B, 1st lamp pattern, and 1st starting port 45, respectively, by 2nd pending number, 2nd special symbol memory designation command, 2 special symbol, 2nd special symbol display 61, 2nd special symbol pending display 64, sub 2nd variable display 82, sub 2nd pending display 84, 2nd pending number display area 70F, 2nd pending icon display It may be read as the area 70D, the second lamp pattern, and the second starting port 47.

(Specific example 1 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 1 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107. FIG. 106 is a timing chart when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 107(a) to (j) are productions corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart of FIG. This is an example.

First, at the timing of P0, as the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", the variable display of the first special symbol changes to the first special symbol. It begins with the symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "1". At this timing, the start commands (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first
When the production control unit 130m receives the special symbol variation pattern designation command), the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from “2” to “1” and starts the variation production. Processing is performed for this purpose.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number (numeric information) displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is "2" for one frame of non-animation. becomes “1”. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "2" to "1". Further, the two pending icons H1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . In addition, the variable display of the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the special symbol (referred to as the first lamp symbol when specifically distinguished) on the sub-first variable display 81 is started, but the production symbol 70a does not perform the preparation operation. Start scrolling after doing so.

In addition, in the 1st special symbol reservation display 63, the 1st reservation number U1 (reservation|reservation memory) which the main control part 110m memorize|stores (ascertains) is displayed by lighting/extinguishing/blinking of LED. The variable display of the first lamp pattern is performed by blinking the LED of the sub-first variable display 81. In addition, the sub-first reservation display 83 displays the first reservation number U1 (reservation memory) stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m by lighting/extinguishing/flashing the LED.

Next, at timing P1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "1" to "2". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (preread designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The stored (kept) first reservation number U1 changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "1" to "2". Further, one pending icon T12 is additionally displayed as an animation of 10 frames in the first pending icon display area 70B2 (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) (see FIG. 107(a)).

Thereafter, at timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating motion (acting motion) (see FIG. 107(b)).

Then, at timing P3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the performance control unit 130m receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248") (see FIG. 107(c)), and the sub-first The first lamp pattern on the variable display 81 is stopped in a losing manner (for example, turned off).

Next, at timing P4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". A variable display of one special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "2" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "2" to "1". Further, the two pending icons H1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Further, variable display of the 1 lamp pattern on the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Further, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as operating a part of the decorative part and enlarging/reducing the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 107(d)) reference).

Thereafter, at timing P5, when a predetermined period of time has passed after the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the effect pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to be scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 107(e)).

Then, at timing P6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating operation (acting operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 107(f)).

Next, at timing P7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the sub-first variable display 81 is displayed. The period of the fluctuating display of the first lamp pattern is extended, and the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuating period (see FIG. 107(f)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion).

Thereafter, at timing P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the first A variable display of special symbols is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "1" to "0". Further, one hold icon H1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TH. Further, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (see FIG. 107(g)).

Then, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the first lamp pattern on the special pattern TZ and the sub-first holding display 83 is continued, and the effect pattern 70a is, as in the present embodiment, After preparatory operations such as partially operating and enlarging/reducing the whole or part are performed, scrolling is started (see FIG. 107(g)).

Then, at the timing of P9, the effect pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to be scrolled. At this time, since the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the icon is in a state where it is performing a rotation operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 107(h)).

Next, at timing P10, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("365"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the icon TH continues to rotate (actual effect) (see FIG. 107(i)).

Thereafter, at timing P11, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the sub-first variable display 81 is displayed. The period of the fluctuating display of the first lamp pattern is extended, and the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuating period (see FIG. 107(i)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion).

At this time, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m is "0", and even if the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed (a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation in P8), ), the temporary stop display of the effect pattern 70a continues (see FIG. 107(j)). Furthermore, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol may continue to fluctuate. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion). In this way, the customer waiting demonstration performance (predetermined performance) is not performed on the first image display device 70 even after a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the change in P8.

As a predetermined production that is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of variation of the production symbol 70a (special symbol) in a state where the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m is “0”. This is not limited to a customer waiting demonstration performance, but may also be an adjustment guidance performance such as adjusting the volume or brightness of an image display device, a guidance performance regarding game operations, or other performance. In this case, the customer waiting demonstration performance may be performed after performing a performance other than the customer waiting demonstration performance. In this way, the predetermined performance includes a performance in which the performance symbol 70a which is temporarily stopped or permanently stopped is executed until the next variable performance is started. Note that the predetermined effect is not limited to being executed by a customer waiting command (customer waiting state designation command), but may be executed by other commands, time set by a timer, or the like.

As described above, according to the first specific example shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, when a predetermined state in which a command is not normally received in the production control section 130m occurs while the variation production of the production symbol 70a is being performed, The performance pattern 70a after the fluctuating performance can be displayed in an oscillating state, and the oscillating state of the performance pattern 70a can be continued even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuating performance to provide a demonstration performance while waiting for a customer. It is no longer executed. Therefore, it becomes easier to see that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players and to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

Thereafter, since the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m is "0", the state shifts to a customer waiting state (game waiting state). When the performance control unit 130m receives the customer waiting command (customer waiting state designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit 130m performs processing to end the variable performance.

In this case, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (main stop), and the special The symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined losing mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol comes to a permanent stop in a losing mode (for example, turned off).

In addition, at the timing of P7, although the production control unit 130m was able to successfully receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, the production command sent from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command. Even if the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 cannot receive the commands normally, the production control unit 130m will normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m. The same processing as when it is not possible will be performed.

(Specific example 2 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A second specific example in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. FIG. 108 is a timing chart when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 109(a) to (i) are productions corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. This is an example.

First, at timing P0, as the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", the variable display of the first special symbol starts. . Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Further, variable display of the first lamp pattern on the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 is started, but in the production pattern 70a, a part of the decorative part is operated as in the present embodiment. After performing preparatory operations such as enlarging/reducing the entire or part of the image, scrolling is started.

Next, at timing P1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". At this time, the winning command (first special symbol When the production control unit 130m receives the storage specification command and the first starting opening winning specification command (pre-read specification command), the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from “3” to “4”. ”. In addition, in the specific example 2, a look-ahead performance (advance notification) indicating that the expectation level of a jackpot is high is executed in advance based on the first pending memory due to winning at timing P1. In the following explanation, the pending memory that serves as the standard for the look-ahead effect may be referred to as the target pending memory.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "3" to "4". Further, one pending icon T1 is additionally displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B as an animation of 10 frames (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) (see FIG. 109(a)).

Thereafter, at timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating motion (acting motion) (see FIG. 109(b)).

Then, at timing P3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the performance control unit 130m receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248") (see FIG. 109(c)), and the first lamp The book stops when the symbol is in a losing state (for example, the light goes out).

Next, at timing P4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". Variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Also, at this timing when the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol pending display 63 changes from "4" to "3", a start command (first special symbol memory When the production control unit 130m receives the specification command, production symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command), the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from “4” to “4”. 3" and processing for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes from "4" to "3". Additionally, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and after a preparatory operation is performed, scrolling is started (see FIG. 109(d)).

Thereafter, at timing P5, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, a pre-read zone effect (normal zone effect) is started. Specifically, the background image changes to a prefetch zone background, a blue zone image in which the text "ZONE" scrolls in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement). (See FIG. 109(e)).

Then, at timing P6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Furthermore, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (actual performance operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 109(f)).

Next, at timing P7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern is displayed in a variable manner. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern continue. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion). Further, the zone effect (display of the prefetch zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of zone BGM) is maintained, and the prefetch zone effect is continuously executed (see FIG. 109(g)).

Thereafter, at timing P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "3" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 109(g) is maintained, except that the display of the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "2".

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 109(g) is maintained, except that the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "2".

Next, at timing P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "3" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" without passing from "3" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. It becomes "1" directly. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes directly from "3" to "1" without passing through "2". Furthermore, the surplus pending icon T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is erased with one frame of non-animation, and all performance symbols 70a (past The effect pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable effect is displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (see FIG. 109(h)). In this way, when the discrepancy between the first pending number U1 that is known by the main control unit 110m and the first pending number U1 that is known by the production control unit 130m is "2", the pending icon T13 is It is deleted from the first pending icon display area 70B3 without being shifted and displayed from the pending icon display area 70B3 to 70B2. At this time, the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image continue.

Then, the necessary two pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the look-ahead zone effect, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern continues, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparation operation (FIG. 109(h) )reference).

Note that when the surplus reservation icon T1 is deleted and the necessary reservation icon T1 is shifted and displayed, the surplus reservation icon T1 may be left as is and the necessary reservation icon T1 is displayed in a shift manner.

Thereafter, at timing P11, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the effect pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed while the pre-reading zone effect and the scrolling of the background image are continued. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 109(i)). Here, in specific example 2, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command before the target pending memory is consumed, and at this time, it is possible to continue executing the prefetch effect based on the target pending memory. It has become.

After that, if the performance control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variable performance ( Also in the target of look-ahead performance), normal zone effects (display of look-ahead zone background, display of blue zone image, output of zone BGM) are executed according to the preview scenario (see FIG. 109(i)), and the effect pattern 70a The look-ahead zone effect ends when the actual stop occurs.

As in the modified example shown in FIG. 109-1, if the production control unit 130m successfully receives various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the first pending number U1 becomes “0”. Based on the variable performance (target of the look-ahead performance) that is executed during the fluctuation display, the normal zone performance (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of zone BGM) will continue according to the preview scenario. The prefetch zone effect may be ended without being executed. If the look-ahead zone performance is not to be executed continuously, the look-ahead zone performance is erased at the timing of P10, and the performance mode is changed to a mode A background or the like which has a lower expectation level for a jackpot than the look-ahead performance.

(Specific example 3 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A third specific example in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 110. FIG. 108 is a timing chart when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 110(a) to (i) are productions corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. This is an example.

Note that specific example 3 in FIG. 110 differs from specific example 2 in FIG. 109 in that it executes a prefetch effect production instead of the prefetch zone production as a prefetch preview production, and also executes an icon change production, so it is common here. The explanation of the different parts will be omitted, and only the different parts will be explained.

At the timing of P4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes from "4" to "3". Additionally, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and the production pattern 70a is such that a part of the decorative part moves or the whole or a part expands and contracts as in the present embodiment. After performing the following preparatory operations, scrolling is started (see FIG. 110(d)).

In addition, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and a pre-read effect performance is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed at the lower rear of the production pattern 70a (see FIG. 110(d)), and an effect sound is output.

Thereafter, at timing P5, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the pre-reading effect production is temporarily stopped, and the icon change production is started. Specifically, the third hold icon T13 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B3 changes to a blue character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement). (See FIG. 110(e)).

Then, at timing P6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (effecting operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 110(f)).

Next, at timing P7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the variable performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern is displayed in a variable manner. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern are continued. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion). Further, the pending icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 110(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "3" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the prefetch effect production (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) is continuously executed, and the display of the first pending number U1 on the first special symbol pending display 63 is "2". The state shown in FIG. 110(g) is maintained except for.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the prefetch effect production (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) is not executed, except that the display of the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "2". As a result, the state shown in FIG. 110(g) is maintained.

Note that, at the timings of P8 and P9, the prefetch effect presentation (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect) may be continuously performed.

Next, at timing P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "3" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" without passing from "3" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. It becomes "1" directly. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes directly from "3" to "1" without going through "2". Furthermore, the surplus hold icon T13 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B3 is erased with one frame of non-animation, and all the effect patterns 70a (past The effect pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable effect is displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (see FIG. 110(h)). In this way, when the discrepancy between the first pending number U1 that is known by the main control unit 110m and the first pending number U1 that is known by the production control unit 130m is "2", the pending icon T13 is It is deleted from the first pending icon display area 70B3 without being shifted and displayed from the pending icon display area 70B3 to 70B2.

Then, the necessary two pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. Moreover, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the production symbol 70a is started, and the pre-read effect production is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF is displayed at the lower rear of the production pattern 70a according to the preview scenario, and an effect sound is output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparation operation (see FIG. 110(h)). In this way, the pending icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained and the icon change effect continues, and the pre-read effect effect (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) and scrolling of the background image continue. is executed.

Thereafter, at timing P11, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the pre-reading effect production is temporarily stopped, and the icon change production is executed, and the production pattern 70a is scrolling at high speed. Specifically, the first hold icon T11 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B1 changes to a red character icon in accordance with the change scenario, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 110(i)).

After that, if the production control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variable production is executed while the special symbol is displayed with the first pending number U1 being “0”. Also in (target of expectation level suggestion by pre-read preview presentation), pre-read effect presentation (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) and icon change presentation (the icon change presentation) are executed. Then, the look-ahead effect performance ends at the timing when the performance pattern 70a scrolls at high speed, and the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a stops displaying, and the icon change performance ends. Here, in specific example 3, the effect control unit 130m normally receives a command before the target pending memory is consumed, and in this case, it is possible to continue executing the prefetch effect based on the target pending memory. It has become.

As in the modification shown in FIG. 110-1, if the performance control unit 130m successfully receives various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the first pending number U1 becomes “0”. Based on the fluctuating effects that are executed during the fluctuating display (target of expectations suggested by prefetching effects), icon change effects and prefetched effect effects (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effects) are performed according to the preview scenario. The prefetch effect may be terminated without being continuously executed. If the pre-reading effect is not to be executed continuously, the pre-reading effect presentation is deleted at the timing of P10, and the effect mode is changed to a mode A background only, which has a lower expectation of a jackpot than the pre-reading effect presentation. Furthermore, the pending icon T1, which had been changed into a character due to the icon change effect, is changed to a normal mode (CD), which is a mode of presentation with low expectations for a jackpot.

(Specific example 4 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A fourth specific example in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 111. FIG. 108 is a timing chart when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 111(a) to (i) are productions corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. This is an example.

In addition, in the specific example 4 of FIG. 111, an icon change effect as a pre-read preview effect is executed on the first image display device 70, and at the same time, an effect (motion effect and light emission effect) by the first movable member 73 as a pre-read advance notice effect. This example differs from the third specific example in FIG. 110 in that the following is executed. Therefore, a description of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be described. Note that in the third specific example, a look-ahead effect performance can also be executed, but since it is the same as the second specific example, the explanation is omitted.

Next, at timing P4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". Variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes from "4" to "3". Additionally, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and the production pattern 70a includes a part of the decorative part moving as in the present embodiment, and a whole or a part expanding and contracting. After performing the following preparatory operations, scrolling is started (see FIG. 111(d)).

In addition, variable display of the performance symbol 70a, special symbol TZ, and first lamp symbol is started, and a performance by the first movable member 73 is executed as a pre-read preview performance. Specifically, the first movable member 73 installed above the first image display device 70 operates in a manner in which expectations for a jackpot are high (for example, large movements or a manner similar to a jackpot). 111(d)), the first movable member 73 emits light. It should be noted that the pre-read preview performance by the first movable member 73 can be executed in a period before the ready-to-reach performance of the performance pattern 70a, and in a partial period of each variable performance in a plurality of variable performances of the performance pattern 70a. A partial period of a variable performance is a variable performance period from the start of the variable performance to the stop (temporary stop or permanent stop) of the variable performance, for example, the first movable member 73 operates a predetermined number of times at the timing of the start of the variable performance. The first movable member 73 operates a predetermined number of times at the timing of the end of the variable performance. It is possible to execute a look-ahead effect at various times, such as executing a look-ahead effect. In this specific example, the pre-reading effect executed during a part of the variable effect period is scheduled to be executed in two or more variable effects.

Thereafter, at timing P5, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the third hold icon T13 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B3 changes to a blue character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement). (See FIG. 111(e)). In addition, the pre-read preview performance by the first movable member 73 continues to be performed.

Then, at timing P6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (effecting operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 111(f)).

Next, at timing P7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern is displayed in a variable manner. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern are continued. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion). Further, the pending icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 111(g)).

Thereafter, at timing P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "3" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the first reservation number U1 of the first special symbol reservation display 63 is displayed as "2" without the pre-read preview effect being executed by the first movable member 73, as shown in FIG. 111(g). state is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 111(g) is maintained, except that the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "2".

Note that, at the timings of P8 and P9, the pre-read preview performance (the motion performance and light emission performance of the first movable member 73) by the operation of the first movable member 73 may be continuously performed.

Next, at timing P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". A variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "3" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" without passing from "3" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. It becomes "1" directly. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes directly from "3" to "1" without passing through "2". Furthermore, the surplus hold icon T3 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B3 is erased with one frame of non-animation, and all the effect patterns 70a (past The effect pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable effect is displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (see FIG. 111(h)). In this way, when the discrepancy between the first pending number U1 that is known by the main control unit 110m and the first pending number U1 that is known by the production control unit 130m is "2", the pending icon T13 is The icon is deleted from the first pending icon display area 70B3 without being shifted and displayed from the pending icon display area 70B3 to 70B2.

Then, the necessary two pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. In addition, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a is started, and the first movable member 73 performs a preview preview performance. Specifically, the motion performance and light emission performance of the first movable member 73 are performed according to the preview scenario, and sound effects are output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparation operation (see FIG. 111(h)). In this way, the pending icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained and the icon change effect is continued, and the pre-read preview effect and scrolling of the background image by the operation of the first movable member 73 are continued.

Thereafter, at timing P11, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the pre-reading preview effect by the first movable member 73 is temporarily stopped, the icon change effect is executed, and the effect pattern 70a is It will scroll at high speed. Specifically, the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B1 changes to a red character icon in accordance with the change scenario, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating motion (performance motion) (see FIG. 111(i)).

After that, if the production control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variable production is executed while the special symbol is displayed with the first pending number U1 being “0”. Also in (target of expectation level suggestion by pre-read preview performance), the first movable member 73 executes the pre-read preview performance and icon change performance (the icon change performance). Then, the pre-read preview performance ends at the timing when the performance pattern 70a scrolls at high speed, and the icon TH is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a stops displaying, and the icon change performance ends. Here, in specific example 4, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command before the target pending memory is exhausted, and in this case, it is possible to continue executing the prefetch effect based on the target pending memory. It has become.

As in the modification shown in FIG. 111-1, if the production control unit 130m successfully receives various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the first pending number U1 becomes “0”. Based on the fluctuating performance (target of expectation suggestion by pre-reading performance) executed during the fluctuation display of , the icon change performance and the pre-reading preview performance (motion performance of the first movable member 73 and light emission performance) are performed in accordance with the preview scenario. The prefetch effect may be terminated without being continuously executed. When the pre-reading performance is not to be executed continuously, the execution of the pre-reading preview performance is stopped at the timing of P10, and the performance mode is changed to a performance mode with lower expectations for a jackpot than the pre-reading preview performance, such as mode A background only. Furthermore, the pending icon T1, which had been changed into a character due to the icon change effect, is changed to a normal mode (CD), which is a mode of presentation with low expectations for a jackpot. Furthermore, the look-ahead performance by the first movable member 73 and the like is not performed.

According to specific examples 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, at timings P7 to P9, the production control unit 130m normally receives commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m. Even if the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 cannot properly receive the production command sent from the production control unit 130m based on reception of this command, the main control unit 110m may receive the production command. The same process as in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (stop command, start command) will be performed.

According to specific examples 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, when the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1" at the timing of P10. As explained above, when the first reservation number U1 changes from "4" to "2" and when the first reservation number U1 changes from "2" to "0", that is, when the main control unit 110m grasps If the difference between the number of reservations currently held and the number of reservations grasped by the production control unit 130m is "2", the basic flow will be the same as the above explanation.

In specific examples 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, a predetermined state in which the first command cannot be received normally occurs at timing P7, and the predetermined state continues for a predetermined period up to timing P10. In this way, in specific examples 2 to 4, the variable performance of the performance symbol 70a is not executed during the predetermined period. Further, during a predetermined period, the performance symbol 70a whose variable performance has been completed can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, and it is also possible to maintain the performance symbol 70a in a temporarily stopped state.

As described above, according to specific examples 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, a specific number (for example, three) of hold icons (two more than a predetermined number (for example, one)) are displayed in the hold icon display area. If the performance control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display in which the number of reservations becomes a predetermined number while displaying the first reservation information), if the production control section The required number of pending icons (for example, the first and second pending icons) are displayed in a shifted manner, without shifting display of the pending icons. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to specific examples 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, in the hold icon display area, a specific number (for example, three) of hold icons (the first If the production control unit 130m receives a command to start a variable display in which the number of reservations reaches a predetermined number while displaying the reservation information (reservation information), the production control unit 130m displays the number of reservation icons one less than the specific number, and then displays the predetermined number of reservation icons. A hold icon is now displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to specific examples 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 108 to 111, in the sub-first reservation display 83 or the first reservation number display area 70E, a specific number that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one) is displayed. (for example, 3), if the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display in which the number of reservations becomes a predetermined number, the number of reservations that is one less than the specific number is displayed. It is designed to display a predetermined number of pending items. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

(Specific example 5 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A fifth specific example in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 113. FIG. 112 is a timing chart when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 113(a) to (i) are productions corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. This is an example.

First, at timing P0, as the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", the variable display of the first special symbol starts. . Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Further, variable display of the first lamp pattern on the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81 is started, but in the production pattern 70a, a part of the decorative part is activated as in the present embodiment. After performing preparatory operations such as enlarging/reducing the entire or part of the image, scrolling is started.

Next, at timing P1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "3" to "4". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (preread designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The stored (kept) first reservation number U1 changes from "3" to "4". In addition, in specific example 5, a look-ahead performance (advance notification) indicating that the expectation level of a jackpot is high is executed in advance based on the pending memory due to the winning at timing P1. In the following explanation, the pending memory that serves as the standard for the look-ahead effect may be referred to as the target pending memory.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one pending icon T14 is additionally displayed as an animation of 10 frames (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from the minimum size) in the first pending icon display area 70B4 (see FIG. 113(a)).

Thereafter, at timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icons T1 to T4 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating action (acting action) (see FIG. 113(b)).

Then, at timing P3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the performance control unit 130m receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248") (see FIG. 113(c)), and the first lamp The book stops when the symbol is in a losing state (for example, the light goes out).

Next, at timing P4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". A variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes from "4" to "3". Additionally, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation (see FIG. 113(d)).

Thereafter, at timing P5, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, a pre-read zone effect (normal zone effect) is started. Specifically, the background image changes to a prefetch zone background, a blue zone image in which the text "ZONE" scrolls in the horizontal direction is displayed, and zone BGM is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotational operation (production operation). (See FIG. 113(e)).

Then, at timing P6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (effecting operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 113(f)).

Next, at timing P7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the variable performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern is displayed in a variable manner. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern are continued. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion). Furthermore, the zone effect (display of the prefetch zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of zone BGM) is maintained, and the prefetch zone effect is continuously executed (see FIG. 113(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "3" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 113(g) is maintained, except that the display of the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "2".

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 113(g) is maintained except that the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "2".

Next, at timing P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "1". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 113(g) is maintained, except that the display of the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "1".

Then, at timing P11, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 113(g) is maintained, except that the display of the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "1". Note that at the timings P7 to P11, the prefetch zone effect and the scrolling of the background image continue.

Next, at timing P12, when the stop time of the special symbol passes, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "3" to "0" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" and "1" without passing through one frame of non-animation. “3” directly becomes “0”. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes directly from "3" to "0" without going through "2" and "1". Furthermore, the surplus hold icon T13 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B3 and the surplus hold icon T12 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B2 are erased with one frame of non-animation, All the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a that are shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (FIG. 113) (see (h)). In this way, when the discrepancy between the first pending number U1 that is known by the main control unit 110m and the first pending number U1 that is known by the production control unit 130m is "3", the pending icon T13 is It is deleted from the first pending icon display area 70B3 without being shifted and displayed from the pending icon display area 70B3 to 70B2. Further, the hold icon T12 is deleted from the first hold icon display area 70B2 without being shifted and displayed from the first hold icon display area 70B2 to 70B1. At this time, the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image continue.

Then, one of the necessary pending icons T11 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B1 is shifted and displayed as an animation for 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the look-ahead zone effect, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern continues, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparation operation (FIG. 113(h) )reference).

Note that when the surplus reservation icon T1 is deleted and the necessary reservation icon T1 is shifted and displayed, the surplus reservation icon T1 may be left as is and the necessary reservation icon T1 is displayed in a shift manner.

Thereafter, at timing P13, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the effect pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed while the pre-reading zone effect and the scrolling of the background image are continued. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 113(i)). Here, in specific example 5, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command before the target pending memory is consumed, and at this time, it is possible to continue executing the prefetch effect based on the target pending memory. It has become.

After that, if the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variable production ( Also in the prefetch effect target), normal zone effects (display of the prefetch zone background, display of a blue zone image, and output of zone BGM) are performed according to the preview scenario (see FIG. 113(i)), and the effect pattern 70a The look-ahead zone effect ends when the actual stop occurs.

As in the modification shown in FIG. 113-1, if the performance control unit 130m successfully receives various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P13, the first pending number U1 becomes “0”. Based on the variable effects (target of pre-read effects) executed during the variable display of , normal zone effects (display of pre-read zone background, display of blue zone image, output of zone BGM) will continue according to the preview scenario. The prefetch zone effect may be ended without being executed. If the pre-reading zone effect is not to be executed continuously, the pre-reading zone effect is deleted at the timing of P13, and the effect mode is changed to a mode A background or the like, which has a lower expectation of a jackpot than the pre-reading effect.

(Specific example 6 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 6 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 114. FIG. 112 is a timing chart when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 114(a) to (i) are productions corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. This is an example.

Note that the specific example 6 in FIG. 114 differs from the specific example 5 in FIG. 113 in that a prefetching effect production is performed as a prefetching preview production instead of the prefetching zone production, and an icon change production is also performed. Explanation of common parts will be omitted, and only different parts will be explained.

At the timing of P4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes from "4" to "3". Additionally, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and the production pattern 70a includes a part of the decorative part moving as in the present embodiment, and a whole or a part expanding and contracting. After performing the following preparatory operations, scrolling is started (see FIG. 114(d)).

In addition, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and a pre-read effect performance is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed at the lower rear of the production pattern 70a (see FIG. 114(d)), and an effect sound is output.

Thereafter, at timing P5, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the pre-reading effect production is temporarily stopped, and the icon change production is started. Specifically, the third hold icon T13 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B3 changes to a blue character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement). (See FIG. 114(e)).

Then, at timing P6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (effecting operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 114(f)).

Next, at timing P7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the variable performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern is displayed in a variable manner. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern are continued. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion). Further, the pending icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 114(g)).

Thereafter, at timing P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "3" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. Therefore, the prefetch effect production (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) is not executed, except that the display of the first pending number U1 on the first special symbol pending display 63 becomes "2". , the state shown in FIG. 114(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 114(g) is maintained, except that the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "2".

Next, at timing P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "1". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 114(g) is maintained, except that the display of the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "1".

Then, at timing P11, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 114(g) is maintained, except that the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "1".

Note that the prefetch effect production (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) may be continuously performed at timings P8 to P11.

Next, at timing P12, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "3" to "0" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" and "1" without passing through one frame of non-animation. "3" directly becomes "0". In addition, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes directly from "3" to "0" without passing through "2" and "1". Furthermore, the two extra hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are erased with one frame of non-animation, and all the effect symbols 70a (including the effect image 70a that is shifted from the stop position) are erased. The effect pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect is displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (see FIG. 114(h)). In this way, when the discrepancy between the first pending number U1 known to the main control unit 110m and the first pending number U1 known to the production control unit 130m is "3", the pending icon T13 is It is deleted from the first pending icon display area 70B3 without being shifted and displayed from the pending icon display area 70B3 to 70B2. Moreover, the hold icon T12 is deleted from the first hold icon display area 70B2 without being shifted and displayed from the first hold icon display area 70B2 to 70B1.

Then, one of the necessary pending icons T11 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B1 is shifted and displayed as an animation for 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. Moreover, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the production symbol 70a is started, and the pre-read effect production is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF is displayed at the lower rear of the production pattern 70a according to the preview scenario, and an effect sound is output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparation operation (see FIG. 114(h)). In this way, the pending icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained and the icon change effect continues, and the pre-read effect effect (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) and scrolling of the background image continue. is executed.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the display of the pending icon T1 is completed, at the timing of P13, the effect image EF is erased, the pre-reading effect production is temporarily stopped, the icon change production is executed, and the production pattern 70a is displayed at high speed. It becomes scrolled. Specifically, the first hold icon T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B1 changes to a red character icon in accordance with the change scenario, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotation operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 114(i)).

After that, if the production control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variable production is executed while the special symbol is displayed with the first pending number U1 being “0”. Also in (target of expectation level suggestion by pre-read preview performance), pre-read effect performance (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) and icon change performance (the icon change performance) are executed. Then, the look-ahead effect performance ends at the timing when the performance pattern 70a scrolls at high speed, and the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a stops displaying, and the icon change performance ends. Here, in specific example 6, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command before the target pending memory is exhausted, and in this case, it is possible to continue executing the prefetch effect based on the target pending memory. It has become.

As in the modification shown in FIG. 114-1, if the performance control unit 130m successfully receives various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the first pending number U1 becomes “0”. Based on the fluctuating effects that are executed during the fluctuating display (target of expectations suggested by prefetching effects), icon change effects and prefetched effect effects (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effects) are performed according to the preview scenario. The prefetch effect may be terminated without being continuously executed. If the look-ahead effect is not to be executed continuously, at the timing of P12, the look-ahead effect is erased (if it is displayed) and the effect is lower in expectations for a jackpot than the look-ahead effect, such as mode A background only. Changes are made to the aspect. Furthermore, the pending icon T1, which had been changed into a character due to the icon change effect, is changed to a normal mode (CD), which is a mode of presentation with low expectations for a jackpot.

(Specific example 7 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 7 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 and 115. FIG. 112 is a timing chart when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 115(a) to (i) are productions corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. This is an example.

In addition, in the specific example 7 of FIG. 115, an icon change effect as a pre-read preview effect is executed on the first image display device 70, and the effect of the first movable member 73 as a pre-read preview effect (movable effect and light emitting effect) This example differs from the sixth specific example in FIG. 115 in that the following is executed, so a description of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be described. In addition, in the specific example 7, a look-ahead effect performance can also be executed, but since it is the same as the specific example 6, the explanation is omitted.

At the timing of P4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes from "4" to "3". Additionally, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and the production pattern 70a includes a part of the decorative part moving as in the present embodiment, and a whole or a part expanding and contracting. After performing the following preparatory operations, scrolling is started (see FIG. 115(d)).

In addition, variable display of the effect pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and first lamp pattern is started, and a movable effect by the first movable member 73 is executed as a pre-read preview effect. Specifically, the first movable member 73 installed above the first image display device 70 operates in a manner in which expectations for a jackpot are high (for example, large movements or a manner similar to a jackpot). At the same time (see FIG. 115(d)), the first movable member 73 emits light. Also, a predetermined sound effect is output. Note that the pre-read preview performance by the first movable member 73 can be executed in a period before the ready-to-reach performance of the performance pattern 70a, and in a partial period of each variable performance in a plurality of variable performances of the performance pattern 70a.

Thereafter, at timing P5, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the third hold icon T13 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B3 changes to a blue character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement). (See FIG. 115(e)). In addition, the pre-read preview performance by the first movable member 73 continues to be performed.

Then, at timing P6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (actual performance operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 115(f)). At this time, the first movable member 73 may continue to perform the pre-read preview effect.

Next, at timing P7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the variable performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern is displayed in a variable manner. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern are continued. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion). Furthermore, the pending icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 115(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "3" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "2" without the pre-reading preview performance by the first movable member 73 being executed, as shown in FIG. 115(g). state is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 115(g) is maintained, except that the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "2".

Next, at timing P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "1". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 115(g) is maintained, except that the display of the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "1".

Then, at timing P11, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 115(g) is maintained, except that the display of the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "1".

Note that, at the timings of P8 to P11, the pre-read preview performance (the motion performance and light emission performance of the first movable member 73) by the first movable member 73 may be continuously performed.

Next, at timing P10, when the stop time of the special symbol passes, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "3" to "0" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" and "1" without passing through one frame of non-animation. “3” directly becomes “0”. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes directly from "3" to "0" without going through "2" and "1". Furthermore, the surplus hold icon T13 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B3 is erased with one frame of non-animation, and the surplus hold icon T13 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B2 is erased. T12 is erased with one frame of non-animation. All the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a that are shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (FIG. 115) (see (h)). In this way, when the discrepancy between the first pending number U1 known to the main control unit 110m and the first pending number U1 known to the production control unit 130m is "3", the pending icon T13 is It is deleted from the first pending icon display area 70B3 without being shifted and displayed from the pending icon display area 70B3 to 70B2. Moreover, the hold icon T12 is deleted from the first hold icon display area 70B2 without being shifted and displayed from the first hold icon display area 70B2 to 70B1.

Then, one of the necessary pending icons T11 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B1 is shifted and displayed as an animation for 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. Further, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a is started, and the first movable member 73 performs a pre-read preview performance. Specifically, a motion effect of the first movable member 73 is performed according to the preview scenario, and a sound effect is output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparation operation (see FIG. 115(h)). In this way, the pending icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained and the icon change effect is continued, and the first movable member 73 continues to perform the pre-read preview effect and the scrolling of the background image.

Thereafter, at timing P13, the pre-read preview effect by the first movable member 73 is temporarily stopped, and the icon change effect is executed, so that the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed. Specifically, the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B1 changes to a red character icon in accordance with the change scenario, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 115(i)).

After that, if the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, a variable performance ( The first movable member 73 performs the pre-read preview performance and the icon change performance (the icon change performance) also in the case where the expectation level is suggested by the pre-read preview performance. Then, the pre-read preview performance ends at the timing when the performance pattern 70a scrolls at high speed, and the icon TH is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a stops displaying, and the icon change performance ends. Here, in specific example 7, the effect control unit 130m normally receives a command before the target pending memory is consumed, and in this case, it is possible to continue executing the prefetch effect based on the target pending memory. It has become.

As in the modified example shown in FIG. 115-1, if the performance control unit 130m successfully receives various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the first pending number U1 becomes “0”. Based on the fluctuating performance (target of expectation suggestion by pre-reading performance) executed during the fluctuation display of , the icon change performance and the pre-reading preview performance (motion performance of the first movable member 73 and light emission performance) are performed in accordance with the preview scenario. The prefetch effect may be terminated without being continuously executed. If the pre-reading performance is not to be executed continuously, the execution of the pre-reading preview performance is stopped at timing P12, and the performance mode is changed to a performance mode such as mode A background only, which has a lower expectation of a jackpot than the pre-reading preview performance. Furthermore, the pending icon T1, which had been changed into a character due to the icon change effect, is changed to a normal mode (CD), which is a mode of presentation with low expectations for a jackpot.

According to specific examples 5 to 7 shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, at timings P7 to P9, the production control unit 130m normally receives commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m. Even if the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 cannot properly receive the production command sent from the production control unit 130m based on reception of this command, the main control unit 110m may receive the production command. The same process as in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (stop command, start command) will be performed.

According to specific examples 5 to 7 shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, at the timing of P10, the first pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0". As explained above, when the first number of reservations changes from "4" to "1", that is, the discrepancy between the number of reservations known by the main control unit 110m and the number of reservations known by the production control unit 130m is " 3'', the basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

In specific examples 5 to 7 shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, a predetermined state in which the first command cannot be received normally occurs at timing P7, and the predetermined state continues for a predetermined period before timing P12. In this way, in specific examples 5 to 7, the variable performance of the performance symbol 70a is not executed during the predetermined period. Further, during a predetermined period, the performance symbol 70a whose variable performance has been completed can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, and it is also possible to maintain the performance symbol 70a in a temporarily stopped state.

As described above, according to specific examples 5 to 7 shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, a specific number (for example, four) of hold icons (three more than a predetermined number (for example, one)) are displayed in the hold icon display area. If the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display in which the number of reservations reaches a predetermined number while displaying the first reservation information), the predetermined number of reservations will be displayed without displaying the number of reservation icons that are one less than the specific number. A number of pending icons are now displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to specific examples 5 to 7 shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, in the hold icon display area, a specific number (for example, four) of hold icons (the first If the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display in which the number of reservations becomes a predetermined number while displaying the reservation information), if the production control unit 130m receives a command to start a variable display in which the number of reservations becomes a predetermined number, the number of reservations that is one less than the specific number is displayed without displaying a reservation icon that is one less than the specific number. Also, two fewer hold icons are displayed, and then a predetermined number of hold icons are displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to specific examples 5 to 7 shown in FIGS. 112 to 115, in the sub-first reservation display 83 or the first reservation number display area 70E, a specific number that is three more than a predetermined number (for example, one) is displayed. (for example, 4), if the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display in which the number of reservations becomes a predetermined number, the number of reservations is one and two fewer than the specific number. It is designed to display a predetermined number of pending items without displaying . Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

(Specific example 8 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 8 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIGS. 116 and 117. FIG. 116 is a timing chart 4 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 115(a) to (h) correspond to (a) to (h) in the timing chart 4 of FIG. 114. This is an example of a performance.

Note that the specific example 8 in FIG. 117 is the same as the specific example 5 in FIG. 112 from the timings P0 to P11, so the explanation will be omitted.

At timing P12, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0" and the first special symbol The variable display of will start. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "1" to "0". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. Therefore, the state is as shown in FIG. 117(g).

Next, at timing P13, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the variable performance will not be performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 117(g) is maintained.

At this time, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m is "0", and even if the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed (a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of variation in P12), ), the temporary stop display of the effect pattern 70a continues (see FIG. 117(h)). Furthermore, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol may continue to fluctuate. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion). In addition, the look-ahead effect continues to be executed. In this way, the customer waiting demonstration effect is not performed on the first image display device 70 even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the change in P12.

As described above, according to the specific example 8 shown in FIGS. 116 and 117, when a predetermined state occurs in which the command is not normally received in the production control unit 130m while the variation production of the production symbol 70a is being performed, The performance pattern 70a after the fluctuating performance can be displayed in an oscillating state, and the oscillating state of the performance pattern 70a can be continued even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuating performance to provide a demonstration performance while waiting for a customer. It is no longer executed. Therefore, it becomes easier to see that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players and to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

As shown in FIG. 117-1, since the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m is "0", the state may be shifted to a customer waiting state (game waiting state). . When the performance control unit 130m receives the customer waiting command (customer waiting state designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit 130m performs processing to end the variable performance.

In this case, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (main stop), and the special The symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined losing mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol comes to a permanent stop in a losing mode (for example, turned off).

Here, when the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting command (customer waiting state designation command), the production pattern 70a may be permanently stopped instead of continuing the temporary stop display of the production pattern 70a. In this case, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (main stop), and the special The symbol TZ comes to a final stop in a predetermined loss mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol comes to a final stop in a loss mode (extinguished). Even in this case, the customer waiting demonstration performance is not performed on the first image display device 70.

As described above, according to the modification of the specific example 8 shown in FIG. , all the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) including the performance symbols 70a that are shifted from the predetermined stop position are displayed at the stop position (actual stop). It looks like this. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that the variable performance has ended (transition to the customer waiting state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that at timings P7, P11, and P13, the production control unit 130m was able to successfully receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display/audio control section 140 and the lamp/drive control section 150 cannot normally receive the commands sent from the main control section 110m, the production control section 130m displays commands (stop commands, start commands) sent from the main control section 110m. The same process will be performed when the message cannot be received normally.

Here, a case has been described in which the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command at the timing of P14 when the first pending number stored (understood) is "3". Even when the customer waiting state designation command is received in any of the states "4", "2", and "1", the basic flow is the same as described above.

(Specific example 9 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 9 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 and 119. FIG. 118 is a timing chart when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 119(a) to (h) are productions corresponding to (a) to (h) in the timing chart of FIG. This is an example.

Note that the specific example 8 in FIG. 117 and the specific example 9 in FIG. 119 differ in that the command received at the timing of P14 is an opening designation command, so the explanation of the common parts will be omitted here, and the different parts will be explained I will only explain.

At the timing of P14, when the special symbol stop time elapses, a jackpot game (special game) is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains “3”, and the jackpot game Processing is performed to start the opening performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first pending number display area 70E remains "3", and is displayed on the effect pattern 70a and the icon display area. The pending icon T1 and the icon TH are erased, and the icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect are completed. In addition, the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in a predetermined loss mode (“248”), the first lamp symbol comes to a final stop in a loss mode (for example, turned off), and the opening effect image is displayed (FIG. 119) h)).

After that, during the jackpot game or after the end of the jackpot game (time saving game state, variable probability game state), if the production control unit 130m can normally receive the first special symbol storage designation command from the main control unit 110m, The first pending number U1 displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first pending number display area 70E is updated to the number according to the command using one frame of non-animation (see FIG. 119(j)). . Note that FIG. 119(j) shows a case where the number of pending commands at the start is "1". At this time, no matter what combination of performance symbols 70a results in a jackpot, a predetermined (same) performance symbol 70a is displayed. For example, even if you hit the jackpot with the combination of the production symbols 70a of "777", even if you hit the jackpot with the combination of "222", the combination of production symbols 70a of "135" in the same sequence as shown in FIG. 119(j) Is displayed. By doing so, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the performance control section 130m, and it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, at the timing of P7 to P13, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m Even if the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the commands sent from the main control unit 110m, the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are displayed for production control. The same process as in the case where the unit 130m cannot receive normally is performed.

Here, a case has been described in which the opening designation command is received at the timing of P14 when the first pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is "3", but the first pending number is "4". ”, “2”, or “1” when the opening designation command is received, the basic flow is the same as described above.

As described above, according to the specific example 9 shown in FIGS. 118 to 119, if the production control unit 130m normally receives the opening designation command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, the predetermined All the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production), including the performance symbols 70a that are shifted from the stop position that is currently in play, are not displayed at the stop position (actual stop), and the jackpot game is played. The opening performance image will be displayed. Therefore, the opening performance is not hindered by the performance symbols, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Specific example 10 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A tenth specific example in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 and 121. FIG. 120 is a timing chart when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 121(a) to (i) are productions corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. This is an example.

First, at timing P0, as the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", the variable display of the first special symbol starts. . Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Further, variable display of the first lamp pattern on the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 is started, but in the production pattern 70a, a part of the decorative part is operated as in the present embodiment. After performing preparatory operations such as enlarging/reducing the entire or part of the image, scrolling is started.

Next, at timing P1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the first pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (preread designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The stored (kept) first reservation number U1 changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one pending icon T14 is additionally displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B4 as an animation for 10 frames (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from the minimum size) (see FIG. 121(a)).

In specific example 10, a look-ahead effect (advance notification) indicating that the expectation level of a jackpot is high is executed in advance based on the first hold memory corresponding to the hold icon T12 in FIG. 121(a). Specifically, the background image changes to a look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image with the word "ZONE" scrolling left and right is displayed, and a look-ahead zone production (normal zone production) in which zone BGM is output. ) is being executed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement). (See FIG. 121(a)).

Thereafter, at timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating motion (acting motion) (see FIG. 121(b)).

Then, at timing P3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the performance control unit 130m receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248") (see FIG. 121(c)), and the first lamp The book stops when the symbol is in a losing state (for example, the light goes out).

Next, at timing P4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". Variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes from "4" to "3". Additionally, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation (see FIG. 121(d)).

Then, at timing P6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (actual performance operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 121(f)).

Note that the pre-read zone effect (normal zone effect) is continuously executed at timings P0 to P6. Specifically, the background image changes to a prefetch zone background, a blue zone image in which the text "ZONE" scrolls in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image is continuing and the effect pattern 70a is performing a variable effect, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performing operation).

Next, at timing P7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern is displayed in a variable manner. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern are continued. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion). Furthermore, the zone effect (display of the prefetch zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of zone BGM) is maintained, and the prefetch zone effect is continuously executed (see FIG. 121(g)).

Thereafter, at timing P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "3" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 121(g) is maintained, except that the display of the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "2".

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 121(g) is maintained, except that the display of the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "2".

Next, at timing P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "3" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" without passing from "3" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. It becomes "1" directly. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes directly from "3" to "1" without passing through "2". Furthermore, the surplus hold icon T13 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B3 is erased with one frame of non-animation, and all the effect patterns 70a (past The effect pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable effect is displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (see FIG. 121(h)). In this way, when the discrepancy between the first pending number U1 that is known by the main control unit 110m and the first pending number U1 that is known by the production control unit 130m is "2", the pending icon T13 is It is deleted from the first pending icon display area 70B3 without being shifted and displayed from the pending icon display area 70B3 to 70B2.

Then, the necessary two pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. In addition, the variable display of the look-ahead zone effect, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp pattern is not continued, but the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparation operation (Fig. 121 (see (h)).

Note that when the surplus reservation icon T1 is deleted and the necessary reservation icon T1 is shifted and displayed, the surplus reservation icon T1 may be left as is and the necessary reservation icon T1 is displayed in a shift manner.

At the timing of P10, if the production control unit 130m successfully receives various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variable production (which is executed during the variable display of the special symbol in which the first pending number U1 becomes “0”) Based on the target of the pre-reading effect), normal zone effects (display of the pre-reading zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of zone BGM) are not continuously executed in accordance with the preview scenario. Specifically, at the timing of P10, the look-ahead zone performance is erased and changed to a performance mode such as Mode A background, which has a lower level of expectation for a jackpot than the look-ahead performance (see FIG. 121(h)). In this way, specific example 10 is a case where the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command after the target pending memory has been digested, and at this time, the prefetch effect based on the target pending memory is not continued to be executed. Or, the pre-read effect is changed to one with lower expectations for a jackpot than the previously executed pre-read effect, or the pre-read effect is deleted.

Thereafter, at timing P11, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the effect pattern 70a will be in a state of being scrolled at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 121(i)).

In addition, at the timing of P10, if the production control unit 130m successfully receives various commands from the main control unit 110m, the first pending number U1 becomes “0”.The variation is executed during the variation display of the special symbol. Based on the effect (object of prefetch effect), normal zone effects (display of prefetch zone background, display of blue zone image, output of zone BGM) may be continuously executed along with the preview scenario.

(Specific example 11 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A specific example 11 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 and 122. FIG. 120 is a timing chart when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 122(a) to (i) are productions corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. This is an example.

Note that the specific example 10 in FIG. 121 and the specific example 11 in FIG. 122 differ in that a prefetching effect production is executed instead of the prefetching zone production as a prefetching preview production, and an icon change production is also executed. Here, we will omit the explanation of the common parts and only explain the different parts.

In specific example 10, a pre-read effect (advance notification) indicating that the expectation level of a jackpot is high is executed in advance based on the pending memory corresponding to the pending icon T12 in FIG. 121(a). In specific example 11, a prefetch effect presentation and an icon change presentation are executed as the prefetch effects. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed at the lower rear of the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Further, an icon change effect is being executed in which the pending icon T1 changes to a blue character icon.

At the timing of P4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes from "4" to "3". Additionally, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and the production pattern 70a is such that a part of the decorative part moves or the whole or a part expands and contracts as in the present embodiment. After performing the following preparatory operations, scrolling is started (see FIG. 122(d)).

In addition, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and a pre-read effect performance is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed at the lower rear of the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. In addition, an icon change effect in which the pending icon T1 changes to a blue character icon continues to be executed. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparation operation (see FIG. 122(d)). At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the fluctuating display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (presentation operation). (See FIG. 122(e)).

Then, at timing P6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (effecting operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 122(f)).

Next, at timing P7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern is displayed in a variable manner. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern are continued. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion). Further, the pending icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 122(g)).

Thereafter, at timing P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "3" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. Therefore, the prefetch effect production (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) is not executed, except that the display of the first pending number U1 on the first special symbol pending display 63 becomes "2". , the state shown in FIG. 122(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 122(g) is maintained, except that the display of the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "2".

Note that, at the timings of P8 and P9, the prefetch effect presentation (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect) may be continuously performed.

Next, at timing P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "3" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" without passing from "3" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. It becomes "1" directly. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes directly from "3" to "1" without going through "2". Furthermore, the surplus hold icon T3 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B3 is erased with one frame of non-animation, and all the effect patterns 70a (past The effect pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable effect is displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (see FIG. 122(h)). In this way, when the discrepancy between the first pending number U1 that is known by the main control unit 110m and the first pending number U1 that is known by the production control unit 130m is "2", the pending icon T3 is It is deleted from the first pending icon display area 70B3 without being shifted and displayed from the pending icon display area 70B3 to 70B2.

Then, the necessary two pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display areas 70B1 and 70B2 are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the corresponding icon. Displayed as TH. Moreover, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp pattern continues. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparation operation (see FIG. 122(h)).

Thereafter, at timing P11, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the shift display of the icons is completed, the effect pattern 70a will be in a state of being scrolled at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 122(i)).

At the timing of P10, if the production control unit 130m successfully receives various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variable production (which is executed during the variable display of the special symbol in which the first pending number U1 becomes “0”) Based on the pre-read effect (target of the pre-read effect), the pre-read effect effect (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) and icon change effect (pending icon change effect or the icon change effect) are continuously executed according to the preview scenario. do not. Specifically, at the timing of P10, the look-ahead effect performance is not executed, and the effect mode is changed to a mode A background, which has a lower level of expectation for a jackpot than the look-ahead performance (see FIG. 122(h)). Further, the hold icon T1, which was a blue character icon, becomes a normal CD image hold icon T1. In this way, specific example 11 is a case where the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command after the target pending memory is digested, and at this time, the prefetch effect based on the target pending memory is not continued to be executed. Or, the pre-read effect is changed to one with lower expectations for a jackpot than the previously executed pre-read effect, or the pre-read effect is deleted.

In addition, at the timing of P10, if the production control unit 130m successfully receives various commands from the main control unit 110m, the first pending number U1 becomes “0”.The variation is executed during the variation display of the special symbol. Based on the performance (target of the look-ahead performance), the look-ahead effect performance (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) and icon change performance (pending icon change performance and the icon change performance) are continued in accordance with the preview scenario. You can also execute it by

(Specific example 12 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A twelfth specific example in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 and 123. FIG. 120 is a timing chart when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 123(a) to (i) are productions corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. This is an example.

Note that the specific example 12 in FIG. 123 differs from the specific example 11 in FIG. 122 in that a pre-reading effect (action effect or issue effect) is executed by the first movable member 73 as a pre-reading preview effect, so they are common here. The explanation of the parts will be omitted and only the different parts will be explained.

In specific example 12, a pre-read effect (advance notification) indicating that the expectation level of a jackpot is high is executed in advance based on the pending memory corresponding to the pending icon T12 in FIG. 123(a). In specific example 12, a performance by the first movable member 73 and an icon change performance are executed as the look-ahead performance. Specifically, an action effect in which the first movable member 73 performs a predetermined action and a light emission effect in which the first movable member 73 emits light are executed, and a sound effect is output. Further, an icon change effect is executed in which the pending icon T1 changes to a blue character icon or a red character icon.

At the timing of P4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes from "4" to "3". Additionally, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation (see FIG. 123(d)).

In addition, variable display of the effect pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and first lamp pattern is started, and a movable effect by the first movable member 73 is executed as a pre-read preview effect. Specifically, the first movable member 73 installed above the first image display device 70 operates in a manner in which expectations for a jackpot are high (for example, large movements or a manner similar to a jackpot). At the same time, the first movable member 73 emits light. Also, sound effects are output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparation operation (see FIG. 123(d)). Note that the pre-read preview performance by the operation of the first movable member 73 can be executed in a period before the ready-to-reach performance of the performance pattern 70a, and in a partial period of each variable performance in a plurality of variable performances of the performance pattern 70a.

Further, the first pending icon T13 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B1 changes to a blue character icon, and the blue character icon is performing a predetermined action effect. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement). (See FIG. 123(e)). In addition, the pre-read preview performance by the first movable member 73 continues to be performed.

Then, at timing P6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (effecting operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 123(f)).

Next, at timing P7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern is displayed in a variable manner. The period will be extended. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion). Further, the pending icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained and the icon change effect is continued (see FIG. 123(g)).

Thereafter, at timing P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "3" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "2" without the pre-reading preview effect being executed by the operation of the first movable member 73 (see FIG. 123). g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 123(g) is maintained, except that the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "2".

Note that, at the timings of P8 and P9, the pre-read preview performance (the motion performance and light emission performance of the first movable member 73) by the first movable member 73 may be continuously executed.

Next, at timing P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "3" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" without passing from "3" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. It becomes "1" directly. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes directly from "3" to "1" without going through "2". Furthermore, the surplus pending icon T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is erased with one frame of non-animation, and all performance symbols 70a (past The effect pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable effect is displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (see FIG. 123(h)). In this way, when the discrepancy between the first pending number U1 that is known by the main control unit 110m and the first pending number U1 that is known by the production control unit 130m is "2", the pending icon T1 is It is deleted from the first pending icon display area 70B without being shifted and displayed in the pending icon display area 70B.

Then, the necessary two pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. Moreover, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp pattern continues. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparation operation (see FIG. 123(h)).

Thereafter, at timing P11, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the shift display of the icons is completed, the effect pattern 70a will be in a state of being scrolled at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 123(i)).

At the timing of P10, if the production control unit 130m successfully receives various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variable production (which is executed during the variable display of the special symbol in which the first pending number U1 becomes “0”) The first movable member 73 does not continue to perform the pre-read preview performance and the icon change performance (the pending icon change performance or the icon change performance) based on the pre-read performance (object of the pre-read performance) according to the preview scenario. Specifically, at the timing of P10, the first movable member 73 does not execute the pre-read notice performance, and the first movable member 73 stands still at the standby position, and the light is turned off or the light emission effect is performed in a more modest manner than the pre-read notice performance. As shown in FIG. 123(h), the presentation mode is changed to one in which the level of expectation for a jackpot is lower than that of the look-ahead presentation (see FIG. 123(h)). Further, the hold icon T1, which was a blue character icon, becomes a normal CD image hold icon T1. In this way, specific example 11 is a case where the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command after the target pending memory is digested, and at this time, the prefetch effect based on the target pending memory is not continued to be executed. Or, the pre-read effect is changed to one with lower expectations for a jackpot than the previously executed pre-read effect, or the pre-read effect is deleted.

In addition, at the timing of P10, if the production control unit 130m successfully receives various commands from the main control unit 110m, the first pending number U1 becomes “0”.The variation is executed during the variation display of the special symbol. Based on the performance (target of the pre-read performance), the first movable member 73 may continuously perform the pre-read preview performance and the icon change performance (the pending icon change performance and the icon change performance) in accordance with the preview scenario.

According to specific examples 10 to 12 shown in FIGS. 120 to 123, at timings P7 to P9, the production control unit 130m normally receives commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m. Even if the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command, the main control unit 110m may receive the production command. The same process as in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (stop command, start command) will be performed.

According to specific examples 10 to 12 shown in FIGS. 120 to 123, at the timing of P10, the first pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1". As explained above, when the first hold number changes from "4" to "2" and when the first hold number changes from "2" to "0", that is, the hold that the main control unit 110m knows If the discrepancy between the number and the number of reservations grasped by the production control unit 130m is "2", the basic flow will be the same as the above explanation.

In specific examples 10 to 12 shown in FIGS. 120 to 123, a predetermined state in which the first command cannot be received normally occurs at timing P7, and the predetermined state continues for a predetermined period before timing P10. In this manner, in specific examples 10 to 12, the variable performance of the performance symbol 70a is not performed during the predetermined period. Further, during a predetermined period, the performance symbol 70a whose variable performance has been completed can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, and it is also possible to maintain the performance symbol 70a in a temporarily stopped state.

As described above, according to specific examples 10 to 12 shown in FIGS. 120 to 123, a specific number (for example, three) of hold icons (two more than a predetermined number (for example, one)) are displayed in the hold icon display area. If the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display in which the number of reservations reaches a predetermined number while displaying the first reservation information), if the production control section The required number of pending icons (for example, the first and second pending icons) are displayed in a shifted manner, without shifting display of the pending icons. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to specific examples 10 to 12 shown in FIGS. 120 to 123, in the hold icon display area, a specific number (for example, three) of hold icons (the first If the production control unit 130m receives a command to start a variable display in which the number of reservations reaches a predetermined number while displaying the reservation information), the production control unit 130m displays the number of reservation icons one less than the specific number, and then displays the predetermined number of reservation icons. A hold icon is now displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to specific examples 10 to 12 shown in FIGS. 120 to 123, in the sub-first reservation display 83 or the first reservation number display area 70E, a specific number that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one) is displayed. (for example, 3), if the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display in which the number of reservations becomes a predetermined number, the number of reservations that is one less than the specific number is displayed. It is designed to display a predetermined number of pending items. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

(Specific example 13 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 13 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 and 125. FIG. 124 is a timing chart when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 125(a) to (i) are productions corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. This is an example.

First, at timing P0, as the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", the variable display of the first special symbol starts. . Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Further, variable display of the first lamp pattern on the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 is started, but in the production pattern 70a, a part of the decorative part is operated as in the present embodiment. After performing preparatory operations such as enlarging/reducing the entire or part of the image, scrolling is started.

Next, at timing P1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the first pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "3" to "4". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (preread designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The stored (kept) first reservation number U1 changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one pending icon T14 is additionally displayed as an animation of 10 frames (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from the minimum size) in the first pending icon display area 70B4 (see FIG. 125(a)).

In specific example 13, based on the first pending memory corresponding to the pending icon T12 in FIG. 125(a), a pre-read effect (advance notification) indicating that the expectation level of a jackpot is high is executed in advance. Specifically, the background image changes to a look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image with the word "ZONE" scrolling left and right is displayed, and a look-ahead zone production (normal zone production) in which zone BGM is output. ) is being executed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement). (See FIG. 125(a)).

Thereafter, at timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (acting operation) (see FIG. 125(b)).

Then, at timing P3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the performance control unit 130m receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the production pattern 70a that had been temporarily stopped comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248") (see FIG. 125(c)), and the first lamp The book stops when the symbol is in a losing state (for example, the light goes out).

Next, at timing P4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". Variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes from "4" to "3". Additionally, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation (see FIG. 125(d)).

Then, at timing P6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (effecting operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 125(f)).

Note that the pre-read zone effect (normal zone effect) is continuously executed at timings P0 to P6. Specifically, the background image changes to a prefetch zone background, a blue zone image in which the text "ZONE" scrolls in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image is continuing and the effect pattern 70a is performing a variable effect, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performing operation).

Next, at timing P7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern is displayed in a variable manner. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern are continued. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion). Further, the zone effect (display of the prefetch zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of zone BGM) is maintained, and the prefetch zone effect is continuously executed (see FIG. 125(g)).

Thereafter, at timing P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "3" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 125(g) is maintained, except that the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "2".

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 125(g) is maintained, except that the display of the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "2".

Thereafter, at timing P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "1". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 125(g) is maintained, except that the display of the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "1".

Then, at timing P11, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 125(g) is maintained, except that the display of the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "1".

Next, at timing P12, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "3" to "0" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" and "1" without passing through one frame of non-animation. “3” directly becomes “0”. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes directly from "3" to "0" without going through "2" and "1". Furthermore, the surplus pending icon T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is erased with one frame of non-animation, and all performance symbols 70a (past The effect pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable effect is displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (see FIG. 125(h)). In this way, when the discrepancy between the first pending number U1 that the main control unit 110m knows and the first pending number U1 that the production control unit 130m knows is "3", the surplus pending icon T1 is deleted from the first pending icon display area 70B without being shifted and displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B.

Then, one of the necessary pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the look-ahead zone effect, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern continues, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparation operation (FIG. 125(h) )reference).

Note that when the surplus reservation icon T1 is deleted and the necessary reservation icon T1 is shifted and displayed, the surplus reservation icon T1 may be left as is and the necessary reservation icon T1 is displayed in a shift manner.

At the timing of P13, if the production control unit 130m successfully receives various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variable production (which is executed during the variable display of the special symbol in which the first pending number U1 becomes “0”) Based on the target of the pre-reading effect), normal zone effects (display of the pre-reading zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of zone BGM) are not continuously executed in accordance with the preview scenario. Specifically, at the timing of P13, the look-ahead zone performance is deleted and changed to a performance mode such as mode A background, which has lower expectations for a jackpot than the look-ahead performance (see FIG. 125(h)). In this way, specific example 13 is a case where the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command after the target pending memory has been digested, and at this time, the prefetch effect based on the target pending memory is not continued to be executed. Or, the pre-read effect is changed to one with lower expectations for a jackpot than the previously executed pre-read effect, or the pre-read effect is deleted.

Thereafter, at timing P13, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the shift display of the hold icon T1 is completed, the effect pattern 70a will be in a state of being scrolled at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 125(i)).

In addition, at the timing of P13, if the production control unit 130m successfully receives various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variation executed during the variation display of the special symbol where the first pending number U1 becomes “0”. Based on the effect (object of prefetch effect), normal zone effects (display of prefetch zone background, display of blue zone image, output of zone BGM) may be continuously executed along with the preview scenario.

(Specific example 14 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A 14th specific example in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 and 126. FIG. 124 is a timing chart when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 126(a) to (i) are productions corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. This is an example.

Note that specific example 13 in FIG. 125 and specific example 14 in FIG. 126 are different in that a prefetching effect production is executed instead of the prefetching zone production as a prefetching preview production, and an icon change production is also executed. Here, we will omit the explanation of the common parts and only explain the different parts.

In specific example 13, a look-ahead effect (advance notification) indicating that the expectation level of a jackpot is high is executed in advance based on the hold memory corresponding to the hold icon T12 in FIG. 125(a). In specific example 14, a prefetch effect production and an icon change production are executed as the prefetch effects. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed at the lower rear of the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Further, an icon change effect is being executed in which the pending icon T1 changes to a blue character icon.

At the timing of P4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes from "4" to "3". Additionally, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation (see FIG. 126(d)).

In addition, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and a pre-read effect performance is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed at the lower rear of the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. In addition, the icon change effect in which the pending icon T1 changes to a blue character icon continues to be executed (see FIG. 126(d)). At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement). (See FIG. 126(e)).

Then, at timing P6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (effecting operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 126(f)).

Next, at timing P7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern is displayed in a variable manner. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern are continued. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion). Furthermore, the pending icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 126(g)).

Thereafter, at timing P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "3" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. Therefore, the prefetch effect production (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) is not executed, except that the display of the first pending number U1 on the first special symbol pending display 63 becomes "2". , the state shown in FIG. 126(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 126(g) is maintained, except that the display of the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "2".

Thereafter, at timing P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "1". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. Therefore, the prefetch effect production (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) is not executed, except that the display of the first pending number U1 of the first special symbol pending display 63 becomes "1". , the state shown in FIG. 126(g) is maintained.

Then, at timing P11, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 126(g) is maintained, except that the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "1".

Note that at the timings of P8 and P11, the prefetch effect production (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect) may be continuously performed.

Next, at timing P12, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "3" to "0" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" and "1" without passing through one frame of non-animation. “3” directly becomes “0”. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes directly from "3" to "0" without going through "2" and "1". Furthermore, the surplus pending icon T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B3 is erased with one frame of non-animation, and all performance symbols 70a (past The effect pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable effect is displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (see FIG. 126(h)). In this way, when the discrepancy between the first pending number U1 that the main control unit 110m knows and the first pending number U1 that the production control unit 130m knows is "3", the surplus pending icon T1 is deleted from the first pending icon display area 70B without being shifted and displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B.

Then, one of the necessary pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. Moreover, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp pattern continues. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparation operation (see FIG. 126(h)).

Thereafter, at timing P13, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the shift display of the icons is completed, the effect pattern 70a will be in a state of being scrolled at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotation operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 126(i)).

At the timing of P13, if the production control unit 130m successfully receives various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variable production (which is executed during the variable display of the special symbol in which the first pending number U1 becomes “0”) Based on the pre-read effect (target of the pre-read effect), the pre-read effect effect (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) and icon change effect (pending icon change effect or the icon change effect) are continuously executed according to the preview scenario. do not. Specifically, at the timing of P13, the prefetch effect performance is not executed, and the effect mode is changed to a mode A background, which has a lower expectation of a jackpot than the prefetch effect (see FIG. 126(h)). Further, the hold icon T1, which was a blue character icon, becomes a normal CD image hold icon T1. In this way, the specific example 14 is a case where the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command after the target pending memory is digested, and at this time, the prefetch effect based on the target pending memory is not continued to be executed. Or, the pre-read effect is changed to one with lower expectations for a jackpot than the previously executed pre-read effect, or the pre-read effect is deleted.

In addition, at the timing of P13, if the production control unit 130m successfully receives various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variation executed during the variation display of the special symbol where the first pending number U1 becomes “0”. Based on the performance (target of the look-ahead performance), the look-ahead effect performance (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) and icon change performance (pending icon change performance and the icon change performance) are continued in accordance with the preview scenario. You can also execute it by

(Specific example 15 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 15 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 and 127. FIG. 124 is a timing chart when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 127(a) to (i) are productions corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. This is an example.

Note that the specific example 15 in FIG. 127 differs from the specific example 14 in FIG. 126 in that the first movable member 73 executes a pre-reading effect (action effect or issue effect) as a pre-reading preview effect, so the same is common here. The explanation of the parts will be omitted and only the different parts will be explained. In addition, in the specific example 15, a look-ahead effect production can also be performed, but since it is the same as the specific example 14, the explanation is omitted.

In specific example 15, a look-ahead effect (advance notification) indicating that the expectation level of a jackpot is high is executed in advance based on the hold memory corresponding to the hold icon T12 in FIG. 127(a). In specific example 15, a performance by the first movable member 73 and an icon change performance are executed as the look-ahead performance. Specifically, an action effect in which the first movable member 73 performs a predetermined action and a light emission effect in which the first movable member 73 emits light are executed, and a sound effect is output. Further, an icon change effect is executed in which the pending icon T1 changes to a blue character icon or a red character icon.

At the timing of P4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes from "4" to "3". Additionally, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation (see FIG. 127(d)).

In addition, variable display of the effect pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and first lamp pattern is started, and a movable effect by the first movable member 73 is executed as a pre-read preview effect. Specifically, the first movable member 73 installed above the first image display device 70 operates in a manner in which expectations for a jackpot are high (for example, large movements or a manner similar to a jackpot). At the same time (see FIG. 127(d)), the first movable member 73 emits light. Also, sound effects are output. In addition, the pre-read preview performance by the operation of the first movable member 73 can be executed continuously in a partial period of each variable performance in multiple variable performances of the performance pattern 70a in the period before the reach performance of the performance pattern 70a. be.

Further, the first pending icon T13 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B1 changes to a blue character icon, and the blue character icon is performing a predetermined action effect. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement). (See FIG. 127(e)). In addition, the pre-read preview performance by the first movable member 73 continues to be performed.

Then, at timing P6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (effecting operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 127(f)).

Next, at timing P7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern is displayed in a variable manner. The period will be extended. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion). Furthermore, the pending icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained and the icon change effect is continued (see FIG. 127(g)).

Thereafter, at timing P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "3" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the first reservation number U1 of the first special symbol reservation display 63 is displayed as "2" without the pre-read preview effect being executed by the operation of the first movable member 73 (see FIG. 127). g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 127(g) is maintained, except that the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "2".

Thereafter, at timing P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "1". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. 127( g) is maintained.

Then, at timing P11, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 127(g) is maintained, except that the display of the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "1".

Note that, at the timings of P8 and P11, the pre-read preview performance (the motion performance and light emission performance of the first movable member 73) by the first movable member 73 may be continuously performed.

Next, at timing P12, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "3" to "0" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" and "1" without passing through one frame of non-animation. “3” directly becomes “0”. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes directly from "3" to "0" without going through "2" and "1". Furthermore, the surplus pending icon T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is erased with one frame of non-animation, and all performance symbols 70a (past The effect pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable effect is displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (see FIG. 127(h)). In this way, when the discrepancy between the first pending number U1 that the main control unit 110m knows and the first pending number U1 that the production control unit 130m knows is "3", the surplus pending icon T1 is deleted from the first pending icon display area 70B without being shifted and displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B.

Then, one of the necessary pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. Moreover, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp pattern continues. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparation operation (see FIG. 127(h)).

Thereafter, at timing P13, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the shift display of the icons is completed, the effect pattern 70a will be in a state of being scrolled at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 127(i)).

At the timing of P13, if the production control unit 130m successfully receives various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variable production (which is executed during the variable display of the special symbol in which the first pending number U1 becomes “0”) The first movable member 73 does not continue to perform the pre-read preview performance and the icon change performance (the pending icon change performance or the icon change performance) based on the pre-read performance (object of the pre-read performance) according to the preview scenario. Specifically, at the timing of P12, the first movable member 73 does not execute the pre-read notice effect, and the first movable member 73 stands still in the standby position, and the light is turned off or the light emission effect is performed in a more modest manner than the pre-read notice effect. As shown in FIG. 127(h), the presentation mode is changed to one in which the level of expectation for a jackpot is lower than that of the look-ahead presentation (see FIG. 127(h)). Further, the hold icon T1, which was a blue character icon, becomes a normal CD image hold icon T1. In this way, the specific example 14 is a case where the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command after the target pending memory is digested, and at this time, the prefetch effect based on the target pending memory is not continued to be executed. Or, the pre-read effect is changed to one with lower expectations for a jackpot than the previously executed pre-read effect, or the pre-read effect is deleted.

In addition, at the timing of P13, if the production control unit 130m successfully receives various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variation executed during the variation display of the special symbol where the first pending number U1 becomes “0”. Based on the performance (target of the pre-read performance), the first movable member 73 may continuously perform the pre-read preview performance and the icon change performance (the pending icon change performance and the icon change performance) in accordance with the preview scenario.

According to specific examples 13 to 15 shown in FIGS. 124 to 127, at timings P7 to P11, the production control unit 130m normally receives commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m. Even if the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command, the main control unit 110m may receive the production command. The same process as in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (stop command, start command) will be performed.

According to specific examples 13 to 15 shown in FIGS. 124 to 127, regarding the case where the first pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0" at the timing of P12. As explained above, when the first number of reservations changes from "4" to "1", that is, the discrepancy between the number of reservations known by the main control unit 110m and the number of reservations known by the production control unit 130m is " 3'', the basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

In specific examples 13 to 15 shown in FIGS. 124 to 127, a predetermined state in which the first command cannot be received normally occurs at timing P7, and the predetermined state continues for a predetermined period before timing P12. In this way, in specific examples 13 to 15, the variable performance of the performance symbol 70a is not executed during the predetermined period. Further, during a predetermined period, the performance symbol 70a whose variable performance has been completed can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, and it is also possible to maintain the performance symbol 70a in a temporarily stopped state.

As described above, according to specific examples 13 to 15 shown in FIGS. 124 to 127, in the hold icon display area, a specific number (for example, three) of hold icons (two more than a predetermined number (for example, one)) ( If the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display in which the number of reservations reaches a predetermined number while displaying the first reservation information), if the production control section The required number of pending icons (for example, the first and second pending icons) are displayed in a shifted manner, without shifting display of the pending icons. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to specific examples 13 to 15 shown in FIGS. 124 to 127, in the hold icon display area, a specific number (for example, three) of hold icons (the first If the production control unit 130m receives a command to start a variable display in which the number of reservations reaches a predetermined number while displaying the reservation information), the production control unit 130m displays the number of reservation icons one less than the specific number, and then displays the predetermined number of reservation icons. A hold icon is now displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to specific examples 13 to 15 shown in FIGS. 124 to 127, in the sub-first reservation display 83 or the first reservation number display area 70E, a specific number that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one) is displayed. (for example, 3), if the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display in which the number of reservations becomes a predetermined number, the number of reservations that is one less than the specific number is displayed. It is designed to display a predetermined number of pending items. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

(Specific example 16 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 16 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129. FIG. 128 is a timing chart when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 129(a) to (j) correspond to (a) to (j) in timing chart 6 of FIG. 128. This is an example of production.

First, at timing P0, as the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", the variable display of the first special symbol starts. . Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number stored (understood) by 130m changes from "2" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. becomes. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "2" to "1". Further, the two pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B1 are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . In addition, variable display of the first lamp pattern is started on the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparation operation.

Next, at timing P1, when the icon shift display is completed, a pre-read zone effect (normal zone effect) and an icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to a prefetch zone background, a blue zone image in which the text "ZONE" scrolls in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Further, the first hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B changes to a blue character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 129(a)).

Then, at the timing of P2, when the game ball enters the first starting port 45, the first pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "1" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning commands (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (preread designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control The process for updating the first pending number U1 stored (kept) by the unit 130m remains at "1" (see FIG. 129(b)).

Thereafter, at timing P3, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (effecting operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 129(c)).

Next, at timing P4, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern is displayed in a variable manner. The period will be extended. In addition, the zone effect (display of the pre-read zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of zone BGM) is maintained, the pre-read zone effect continues, the blue character icon is maintained, and the icon change effect continues (Figure 129 (see (d)).

Thereafter, at timing P5, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the first The variable display of special symbols begins. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "1". If the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the control unit 130m changes from "1" to "1", that is, a process is performed to start the variable performance without changing the first pending number U1.

At this time, the first pending number displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and the first pending icon display area Second in 70B, a hold icon T1 (CD icon) is additionally displayed as a non-animation for one frame (displayed in normal size from the beginning). In addition, all the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position ( (See FIG. 129(e)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern continues, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation (see FIG. 129(e)).

Thereafter, at timing P6, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) is started. Specifically, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 129(f)).

Next, at timing P7, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance (the SP ready-to-win performance ends), the performance symbol 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a reach-missing mode ("161"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (effecting operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 129(g)).

Then, at timing P8, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the performance control unit 130m receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern is in a losing mode (extinguished). The main stop is performed (see FIG. 129(h)).

After that, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the first The variable display of special symbols begins. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in one frame of non-animation, and the first pending icon is displayed. One pending icon T1 displayed in the area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C as an animation of 20 frames and displayed as the icon TH. Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation (see FIG. 129(i)).

Next, at timing P10, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C (the icon corresponding to the first pending memory in which the production control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command) changes to a blue character icon. At the same time, a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the icon TH is in a state where it is performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 129 ( See j).

Thereafter, when the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon TH is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change performance ends.

In addition, at the timing of P2 to P4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (command at the time of winning, command at the time of stopping) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m Even if the display/audio control section 140 and the lamp/drive control section 150 cannot normally receive the production commands sent from the main control section 110m, the production control will display the commands (winning commands, stop commands) sent from the main control section 110m. The same process as in the case where the unit 130m cannot receive normally is performed.

Here, at the timing of P5, a case has been described in which the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "1", but the first pending number U1 is "0". If the first pending number U1 changes from "2" to "0", if the first pending number U1 changes from "3" to "3", in other words, the main control unit 110m If the number of reservations (kept) and the number of reservations stored (kept) by the production control unit 130m are the same, the basic flow will be the same as the above explanation.

In this way, according to the specific example 16 shown in FIGS. 128 and 129, while a predetermined number (for example, one) of pending icons (first pending information) are displayed in the pending icon display area 70C, the predetermined number of pending icons (first pending information) is displayed. When the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display that is a number, display one more (for example, two) pending icons than a predetermined number, and then shift-display those pending icons. A predetermined number of pending icons are displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example 16 shown in FIGS. 128 to 129, while a predetermined number (for example, one) of the number of reservations is displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 or the first reservation number display area 70E, the number of reservations When the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display in which is a predetermined number, the predetermined number of pending numbers is displayed without displaying the number of pending numbers that is one more than the predetermined number (for example, two). It is supposed to be done. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

Further, according to the specific example 16 shown in FIGS. 128 and 129, although the pending icon (first pending information) is not displayed in the pending icon display area 70C, the pending number is "0" while the icon is being displayed. When the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display, it displays a number of hold icons that are one more than "0" (for example, 1), and then shifts and displays the hold icons. The hold icon is no longer displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 128 and 129, while the sub-first pending display 83 or the first pending number display area 70E is displaying the pending number of "0", the pending number is "0". When the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display, the number of pending items of "0" is displayed (maintained) without displaying the number of pending items that is one more than "0" (for example, 1). ). Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

(Specific example 17 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 17 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. FIG. 130 is a timing chart when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 131(a) to (f) are productions corresponding to (a) to (f) in the timing chart of FIG. This is an example.

First, at timing P0, as the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", the variable display of the first special symbol starts. . Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "2" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and the first pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1". The two pending icons T1 displayed in 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparation operation.

Next, at timing P1, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, a look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) and an icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to a prefetch zone background, a blue zone image in which the text "ZONE" scrolls in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Further, the first hold icon T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B changes to a blue character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement). (See FIG. 131(a)).

Then, at the timing of P2, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "1" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning commands (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (preread designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control The process for updating the first pending number U1 stored (kept) by the unit 130m remains at "1" (see FIG. 131(b)).

Thereafter, at the timing of P3, the game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3". At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "3". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (preread designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control The process for updating the first pending number U1 stored (kept) by the unit 130m remains at "1" (see FIG. 131(b)).

Next, at timing P4, the game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "3" to "4". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (preread designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control The process for updating the first pending number U1 stored (kept) by the unit 130m remains at "1" (see FIG. 131(b)).

Then, at timing P5, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (effecting operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 131(c)).

Thereafter, at timing P6, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern is displayed in a variable manner. The period will be extended. In addition, the zone effect (display of the pre-read zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of zone BGM) is maintained, the pre-read zone effect continues, the blue character icon is maintained, and the icon change effect continues (Figure 131 (see (d)).

Thereafter, at timing P7, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first The variable display of special symbols begins. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "4" to "3". If the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the control unit 130m changes from "1" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the first pending icon display area The hold icon T1 (CD icon) is additionally displayed as a non-animation for one frame (displayed in normal size from the beginning) in the second to fourth positions of 70B. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position ( (See FIG. 131(e)).

Then, the necessary four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern continues, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation (see FIG. 131(e)).

Thereafter, at timing P8, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 131(f)).

Thereafter, when the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon TH is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change performance ends.

In addition, at the timing of P2 to P6, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (winning command, stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, Even if the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production commands sent from the production control unit 130m, the commands sent from the main control unit 110m (winning command, stop command) , start command) is not received normally by the production control unit 130m.

Here, at the timing of P7, a case has been described in which the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "3", but the first pending number U1 is "1". When the first reservation number U1 changes from "0" to "2", when the first reservation number U1 changes from "0" to "1", in other words, the main control unit 110m stores If the number of reservations (understood) is greater than the number of reservations stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m, the basic flow will be the same as the above explanation.

As described above, according to the specific example 17 shown in FIGS. 130 to 131, while a predetermined number (for example, one) of pending icons (first pending information) are displayed in the pending icon display area, the number of pending If the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display that is a specific number (for example, two) that is greater than the specific number, display a hold icon that is one more than the specific number (for example, three), and then By shifting and displaying these pending icons, a specific number of pending icons are displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example 17 shown in FIGS. 130 to 131, while a predetermined number (for example, one) of the number of reservations is displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 or the first reservation number display area 70E, the number of reservations When the production control unit 130m receives a command at the time of starting a variable display in which is a specific number (for example, two) that is larger than a predetermined number, it displays a pending number that is one more than the specific number (for example, three). It is now possible to display a specific number of pending items without having to do so. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

Further, according to specific example 17 shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, although the hold icon (first hold information) is not displayed in the hold icon display area, when the hold icon (first hold information) is displayed, the hold number is a predetermined number (for example, 1) When the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display, it displays one more (for example, two) pending icons than the predetermined number, and then shifts and displays those pending icons. By doing so, a predetermined number of pending icons will be displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example 17 shown in FIGS. 130 to 131, when the number of reservations of "0" is displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 or the first reservation number display area 70E, the number of reservations reaches a predetermined number ( For example, if the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display that is 1), the predetermined number of pending numbers will be displayed without displaying the pending number that is one more than the predetermined number (for example, 2). It is designed to be displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

According to the above-described specific example, if the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command while the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, the variation period of the special pattern TZ and the lamp pattern , the output period of the fluctuating BGM is extended (continued) compared to the normal period. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a period in which no performance is performed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example described above, while the temporary stop period of the performance symbol 70a is being extended (continued), the scrolling of the background image, the pending icon, and the rotating operation of the icon are continued. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the performance from becoming extremely static and boring during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the performance symbols 70a, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the above-mentioned specific example, even during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the performance symbol 70a, the pre-read notice performance (icon change performance, pre-read zone performance) is continued (executed). Therefore, even if a command abnormality occurs in which the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, the pre-read preview performance will not end, and the game can be improved by avoiding inconveniences that may cause player dissatisfaction. It becomes possible to improve the interest of

Further, according to the above-mentioned specific example, even if the pre-reading notice presentation (icon change presentation, pre-reading zone presentation) is continued (executed) during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the presentation pattern 70a, the presentation pattern During the extension (continuation) of the temporary suspension period 70a, the preview mode (type of icon, type of zone performance) of the pre-read preview performance does not change. Therefore, there is no abnormality in the progress of the pre-read preview performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game by avoiding inconveniences that may increase player dissatisfaction.

Furthermore, according to the above-mentioned specific example, if the production control unit 130m normally receives the start command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, if the production is deviated from the predetermined stop position. The variable display is started after all the effect patterns 70a including the pattern 70a (the effect patterns 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect) are displayed at the stop position (momentarily derived and displayed). . Therefore, the appearance at the start of the variable performance can be made better than when the variable display is started with the performance symbols 70a deviated from the stop position, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example described above, if the production control unit 130m normally receives the start command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the lamp pattern are not stopped and displayed. The variable display continues. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated processing such as stopping and displaying the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol, and it becomes possible to reduce the control load. Furthermore, even if the performance symbol 70a is displayed at the stop position (momentarily derived and displayed), the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol can inform the player that a variable performance is being performed, increasing the interest of the game. It becomes possible to improve the performance.

Furthermore, according to the above-mentioned specific example, if the production control unit 130m normally receives the start command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, the icon is displayed at the normal time (when the stop command is not received). It is designed to be erased in a shorter time (1 frame of non-animation) than the 10 frames of animation (1 frame of non-animation). Therefore, it is possible to make the newly executed variable performance less likely to be hindered by the deletion of the icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the above-mentioned specific example, the production control unit 130m normally issues the start command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a in which the pre-read notice production (icon change production, pre-read zone production) is continued (executed). If it is received, the pre-read preview performance can be executed even in the newly executed variable performance. Therefore, even if a communication error occurs in which the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive commands, the pre-read preview performance will not end, and the game can be improved by avoiding inconveniences that may cause player dissatisfaction. It becomes possible to improve the interest of

Further, according to the above-mentioned specific example, the production control unit 130m normally issues the start command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a in which the pre-read notice production (icon change production, pre-read zone production) is continued (executed). If the notification is received, it is possible to perform a new variable performance that corresponds to the scenario of the pre-read preview performance. Therefore, even if a command abnormality occurs in which the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, the progress of the pre-read preview performance will not be abnormal, thereby avoiding inconveniences that may increase player dissatisfaction. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Specific example 18 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 18 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIGS. 132 and 133. FIG. 132 is a timing chart when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 133(a) to (j) are productions corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart of FIG. This is an example.

First, at timing P0, as the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", the variable display of the first special symbol starts. . Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "2" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and the first pending icon is displayed. The two pending icons T1 displayed in the area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparation operation.

Next, at timing P1, the shift display of the pending icon is completed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continuing and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotation operation (production operation).

Then, at timing P2, the game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "1" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (preread designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control No process is performed to update the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the unit 130m, and it remains at "1".

At this time, since the winning command for which the first pending number U1 is "2" has not been received, the first pending number U1 displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first pending number display area 70E is The value remains "1", and the pending icon T1 is not displayed at the second location corresponding to the first pending number "2" in the first pending icon display area 70B (see FIG. 133(a)).

Thereafter, at the timing of P3, the game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3". At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (preread designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The stored (kept) first reservation number U1 changes from "1" to "3".

At this time, the first pending number U1 displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the first pending icon is displayed. In the second area of the area 70B, which corresponds to "2" of the first pending number U1 for which the winning command could not be received, the pending icon T1 is not displayed, and 3 corresponds to "3" of the first pending number U1. Second, one hold icon T1 is additionally displayed as an animation of 10 frames (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) (see FIG. 133(b)).

Next, at timing P4, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating motion (acting motion) (see FIG. 133(c)).

Then, at timing P5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the performance control unit 130m receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern is in a losing mode (for example, turned off). The main stop is made at (see FIG. 133(d)).

Thereafter, at timing P6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the first The variable display of special symbols begins. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "3" to "2" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" in one frame of non-animation, and the first pending icon is displayed. The second pending icon T1 corresponding to the first pending number "2" for which the winning command could not be received in the area 70B is additionally displayed as one frame of non-animation (displayed in normal size from the beginning) and displayed. The three pending icons T1 are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation of 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation (see FIG. 133(e)).

Thereafter, at timing P7, the shift display of the hold icon T1 is completed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement). (See FIG. 133(f)).

Next, at timing P8, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("225"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (actual performance operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 133(g)).

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the performance control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern is in a losing mode (for example, turned off). The main stop is made at (see FIG. 133(h)).

After that, at timing P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the first The variable display of special symbols begins. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "2" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and the first pending icon is displayed. The two pending icons T1 displayed in the area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation (see FIG. 133(i)).

Next, at timing P11, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C (the icon corresponding to the first pending memory in which the production control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command) changes to a blue character icon. At the same time, a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the icon Th is in a state where it is performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (see FIG. 133). See j).

Thereafter, when the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon TH is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change performance ends.

In addition, at the timing of P2, although the production control unit 130m was able to successfully receive the command (winning command) sent from the main control unit 110m, the production command sent from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command. The case where the display/audio control section 140 and the lamp/drive control section 150 cannot normally receive the command is the same as the case where the production control section 130m cannot normally receive the command (winning command) sent from the main control section 110m. processing will be performed.

Here, at the timing of P3, when the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is "1", a winning command is received in which the first pending number becomes "3". As explained above, when the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is “1” and a winning command is received in which the first pending number U1 becomes “4”, the production control unit Regarding the case where the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m is "0" and a winning command is received in which the first pending number U1 is "2", "3", or "4". The basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

As described above, according to the specific example 18 shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the hold icon (first hold information ) is not displayed, if the production control unit 130m receives a winning command in which the number of reservations is one more than the predetermined number (for example, three), the predetermined number of reservation icons in the reservation icon display area The hold icon is not displayed in the area corresponding to (for example, the second) the hold icon, but is displayed in the area (for example, the third) corresponding to a specific number of the hold icon display areas. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming less interested in the game by avoiding the inconvenience of having the player recognize the incorrect number of reservations.

Further, according to the specific example 18 shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, a number (for example, one) smaller than a predetermined number (for example, two) is displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 or the first reservation number display area 70E. ), if the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command that makes the pending number one more than the predetermined number (for example, three), display the predetermined number of pending prizes. Instead, it displays a specific number of pending items. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

As described above, according to the specific example 18 shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the hold icon (first hold information ) is not displayed, if the production control unit 130m receives a winning command in which the number of pending prizes is a specific number (for example, four) that is more than a predetermined number, a predetermined number of pending icons are displayed in the reserved icon display area. The hold icon is not displayed in the area (for example, the third) that corresponds to one less than the specific number from the corresponding area (for example, the second), and the hold icon is displayed in the area that corresponds to the specific number of the hold icon display areas (for example, 4), a hold icon is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming less interested in the game by avoiding the inconvenience of having the player recognize the incorrect number of reservations.

Further, according to the specific example 18 shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, a number (for example, one) smaller than a predetermined number (for example, two) is displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 or the first reservation number display area 70E. ), if the presentation control unit 130m receives a winning command in which the pending number becomes a specific number (for example, 4) that is more than the predetermined number, the predetermined number is one less than the specific number. It is designed to display a specific number of pending numbers without displaying a number of pending numbers. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

According to the specific example 18 shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, a predetermined number of pending icons are not displayed in an area (for example, the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the pending icon display areas. If the performance control unit 130m receives a start command that makes the number of reservations a predetermined number while displaying a reservation icon in an area (for example, the third) corresponding to a specific number (for example, three) that is one more than A predetermined number of pending icons are displayed by additionally displaying a pending icon in an area corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, the second) of the icon display areas to display a specific number of pending icons, and then the predetermined number of pending icons are shifted and displayed. The icon is now displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example 18 shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, an area (for example, the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the reserved icon display areas and a number (for example, the second) that is one more than the predetermined number ( If the number of pending icons is not displayed in the area corresponding to (for example, 3) and the pending icon is displayed in the area (for example, 4th) that corresponds to a specific number that is more than a predetermined number (for example, 4), the number of pending icons is specified. When the production control unit 130m receives a start command that is one less than the number, the area corresponding to the predetermined number (for example, the second) of the pending icon display areas and the number one more than the predetermined number ( For example, add hold icons to the area corresponding to 3) to display a specific number of hold icons, then shift and display those hold icons to display a hold icon that is one less than the specific number. It is supposed to be done. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example 18 shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the icon corresponding to the first pending memory in which the production control unit 130m could not normally receive the command at the time of winning is displayed as a pending icon. Although the icon change effect is not executed, the icon change effect can be executed while the icon is being displayed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the icon change effect is not executed due to failure to receive the winning command normally, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the above-mentioned specific example, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of commands occurs in the production control board 130 while the main control board 110 has a predetermined number (4 or 3) of pending memories, the first special On the symbol reservation display 63 (first display), the number of reservations continues to be displayed in a decreasing manner even during the occurrence of an abnormality. Then, after the abnormality occurs, the effect control board 130 is in a state where the main control board 110 has a reserved memory of a specific number (2 or more fewer than the main control board 110) that is smaller than the predetermined number (4 or 3). When a command is successfully received in the first image display device 70 (second display), a pending display is displayed in which the number of pending icons decreases step by step from a predetermined number to a specific number (for example, the number of pending icons decreases from 4 to 2 or 1, 3 to 1) are not displayed.
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easier to see that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the above-mentioned specific example, the pending display (display of the number of pending, pending icon) makes it possible to perform a pre-reading effect (advance notification) that increases the expectation of a jackpot in advance, and the effect can be performed while the pre-reading effect using the pending display is being executed. When an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the control board 130, it is possible to continue executing the pre-read effect by displaying a hold until the command is normally received.
Therefore, even when an abnormality occurs, it is possible to attract the attention of the players, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In the above-mentioned specific example, the background display (for example, a background image different from that normally used, such as the background of the look-ahead zone) makes it possible to perform a look-ahead effect (advance notification) that increases the expectation of a jackpot in advance. When an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 while executing a pre-reading effect using the background display, the pre-reading effect using the background display can continue to be executed until the command is normally received. .
Therefore, even when an abnormality occurs, it is possible to attract the attention of the players, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In the above-mentioned specific example, it is possible to perform a pre-reading effect (advance notification) to increase the expectation of a jackpot in advance by displaying text (for example, a caption or text such as "ZONE"), and executing the pre-reading effect by displaying the text. When an abnormality occurs in the performance control board 130 due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command, the pre-read performance by character display can be continuously executed until the command is normally received.
Therefore, even when an abnormality occurs, it is possible to attract the attention of the players, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In the above-mentioned specific example, the expectation level display (for example, a color effect such as a blue effect image EF) enables a pre-reading effect (advance notification) that increases the jackpot expectation level, and the expectation level display When an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during execution of the pre-read performance, the pre-read performance based on the expectation level display can be continuously executed until the command is normally received.
Therefore, even when an abnormality occurs, it is possible to attract the attention of the players, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In the above-mentioned specific example, as advance notification to increase the jackpot expectation level, a pre-reading performance (for example, the first movable member 70 (such as board and frame objects, movements such as vibration of operation buttons, light emission, chance eyes of the same color of the effect pattern, etc.), abnormal reception of commands or non-reception of commands on the effect control board 130 during the execution of the pre-read effect. When an abnormality occurs, the prefetch effect can continue to be executed until the command is received normally.
Therefore, even when an abnormality occurs, it is possible to attract the attention of the players, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, it is possible to perform a look-ahead performance (advance notification) that increases the expectation of a jackpot in advance, and if an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during the execution of the look-ahead performance, the performance control If there is a jackpot in the pending memory that the board 130 has missed, it is possible to continue to execute the pre-read effect by displaying the pending until the command is normally received, and even if the predetermined big winning opening is opened. good.
Therefore, even when an abnormality occurs, it is possible to attract the attention of the players, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In the above-mentioned specific example, as advance notification to increase the jackpot expectation level, a pre-reading performance (for example, the first movable member 70 (such as board and frame objects, movements such as vibration of operation buttons, light emission, chance eyes of the same color of the effect pattern, etc.), abnormal reception of commands or non-reception of commands on the effect control board 130 during the execution of the pre-read effect. If a command is received normally after an error occurs, the prefetch effect that was scheduled to be executed continuously will not be performed from where it left off.
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easier to see that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the above-mentioned specific example, as advance notification to increase the jackpot expectation level, a pre-reading performance (for example, the first movable member 70 There are board accessories and frame accessories, movements such as vibration of operation buttons, light emission, chance eyes of the same color of the production pattern, etc.). After an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during the execution of a continuous look-ahead performance that spans a plurality of symbol variations based on the first pending memory, the command is stored after the first pending memory. When a command corresponding to the second pending memory is normally received, the prefetch effect that was scheduled to be executed continuously based on the predetermined pending memory is not performed from the continuation.
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easier to see that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the specific example described above, when the main control board 110 has a predetermined number of pending memories (4 or 3) and an abnormality occurs in the production control board 130 due to abnormal reception or non-reception of commands, the first special The symbol reservation display 63 continues to display a decreasing number of reservations (first display) even during the occurrence of an abnormality. Then, after the abnormality occurs, the effect control board 130 is in a state where the main control board 110 has a reserved memory of a specific number (2 or more fewer than the main control board 110) that is smaller than the predetermined number (4 or 3). When a command is normally received at (from 2 or 1, from 3 to 1) is not displayed. On the other hand, in the reservation number display areas 70F and 70E of the first image display device 70, the reservation display (third display, for example, reservation number) that gradually decreases from a predetermined number to a specific number is not displayed, It is now possible to change the display to a specific number of pending items.
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easier to see that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command in the performance control board 130, the performance pattern 70a whose variable performance has ended can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state (oscillating state), Even if a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuating performance of the performance pattern 70a, the temporary stop state (swinging state) of the performance pattern 70a is continued, and the customer waiting demonstration performance is not executed.
Therefore, it becomes easy to understand that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform variable display of the performance symbols 70a. Then, after an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during execution of a look-ahead performance based on the first suspension memory, a second suspension memory stored after the first suspension memory is stored. When the command corresponding to is normally received, in the variable display of the normally received performance symbol 70a, the pre-read performance (advance notification) that was scheduled to be executed continuously for the first pending memory is not performed continuously. , or the pre-read effect is changed to a display with a lower level of expectation, or the pre-read effect is deleted.
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easier to see that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform variable display of the performance symbols 70a. Based on the first pending memory, the command is abnormally received or not received in the performance control board 130 during execution of the prefetch effect using a background display (for example, a background image different from that normally used, such as a prefetch zone background). After an abnormality has occurred due to reception, when a command corresponding to the second pending memory stored after the first pending memory is normally received, the fluctuating display of the normally received production symbol 70a will display a command corresponding to the first pending memory. The pre-reading effect (advance notification) by the background display that was scheduled to be executed continuously will not continue, or the pre-reading effect will be changed to a display with a lower expectation level, or the pre-reading effect will be deleted. It has become.
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easier to see that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform variable display of the performance symbols 70a. Then, based on the first pending memory, after an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during the execution of a pre-reading performance using character displays (for example, telops and characters such as "ZONE") , When a command corresponding to the second pending memory stored after the first pending memory is normally received, the fluctuating display of the normally received production symbol 70a is executed continuously for the first pending memory. The planned pre-read effect (advance notification) by character display is not continued, the pre-read effect is changed to a display with a lower level of expectation, or the pre-read effect is deleted.
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easier to see that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform variable display of the performance symbols 70a. Then, based on the first pending memory, an abnormality due to an abnormal reception or non-reception of a command is detected in the performance control board 130 during execution of a look-ahead performance using an expectation level display (for example, a color effect such as a blue effect image EF). After the occurrence, when a command corresponding to the second pending memory stored after the first pending memory is normally received, in the fluctuating display of the normally received production symbol 70a, the command corresponding to the second pending memory stored after the first pending memory is continuously displayed. The pre-reading effect (pre-notification) based on the expectation level display that was scheduled to be executed is not continued, or the pre-reading effect is changed to a display with a lower expectation level, or the pre-reading effect is deleted. .
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easier to see that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform variable display of the performance symbols 70a. As a prior notice to increase the expectation of a jackpot, a pre-reading performance (for example, a board accessory such as the first movable member 70, Movements such as frame accessories, vibration of operation buttons, and light emission,
There are chance eyes of the same color of the production design, etc.). Then, based on the first pending memory, abnormal reception or non-reception of a command in the production control board 130 during execution of a look-ahead production that is executed in a partial period of each variation production in a plurality of variation productions in a period before reach. After an abnormality occurs, when a command corresponding to the second pending memory stored after the first pending memory is normally received, the fluctuating display of the normally received production symbol 70a will be performed with respect to the first pending memory. The pre-read effect (pre-notification) that was scheduled to be executed continuously is not performed continuously, the pre-read effect is changed to a display with a lower expectation level, or the pre-read effect is deleted.
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easier to see that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In addition, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the production control board 130 and there is a jackpot in the command (suspended memory) that the production control board 130 has failed to receive, the command that has been missed by the production control board 130 (suspended memory) has a jackpot, the jackpot pending memory or the jackpot pending memory is stored later. When the command corresponding to the suspended memory is normally received, in the fluctuating display of the normally received performance symbol 70a, a look-ahead performance (advance notification) based on the expectation display that was scheduled to be executed continuously for the first suspended memory is performed. may not be performed continuously, or the pre-read effect may be changed to a display with a lower level of expectation, or the pre-read effect may be deleted.
In this case, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easier to see that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform variable display of the performance symbols 70a. Then, after an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during the execution of a look-ahead performance based on the first pending memory, the first pending memory or the memory stored before the first pending memory is When the command corresponding to the second pending memory is normally received, in the fluctuating display of the normally received production symbol 70a, the pre-reading production (advance notification) that was scheduled to be executed continuously for the first pending memory is displayed. can continue to be executed.
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform variable display of the performance symbols 70a. Then, after an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during the execution of a look-ahead performance based on the first pending memory, the first pending memory or the memory stored before the first pending memory is When the command corresponding to the second pending memory is normally received, in the fluctuating display of the normally received production symbol 70a, the pre-reading production (advance notification) that was scheduled to be executed continuously for the first pending memory is displayed. It is designed not to continue running.
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform variable display of the performance symbols 70a. Based on the first pending memory, the command is abnormally received or not received in the performance control board 130 during execution of the prefetch effect using a background display (for example, a background image different from that normally used, such as a prefetch zone background). After an abnormality occurs due to reception, when a command corresponding to the first pending memory or the second pending memory stored before the first pending memory is normally received, the fluctuating display of the normally received performance symbol 70a will display the first pending memory. The pre-read effect (advance notification) by background display, which was scheduled to be executed continuously for the first pending memory, can be executed continuously.
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform variable display of the performance symbols 70a. Based on the first pending memory, the command is abnormally received or not received in the performance control board 130 during execution of the prefetch effect using a background display (for example, a background image different from that normally used, such as a prefetch zone background). After an abnormality has occurred due to reception, when a command corresponding to the first pending memory or the second pending memory stored before the first pending memory is normally received, the fluctuating display of the normally received performance symbol 70a will display the first pending memory. The pre-read effect (advance notification) by background display, which was scheduled to be executed continuously for the first pending memory, is not executed continuously.
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform variable display of the performance symbols 70a. Then, based on the first pending memory, after an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during the execution of a pre-reading performance using character displays (for example, telops and characters such as "ZONE") , when a command corresponding to the first pending memory or the second pending memory stored before the first pending memory is normally received, in the fluctuating display of the normally received production pattern 70a, the command corresponding to the first pending memory is Pre-read effects (advance notification) using character displays that were scheduled to be executed continuously can now be executed continuously.
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform variable display of the performance symbols 70a. Then, based on the first pending memory, after an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during the execution of a pre-reading performance using character displays (for example, telops and characters such as "ZONE") , when a command corresponding to the first pending memory or the second pending memory stored before the first pending memory is normally received, in the fluctuating display of the normally received production pattern 70a, the command corresponding to the first pending memory is Pre-read effects (advance notification) using character displays that were scheduled to be executed continuously are not executed continuously.
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality occurs in the production control board 130 due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command, the first image display device 70 does not display the variation of the production symbols 70a. Then, based on the first pending memory, an abnormality due to an abnormal reception or non-reception of a command is detected in the performance control board 130 during execution of a look-ahead performance using an expectation level display (for example, a color effect such as a blue effect image EF). After the occurrence, if a command corresponding to the first pending memory or the second pending memory stored before the first pending memory is normally received, in the fluctuating display of the normally received performance symbol 70a, the first pending memory is It is now possible to continue performing the pre-reading performance (advance notification) based on the expectation level display, which was scheduled to be performed continuously.
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality occurs in the production control board 130 due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command, the first image display device 70 does not display the variation of the production symbols 70a. Then, based on the first pending memory, an abnormality due to an abnormal reception or non-reception of a command is detected in the performance control board 130 during execution of a look-ahead performance using an expectation level display (for example, a color effect such as a blue effect image EF). After the occurrence, if a command corresponding to the first pending memory or the second pending memory stored before the first pending memory is normally received, in the fluctuating display of the normally received performance symbol 70a, the first pending memory is The pre-reading effect (advance notification) based on the expectation level display that was scheduled to be executed continuously for 2020 will not be executed continuously.
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the above-mentioned specific example, as a look-ahead effect (advance notice) to increase the jackpot expectation level in advance, for example, a pending display (display of the number of holds, a hold icon), a background display (for example, a look-ahead zone background, etc.), etc. background image different from that used), character display (for example, captions and characters such as "ZONE"), expectation display (for example, color effect such as blue effect image EF), board of the first movable member 70, etc. It can be executed by combining a plurality of accessories, frame accessories, actions such as vibration of operation buttons, light emission, chance eyes of the same color of production patterns, etc. When an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during the execution of multiple prefetch effects, the first prefetch effect (for example, hold display) can be executed continuously, while the second pre-read effect (for example, background display, movement effect of the first movable member 70, etc.) of the plurality of pre-read effects cannot be executed continuously. There is.
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the above-mentioned specific example, as a look-ahead effect (advance notice) to increase the jackpot expectation level in advance, for example, a pending display (display of the number of holds, a hold icon), a background display (for example, a look-ahead zone background, etc.), etc. background image different from that used), character display (for example, captions and characters such as "ZONE"), expectation display (for example, color effect such as blue effect image EF), board of the first movable member 70, etc. It can be executed by combining a plurality of accessories, frame accessories, actions such as vibration of operation buttons, light emission, chance eyes of the same color of production patterns, etc. When an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during the execution of multiple prefetch effects, the first prefetch effect (for example, hold display) can be executed continuously, while the second pre-read effect (for example, background display, movement effect of the first movable member 70, etc.) of the plurality of pre-read effects cannot be executed continuously. There is.
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the above-mentioned specific example, as a look-ahead effect (advance notice) to increase the jackpot expectation level in advance, for example, a pending display (display of the number of holds, a hold icon), a background display (for example, a look-ahead zone background, etc.), etc. background image different from that used), character display (for example, captions and characters such as "ZONE"), expectation display (for example, color effect such as blue effect image EF), board of the first movable member 70, etc. It can be executed by combining a plurality of accessories, frame accessories, actions such as vibration of operation buttons, light emission, chance eyes of the same color of production patterns, etc. When an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during execution of a plurality of pre-read effects, the first image display device 70 of the plurality of pre-read effects is used until the command is normally received. While the first look-ahead effect (for example, a hold display) that is executed can be continuously executed, the second look-ahead effect (for example, a hold display) that is executed using a device other than the first image display device 70 among the plurality of look-ahead effects is possible. For example, the motion performance of the first movable member 70) is not continuously performed.
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the above-mentioned specific example, as a look-ahead effect (advance notice) to increase the jackpot expectation level in advance, for example, a pending display (display of the number of holds, a hold icon), a background display (for example, a look-ahead zone background, etc.), etc. background image different from that used), character display (for example, captions and characters such as "ZONE"), expectation display (for example, color effect such as blue effect image EF), board of the first movable member 70, etc. It can be executed by combining a plurality of accessories, frame accessories, actions such as vibration of operation buttons, light emission, chance eyes of the same color of production patterns, etc. After an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during the execution of multiple prefetch effects, if the command is normally received, the first prefetch effect (for example, a pending display) among the multiple prefetch effects ) can be executed continuously, while the second pre-reading effect (for example, background display, movement effect of the first movable member 70, etc.) of the plurality of pre-reading effects is not continuously executed. .
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the above-mentioned specific example, as a look-ahead effect (advance notice) to increase the expectation of a jackpot in advance, for example, a pending display (display of the number of holds, a hold icon), a background display (for example, a look-ahead zone background, etc.), etc. background image different from that used), character display (for example, captions and characters such as "ZONE"), expectation display (for example, color effect such as blue effect image EF), board of the first movable member 70, etc. It can be executed by combining a plurality of accessories, frame accessories, actions such as vibration of operation buttons, light emission, chance eyes of the same color of production patterns, etc. After an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during execution of a plurality of pre-read effects, if a command is normally received, one of the plural pre-read effects is executed using the first image display device 70. The first look-ahead effect (for example, a hold display) can be executed continuously, while the second look-ahead effect (for example, , motion performance of the first movable member 70, etc.) are not performed continuously.
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the above-mentioned specific example, if abnormal reception or non-reception of the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) occurs in the production control board 130 in a state where there is a pending memory, the variation production of the production symbol 70a on the first image display device 70 is changed. The effect pattern 70a which is not started and has stopped fluctuating temporarily stops in a swinging state. At this time, even if the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the display of the pending icon T1 corresponding to the pending memory is continued, and the identification part (number) constituting the production pattern 70a and the effect (EF) attached to the character are continued. ) is executed.
Therefore, even if the performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped, it is possible to maintain the player's interest and prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

In the above-mentioned specific example, if abnormal reception or non-reception of the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) occurs in the production control board 130 in a state where there is a pending memory, the variation production of the production symbol 70a on the first image display device 70 is changed. The effect pattern 70a which is not started and has stopped fluctuating temporarily stops in a swinging state. At this time, even if the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the display of the hold icon T1 corresponding to the hold memory is continued, and a part of the decoration (for example, a stick image SG) motion performance is executed.
Therefore, even if the performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped, it is possible to maintain the player's interest and prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

In the above-mentioned specific example, when abnormal reception or non-reception of the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) occurs in the production control board 130 in a state where there is a pending memory, the variation production of the production symbol 70a on the first image display device 70 is changed. The effect pattern 70a which is not started and has stopped fluctuating temporarily stops in a swinging state. At this time, even if the performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the display of the pending icon T corresponding to the pending memory is continued, and the motion performance of the pending icon T is executed.
Therefore, even if the performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped, it is possible to maintain the player's interest and prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

If the number of reservations stored in the main control board 110 is 2 or more smaller than the number of reservations stored in the production control board 130, the display will be displayed on the liquid crystal (first image display device, second image display device). To rewrite the number of pending icons corresponding to the number of pending commands input from a main control board 110 without performing an effect of gradually reducing the number of pending icons corresponding to the deviated number of pending icons.
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

Advance notifications (pre-reading effects) that increase the expectation of a jackpot include, for example, pending changes, character displays for pending changes, changes in the character display for pending changes, and character displays (telops) suggesting transition to a mode consisting of multiple types. , background color change, background conversion, return of appearing characters, appearance of new characters, display of expectations based on multiple types (colors, effects, characters, etc.), predetermined effects performed during the first period (before reach) from the start of variation. (Button vibration, movement of frames and board accessories, effects, lightning, character display, specific sounds, predetermined lamp lighting) may be performed in parallel in a plurality of variable effects.

When the production control board 130 normally receives the next and subsequent stop commands through a state in which the stop command is abnormally received or not received, the production pattern 70a is displayed statically (main stop), and the production pattern 70a is displayed in a static state (main stop), and in response to the command. What is necessary is to execute display processing.

Even if the production control board 130 abnormally receives or does not receive the stop command, it is sufficient to display the background images associated with each of the plurality of production modes. At this time, in a plurality of performance modes, a common display mode (shape and color) is displayed for hold, pseudo, group notices, etc., but the degree of expectation may differ depending on the performance mode. For example, an operation image of an operation button, an operation image of an operation means such as a lever, a display of a light guide plate, a title display, etc. are displayed in a manner with different expectations for a jackpot depending on the presentation mode.

If the performance control board 130 normally receives the next command after abnormally receiving or not receiving the stop command during the pre-reading performance, the pre-reading performance will continue to be displayed in the abnormally received or unreceived state. However, if the next command is normally received, the previous prefetch effect may not be continued and executed.

If the performance control board 130 normally receives the next command after abnormally receiving or not receiving the stop command during the pre-reading performance, the pre-reading performance will continue to be displayed in the abnormally received or unreceived state. However, it may be possible to execute a new effect (for example, including a change in the icon at that time) when the next command is normally received.

If the performance control board 130 normally receives the next command after abnormally receiving or not receiving the stop command during the pre-reading performance, the pre-reading performance will continue to be displayed in the abnormally received or unreceived state. However, when the next command is normally received, it may be possible to change the display mode to a less expected display mode than the previous prefetch effect (for example, change the pending display from a blue icon to a plain display).

If the production control board 130 normally receives the next command after abnormally receiving or not receiving a stop command during a pre-read production that changes the background display (mode, stage), it will indicate whether the stop command is abnormally received or not received. In this state, a pre-reading effect that changes the background display (mode, stage) may be continuously displayed.

If the production control board 130 normally receives the next command after abnormally receiving or not receiving the stop command during a look-ahead production that displays character displays (for example, telops), the production control board 130 will receive an abnormal reception or non-reception. In this state, a prefetch effect that displays text (telop) may continue to be displayed.

If the production control board 130 normally receives the next command after abnormally receiving or not receiving the stop command during the look-ahead production that displays the expected value display (color change, effect, hold), an error occurs. In the received or unreceived state, a look-ahead effect that displays an expected value display (color change, effect, pending) may continue to be executed.

When a command from the production control board 130 is missed, the display is not limited to displaying a portion of the plurality of production symbols 70a whose variable production has ended in a temporarily stopped state (swinging state), and when the variation production has ended. A part of the plurality of effect symbols 70a may be displayed in a temporarily stopped state (swinging state), and the remaining part of the plurality of effect symbols 70a may be displayed in a fully stopped state (stationary state). For example, when a command from the production control board 130 is missed, the two left and right production symbols 70a are permanently stopped while the central production symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, or the two left and right production symbols 70a are temporarily stopped. It is possible to make changes as appropriate, such as by permanently stopping the central performance pattern 70a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the performance pattern 70a swings up and down as a temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, but the performance pattern 70a may be expanded/contracted. In this case, if the start command is received during a temporary stop, if the production pattern 70a is deviated from the stop position in the direction of shrinking (smaller than the normal size) or in the direction of expanding (smaller than the normal size). (large), it is recommended that it be displayed in the normal size at the stop position.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance pattern 70a swings up and down as a temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, but the performance pattern 70a does not swing and the decorative part and number part protrude from the base image. It may also be made to fluctuate as shown in FIG. In this case, if the start command is received during a temporary stop, if the decorative part or number part is out of the base image, it will fit within the base image and be displayed at the stop position. good.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state), since the effect pattern 70a is composed of only a number part (identification character), the decoration part fluctuates when the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped. Although the movement (performance movement) is not performed, the performance pattern 70a is composed of a number part (identification character) and a decoration part consisting of a pattern effect image, and the design effect image is displayed when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped. It may also be made to perform a fluctuating motion (direction motion).

When a command of the performance control board 130 is missed, a performance may be executed in which the identification part (number) forming the performance symbol 70a for which the variable performance has been completed is activated. In this case, the motion performance is not limited to being performed on a part of the plurality of performance symbols 70a for which the fluctuation performance has been completed, but also for performing the motion performance on a part of the plurality of performance symbols 70a for which the fluctuation performance has been completed. The motion performance may not be executed in the remaining part of the performance pattern 70a.

When a command from the production control board 130 is missed, an effect (for example, a pattern effect image ZE decorating the background of the character) accompanying a character (for example, a character image CG) constituting the production pattern 70a for which the variable production has been completed is ) is recommended. In this case, the motion performance is not limited to being performed on a part of the plurality of performance symbols 70a for which the fluctuation performance has been completed, but also for performing the motion performance on a part of the plurality of performance symbols 70a for which the fluctuation performance has been completed. The motion performance may not be executed in the remaining part of the performance pattern 70a.

When a command from the production control board 130 is missed, the decoration (for example, a stick-shaped image SG that is part of the character) attached to the character (for example, character image CG) that constitutes the production pattern 70a for which the variable production has been completed ) is recommended. In this case, the motion performance is not limited to being performed on a part of the plurality of performance symbols 70a for which the fluctuation performance has been completed, but also for performing the motion performance on a part of the plurality of performance symbols 70a for which the fluctuation performance has been completed. The motion performance may not be executed in the remaining part of the performance pattern 70a.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE, which constitute the decoration section, perform a fluctuating motion (production motion). Only one of them may be made to perform a fluctuating motion (acting motion).

When a command from the performance control board 130 is missed, it is preferable to perform a performance in which a hold display (for example, a hold icon) is activated.

When a command from the performance control board 130 is missed, it is preferable to perform a performance in which a hold display (for example, a hold icon) is activated.

When the production control board 130 fails to receive commands, it is preferable to continue changing the special symbol TZ.

When the variable performance of the performance pattern 70a is started based on a normal command after a command from the performance control board 130 is missed, even if the numerical information of the performance pattern 70a and the numerical information of the special pattern TZ are different. good.

Further, in this embodiment, the frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 76 are not mentioned during the extension of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, but the frame illumination device 76 is not mentioned during the extension of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a. At least one of the plurality of light emitting units 10 may be set in the same manner as during the temporary stop before the extension (emission mode with lower brightness than during fluctuation, light emission mode with less change or movement than during fluctuation). , at least one of the plurality of light emitting parts constituting the board lighting device 76 is set in the same light emission mode as during temporary stop before extension (light emission mode with lower brightness than during fluctuation, light emission with less change or movement than during fluctuation) mode, lights out). In this case, when the next start command is received, the frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 76 change (switch) to a light emission mode corresponding to the fluctuation.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the production pattern 70a in the losing mode stops, the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), but the special symbol TZ has the same number as the production pattern 70a. The actual stop may be performed in a manner of failure. In addition, when the production pattern 70a in the jackpot mode stops, the special symbol TZ stops in a predetermined jackpot mode ("333"), but the special symbol TZ stops in the jackpot mode with the same number as the production pattern 70a. It may be stopped.

In addition, in this embodiment, the start time commands (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern When the production control unit 130m receives the specified command), the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol continue to be displayed in a variable manner, but as with the production symbol 70a, they are momentarily derived and displayed, and then the variable display is started. You may start it. In this case, regarding the special symbol TZ, it is preferable to display the special symbol TZ that is shifted from the predetermined stopping position at the stopping position.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a start command or a customer waiting state designation command is received while the icon TH is displayed, the icon TH is erased with one frame of non-animation, but when the icon TH is stopped It only needs to be shorter than 10 frames required for erasing the icon TH based on reception of a command, 20 frames required for shift display of the pending icon T, and 10 frames required for additional display of the pending icon. You may also do so.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, if a start command is received while displaying a number of pending icons greater than the number of pending icons, the excess pending icon T1 is erased with one frame of non-animation. The number of frames may be shorter than 10 frames required for erasing the icon T1 based on reception of the stop command, 20 frames required for shift display of the hold icon HI, and 10 frames required for additional display of the hold icon, for example, 5 frames. It may be erased with a minute animation.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the performance control unit 130m receives a start command that makes the number of reservations a predetermined number, the performance control unit 130m stores (understands) the number of reservations and the number of reservations notified from the main control unit 110m. If there is an inconsistency due to a command error (an error where the number is the same, an error where there is a deviation in the increasing direction) between the number of pending and Although a predetermined number of pending icons are displayed after the display, the predetermined number of pending icons may be displayed without displaying the pending icons that are one more than the predetermined number.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the performance control unit 130m receives a start command that makes the number of reservations a predetermined number, the performance control unit 130m stores (understands) the number of reservations and the number of reservations notified from the main control unit 110m. If there is an inconsistency due to a command error (an error where the number is the same, an error where there is a deviation in the increasing direction) with the number of pending commands, the command is executed in response to the reception of this start command. Although the icon is displayed during the fluctuating performance, the icon may not be displayed during the fluctuating performance that is executed in response to reception of the start command.

In addition, in this embodiment, the normal icon is the CD icon regardless of the type of performance mode, but the form (shape, color, etc.) of the normal icon may be changed depending on the type of performance mode or gaming state. good. In this case, the special icon may be a character icon regardless of the type of performance mode, or the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon may be changed depending on the type of performance mode or game state.

In addition, when changing the form (shape, color, etc.) of the normal icon depending on the type of production mode or game state, the operation mode (performance movement mode) during the variable production should be made different depending on the form of the normal icon. Good too. Furthermore, even when changing the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon depending on the type of performance mode or game state, the operation mode (performance operation mode) during the variable performance can be changed depending on the form of the special icon. Good too.

In addition, in this embodiment, only the special icon was displayed as a result of the icon change effect, but special icons that suggest a change to a special icon (displayed in the process of changing to a special icon) and specific A specific icon indicating that a reach effect (for example, an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect) is to be executed may be provided. In this case, it is preferable to make the form and presentation operation of the special icon or specific icon different from the form and presentation operation of the normal icon or special icon.

In addition, in this embodiment, the pending icon is displayed when both the reserved number designation command and the prefetch designation command are received as commands at the time of winning a prize, but when the reserved number designation command is received, The hold icon may be displayed if the command is not received normally, but the hold icon may not be displayed if the read-ahead designation command is normally received without the hold count specification command being received normally. Or vice versa. Note that when displaying a pending icon by receiving only one of the pending number designation command and the prefetch designation command, the icon change effect for this pending icon may not be executed.

Further, in this embodiment, the performance mode cannot be changed by operating the performance button 17 by the player, but the performance mode may be changed by operating the performance button 17. In this case, during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a based on the command abnormality in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, no operation for changing the production mode is accepted, that is, the production button 17 It is preferable to restrict changes in the production mode based on the operation.

Further, in this embodiment, the hold icon change effect is executed without operating the effect button 17, but the hold icon is displayed as a button icon that prompts the operation of the effect button 17, and An operation change effect may be executed in which the button icon is changed to any one of a normal icon, a special icon, and a specific icon in response to the effect button 17 being operated while the button icon is displayed. . In this case, in the operation change production, the production button 17 is changed at a predetermined rate from the first operation mode (non-vibration, non-protruding state in the standby position) to the second operation mode (vibration, protrusion state in the production position) You can do it like this. In this case, the rate at which the production button 17 changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the operation change production is higher than the rate at which the production button 17 changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the dialogue preview production or final production. It is better to make the rate of change higher.

In addition, in this embodiment, the only operation part for performing the operation performance (line preview performance, final performance) is the performance button 17, but an operation part such as a performance lever is provided separately from the performance button 17, for example. During the validity period that occurs during the SP reach performance, an operation promotion performance that prompts the operation of the performance button 17 or the performance lever is executed, and an operation performance (decision performance, etc.) is executed in response to the operation of the performance button 17 or the performance lever. You can. In this case, the deciding performance in the SP reach performance that can only be executed in a specific gaming state (time saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state) is better than the case where the SP reaching performance that can only be performed in the normal gaming state is executed. An operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 may be executed at a low rate (less likely to be executed).

Further, in this embodiment, during the execution period of the reach effect, the operation preview effect indicating the expectation level that the jackpot game will be executed in response to the operation of the activated effect button 17 is not executed. The operation preview performance may be executed in the first half period (for example, during the normal reach performance) and the second half period (for example, during the SP reach performance) of the reach performance. In this case, the operation preview performance performed during the second half of the reach performance is better than the operation preview performance performed during the first half of the reach performance when the performance button 17 is in the second operation mode (vibration, movement to the performance position). ) should be set so that the ratio becomes high.

Further, in the present embodiment, the expectation level of the preview in the jackpot preview performance and the movement of the movable member are not linked, but the expectation level of the preview in the jackpot preview performance may be linked to the movement of the movable member. In this case, while the fluctuating effect is being executed, the movable member moves more when a preview effect with high jackpot expectations is executed than when a preview effect with low jackpot expectations is executed. It is better to make the ratio higher (easier to operate).

In the present embodiment, the first image display device 70 displays a pending icon T1 (T2) in a pending icon display area 70B (70C) and displays a pending number in a pending number display area 70E (70F) as pending storage. There is. In this way, in the pending icon display area 70B (70C), the number of pending items is displayed based on the number of displayed pending icons T1 (T2), and in the pending number display area 70E (70F), the number of pending items is displayed based on the numerical information of the pending number. it's shown. The hold icon T1 (T2) is not limited to a single picture, diagram, character, or symbol like the "CD" shape of this embodiment, but may be a combination of multiple pictures, diagrams, characters, symbols, etc. It is possible to adopt an appropriate structure, such as adding effects, decorations, etc. to main parts such as figures, characters, and symbols.

The display of the number of pending icons, such as the display of pending icon changes, is not limited to changing by the pending icon alone, but can also be displayed by changing the number due to the actions of other characters or the actions of characters, etc. good. Note that the change in the hold icon change effect is not limited to the timing of the specific example described above.

As a pre-reading effect (advance notification) using text display, we have given an example in which the text "ZONE" scrolls horizontally, but text display is not limited to meaningful character strings, but may also include symbols, pictures, diagrams, or the like. It may be a combination with. Alternatively, a plurality of character displays may be provided, and the selected character display may be different depending on the level of expectation. The character display is not limited to scrolling left and right, but can be in any suitable manner that attracts the player's attention, such as zooming in or out, panning or tilting.

As a pre-reading effect (advance notification) based on the expectation level display, we have given a color effect, exemplifying a blue effect image EF, but it is not limited to color effects, for example, a light emitting effect such as a halo, a black Appropriate displays such as effects such as being sucked in like a hole or wind blowing can be adopted. Moreover, the expectation level display is not limited to being performed accompanying the performance pattern 70a or on the performance pattern 70a itself, but may be displayed on a background display or otherwise. Furthermore, the expectation level display is not limited to displaying on the first image display device 70, but can also be performed by displaying on the game board an accessory, a light emitting device, a prize winning device such as a starting hole, or an accessory or a light emitting device provided on a game slot. This may also be done by emitting light such as.

The pre-read performance (advance notification) based on the expectation level display may be a performance that is performed only before the reach, or a performance that is performed after the reach. Moreover, when the expectation level display is performed after reaching, it may be displayed continuously in the mode before reaching, or may be changed so as to be displayed in a mode different from the mode before reaching.

The pre-reading effect (advance notification) may be a variable effect or progress at an appropriate timing according to the drawn scenario, but for each variable effect, there are various factors such as whether or not it will proceed and whether or not the expectation level needs to change. It is also possible to conduct a lottery and proceed according to the result.

Examples of effects include color effects, such as a design effect image ZE that decorates the background of a character and a blue effect image EF, but they are not limited to color effects; for example, a halo shines. Appropriate displays can be adopted, such as a light emitting effect such as this, or an action effect such as being sucked in like a black hole or wind blowing.

In the present embodiment, a specific example has been described in which the icon TH is not displayed when the production control unit 130m returns from a predetermined state in which the command cannot be received normally. When the icon TH is received and returned, the icon TH may be displayed and then deleted.

Similar to the production control section 130m described above, if the first special symbol reservation display 63 cannot normally receive a command (signal) from the main control section 110m, the reservation displayed on the first special symbol reservation display 63 A predetermined state may occur in which the number and the number of reservations grasped (stored) by the production control unit 130m deviate from each other.
That is, the first special symbol retention display 63 (first display means) can execute a first shift display in which the retention memory is sequentially decreased by one each time a variable performance is started, and the performance control unit 130m In a state where there is a predetermined number of pending memories (for example, four), if a command (signal) for a specific number of pending memories (for example, two) that is two or more smaller than the predetermined number is received from the main control unit 110m, the It is possible to perform a second shift display in which the number of reserved memories is reduced from a predetermined number to a specific number in a reduction mode different from the first shift display (a mode in which the number of pending memories is directly reduced from four to two without going through three). On the other hand, the first image display device 70 (second display means) controlled by the production control unit 130m is configured to display the production symbols regardless of whether the first shift display or the second shift display is executed. Each time the variable performance of 70a is finished, the reserved memory can be sequentially decreased one by one.
According to this, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In a specific example, the suspended memory stored (understood) by the production control unit can be displayed at a plurality of locations. In this embodiment, the pending icon display area 70B (70
D) and the pending number display area 70E (70F), the pending memory is displayed in two places, for example,
The reserved memory may be displayed on each of the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71, or at a plurality of locations on the second image display device 71.

In a specific example, in the hold icon display area 70B (70D), it is possible to perform a first shift display in which the hold memory is sequentially decreased by one each time a variable effect is started. In this first shift display, for example, the hold icon T1 (T2) is displayed so as to be shifted one by one each time a variable performance is performed. In addition, in a state where, for example, four pending icons T1 (T2) are displayed in the pending icon display area 70B (70D), if the production control unit 130m receives a command corresponding to, for example, two pending memories, A display similar to the first shift display in which the number of icons T1 (T2) shifts from 4 to 3 and then decreases to 3 and then shifts from 3 to 2 is not displayed, and the pending icon T1 (T2) is displayed. After the fourth item disappears, a second shift display is performed in which the number shifts from three to two. On the other hand, in the pending number display area 70E (70F) that displays pending memory using pending numbers (numeric information), the pending numbers are displayed so as to decrease one by one each time a variable effect is started. There is. For example, in a state where the pending number "4" is displayed in the pending number display area 70E (70F), if the production control unit 130m receives a command corresponding to two pending memories (the second shift display is not executed). (in the case of holding digits), instead of displaying a display that sequentially decreases the pending digits one by one, a third shift display is performed that displays the pending digit ``2'' corresponding to two pending memories, for example, from the pending digit ``4.'' It has become.

As a look-ahead performance (advance notification), by executing a related performance during a part of a period of each variable performance in a plurality of variable performances, it is announced that the level of expectation for the special game is high based on undetermined pending memory. What you suggest is doable. "Related effects" include various effects, such as movements and light emitting effects of role objects set on the game frame and game board, movements such as vibration of operation buttons and light emitting, chance eyes of the same color on the effect pattern 70a, etc. Even if the same performance is performed in each variable performance, the content of the performance may be different for each variable performance, such as executing a different performance that increases the level of expectation as the variable performance is repeated.

When a predetermined state occurs in which the pending memory displayed on the first image display device 70 does not increase or decrease even though the pending memory increases or decreases in the main control unit 110m, the effect related to the prefetch effect (advance notification) is continued. It doesn't matter if it is executed or not. In such a case, the player's interest can be attracted by continuing to perform related effects. Further, by not continuously executing related performances, consistency of performances can be maintained.

For example, when a predetermined state is resolved and becomes normal based on a pending memory stored after the target memory, it is possible to prevent the prefetch performance based on the target pending memory from being executed from the continuation of the related performance. In addition, a performance related to the look-ahead performance based on the target pending memory (for example, performing a large movement performance of the first movable member 73) is replaced with another related performance (for example, the first movable member 73) that has lower expectations than the related performance. It may be changed to (reducing the motion effect of the member 73). Furthermore, the performance related to the prefetch performance based on the target pending memory may be deleted.

For example, when the predetermined state is resolved and becomes normal based on the pending memory stored before the target storage, the prefetch performance based on the target pending memory can be executed from the continuation of the related performance. In this case, the player's sense of expectation can be improved by continuing the look-ahead performance.

For example, when the predetermined state is resolved and becomes normal based on the pending memory stored before the target storage, it is possible to prevent the prefetch performance based on the target pending memory from being executed from the continuation of the related performance. In this case, consistency of presentation can be maintained.

(Inspection mode of main control board 130)
For example, in a conventional gaming machine such as that disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2018-118109, a drive source is operated to convert the big prize opening and starting opening from a closed state to an open state under the control of a main control board. ing. However, in conventional game machines, when replacing the game board at a game parlor or replacing the game board that makes up the front side of the game board, the drive source that operates under the control of the main control board does not generate an activation trigger. However, there is a problem in that it is difficult to verify the operation of these drive sources.
Therefore, the gaming machine 1 shown in FIGS. 134 to 138 has a drive source (big prize opening SOL, starting opening SOL, V distribution SOL) whose operation is controlled by the main control board 110 as a result of the game, and the main control The board 110 is configured to initially operate the drive source in a predetermined manner in a pre-start state after power supply is started and before transition to a playable state in which the game is controlled.
As a result, during a certain period limited to the state before the start of the game (pre-start state), the special electric accessory, the normal electric accessory, and the distribution mechanism in the grand prize opening are operated and the operation is confirmed, and the installation is confirmed. Also, inspection and confirmation after parts replacement can be performed more reliably.

As shown in FIG. 134, when a setting change device is installed, a pre-start state is a certain period after the end of setting change or setting confirmation. In this case, RWM clear preparation is in progress.

As shown in FIG. 135, if a setting change device is not installed, power is turned on while pressing the RWM clear switch 111a, and a certain period after pressing the RWM clear switch 111a again is set as the pre-start state. . In this case, there is no RWM clear preparation in progress.

As shown in FIG. 136, if a setting change device is not installed, the pre-start state is a certain period after the power is turned on while pressing the RWM clear switch 111a. In this case, after transitioning to the pre-start state, for example, after 7 seconds have elapsed, turn on (for example, 0.512 seconds) and turn off (for example, 0.512 seconds) each solenoid of the mechanism that affects the result of the game, for example, three times. It is best to move to the playable state after doing so.

As shown in FIG. 137, when a setting change device is installed, the pre-start state is when settings are being changed or settings are being confirmed.

As shown in FIG. 138, if a setting change device is not installed, the pre-start state is the period from when the power is turned on while pressing the RWM clear switch 111a until when the RWM clear switch 111a is pressed again. In this case, when the state shifts to the pre-start state, each solenoid of the mechanism that affects the result of the game is turned ON (for example, 0.512 seconds) and OFF (for example, 0.512 seconds) by pressing the RWM clear switch 111a to return to the game ready state. You may want to repeat this until the transition is complete. Note that in this case, RWM clear preparation is in progress.

During the above-mentioned pre-start state, the prize balls are paid out when the game ball enters the winning slot, the special symbol display device or the special electric accessory is activated when the game ball enters the starting slot, and the normal state of the game ball. The operation of the normal symbol display device or the operation of the normal electric accessory due to passing through the gate related to the operation of the symbol display device or winning a prize in the winning slot will be invalidated. On the other hand, during the pre-start state, the firing permission signal is output immediately after the power is turned on, so the firing of game balls is not invalidated. Further, in the pre-start state, it is preferable to turn off (not display) the performance display monitor.

During the pre-start state described above, the payout of prize balls backed up on the payout board is not invalidated. Further, while the big winning opening is open in the pre-start state, the opening signal is not output from the game information output terminal board. It is preferable that a power-on/power recovery command is sent when the game mode is transitioned to the playable state, and the initial operation of the gimmick is performed after the game mode is transitioned to the game mode. Then, during the operation of the big winning hole solenoid in the pre-start state, it is preferable that the big winning hole LED etc. do not emit light like during a jackpot.

It is preferable that the performance display monitor turns on all lights for, for example, 5 seconds after the inspection mode ends, and then displays the base value. Further, it is preferable to stop firing in a state "other than power recovery" (state before start, during an unrecoverable error).

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a slave control means that controls the performance of the game based on signals (commands) from the main control means. (performance control section 130m), the main control means (main control section 110m) stores a reservation memory based on the establishment of a starting condition (game ball winning in the starting openings 45, 47). Is it possible and controllable to display the reserved memory on the first display means (special symbol reserved display devices 63, 64), and perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory? The slave control means (effect control section 130m) controls the suspended memory to be displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to perform a fluctuating performance of the performance symbol (70a) on the second display means, and the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to perform a first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3) in which the number of reserved memories is sequentially decreased by one each time the program is started, and in a state where a predetermined number (for example, 4) of reserved memories are displayed. , when the slave control means receives from the main control means a signal of pending storage of a specific number (e.g., two) less than a predetermined number by two or more, the first shift display (e.g., from four to three); is capable of executing a second shift display (for example, from 4 to 2) that reduces the number of pending memories from the predetermined number to the specific number in a different reduction manner, and the first display means (special symbol pending display 63, 64) ) is suspended every time the determination is completed, regardless of whether the first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3) or the second shift display (for example, from 4 to 2) is executed. It is characterized in that it is possible to display the memory in decreasing order one by one.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store the reservation memory based on the first display means (special symbol reservation display 6).
3, 64), and it is possible to determine whether or not to perform a special game (big win) advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory. 130m) can be controlled to display the reserved memory on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the second display means (first image display device 70, A second image display device 71) can perform a fluctuating performance of the design, and the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can hold the fluctuating performance each time the fluctuating performance is started. It is possible to perform a first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3) in which the memories are sequentially decreased one by one, and in a state where a predetermined number (for example, 4) of reserved memories are displayed, the slave control means ( When the production control unit 130m) receives a signal for suspending storage of a specific number (for example, two) that is two or more smaller than a predetermined number (for example, four) from the main control means (main control unit 110m), the first a second shift display (e.g., from 4 to 2) that reduces the number of reserved memories from the predetermined number (e.g., 4) to the specific number (e.g., 2) in a reduction manner different from the shift display (e.g., from 4 to 3); ) and that the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the first display means (special symbol retention displays 63, 64) change the number from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2). The number of pending memories displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is the predetermined number (e.g. Even in a predetermined state in which the number of symbols does not decrease from 4 pieces to the specific number (for example 2 pieces), the advance notification can be continued and executed, and the first display means (special symbol reservation display devices 63 and 64) Regardless of whether the first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3 pieces) or the second shift display (for example, from 4 to 2 pieces) is executed, each time the determination is completed, the suspended memory is It is characterized in that it is possible to display decreasing values one by one in order.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a reservation memory based on the reservation memory, and control the reservation memory to be displayed on the first display means (special symbol reservation display devices 63, 64), and to play a special game advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory. The subordinate control means (performance control section 130m) displays the reserved memory on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). The second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can perform a fluctuating effect of the effect design, The first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71) are capable of performing a first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3) in which the number of pending memories is sequentially decreased by one each time the variable effect is started. , in a state where a predetermined number (for example, four) of suspended memories are displayed, the slave control means (effect control unit 130m) displays a specific number (for example, two) that is two or more smaller than the predetermined number (for example, four). When a signal of pending storage is received from the main control means (main control unit 110m), the pending storage is changed to the predetermined number (for example, 4) in a decreasing manner different from the first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3). ) to the specific number (for example, 2) can be executed (for example, from 4 to 2), and it is possible to perform a second shift display (for example, from 4 to 2), indicating that the expectation level for the special game is high based on the undetermined pending memory. The suggested advance notification can be executed by a background display (for example, a change to a look-ahead zone background) displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the first display The means (special symbol retention display devices 63, 64) display the second display means during a period in which the retention memory is displayed to decrease by one from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2). Even if the pending memories displayed on the (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) are in a predetermined state in which they do not decrease from the predetermined number (for example, four) to the specific number (for example, two), the Pre-article notification can be continuously executed, and the first display means (special symbol holding display devices 63, 64) display the first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3 symbols) and the second shift display (for example, from 4 to 3 symbols). 4 to 2) is executed, each time the determination is completed, the number of pending memories can be displayed in order to decrease by one.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a reservation memory based on the reservation memory, and control the reservation memory to be displayed on the first display means (special symbol reservation display devices 63, 64), and to play a special game advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory. The subordinate control means (performance control section 130m) displays the reserved memory on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). The second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can perform a fluctuating effect of the effect design, The first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71) are capable of performing a first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3) in which the number of pending memories is sequentially decreased by one each time the variable effect is started. , in a state where a predetermined number (for example, four) of suspended memories are displayed, the slave control means (effect control unit 130m) displays a specific number (for example, two) that is two or more smaller than the predetermined number (for example, four). When a signal of pending storage is received from the main control means (main control unit 110m), the pending storage is changed to the predetermined number (for example, 4) in a decreasing manner different from the first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3). ) to the specific number (for example, 2) can be executed (for example, from 4 to 2), and it is possible to perform a second shift display (for example, from 4 to 2), indicating that the expectation level for the special game is high based on the undetermined pending memory. The suggested advance notification can be executed by a character display (for example, "ZONE" telop) displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the first display means ( In the special symbol retention display (63, 64), the second display means (the Even if the number of pending memories displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 is in a predetermined state in which the predetermined number (for example, four) does not decrease to the specific number (for example, two), the predetermined The notification can be executed continuously, and the first display means (special symbol holding display devices 63, 64) display the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3 symbols) and the second shift display (for example, 4 symbols). 2) is executed, each time the determination is completed, the number of pending memories can be sequentially decreased by one.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a reservation memory based on the reservation memory, and control the reservation memory to be displayed on the first display means (special symbol reservation display devices 63, 64), and to play a special game advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory. The subordinate control means (performance control section 130m) displays the reserved memory on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). The second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can perform a fluctuating effect of the effect design based on the undetermined pending memory. It is possible to perform advance notification suggesting that the level of expectation for the special game is high by displaying the level of expectation (for example, a look-ahead effect), and the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 70, second image display The device 71) is capable of executing a first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3) in which the number of pending memories is sequentially decreased by one each time the variable effect is started, and is capable of displaying a predetermined number of pending memories (for example, 4). In the state where the memories are being displayed, the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) sends a signal of a specific number (for example, two) of reserved memories that is two or more less than a predetermined number (for example, four) to the main control means. (main control unit 110m), the pending storage is changed from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2) in a decreasing manner different from the first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3). It is possible to perform a second shift display (for example, from 4 to 2), and the first display means (special symbol holding display 63, 64) displays the predetermined number (for example, 4)
displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) during a period in which the pending memory is displayed to decrease by one from the specific number (for example, 2 pieces) to the specific number (for example, 2 pieces). Even in a predetermined state in which the number of pending memories is not reduced from the predetermined number (for example, four) to the specific number (for example, two), the advance notification can be continuously performed, and the first display means ( The special symbol reservation display 63, 64) is used to display the first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3 symbols) or the second shift display (for example, from 4 to 2 symbols), The present invention is characterized in that each time the determination is completed, the number of pending memories can be sequentially decreased one by one.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a reservation memory based on the reservation memory, and control the reservation memory to be displayed on the first display means (special symbol reservation display devices 63, 64), and to play a special game advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory. The subordinate control means (performance control section 130m) displays the reserved memory on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). At the same time, the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can perform variable effects of the effect symbols, and each of the plurality of variable effects By performing a related performance (for example, a movement performance of the first movable member 73) during a part of the variable performance, it is possible to create a preliminary game that suggests that the level of expectation for the special game is high based on undetermined pending memory. The second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can perform a first shift to sequentially decrease the pending memory by one each time the variable effect is started. In a state in which display (for example, from 4 to 3) is possible and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of suspended memories are being displayed, the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) displays a predetermined number (for example, 4) of suspended memories. ), when a specific number (e.g., two) of pending storage signals is received from the main control means (main control unit 110m), the first shift display (e.g., from four to three) A second shift display (for example, from 4 to 2) that reduces the number of reserved memories from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2) in a different reduction manner, and the first display means (Special symbol holding display 63, 64) is displayed regardless of whether the first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3 pieces) or the second shift display (for example, from 4 to 2 pieces) is executed. , each time the determination is completed, the reserved memory can be sequentially decreased by one, and the slave control means (performance control section 130m) can display a display in the first display means (special symbol retention display 63, 64). Despite the increase/decrease in the pending memory, a predetermined state occurs in which the pending memory displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease, and the target of the prior notification is When the predetermined state is resolved based on a pending memory stored after the target pending memory that has become , the advance notification is not performed from the continuation of the related performance (for example, the motion performance of the first movable member 73, etc.) It is characterized by

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a reservation memory based on the reservation memory, and control the reservation memory to be displayed on the first display means (special symbol reservation display devices 63, 64), and to play an advantageous special game (jackpot) based on the reservation memory. The slave control means (effect control section 130m) displays the suspended memory on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). The second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can perform a fluctuating effect of the effect design (70a), and the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can control The first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71) are capable of performing a first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3) in which the number of pending memories is sequentially decreased by one each time the variable effect is started. , in a state where a predetermined number (for example, four) of suspended memories are displayed, the slave control means (effect control unit 130m) displays a specific number (for example, two) that is two or more smaller than the predetermined number (for example, four). When a signal of pending storage is received from the main control means (main control unit 110m), the pending storage is changed from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2) in a decreasing manner different from the first shift display. A second shift display (for example, from four to two) can be performed to reduce the number of pending memories (for example, from four to two), and the number of pending memories can be displayed by numerical information, and when the second shift display is performed, the numerical information It is possible to execute a third shift display (for example, from 4 to 2) that displays the numerical information corresponding to the specific number (for example, 2) of pending storage without displaying a display in which the number is sequentially decreased one by one; The first display means (special symbol holding display devices 63, 64) is used when either of the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3 symbols) or the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2 symbols) is executed. Even if the determination is completed, the number of pending memories can be displayed in order to decrease by one each time the determination is completed.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a reservation memory based on the reservation memory, and control the reservation memory to be displayed on the first display means (special symbol reservation display devices 63, 64), and to play a special game advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory. The subordinate control means (performance control section 130m) displays the reserved memory on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). The second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can perform a fluctuating effect of the effect design, The first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71) are capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, customer waiting demonstration effect) when there is no pending memory after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, and It is possible to execute a first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3) in which the number of pending memories is sequentially decreased by one each time a variable effect is started, and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of pending memories are displayed. In this state, the slave control means (effect control section 130m) sends a signal for holding storage of a specific number (for example, two) that is two or more smaller than a predetermined number (for example, four) to the main control means (main control section 110m). , a second shift that reduces the number of pending memories from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2) in a reduction manner different from the first shift indication (for example, from 4 to 3). It is possible to display (for example, from 4 to 2 pieces), and the first display means (special symbol holding display devices 63, 64) can hold the predetermined number of pieces (for example, 4 pieces) to the specific number (for example, 2 pieces). The number of pending memories displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) decreases from the predetermined number (for example, four) during the period in which the memories are displayed to decrease by one. When in a predetermined state in which the number does not decrease to the specific number (for example, 2), the effect pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, and even if a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable effect, Without executing the performance (for example, customer waiting demonstration performance), the first display means (special symbol holding display devices 63, 64) displays the first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3 symbols) and the second shift display (for example, from 4 to 3 symbols). For example, regardless of whether any of the above determinations (from 4 to 2) is executed, each time the determination is completed, the number of pending memories can be displayed in order to decrease by one.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to perform a fluctuating performance of the performance symbol (70a) in the , and advance notification (e.g., background display, character display, expectation level display) that suggests that the level of expectation for the special game is high based on undetermined pending memory. etc.), and even though the reserved memory increases or decreases in the main control means (main control unit 110m), the display on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is possible. When a predetermined state occurs in which the suspended memory does not increase or decrease, the effect pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the target of the advance notification When the predetermined state is resolved based on a pending memory stored after the target pending memory that has become, the advance notification based on the target pending memory is not continuously executed. Performing one of the following: changing the advance notice to another advance notice having a lower level of expectation than the advance notice; and deleting the advance notice based on the target pending memory. It is characterized by

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means can display (the first image display device 70, second image display device 71) ) The display means (first image display device 70 , second image display device 71), and the display means (2nd image display device 71) can be executed by a background display (for example, a prefetch zone background). When a predetermined state occurs in which the pending memory displayed on the first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease, the effect pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the previous When the pre-notification can be continuously executed and the predetermined state is resolved based on a pending memory stored after the target pending memory that was the target of the prior notification, the pre-notification based on the target pending memory is Not continuing to execute the previous article notification, changing the previous notification based on the target pending memory to another preliminary notification with a lower expectation level than the previous notification, and It is characterized by performing one of the following: erasing the pre-article notification.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) The display means (first image display device 70 , second image display device 71), and even though the reserved memory increases or decreases in the main control means (main control unit 110m), the display means When a predetermined state occurs in which the pending memory displayed on the screen does not increase or decrease, the effect pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the advance notice can be continuously executed, and the advance notice can be continued. The target pending memory does not continue to execute the preliminary notification based on the target pending memory when the predetermined state is resolved based on a pending memory stored after the target pending memory that is the target of notification. any one of changing the advance notice based on the prior notice to another advance notice having a lower expectation level than the advance notice; and deleting the advance notice based on the target pending memory. It is characterized by doing the following.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to execute a variable performance of the performance symbol (70a) in the , and a prior notification indicating that the degree of expectation for the special game is high based on undetermined pending memory is provided by displaying the degree of expectation (for example, a look-ahead effect performance). The pending memory that is executable and displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) despite the increase and decrease of the pending memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m) When a predetermined state in which the number does not increase or decrease occurs, the production pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the target of the advance notification is When the predetermined state is resolved based on a pending memory stored after the target pending memory, the prior notification based on the target pending memory is not continuously executed. It is characterized by performing one of the following: changing the notification to another advance notification with a lower expectation level than the prior announcement; and deleting the advance notification based on the target pending memory. do.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to perform a fluctuating performance of the performance symbol (70a) in a plurality of fluctuating performances, and by performing a related performance (for example, the operation of the first movable member 73) during a part of the period of each fluctuating performance, undetermined It is possible to execute advance notification suggesting that the degree of expectation for the special game is high based on the pending memory of When a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease, the production pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, The advance notification can be executed continuously, and when the predetermined state is resolved based on the pending memory stored after the target pending memory that was the target of the advance notification, the predetermined state can be executed based on the target pending memory. The performance related to the advance notification based on the target pending memory (for example, the operation of the first movable member 73) is not executed from the continuation of the performance related to the advance notification (for example, the movement of the first movable member 73). any one of changing the related performance to another related performance with lower expectations than the related performance, and erasing the related performance of the advance notification based on the target retention memory. It is characterized by doing.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to perform a fluctuating performance of the performance symbol (70a) in the , and advance notification (e.g., background display, character display, expectation level display) that suggests that the level of expectation for the special game is high based on undetermined pending memory. ) can be executed and displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) despite the increase or decrease of the reserved memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m). When a predetermined state occurs in which the suspended memory does not increase or decrease, the effect pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the target of the advance notification is When returning from the predetermined state based on a pending memory stored after the target pending memory that has become, the previous article based on the target pending memory does not continue to execute the advance notification based on the target pending memory. Performing one of the following: changing the previous notification to another notification with a lower expectation level than the previous notification, and deleting the previous notification based on the target pending memory, and displaying the The means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) executes a first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3) that sequentially decreases the number of pending memories by one each time the variable effect is started. is possible, and in a state where the slave control means (presentation control unit 130m) has a predetermined number (for example, four) of pending memories, the slave control means (presentation control unit 130m) has a predetermined number (for example, four). When a signal of a specific number (for example, two) of pending storage that is two or more fewer is received from the main control means (main control unit 110m), the reduction mode is different from the first shift display (for example, from four to three). A second shift display (for example, from 4 to 2) can be executed to reduce the number of reserved memories from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2), and the number of reserved memories can be reduced by numerical information. If display is possible and the second shift display is executed, the numerical information corresponding to the specific number (for example, 2) of pending storage is displayed without sequentially decreasing the numerical information one by one. It is characterized in that it is possible to execute a third shift display (for example, from 4 to 2).

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) Advance notification (e.g., background display, character display, expectation level display) that suggests that it is possible to perform a fluctuating performance of the performance symbol (70a) and that expectations for the special game are high based on undetermined pending memory. and when there is no pending memory after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the display means can execute a predetermined effect (for example, a customer waiting demonstration effect), and the main control means (main control means) When a predetermined state occurs in which the pending memory displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease even though the pending memory increases or decreases in the control unit 110m), the While the production pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, the advance notification can be continuously executed, and when the predetermined state occurs, the production pattern can be displayed in a temporary stop state. In addition, the predetermined performance (e.g., customer waiting demonstration performance) is not executed even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, and the pending memory is stored after the target pending memory that is the target of the advance notification. When the predetermined state is resolved based on the predetermined state, the prior notification based on the target pending memory is not continuously executed, and the prior notification based on the target pending memory is set to have a higher expectation level than the prior notification. The method is characterized in that one of the following is performed: changing to another advance notice with a lower value, and erasing the advance notice based on the target pending storage.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) Advance notification (e.g., background display, character display, expectation level display) that suggests that it is possible to perform a fluctuating performance of the performance symbol (70a) and that expectations for the special game are high based on undetermined pending memory. can be executed, and even though the hold storage increases or decreases in the main control means (main control unit 110m), the hold displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) When a predetermined state in which the memory does not increase or decrease occurs, the production pattern can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the target that was the target of the advance notification is suspended. When the predetermined state is resolved based on the pending memory prior to storage, the advance notification based on the target pending memory can be continuously executed.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) Advance notification (e.g., background display, character display, expectation level display) that suggests that it is possible to perform a fluctuating performance of the performance symbol (70a) and that expectations for the special game are high based on undetermined pending memory. can be executed, and even though the hold storage increases or decreases in the main control means (main control unit 110m), the hold displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) When a predetermined state occurs in which the memory does not increase or decrease, the effect pattern can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the target that was the target of the advance notification is suspended. It is characterized in that when the predetermined state is resolved based on the pending memory before storage, the advance notification based on the target pending memory is not continuously executed.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) A background display (e.g. The display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can be executed by When a predetermined state occurs in which the displayed pending memory does not increase or decrease, the effect pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously performed, and the advance notification can be performed continuously. When the predetermined state is resolved based on the pending memory prior to the target pending memory, the advance notification based on the target pending memory can be continuously performed.

◆The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the game machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of the game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) A background display (e.g. The display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can be executed by When a predetermined state occurs in which the displayed pending memory does not increase or decrease, the effect pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously performed, and the advance notification can be performed continuously. It is characterized in that when the predetermined state is resolved based on the pending memory prior to the targeted pending memory, the advance notification based on the target pending memory is not continuously executed.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) A text display (e.g. "ZONE" telop), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can be executed by the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), despite the increase and decrease of the reserved memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m). When a predetermined state occurs in which the pending memory displayed on the screen does not increase or decrease, the effect pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the advance notice can be continuously executed, and the advance notice can be continued. When the predetermined state is resolved based on the pending memory prior to the target pending memory that is the target of the notification, the advance notification based on the target pending memory can be continuously performed.

◆The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the game machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of the game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) A text display (e.g. "ZONE" telop), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can be executed by the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), despite the increase/decrease of the reserved memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m). When a predetermined state occurs in which the pending memory displayed in It is characterized in that when the predetermined state is resolved based on a pending memory prior to the target pending memory that is the target of notification, the preliminary notification based on the target pending memory is not continuously executed.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to execute a variable performance of the performance symbol (70a) in the , and a prior notification indicating that the degree of expectation for the special game is high based on undetermined pending memory is provided by displaying the degree of expectation (for example, a look-ahead effect performance). The pending memory that is executable and displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) despite the increase and decrease of the pending memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m) When a predetermined state in which the number does not increase or decrease occurs, the production pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the target of the advance notification is The present invention is characterized in that when the predetermined state is resolved based on the pending storage prior to the target pending storage, the advance notification based on the target pending storage can be continuously performed.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to execute a variable performance of the performance symbol (70a) in the , and a prior notification indicating that the degree of expectation for the special game is high based on undetermined pending memory is provided by displaying the degree of expectation (for example, a look-ahead effect performance). The pending memory that is executable and displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) despite the increase and decrease of the pending memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m) When a predetermined state in which the number does not increase or decrease occurs, the production pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the target of the advance notification is When the predetermined state is resolved based on the pending storage prior to the target pending storage, the advance notification based on the target pending storage is not continuously executed.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) A first advance notice (for example, a pending icon change presentation) that suggests that a variation presentation of the presentation symbol (70a) can be executed and that expectations for the special game are high based on undetermined pending memories; By executing a related performance (for example, a motion performance of the first movable member 73) during a part of the period of each variable performance in a plurality of variable performances, the degree of expectation for the special game based on undetermined pending memory is increased. The display means (first image display device 70, When a predetermined state occurs in which the pending memory displayed on the second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease, the second advance notification is continued while the production pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state. and when the predetermined state is resolved based on a pending memory prior to the target pending memory that is the target of the prior notification, the second preliminary notification based on the target pending memory is related. It is characterized in that it can be executed from the continuation of the performance (for example, the motion performance of the first movable member 73, etc.).

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) A first advance notice (for example, a pending icon change presentation) that suggests that a variation presentation of the presentation symbol (70a) can be executed and that expectations for the special game are high based on undetermined pending memories; By executing a related performance (for example, a motion performance of the first movable member 73) during a part of the period of each variable performance in a plurality of variable performances, the degree of expectation for the special game based on undetermined pending memory is increased. The display means (first image display device 70, When a predetermined state occurs in which the pending memory displayed on the second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease, the second advance notification is continued while the production pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state. and when the predetermined state is resolved based on a pending memory prior to the target pending memory that is the target of the prior notification, the second preliminary notification based on the target pending memory is related. It is characterized in that the performance (for example, the movement performance of the first movable member 73, etc.) is not executed from the continuation of the performance.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to perform a fluctuating performance of the performance symbols, and provide advance notice (for example, background display, text display, expectation level display, etc.) that suggests that the level of expectation for the special game is high based on undetermined pending memory. The pending memory that is executable and displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) despite the increase and decrease of the pending memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m) When a predetermined state in which the number does not increase or decrease occurs, the production pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the target of the advance notification is When the predetermined state is resolved based on the pending memory prior to the target pending memory, the advance notification (for example, background display, text display, expectation level display, etc.) based on the target pending memory can be continuously executed. The display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) includes a first shift display (for example, from four to 3), and in a state where the slave control means (effect control unit 130m) has a predetermined number (for example, four) of pending memories, the slave control means (presentation control unit 130m) can perform a predetermined number of operations (for example, four). When a signal for holding storage of a specific number (for example, 2 pieces) that is two or more smaller than 4 pieces is received from the main control means (main control unit 110m), the holding storage is stored in a decreasing manner different from the first shift display. It is possible to perform a second shift display (for example, from 4 to 2) that reduces the number of items from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2), and it is possible to display the number of reserved memories by numerical information. If the second shift display is executed, the numerical information is not displayed to be sequentially decreased one by one, but the numerical information corresponding to the specific number (for example, two) of pending storage is displayed. It is characterized by being able to perform 3-shift display (from 4 to 2).

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to perform a fluctuating performance of the performance symbols, and provide advance notice (for example, background display, text display, expectation level display, etc.) that suggests that the level of expectation for the special game is high based on undetermined pending memory. The pending memory that is executable and displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) despite the increase and decrease of the pending memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m) When a predetermined state in which the number does not increase or decrease occurs, the production pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the target of the advance notification is When the predetermined state is resolved based on the pending memory before the target pending memory, the advance notification (for example, background display, text display, expectation level display, etc.) based on the target pending memory is continuously executed. First, the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) displays a first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3) that sequentially decreases the number of pending memories by one each time the variable effect is started. in a state where the slave control means (performance control section 130m) has a predetermined number (for example, 4) of pending memories, the slave control means (performance control section 130m) can execute a predetermined number of operations (for example, 4). When receiving from the main control means (main control unit 110m) a signal of a specific number (for example, 2) of pending storage that is two or more fewer than the specified number (for example, 2), the pending storage is reduced in a manner different from the first shift display. It is possible to perform a second shift display (for example, from 4 to 2) to reduce the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2), and it is possible to display the number of reserved memories by numerical information. , when the second shift display is executed, the third shift display does not display the numerical information sequentially decreasing one by one, but displays the numerical information corresponding to the specific number (for example, two) of pending storage. It is characterized by being able to execute shift display (from 4 to 2).

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to perform a fluctuating performance of the performance symbol (70a) at , it is possible to perform advance notification suggesting that the level of expectation for the special game is high based on undetermined pending memory, and it is possible to perform a preliminary notification indicating that the level of expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined pending memory, and to start the fluctuating performance. If there is no pending memory after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since then, the display means can execute a predetermined performance (for example, a customer waiting demonstration performance), and even if the main control unit (main control unit 110m) increases or decreases the pending memory. Regardless, when a predetermined state occurs in which the pending memory displayed on the display means does not increase or decrease, the effect pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed. and when the predetermined state occurs, the predetermined effect (for example, customer waiting demonstration effect) is not executed even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, and the target is the target of the advance notification. When the predetermined state is resolved based on the pending storage prior to the pending storage, the advance notification based on the target pending storage can be continuously executed.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to perform a fluctuating performance of the performance symbol (70a) at , it is possible to perform advance notification suggesting that the level of expectation for the special game is high based on undetermined pending memory, and it is possible to perform a preliminary notification indicating that the level of expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined pending memory, and to start the fluctuating performance. If there is no pending memory after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since then, the display means can execute a predetermined performance (for example, a customer waiting demonstration performance), and even if the main control unit (main control unit 110m) increases or decreases the pending memory. Regardless, when a predetermined state occurs in which the pending memory displayed on the display means does not increase or decrease, the effect pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed. and when the predetermined state occurs, the predetermined effect (for example, customer waiting demonstration effect) is not executed even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, and the target is the target of the advance notification. When the predetermined state is resolved based on the pending storage prior to the pending storage, the advance notification based on the target pending storage is not continuously executed.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to execute a fluctuating effect of the effect design (70a) in the above-mentioned main control means (main control When a predetermined state occurs in which the number of pending memories of the signal transmitted from the part 110m) is different from the number of pending memories grasped by the slave control means (performance control part 130m), the production pattern (70a) is When the predetermined state occurs, the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can continue to display the suspended memory, and display the effect pattern ( 70a) is displayed in a temporarily stopped state, an effect production (for example, a pattern effect image ZE) can be performed on the production pattern (70a), and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of suspended memories are displayed. , the slave control means (effect control section 130m) sends a signal (command) for holding storage of a specific number (for example, two) that is two or more smaller than a predetermined number (for example, four) to the main control means (main control section 110m). ), the display effect to reduce the number of pending memories in stages is not performed for the number of discrepancies (for example, twice) between the specific number (for example, 4) and the predetermined number (for example, 2); It is characterized by displaying a predetermined number (for example, two) of pending memories.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to perform a fluctuating effect of the effect design (70a) in the above-mentioned main control means (main control When a predetermined state occurs in which the number of pending memories of the signal transmitted from the part 110m) is different from the number of pending memories grasped by the slave control means (performance control part 130m), the effect pattern (70a) is When the predetermined state occurs, the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) continues to display the suspended memory, and displays the effect pattern ( 70a) is displayed in a temporarily stopped state, it is possible to execute the movement performance of at least a part (for example, the bar-shaped image SG) of the decorative part of the performance pattern (70a), and to store a predetermined number (for example, 4) of the decorative parts in the suspended memory. In the displaying state, the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) controls the main control to send a signal (command) for holding storage of a specific number (for example, 2 pieces) that is two or more smaller than a predetermined number (for example, 4 pieces). When received from the means (main control unit 110m), a display effect that gradually reduces the number of pending memories is displayed by the number of discrepancies (for example, 2) between the specific number (for example, 4) and the predetermined number (for example, 2). The predetermined number (for example, 2) of the reserved memories are displayed without performing the above-mentioned number of times (for example, 2 times).

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) is configured to satisfy the starting condition (the landing of a game ball in the starting openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to perform a fluctuating effect of the effect design (70a) in the above-mentioned main control means (main control When a predetermined state occurs in which the number of pending memories of the signal transmitted from the part 110m) is different from the number of pending memories grasped by the slave control means (performance control part 130m), the effect pattern (70a) is The display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can display the effect pattern (70a) in a temporarily stopped state when the predetermined state occurs. In this state, it is possible to continue displaying the suspended memory and to perform the effect production of the suspended memory, and in a state where a predetermined number (for example, 4) of suspended memories are displayed, the slave control means (production control unit 130m ) receives from the main control means (main control unit 110m) a specific number (for example, two) of pending storage signals (commands) that are two or more smaller than a predetermined number (for example, four), the number of pending storage The display effect of gradually reducing the number of items is not performed for the number of deviations (e.g., twice) between the specific number (e.g., four) and the predetermined number (e.g., two), and the predetermined number (e.g., two) is retained and stored. It is characterized by displaying.

(Image change effect)
The image display device consisting of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) can display various effects according to the progress of the game. Performance displays include customer waiting demonstration performances that are executed during a customer waiting state (standby state where no game is in progress) where special symbols are not being displayed in a variable manner, and production symbols that are executed while special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. There is a fluctuating effect accompanied by a fluctuating display of 70a. In addition, as an effect display, on the screen of the first image display device 70 and/or the screen of the second image display device 71, an image corresponding to the entire screen and/or a partial area of the screen may be reduced, enlarged, deformed, rotated, etc. It is possible to perform an image change effect in which one or more of these are varied in combination. The image change effect can be said to be something that makes the screen itself appear to be moving, such as by shaking, depending on the image displayed on the screen. The image change effect can be executed at any timing (for example, timing during the execution period of the variable effect, timing during the execution period of the jackpot game, or timing during the execution period of the customer waiting demonstration effect).

In the following explanation, in the figures, the change display on the screen where the image change effect is executed is referred to as "SV display", and the normal screen display on which the image change effect is not executed is referred to as "normal display". It is written as. In the image change effect, the first image displayed on the screen in the normal display (for example, the effect pattern 70a, the background image HG, etc.: FIG. 140(a)) and the first image displayed on the screen in the change display as the first image changes. 140(c)). Note that it can be said that the second image in the changed display can be recognized as being common and/or related to the first image in the normal display, depending on its shape, information, and the like.

The image change effect can be executed at an appropriate timing during the execution period of the variable effect or the like. For example, the image change effect may be executed in synchronization with the start of the change effect, in the middle of the execution period of the change effect, or in synchronization with the end of the change effect. ). In addition, the image change effect may be triggered by an external factor such as the winning of a game ball in a prize opening or the operation of the effect button device 16, or may be triggered by a predetermined effect pattern such as selection of a predetermined game state or look-ahead effect. Execution can be triggered by various conditions, such as internal factors such as the selection of

The gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment is configured to be able to perform an image change effect on the image display devices 70, 71 in conjunction with a light emitting effect by the board lighting device 76 and/or the frame lighting device 10. Furthermore, the image change effect on the image display devices 70 and 71 may be performed in addition to or in place of the light emission effect by the board lighting device 76 and/or the frame lighting device 10. , the second movable member 74). Furthermore, the image change effect on the image display devices 70 and 71 may be configured to be executable in conjunction with the audio output of the audio output device 9.

(1st movable accessory - movement)
The first movable member 73, which is a movable accessory, is moved between an upper standby position (origin position) and a lower position by the driving force of a first movable member drive motor that is a part of the board drive device 75 (see FIG. 2). It is possible to perform a performance operation that moves in the vertical direction between the performance position located at . Note that the first movable member 73 can be detected to be at the original position by a first position detection sensor (not shown). Here, the first movable member 73 of the embodiment does not overlap with the screen of the first image display device 70 or has a small degree of overlap in the first mode stopped at the standby position. Furthermore, as the first movable member 73 descends from the standby position to the presentation position, the degree of overlap with the screen increases. The first movable member 73 performs a predetermined performance operation, such as greatly vibrating the entire area between the standby position and the performance position, or vibrating finely in a partial range between the standby position and the performance position. It is configured to be changeable from the first aspect to the second aspect.

(First movable accessory - first light emitting area)
The first movable member 73 is capable of emitting dramatic light by lighting the first movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emission mode. The first movable member 73 is provided with one or more first light emitting regions HK1, and the first light emitting region HK1 can emit light independently from other parts of the board lighting device 76. ing. The first light emitting region HK1 has a first state in which the first movable member LED emits light such as lighting, blinking, or color change, and a second state in which the first movable member LED is turned off and does not emit light. It is possible to change the light emitting state. By being in the second state in which the first light emitting region HK1 is turned off, the whole or a part of the first movable member 73 becomes dark, and by being in the first state in which the first light emitting region HK1 emits light, the first movable member 73 becomes dark. The first movable member 73 becomes brighter than when the light emitting region HK1 is in the second state. In the embodiment, the first movable member LED is turned off in the second state, but in the second state, the first movable member LED is made to emit light darker than in the second state, for example, the hue of the first movable member LED is made darker than in the first state. It may be made darker, the brightness lower than in the first state, or the saturation lower than in the first state. Further, the range of the first light emitting region HK1 may be changed by switching the first movable member LED to turn on or off.

(Second movable accessory - movement)
The second movable member 74, which is a movable accessory, is moved between a standby position (origin position) located in the upper right corner by the driving force of a second movable member drive motor that is a part of the board drive device 75 (see FIG. 2). It is possible to perform a performance operation that moves diagonally up and down between the performance position located at the lower left. Note that the second movable member 74 can be detected to be at the original position by a second position detection sensor (not shown). Here, the first movable member 74 of the embodiment does not overlap with the screen of the first image display device 70 or has a small degree of overlap in the first state stopped at the standby position. Further, as the second movable member 74 moves diagonally downward from the standby position toward the presentation position, the degree of overlap with the screen increases. The second movable member 74 performs a predetermined performance operation, such as greatly vibrating the entire area between the standby position and the performance position, or vibrating finely in a partial range between the standby position and the performance position. It is configured to be changeable from the first aspect to the second aspect.

(Second movable accessory - first light emitting area)
The second movable member 74 is capable of emitting dramatic light by lighting the second movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emission mode. The second movable member 74 is provided with one or more first light emitting regions HK1, and the first light emitting region HK1 can emit light independently from other parts of the board lighting device 76. ing. The first light emitting region HK1 has a first state in which the second movable member LED is lit, blinks, changes color, etc. to emit a dramatic effect, and a second state in which the second movable member LED is turned off and does not emit a dramatic light. It is possible to change the light emitting state. By being in the second state in which the first light emitting region HK1 is turned off, the whole or a part of the second movable member 74 becomes dark, and by being in the first state in which the first light emitting region HK1 emits light, the first light emitting region HK1 becomes dark. The second movable member 74 becomes brighter than when the light emitting region HK1 is in the second state. In the embodiment, the second movable member LED is turned off in the second state, but in the second state, the second movable member LED is made to emit light darker than in the first state, for example, the hue of the second movable member LED is made darker than in the first state. It may be made darker, the brightness lower than in the first state, or the saturation lower than in the first state. Further, the range of the first light emitting region HK1 may be changed by switching the second movable member LED such as turning on or off.

In the embodiment, the movable accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) moves forward and backward in the second mode. It is also possible to perform a performance operation using .

(Second light emitting region)
The gaming machine 1 is provided as a part of the board lighting device 76 and/or the frame lighting device 10 in at least one of the parts different from the movable accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74). A second light emitting region HK2 is provided. The parts of the panel lighting device 76 that become the second light emitting region HK2 include, for example, the decorative frame 40, the space between the first starting port 45 and the variable starting section 46 (the area around the first starting port 45 and the variable starting section 46), It may be an accessory attached to the game board 5 such as a winning hole lamp NR) for emitting light in a predetermined manner, a general winning hole 43, a big winning hole 50, or the game board 5 itself. Moreover, as a part of the frame illumination device 10 that becomes the second light emitting region HK2, for example, the glass frame 4 can be mentioned. Note that parts other than movable accessories such as the handle light emitting device 15c and the effect button device 16 may function as the second light emitting region HK2. Here, the second light emitting region HK2 is provided at a plurality of locations, and in the embodiment, between the decorative frame 40, the first starting port 45 and the variable starting section 46 (the first starting port 45 and the variable starting section 46). A case is illustrated in which the prize opening lamp NR for emitting light around the glass frame 4 in a predetermined manner and the frame illumination device 10 provided on the glass frame 4 function as the second light emitting region HK2. A plurality of second light-emitting regions HK2 may be provided, for example, in different members such as the decorative frame 40 and the prize opening, or may be provided in a plurality in one member such as in the decorative frame 40, for example.

The second light emitting area HK2 is capable of emitting a dramatic effect by lighting the LED (full color) in a predetermined light emitting mode. The second light emitting area HK2 is capable of emitting dramatic light independently of the first light emitting area HK1 and other second light emitting areas. The first light emitting area HK2 is capable of changing the light emitting state between a first state in which the LED is lit, flashing, color changing, etc. to emit a dramatic light, and a second state in which the LED is turned off and no dramatic light is emitted. is possible. By being in the second state in which the second light emitting region HK2 is turned off, in the embodiment, the whole or a part of the periphery of the screen of the first image display device 70 becomes dark, and the second light emitting region HK2 emits a dramatic light. By being in the first state, the area around the screen becomes brighter than when the first light emitting region HK2 is in the second state. In the embodiment, the LED is turned off in the second state, but in the second state the LED emits light darker than in the first state, for example, the hue is darker than in the first state, or the LED is turned off in the second state. The brightness may also be lowered, or the saturation may be lowered than in the first state. Further, the range of the second light emitting region HK2 may be changed by switching the LEDs such as turning on or off.

(Specific example 1 of image change production)
Next, a specific example 1 of the image change effect executed in conjunction with the effect light emission using the first light emitting area HK1 and/or the second light emitting area HK2 will be described. FIG. 139 shows the operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, the effect light emission of the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2, the audio output of the audio output device 10, and the screen of the first image display device 70. FIG. 2 is a timing chart of a first specific example showing the relationship between image change effects. FIG. Further, FIG. 140 shows an example of the effect when the image change effect of the first specific example is executed.

At the timing T0, a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect symbol 70a that is executed during the variable display of the special symbol is being executed on the screen of the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 140(a)). At this time, the icon TH is displayed in the icon display area 70C provided at the bottom of the screen, and the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is displayed in the first pending number U1 at the bottom of the screen. It is displayed as a pending icon T1 in the icon display area 70B. Further, in the first pending number display area 70E provided on the left side of the screen, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is displayed as the first pending number. Further, in the special symbol display area provided at the lower right of the screen, a special symbol TZ is variably displayed in response to the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). On the screen, a background image HG is displayed behind the effect pattern 70a that is being displayed in a variable manner, and the background image HG is displayed in a predetermined manner such as scrolling. In this way, the "normal display" is executed on the screen at the timing T0.

At timing T0, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in a first state where they are stopped at the standby position. In addition, the first light emitting region HK1 of the first movable member 73, the first light emitting region HK1 of the second movable member 74, the second light emitting region HK2 of the decorative frame 40, the second light emitting region HK2 consisting of the winning opening lamp NR, and the frame All of the second light emitting regions HK2 comprising the illumination device 10 are in the first state in which they are performing dramatic light emission. Furthermore, the audio output device 9 outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc., thereby producing effects using sound (music, voice). Note that while the change notification sound, which will be described later, is being output, the sound performance may be continuously performed or the sound performance may be interrupted.

When the image change effect is executed at the timing T1, the first light emitting area HK1 of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are changed in synchronization with (synchronized with) the start of the transition from the normal display to the change display. The first light emitting region HK1 changes from the first state to the second state where the light is turned off (see FIG. 140(b)). At this time, in accordance with (synchronizing with) the start of the transition to the change display, the second light emitting region HK1 of the decorative frame 40 and the second light emitting region HK2 consisting of the winning slot lamp NR change from the first state to the second state in which the light is turned off. Change. Furthermore, the second light emitting region HK2 made up of the frame illumination device 10 is maintained in the first state even though the other second light emitting regions HK2 change in conjunction with the first light emitting region HK1. Furthermore, in accordance with (synchronizing with) the start of the transition to the change display, the first movable member 73 shifts from the standby position from the first mode to the second mode in which motion can be produced. At this time, the second movable member 74 is maintained in the first mode in which it stops at the standby position. Furthermore, in synchronization with (synchronizing with) the start of the transition to the change display, a change notification sound such as a "pikin" is output from the audio output device 9.

The timing T1 is a frame update timing (start frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the production symbol 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the start of the variation production. At this frame update timing, the first image display of the image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) related to the change display that had started to be drawn to the frame buffer prior to the timing of T1. Display on the device 70 is started, and a change display is started on the screen of the first image display device 70. In specific example 1, the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK1 start changing from the first state to the second state in synchronization with (synchronizing with) the start frame update timing of the change display, and the change from the first state to the second state is started. The change of the first movable member 73 from the first mode to the second mode is started, and the output of the change notification sound from the audio output device 9 is started. In this way, in specific example 1, at the same time as the image change effect starts on the screen, the changes in the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2, the operation of the first movable member 73, and the output of the change notification sound are started. Ru.

As shown in FIG. 140(b), when transitioning from the normal display to the change display, the production pattern 70a, the background image HG, the relevant icon TH, and the pending icon T1 change to shrink together, and the picture frame is viewed from outside the screen. The image is displayed so that the image GG appears. The change display is framed so that the outer periphery of the image is surrounded by the frame image GG, and the inside of the frame image GG is configured to look like a part (or all) of the normal display has been cut out. When transitioning from the normal display to the change display, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area are reduced and changed together with the production symbol 70a. It is displayed in the same position as the normal display.

As shown in FIG. 140(c), an image change effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a in the change display, the background image HG, the relevant icon TH, the hold icon T1, and the frame image GG are displayed so as to swing together. In specific example 1, the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2, which were in the second state at the beginning of the execution period of the image change effect, are switched to the first state in the middle of the execution period of the image change effect. has been set (see Figure 140(d)). Further, in the first specific example, the output of the change notification sound is stopped after the change notification sound is output halfway from the start of execution of the image change effect. Here, in specific example 1, the timing of switching the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2 from the second state to the first state is adjusted (synchronized) in the middle of the execution period of the image change effect (timing T3). ), but the switching timing may be shifted. In specific example 1, in the subsequent image change effect, the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2 emit light in the first state.

When the image change effect is being executed, on the screen, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area are the range in which the change display changes. It is located outside of the box, and is designed to prevent the changing display from overlapping with the pending numbers and special design TZ. Further, the variable performance of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is displayed so as to continue, and the reservation icon T1 and the reservation number are also displayed so as to increase in accordance with the winning of the game ball.

The first movable member 73 in the second mode is returned to the first mode in synchronization with (synchronized with) the start of returning from the change display to the normal display at timing T4 (see FIG. 140(e)). The timing T4 is a frame update timing (return frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the production symbol 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the start of the variation production. At this frame update timing, display of image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) related to the returning change display on the first image display device 70 is started. In specific example 1, the change of the first movable member 73 from the second mode to the first mode is started in accordance with (synchronized with) the update timing of the return frame of the change display.

As shown in FIG. 140(e), when transitioning from the change display to the normal display, the effect pattern 70a, the background image HG, the relevant icon TH, and the hold icon T1 change to enlarge together, and the frame image GG is displayed on the screen. appears to disappear outside of the screen. When transitioning from the change display to the normal display, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area enlarge and change together with the production symbol 70a. There is no problem and it is displayed in the same position.

In synchronization with (synchronizing with) the start of the normal display at timing T5, the first movable member 73 in the second mode stops at the standby position and returns to the first mode (see FIG. 140(f)). The timing of T5 is a frame update timing (end frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the production pattern 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the start of the variation production. At this frame update timing, display of image data related to normal display (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) on the first image display device 70 is started. In specific example 1, the change of the first movable member 73 from the second mode to the first mode is completed in accordance with (synchronized with) the end frame update timing.

In specific example 1, when an image change effect is performed, a light emission effect that changes from the first state to the second state can be executed by linking at least one of the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2. It is composed of By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the changing display on the screen, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In particular, when an image change effect is performed, by changing from a relatively bright first state to a second state darker than the first state, the player's attention is directed to the area around the screen of the first image display device 70. First, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the changing display executed on the screen of the first image display device 70, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the first specific example, the special symbol TZ and the reserved number can be displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 together with the production symbol 70a, the reserved icon T1, the background image HG, and the like. In the image change production, the special symbol TZ and the pending number can be displayed at the same position whether the production pattern 70a, the pending icon T1, and the background image HG are normally displayed or changed. . By doing so, even when the image change effect is executed, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the necessary information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In particular, it is preferable for the player that the information (third image) displayed at the same position has the same content as the information (first image and second image) that changes in the image change effect.

In the first specific example, the special symbol TZ and the reserved number can be displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 together with the production symbol 70a, the reserved icon T1, the background image HG, and the like. In the image change effect, the ease of visual recognition changes depending on whether the effect pattern 70a, the hold icon T1, and the background image HG are displayed in a changed manner or when they are normally displayed. On the other hand, the special symbol TZ and the reserved numerals can be displayed so that their visibility does not change whether they are changed or displayed. By doing so, even when the image change effect is executed, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the necessary information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In particular, it is preferable for the player that the information that does not change the visibility (third image) has the same content as the information that changes in the image change effect (the first image and the second image).

In specific example 1, when an image change effect is executed, a change is made on the screen of the first image display device 70 in conjunction with the change from the normal display to the change display of the effect pattern 70a, the hold icon T1, and the background image HG. It is possible to display a frame image GG. By doing so, when the image change effect is executed, the change display can attract the attention of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, by making the frame image GG, which is not displayed in the normal display, appear in the changing display, the changing display can be made to attract the player's attention more, and the interest in the game can be improved. Note that the frame image GG may be in the same image (image layer) as the production pattern 70a, the hold icon T1, and the background image HG, or may be set as a separate image (another image layer) from these, and the production pattern 70a, It may be expressed so that it changes together with the hold icon T1 and the background image HG.

In specific example 1, the first light emitting region HK1 and/or the second light emitting region HK2 are changed to the second state in synchronization with (synchronizing with) the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the attention of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In specific example 1, the first movable member 73 changes to the second mode and the change notification sound is output in synchronization with the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the attention of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In specific example 1, the first movable member 73 is changed to the first mode in synchronization with (synchronized with) the end of the image change effect. By doing this, when the execution of the image change effect is finished, the change from the change display to the normal display can attract the player's attention, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Specific example 2 of image change production)
Next, a second specific example of an image change effect executed in conjunction with the effect light emission using the first light emitting area HK1 and/or the second light emitting area HK2 will be described. FIG. 141 shows the operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, the effect light emission of the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2, the audio output of the audio output device 10, and the screen of the first image display device 70. 12 is a timing chart of a second specific example showing the relationship between image change effects. Further, FIG. 142 shows an example of the effect when the image change effect of the second specific example is executed.

At the timing T0, a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect symbol 70a that is executed during the variable display of the special symbol is being executed on the screen of the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 142(a)). At this time, the icon TH is displayed in the icon display area 70C provided at the bottom of the screen, and the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is displayed in the first pending number U1 at the bottom of the screen. It is displayed as a pending icon T1 in the icon display area 70B. Further, in the first reservation number display area 70E provided on the left side of the screen, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is displayed as the first reservation number. Further, in the special symbol display area provided at the lower right of the screen, a special symbol TZ is variably displayed in response to the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). Then, on the screen, a background image HG is displayed behind the effect pattern 70a that is being displayed in a variable manner, and the background image HG is displayed in a predetermined manner such as scrolling. In this way, the "normal display" is executed on the screen at the timing T0.

At timing T0, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in a first state where they are stopped at the standby position. In addition, the first light emitting region HK1 of the first movable member 73, the first light emitting region HK1 of the second movable member 74, the second light emitting region HK2 of the decorative frame 40, the second light emitting region HK2 consisting of the prize opening lamp NR, and the frame All of the second light emitting regions HK2 comprising the illumination device 10 are in the first state in which they are performing dramatic light emission. Further, the audio output device 9 outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), and the like to perform sound (music, audio) effects. Note that while the change notification sound, which will be described later, is being output, the sound performance may be continuously performed or the sound performance may be interrupted.

When the image change effect is executed at the timing T1, the first light emitting area HK1 of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are changed in synchronization with the start of the transition from the normal display to the change display. The first light emitting region HK1 changes from the first state to the second state where the light is turned off (see FIG. 142(b)). At this time, in accordance with (synchronizing with) the start of the transition to the change display, the second light emitting region HK1 of the decorative frame 40 and the second light emitting region HK2 consisting of the winning slot lamp NR change from the first state to the second state in which the light is turned off. Change. Further, the second light emitting region HK2 comprising the frame illumination device 10 also changes from the first state in which it emits light for effect to the second state in which it is turned off. Furthermore, in synchronization with the start of the transition to the change display, the first movable member 73 shifts from the standby position from the first mode to the second mode in which motion can be produced. At this time, the second movable member 74 is maintained in the first mode in which it stops at the standby position. Furthermore, in synchronization with (synchronizing with) the start of the transition to the change display, a change notification sound such as "pikin" is output from the audio output device 9.

The timing T1 is a frame update timing (start frame update timing) in the middle of a normal variation period in which the normal variation of the production symbol 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the start of the variation production. At this frame update timing, the first image display of the image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) related to the change display that had started to be drawn to the frame buffer prior to the timing of T1. The display on the device 70 is started, and the display of the change display on the screen of the first image display device 70 is started. In specific example 2, the change from the first state to the second state of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK1 is started in accordance with (synchronized with) the start frame update timing of the change display, and the change from the first state to the second state is started. The change of the first movable member 73 from the first mode to the second mode is started, and the output of the change notification sound from the audio output device 9 is started. In this way, in the second specific example, at the same time as the start of the image change effect on the screen, the changes in the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2, the operation of the first movable member 73, and the output of the change notification sound are started. Ru.

As shown in FIG. 142(b), when transitioning from the normal display to the change display, the production pattern 70a, the background image HG, the relevant icon TH, and the pending icon T1 change to shrink together, and the picture frame is visible from outside the screen. The image is displayed so that the image GG appears. The change display is framed so that the outer periphery of the image is surrounded by the frame image GG, and the inside of the frame image GG is configured to look like a part (or all) of the normal display has been cut out. When transitioning from the normal display to the change display, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area are reduced and changed together with the production symbol 70a. It is displayed in the same position as the normal display.

As shown in FIG. 142(c), an image change effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a in the change display, the background image HG, the relevant icon TH, the hold icon T1, and the frame image GG are displayed so as to swing together. In specific example 2, a part of the first light emitting area HK1 (the first movable member 73) and a part of the second light emitting area HK2 (the decorative frame 40) are in the second state at the beginning of the execution period of the image change effect. is set to switch to the first state in the middle of the execution period of the image change effect (see FIG. 142(d)). In addition, in specific example 2, during the execution period of the image change effect, the remaining part of the first light emitting area HK1 (second movable member 74) and the remaining part of the second light emitting area HK2 (winning hole lamp NR, frame lighting device 10) is set to be maintained in the second state (see FIG. 142(d)). In the second specific example, the change notification sound is output from the start to the end of the image change performance, and then output is stopped. Here, in specific example 2, the timing of switching the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2 from the second state to the first state is adjusted (synchronized) in the middle of the execution period of the image change effect (timing T3). ), but the switching timing may be shifted.

When the image change effect is being executed, on the screen, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area are the range in which the change display changes. It is located outside of the , and is designed to prevent the changing display from overlapping with the pending numbers and special design TZ. Further, the variable performance of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is displayed so as to continue, and the reservation icon T1 and the reservation number are also displayed so as to increase in accordance with the winning of the game ball.

The first movable member 73 in the second mode is returned to the first mode after the change display at timing T4 starts returning to the normal display (see FIG. 142(e)). The timing T4 is a frame update timing (return frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the production symbol 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the start of the variation production. At this frame update timing, display of image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) related to the returning change display on the first image display device 70 is started. In specific example 2, the change of the first movable member 73 from the second mode to the first mode is started at a later time than the return frame update timing of the change display.

As shown in FIG. 142(e), when transitioning from the change display to the normal display, the effect pattern 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH, and the hold icon T1 change to enlarge together, and the frame image GG changes to the screen. appears to disappear outside of the screen. When transitioning from the change display to the normal display, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area enlarge and change together with the production symbol 70a. There is no problem and it is displayed in the same position.

At a timing later than the start of the normal display (end of the change display) at timing T5, the first movable member 73 in the second mode stops at the standby position and returns to the first mode (FIG. 142(f)) reference). The first light emitting area HK1 (second movable member 74) and the second light emitting area HK2 (winning hole lamp NR) in the second state are activated at a timing later than the start of the normal display (end of the change display) at timing T5. , the frame illumination device 10) returns to the first state and emits light for effect. The timing T5 is a frame update timing (end frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the production symbol 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the start of the variation production. At this frame update timing, display of image data related to normal display (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) on the first image display device 70 is started. In specific example 2, the change of the first movable member 73 from the second mode to the first mode is completed, and the light emitting regions HK1 and HK2 return to the first state, with a shift from the end frame update timing.

In specific example 2, when an image change effect is performed, a light emission effect that changes from the first state to the second state can be executed by linking at least one of the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2. It is composed of By doing so, it is possible to attract the attention of the player to the image change effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In particular, when an image change effect is performed, by changing from a relatively bright first state to a second state darker than the first state, the player's attention is directed to the area around the screen of the first image display device 70. First, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the changing display executed on the screen of the first image display device 70, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the second specific example, the special symbol TZ and the reserved number can be displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 together with the performance symbol 70a, the reserved icon T1, the background image HG, and the like. In the image change production, the special symbol TZ and the pending number can be displayed at the same position whether the production pattern 70a, the pending icon T1, and the background image HG are normally displayed or changed. . By doing so, even when the image change effect is executed, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the necessary information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In particular, it is preferable for the player that the information (third image) displayed at the same position has the same content as the information (first image and second image) that changes in the image change effect.

In the second specific example, the special symbol TZ and the reserved number can be displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 together with the performance symbol 70a, the reserved icon T1, the background image HG, and the like. In the image change effect, the ease of visual recognition changes between the case of a change display in which the effect pattern 70a, the hold icon T1, and the background image HG are displayed in a changed manner, and the case of a normal display. On the other hand, in the embodiment, it is possible to display the special symbol TZ and the reserved numerals so that their visibility does not change whether they are normally displayed or changed. By doing so, even when the image change effect is executed, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the necessary information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In particular, it is preferable for the player that the information that does not change the visibility (third image) has the same content as the information that changes in the image change effect (the first image and the second image).

In specific example 2, when an image change effect is executed, a change is made on the screen of the first image display device 70 in conjunction with the change from the normal display to the change display of the effect pattern 70a, the hold icon T1, and the background image HG. It is possible to display a frame image GG. By doing so, when the image change effect is executed, the change display can attract the attention of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, by making the frame image GG, which is not displayed in the normal display, appear in the changing display, the changing display can be made to attract the player's attention more, and the interest in the game can be improved. Note that the frame image GG may be in the same image (image layer) as the production pattern 70a, the hold icon T1, and the background image HG, or may be set as a separate image (another image layer) from these, and the production pattern 70a, It may be expressed so that it changes together with the hold icon T1 and the background image HG.

In specific example 2, the first light emitting area HK1 and/or the second light emitting area HK2 are changed to the second state in synchronization with (synchronizing with) the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the attention of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the second specific example, the first movable member 73 changes to the second mode and the change notification sound is output in synchronization with the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the attention of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the second specific example, the first movable member 73 is changed to the first mode at a time shifted from the end of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is finished, the change display can attract the attention of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In specific example 2, the first light emitting area HK1 and/or the second light emitting area HK2 is changed to the second state at a time when the image change effect is finished. By doing this, when the execution of the image change performance is finished, the change from the change display to the normal display can attract the player's attention, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Specific example 3 of image change production)
Next, a third specific example of an image change effect executed in conjunction with the effect light emission using the first light emitting area HK1 and/or the second light emitting area HK2 will be described. FIG. 143 shows the operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, the effect light emission of the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2, the audio output of the audio output device 10, and the screen of the first image display device 70. 12 is a timing chart of specific example 3 showing the relationship between image change effects. Further, FIG. 144 shows an example of the effect when the image change effect of the third specific example is executed.

At the timing T0, a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect symbol 70a that is executed during the variable display of the special symbol is being executed on the screen of the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 144(a)). At this time, the icon TH is displayed in the icon display area 70C provided at the bottom of the screen, and the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is displayed in the first pending number U1 at the bottom of the screen. It is displayed as a pending icon T1 in the icon display area 70B. Further, in the first reservation number display area 70E provided on the left side of the screen, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is displayed as the first reservation number. Further, in the special symbol display area provided at the lower right of the screen, a special symbol TZ is variably displayed in response to the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). Then, on the screen, a background image HG is displayed behind the effect pattern 70a that is being displayed in a variable manner, and the background image HG is displayed in a predetermined manner such as scrolling. In this way, the "normal display" is executed on the screen at the timing T0.

At timing T0, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in a first state where they are stopped at the standby position. In addition, the first light emitting region HK1 of the first movable member 73, the first light emitting region HK1 of the second movable member 74, the second light emitting region HK2 of the decorative frame 40, the second light emitting region HK2 consisting of the prize opening lamp NR, and the frame All of the second light emitting regions HK2 comprising the illumination device 10 are in the first state in which they are performing dramatic light emission. Further, the audio output device 9 outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), and the like to perform sound (music, audio) effects. Note that while the change notification sound, which will be described later, is being output, the sound performance may be continuously performed or the sound performance may be interrupted.

In specific example 3, the first light emitting area HK1 (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and the second light emitting area HK2 (decorative frame 40, the prize opening lamp NR and the frame illumination device 10) change from the first state to the second state where they are turned off (see FIG. 144(a)). Then, at timing T1, when the image change effect is executed, the first light emitting region HK1 of the second movable member 74 and the The second light emitting area HK2 changes from the second state to the first state and performs the effect light emission (see FIG. 144(b)). At this time, in accordance with (synchronizing with) the start of the transition to the change display, the second movable member 74 transitions from the first mode in the standby position to the second mode in which motion production is possible. The first movable member 73 is maintained in the first mode in which it stops at the standby position. In addition, in synchronization with the start of the transition to the change display, a change notification sound such as "pikin" is output from the audio output device 9, for example. Note that the first light emitting area HK1 of the first movable member 73, the decorative frame 40, and the second light emitting area HK1 of the winning opening lamp NR are maintained in the second state over the execution period of the image change performance.

The timing T1 is a frame update timing (start frame update timing) in the middle of a normal variation period in which the normal variation of the production symbol 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the start of the variation production. At this frame update timing, the first image display of the image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) related to the change display that had started to be drawn to the frame buffer prior to the timing of T1. Display on the device 70 is started, and a change display is started on the screen of the first image display device 70. In specific example 3, the change from the first state to the second state of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK1 is started at a shift from the start frame update timing of the change display. In conjunction with (synchronizing with) the update timing of the start frame of the change display, the change of the second movable member 74 from the first mode to the second mode is started, and the change notification sound is output from the audio output device 9. Begins.

As shown in FIG. 144(b), when transitioning from the normal display to the change display, the production pattern 70a, the background image HG, the relevant icon TH, and the pending icon T1 change to shrink together, and the picture frame is viewed from outside the screen. The image GG is displayed so that it appears. The change display is framed so that the outer periphery of the image is surrounded by the frame image GG, and the inside of the frame image GG is configured to look like a part (or all) of the normal display has been cut out. When transitioning from the normal display to the change display, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area are reduced and changed together with the production symbol 70a. It is displayed in the same position as the normal display.

As shown in FIG. 144(c), an image change effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a in the change display, the background image HG, the relevant icon TH, the pending icon T1, and the frame image GG are displayed so as to swing together. In specific example 3, the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2, which were in the second state, are set to switch to the first state when the image change effect starts to be executed (FIG. 144(d)). reference). Further, in the third specific example, the output of the change notification sound is stopped after the change notification sound is output halfway from the start of execution of the image change effect.

When the image change effect is being executed, on the screen, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area are the range in which the change display changes. It is located outside of the , and is designed to prevent the changing display from overlapping with the pending numbers and special design TZ. Further, the variable performance of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is displayed so as to continue, and the reservation icon T1 and the reservation number are also displayed so as to increase in accordance with the winning of the game ball.

The second movable member 74 in the second mode is returned to the first mode in synchronization with (synchronized with) the start of returning from the change display to the normal display at timing T4 (see FIG. 144(e)). The timing T4 is a frame update timing (return frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the production symbol 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the start of the variation production. At this frame update timing, display of image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) related to the returning change display on the first image display device 70 is started. In specific example 3, the change of the second movable member 74 from the second mode to the first mode is started in accordance with (synchronized with) the update timing of the return frame of the change display.

As shown in FIG. 144(e), when transitioning from the change display to the normal display, the effect pattern 70a, the background image HG, the relevant icon TH, and the hold icon T1 change to enlarge together, and the frame image GG is displayed on the screen. appears to disappear outside of the screen. When transitioning from the change display to the normal display, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area enlarge and change together with the production symbol 70a. There is no problem and it is displayed in the same position.

In synchronization with (synchronizing with) the start of the normal display at timing T5, the second movable member 74 in the second mode stops at the standby position and returns to the first mode (see FIG. 144(f)). The timing T5 is a frame update timing (end frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the production symbol 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the start of the variation production. At this frame update timing, display of image data related to normal display (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) on the first image display device 70 is started. In specific example 3, the change of the second movable member 74 from the second mode to the first mode is completed in accordance with (synchronized with) the end frame update timing.

In specific example 3, when an image change effect is performed, a light emission effect that changes from the first state to the second state can be executed by linking at least one of the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2. It is composed of By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the changing display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In particular, when an image change effect is performed, by changing from a relatively bright first state to a second state darker than the first state, the player's attention is directed to the area around the screen of the first image display device 70. First, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the image change effect executed on the screen of the first image display device 70, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the third specific example, the special symbol TZ and the reserved number can be displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 together with the production symbol 70a, the reserved icon T1, the background image HG, and the like. In the image change production, the special symbol TZ and the pending number can be displayed at the same position whether the production pattern 70a, the pending icon T1, and the background image HG are normally displayed or changed. . By doing so, even when the image change effect is executed, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the necessary information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In particular, it is preferable for the player that the information (third image) displayed at the same position has the same content as the information (first image and second image) that changes in the image change effect.

In the third specific example, the special symbol TZ and the reserved number can be displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 together with the production symbol 70a, the reserved icon T1, the background image HG, and the like. In the image change effect, the visibility of the effect pattern 70a, the pending icon T1, and the background image HG changes between the normal display and the change display. On the other hand, the special symbol TZ and the reserved numerals can be displayed so that their visibility does not change whether they are normally displayed or changed. By doing so, even when the image change effect is executed, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the necessary information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In particular, it is preferable for the player that the information that does not change the visibility (third image) has the same content as the information that changes in the image change effect (the first image and the second image).

In specific example 3, when an image change effect is executed, a change is made on the screen of the first image display device 70 in conjunction with the change from the normal display to the change display of the effect pattern 70a, the hold icon T1, and the background image HG. It is possible to display a frame image GG. By doing so, when the image change effect is executed, the change display can attract the attention of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, by making the frame image GG, which is not displayed in the normal display, appear in the changing display, the changing display can be made to attract the player's attention more, and the interest in the game can be improved. Note that the frame image GG may be in the same image (image layer) as the production pattern 70a, the hold icon T1, and the background image HG, or it may be set as a separate image (another image layer) from these, and the production pattern 70a, It may be expressed so that it changes together with the hold icon T1 and the background image HG.

In the third specific example, the first light emitting area HK1 and/or the second light emitting area HK2 are changed to the second state at a time when the image change effect is started. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the attention of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the third specific example, the second movable member 74 changes to the second mode and the change notification sound is output at a time lag from the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the attention of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the third specific example, the second movable member 74 changes to the first mode in synchronization with the end of the image change effect. By doing this, when the execution of the image change performance is finished, the change from the change display to the normal display can attract the player's attention, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In specific example 3, the first light emitting area HK1 and/or the second light emitting area HK2 are changed to the second state a little before the start of the image change effect, and the change is performed in synchronization with the start of the image change effect. ) The first light emitting region HK1 and/or the second light emitting region HK2 are changed to the first state. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the attention of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. It should be noted that the movable members 73 and 74 are changed to the second mode a little before the start of the image change effect, and either in conjunction with (synchronized with) the start of the image change effect or after the start of the image change effect. The movable members 73, 74 may be returned to the first mode.

(Specific example 4 of image change production)
Next, a fourth specific example of an image change effect executed in conjunction with the effect light emission using the first light emitting area HK1 and/or the second light emitting area HK2 will be described. FIG. 145 shows the operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, the effect light emission of the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2, the audio output of the audio output device 10, and the screen of the first image display device 70. 12 is a timing chart of a fourth specific example showing the relationship between image change effects. Further, FIG. 146 shows an example of the effect when the image change effect of the fourth specific example is executed.

At the timing T0, a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect symbol 70a that is executed during the variable display of the special symbol is being executed on the screen of the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 146(a)). At this time, the icon TH is displayed in the icon display area 70C provided at the bottom of the screen, and the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is displayed in the first pending number U1 at the bottom of the screen. It is displayed as a pending icon T1 in the icon display area 70B. Further, in the first reservation number display area 70E provided on the left side of the screen, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is displayed as the first reservation number. Further, in the special symbol display area provided at the lower right of the screen, a special symbol TZ is variably displayed in response to the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). Then, on the screen, a background image HG is displayed behind the effect pattern 70a that is being displayed in a variable manner, and the background image HG is displayed in a predetermined manner such as scrolling. In this way, the normal display is executed on the screen at the timing T0.

At timing T0, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in a first state where they are stopped at the standby position. In addition, the first light emitting region HK1 of the first movable member 73, the first light emitting region HK1 of the second movable member 74, the second light emitting region HK2 of the decorative frame 40, the second light emitting region HK2 consisting of the prize opening lamp NR, and the frame All of the second light emitting regions HK2 comprising the illumination device 10 are in the first state in which they are performing dramatic light emission. Further, the audio output device 9 outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), and the like to perform sound (music, audio) effects. Note that while the change notification sound, which will be described later, is being output, the sound performance may be continuously performed or the sound performance may be interrupted.

In specific example 4, the first light emitting area HK1 (the first movable member 73) and the second light emitting area HK2 (the decorative frame 40, the frame illumination device 10) changes from the first state to the second state where the light is turned off (see FIG. 146(a)). At this time, the first light emitting region HK1 (second movable member 74) and the second light emitting region HK2 (winning hole lamp NR) remain in the first state. The first movable member 73 starts to change from the first mode to the second mode at timing T1a, which is before T1 when the image change effect is started. Then, at timing T1, when the image change effect is executed, a change notification sound such as a "pikin" is output from the audio output device 9 in synchronization with the start of transition to the change display. At timing T1b after T1 when the image change effect is started, the first light emitting area HK1 of the second movable member 74 and the second light emitting area HK2 of the prize opening lamp NR change from the first state to the second state. do. Further, at the timing T1b, the second movable member 74 shifts from the first mode in the standby position to the second mode in which motion production is possible.

The timing T1 is a frame update timing (start frame update timing) in the middle of a normal variation period in which the normal variation of the production symbol 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the start of the variation production. At this frame update timing, the first image display of the image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) related to the change display that had started to be drawn to the frame buffer prior to the timing of T1. Display on the device 70 is started, and a change display is started on the screen of the first image display device 70. In specific example 4, the change from the first state to the second state of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK1 is started at a shift from the update timing of the start frame of the change display. Further, the change from the first mode to the second mode of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is started at a shift from the start frame update timing of the change display. On the other hand, the output of the change notification sound from the audio output device 9 is started in synchronization with the update timing of the start frame of the change display.

As shown in FIG. 146(b), when transitioning from the normal display to the change display, the production pattern 70a, the background image HG, the relevant icon TH, and the hold icon T1 change to shrink together, and the picture frame is visible from outside the screen. The image is displayed so that the image GG appears. The change display is framed so that the outer periphery of the image is surrounded by the frame image GG, and the inside of the frame image GG is configured to look like a part (or all) of the normal display has been cut out. When transitioning from the normal display to the change display, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area are reduced and changed together with the production symbol 70a. It is displayed in the same position as the normal display.

As shown in FIG. 146(c), an image change effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a in the change display, the background image HG, the relevant icon TH, the pending icon T1, and the frame image GG are displayed so as to swing together. Further, in the fourth specific example, the output of the change notification sound is stopped after being output halfway from the start of execution of the image change effect.

When the image change effect is being executed, on the screen, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area are the range in which the change display changes. It is located outside of the , and is designed to prevent the changing display from overlapping with the pending numbers and special design TZ. Further, the variable performance of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is displayed so as to continue, and the reservation icon T1 and the reservation number are also displayed so as to increase in accordance with the winning of the game ball.

The first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 in the second mode are returned to the first mode in synchronization with (synchronized with) or staggered the start of the return from the change display to the normal display at timing T4. The timing T4 is a frame update timing (return frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the production symbol 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the start of the variation production. At this frame update timing, display of image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) related to the returning change display on the first image display device 70 is started.

As shown in FIG. 146(e), when transitioning from the change display to the normal display, the effect pattern 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH, and the hold icon T1 change to enlarge together, and the frame image GG changes to the screen. appears to disappear outside of the screen. When transitioning from the change display to the normal display, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area enlarge and change together with the production symbol 70a. There is no problem and it is displayed in the same position.

In specific example 4, the first light emitting region HK1 (first movable member 73) and the second light emitting region HK2 (decorative frame 40, frame illumination device 10 ) changes from the second state to the first state, and the effect light emission is executed. At this time, the first light emitting region HK1 (second movable member 74) and the second light emitting region HK2 (winning a prize opening lamp NR) remain in the second state. Further, the first movable member 73 starts changing from the second mode to the first mode before the timing T5a, which is before T5 when the image change effect starts to be executed, and at the timing T5a, the first movable member 73 starts changing from the second mode to the first mode. returns to the first mode and stops. At this time, the second movable member 74 remains in the second mode. Then, at timing T5, the changing display returns to the normal display, and the image changing effect ends.

At timing T5b after T5 when the image change effect is finished, the first light emitting area HK1 (second movable member 74) and the second light emitting area HK2 (winning hole lamp NR) change from the second state to the first state. The light changes and a light emission is performed. Further, at a timing before T5 when the image change effect starts to be executed, the second movable member 74 starts changing from the second mode to the first mode, and at timing T5b, the first movable member 74 changes to the first mode. Return to and stop. Note that the return of the movable members 73, 74 to the first mode may be started after the image change effect is finished, or in synchronization with (synchronized with) the end of the image change effect.

In specific example 4, when an image change effect is performed, a light emission effect that changes from the first state to the second state can be executed by linking at least one of the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2. It is composed of By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the changing display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In particular, when an image change effect is performed, by changing from a relatively bright first state to a second state darker than the first state, the player's attention is directed to the area around the screen of the first image display device 70. First, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the image change effect executed on the screen of the first image display device 70, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the fourth specific example, the special symbol TZ and the reserved number can be displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 together with the performance symbol 70a, the reserved icon T1, the background image HG, and the like. In the image change production, the special symbol TZ and the pending number can be displayed at the same position whether the production pattern 70a, the pending icon T1, and the background image HG are normally displayed or changed. . By doing so, even when the image change effect is executed, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the necessary information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In particular, it is preferable for the player that the information (third image) displayed at the same position has the same content as the information (first image and second image) that changes in the image change effect.

In the fourth specific example, the special symbol TZ and the reserved number can be displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 together with the performance symbol 70a, the reserved icon T1, the background image HG, and the like. In the image change effect, the ease of visual recognition of the effect pattern 70a, the hold icon T1, and the background image HG changes between the change display and the normal display. On the other hand, the special symbol TZ and the reserved numerals can be displayed so that their visibility does not change whether they are changed or displayed. By doing so, even when the image change effect is executed, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the necessary information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In particular, it is preferable for the player that the information that does not change the visibility (third image) has the same content as the information that changes in the image change effect (the first image and the second image).

In specific example 4, when an image change effect is executed, a change is made on the screen of the first image display device 70 in conjunction with the change from the normal display to the change display of the effect pattern 70a, the hold icon T1, and the background image HG. It is possible to display a frame image GG. By doing so, when the image change effect is executed, the change display can attract the attention of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, by making the frame image GG, which is not displayed in the normal display, appear in the changing display, the changing display can be made to attract the player's attention more, and the interest in the game can be improved. Note that the frame image GG may be in the same image (image layer) as the production pattern 70a, the hold icon T1, and the background image HG, or it may be set as a separate image (another image layer) from these, and the production pattern 70a, It may be expressed so that it changes together with the hold icon T1 and the background image HG.

In specific example 4, the first light emitting area HK1 and/or the second light emitting area HK2 are changed to the second state at a time shifted from the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the attention of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In specific example 4, the movable members 73 and 74 change to the second mode and the change notification sound is outputted at a timing shifted from the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the attention of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the fourth specific example, the change of the movable members 73 and 74 to the first mode is completed at a time when the image change effect is finished. By doing this, when the execution of the image change effect is finished, the change from the change display to the normal display can attract the player's attention, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In specific example 4, the first light emitting area HK1 and/or the second light emitting area HK2 are returned to the first state at a time when the image change effect ends. By doing this, when the execution of the image change effect is finished, the change from the change display to the normal display can attract the player's attention, and the interest of the game can be improved.

As shown in FIGS. 147 and 148, in the image change production, an effect EF that decorates the change display may be displayed together with the change display. The effect EF may be a moving image or a fixed image, and may or may not change in accordance with the changing display. Furthermore, the effect EF is displayed so that it does not overlap with the change display, whether it is displayed in front of the change display (Figure 147(a)) or behind the change display (Figure 147(b)). (FIG. 148) or either.

In the image change production, when displaying the effect EF together with the change display, the effect EF may be displayed in a shape or color corresponding to the degree of expectation for a jackpot. For example, when the expectation level is low, a blue effect EF is displayed (FIG. 148(a)), and when the expectation level is high, a red effect EF is displayed. Note that the expectation level display using the effect EF may be changed during the period of image change production.

In the image change production, production may be performed in conjunction with a light guide plate or other production means. Further, in accordance with the image change effect performed on the screen of the first image display device 70, a linked effect may be performed on the screen of the second image display device 71. For example, the screen of the second image display device 71 is darkened in accordance with the effect of making the periphery of the screen of the first image display device 70 relatively dark by setting the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2 to the second state. Examples of such activities include:

In the image change performance, predetermined images such as the performance pattern 70a and the hold icon are not included in the change display, and the performance pattern 70a and the hold icon are fixedly displayed in the same position as the normal display, for example, in the same way as the normal display. It may be displayed (FIG. 149(a)). In the image change performance, a predetermined image such as a pending icon may not be included in the change display, and the pending icon or the like may be erased or hidden from view during the execution period of the image change performance ( Figure 149(b)). In addition, in the image change effect, a predetermined image such as the effect pattern 70a or a hold icon included in the change display may be displayed in the same manner as the normal display, for example, by fixedly displaying it at the same position as the normal display. .

The system information IF1, which includes characters included in the normal display (FIG. 150(a)) to guide right-handed players, and the game information IF2, which includes characters that indicate the number of time savings after a jackpot game ends, are displayed on the screen. The information may be displayed as follows in the image display effect. For example, in the image change effect, the system information IF1 may be displayed in the same way as the normal display, such as not including the system information IF1 in the change display and displaying the system information IF1 fixedly at the same position as the normal display (FIG. 150(b)). . Furthermore, in the image change effect, the game information IF2 may be included in the change display (FIG. 150(b)). In this case, an image showing the same information as the reduced game information IF2 in the change display may be enlarged and displayed overlapping the change display.

In the image change production, an effect EF may be displayed that associates the change display with the movable members 73, 74 that perform the production operation in the second mode (FIG. 151(a)). In the image change effect, for example, the movement effect and/or effect EF of the movable members 73 and 74 in the second mode, such as a change display changing position by being pushed or pulled by the second movable member 74; The change may be linked with the change in the change display (FIGS. 151(b) and 151(c)).

The image change effect can be executed at various timings in association with other effects. For example, an image change effect may be performed during the continuous look-ahead effect.

The start or end of execution of the image change effect (the start of reducing the normally displayed image or the return of the changed image to the normal display) may be associated with the operation of an operating means such as a button operation of the effect button device 16. . For example, when the image change effect becomes executable, a button image may be displayed on the screen to guide the button operation, and when the button operation is performed, the image change effect may be started. Note that if the button image is used in common in a plurality of presentation modes, the amount of data can be compressed. Furthermore, when a predetermined condition (for example, long press or repeated press) is established by operating the operating means such as button operation of the production button device 16, the change display or the effect EF or image displayed together with the change display is changed (for example, , the glass may break). At this time, each time a predetermined condition (for example, a long press or a repeated press) is satisfied by operating the operating means, the change display or the change in the effect EF or image displayed together with the change display progresses (for example, the glass gradually changes). ).

The image change effect may be selectable from a plurality of patterns. For example, a plurality of patterns are set, such as an image change effect having a change display in which the effect pattern 70a and the background image HG change together, and an image change effect having a change display in which the effect pattern 70a is not included and the background image HG changes. You can leave it there.

The changing display may be a single image or a combination of separate images moving in sync. For example, by forming an image larger than the displayable area of the screen, the frame image GG can be made invisible in normal display (Fig. 152(a)), and a change display smaller than the displayable area of the screen can be made. By changing, the frame image GG may be displayed on the screen (FIG. 152(b)). The change display may be rotated or swung (Fig. 152(c)), deformed so as to be stretched horizontally (Fig. 152(d)), for example tilted and stretched (Fig. 152(e)), or reduced.・It can be executed in various ways, such as by enlarging it. Then, when the image change effect is finished, the change display may be changed to be larger than the displayable area of the screen (FIGS. 153(a) and 153(b)). Further, at the end of the image change effect, when switching from the change display to the normal display, a switching effect such as a whiteout that momentarily displays a white image, for example, may be inserted (FIG. 153(c)). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a loss mode ("285") (FIG. 153(d)). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (presentation operation). Then, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined losing manner (FIG. 153(e)).

The image change effect is executed in accordance with the frame update timing. At this time, in accordance with the change in the change display, other effects (sound effects, light emission, movement of accessories) other than the change display can be performed. Alternatively, other effects may be performed at timings shifted from changes in the change display. When the change display returns from a changing state to a normal display that does not change, the end timing of other effects other than the change display (sound effects, light emission, movement of accessories) that are executed in accordance with the change display is determined. The timing can be earlier or later than the change end timing of the change display, or can be the same.

At the start of the image change performance (when the change display shrinks), multiple performances (sounds, images, lighting equipment, movable accessory operation) start at the same frame update timing, and when the image change performance ends (the change display ), multiple effects (sounds, images, lighting devices, movable accessory operations) may not start at the same frame update timing.

In the image change effect, a change display is started in which a predetermined image (for example, the effect pattern 70a, background image HG, etc.) that was in the normal position in the normal display is shrunk toward the back of the screen and changes to the change position, and the change The predetermined image that was at the changed position in the display is enlarged from the back side of the screen toward the front side and returns to the normal position, thereby returning to the normal display. Here, in the image change effect, it is preferable that the start period during which the predetermined image changes from the normal position to the changed position is longer than the return period during which the predetermined image changes from the changed position to the normal position. In other words, the number of frames when the change display is reduced at the start of the image change effect (start period) may be made larger than the number of frames when the change display is expanded at the end of the image change effect (return period). In this way, by increasing the number of frames at the start of the image change effect, it is easy for the player to understand, attracts attention to the image change effect, and improves the interest of the game. Furthermore, by reducing the number of frames at the end of the image change effect, the transition to the normal display can be made quickly, which can lead to interest in the next variable effect. Here, the operations of the movable members 73 and 74 that are executed in accordance with the reduction/enlargement change of a predetermined image in the image change effect and the changes in the light emitting areas HK1 and HK2 are also executed in conjunction with the start period. , it is preferable to make the time longer than those executed in conjunction with the recovery period.

Although a specific example of moving the movable members 73, 74 in the image change production has been described above, it is not necessary to move the movable members 73, 74, and the movable accessories 73, 74 may be stopped during the execution period of the image change production. You can.

(If the conditions are not met in the production control section)
Next, a case will be described in which the production control section 130m cannot normally receive the command and the predetermined conditions are not met in the production control section 130m. The case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command means, for example, that the command is not received due to a disconnection, half-disconnection, or disconnection of the command line connecting the main control board 110 and the production control board 130, or the like. , communication abnormalities such as abnormal reception of commands due to garbled commands due to noise or half-disconnection are possible. In addition, in the following explanation, the time when the production control unit 130m is able to receive a command normally is expressed as “〇” in the figure, and the time when a predetermined state in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally is expressed. , is represented by an "x" in the figure. During a predetermined period from when a predetermined state in which a command cannot be received normally occurs until before a command can be received normally, one or more commands of the same type and/or different types may not be received normally. . In addition, the command is written as "cd" in the figure.

The effect patterns 70a displayed on the first image display device 70 in the normal gaming state decorate a rectangular base image, a character image CG consisting of a predetermined character, a bar-shaped image SG that is a part of the character, and the background of the character. It is assumed that it is composed of a decorative part made up of a pattern effect image ZE, and an identification part made up of a hexagonal base image and a numeric part (identification characters). Further, it is assumed that the effect pattern 70a displayed on the first image display device 70 in a specific game state is composed only of an identification part consisting of a number part (identification character).

In the normal gaming state, it is assumed that the background images corresponding to each of the production modes A to C are scrolling left and right (reciprocating motion). Further, in the specific game state, it is assumed that the background images corresponding to each of the production modes D to E are scrolling left and right (reciprocating motion).

In addition, predetermined detection sensors (starting port detection switches 45a, 47a, magnetic detection sensor 53a)
, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), an abnormality notification (error notification) is immediately provided. On the other hand, in the case of a command abnormality due to disconnection of the connector of the command line for communication between the main control board 110 and the production control board 130, no abnormality notification is performed.

In the following specific example, we will explain a case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive commands in the normal gaming state, but even if the gaming state is a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state), the basic The flow is similar to the normal game state.

Specifically, the first reservation number, the first special symbol storage designation command, the first special symbol, the first special symbol display 60, the first special symbol reservation display 63, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-first 1 pending display 83, 1st pending number display area 70E, 1st pending icon display area 70B, 1st lamp pattern, and 1st starting port 45, respectively, by 2nd pending number, 2nd special symbol memory designation command, 2 special symbol, 2nd special symbol display 61, 2nd special symbol pending display 64, sub 2nd variable display 82, sub 2nd pending display 84, 2nd pending number display area 70F, 2nd pending icon display It may be read as the area 70D, the second lamp pattern, and the second starting port 47.

(Specific example 1 when conditions are not met in the production control section)
Specific example 1 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command and the predetermined conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m will be described using FIGS. 154 and 155. FIG. 154 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the performance control unit 130m, and FIG. 155 is an example of performance corresponding to the timing chart of FIG. 154.

At timing P1, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60, and a gaming state designation command, a performance symbol designation command, and a fluctuation pattern designation are sent as start commands from the main control unit 110m. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the command, variable display of the 1-lamp symbol on the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81 is started (see FIG. 155(a)).

At timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating motion (acting motion) (see FIG. 155(b)).

At timing P3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the production control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command, abbreviated as symbol confirmation CD in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the command to end the variable production is Processing takes place. At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("285") (see FIG. 155(c)), and the sub-first The first lamp pattern on the variable display 81 is stopped in a losing manner (for example, turned off).

At the P4 timing, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, production symbol designation command, and fluctuation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a, the special symbol TZ and The variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as operating a part of the decorative part and enlarging/reducing the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155(d)) reference). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 155(e)).

At timing P5, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (effecting operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 155(f)).

At the timing of P6, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the sub-first variable display 81 is displayed. The period of the fluctuating display of the first lamp pattern is extended, and the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 155(f)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion).

At the timing of P7, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts to fluctuate display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the production symbol specification command and the fluctuation pattern specification command. If it cannot be received, the variable display of the 1-lamp symbol on the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 is not started. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the sub-first variable display 81 is displayed. The period of the fluctuating display of the first lamp pattern is extended, and the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 155(f)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion).

At the timing of P8, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the temporary stop of the production symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation The period of variable display of the first lamp pattern on the display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(f)).

At the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the performance control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable performance is performed. At this time, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined losing manner (see FIG. 155(g)), and the sub-first variable display 81 In the first lamp pattern, the main lamp pattern stops (for example, goes out).

At timing P10, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, while the production control unit 130m normally receives the gaming state specification command and the fluctuation pattern specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the production symbol specification command. If it cannot be received, the variable display of the 1-lamp symbol on the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 will not be started. At this time, the production pattern 70a comes to a final stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in a predetermined loss mode, and the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is in a loss mode (for example, turned off). The main stop state continues (see FIG. 155(g)).

At the timing of P11, even if a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the final stop of the performance symbol 70a, the final stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and The main stop period of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(g)).

At timing P12, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the final stop of the production symbol 70a, the final stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and , the period during which the first lamp pattern is permanently stopped on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(g)).

At timing P13, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, while the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command and production symbol designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the fluctuation pattern specification command. If it cannot be received, the variable display of the 1-lamp symbol on the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 will not be started. At this time, the production pattern 70a comes to a final stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in a predetermined loss mode, and the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is in a loss mode (for example, turned off). The main stop state continues (see FIG. 155(g)).

At the timing of P14, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the main stop of the performance symbol 70a, the main stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub The period during which the first lamp pattern is permanently stopped on the first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(g)).

At timing P15, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the production control unit 130m can normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the final stop of the production symbol 70a, the final stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, And, the period of the main stop of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(g)).

At timing P16, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, production symbol designation command, and fluctuation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a, the special symbol TZ and The variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as operating a part of the decorative part and enlarging/reducing the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155(h) reference). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 155(i)).

Although the production control unit 130m was able to successfully receive the command sent from the main control unit 110m, based on the reception of this command, the production command sent from the production control unit 130m is not displayed/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/ Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, the same processing as when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the commands sent from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

In specific example 1, the production control unit 130m sets a first condition (gaming state specification command) regarding the designation of the gaming state, a second condition (production symbol specification command) regarding the designation of the performance symbol 70a, and a designation of the performance pattern of the performance symbol. If the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is satisfied (normal reception), the variation of the production pattern 70a is started, and if the fourth condition (special pattern confirmation command) regarding the stop of variation of the production pattern 70a is not satisfied (missed), The swing is made to fluctuate with a performance pattern 70a determined based on a second condition (performance pattern designation command). On the other hand, in the performance control unit 130m, although the first condition regarding the designation of the gaming state (gaming state designation command) is satisfied (normal reception), the second condition regarding the designation of the performance symbol 70a (the performance symbol designation command) and the performance If at least one of the third conditions (fluctuation pattern specification command) regarding designation of the symbol production pattern is not satisfied (missed), (regardless of whether the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) is satisfied (normal reception) or missing abnormality) , the variation of the effect pattern 70a is not started. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a malfunction has occurred in the performance control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Specific example 2 when conditions are not met in the production control section)
With reference to FIGS. 155 and 156, a second specific example will be described in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally and the predetermined conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m. FIG. 156 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the performance control unit 130m, and specific example 2 will be described with reference to the performance example of FIG. 155.

At the timing of P1, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, production symbol designation command, and variation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a, special symbol The variable display of one lamp pattern on the TZ and the sub-first variable display 81 is started (see FIG. 155(a)). At this time, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60.

At timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating motion (acting motion) (see FIG. 155(b)).

At timing P3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the production control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command, abbreviated as symbol confirmation CD in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the command to end the variable production is Processing takes place. At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("285") (see FIG. 155(c)), and the sub-first The first lamp pattern on the variable display 81 is stopped in a losing manner (for example, turned off).

At the P4 timing, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, production symbol designation command, and fluctuation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a, the special symbol TZ and The variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as operating a part of the decorative part and enlarging/reducing the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155(d)) reference). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 155(e)).

At timing P5, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (effecting operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 155(f)).

At timing P6, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 in a losing manner. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH continue, the performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the sub-first variable display 81 is displayed. The period of the fluctuating display of the first lamp pattern is extended, and the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuating period (see FIG. 155(f)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion).

At the timing of P7, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts to fluctuate display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the production symbol designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command. When receiving, the variable display of the production symbol 70a is started, and the variable display of the 1 lamp symbol on the special symbol TZ and the sub-first variable display 81 is continued. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as operating a part of the decorative part or enlarging/contracting the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155(h) reference). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 155(i)). At this time, the temporarily stopped effect pattern 70a may be displayed in a variable manner as it is, but it may be stopped (for a moment), erased, or rewritten, and then the variable display of the effect pattern 70a may be started.

At timing P8, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing manner. At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (effecting operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 155(f)).

At the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the sub-first variable display 81 is displayed. The period of the fluctuating display of the first lamp pattern is extended, and the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 155(f)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion).

At timing P10, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, production design designation command, and variation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the variation display of the performance symbols 70a starts. At the same time, the special symbol TZ and the 1-lamp symbol are continuously displayed in a variable manner on the sub-first variable display 81. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as operating a part of the decorative part or enlarging/contracting the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155(h) reference). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 155(i)). At this time, the temporarily stopped effect pattern 70a may be displayed in a variable manner as it is, but it may be stopped (for a moment), erased, or rewritten, and then the variable display of the effect pattern 70a may be started.

At timing P11, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing manner. At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating motion (acting motion) (see FIG. 155(f)).

At timing P12, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the production control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command, abbreviated as symbol confirmation CD in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the command to end the variable production is Processing takes place. At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined losing manner (see FIG. 155(g)), and the sub-first variable display 81 The main stop occurs when the first lamp pattern is in a losing state (for example, turned off).

At timing P13, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, production symbol designation command, and fluctuation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a, the special symbol TZ and The variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as operating a part of the decorative part or enlarging/contracting the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155(h) reference). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 155(i)).

Although the production control unit 130m was able to successfully receive the command sent from the main control unit 110m, based on the reception of this command, the production command sent from the production control unit 130m is not displayed/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/ Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, the same processing as when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the commands sent from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

In specific example 2, the performance control unit 130m sets a first condition regarding the gaming state (gaming state designation command), a second condition regarding the performance symbol 70a (performance symbol designation command), and a first condition regarding the performance pattern (variation pattern) of the performance symbol 70a. When the 3rd condition (variation pattern designation command) is satisfied, the first state starts the fluctuating production, and when the 4th condition (special symbol confirmation command) regarding stopping the variation of the production symbol 70a is insufficient, based on the second condition. The determined effect pattern 70a enters a second state in which swing fluctuation can be executed. On the other hand, in the performance control unit 130m, if the first condition (gaming state designation command) is insufficient but the second condition (performance symbol designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) are satisfied, the The state is such that the same fluctuation performance as in the first state is started, and if the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) is insufficient, the state becomes a state in which the same swing fluctuation as in the second state can be executed. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a malfunction has occurred in the performance control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In specific example 2, when the performance control unit 130m satisfies the predetermined conditions regarding the performance symbols 70a (performance symbol designation command, variation pattern designation command), regardless of whether the conditions regarding the gaming state (gaming state designation command) are satisfied or not. , the fluctuation performance of the performance pattern 70a is started, and if the conditions for stopping the fluctuation of the performance pattern 70a (special pattern confirmation command) are insufficient, the fluctuation fluctuation is started with the performance pattern 70a determined based on the predetermined condition performance pattern designation command). It is doable. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a malfunction has occurred in the production control section 130m, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

(Specific example 3 when conditions are not met in the production control section)
Using FIG. 155 and FIG. 157, a third specific example will be described in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally and the predetermined conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m. FIG. 157 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the performance control unit 130m, and specific example 3 will be described with reference to the performance example of FIG. 155.

At the timing of P1, when the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the game state designation command, production design designation command, and variation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a, the special symbol The variable display of one lamp pattern on the TZ and the sub-first variable display 81 is started (see FIG. 155(a)). At this time, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60.

At timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating motion (acting motion) (see FIG. 155(b)).

At timing P3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the production control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command, abbreviated as symbol confirmation CD in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the command to end the variable production is Processing takes place. At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("285") (see FIG. 155(c)), and the sub-first The first lamp pattern on the variable display 81 is stopped in a losing manner (for example, turned off).

At the P4 timing, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, production symbol designation command, and fluctuation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a, the special symbol TZ and The variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as operating a part of the decorative part and enlarging/reducing the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155(d)) reference). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 155(e)).

At timing P5, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (effecting operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 155(f)).

At the timing of P6, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the sub-first variable display 81 is displayed. The period of the fluctuating display of the first lamp pattern is extended, and the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 155(f)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion).

At the timing of P7, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts to fluctuate display of the first special symbol. At this time, if the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive any of the game state designation commands, performance design designation commands, and fluctuation pattern designation commands as start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a, the special symbol The variable display of one lamp pattern on the TZ and the sub-first variable display 81 is not started. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the sub-first variable display 81 is displayed. The period of the fluctuating display of the first lamp pattern is extended, and the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 155(f)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion).

At the timing of P8, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the temporary stop of the production symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation The period of variable display of the first lamp pattern on the display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(f)).

At the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the performance control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable performance is performed. At this time, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined losing manner (see FIG. 155(g)), and the sub-first variable display 81 In this case, the first lamp pattern is turned off (for example, turned off) and the main lamp stops.

At timing P10, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, while the production control section 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command and production symbol specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control section 110m, the production control section 130m cannot normally receive the fluctuation pattern specification command. When receiving, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the 1 lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is not started. At this time, the production pattern 70a comes to a final stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 shows a losing mode (for example, turned off). The main stop state continues (see FIG. 155(g)).

At the timing of P11, even if a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the final stop of the performance symbol 70a, the final stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and The main stop period of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(g)).

At timing P12, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the final stop of the production symbol 70a, the final stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and , the period during which the first lamp pattern is permanently stopped on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(g)).

At timing P13, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts to fluctuate display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control section 130m cannot normally receive the gaming state specification command and the fluctuation pattern specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control section 110m, the production control section 130m cannot normally receive the production symbol specification command. When receiving, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the 1 lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is not started. At this time, the production pattern 70a comes to a final stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 shows a losing mode (for example, turned off). The main stop state continues (see FIG. 155(g)).

At the timing of P14, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the main stop of the performance symbol 70a, the main stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub The period during which the first lamp pattern is permanently stopped on the first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(g)).

At timing P15, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the production control unit 130m can normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the final stop of the production symbol 70a, the final stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, And, the period of the main stop of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(g)).

At timing P16, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, production symbol designation command, and fluctuation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a, the special symbol TZ and The variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as operating a part of the decorative part and enlarging/reducing the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155(h) reference). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 155(i)).

Although the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command sent from the main control unit 110m, the production command sent from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command is not displayed/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/ Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, the same processing as when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the commands sent from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

In specific example 3, the performance control unit 130m sets a first condition regarding the gaming state (gaming state designation command), a second condition regarding the performance symbol 70a (performance symbol designation command), and a first condition regarding the performance pattern (variation pattern) of the performance symbol 70a. When the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is satisfied, the variation performance of the production pattern 70a is started, and when the fourth condition (special pattern confirmation command) regarding the stop of variation of the production pattern 70a is insufficient, the second condition (production pattern It is possible to execute the swing fluctuation with the effect pattern 70a determined based on the designated command). On the other hand, in the production control unit 130m, when the first condition (gaming state specification command) is insufficient and at least one of the second condition (production symbol specification command) and the third condition (variation pattern specification command) is insufficient. , it is possible to control so as not to start the variable presentation of the presentation pattern 70a. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a malfunction has occurred in the performance control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Specific example 4 when conditions are not met in the production control section)
Using FIG. 155 and FIG. 158, a specific example 4 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally and the predetermined conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 158 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the effect control section 130m, and specific example 4 will be described with reference to the example of effect shown in FIG. 155.

At the timing of P1, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, production symbol designation command, and variation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a, special symbol The variable display of one lamp pattern on the TZ and the sub-first variable display 81 is started (see FIG. 155(a)). At this time, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60.

At timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating motion (acting motion) (see FIG. 155(b)).

At timing P3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the production control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command, abbreviated as symbol confirmation CD in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the command to end the variable production is Processing takes place. At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("285") (see FIG. 155(c)), and the sub-first The first lamp pattern on the variable display 81 is stopped in a losing manner (for example, turned off).

At the P4 timing, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, while the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the production symbol specification command and the fluctuation pattern specification command. When not received, the fluctuating display of the 1-lamp symbol on the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81 is not started, and the final stop of the production symbol 70a, the final stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and , the period during which the first lamp pattern is permanently stopped on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At timing P5, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 The stop period of the 1 lamp pattern is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At timing P6, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. Even if the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the variable production has not started, the main stop of the production pattern 70a, the special The period of the main stop of the fluctuation display of the symbol TZ and the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P7, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts to fluctuate display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m normally receives the gaming state specification command and the fluctuation pattern specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the production symbol specification command. If it cannot be received, the variable display of the 1-lamp symbol on the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 will not be started. Therefore, the period of the main stop of the production pattern 70a, the main stop of the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the main stop of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (FIG. 155(c) reference).

At the timing of P8, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the temporary stop of the production symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation The period of variable display of the first lamp pattern on the display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. Even if the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the variable production has not started, the production pattern 70a is The periods of the stop, the main stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At timing P10, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, while the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command and production symbol designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the fluctuation pattern specification command. If it cannot be received, the variable display of the 1-lamp symbol on the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 is not started. Therefore, the period of the main stop of the production pattern 70a, the main stop of the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the main stop of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (FIG. 155(c) reference).

At the timing P11, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the temporary stop of the production symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation The period of variable display of the first lamp pattern on the display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At timing P12, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. Even if the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the fluctuating production has not started, so the production pattern 70a is The periods of the stop, the main stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At timing P13, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts to fluctuate display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the game state designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the production symbol designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command. When receiving, variable display of the effect pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as operating a part of the decorative part and enlarging/reducing the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155(d)) reference). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 155(e)).

At timing P14, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating motion (acting motion) (see FIG. 155(f)).

At timing P15, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the sub-first variable display 81 is displayed. The period of the fluctuating display of the first lamp pattern is extended, and the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 155(f)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion).

At timing P16, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, production symbol designation command, and fluctuation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a, the special symbol TZ and The variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as operating a part of the decorative part or enlarging/contracting the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155(h) reference). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 155(i)). At this time, the temporarily stopped effect pattern 70a may be displayed in a variable manner as it is, but it may be stopped (for a moment), erased, or rewritten, and then the variable display of the effect pattern 70a may be started.

The steps after P17 are as described above.

Although the production control unit 130m was able to successfully receive the command sent from the main control unit 110m, based on the reception of this command, the production command sent from the production control unit 130m is not displayed/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/ Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, the same processing as when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the commands sent from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

In specific example 4, the performance control unit 130m satisfies the first condition regarding the gaming state (gaming state designation command), but the second condition regarding the performance symbol 70a (performance symbol designation command) and the performance pattern (variation) of the performance symbol 70a. If at least one of the third conditions (variation pattern designation command) regarding the variation pattern is insufficient, control is possible so as not to start the variation effect. On the other hand, in the production control unit 130m, if the first condition (gaming state specification command) is insufficient while the second condition (production symbol specification command) and third condition (fluctuation pattern specification command) are satisfied, the production When the symbol fluctuation is started and the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) is insufficient, the fluctuation fluctuation can be executed with the performance symbol 70a determined based on the second condition (the performance symbol designation command). By doing so, it is easy to understand that a malfunction has occurred in the performance control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Specific example 5 when conditions are not met in the production control section)
Specific example 1 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command and the predetermined conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m will be described using FIGS. 155 and 159. FIG. 159 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the performance control unit 130m, and specific example 5 will be described with reference to the performance example of FIG. 155.

At the timing of P1, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, production symbol designation command, and variation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a, special symbol The variable display of one lamp pattern on the TZ and the sub-first variable display 81 is started (see FIG. 155(a)). At this time, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60.

At timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating motion (acting motion) (see FIG. 155(b)).

At timing P3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the production control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command, abbreviated as symbol confirmation CD in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the command to end the variable production is Processing takes place. At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("285") (see FIG. 155(c)), and the sub-first The first lamp pattern on the variable display 81 is stopped in a losing manner (for example, turned off).

At the P4 timing, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, while the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the production symbol designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command. When not received, the fluctuating display of the 1 lamp symbol on the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the sub-first variation display 81 is not started, and the final stop of the production symbol 70a, the final stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and , the period during which the first lamp pattern is permanently stopped on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At timing P5, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 The stop period of the 1 lamp pattern is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At timing P6, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. Even if the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the variable production has not started, the main stop of the production pattern 70a, the special The period of the main stop of the fluctuation display of the symbol TZ and the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At timing P7, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, while the production control section 130m normally receives the gaming state specification command and the fluctuation pattern specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control section 110m, the production control section 130m does not normally receive the production symbol specification command. When not received, the fluctuating display of the 1-lamp symbol on the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81 is not started, and the final stop of the production symbol 70a, the final stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and , the period during which the first lamp pattern is permanently stopped on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P8, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 The stop period of the 1 lamp pattern is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. Even if the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the variable production has not started, the main stop of the production pattern 70a, The period of the main stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the main stop of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At timing P10, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, while the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command and production symbol designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the fluctuation pattern specification command. When not received, the fluctuating display of the 1-lamp symbol on the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81 is not started, and the final stop of the production symbol 70a, the final stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and , the period during which the first lamp pattern is permanently stopped on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing P11, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 The stop period of the 1 lamp pattern is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At timing P12, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. Even if the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the variable production has not started, the main stop of the production pattern 70a, the special The period of the main stop of the fluctuation display of the symbol TZ and the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At timing P13, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive any of the game state designation commands, production symbol designation commands, and fluctuation pattern designation commands as start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a, the special symbol The variable display of the 1 lamp symbol on the TZ and the sub-first variable display 81 is not started, and the main stop of the production pattern 70a, the main stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the main stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 The main stop period of the first lamp pattern is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At timing P14, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 The stop period of the 1 lamp pattern is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At timing P15, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. Even if the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the variable production has not started, the main stop of the production pattern 70a, the special The period of the main stop of the fluctuation display of the symbol TZ and the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At timing P16, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, while the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the gaming state designation command and production symbol designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the fluctuation pattern specification command. When receiving, the fluctuating display of the 1-lamp symbol on the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81 is not started, the final stop of the production symbol 70a, the final stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and , the main stop period of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At the timing P17, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 The stop period of the 1 lamp pattern is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At timing P18, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. Even if the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the variable production has not started, the main stop of the production pattern 70a, The period of the main stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the main stop of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At timing P19, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, while the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the gaming state specification command and the fluctuation pattern specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the production symbol specification command. When receiving, the fluctuating display of the 1-lamp symbol on the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81 is not started, the final stop of the production symbol 70a, the final stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and , the period during which the first lamp pattern is permanently stopped on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At timing P20, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 The stop period of the 1 lamp pattern is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At timing P21, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. Even if the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the variable production has not started, the main stop of the production pattern 70a, the special The period of the main stop of the fluctuation display of the symbol TZ and the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(c)).

At timing P22, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, production symbol designation command, and fluctuation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a, the special symbol TZ and The variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as operating a part of the decorative part and enlarging/reducing the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155(h) reference). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 155(i)).

Although the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command sent from the main control unit 110m, the production command sent from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command is not displayed/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/ Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, the same processing as when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the commands sent from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

In specific example 5, when the performance control unit 130m lacks the predetermined conditions regarding the performance symbols 70a (performance symbol designation commands, fluctuation pattern designation commands), the conditions regarding the gaming state (game state designation command) and the fluctuation stop of the performance symbols 70a are set. It is possible to control so that the variable production does not start regardless of whether the related conditions (special symbol confirmation command) are satisfied or insufficient. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a malfunction has occurred in the production control section 130m, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

(Specific example 6 when conditions are not met in the production control section)
Using FIG. 155 and FIG. 160, a specific example 6 will be described in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally and the predetermined conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m. FIG. 160 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the effect control section 130m, and specific example 6 will be described with reference to the example of effect shown in FIG. 155.

At the timing of P1, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, production symbol designation command, and variation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a, special symbol The variable display of one lamp pattern on the TZ and the sub-first variable display 81 is started (see FIG. 155(a)). At this time, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60.

At timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating motion (acting motion) (see FIG. 155(b)).

At timing P3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the production control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command, abbreviated as symbol confirmation CD in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the command to end the variable production is Processing takes place. At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("285") (see FIG. 155(c)), and the sub-first The first lamp pattern on the variable display 81 is stopped in a losing manner (for example, turned off).

At the P4 timing, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, while the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the production symbol designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command. When receiving, variable display of the effect pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as operating a part of the decorative part and enlarging/reducing the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155(d)) reference). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 155(e)).

At timing P5, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (effecting operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 155(f)).

At the timing of P6, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the sub-first variable display 81 is displayed. The period of the fluctuating display of the first lamp pattern is extended, and the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 155(f)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion).

At the timing of P7, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts to fluctuate display of the first special symbol. At this time, if the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive any of the game state designation commands, performance design designation commands, and fluctuation pattern designation commands as start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a, the special symbol The variable display of one lamp pattern on the TZ and the sub-first variable display 81 is not started. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the sub-first variable display 81 is displayed. The period of the fluctuating display of the first lamp pattern is extended, and the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 155(f)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion).

At the timing of P8, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the temporary stop of the production symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation The period of variable display of the first lamp pattern on the display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(f)).

At the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the performance control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable performance is performed. At this time, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined losing manner (see FIG. 155(g)), and the sub-first variable display 81 In the first lamp pattern, the main lamp pattern stops (for example, goes out).

At timing P10, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, while the production control section 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command and production symbol specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control section 110m, the production control section 130m cannot normally receive the fluctuation pattern specification command. When receiving, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the 1 lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is not started. At this time, the production pattern 70a comes to a final stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 shows a losing mode (for example, turned off). The main stop state continues (see FIG. 155(g)).

At the timing of P11, even if a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the final stop of the performance symbol 70a, the final stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and The main stop period of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(g)).

At timing P12, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the fluctuating production has not started, so the main stop of the production symbol 70a, the special symbol The period of the main stop of the TZ fluctuation display and the main stop of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(g)).

At timing P13, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts to fluctuate display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control section 130m cannot normally receive the gaming state specification command and the fluctuation pattern specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control section 110m, the production control section 130m cannot normally receive the production symbol specification command. When receiving, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the 1 lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is not started. At this time, the production pattern 70a comes to a final stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 shows a losing mode (for example, turned off). The main stop state continues (see FIG. 155(g)).

At the timing of P14, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the main stop of the performance symbol 70a, the main stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub The period during which the first lamp pattern is permanently stopped on the first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(g)).

At timing P15, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the production control unit 130m can normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the final stop of the production symbol 70a, the final stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, And, the period of the main stop of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 155(g)).

At timing P16, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, production symbol designation command, and fluctuation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a, the special symbol TZ and The variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as operating a part of the decorative part or enlarging/contracting the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155(h) reference). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 155(i)).

Although the production control unit 130m was able to successfully receive the command sent from the main control unit 110m, based on the reception of this command, the production command sent from the production control unit 130m is not displayed/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/ Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, the same processing as when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the commands sent from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

In specific example 6, although the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state is insufficient in the performance control unit 130m, the second condition (performance design designation command) regarding the performance symbol 70a and the performance pattern (variation) of the performance symbol 70a are insufficient. If the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) regarding the pattern) is satisfied, the fluctuating performance is started, and if the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) regarding stopping the fluctuation of the performance symbol 70a is insufficient, the second condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) is satisfied. It is possible to execute the swing fluctuation with the effect pattern 70a determined based on the designated command). On the other hand, in the production control unit 130m, when the first condition (gaming state specification command) is insufficient and at least one of the second condition (production symbol specification command) and the third condition (variation pattern specification command) is insufficient. , it is possible to control the variable performance so as not to start it. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a malfunction has occurred in the performance control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Specific example 7 when conditions are not met in the production control section)
Using FIG. 161, a seventh specific example will be described in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally and the predetermined conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m. FIG. 161 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the production control section 130m.

At timing P1, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the gaming state designation command (gaming state A), production symbol specification command, and fluctuation pattern specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a , the special symbol TZ and the variable display of one lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are started. Note that the internal state of the production control unit 130m is determined to be the gaming state A based on the gaming state designation command that designates the gaming state A. In addition, the performance control unit 130m stores a reception history of gaming state designation commands.

At timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing manner. At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (acting operation).

At timing P3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the production control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command, abbreviated as symbol confirmation CD in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the command to end the variable production is Processing takes place. At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode, and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 changes to a loss mode ( For example, the main operation is stopped when the light is turned off).

At the P4 timing, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the gaming state designation command (gaming state A), production symbol specification command, and fluctuation pattern specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a , the special symbol TZ and the variable display of one lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are started. In this case, the production control unit 130m determines that the gaming state designation command that designates the gaming state A received at the timing P4 has the same content as the reception history of the previous gaming state designation command (gaming state A) received at the timing P1. Since it is a command, the internal state remains in gaming state A. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as operating a part of the decorative part and enlarging/contracting the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155(d)) reference). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation).

At timing P5, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing manner. At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (rendering operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue.

At timing P6, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 in a losing manner. When the performance control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable performance is performed. At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode, and the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 changes to a loss mode ( For example, the main operation is stopped when the light is turned off).

At the timing of P7, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts to fluctuate display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the gaming state designation command (gaming state B), production symbol specification command, and fluctuation pattern specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a , the special symbol TZ and the variable display of one lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are started. In this case, the production control unit 130m determines that the gaming state designation command that designates the gaming state A received at the timing P7 has the same content as the reception history of the previous gaming state designation command (gaming state A) (timing P4). Since it is not a command, the internal state is switched to gaming state B. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as operating a part of the decorative part and enlarging/reducing the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155(d)) reference). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation).

At timing P8, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing manner. At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (rendering operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue.

At the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the performance control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable performance is performed. At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode, and the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 changes to a loss mode ( For example, the main operation is stopped when the light is turned off).

At timing P10, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, while the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the gaming state designation command (gaming state A) as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance control unit 130m controls the performance designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command. When the part 130m receives the signal normally, variable display of the 1-lamp pattern on the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 is started. In this case, the production control unit 130m determines that the gaming state designation command that designates gaming state A that could not be received at timing P10 is the same as the reception history of the gaming state designation command (gaming state B) last time (timing P7). Although the content is not a command, the internal state remains in gaming state B without switching to gaming state A. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as operating a part of the decorative part and enlarging/reducing the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 155(d)) reference). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation).

At timing P11, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing manner. At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (rendering operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue.

At timing P12, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the performance control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable performance is performed. At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode, and the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 changes to a loss mode ( For example, the main operation is stopped when the light is turned off).

At timing P13, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, while the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the gaming state designation command (gaming state A) and the production symbol specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the variation pattern specification command is used for production control. When the section 130m receives the signal normally, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the 1 lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is not started, and the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the 1st lamp pattern are not started. The stopped state continues. In this case, the production control unit 130m determines that the gaming state designation command that designates gaming state A that could not be received at timing P10 is the same as the gaming state designation command (gaming state B) in the previous reception history (timing P7). Although the content is not a command, the internal state remains in gaming state B without switching to gaming state A.

At the timing of P15 after passing through P14, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 in a losing manner. Even if the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the variable production has not started, so the production pattern 70a, special symbol TZ and The 1 lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 remains in a stopped state and does not change.

At timing P16, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts to fluctuate display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the gaming state designation command (gaming state A) and the fluctuation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance control unit 130m uses the production symbol designation command to control the performance. When the section 130m receives the signal normally, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the 1 lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is not started, and the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the 1st lamp pattern are not started. The stopped state continues. In this case, the production control unit 130m determines that the gaming state designation command that designates gaming state A that could not be received at timing P10 is the same as the gaming state designation command (gaming state B) in the previous reception history (timing P7). Although the content is not a command, the internal state remains in gaming state B without switching to gaming state A.

At the timing of P18 after P17, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 in a losing manner. Even if the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the variable production has not started, so the production pattern 70a, the special symbol TZ and The 1 lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 remains in a stopped state and does not change.

If, at the timing when the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60, the production control section sends a gaming state designation command (gaming state A) as a start command transmitted from the main control section 110m. 130m normally receives, but if the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive at least one of the production symbol designation command and the variation pattern specification command, the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81. 1 The fluctuating display of the lamp pattern does not start. In this case, if the gaming state of the gaming state designation command received at this timing is the same as the gaming state designation command of the previous reception history, the production control unit 130m will execute the previous game without switching the internal state. remain in the state. On the other hand, if the gaming state of the gaming state designation command received at this timing is not the same as the gaming state designation command of the previous reception history, the production control unit 130m uses the current gaming state designation command as the gaming state designation command. The internal state is switched to the gaming state determined based on the above.

Although the production control unit 130m was able to successfully receive the command sent from the main control unit 110m, based on the reception of this command, the production command sent from the production control unit 130m is not displayed/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/ Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, the same processing as when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the commands sent from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

In specific example 7, when the first condition (gaming state designation command) regarding designation of the gaming state is satisfied (normal reception), the performance control unit 130m executes the game determined based on the first condition (gaming state designation command). If the state is the same gaming state as the previously designated first condition (gaming state designation command), the gaming state known by the production control unit 130m is not changed. On the other hand, if the gaming state determined based on the first condition (gaming state designation command) is different from the previously specified first condition gaming state designation command), the gaming state known to the sub The game state is changed to the one determined based on the first condition (game state designation command). In addition, in the performance control unit 130m, if the first condition (gaming state designation command) regarding the designation of the game state is not satisfied (missed), other conditions (the second condition (special symbol designation command) regarding the designation of performance symbols and the performance Regardless of the third condition (performance pattern designation command) regarding designation of the symbol performance pattern, the game state is not changed. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a malfunction has occurred in the performance control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Specific example 8 when conditions are not met in the production control section)
Using FIG. 162, a specific example 8 will be described in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally and the predetermined conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m. FIG. 162 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the production control section 130m.

As shown in FIG. 162(a), at timing P1, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, if the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, performance symbol designation command (winning symbol), and variation pattern designation command (winning performance) as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m. , the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of one lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are started. In this case, if the performance symbol 70a determined based on the performance symbol designation command is a winning one and the fluctuation pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern designation command is a winning one, a variable performance is started.

At timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing manner. At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (acting operation).

At timing P3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the production control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command, abbreviated as symbol confirmation CD in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the command to end the variable production is Processing takes place. At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode, and the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 changes to a loss mode ( For example, the main operation is stopped when the light is turned off).

At the P4 timing, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m receives a gaming state designation command, a performance design designation command (winning symbol), and a variation pattern designation command (loss performance) as a start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, The variable display of the 1-lamp symbol on the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81 does not start, and the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the 1st lamp symbol on the sub-first variation display 81 stop. kept in condition. In this way, if the performance symbol 70a determined based on the performance symbol designation command is a winning one, but the fluctuation pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern designation command is a losing one, the fluctuation performance is not started.

As shown in FIG. 162(b), at timing P1, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, if the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, performance symbol designation command (losing symbol), and variation pattern designation command (loss performance) as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m. , the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of one lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are started. In this case, when the performance symbol 70a determined based on the performance symbol designation command is a losing one and the fluctuation pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern designation command is a losing one, a variable performance is started.

At timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing manner. At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (presentation operation).

At timing P3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the production control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command, abbreviated as symbol confirmation CD in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the command to end the variable production is Processing takes place. At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode, and the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 changes to a loss mode ( For example, the main operation is stopped when the light is turned off).

At the P4 timing, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the production control unit 130m receives a gaming state designation command, a performance symbol designation command (losing symbol), and a variation pattern designation command (winning performance) as a start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, The variable display of the 1-lamp symbol on the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81 does not start, and the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the 1st lamp symbol on the sub-first variation display 81 stop. kept in condition. In this way, if the performance symbol 70a determined based on the performance symbol designation command is a losing one, whereas the fluctuation pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern designation command is a winning one, the fluctuation performance is not started.

Although the production control unit 130m was able to successfully receive the command sent from the main control unit 110m, based on the reception of this command, the production command sent from the production control unit 130m is not displayed/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/ Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, the same processing as when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the commands sent from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

In specific example 8, the performance control unit 130m determines that the performance symbol 70a determined based on the second condition (performance symbol designation command) regarding the designation of the performance symbol 70a is a winning one, and that the performance pattern of the performance symbol 70a ( When the variation pattern determined based on the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the designation of the variation pattern (variation pattern) is a winning one, it is possible to start varying the production symbols 70a. Similarly, in the performance control unit 130m, the performance pattern 70a determined based on the second condition (performance design designation command) regarding the designation of the performance pattern 70a is determined to be a loss, and the performance pattern regarding the designation of the performance pattern 70a is determined. If the variation pattern determined based on the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is a losing one, it is possible to start varying the production symbol 70a. On the other hand, in the performance control unit 130m, (a first condition (gaming state designation command) regarding the designation of the game state, a second condition (performance design designation command) regarding the designation of the performance symbol 70a, and a performance pattern of the performance symbol 70a), Even when the third condition regarding designation (fluctuation pattern designation command) is satisfied (received), the performance pattern 70a determined based on the second condition (performance design designation command) regarding the designation of the performance pattern 70a, and the performance. If the hit/loss is different from the variation pattern determined based on the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding designation of the production pattern of the symbol 70a, the variation of the production pattern 70a is not started. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a malfunction has occurred in the performance control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Specific example 9 when conditions are not met in the production control section)
Using FIG. 163, a specific example 9 will be described in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally and the predetermined conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m. FIG. 163 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the production control section 130m.

As shown in FIG. 163(a), at timing P1, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, a game state designation command, a production symbol designation command (for the first special symbol), and a fluctuation pattern designation command (for the first special symbol) as a start command transmitted from the main control section 110m are transmitted from the production control section 130m. When received normally, variable display of the 1 lamp pattern on the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 is started. In this case, the production pattern 70a determined based on the production pattern designation command is for the first special symbol, and the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern designation command is for the first special symbol. If so, start a variable performance.

At timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing manner. At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (acting operation).

At timing P3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the production control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command, abbreviated as symbol confirmation CD in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the command to end the variable production is Processing takes place. At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode, and the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 changes to a loss mode ( For example, the main operation is stopped when the light is turned off).

At the P4 timing, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, a game state designation command, a production symbol designation command (for the first special symbol), and a fluctuation pattern designation command (for the second special symbol) as a start command transmitted from the main control section 110m are transmitted from the production control section 130m. is received, the variable display of the 1 lamp symbol on the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81 is not started, and the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the 1 lamp symbol on the sub-first variation display 81 are not started. 1 lamp pattern is kept in a stopped state. In this way, the production pattern 70a determined based on the production pattern designation command is for the first special symbol, whereas the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern designation command is for the second special symbol. If it is, the variable performance will not start.

As shown in FIG. 163(b), at timing P1, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, a game state designation command, a production symbol designation command (for the second special symbol), and a fluctuation pattern designation command (for the second special symbol) as a start command transmitted from the main control section 110m are transmitted from the production control section 130m. When received normally, variable display of the 1 lamp pattern on the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 is started. In this case, the production pattern 70a determined based on the production pattern designation command is for the second special symbol, and the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern designation command is for the second special symbol. If so, start a variable performance.

At timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing manner. At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (presentation operation).

At timing P3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the production control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command, abbreviated as symbol confirmation CD in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the command to end the variable production is Processing takes place. At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode, and the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 changes to a loss mode ( For example, the main operation is stopped when the light is turned off).

At the P4 timing, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, a game state designation command, a production symbol designation command (for the second special symbol), and a fluctuation pattern designation command (for the first special symbol) as a start command transmitted from the main control section 110m are transmitted from the production control section 130m. is received, the fluctuating display of the 1 lamp symbol on the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81 is not started, and the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the 1-lamp symbol on the sub-first variation display 81 are 1 lamp pattern is kept in a stopped state. In this way, the production pattern 70a determined based on the production pattern designation command is for the second special symbol, whereas the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern designation command is for the first special symbol. If it is, the variable performance will not start.

Although the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command sent from the main control unit 110m, the production command sent from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command is not displayed/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/ Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, the same processing as when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the commands sent from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

In specific example 9, the second condition (performance symbol designation command) regarding the designation of the production symbol 70a is selected in the production control unit 130m under a predetermined winning condition (for the first special symbol or for the second special symbol). In addition, if the third condition (variable pattern designation command) regarding the designation of the performance pattern of the performance symbol is selected under the predetermined winning condition (for the first special symbol or for the second special symbol), the production symbol 70a It is possible to start the fluctuation. On the other hand, in the performance control unit 130m, (a first condition (gaming state designation command) regarding the designation of the game state, a second condition (performance design designation command) regarding the designation of the performance symbol 70a, and a performance pattern of the performance symbol 70a). Even when the third condition for designation (variation pattern designation command) is satisfied (normal reception), the second condition for designation of the production symbol 70a (production symbol designation command) does not meet the predetermined winning condition (for the first special symbol). or for the second special symbol), while the third condition (variable pattern designation command) regarding the designation of the production pattern of the production symbol 70a is selected under the predetermined winning condition (for the first special symbol or the second special symbol). (for symbols) and another winning condition (for the second special symbol or the first special symbol), the variation of the production symbol will not start. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a malfunction has occurred in the performance control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

As mentioned above, the commands sent from the main control unit 110m are exemplified as conditions for executing a predetermined control in the production control unit 130m, but the conditions are not limited to this, and other conditions such as the passage of time and operation of operation buttons can be used. It is also possible to set the event as a condition.

As shown in FIG. 164, even when the conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m (such as the above-mentioned specific examples 1 to 9), the main control unit 110m sends a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.), the above-described initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17, etc. can be performed. Specifically, during a period in which the effect pattern 70a is fluctuating even if the conditions are not met in the effect control unit 130m, the main control unit 110m When the predetermined signal from the production controller 130m is normally received, the initial operation of the movable accessory such as the first movable member 73 is executed. In addition, during a period in which the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped because the conditions are not met in the performance control unit 130m, the first movable member 73 etc. Execute the initial operation of the accessory. Furthermore, during a period in which the production pattern 70a is in a permanent halt due to conditions not being met in the production control unit 130m, if a predetermined signal from the main control unit 110m is normally received by the production control unit 130m, the production pattern 70a that has stopped is is displayed on the screen, the initial operation of the movable accessories such as the first movable member 73 is performed. In this way, in the embodiment, no matter which conditions are met (not met) in the production control section 130m, if the initial operating conditions based on the predetermined signal from the main control section 110m are satisfied, the production pattern 70a is displayed. Regardless of the aspect, an initial operation is performed. In addition, in the specific example 10, the relationship between the conditions that are aligned (not aligned) in the effect control unit 130m and the effect pattern 70a is the same as that in the specific example 1, so the explanation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 165, the detection means detects a predetermined event (start-up prize, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) even when the conditions are not met in the performance control unit 130m (such as the above-mentioned specific examples 1 to 10). If the main control means 110 (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) becomes disconnected (connector disconnected, wire breakage, etc.) while power is being supplied to the gaming machine 1, a predetermined abnormality notification is issued. (Disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed. This abnormality notification can be performed over a predetermined period of time. Specifically, in the period when the performance pattern 70a is fluctuating even if the conditions are not met in the performance control unit 130m, if the disconnection state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) occurs, a predetermined abnormality notification is executed. . In addition, when the performance control unit 130m becomes unconnected (connector disconnected, disconnected wire, etc.) during a period in which the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped due to conditions not being met, a predetermined abnormality notification is executed. Furthermore, if the performance control unit 130m becomes unconnected (connector disconnection, wire breakage, etc.) during a period in which the performance pattern 70a is at a permanent halt due to conditions not being met, a predetermined abnormality notification is executed. In this way, in the embodiment, no matter which conditions are met (or not) in the production control unit 130m, as long as the abnormality notification condition for the disconnected state is satisfied, regardless of the display mode of the production pattern 70a. , abnormality notification is executed. At this time, an abnormality notification may be made in the image display devices 70, 71 overlapping the effect pattern 70a which is in the fluctuating, temporary stop or permanent stop state, or in an area overlapping the effect pattern 70a, and the image display device 70, 71 may Abnormality notification can be performed using the image display devices 70 and 71 in various ways, such as turning off the image display device 70 and 71 to notify the abnormality. In addition, in the specific example 11, the relationship between the conditions that are aligned (not aligned) in the production control unit 130m and the production pattern 70a is the same as that of the specific example 1, so the explanation will be omitted.

Note that when the conditions are not met in the effect control unit 130m, other events, actions, effects, actions, notifications, etc. described in this embodiment may be executed in combination.

<Contents I of the invention described in this embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, when a starting condition is established, determination information on whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player is acquired and the determination information is stored. Then, when the determination condition is met, the stored determination information is determined, and a variable performance is executed according to the result of the determination, and when the variable performance results in a special result, a special game is executed. As such a gaming machine, there is a gaming machine that performs a display effect that transforms the display area of an image display device and also transforms the image being displayed within the display area (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-196126). However, there is still room for improvement in the gaming machine described above in order to improve the interest of the game.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment changes between a first mode (stopping at a standby position) and a second mode (performance operation). A movable accessory (movable members 73, 74) that can be used, and a light-emitting state that is provided on the movable accessory (73, 74) and has a first state (effect light-emitting state) in which light is emitted and a second state (for example, lights out). A first light emitting region (HK1) that can change the light emitting region (HK1) and a first light emitting region (HK1) that is provided in at least one of a plurality of parts different from the movable accessory (73, 74), and a first light emitting state (effect light emitting state) and a first light emitting region The second light emitting area comprises a second light emitting area (HK2) whose light emitting state can be changed between two states (for example, off), and display means (70, 71) capable of executing a predetermined variation effect. (HK2), and in the variable performance, the first image (for example, the performance pattern 70a of the normal display) displayed on the screen of the display means (image display devices 70, 71) and the first image When the fluctuating effect that changes to the second image (for example, the effect pattern 70a of the change display) that is changed and displayed on the screen and changes to the second image (for example, the effect pattern 70a of the change display) is performed. , a light emitting effect can be executed in which at least one of the first light emitting area (HK1) and the second light emitting area (HK2) is changed to the second state (for example, turned off), and the display means A third image (for example, a special pattern TZ) can be displayed on the screen of the (image display device 70, 71) together with the first image, and whether it is either the first image or the second image, the third image Three images (for example, special design TZ) can be displayed at the same position.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, a movable accessory (a movable member 73, 74), and a first light-emitting region provided on the movable accessory (73, 74), whose light-emitting state can be changed between a first state where light is emitted (effect light-emitting state) and a second state (for example, off). (HK1) is provided in at least one of a plurality of parts different from the movable accessory (movable members 73, 74), and is in a first state where light is emitted (effect light emitting state) and a second state (for example, off). The second light emitting region (HK2) is provided with a second light emitting region (HK2) whose light emitting state can be changed, and display means (image display devices 70, 71) capable of executing a predetermined variation effect, and the second light emitting region (HK2) is In the variable production, a first image (for example, a production pattern 70a for normal display) displayed on the screen of the display means (image display devices 70, 71) and a screen in which the first image changes and When the variable effect that changes to the second image (for example, the effect pattern 70a of the change display) is performed, the first A light emitting effect can be executed in which the light emitting region (HK1) and at least one of the second light emitting regions (HK2) are linked to change to the second state (for example, turned off), and the display means (image display device 70, 71), a third image (for example, a special pattern TZ) can be displayed together with the first image (for example, the effect pattern 70a for normal display), and the first image (for example, the effect pattern 70a for normal display) can be displayed on the screen of etc.) is changed to the second image (for example, the effect pattern 70a of the change display), the ease of visual recognition is changed, while the third image (For example, special design TZ) can be displayed without changing the visibility.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, a movable accessory (a movable member 73, 74), and a first light-emitting region provided on the movable accessory (73, 74), whose light-emitting state can be changed between a first state where light is emitted (effect light-emitting state) and a second state (for example, off). (HK1) is provided in at least one of a plurality of parts different from the movable accessory (movable members 73, 74), and is in a first state where light is emitted (effect light emitting state) and a second state (for example, off). The second light emitting region (HK2) is provided with a second light emitting region (HK2) whose light emitting state can be changed, and display means (image display devices 70, 71) capable of executing a predetermined variation effect, and the second light emitting region (HK2) is In the variable production, a first image (for example, a production pattern 70a for normal display) displayed on the screen of the display means (image display devices 70, 71) and a screen in which the first image changes and When the variable effect that changes to the second image (for example, the effect pattern 70a of the change display) is performed, the first A light emitting effect can be executed in which the light emitting region (HK1) and at least one of the second light emitting regions (HK2) are linked to change to the second state (for example, turned off), and the display means (image display device 70, 71), a third image (for example, a third image that changes in conjunction with the change from the first image (for example, the production symbol 70a for normal display) to the second image (for example, the production symbol 70a for change display) A frame image GG) can be displayed.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment II>
In a conventional gaming machine, when a starting condition is established, determination information on whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player is acquired and the determination information is stored. Then, when the determination condition is met, the stored determination information is determined, and a variable performance is executed according to the result of the determination, and when the variable performance results in a special result, a special game is executed. Some of these gaming machines include a main control board that controls the progress of the game, and a sub-control board that controls the performance of the game based on signals (commands) from the main control board (for example, JP 2019-033816 A). However, the gaming machine described above does not take into consideration the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the production control means deviate, and there is still room for improvement in order to improve the interest of the game. has been done.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a In a gaming machine (1) equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling performances according to signals (commands, etc.), a movable performance means (first movable member 73) that can operate in a predetermined manner , a second movable member 74, and a production button 17), and the production control means (production control board 130) controls the initial operation of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17). (initial operation, initial light emission) and the production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and according to the signal. A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is sent from the main control means (main control board 110) during a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the corresponding performance can be executed. is received, the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, the display means (image display devices 70, 71 can perform a fluctuating effect of the effect design (70a), and the effect control means ( In the performance control board 130), a first condition regarding the gaming state (gaming state designation command), a second condition regarding the performance symbol (70a) (performance symbol designation command), and a third condition regarding the performance pattern of the performance symbol (70a). (Fluctuating pattern designation command), the fluctuating performance is started, and if the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) regarding stopping the fluctuation of the performance symbol (70a) is insufficient, the second condition (Variation pattern designation Although it is possible to perform swing fluctuations with the performance symbol (70a) determined based on the command), and the performance control means (performance control board 130) satisfies the first condition (gaming state designation command), If at least one of the second condition (effect design designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern specification command) is insufficient, control is possible so as not to start the variable performance.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a In a gaming machine (1) equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling performances according to signals (commands, etc.), a movable performance means (first movable member 73) that can operate in a predetermined manner , a second movable member 74, and a production button 17), and the production control means (production control board 130) controls the initial operation of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17). (initial operation, initial light emission) and the production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and according to the signal. A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is sent from the main control means (main control board 110) during a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the corresponding performance can be executed. is received, the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, the display means (image display devices 70, 71 can perform a fluctuating effect of the effect design (70a), and the effect control means ( In the performance control board 130), a first condition regarding the gaming state (gaming state designation command), a second condition regarding the performance symbol (70a) (performance symbol designation command), and a third condition regarding the performance pattern of the performance symbol (70a). (Fluctuation pattern designation command), the first state starts the fluctuation performance, and if the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) regarding stopping the fluctuation of the performance symbol (70a) is insufficient, the second condition The performance symbol (70a) determined based on the performance symbol designation command (performance symbol designation command) enters a second state in which swing fluctuation can be executed, and the performance control means (performance control board 130) controls the first condition (game state designation command). command) is insufficient, but if the second condition (effect design designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern specification command) are satisfied, the state will be in which the variable performance starts as in the first state, and the fourth state If the condition (special symbol confirmation command) is insufficient, the state is characterized in that the swing fluctuation can be executed as in the second state.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a In a gaming machine (1) equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling performances according to signals (commands, etc.), a movable performance means (first movable member 73) that can operate in a predetermined manner , a second movable member 74, and a production button 17), and the production control means (production control board 130) controls the initial operation of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17). (initial operation, initial light emission) and the production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and according to the signal. A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is sent from the main control means (main control board 110) during a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the corresponding performance can be executed. is received, the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, the display means (image display devices 70, 71 can perform a fluctuating effect of the effect design (70a), and the effect control means ( In the performance control board 130), when the predetermined conditions (performance symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) regarding the performance symbol (70a) are satisfied, regardless of whether the conditions regarding the gaming state (gaming state designation command) are satisfied or insufficient, When the fluctuating production is started and the conditions (special symbol confirmation command) for stopping the variation of the production symbol (70a) are insufficient, the above-mentioned variation is determined based on the predetermined conditions (production symbol designation command, variation pattern designation command). It is characterized in that it is possible to perform swing fluctuations with the effect pattern (70a).

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a In a gaming machine (1) equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling performances according to signals (commands, etc.), a movable performance means (first movable member 73) that can operate in a predetermined manner , a second movable member 74, and a production button 17), and the production control means (production control board 130) controls the initial operation of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17). (initial operation, initial light emission) and the production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and according to the signal. A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is sent from the main control means (main control board 110) during a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the corresponding performance can be executed. is received, the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, the display means (image display devices 70, 71 can perform a fluctuating effect of the effect design (70a), and the effect control means ( In the performance control board 130), a first condition regarding the gaming state (gaming state designation command), a second condition regarding the performance symbol (70a) (performance symbol designation command), and a third condition regarding the performance pattern of the performance symbol (70a). (Fluctuation pattern designation command), the fluctuation effect is started, and if the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) regarding stopping the fluctuation of the effect pattern (70a) is insufficient, the change is determined based on the second condition. It is possible to execute swing fluctuations with the performance symbols (70a) that are displayed, and in the production control means (production control board 130), when the first condition (gaming state designation command) is insufficient and the second condition (production symbol If at least one of the specified command) and the third condition (variation pattern specification command) is insufficient, control is possible so as not to start the variable effect.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a In a gaming machine (1) equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling performances according to signals (commands, etc.), a movable performance means (first movable member 73) that can operate in a predetermined manner , a second movable member 74, and a production button 17), and the production control means (production control board 130) controls the initial operation of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17). (initial operation, initial light emission) and the production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and according to the signal. A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is sent from the main control means (main control board 110) during a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the corresponding performance can be executed. is received, the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, the display means (image display devices 70, 71 can perform a fluctuating effect of the effect design (70a), and the effect control means ( In the performance control board 130), although the first condition regarding the gaming state (gaming state designation command) is satisfied, the second condition regarding the performance symbol (70a) (the performance symbol designation command) and the third condition regarding the performance pattern of the performance symbol are satisfied. If at least one of the conditions (fluctuation pattern designation command) is insufficient, control is possible so as not to start the fluctuating performance, and the performance control means (performance control board 130) executes the first condition (gaming state designation command). If the second condition (effect pattern designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern specification command) are satisfied while the effect pattern designation command is insufficient, the effect pattern (70a) starts to fluctuate, and the effect pattern (70a) changes. If the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) regarding the stop of fluctuation is insufficient, the swing fluctuation can be executed with the production symbol (70a) determined based on the second condition (production symbol designation command). shall be.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a In a gaming machine (1) equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling performances according to signals (commands, etc.), a movable performance means (first movable member 73) that can operate in a predetermined manner , a second movable member 74, and a production button 17), and the production control means (production control board 130) controls the initial operation of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17). (initial operation, initial light emission) and the production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and according to the signal. A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is sent from the main control means (main control board 110) during a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the corresponding performance can be executed. is received, the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, the display means (image display devices 70, 71 can perform a fluctuating effect of the effect design (70a), and the effect control means ( In the performance control board 130), if the predetermined conditions (performance symbol designation command, variation pattern designation command) regarding the performance symbol (70a) are insufficient, the conditions regarding the gaming state (gaming state designation command) and the performance symbol (70a) are The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to control such that the fluctuation performance is not started regardless of whether a condition regarding the fluctuation stop (special symbol confirmation command) is satisfied or insufficient.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a In a gaming machine (1) equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling performances according to signals (commands, etc.), a movable performance means (first movable member 73) that can operate in a predetermined manner , a second movable member 74, and a production button 17), and the production control means (production control board 130) controls the initial operation of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17). (initial operation, initial light emission) and the production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and according to the signal. A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is sent from the main control means (main control board 110) during a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the corresponding performance can be executed. is received, the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, the display means (image display devices 70, 71 can perform a fluctuating effect of the effect design (70a), and the effect control means ( In the performance control board 130), although the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state is insufficient, the second condition (performance design designation command) regarding the performance symbol (70a) and the performance pattern of the performance symbol (70a) are insufficient. When the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding is satisfied, the fluctuating performance is started, and when the fourth condition regarding stopping the fluctuation of the performance symbol (70a) (special symbol confirmation command) is insufficient, the second condition (effect design designation command), it is possible to execute swing fluctuations with the performance symbols determined based on the performance symbol designation command, and in the production control means (performance control board 130), when the first condition (gaming state designation command) is insufficient, If at least one of the second condition (effect design designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern specification command) is insufficient, control is possible so as not to start the variable performance.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a In a game machine (1) equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling performances according to signals (commands, etc.), it is possible to output game performance sounds (BGM, SE, etc.). A sound output means (sound output device 9) is provided, and the effect control means (effect control board 130) outputs a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output device (sound output device 9). , power recovery notification sound, etc.), and the main control means ( When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control board 110), the predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) can be outputted, and the display means (The image display devices 70 and 71 can execute a variable performance of the performance symbols (70a), and the performance control means (performance control board 130) sets the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the performance symbol (70a) When the second condition (effect pattern designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern specification command) regarding the effect pattern of the effect pattern (70a) are satisfied, the variable effect is started, and the effect pattern (70a) is started. ) When the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) regarding the stop of fluctuation is insufficient, it is possible to execute the fluctuation fluctuation with the production symbol (70a) determined based on the second condition (production symbol designation command), In the performance control means (performance control board 130), although the first condition (gaming state designation command) is satisfied, at least the second condition (performance symbol designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) are satisfied. It is characterized in that control is possible so as not to start the fluctuating effect if one of the two is insufficient.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a In a game machine (1) equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling performances according to signals (commands, etc.), it is possible to output game performance sounds (BGM, SE, etc.). A sound output means (sound output device 9) is provided, and the effect control means (effect control board 130) outputs a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output device (sound output device 9). , power recovery notification sound, etc.), and the main control means ( When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control board 110), the predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) can be outputted, and the display means (The image display devices 70 and 71 can execute a variable performance of the performance symbols (70a), and the performance control means (performance control board 130) sets the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the performance symbol When the second condition (effect pattern designation command) regarding (70a) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern specification command) regarding the effect pattern of the effect pattern (70a) are satisfied, the first state is entered to start the variable effect, and the If the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) regarding the stop of fluctuation of the production symbol (70a) is insufficient, the fluctuation fluctuation is executed with the production symbol (70a) determined based on the second condition (production symbol designation command). The second condition is possible, and although the first condition (playing state designation command) is insufficient in the performance control means (performance control board 130), the second condition (performance symbol designation command) and the third condition ( If the fluctuation pattern specification command) is satisfied, the state will be the same as the first state in which the fluctuation effect starts, and if the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) is insufficient, the swing fluctuation can be executed as in the second state. It is characterized by being in a state of

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a In a game machine (1) equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling performances according to signals (commands, etc.), it is possible to output game performance sounds (BGM, SE, etc.). A sound output means (sound output device 9) is provided, and the effect control means (effect control board 130) outputs a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output device (sound output device 9). , power recovery notification sound, etc.), and the main control means ( When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control board 110), the predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) can be outputted, and the display means (The image display devices 70, 71 can execute a variation effect of the effect pattern (70a), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) can perform a predetermined condition (effect pattern designation command, variation effect) regarding the effect pattern (70a). When the pattern specification command) is satisfied, regardless of whether the conditions related to the gaming state (gaming state specification command) are satisfied or insufficient, the fluctuating production is started, and the condition regarding stopping the variation of the production symbols (70a) (special symbol confirmation command) is satisfied. ) is insufficient, the swing variation can be executed with the effect pattern (70a) determined based on the predetermined conditions (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command).

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a In a game machine (1) equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling performances according to signals (commands, etc.), it is possible to output game performance sounds (BGM, SE, etc.). A sound output means (sound output device 9) is provided, and the effect control means (effect control board 130) outputs a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output device (sound output device 9). , power recovery notification sound, etc.), and the main control means ( When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control board 110), the predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) can be outputted, and the display means (The image display devices 70 and 71 can execute a variable performance of the performance symbols (70a), and the performance control means (performance control board 130) sets the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the performance symbol (70a) When the second condition (effect pattern designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern specification command) regarding the effect pattern of the effect pattern (70a) are satisfied, the variable effect is started, and the effect pattern (70a) is started. ) When the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) regarding the stop of fluctuation is insufficient, it is possible to execute the fluctuation fluctuation with the effect pattern (70a) determined based on the second condition, and the effect control means (effect control means) In the control board 130), when the first condition (gaming state designation command) is insufficient and at least one of the second condition (production symbol designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is insufficient, It is characterized by being controllable so as not to start the variable performance.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a In a game machine (1) equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling performances according to signals (commands, etc.), it is possible to output game performance sounds (BGM, SE, etc.). A sound output means (sound output device 9) is provided, and the effect control means (effect control board 130) outputs a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output device (sound output device 9). , power recovery notification sound, etc.), and the main control means ( When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control board 110), the predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) can be outputted, and the display means (The image display devices 70 and 71 can perform a variable performance of the performance symbols (70a), and the performance control means (performance control board 130) satisfies the first condition regarding the gaming state (gaming state designation command). , If at least one of the second condition (performance symbol designation command) regarding the performance symbol (70a) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the performance pattern of the performance symbol is insufficient, the fluctuation performance is not started. In the production control means (production control board 130), while the first condition (gaming state designation command) is insufficient, the second condition (production symbol designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern When the specified command) is satisfied, the variation of the production symbol (70a) is started, and when the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) regarding the stop of variation of the production symbol (70a) is insufficient, the second condition (Specification command) is satisfied. The present invention is characterized in that swing fluctuation can be executed with the effect pattern (70a) determined based on a pattern designation command (symbol designation command).

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a In a game machine (1) equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling performances according to signals (commands, etc.), it is possible to output game performance sounds (BGM, SE, etc.). A sound output means (sound output device 9) is provided, and the effect control means (effect control board 130) outputs a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output device (sound output device 9). , power recovery notification sound, etc.), and the main control means ( When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control board 110), the predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) can be outputted, and the display means (The image display devices 70, 71 can execute a variation effect of the effect pattern (70a), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) can perform a predetermined condition (effect pattern designation command, variation effect) regarding the effect pattern (70a). If the pattern specification command) is insufficient, the variation performance is started regardless of whether the conditions related to the gaming state (gaming state specification command) and the conditions related to stopping the variation of the performance symbols (70a) (special symbol confirmation command) are satisfied or insufficient. It is characterized in that it can be controlled so that it does not occur.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a In a game machine (1) equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling performances according to signals (commands, etc.), it is possible to output game performance sounds (BGM, SE, etc.). A sound output means (sound output device 9) is provided, and the effect control means (effect control board 130) outputs a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output device (sound output device 9). , power recovery notification sound, etc.), and the main control means ( When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control board 110), the predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) can be outputted, and the display means (Although the image display devices 70 and 71 can perform a variable performance of the performance symbols (70a), and the performance control means (performance control board 130) lacks the first condition regarding the gaming state (gaming state designation command), , when the second condition (effect pattern designation command) regarding the effect pattern (70a) and the third condition (variation pattern specification command) regarding the effect pattern of the effect pattern (70a) are satisfied, start the variable effect, and If the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) regarding the stop of fluctuation of the production symbol (70a) is insufficient, it is possible to execute the swing fluctuation with the production symbol determined based on the second condition (production symbol designation command). , in the production control means (production control board 130), the first condition (gaming state specification command) is insufficient and at least the second condition (production symbol specification command) and the third condition (variation pattern specification command) are insufficient. It is characterized in that control is possible so as not to start the fluctuating effect if one of the two is insufficient.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (1) that can execute the game, a main control means (main control board) that can control the progress of the game is provided. 110), an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), etc.) for detecting the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the production control means (production control board 110). ) is capable of executing a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when power supply to the gaming machine is started, the The main control means (main control board 110) and/or the effect control means (effect control board) and the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are in a disconnected state (connector disconnected, disconnection). etc.), it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) is configured to display the display means (image display devices 70, 71). It is possible to perform a fluctuating performance of the performance symbol (70a) in the performance control means (performance control board 130), and the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the gaming state and the second condition regarding the performance symbol (70a) are executed. (effect pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern specification command) regarding the effect pattern of the effect pattern (70a), the variable effect is started, and the fourth condition regarding the stop of variation of the effect pattern (70a) is satisfied. If the condition (special symbol confirmation command) is insufficient, it is possible to perform swing fluctuation with the production symbol (70a) determined based on the second condition (production symbol designation command), and the production control means (production control In the board 130), if the first condition (gaming state designation command) is satisfied but at least one of the second condition (production symbol designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) is insufficient, It is characterized by being controllable so as not to start the variable performance.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (1) that can execute the game, a main control means (main control board) that can control the progress of the game is provided. 110), an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), etc.) for detecting the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the production control means (production control board 110). ) is capable of executing a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when power supply to the gaming machine is started, the The main control means (main control board 110) and/or the effect control means (effect control board) and the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are in a disconnected state (connector disconnected, disconnection). etc.), it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) is configured to display the display means (image display devices 70, 71). It is possible to perform a fluctuating performance of the performance symbol (70a) in the performance control means (performance control board 130), and the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the gaming state and the second condition regarding the performance symbol (70a) are executed. (effect pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern specification command) regarding the effect pattern of the effect pattern (70a), the first state starts the variable effect, and the variation of the effect pattern (70a) If the fourth condition regarding stopping (special symbol confirmation command) is insufficient, a second state is entered in which swing fluctuation can be executed with the production symbol (70a) determined based on the second condition (production symbol designation command), In the production control means (production control board 130), although the first condition (gaming state specification command) is insufficient, the second condition (production symbol specification command) and the third condition (variation pattern specification command) are satisfied. If so, the state becomes a state in which a fluctuation effect is started as in the first state, and when the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) is insufficient, the state becomes a state in which shaking fluctuation can be executed as in the second state. shall be.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (1) that can execute the game, a main control means (main control board) that can control the progress of the game is provided. 110), an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), etc.) for detecting the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the production control means (production control board 110). ) is capable of executing a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when power supply to the gaming machine is started, the The main control means (main control board 110) and/or the effect control means (effect control board) and the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are in a disconnected state (connector disconnected, disconnection). etc.), it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) is configured to display the display means (image display devices 70, 71). It is possible to perform a fluctuating performance of the performance symbol (70a) at the stage, and the performance control means (performance control board 130) satisfies predetermined conditions (performance design designation command, variation pattern designation command) regarding the performance design (70a). In this case, regardless of whether the conditions related to the gaming state (gaming state designation command) are satisfied or insufficient, the fluctuating performance is started, and if the conditions regarding stopping the fluctuation of the performance symbols (70a) (special symbol confirmation command) are insufficient, the above-mentioned The present invention is characterized in that swing fluctuation can be executed with the effect pattern (70a) determined based on predetermined conditions (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command).

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (1) that can execute the game, a main control means (main control board) that can control the progress of the game is provided. 110), an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), etc.) for detecting the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the production control means (production control board 110). ) is capable of executing a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when power supply to the gaming machine is started, the The main control means (main control board 110) and/or the effect control means (effect control board) and the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are in a disconnected state (connector disconnected, disconnection). etc.), it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) is configured to display the display means (image display devices 70, 71). It is possible to perform a fluctuating performance of the performance symbol (70a) in the performance control means (performance control board 130), and the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the gaming state and the second condition regarding the performance symbol (70a) are executed. (effect pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern specification command) regarding the effect pattern of the effect pattern (70a), the variable effect is started, and the fourth condition regarding the stop of variation of the effect pattern (70a) is satisfied. If the condition (special symbol confirmation command) is insufficient, it is possible to execute a swing variation with the production symbol (70a) determined based on the second condition, and the production control means (production control board 130) If the first condition (gaming state specification command) is insufficient and at least one of the second condition (production symbol specification command) and the third condition (variation pattern specification command) is insufficient, the variation production is not started. It is characterized by being controllable.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (1) that can execute the game, a main control means (main control board) that can control the progress of the game is provided. 110), an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), etc.) for detecting the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the production control means (production control board 110). ) is capable of executing a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when power supply to the gaming machine is started, the The main control means (main control board 110) and/or the effect control means (effect control board) and the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are in a disconnected state (connector disconnected, disconnection). etc.), it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) is configured to display the display means (image display devices 70, 71). It is possible to perform a variable performance of the performance symbol (70a) in the performance pattern (70a), and the performance control means (performance control board 130) satisfies the first condition regarding the gaming state (gaming state designation command), but the performance pattern (70a) If at least one of the second condition (effect design designation command) regarding the effect pattern and the third condition (variation pattern specification command) regarding the effect pattern of the effect pattern is insufficient, control is possible so as not to start the variable effect, and the effect is controlled so that the variable effect is not started. In the control means (production control board 130), when the first condition (gaming state specification command) is insufficient while the second condition (production symbol specification command) and the third condition (variation pattern specification command) are satisfied. , If the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) regarding the start of the variation of the production symbol (70a) and the stop of the variation of the production symbol (70a) is insufficient, then based on the second condition (production symbol designation command) The present invention is characterized in that a swing variation can be executed with the determined effect pattern (70a).

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (1) that can execute the game, a main control means (main control board) that can control the progress of the game is provided. 110), an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), etc.) for detecting the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the production control means (production control board 110). ) is capable of executing a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when power supply to the gaming machine is started, the The main control means (main control board 110) and/or the effect control means (effect control board) and the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are in a disconnected state (connector disconnected, disconnection). etc.), it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) is configured to display the display means (image display devices 70, 71). It is possible to perform a variable presentation of the presentation pattern (70a) in the case where the presentation control means (performance control board 130) lacks a predetermined condition (performance pattern specification command, variation pattern specification command) regarding the presentation pattern (70a). In this case, it is possible to control so as not to start the fluctuating performance regardless of whether the conditions regarding the gaming state (gaming state designation command) and the conditions regarding stopping the fluctuation of the performance symbols (70a) (special symbol confirmation command) are satisfied or insufficient. It is characterized by

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (1) that can execute the game, a main control means (main control board) that can control the progress of the game is provided. 110), an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), etc.) for detecting the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the production control means (production control board 110). ) is capable of executing a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when power supply to the gaming machine is started, the The main control means (main control board 110) and/or the effect control means (effect control board) and the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are in a disconnected state (connector disconnected, disconnection). etc.), it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) is configured to display the display means (image display devices 70, 71). It is possible to perform a variable performance of the performance symbol (70a) in the performance pattern (70a), and although the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state is insufficient in the performance control means (performance control board 130), the performance pattern (70a) can be executed. When the second condition (performance design designation command) regarding the production pattern and the third condition (variation pattern specification command) regarding the production pattern of the production pattern (70a) are satisfied, the variation production is started and the variation of the production pattern (70a) is satisfied. If the fourth condition regarding stopping (special symbol confirmation command) is insufficient, it is possible to execute swing fluctuation with the performance symbol determined based on the second condition (performance symbol designation command), and the performance control means (special symbol determination command) In the control board 130), when the first condition (gaming state designation command) is insufficient and at least one of the second condition (production symbol designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is insufficient, It is characterized by being controllable so as not to start the variable performance.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (1) that can execute the game, a main control means (main control board) that can control the progress of the game is provided. 110), an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), etc.), the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the effect control means (effect control board 130). Accordingly, it is possible to execute predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and supply power to the gaming machine. When the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) become disconnected (connector disconnected, wire breakage, etc.), a predetermined It is possible to perform abnormality notifications (wire breakage notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) controls the display means (image display devices 70 and 71 to display changes in effect patterns (70a)). The performance can be executed, and the performance control means (performance control board 130) executes a first condition regarding the gaming state (gaming state designation command), a second condition regarding the performance symbol (70a) (performance symbol designation command), and the above-mentioned performance symbol. When the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the production pattern of the production pattern (70a) is satisfied, the variation production is started, and the fourth condition (special pattern confirmation command) regarding the stop of variation of the production pattern (70a) is satisfied. If it is insufficient, it is possible to execute a swing variation with the effect pattern (70a) determined based on the second condition (effect pattern designation command), and in the effect control means (effect control board 130), the first Although the condition (gaming state designation command) is satisfied, if at least one of the second condition (performance symbol designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is insufficient, control is performed so as not to start the fluctuation performance. It is characterized by being possible.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (1) that can execute the game, a main control means (main control board) that can control the progress of the game is provided. 110), an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), etc.), the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the effect control means (effect control board 130). Accordingly, it is possible to execute predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and supply power to the gaming machine. When the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) become disconnected (connector disconnected, wire breakage, etc.), a predetermined It is possible to perform abnormality notifications (wire breakage notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) controls the display means (image display devices 70 and 71 to display changes in effect patterns (70a)). The performance can be executed, and the performance control means (performance control board 130) executes a first condition regarding the gaming state (gaming state designation command), a second condition regarding the performance symbol (70a) (performance symbol designation command), and the above-mentioned performance symbol. When the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) regarding the performance pattern of the performance symbol (70a) is satisfied, the first state starts the fluctuating performance, and the fourth condition (special symbol) regarding the stop of the fluctuation of the performance symbol (70a) is satisfied. If the number of confirmed commands (determined command) is insufficient, a second state is entered in which the swing fluctuation can be executed with the effect pattern (70a) determined based on the second condition (effect pattern designation command), and the effect control means (effect control board) is activated. 130), if the first condition (gaming state designation command) is insufficient but the second condition (effect design designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) are satisfied, the first state and Similarly, if the state is to start a fluctuating performance, and the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) is insufficient, the state is characterized in that, as in the second state, it becomes possible to perform a swing fluctuation.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (1) that can execute the game, a main control means (main control board) that can control the progress of the game is provided. 110), an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), etc.), the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the effect control means (effect control board 130). Accordingly, it is possible to execute predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and supply power to the gaming machine. When the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) become disconnected (connector disconnected, wire breakage, etc.), a predetermined It is possible to perform abnormality notifications (wire breakage notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) controls the display means (image display devices 70 and 71 to display changes in effect patterns (70a)). If the performance can be executed and the performance control means (performance control board 130) satisfies the predetermined conditions (performance symbol designation command, variation pattern designation command) regarding the performance symbols (70a), the conditions regarding the gaming state (game Regardless of whether the fluctuating effect is satisfied or insufficient (status designation command), if the condition for stopping the fluctuation of the performance symbol (70a) (special symbol confirmation command) is insufficient, then the predetermined condition (the performance symbol designation command, The present invention is characterized in that a swing variation can be executed with the effect pattern (70a) determined based on a variation pattern designation command).

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (1) that can execute the game, a main control means (main control board) that can control the progress of the game is provided. 110), an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), etc.), the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the effect control means (effect control board 130). Accordingly, it is possible to execute predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and supply power to the gaming machine. When the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) become disconnected (connector disconnected, wire breakage, etc.), a predetermined It is possible to perform abnormality notifications (wire breakage notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) controls the display means (image display devices 70 and 71 to display changes in effect patterns (70a)). The performance can be executed, and the performance control means (performance control board 130) executes a first condition regarding the gaming state (gaming state designation command), a second condition regarding the performance symbol (70a) (performance symbol designation command), and the above-mentioned performance symbol. When the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the production pattern of the production pattern (70a) is satisfied, the variation production is started, and the fourth condition (special pattern confirmation command) regarding the stop of variation of the production pattern (70a) is satisfied. If it is insufficient, it is possible to execute swing fluctuations with the performance symbols (70a) determined based on the second condition, and the performance control means (performance control board 130) executes the first condition (gaming state designation command). ) is insufficient and at least one of the second condition (effect design designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern specification command) is insufficient, the variation effect can be controlled not to start. do.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (1) that can execute the game, a main control means (main control board) that can control the progress of the game is provided. 110), an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), etc.), the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the effect control means (effect control board 130). Accordingly, it is possible to execute predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and supply power to the gaming machine. When the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) become disconnected (connector disconnected, wire breakage, etc.), a predetermined It is possible to perform abnormality notifications (wire breakage notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) controls the display means (image display devices 70 and 71 to display changes in effect patterns (70a)). Although the performance can be executed and the performance control means (performance control board 130) satisfies the first condition regarding the gaming state (gaming state designation command), the second condition regarding the performance symbol (70a) (performance symbol designation command) is satisfied. If at least one of the command) and the third condition regarding the performance pattern of the performance symbol (fluctuation pattern designation command) is insufficient, the fluctuating performance can be controlled not to start, and the performance control means (performance control board 130) In this case, when the first condition (gaming state designation command) is insufficient while the second condition (effect pattern designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) are satisfied, the effect of the effect pattern (70a) is If the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) for stopping the variation of the production symbol (70a) is insufficient after the variation has started, the production symbol (70a) determined based on the second condition (production symbol designation command) ) is characterized in that it is possible to perform shaking fluctuations.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (1) that can execute the game, a main control means (main control board) that can control the progress of the game is provided. 110), an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), etc.), the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the effect control means (effect control board 130). Accordingly, it is possible to execute predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and supply power to the gaming machine. When the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) become disconnected (connector disconnected, wire breakage, etc.), a predetermined It is possible to perform abnormality notifications (wire breakage notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) controls the display means (image display devices 70 and 71 to display changes in effect patterns (70a)). If the performance is executable and the performance control means (performance control board 130) lacks the predetermined conditions (performance symbol designation command, variation pattern designation command) regarding the performance symbol (70a), the conditions regarding the gaming state (game The present invention is characterized in that it can be controlled so as not to start the fluctuating performance regardless of whether the conditions (special symbol confirmation command) regarding the stoppage of fluctuation of the performance symbol (70a) are satisfied or insufficient.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (1) that can execute the game, a main control means (main control board) that can control the progress of the game is provided. 110), an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), etc.), the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the effect control means (effect control board 130). Accordingly, it is possible to execute predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and supply power to the gaming machine. When the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) become disconnected (connector disconnected, wire breakage, etc.), a predetermined It is possible to perform abnormality notifications (wire breakage notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) controls the display means (image display devices 70 and 71 to display changes in effect patterns (70a)). Although the performance can be executed and the performance control means (performance control board 130) lacks the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the second condition (performance design designation command) regarding the performance symbol (70a) is insufficient. command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the production pattern of the production symbol (70a), the variation production is started, and the fourth condition (special symbol) regarding the stop of variation of the production symbol (70a) is satisfied. If the number of fixed commands (determined command) is insufficient, it is possible to execute swing fluctuations with the performance symbols determined based on the second condition (production symbol designation command), and the performance control means (production control board 130) When one condition (gaming state designation command) is insufficient and at least one of the second condition (production symbol designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is insufficient, control is performed so as not to start the variation production. It is characterized by being possible.

(About time-saving gaming state)
The above-mentioned "low-probability time-saving gaming state" is a low-probability gaming state in which a specified number of special symbols change You may set a "low-probability time-saving gaming state triggered by a predetermined number of changes" that is triggered by the execution of the game. "Low-probability time-saving gaming state triggered by a specified number of changes" is executed after a specified number of symbol changes have been made, for example, 1000 times, in a low-probability gaming state including a low-probability time-saving gaming state, and is used to determine whether or not it is a jackpot. In addition to the performance, it is possible to perform a combination of time-saving effects such as counting down the number of fluctuations until the time-saving occurs.

In addition to or in place of the "low-probability time-saving gaming state after a jackpot" and/or the "low-probability time-saving gaming state based on a specific symbol combination," the "low-probability time-saving gaming state" is defined in advance in the low-probability gaming state. A ``low-accuracy time-saving gaming state based on a specific symbol combination'' may be set, which is triggered by the display of a predetermined special symbol combination. "Low-probability time-saving gaming state based on specific symbol combinations" is a low-probability state that is executed after displaying specific symbols such as "1, 2, 3" or "7, 8, 7," and is used to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot. In addition to this performance, it is possible to perform a combination of a reach to see whether the time reduction will occur or other time reduction effects, etc.

(Winning a game ball into the starting slot)
In the game machine 1 of the embodiment, when the game ball is launched so as to pass through the left side area of the game area 5a, the game ball is played on the condition that the game ball passes through the first starting port 45 or the general figure gate 44. It is possible to win a prize through the second starting opening 47 that is opened depending on the winning result of the normal symbol winning lottery. In the game machine 1 of the embodiment, when the game ball is launched so as to pass through the right side area of the game area 5a, the game ball is played on the condition that the game ball passes through the first starting port 45 or the general figure gate 44. It is possible to win a prize through the second starting opening 47 that is opened depending on the winning result of the normal symbol winning lottery.

In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, it is easier to pass through the regular figure gate 44 when the game is launched to the right side area of the game area 5a than when it is launched to the left side area of the game area 5a. Therefore, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment is in a "time-saving gaming state" (specific gaming state) in which the second starting port 47 is more easily controlled in an open state than in a "non-time-saving gaming state" when the game ball passes through the general figure gate 44. In this case, it is better for the player to hit the game ball into the right side area of the game area 5a and aim to win the second starting hole 47 than to hit the game ball into the left side area of the game area 5a. It becomes possible to proceed with the game advantageously without consuming.

In the game machine 1 of the embodiment, the entrance of the warp device 41 is opened on the left side of the decorative frame 41, and the game ball is always placed directly under the stage portion 42 on which the game ball guided by the warp device 41 rolls. A first starting port 45 (ball entry) is provided. Therefore, in the "non-time-saving gaming state" (normal gaming state), which is more difficult to control than the "time-saving gaming state" in which the second starting port 47 is opened when the game ball passes through the regular game gate 44, the left side area of the gaming area 5a is It is better for the player to aim the game ball into the first starting slot 45 by hitting the game ball to the right side of the game area 5a, and the player can play the game more advantageously without consuming the game ball. It is possible to proceed.

In this way, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment is designed to have an advantage or disadvantage for the player depending on whether the player launches the ball to the left or right area of the gaming area 5a, and the game machine 1 is configured to be advantageous or disadvantageous for the player depending on the playing state. It is preferable to switch the area where the area 5a is ejected. In other words, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment is required to proceed with the game with the aim of winning the starting openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state. However, since the firing operation is left up to the player's control as to whether the ball should be fired into the right or left side of the gaming area 5a, the player may proceed with the game with the aim of hitting the wrong starting openings 45, 47. There is a risk that the product may become damaged.

In addition, in both the "non-time-saving gaming state" and the "time-saving gaming state", even if the game machine only needs to launch the game ball into the same area of the gaming area 5a (for example, the left area), Since the firing operation is left up to the player's control as to which area on the left side to launch the ball into, there is a risk that the player may proceed with the game with the aim of hitting the wrong starting port 45 or 47. There is no difference.

(Example 1 of production)
FIGS. 166 and 167 are diagrams illustrating a first concrete example of an expectation level display, a pending icon change effect, a lamp change effect, a notification sound effect, a movable member operation effect, and a continuous notice effect based on these. Note that various performances that make players expect to play a jackpot game are sometimes referred to as winning hint performances.

As shown in FIG. 166(a), the first pending icon (CD icon) is displayed on the first display section 70B1, second display section 70B2, and third display section 70B3 of the first pending icon display area 70B. Suppose that the loss effect symbol 70a of "728" is stopped and displayed when the player is in the game.

After that, when the fluctuating effect is started, as shown in FIG. The first hold icon (CD icon) displayed in 70B3 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C, the first display section 70B1, and the second display section 70B2, respectively.

Here, the first performance of the continuous notice performance is started by displaying the blue effect image EF around the performance symbol 70a that starts the variable display, and the first performance that is shifted and displayed on the second display section 70B2 When the display mode of the pending icon changes to a blue character icon, the pending icon change effect is started, and along with this, the winning slot lamp NR changes from an extinguished state to a blinking blue state, thereby starting a lamp change effect. will be started. Further, an operation performance in which the first movable member 73 moves in a weak operation mode in which it vibrates in the vertical direction is executed for a predetermined period of time. Note that the operation performance of the first movable member 73 in the weak operation mode is started at a timing before the performance pattern 70a starts to fluctuate, and is stopped before the performance pattern 70 scrolls at high speed (for example, before the preparation operation). .

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 166(c), the effect image EF displayed around the effect pattern 70a is erased, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling at high speed. At this time, the operation of the first movable member 73 is stopped. Furthermore, in the first image display device 70, a zone effect (normal zone effect) is started. Specifically, the background image changes to zone background A, a blue zone image in which the characters "ZONE" scroll in the horizontal direction is displayed, and zone BGM is output. Then, when the variable time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 166(d), after the performance symbol 70a indicating a loss is temporarily stopped and displayed, the loss performance symbol 70a of "259" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. .

Thereafter, when the fluctuating effect is started, as shown in FIG. 166(e), the fluctuating display of the effect pattern 70a is started and is displayed on the first display section 70B1 and the second display section 70B2. The first pending icon is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display section 70B1, respectively.

Here, the second effect of the continuous notice effect is started by displaying the effect image EF around the effect image 70a that starts the variable display, and the pending icon change effect, lamp change effect, and zone effect continue. It will remain as it is. Further, an operation performance in which the first movable member 73 moves in a weak operation mode in which it vibrates in the vertical direction is executed for a predetermined period of time.

Then, as shown in FIG. 166(f), the effect image EF displayed around the performance symbol 70a is erased, and the performance symbol 70a starts scrolling at high speed. At this time, the operation of the first movable member 73 is stopped. Then, when the variable time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 166(g), after the performance symbol 70a indicating a loss is temporarily stopped and displayed, the loss performance symbol 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. .

Thereafter, when the fluctuation performance that becomes the fluctuation is started, as shown in FIG. 166(h), the fluctuation display of the performance symbol 70a is started, and the first pending icon displayed on the first display section 70B1 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the effect image 70a that starts the fluctuating display, thereby starting the third effect of the continuous notice effect, but the effect image EF is blue, which indicates the level of expectation for a jackpot game. Displayed in high red. In addition, the symbol effect image ZE is displayed in a color that indicates higher expectations for the jackpot game than before. Further, the hold icon change effect is continuously displayed. In addition, by changing the winning opening lamp NR from lighting in blue to blinking in red, a lamp change effect with higher expectations for a jackpot than lighting in blue is executed. Further, an operation effect is performed in which the first movable member 73 moves in a strong operation mode in which the first movable member 73 moves greatly so as to fall from the upper side of the first image display device 70 to the front side of the first image display device. At this time, an operation performance in which the second movable member 74 operates in a weak operation mode in which it vibrates in an oblique direction is executed for a predetermined period of time. In this way, the advance notification executed in the variable display provides a display with a higher expectation of a jackpot than the previous notification.

Then, as shown in FIG. 167(i), the effect image EF displayed around the performance symbol 70a is erased, and the performance symbol 70a starts scrolling at high speed. At this time, the operations of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are stopped. Note that the zone effect is displayed by switching to zone background B, which is a display with higher expectations for a jackpot than zone background A.

As shown in FIG. 167(j), the mini-character MCB is displayed on the first image display device 70, and an effect that arouses anticipation is performed by, for example, the mini-character MCB moving across the screen.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 167(k), for example, the line "CHANCE!" uttered by a teammate is displayed in the line window displayed on the first image display device 70, and the voice output device 9 responds to the line. The dialogue preview performance is executed by displaying the voice ``Your chance has arrived!''.

Then, as shown in FIG. 167(l), the effect pattern 70a of "3" is stopped (temporarily stopped) displayed in the left and right variable display areas of the effect pattern 70a that was being displayed in a variable manner, and the center variable display area is A reach effect (normal reach) in which the effect pattern 70a is displayed variably is executed. At this time, the display mode of the first pending icon shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red character icon, thereby executing a pending icon change effect that has higher expectations for a jackpot game than the blue character icon. . Furthermore, in accordance with this, the winning opening lamp NR changes from lighting in red to emitting light in multiple colors (rainbow colors), so that a lamp change performance with higher expectations for a jackpot than lighting in red is executed.

After that, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. 167(m), the SP reach effect is started, and the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the second The pending icon display area 70D is erased. The reduced performance pattern 70a includes a rectangular base image, a character image CG of a predetermined character, a bar-shaped image SG that is a part of the character, and a decorative part consisting of a pattern effect image ZE that decorates the background of the character. Then, the normal display mode consisting of an identification section consisting of a hexagonal base image and a numeric section (identification character) changes to a simple reduced display mode of only the identification section.

Then, when the SPSP reaches reach, as shown in FIG. 167(n), the SPSP reach effect is started and the icon display area 70C is erased together with the icon.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect that becomes a jackpot ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special symbol confirmation command indicating a jackpot), as shown in FIG. 167(o), the current jackpot game (here, the first The jackpot effect pattern 70a of "333" indicating the type of jackpot game) and the special pattern TZ are temporarily stopped and displayed (fluctuation fluctuation) and then stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation performance ends.

In addition, although the winning slot lamp NR remains off while SP and/or SPSP reach is displayed, the lamp change effect continues or it is not used in the lamp change effect (does not indicate the expectation of winning a jackpot. ) The winning slot lamp NR may be lit in a lighting mode (for example, white lighting).

(Expectation level display)
As shown in FIGS. 166 and 167, in the fluctuating display of the performance symbols 70a, it is possible to display so-called expectation levels such as color effects such as the effect image EF and the symbol effect image ZE to make players look forward to the execution of a jackpot game. . As shown in FIG. 168, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has a variable display ( (Hereinafter, it may be referred to as "Special 1 variable display."), the execution rate of the expectation level display using the color effect is smaller in the Special 1 variable display executed in a specific game state (Execution rate a3 < Execution rate a1). In other words, the effect of the color effect in the special 1 variable display is better when the game ball is hit to the left in the specific game state than when the game ball is hit to the left toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. It is difficult to display the expectation level.

As shown in FIG. 168, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has a variable display ( (Hereinafter, it may be referred to as "Special 2 variable display."), the execution rate of the expectation level display using the color effect is smaller in the Special 1 variable display executed in a specific gaming state (Execution rate a3 < Execution rate a4). In other words, the effect of the color effect in the special 1 variation display is better when the game ball is hit to the left in a specific game state than when the game ball is hit to the right in a specific game state. It is difficult to display the expectation level.

With such an execution rate of the expectation level display, even if you mistakenly hit the ball to the left in the specific gaming state as in the normal gaming state, it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first prize opening 45. It is possible to make the player aware of something. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

The expectation display is not limited to color effects, but may also be text or decorations superimposed on images such as background images or production designs, or around the image, and the difference in content and color can increase the chances of winning a jackpot. It may be anything that can make people look forward to playing the game.

The number of types and contents of the effect patterns shown in FIG. 168 may be the same or different. Here, the number of types of expectation display using color effects may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state. Furthermore, the number of types of expectation level display using color effects may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in a specific gaming state than in the special 2 variable display executed in a specific gaming state.

For example, if the execution rate of effect pattern A32 when special 1 variable display is displayed in a specific game state is "0" (or effect pattern A32 is not set), effect pattern A12 is executed when special 1 variable display is performed in a normal game state. Although it is possible to display the expectation level of the performance pattern A12, the expectation level display of the performance pattern A32 corresponding to (or the same as) the performance pattern A12 will not be executed. At this time, when executing the Toku 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state, it is possible to execute the expectation level display of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the Toku 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state.

For example, if the execution rate of effect pattern A32 when special 1 variable display is performed in a specific gaming state is "0" (or effect pattern A32 is not set), effect pattern A42 is executed when special 2 variable display is performed in a specific game state. However, the expectation level display of the performance pattern A32 corresponding to (or the same as) the performance pattern A42 will not be executed. At this time, when executing the Toku 2 variable display executed in the specific gaming state, it is possible to execute the expectation level display of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the Toku 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Zone production)
As shown in FIGS. 166 and 167, in the variable display of the effect symbols 70a, it is possible to perform a zone effect that involves changing the scene of the background image. The zone effect is something that makes players expect the execution of a jackpot game over a predetermined period of time, and is either a predetermined variable display period based on the determination of one starting condition or a predetermined variable display period based on the determination of multiple starting conditions. It can be executed at the timing of

As shown in FIG. 169, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the zone effect is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state. (execution rate b3<execution rate b1). In other words, the zone performance in the special 1 variable display is better when the game ball is hit to the left in the specific game state than when the game ball is hit to the left toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. difficult to implement.

As shown in FIG. 169, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the zone effect is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in a specific gaming state than in the special 2 variable display executed in a specific gaming state. (execution rate b3<execution rate b4). In other words, the zone effect in the special 1 variable display is better when a left-handed ball is hit in a specific gaming state than when a so-called right-handed ball is hit toward the right side of the gaming area 5a in a specific gaming state. difficult to implement.

Due to the execution rate of such a zone performance, even if you accidentally hit the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first prize opening 45. It is possible to make the player aware of this. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

The number of types and contents of the effect patterns shown in FIG. 169 may be the same or different. Here, the number of types of zone effects may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state. Further, the number of types of zone effects may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in a specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in a specific game state.

For example, if the execution rate of performance pattern B32 when special 1 fluctuation display is displayed in a specific gaming state is "0" (or performance pattern B32 is not set), performance pattern B12 is executed when special 1 fluctuation display is performed in a normal gaming state. However, the zone performance of the performance pattern B32 corresponding to (or the same as) the performance pattern B12 will not be executed. At this time, when executing the Toku 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state, it is possible to execute a zone performance of a performance mode that cannot be executed in the Toku 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state.

For example, if the execution rate of performance pattern B32 when special 1 variation display is performed in a specific gaming state is "0" (or performance pattern B32 is not set), performance pattern B42 is executed when special 2 variation display is performed in a specific game state. However, the zone performance of the performance pattern B32 corresponding to (or the same as) the performance pattern B42 will not be executed. At this time, when executing the Toku 2 variable display executed in the specific gaming state, it is possible to execute a zone performance of a performance mode that cannot be executed in the Toku 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state.

The zone effect is not limited to being performed over a plurality of variable displays, but the zone effect may be performed in a single variable display. If it is possible to execute a win-suggesting performance such as a zone performance over a predetermined number of fluctuation displays, the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state is better than the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state. However, the ratio of the number of times (including zero times) may be large. In other words, the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state is better than the special 1 fluctuation display in the regular gaming state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state to perform hit-suggesting performances such as zone performances with patterns over a shorter number of fluctuation displays. It can be said that it is easy to

In the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, it is possible to change the scene such as the background, the telop that flows on the screen, the decorative pattern change that changes to the production pattern 70a for zone production, etc. However, in the special 1 variable display of a specific game state, it may be possible to regulate the execution of scene changes such as the background, telops flowing on the screen, pattern decorative changes that change to the zone effect effect pattern 70a, etc.

Even if these steps are taken, even if you accidentally hit the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. It is possible to make the player aware of this. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Notification sound effect)
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, when a CD icon is generated as a hold icon, a first generation notification sound is output as a notification sound when the icon is generated. In addition, as shown in FIG. 166(b), when a pending icon or a blue character icon is generated (changed to) as the icon, a second occurrence notification sound is used as the notification sound when the icon occurs (changes). (first change notification sound) is output. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 167(l), when a hold icon and a red character icon are generated (changed to) as the icon, a third generation notification sound ( (second change notification sound) is output. Furthermore, when the icon changes to a rainbow character icon, a fourth generated notification sound (third change notification sound) is set to be output as a notification sound at the time of icon change.

In this embodiment, different notification sounds are set for each of the plurality of icon display modes (4 types), but the notification sound when a CD icon is generated, the blue character icon, and the red character icon are different. , and a change notification sound when the icon changes to a rainbow character icon.Alternatively, the notification sound is not output when the CD icon occurs, and the notification sound is output only when the icon changes to one of the modes. It may also be output. Further, for the rainbow character icon that is certain to be a jackpot, a dedicated change notification sound may be provided and there may be three types.

As shown in FIG. 170, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the change notification sound effect is higher in the special 1 fluctuation display performed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 fluctuation display performed in the normal gaming state. is small (execution rate c3<execution rate c1). In other words, the change notification sound in the special 1 variation display is louder when hitting the ball to the left in the specific gaming state than when hitting the game ball to the left toward the left side area of the gaming area 5a in the normal gaming state. It is difficult to execute the performance.

As shown in FIG. 170, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution rate of the change notification sound effect is higher in the special 1 variable display executed in a specific gaming state than in the special 2 variable display executed in a specific gaming state. is smaller (execution rate c3<execution rate c4). In other words, the change notification in the special figure 1 fluctuation display is more effective when a ball is hit to the left in a specific game state than when the game ball is hit to the right in a specific game state. Sound production is difficult to perform.

With such an execution rate of the change notification sound performance, even if you accidentally hit the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first prize opening 45. It is possible to make the player aware that this is the case. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

Here, the number of types of change notification sound effects may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state. Furthermore, the number of types of change notification sound effects may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in a specific gaming state than in the special 2 variable display executed in a specific gaming state.

The change notification sound performance is not limited to when the pending icon changes, but may also be performed with an exciting sound when winning a prize, when fluctuation starts or when fluctuation stops.

For example, if the execution rate of a specific change notification sound when displaying special 1 variation in a specific gaming state is "0" (or the specific change notification sound is not set), then special 1 variation display in a normal gaming state Although it is possible to execute a notification sound effect using a predetermined change notification sound, a notification sound effect using a specific change notification sound corresponding to (or the same as) the predetermined change notification sound will not be performed. At this time, when executing the Toku 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state, it is possible to execute the notification sound performance of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the Toku 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state.

For example, if the execution rate of the specific change notification sound when displaying the special 1 variation in a specific gaming state is "0" (or the specific change notification sound is not set), the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state Although it is possible to execute a notification sound effect using a predetermined change notification sound, a notification sound effect using a specific change notification sound corresponding to (or the same as) the predetermined change notification sound will not be performed. At this time, when executing the Toku 2 variable display executed in the specific gaming state, it is possible to execute the notification sound performance of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the Toku 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

The notification sound performance is not limited to being performed in association with the pending (relevant) icon change; for example, when a game ball enters the starting slot, when a fixed performance such as "Kyuuin" is executed, The button change sound when a buried operation button appears, the operation sound of the movable members 73, 74, the change start sound/return sound when multiple movable members are combined to form a specific design, and the specific design It can be performed in conjunction with various conditions, such as the completed sound when it is performed.

If the notification sound effect can be executed in association with a predetermined condition, the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state is more effective when the predetermined condition is executed than the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state. The ratio at which the notification sound effect is performed may be the same or smaller, and the ratio at which the notification sound effect is performed may be smaller.

In the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, for example, it is possible to perform a performance with a confirmed notification sound among the notification sound effects, but in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state, the final notification sound It may also be possible to regulate execution of sound effects. Note that this is not limited to the final notification sound, and the same can be done with the various notification sound productions described above. In other words, in the special 1 variation display in the regular gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state, it is possible to perform an effect using a predetermined notification sound of the notification sound effects, but in the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state, This means that it is possible to regulate the execution of the performance using the notification sound.

By doing these things, even if the game ball is accidentally hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first winning slot 45. can be made to notice. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Pending icon change effect)
As shown in FIGS. 166 and 167, in the variable display of the performance symbols 70a, by displaying the shape and color of the pending icon in a changing manner, it is possible to perform a pending icon performance that makes players expect a jackpot game. The pending icon change in this embodiment makes the player expect the execution of the jackpot game over a predetermined period of time, and is a predetermined variation display period based on the determination of one starting condition, or a predetermined variation display period based on the determination of multiple starting conditions. It can be executed at any timing during the display period.

As shown in FIG. 171, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution rate of the reserved icon change effect is higher in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state. is small (execution rate d3<execution rate d1). In other words, the hold icon changes in the special 1 variation display more when a player hits the game ball to the left in a specific game state than when a game ball is hit to the left toward the left side of the gaming area 5a in a normal game state. It is difficult to execute the performance.

As shown in FIG. 171, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution rate of the reserved icon change effect is higher in the special 1 variable display executed in a specific gaming state than in the special 2 variable display executed in a specific gaming state. is small (execution rate d3<execution rate d4). In other words, the hold icon changes in the special 1 variation display more easily when a left-handed ball is hit in a specific gaming state than when a so-called right-handed ball is hit toward the right side of the gaming area 5a in a specific gaming state. It is difficult to execute the performance.

With such an execution rate of the pending icon change effect, it is disadvantageous to enter the game ball into the first prize opening 45 even if you accidentally hit the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. It is possible to make the player aware that this is the case. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

The number of types and contents of the effect patterns shown in FIG. 171 may be the same or different. Here, the number of types of pending icon change effects may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state. Further, the number of types of pending icon change effects may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in a specific gaming state than in the special 2 variable display executed in a specific gaming state.

The pending icon change effect is not limited to changing the color of the pending icon (including the icon) or changing the appearance of the icon itself, but also changes the icon itself or the effects attached to the icon, such as effects and characters attached to the icon. It's okay. Further, the pending icon effect is not limited to changing the round CD icon to a character icon as in the embodiment, but may also change the shape of a triangle, square, or the like.

For example, if the performance pattern D32 is executed at "0" (or the performance pattern D32 is not set) when the special 1 variation is displayed in a specific gaming state, the performance pattern D12 is executed when the special 1 variation is displayed in the normal gaming state. Although the pending icon change effect can be executed, the zone effect of the effect pattern D32 corresponding to (or the same as) the effect pattern D12 will not be executed. At this time, when performing the Toku 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state, it is possible to execute a pending icon change performance of a performance mode that cannot be executed in the Toku 1 fluctuation display executed in the specific gaming state.

For example, if the execution rate of the performance pattern D32 when the special 1 variable display is displayed in a specific gaming state is "0" (or the performance pattern D32 is not set), the performance pattern D42 is executed when the special 2 variable display is displayed in the specific game state. However, the pending icon change performance of the performance pattern D32 corresponding to (or the same as) the performance pattern D42 will not be executed. At this time, when executing the Toku 2 variable display executed in the specific game state, it is possible to execute a pending icon change effect of a performance mode that cannot be executed in the Tok 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

The number of types of hold icons that can be displayed may be smaller in the special 1 variable display in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state. Further, in the hold icon change effect, the CD icon may change stepwise from blue to red to rainbow, or the CD icon may change selectively to blue, red, or rainbow. The number of types of display modes that can be changed from the current pending icon display mode is higher in the special 1 variation display in a specific gaming state than in the normal gaming state's special 1 variation display or the special 2 variation display in a specific gaming state. may be less.

For example, in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state, it is possible to execute a pending icon change effect, but in the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state, it is possible to restrict the execution of the pending icon change effect. It may be. In the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, for example, it is possible to execute a change effect that is performed when changing the pending icon change, but in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, the change It may also be possible to regulate the execution of the performance. Note that even if the pending icon presentation is not performed, icon decorations that are displayed along with the pending icon, such as a pedestal on which the pending icon is placed or a frame surrounding the pending icon, may be displayed.

By doing these things, even if the game ball is accidentally hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player is informed that it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first winning slot 45. It can make you notice. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(lamp change effect)
As shown in FIGS. 166 and 167, this is a type of look-ahead preview effect that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be executed by changing the lighting mode of the winning slot lamp NR over one or more variable displays. It is possible to perform a certain lamp change effect.

As shown in FIG. 172, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the lamp change effect is higher in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state. (execution rate e3<execution rate e1). In other words, the lamp icon changes in the special 1 variation display more when a left-handed ball is hit in a specific game state than when a so-called left-handed ball is hit toward the left side area of the game area 5a in a normal game state. It is difficult to execute the performance.

As shown in FIG. 172, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the lamp change effect is higher in the special 1 variable display executed in a specific gaming state than in the special 2 variable display executed in a specific gaming state. (execution rate e3<execution rate e4). In other words, the lamp change performance in the special 1 variation display is better when a player hits the game ball left-handed in a specific game state than when he hits the game ball to the right toward the right side of the game area 5a in a specific game state. is difficult to implement.

With such an execution ratio of the lamp change effect, even if you accidentally hit the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first prize opening 45. It is possible to make the player aware of something. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

The number of types and contents of the effect patterns shown in FIG. 172 may be the same or different. Here, the number of types of lamp change effects may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state. Further, the number of types of lamp change effects may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state.

The lamp change effect is not limited to the winning slot lamp NR, but also other lighting such as the movable members 73, 74, the decorative frame 40, the lighting device 10 for the frame of the game board 5 and the glass frame 4, in addition to the winning slot lamp NR. It may also be executed in conjunction with a device.

For example, if the execution rate of the effect pattern E32 when the special 1 variable display is displayed in a specific gaming state is "0" (or the effect pattern E32 is not set), the effect pattern E12 is executed when the special 1 variable display is displayed in the normal game state. However, the lamp change effect of the effect pattern E32 corresponding to (or the same as) the effect pattern E12 will not be executed. At this time, when performing the Toku 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state, it is possible to execute a lamp change effect of a performance mode that cannot be executed in the Toku 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

For example, if the execution rate of the effect pattern E32 when the special 1 variable display is displayed in a specific gaming state is "0" (or the effect pattern E32 is not set), the effect pattern E42 is executed when the special 2 variable display is displayed in the specific game state. However, the lamp change effect of the effect pattern E32 corresponding to (or the same as) the effect pattern E42 will not be executed. At this time, when executing the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state, it is possible to execute a lamp change performance of a performance mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

The number of types of lamp change effects may be smaller in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. In the lamp change effect, the lamp may change stepwise from no light to blue to red to rainbow, or may selectively change from no light to blue, red, or rainbow. Compared to the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, the special 1 variation display in the specific game state has fewer types of light emission modes that can be changed from the current light emission mode. Good too.

In the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, for example, a predetermined pattern of lamp change effects can be executed, but in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, a predetermined pattern of lamp changes can be executed. It may also be possible to regulate execution of the performance.

The light emission (light emission pattern) that constitutes the lamp change effect includes, for example, when the pending (relevant) icon changes, when a game ball enters the starting slot, when a decisive effect such as "Kyuuin" is executed, button change sound when a buried operation button appears, the operating sound of the movable members 73 and 74, the start of change/return sound and identification when multiple movable members are combined to form a specific design. This can be done in conjunction with various conditions, such as the final sound of the design.

If a lamp change effect can be executed in association with a predetermined condition, the predetermined condition is executed better in the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state. The ratio at which the lamp change effect is performed may be the same or smaller, and the ratio at which the lamp change effect is executed may be smaller.

In the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state, it is possible to perform a lamp change effect using, for example, the prize opening lamp NR and the board lighting device (frame lighting device). , In the special 1 variable display of a specific game state, for example, it may be possible to execute an effect using a board lighting device or a frame lighting device, while restricting the execution of an effect using a prize opening lamp NR. That is, in the special 1 variable display in the regular gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state, it is possible to perform a performance using a predetermined part (area, member unit, etc.) of the lamp change performance, but the special In the 1-variation display, it is possible to restrict the performance of a predetermined part.

The pattern selected for the lamp change performance or lamp change performance is based on the timing (for example, when winning a prize, when the fluctuation starts, when the fluctuation stops, how many times in a row, the start/stop/decision of the operation of the movable member, the vibration or operation of the operation button) etc.) may be changed. In the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state, it is possible to perform a lamp change effect at a predetermined timing, such as when winning a prize, and at a specific timing when the movable member is activated. In the special 1 variable display, it may be possible to restrict execution of the lamp change effect at a predetermined timing and a specific timing.

From the execution period of the lamp change performance (predetermined pattern of lamp change performance) performed during the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state, the lamp change performance performed during the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state The execution period of (predetermined pattern of lamp change effect) may be shorter.

Based on the number of types of parts (areas, members, etc.) that emit light in the light emitting effect (lamp change effect) performed in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, the special 1 variation in the specific game state The number of types of parts (regions, members, etc.) that emit light in the light emitting effect (lamp change effect) performed in the display may be smaller. In addition, the light emitting effect (lamp change effect) performed in the special 1 variable display of a specific gaming state ( The range in which light is emitted during the lamp change effect may be smaller. Here, the light emitting effect is a mode in which the number of light emitted by the LEDs arranged side by side changes, so that the number of light emitted and the light emitting range changes in stages, and a light guide plate, etc. overlaps with an image display device, a panel lighting device, etc. This may change the light emission mode.

By doing this, even if the game ball is accidentally hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player is informed that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning slot 45. It can make you notice. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Production of movement of movable parts)
As shown in FIGS. 166 and 167, the player It is possible to perform an operation effect that makes the user expect that a jackpot game will be executed.

As shown in FIG. 173, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state is operated by the first movable member 73 more than the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state. The execution rate in the weak performance mode is small (execution rate f31<execution rate f11). In other words, the weak activation state in the special 1 variation display is stronger when the game ball is hit to the left in the specific game state than when the game ball is hit to the left toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. It is difficult to perform the operation.

As shown in FIG. 173, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variable display executed in a specific gaming state is operated by the first movable member 73 more than the special 2 variable display executed in a specific gaming state. The execution rate in the weak performance mode is small (execution rate f31<execution rate f41). In other words, in a specific game state, when a game ball is hit to the left in a specific game state, the action is weaker in the special figure 1 fluctuation display than when a game ball is hit to the right in the right side of the game area 5a. It is difficult to perform the action of the mode.

Due to the execution rate of such an operation effect, even if you mistakenly hit the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first prize opening 45. It is possible to make the player aware of this. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

Note that the execution ratio of the strong actuation mode in the actuation presentation may be smaller than, the same as, or larger than the weak actuation mode. In addition, regarding the strong operation mode, the relationship between the winnings in the starting ports 45 and 47 and the gaming state may be the same as the weak operation mode, or may be reversed, and the execution ratio may be the same. Good too.

Here, the number of types of operation performance patterns may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state. Furthermore, the number of types of operation performance patterns may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state.

In this embodiment, the operation performance of the first movable member 73 has been described, but the operation performance of other movable accessories such as the second movable member 74 may be made similar to that of the first movable member 73. In this case, the first movable member 73 and other movable accessories may be operated in conjunction with each other.

For example, if the execution rate of the specific operation mode is "0" (or the specific operation mode is not set) when the special 1 variation is displayed in a specific gaming state, then when the special 1 variation is displayed in the normal gaming state, Although it is possible to execute an operation effect according to the predetermined operation mode, an operation effect according to a specific operation mode that corresponds to (or is the same as) the predetermined operation mode will not be executed. At this time, when executing the Toku 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state, it is possible to execute an operation performance of a performance mode that cannot be executed in the Toku 1 fluctuation display executed in the specific game state.

For example, if the execution rate of the specific operation mode is "0" (or the specific operation mode is not set) when the special 1 variation is displayed in a specific game state, then when the special 2 variation is displayed in the specific game state, Although it is possible to execute an operation effect according to the predetermined operation mode, an operation effect according to a specific operation mode that corresponds to (or is the same as) the predetermined operation mode will not be executed. At this time, when executing the Toku 2 variable display executed in the specific game state, it is possible to execute an operation performance in a performance mode that cannot be executed in the Toku 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

The operation performance can be executed at various timings such as the start of fluctuation, the development of the performance, the occurrence of reach, the time of tilt, and the final performance (determined performance). In the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, it is possible to perform weak operation and strong operation effects at a predetermined timing such as the start of variation, and at a specific timing such as a decisive effect. In the special 1 variation display of the specific game state, it may be possible to restrict the execution of the strong action at a predetermined timing, and it may also be possible to execute the strong action at a specific timing. In this way, differences may be provided in the operating mode, whether or not the action effect can be executed, etc., depending on the timing.

The operation effect can be executed in association with a light emission effect by a light emitting means such as an LED provided on the movable member. In this case, the light emitting effect can be selected from a light emitting pattern, a light emitting color, a light emitting range, etc., such as blue light → red light → rainbow light, which have different expectations in stages. Then, in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, it is possible to perform an operation effect of a predetermined light emission mode of blue light emission, for example, and a specific light emission mode of rainbow light emission, for example, but in the special game state In the special 1 variable display, it may be possible to restrict the execution of the operation effect when a predetermined light emission mode is used, and at the same time make it possible to execute the operation effect when a specific light emission mode is used. In other words, in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, it is possible to execute a predetermined light emission mode of blue light emission and a specific light emission mode of rainbow light emission, for example, in the operation effect, but in the special game state In the feature 1 variable display, it may be possible to restrict the execution of the light emission effect of a predetermined light emission mode in the operation effect, while also being able to execute the light emission effect of a specific light emission mode. In addition, if there is a predetermined light emitting pattern that can be executed in weak operation and a predetermined light emission pattern that can be executed in strong operation, the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state The execution ratio of the predetermined light emission pattern may be smaller in the special 1 variation display of the gaming state.

By doing this, even if the game ball is accidentally hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player is informed that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning slot 45. It can make you notice. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Display performance using a display means different from the first image display device)
As shown in FIG. 174, a jackpot game is executed for the player by displaying the light guide plate image DG over one or more variable displays on the light guide plate provided on the front side of the first image display device 70. It is possible to perform a light guide plate display effect, which is a type of advance notice effect that makes people look forward to something. For example, as shown in FIG. 174(a), in the first continuous preview performance, a light guide plate image DG imitating a character is displayed at the start of the variable display, and as shown in FIG. 174(b), in the second In the continuous preview performance, for example, at the start of the variable display, a light guide plate image DG imitating a character in a pose different from the first time is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 174(c), in the third continuous preview performance, For example, at the start of the variable display, a light guide plate image DG imitating a character in the same pose as the second time but in a different color (such as a red character or a rainbow character) is displayed. Note that the timing of the light guide plate display performance is not limited to the start of the fluctuation, but may be during the fluctuation display or at the end of the fluctuation display, and the timing of successive light guide plate display performances may be different.

As shown in FIG. 174-1, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state is more effective than the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state. The execution rate is small (execution rate g3<execution rate g1). In other words, the light guide plate display in the special 1 variable display is more accurate when the game ball is hit to the left in the specific game state than when the game ball is hit to the left toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. It is difficult to execute the performance.

As shown in FIG. 174-1, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state is more effective than the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state. The execution rate is small (execution rate g3<execution rate g4). In other words, the light guide plate in the special figure 1 fluctuation display is better when the game ball is hit to the left in the specific game state than when the game ball is hit to the right in the specific game state. Display performance is difficult to execute.

With such an execution ratio of the light guide plate display performance, even if you accidentally hit the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first prize opening 45. It is possible to make the player aware that this is the case. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

Here, the number of types of patterns of the light guide plate display effect may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state. Further, the number of types of patterns of the light guide plate display effect may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state.

In the present embodiment, the display effect of the light guide plate has been explained, but the display effect performed by a display means different from the first image display apparatus 71, such as the second image display device 71 or a 3D filter, is similar to the light guide plate display effect. However, the execution ratio may be different. In this case, the light guide plate display effect and other display effects may be linked (related) and executed.

For example, if the execution rate of performance pattern G32 when special 1 fluctuation display is performed in a specific gaming state is "0" (or performance pattern G32 is not set), performance pattern G12 is executed when special 1 fluctuation display is performed in a normal gaming state. However, the light guide plate display effect of the effect pattern G32 corresponding to (or the same as) the effect pattern G12 will not be executed. At this time, when executing the Toku 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state, it is possible to execute a light guide plate display effect of a performance mode that cannot be executed in the Toku 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

For example, if the execution rate of the effect pattern G32 when the special 1 variable display is displayed in a specific gaming state is "0" (or the effect pattern G32 is not set), the effect pattern G42 is executed when the special 2 variable display is displayed in the specific game state. However, the light guide plate change effect of the effect pattern G32 corresponding to (or the same as) the effect pattern G42 will not be executed. At this time, when executing the Toku 2 variable display executed in the specific game state, it is possible to execute the light guide plate change effect of the effect mode that cannot be executed in the Toku 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

The light guide plate display effect can be executed at various timings such as at the start of fluctuation, at the development of the effect, at the time of reach occurrence, at the time of tilting, and at the final effect (confirmed effect). In the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, it is possible to execute the light guide plate display performance at a predetermined timing such as the start of variation and at a specific timing such as a final performance, but In the feature 1 variable display, execution of the light guide plate display effect at a predetermined timing may be regulated, while execution of the light guide plate display effect at a specific timing may be possible. In this way, differences may be provided in the display mode, whether or not the light guide plate display effect can be executed, etc., depending on the timing.

The light guide plate display effect can be executed in association with other hit suggestion effects, such as an actuation effect using a movable member. In this case, the light guide plate display effects can be selected from a light emitting pattern, a light emitting color, a light emitting range, etc., such as blue light → red light → rainbow light, which have different expectations in stages. Then, in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, the light guide plate display effect of the predetermined display mode of blue light emission and the specific display mode of rainbow light emission, for example, is replaced with other winning hints such as operation effects. However, in the special 1 variable display of a specific game state, it is possible to restrict the execution of other winning suggestion performances when in a predetermined display mode, while it is possible to restrict the execution of other winning suggestion performances when in a specific display mode. May be executable. In other words, in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, it is possible to perform a predetermined display mode of blue light emission and a specific display mode of rainbow light emission, for example, along with the operation effect, but in the specific game state In the feature 1 variable display, while it is possible to regulate the execution of the operation effect and the light emission effect of a predetermined display mode, it may also be possible to execute a specific display mode together with the operation effect. In addition, if there is a predetermined display pattern (executable during weak operation) and a predetermined display pattern (executable during strong operation), special 1 variation display in normal gaming state or special 2 variation in specific gaming state The execution ratio of the predetermined display pattern may be smaller in the special 1 variable display of the specific game state than in the display.

By doing this, even if the game ball is accidentally hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player is informed that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning slot 45. It can make you notice. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

The display performance performed by a device other than the first image display device 71 is not limited to the light guide plate, but may be a sub-liquid crystal provided on a game board such as a second image display device, a sub-liquid crystal provided in a frame, etc. Display effects may be performed by combining these display means including the light guide plate.

(Continuous preview performance)
As shown in FIGS. 166, 167, and 174, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment makes the player expect a jackpot game by executing a predetermined effect over one or more variable displays. It is possible to perform a continuous preview performance, which is a type of advance preview performance. In this embodiment, a color effect, a zone effect, a change notification sound effect, a hold icon change effect, a lamp change effect, a display effect using a light guide plate, etc. are executed in conjunction with each other.

Therefore, according to FIGS. 169 to 173 and FIG. 174-1, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment displays a special 1 variable display executed in a specific gaming state more than a special 1 variable display executed in a normal gaming state. However, the execution rate of continuous preview performances is decreasing. In other words, the continuous notice performance in the special 1 variable display is better when the game ball is hit to the left in the specific game state than when the game ball is hit to the left toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. is difficult to implement.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the continuous notice performance is smaller in the Special 1 variable display executed in a specific gaming state than in the Special 2 variable display executed in a specific gaming state. In other words, the continuous notice performance in the Special 1 variable display is better when hitting left in a specific gaming state than when hitting the game ball to the right in a specific gaming state. is difficult to implement.

Due to the execution rate of such a continuous notice performance, even if you mistakenly hit the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is disadvantageous to win the game ball in the first prize opening 45. It is possible to make the player aware of something. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

Here, the number of types of patterns of the continuous notice performance may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state. Further, the number of types of patterns of the continuous notice performance may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state.

Continuous notice performance is not only a linked performance that is performed consecutively or in conjunction with multiple fluctuating displays, but also a stage in which the level of expectation for a jackpot game increases as the number of fluctuating displays increases or as a predetermined condition such as the passage of time progresses. It may also include a development performance that becomes larger due to a target or continuous changes (development promotion performance, step-up (SU) type performance, etc.). Note that the development effect may be a change effect, such as a countdown or a timer effect, in which the mode (display mode or content) changes when a predetermined condition (e.g., elapsed time) is met.

Indirect effects, such as roulette effects, effects that increase the number of drawings when reaching, etc., that suggest different results depending on the selected options, pre-reading suggestion characters, conversation previews and cut-in notices on the LCD, and roulette effects for future development. Depending on the content, preview performances that foretell the occurrence of events that will lead to jackpots such as look-ahead and reach, and content suggestions that suggest the content of events that will be executed after the relevant performance, such as jackpot type suggestion performances (〇〇bonus). There are also effects that suggest operation, such as guidance for long button presses on the image display device, continuous press effects (the gauge accumulates during long presses, and the button vibrates for each level reached), and movable accessories (dedicated movable objects). Actions such as weak warning (suggestion) action, strong warning (suggestion) action, suggestion, development, and final performance), and vibration of operation buttons (including role objects with other functions such as role objects and light guide plates) Regarding other advance notification performances such as performances, the execution rate may be determined based on the relationship between the gaming state and the starting condition described above.

For example, if the execution rate of the continuous preview performance of the specific performance mode when displaying the special 1 variation in a specific gaming state is "0" (or the specific operation mode is not set), then the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state At this time, it is possible to execute a continuous preview performance in a predetermined performance mode, but a continuous preview performance in a specific performance mode corresponding to (or the same as) the predetermined performance mode will not be executed. At this time, when executing the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state, it is possible to execute a continuous preview performance of a performance mode that cannot be executed with the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

For example, if the execution rate of the continuous preview performance of the specific performance mode when displaying the special 1 variation in a specific game state is "0" (or the specific operation mode is not set), then the special 2 variation display in the specific game state At this time, it is possible to execute a continuous preview performance in a predetermined performance mode, but a continuous preview performance in a specific performance mode corresponding to (or the same as) the predetermined performance mode will not be executed. At this time, when executing the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state, it is possible to execute a continuous preview performance of a performance mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball in the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

In the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state, the light emitting effect of the special 1 starting hole 45 is executed at the timing when the game ball enters the first winning hole 45 and/or at the timing when the effect pattern 70a (first special pattern) starts changing. This is possible, and it is also possible to perform motion effects of the first movable accessory 73 and/or the second movable member 74. Similarly, in the special 2 fluctuation display of a specific game state, the special 2 starting hole 45 emits light at the winning timing of the game ball to the second winning hole 47 and/or the fluctuation start timing of the production symbol 70a (second special symbol). In addition to being able to perform a performance, it may also be possible to perform a motion performance of the first movable accessory 73 and/or the second movable member 74.

On the other hand, in the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state, the special 1 starting hole 45 The light emission effect is not performed, and the movement effect of the first movable accessory 73 and/or the second movable member 74 is not performed. That is, when the player hits left in the normal game state, the light emitting effect and action effect are executed, but when the player hits left in the specific game state, the execution of the light emitting effect and the action effect is regulated.

In this way, by making the light emitting effect and movement effect different between the special 1 variation display in the normal game state and the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, it is possible to make it possible to accidentally hit left-handed in the specific game state as well as in the normal game state. Even in such a case, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to win a game ball into the first winning hole 45. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

When the three production patterns 70a appear (stop) with a specific pattern (specific number = chance number), it becomes an opportunity to enter the so-called sudden probability change (2R probability change), or SP reach (the possibility of a jackpot even in the reach) It may also develop into something with a high level of sexuality. Such a fluctuating display in which a chance roll appears may be performed by one fluctuating or by multiple fluctuating. In this case, the appearance rate of chance eyes may be smaller in the special 1 variable display in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state. Further, the ratio of chance eyes appearing in a plurality of fluctuations may be smaller in the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state.

The production pattern 70a can be displayed in various ways, such as a predetermined display mode consisting of an identification part such as numbers (1 to 9) or letters (A, B...) and a decoration part such as a character, and a specific display mode consisting of only the identification part. The display may be selected from among the modes. Note that there may be multiple types of predetermined display modes. Additionally, in addition to or in place of the production pattern 70a, a pseudo-continuation pattern such as "NEXT" is displayed, so that it appears to fluctuate multiple times regardless of one starting condition (one prize winning). You may perform a similar performance (pseudo-reaction). Also, in addition to or in place of the production pattern 70a, for example, a change pattern, a mode entry pattern, a development pattern, etc., appear, thereby changing a mode (for example, production mode) or production different from the current one. It may also be possible to expect the execution of Note that special symbols such as pseudo-continuous symbols, change symbols, mode entry symbols, and development symbols have different information (expectation level of execution of the jackpot game) from the normal performance symbols 70a. The appearance of such a special pattern can also be used as an element of the linked effect.

The appearance ratio of special symbols may be smaller in the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state. In addition, the total number of types of symbols that can be displayed (normal performance symbols + special symbols) is higher in the special 1 variation display in a specific game state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. may be less. In addition, the execution rate of the linked effect that is performed in conjunction with the appearance of special symbols is higher in the special 1 variable display in a specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state. It can be small.

Even with these methods, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first prize opening 45 even if he or she accidentally hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Example 2 of production)
A second specific example of variable display performance is shown.

(Special 1 variation display in normal gaming state)
The special 1 variation display in the normal game state will be explained using FIGS. 175 and 176. As shown in FIG. 175, at timing P0, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m changes from "0" to "1". increases to At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "0" to "1". Further, one pending icon T1 is additionally displayed as an animation of 10 frames in the first pending icon display area 70B (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) (see FIG. 176(a)).

Next, at timing P1, as the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Ru. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "1" to "0". Further, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "1" to "0". Further, the hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as animations for 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Further, variable display of the first lamp pattern on the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 is started, but in the production pattern 70a, a part of the decorative part is operated as in the present embodiment. After performing preparatory operations such as enlarging/reducing the entire or part of the screen, scrolling is started (see FIG. 176(b)).

At the timing of P2, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "0" to "1". Furthermore, one pending icon T1 is additionally displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B as an animation of 10 frames (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) (see FIG. 176(c)).

At the timing of P3, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes from "1" to "2". Further, one pending icon T1 is additionally displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B as an animation of 10 frames (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) (see FIG. 176(d)).

Thereafter, at timing P4, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("259"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating motion (acting motion) (see FIG. 176(e)).

Then, at timing P5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. Further, processing for ending the variable performance is performed in the performance control unit 130m.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("259") (see FIG. 176(f)), and the first lamp The book stops when the symbol is in a losing state (for example, the light goes out).

Next, at the timing of P6, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "1". Further, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "2" to "1". Furthermore, the pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and after a preparatory operation is performed, scrolling is started (see FIG. 176(g)).

At the timing of P7, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes from "1" to "2". Further, one pending icon T1 is additionally displayed as an animation of 10 frames in the first pending icon display area 70B (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) (see FIG. 176(h)).

Thereafter, at timing P8, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("789"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating motion (acting motion) (see FIG. 176(i)).

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. Further, processing for ending the variable performance is performed in the performance control unit 130m.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("789") (see FIG. 176(j)), and the first lamp The book stops when the symbol is in a losing state (for example, the light goes out).

Thereafter, the special 1 variation display is performed in the normal gaming state according to the above-described flow.

We have explained the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state, but the basic flow is also the special 2 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state and the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state (time saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state). It will be the same as shown.

Specifically, the first pending number, the first special symbol, the first special symbol display 60, the first special symbol pending display 63, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-first pending display 83, the first The reserved number display area 70E, the first reserved icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern, and the first starting port 45 are respectively replaced by the second reserved number, the second special symbol, the second special symbol display 61, and the second special symbol. Replaced with reservation display 64, sub-second variable display 82, sub-second reservation display 84, second reservation number display area 70F, second reservation icon display area 70D, second lamp pattern, and second start port 47. Bye.

(Special 1 variation display of specific gaming state)
With reference to FIGS. 177 and 178, the special 1 variation display in a specific gaming state will be explained. As shown in FIG. 177, at timing P0, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m changes from "0" to "1". increases to At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "0" to "1". However, the hold icon T1 is not additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B (see FIG. 178(a)).

Next, at timing P1, as the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Ru. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "1" to "0". Further, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "1" to "0". Note that the hold icon T1 is not displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B (not displayed in a shifted manner). In addition, variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 is started, but the effect symbol 70a remains in a stopped state (see FIG. 178(b)).

At the timing of P2, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "0" to "1". However, the hold icon T1 is not additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B (see FIG. 178(c)).

At the timing of P3, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes from "1" to "2". However, the hold icon T1 is not additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B (see FIG. 178(d)).

Thereafter, at timing P4, even if a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a remains in the stopped state (see FIG. 178(e)).

Then, at timing P5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. Further, processing for ending the variable performance is performed in the performance control unit 130m.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the effect pattern 70a remains in a stopped state. Further, the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in a predetermined losing mode (“259”) (see FIG. 178(f)), and the first lamp symbol comes to a real stop in a losing mode (for example, turned off).

Next, at the timing of P6, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "1". Further, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "2" to "1". However, the hold icon T1 is not displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B. Further, the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, but the performance symbol 70a remains in a stopped state (see FIG. 178(g)).

At the timing of P7, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes from "1" to "2". However, the hold icon T1 is not additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B (see FIG. 178(h)).

Thereafter, at timing P8, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right remains in a stopped state (see FIG. 178(i)).

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. Further, processing for ending the variable performance is performed in the performance control unit 130m.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the production pattern 70a remains in a stopped state, but the special pattern TZ stops in a predetermined losing mode ("789") (see FIG. 178(j)). , the main lamp stops when the first lamp pattern fails (for example, turns off).

Thereafter, the special 1 variation display is performed in the specific game state according to the above-described flow. In addition, in the above example, although the effect pattern 70a is not varied, the effect pattern 70a may be varied.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment can execute a specific variation display in which the special symbol TZ varies without displaying the pending icon T1 from the start to the end of the special 1 variation display in a specific gaming state, and the specific variation display of the present embodiment In the variation display, the effect pattern 70a is not varied. On the other hand, in the normal gaming state, the above-described specific variation display is not executed from the start to the end of the special 1 variation display, and the production symbol 70a and the special symbol are displayed while displaying the hold icon T1 from the start to the end of the special 1 variation display. TZ is designed to fluctuate.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball in the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment can execute a specific variation display in which the special symbol TZ varies without displaying the pending icon T1 from the start to the end of the special 1 variation display in a specific gaming state, and the specific variation display of the present embodiment In the variation display, the effect pattern 70a is not varied. On the other hand, in the specific game state, the above-described specific variation display is not executed from the start to the end of the special 2 variation display, and the production symbol 70a and the special symbol are displayed while displaying the hold icon T2 from the start to the end of the special 2 variation display. TZ is designed to fluctuate.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball in the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

In the specific variation display, at least one of the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ can be made to vary. For example, even if both the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ change, the production symbol 70a may fluctuate but the special symbol TZ does not vary, or the special symbol TZ may vary but the production symbol 70a is not displayed. There may be.

In the embodiment, in the normal gaming state, a pending icon and a pending number can be displayed in a predetermined manner in accordance with an increase or decrease in the pending number based on winnings of game balls into the first starting port 45. On the other hand, in a specific gaming state, a pending icon can be displayed in a specific manner with only pending numbers different from the predetermined mode depending on an increase/decrease in the number of pending games based on winnings of game balls into the first starting port 45.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball in the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

In the embodiment, in a specific gaming state, a pending icon and a pending number can be displayed in a predetermined manner in accordance with an increase or decrease in the number of pending games based on winnings of game balls into the second starting port 47. On the other hand, in a specific gaming state, a pending icon can be displayed in a specific manner with only pending numbers different from the predetermined mode depending on an increase/decrease in the number of pending games based on winnings of game balls into the first starting port 45.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball in the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

In the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state, information regarding the number of reservations is displayed using the reservation icon, the reservation number, and the display, while in the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state, It is displayed with pending numbers and a display. That is, the total number of types of information regarding the number of reservations is smaller in the special 1 variable display in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state. It can also be said that it is more difficult to grasp (confirm) the information regarding the number of reservations in the Special 1 variable display in the specific gaming state than in the Special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the Special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state.

Further, the hold (relevant) icon is not limited to not being displayed in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state, but may be displayed. In addition, when displaying special 1 fluctuations in a specific gaming state, even if you do not shift display the pending (relevant) icon based on an increase or decrease in the number of reservations, the special 1 fluctuation in the normal gaming state will not operate. It may be displayed in a manner different from the display or special 2 variation display of the specific game state. That is, in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state, it is possible to shift display the pending icon, but in the special 1 variable display in the specific gaming state, it is not possible to execute the shift display of the pending icon. Can be regulated. In addition, in the special 1 variation display of the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display of the specific gaming state, it is possible to display the pending icon in a predetermined manner, but in the special 1 variation display of the specific gaming state, the pending icon can be displayed in the predetermined manner. It is possible to control the execution of display in .

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball in the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Example 3 of production)
A third specific example of variable display performance is shown.

(Special 1 fluctuation display of pending number “1” in normal gaming state)
An example of special 1 fluctuation display when the number of reservations in the normal game state is "1" will be explained using FIG. 179. Note that the variation pattern is selected from among a plurality of variation patterns.

As shown in FIG. 179, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "0" to "1". Furthermore, one pending icon T1 is additionally displayed as an animation of 10 frames in the first pending icon display area 70B (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) (see FIG. 179(a)).

Next, as the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", variable display of the first special symbol is started. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "1" to "0". Further, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "1" to "0". Further, the hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as animations for 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Further, variable display of the first lamp pattern on the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 is started, but in the production pattern 70a, a part of the decorative part is operated as in the present embodiment. After performing preparatory operations such as enlarging or enlarging the entire or part of the screen, scrolling is started (see FIG. 179(b)).

At this time, scrolling of the production symbols 70a starts in the order of the production symbols 70a on the left, the production symbols 70a in the center, and the production symbols 70a on the right (see FIGS. 179(c) to (e)).

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("789"). At this time, the performance symbols 70a temporarily stop in the order of the left performance symbol 70a, the center performance symbol 70a, and the right performance symbol 70a (see FIGS. 179(f) to (h)). In addition, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also perform a fluctuation motion. Perform (direction action). Further, the pending icon T and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (acting operation) (see FIGS. 179(f) to (h)).

Then, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. Further, processing for ending the variable performance is performed in the performance control unit 130m.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("789") (see FIG. 179(i)), and the first lamp The book stops when the symbol is in a losing state (for example, the light goes out).

(Special 1 fluctuation display of pending number “4” in normal gaming state)
An example of special 1 fluctuation display when the number of reservations is "4" in the normal gaming state will be explained using FIG. 180. Note that the variation pattern is selected from among a plurality of variation patterns.

As shown in FIG. 180, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one pending icon T1 is additionally displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B as an animation of 10 frames (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) (see FIG. 180(a)).

Next, as the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", variable display of the first special symbol is started. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as animations for 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Further, variable display of the first lamp pattern on the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 is started, but in the production pattern 70a, a part of the decorative part is operated as in the present embodiment. After performing preparatory operations such as enlarging/reducing the entire or part of the screen, scrolling is started (see FIG. 180(b)).

At this time, scrolling of the left side performance pattern 70a, the center performance pattern 70a, and the right side performance pattern 70a starts to scroll at the same time (see FIG. 180(c)).

When the game ball enters the first starting port 45, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one pending icon T1 is additionally displayed as an animation of 10 frames in the first pending icon display area 70B (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) (see FIG. 180(d)).

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("789"). At this time, the left performance symbol 70a, the center performance symbol 70a, and the right performance symbol 70a temporarily stop at the same time (see FIG. 180(e)). In addition, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also perform a fluctuation motion. Perform (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating motion (acting motion) (see FIG. 180(e)).

Then, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. Further, processing for ending the variable performance is performed in the performance control unit 130m.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("789") (see FIG. 180(f)), and the first lamp The book stops when the symbol is in a losing state (for example, the light goes out).

Thereafter, special 1 variation display is performed in the normal gaming state using the variation pattern selected according to the above-described flow.

We have explained the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state, but the basic flow is also the special 2 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state and the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state (time saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state). It will be the same as shown.

Specifically, the first pending number, the first special symbol, the first special symbol display 60, the first special symbol pending display 63, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-first pending display 83, the first The reserved number display area 70E, the first reserved icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern, and the first starting port 45 are respectively replaced by the second reserved number, the second special symbol, the second special symbol display 61, and the second special symbol. Replaced with reservation display 64, sub-second variable display 82, sub-second reservation display 84, second reservation number display area 70F, second reservation icon display area 70D, second lamp pattern, and second start port 47. Bye.

In the embodiment, the three effect patterns 70a shown in FIG. 180 start scrolling at the same time based on the variation pattern in which the three effect patterns 70a shown in FIG. 179 start scrolling in order and the three effect patterns 70a temporarily stop in order. However, the variation pattern in which the three production symbols 70a temporarily stop at the same time has a shorter variation time.

As shown in FIG. 181, the average fluctuation time of the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state is different between at least the number of reservations "1" and "4", and for example, as the number of reservations increases, the average fluctuation time becomes longer. . In the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state, the average fluctuation time is the longest when the number of reservations is "1", and the average fluctuation time is the shortest when the number of reservations is "4". Similarly, the average fluctuation time of the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state is different between at least the number of reservations "1" and "4", and for example, as the number of reservations increases, the average fluctuation time becomes longer. In the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state, the average fluctuation time is the longest when the number of holds is "1", and the average fluctuation time is the shortest when the number of holds is "4". In addition, even if the average fluctuation time is the same or different for the number of reservations "2" and "3", or the average fluctuation time for the number of reservations "2" to "4" is the same or different, It can be either.

On the other hand, the average fluctuation time of the special 1 fluctuation display in a specific gaming state is at least the same or different for the number of reservations "1" and "4". For example, if they are different, The average fluctuation time is the longest, and the average fluctuation time is the shortest when the number of reservations is "4".

Here, based on the difference between the average fluctuation display time when the number of reservations is "4" and the average fluctuation display time when the number of reservations is "1" when special 1 fluctuation display is executed in the normal gaming state, In particular, when executing the 1-variation display, the difference between the average variation display time when the number of reservations is "4" and the average variation display time when the number of reservations is "1" is smaller. That is, even if the average fluctuation time of the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state is different between the pending numbers "4" and "1", the difference is smaller than the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state.

In addition, when executing special 2 fluctuation display in a specific gaming state, the difference between the average fluctuation display time when the number of reservations is "4" and the average fluctuation display time when the number of reservations is "1" is determined. In the case of executing the 1-variation display, the difference between the average variation display time when the number of reservations is "4" and the average variation display time when the number of reservations is "1" is smaller. That is, even if the average fluctuation time of the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state is different between the pending numbers "4" and "1", the difference is smaller than the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state.

In addition, in the embodiment, based on the difference in the average fluctuation time between the number of reservations "4" of the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state and the number of reservations "1", the number of reservations of the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state is "4". The difference in the average fluctuation time with the number of reservations "1" is smaller, and the difference in the average fluctuation time between the number of reservations "4" and the number of reservations "1" in the special 2 fluctuation display in a specific gaming state is smaller. The difference in average fluctuation time between the number of reservations "4" and the number of reservations "1" in the special 1 fluctuation display is smaller (normal special 1>specific special 2>specific special 1).

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball in the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

In the embodiment, the three effect patterns 70a shown in FIG. 180 start scrolling at the same time based on the variation pattern in which the three effect patterns 70a shown in FIG. 179 start scrolling in order and the three effect patterns 70a temporarily stop in order. However, the variation pattern in which the three production symbols 70a temporarily stop at the same time has a shorter variation time.

In the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state, when the number of reservations is "4", the fluctuation pattern of FIG. 180 is more likely to be selected than the fluctuation pattern of FIG. 179, and when the number of reservations is "1" to "3", the fluctuation pattern of FIG. 179 The pattern is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. 180. That is, there are a plurality of variation patterns determined according to the number of reservations in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state. On the other hand, in the special 1 variation display of a specific game state, even if the number of reservations is "4" to "1", the variation pattern in FIG. 179 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. 180, and the variation pattern in FIG. is difficult to select (the selection rate may be 0). In other words, in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state, the variation pattern is almost fixed regardless of the number of reservations. In this way, when executing the special 1 fluctuation display for loss determination in the normal gaming state, the special 1 fluctuation display for loss determination is executed in the specific gaming state based on the number of patterns of the fluctuation display time determined by the predetermined number of reservations. In this case, the number of variable display time patterns determined by the predetermined number of reservations is smaller.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball in the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

In the special 2 fluctuation display of a specific game state, when the number of reservations is "4", the fluctuation pattern of FIG. 180 is more likely to be selected than the fluctuation pattern of FIG. 179, and when the number of reservations is "1" to "3", the fluctuation pattern of FIG. The pattern is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. 180. That is, there are a plurality of variation patterns determined according to the number of reservations in the special 2 variation display of the specific gaming state. On the other hand, in the special 1 variation display of a specific game state, even if the number of reservations is "4" to "1", the variation pattern in FIG. 179 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. 180, and the variation pattern in FIG. is difficult to select (the selection rate may be 0). In other words, in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state, the variation pattern is almost fixed regardless of the number of reservations. In this way, when executing the special 2 variable display for loss determination in a specific gaming state, the special 1 variable display for loss determination is executed in the specific gaming state based on the number of patterns of the variable display time determined by the predetermined number of reservations. In this case, the number of variable display time patterns determined by the predetermined number of reservations is smaller.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball in the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

Then, when executing the special 1 variation display for loss determination in the normal gaming state or when executing the special 2 variation display for loss determination in the specific gaming state, the pending number is determined from "4" to "1". Based on the number of patterns of variable display time, when executing the special 1 variable display for loss determination in a specific gaming state, the variable display time determined by the number of pendings determined by the number of pendings from "4" to "1" The number of patterns is smaller. In this way, when comparing the total number of variable display time patterns that can be determined by the number of holds from "4" to "1", instead of comparing by the number of holds as described above, it is possible to determine the loss in the normal gaming state. There are fewer special 1 fluctuation displays for loss determination in a specific gaming state than special 1 fluctuation displays for difference determination in a specific gaming state or special 2 fluctuation displays for difference determination in a specific gaming state. Even in this case, the above-mentioned effects can be obtained.

In the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state, when the number of reservations is "4", the fluctuation pattern of FIG. 180 is more likely to be selected than the fluctuation pattern of FIG. 179, and when the number of reservations is "1" to "3", the fluctuation pattern of FIG. 179 The pattern is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. 180. That is, there are a plurality of variation patterns determined according to the number of reservations in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state. On the other hand, in the special 1 variation display of a specific game state, even if the number of reservations is "4" to "1", the variation pattern in FIG. 179 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. 180, and the variation pattern in FIG. is difficult to select (the selection rate may be 0). In other words, in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state, the variation pattern is almost fixed regardless of the number of reservations. In other words, when displaying special 1 fluctuation for loss determination in a specific gaming state than when performing special 1 fluctuation display for loss determination in normal gaming state, the number of reservations is "4" and the number of reservations is "1". ”, the same variation pattern is executed at a high rate.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball in the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

In the special 2 fluctuation display of a specific game state, when the number of reservations is "4", the fluctuation pattern of FIG. 180 is more likely to be selected than the fluctuation pattern of FIG. 179, and when the number of reservations is "1" to "3", the fluctuation pattern of FIG. The pattern is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. 180. That is, there are a plurality of variation patterns determined according to the number of reservations in the special 2 variation display of the specific gaming state. On the other hand, in the special 1 variation display of a specific game state, even if the number of reservations is "4" to "1", the variation pattern in FIG. 179 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. 180, and the variation pattern in FIG. is difficult to select (the selection rate may be 0). In other words, in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state, the variation pattern is almost fixed regardless of the number of reservations. In other words, when displaying special 1 variation for loss determination in a specific gaming state than when performing special 2 variation display for loss determination in a specific gaming state, the number of pendings is "4" and the number of pendings is "1". ”, the same variation pattern is executed at a high rate.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball in the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

The special 1 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state is better than the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state, regardless of the number of reservations (the number of reservations is "4" and the number of reservations is "1"). ) The execution rate of variation patterns with the same stop or start pattern is high. Also, the total number of variation patterns with different stop modes (start modes) is smaller in the special 1 variation display in a specific gaming state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state. I can say that.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

As shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after preparatory operations such as movement of a part of the decorative part and expansion/contraction movement of the whole or part thereof are performed. Depending on the presence or absence of the preparatory action and the type of the preparatory action, players are expected to execute a jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 182, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the preparation operation is smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state. (execution rate h3<execution rate h1). In other words, the preparatory action in the special 1 variation display is better when the ball is hit to the left in the specific game state than when the player hits the game ball to the left toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. difficult to implement.

As shown in FIG. 182, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the preparation operation is smaller in the Special 1 variation display executed in a specific gaming state than in the Special 2 variation display executed in a specific gaming state. (execution rate h3<execution rate h4). In other words, the preparatory action in the special 1 variation display is better when the game ball is hit to the left in the specific game state than when the game ball is hit to the right in the specific game state. difficult to implement.

Due to the execution rate of such a preparation operation, even if you mistakenly hit the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first prize opening 45. It is possible to make the player aware of this. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

As shown in FIG. 182, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state has fewer types of preparation operations than the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state. (number of types of variation pattern H3<number of types of variation pattern H1). In other words, the preparatory action in the special 1 variation display is better when the ball is hit to the left in the specific game state than when the player hits the game ball to the left toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. It is easy to follow the same pattern.

As shown in FIG. 182, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variable display executed in a specific gaming state has fewer types of preparation operations than the special 2 variable display executed in a specific gaming state. (number of types of variation pattern H3<number of types of variation pattern H4). In other words, the preparatory action in the special 1 variation display is better when the ball is hit to the left in the specific game state than when the player hits the game ball to the left toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. It is easy to follow the same pattern.

Due to the number of types of preparatory movements, it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first prize opening 45 even if you accidentally hit the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. It is possible to make the player aware of this. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

As shown in FIGS. 179 and 180, when temporarily stopping, the effect pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and the effect pattern 70a also A stopping operation is executed in which the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE perform a fluctuation operation (production operation).

As shown in FIG. 183, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the stop operation is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state. (execution rate i3<execution rate i1). In other words, the stop operation in the special 1 variable display is more likely to occur when the game ball is hit to the left in the specific game state than when the player hits the game ball to the left toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. difficult to implement.

As shown in FIG. 183, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the stop operation is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in a specific gaming state than in the special 2 variable display executed in a specific gaming state. (execution rate i3<execution rate i4). In other words, the preparatory action in the special 1 variation display is better when the game ball is hit to the left in the specific game state than when the game ball is hit to the right in the specific game state. difficult to implement.

Due to the execution rate of such a stopping operation, it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first prize opening 45 even if you accidentally hit the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. It is possible to make the player aware of this. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

As shown in FIG. 182, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state has fewer types of stop operations than the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state. (number of types of variation pattern I3<number of types of variation pattern I1). In other words, the stop operation in the special 1 variable display is more likely to occur when the game ball is hit to the left in the specific game state than when the player hits the game ball to the left toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. It is easy to follow the same pattern.

As shown in FIG. 182, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variable display executed in a specific gaming state has fewer types of stop operations than the special 2 variable display executed in a specific gaming state. (number of types of variation pattern I3<number of types of variation pattern I4). In other words, the stopping action in the Special 1 variable display is more likely to occur when the game ball is hit to the left in the specific game state than when the player hits the game ball to the left toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. It is easy to follow the same pattern.

Due to the number of types of stopping motions like this, it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first prize opening 45 even if you accidentally hit the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. It is possible to make the player aware of this. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

Note that instead of performing both the preparation operation and the stop operation, only one of them may be performed.

In the embodiment, when stopping the variable display due to a loss determination, there is a variable stop pattern in which three effect symbols 70a are sequentially stopped (temporarily stopped) as shown in FIG. 179, and three effect symbols as shown in FIG. 180 are used. There is a variable stop pattern in which all 70a are stopped all at once. As shown in FIG. 184, from the special 1 variation display that is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the normal gaming state and is determined to be a loss, the number of losses that is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the specific gaming state is In the special 1 variation display that becomes the judgment, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a stop together is smaller. In other words, it is better to hit the game ball to the left in the specific game state than to hit the game ball to the left toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. In the variable display, it is difficult to execute a mode in which the three effect symbols 70a stop together.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 184, from the special 1 variation display that determines a loss, which is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the normal gaming state, it is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the specific gaming state. In the special 1 variation display that results in a loss determination, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a stop in order is higher. In other words, it is better to hit the game ball to the left in the specific game state than to hit the game ball to the left toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. In the variable display, the mode in which the three effect symbols 70a stop in sequence is likely to be executed.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

In the embodiment, when stopping the variable display due to a loss determination, there is a variable stop pattern in which three effect symbols 70a are sequentially stopped (temporarily stopped) as shown in FIG. 179, and three effect symbols as shown in FIG. 180 are used. There is a variable stop pattern in which all 70a are stopped all at once. As shown in FIG. 184, from the special 2 variation display that is executed when the number of holds is "4" in a specific gaming state, the loss judgment is determined to be a loss, which is executed when the number of holds is "4" in a specific gaming state. In the special 1 variation display that becomes the judgment, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a stop together is smaller. In other words, the three performance symbols 70a stop together in the special 1 fluctuation display with the number of reservations "4" when the left hand is played in a specific game state than when the right hand is made in the specific game state. is difficult to implement.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 184, from the special 2 variation display that is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in a specific gaming state, which is a loss determination, the display is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in a specific gaming state. In the special 1 variation display that results in a loss determination, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a stop in order is higher. In other words, the three effect symbols 70a stop in sequence in the special 1 fluctuation display with the number of reservations "4" when the player plays left-handed in a specific gaming state than when they play right-handed in a specific gaming state. Easy to execute.

As shown in FIG. 184, a special 1 variation display that results in a loss determination is executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the normal gaming state, or a loss determination is performed when the number of reservations is "1" in a specific gaming state. In the special 2 fluctuation display that becomes ``1'' and the special 1 fluctuation display that is executed when the number of reservations is "1" in a specific game state and becomes a loss determination, a fluctuation pattern in which the three effect symbols 70a stop together is The execution rate is the same. In addition, as shown in FIG. 184, a special 1 variation display is executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the normal gaming state, and is executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the specific gaming state. In the special 2 variation display that determines a loss and the special 1 variation display that results in a loss determination that is executed when the number of reservations is "1" in a specific game state, the three performance symbols 70a stop in sequence. The execution rate of the patterns is the same.

In the embodiment, when starting a variable display in a loss determination, a variation start pattern in which three effect patterns 70a are sequentially scrolled as shown in FIG. 179 and three effect patterns 70a as shown in FIG. 180 are simultaneously scrolled. There is a variation start pattern that causes As shown in FIG. 185, from the special 1 variation display that is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the normal gaming state and is determined to be a loss, the number of losses that is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the specific gaming state is In the special 1 variable display that becomes the judgment, the execution rate of the variable pattern in which the scrolling starts when the three performance symbols 70a are aligned is smaller. In other words, it is better to hit the game ball to the left in the specific game state than to hit the game ball to the left toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. In the variable display, it is difficult to execute a mode in which scrolling starts when all three performance symbols 70a are aligned.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 185, from the special 1 variation display that is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the normal gaming state, which determines a loss, the display is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the specific gaming state. In the special 1 variation display that results in a loss determination, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which the three effect symbols 70a start scrolling in order is higher. In other words, it is better to hit the game ball to the left in the specific game state than to hit the game ball to the left toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. In the variable display, the mode in which the three effect symbols 70a start scrolling in order is likely to be executed.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball in the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

In the embodiment, when the variable display is stopped due to a loss determination, a variation start pattern is used in which scrolling of three effect symbols 70a is started in order as shown in FIG. There is a variation start pattern in which scrolling is started. As shown in FIG. 185, from the special 2 variation display that is executed when the number of holds is "4" in a specific gaming state, the loss judgment that is executed when the number of holds is "4" in a specific gaming state. The execution ratio of the variation pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a align and start scrolling is smaller in the special 1 variation display that becomes the judgment. That is, in the case of left-handed hitting in a specific gaming state, the three performance symbols 70a are aligned and start scrolling in the Special 1 variable display with the number of reservations “4” than in the case of right-handed hitting in a specific gaming state. aspects are difficult to implement.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 185, from the special 2 fluctuation display that is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in a specific gaming state and is determined to be a loss, the display is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in a specific gaming state. In the special 1 variation display that results in a loss determination, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a start scrolling in order is higher. In other words, the three performance symbols 70a start scrolling in order in the special 1 fluctuation display with the number of reservations "4" when the left hand is played in a specific gaming state than when the right hand is made in the specific gaming state. is easy to execute.

As shown in FIG. 185, a special 1 variation display that results in a loss determination is executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the normal gaming state, or a loss determination is performed when the number of reservations is "1" in a specific gaming state. In the special 2 fluctuation display that becomes ``1'' and the special 1 fluctuation display that is executed when the number of reservations is "1" in a specific game state and becomes a loss determination, a fluctuation pattern in which the three effect symbols 70a are aligned and starts scrolling. The execution rate is the same. In addition, as shown in FIG. 185, a special 1 variation display is executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the normal gaming state, and is executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the specific gaming state. In the special 2 variable display that results in a loss determination and the special 1 fluctuation display that results in a loss determination that is executed when the number of reservations is "1" in a specific game state, the three effect symbols 70a start scrolling in order. The execution rate of the fluctuation patterns is the same.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

In the special 1 variation display of a specific game state, the displayed performance pattern 70a does not scroll, or there is a special display mode such as a part of the decoration such as a character disappearing from the performance pattern 70a, or the performance pattern The present invention is not limited to the case where 70a is not displayed, but may be other than the case where, for example, a decorative part such as a character of the effect pattern 70a does not perform a predetermined operation even though it is scrolled. In other words, the special 1 fluctuation display in a specific gaming state is better than the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state. It can be said that a large proportion of the information is displayed in a special manner different from that displayed in the special 2 variable display.

A special pattern such as the above-mentioned pseudo-connected pattern may be displayed overlapping the effect pattern 70a or in place of the effect pattern 70a. In this case, by displaying a special pattern, all or part of the normal scrolling of the effect pattern 70a and the movements (preparation movement and stop movement) of the decorative part such as the character of the effect pattern become invisible. . And, the ratio or range in which the normal symbols are hidden by the display of special symbols is higher in the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state. is getting smaller.

By doing these things, even if the game ball is accidentally hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player is informed that it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first winning slot 45. It can make you notice. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Example 4 of production)
A fourth specific example of variable display performance will be described with reference to FIG. 185.

As shown in FIG. 185(a), while the effect pattern 70a of "8" is stopped (temporarily stopped) displayed in the left and right variable display areas of the effect pattern 70a that was being displayed in a variable manner, the effect is displayed in the center variable display area. It is assumed that a ready-to-win effect in which the symbol 70a is displayed in a variable manner is being executed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 186(b), an effect display is performed in which the temporarily stopped left and right effect symbols 70a change to a display mode different from the previous display mode (FIG. 186(b), thereby It is suggested that expectations for the jackpot game are high.Then, a symbol size change effect is executed in which the effect symbol 70a is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen, and a predetermined effect such as insertion of a moving image is performed on the first image display device 70. The reduced performance pattern 70a is made up of a rectangular base image, a character image CG of a predetermined character, a bar-shaped image SG that is part of the character, and a pattern effect image ZE that decorates the background of the character. The normal display mode consisting of a decorative section, an identification section consisting of a hexagonal base image and a numeric section (identification characters) changes to a simple reduced display mode of only the identification section.

As shown in FIGS. 185(d) and (f), by displaying pseudo-effect patterns (pseudo-symbols) GZ in three rows above and below, an effect that increases expectations for a jackpot game is performed. . After that, when the execution period of the reach effect that becomes a jackpot ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special symbol confirmation command indicating a jackpot), as shown in FIG. 185(g), the current jackpot game (here, the first jackpot The jackpot effect pattern 70a of "888" indicating the type of game (game) and the special pattern TZ are temporarily stopped and displayed (shaking fluctuation) and then stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation performance ends.

In the embodiment, the fluctuating display is displayed with the performance pattern 70a in the normal mode and at a predetermined timing of the fluctuating display (for example, at the beginning of the reach performance, in the middle of the reach performance, when the fluctuation starts, during the fluctuation, when the fluctuation stops, etc.) This can be carried out with the production pattern 70a in a specific manner. The production pattern 70a of the specific mode is not only a changed production pattern 70a (changed pattern) or a pseudo pattern GZ as shown in FIG. It may also be a development pattern that stimulates expectations.

As shown in FIG. 186, the ratio of the performance symbols 70a of the specific mode being displayed is smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state (m32 <m12). In other words, it is more difficult to display the performance symbol 70a in a specific manner in the special 1-figure variable display when the left-handed hit is made in the specific game state than when the left-handed hit is made in the normal game state.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

As shown in FIG. 186, the ratio of the performance symbols 70a of the specific mode being displayed is smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state (m32 <m42). In other words, the ratio of the performance symbols 70a in the normal mode being displayed is higher in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state. That is, it is more difficult to display the performance symbols 70a in a specific manner when the player hits the left hand in the specific game state than when the player hits the right player in the specific game state.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

As shown in FIG. 185, it is possible to perform a display size change effect in which the display size of the effect pattern 70a is changed in the variable display. As shown in FIG. 187, the display size of the performance symbol 70a is changed more in the special 1 fluctuation display that is executed in a specific gaming state than in the special 1 fluctuation display that is a loss determination in the normal gaming state. The execution rate of the display size change effect is small (n3<n1). That is, it is more difficult to execute the display size change performance of the performance symbol 70a in the special 1 figure variable display when the left hit is performed in the specific game state than when the left hit is performed in the normal game state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 187, the special 1 fluctuation display that is executed in a specific game state and that determines a loss changes the display size of the performance symbol 70a more than the special 2 fluctuation display that determines a loss in a specific game state. The execution rate of the display size change effect is small (n3<n4). That is, the display size change performance of the performance symbols 70a is more difficult to execute when a left hit is performed in a specific game state than when a right hit is performed in a specific game state.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball in the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

The display size change effect is not limited to being executed in conjunction with the reach effect, but can be executed at a predetermined timing such as at the start of the change or during the change. The display size change effect may be executed in association with a winning suggestion effect such as an operation effect of a movable member, or a predetermined condition such as the number of reservations or operation of an operation button.

From the special 1 variation display that is executed when the number of holds is "4" in the normal gaming state, which is a loss determination, or the special 2 variation display that is executed when the number of holds is "4" in a specific game state, and which is a loss determination. , the special 1 variation display that is executed when the number of holds is "4" in a specific gaming state and is determined to be a loss may have a smaller execution rate of the symbol change performance. From the special 1 variation display that is executed when the number of holds is "1" in the normal gaming state, which is a loss judgment, or the special 2 variation display that is executed when the number of holds is "1" in a specific game state, and which is a loss judgment. , the special 1 variation display that is executed when the number of holds is "1" in a specific gaming state and is determined to be a loss may have a smaller execution rate of the symbol change performance.

A special 1 variation display that is executed when the number of holds is "4" in a specific gaming state and is a loss determination, and a special 1 variation display that is executed when the number of holds is "1" in a specific gaming state and is a loss determination. The execution rate of the symbol change effect may be the same. In addition, from the special 1 fluctuation display that is executed when the number of holds is "4" in a specific gaming state and becomes a loss judgment, the special 1 that is executed when the number of holds is "1" in a specific gaming state and becomes a loss judgment. In the variable display, the execution rate of the symbol change performance may be smaller or larger.

Production that makes people expect to execute a jackpot game by changing the symbols (symbol change production) is not limited to the display size change production, but also changes the position where the production symbols 70a are displayed, or changes the display order of the production symbols 70a. Other aspects such as changing or changing are also possible. In addition, when the symbol change effect has multiple patterns with different display sizes, display positions, display orders, etc., the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state will be better than the special 1 variable display in the specific gaming state. In the case of variable display, the total number of patterns for pattern change performance may be smaller.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball in the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

As shown in FIG. 186, the variable display is a reach effect (normal reach, SP reach, SPSP reach, reach development promotion effect, etc.). As shown in FIG. 188, the execution ratio of the reach effect is smaller in the Special 1 variable display that is executed in a specific gaming state and that results in a loss determination than in the Special 1 fluctuation display that results in a loss determination in the normal gaming state ( o3<o1). That is, it is more difficult for the reach effect to be executed in the special 1 figure variation display when the player makes a left shot in the specific game state than when the player makes a left shot in the normal game state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 188, the execution ratio of the reach effect is smaller in the special 1 variation display that is executed in a specific gaming state and results in a loss determination than in the special 2 variation display that is performed in a specific gaming state and results in a loss determination ( o3<o4). In other words, it is more difficult for the reach effect to be executed when the player hits the left hand in the specific gaming state than when the player hits the right player in the specific gaming state.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball in the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

Prior to reach performance, the first performance such as mode entry performance and development performance is performed, and then the second performance such as roulette performance and development performance is performed. By staging the event, expectations for the jackpot are raised. Here, the execution ratio of the advance notification performance executed before the reach performance is smaller in the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state. You can. In other words, the execution ratio of the ready-to-win performance performed from the advance notification performance is smaller in the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state. In addition, the special 1 variable display in a specific gaming state has fewer pre-notification effects executed before the reach effect than the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in a specific gaming state. Good too. In other words, the ratio of ready-to-reach effects being executed after pre-notification effects is smaller in special 1 variation displays in specific gaming states than in special 1 variation displays in normal gaming states or special 2 variation displays in specific gaming states. .

The special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state has a lower expectation of transitioning to a jackpot game after the reach effect is executed than the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state, and the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state The special 1 variable display has a lower expectation of transitioning to a jackpot game after the reach effect is executed (special 2 variable display in a specific gaming state > special 1 variable display in a normal gaming state > special 1 in a specific gaming state) (variable display).

When selecting and executing a reach effect from multiple patterns, the special 1 variation display in a specific gaming state shows the total types of reach effects better than the special 1 variation display in a normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in a specific gaming state. The number may be small.

It is possible to select from a plurality of patterns and execute related performances, such as movement effects of movable members and vibration effects of operation buttons, which are performed in association with the reach effect at appropriate timings such as during or before the reach effect. In this case, the special 1 variable display in the specific gaming state has a smaller execution ratio of related performances performed in conjunction with the ready-to-win performance than the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state. Furthermore, the special 1 variable display in the specific gaming state has fewer types of related performances performed in conjunction with the ready-to-win performance than the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state.

The special 1 variable display in a specific gaming state has a smaller rate of development from normal reach to SP reach or SPSP reach than the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state. The execution period of the ready-to-win effect is shorter in the special 1 variable display in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state. The execution ratio of the ready-to-win performance over a plurality of fluctuations is smaller in the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state.

By doing this, even if the game ball is accidentally hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player is informed that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning slot 45. It can make you notice. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Specific production example 5)
Specific example 5 of variable display effects will be described with reference to FIGS. 189 and 190. In the specific example 5 of performance, the player is in a specific game state, and the first specific notification SR1 is performed in the upper right area of the first image display device 70 to guide the player to play right.

As shown in FIG. 189, at timing P0, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47, the second pending number U2 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m changes from "3" to "4". increases to At this time, the second reservation number U2 indicated by the LED on the second special symbol reservation display 64 changes from "3" to "4". In addition, the 1st pending number which the main control part 110m memorize|stores (ascertains) is "0", and the 1st pending number U1 shown by LED in the 1st special symbol pending display 63 is "0".

At this time, the second pending number U2 indicated by the second pending number displayed in the second pending number display area 70F changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the second pending number U2 indicated by the LED of the sub-second pending display 84 changes from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one pending icon T2 is additionally displayed as an animation of 10 frames (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) in the second pending icon display area 70D (see FIG. 190(a)). Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E is "0". Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 is "0", and the pending icon T1 is not displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B.

Next, at timing P1, as the second pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", the variable display of the second special symbol is started. Ru. Further, the second pending number U2 indicated by the LED on the second special symbol pending display 64 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the second pending number U2 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the second pending number U2 indicated by the second pending number displayed in the second pending number display area 70F changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the second reservation number U2 indicated by the LED of the sub-second reservation display 84 changes from "4" to "3". Furthermore, the hold icons T2 displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D are shifted and displayed as animations for 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Further, variable display of the first lamp pattern on the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the sub-second variable display 81 is started, but in the production pattern 70a, a part of the decorative part is operated as in the present embodiment. After performing preparatory operations such as enlarging or enlarging the entire or part of the screen, scrolling is started (see FIG. 190(b)).

At the timing of P2, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "0" to "1". However, the hold icon T1 is not additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B (see FIG. 190(c)).

Further, based on the winning in the first winning opening 45, in addition to the first specific notification SR1, a display such as "Right hit" is displayed in the center of the first image display device 70, and the audio output device 9 Then, for example, a second specific notification SR2 is executed in which a voice output such as "Please hit right." is executed (see FIG. 190(c)).

Thereafter, at timing P3, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("789"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (acting operation) (see FIG. 190(d)).

Then, at timing P6, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the second special symbol display 61. Further, processing for ending the variable performance is performed in the performance control unit 130m.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("789") (see FIG. 190(e)), and the second lamp The book stops when the symbol is in a losing state (for example, the light goes out).

Next, at timing P5, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the second pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". 2. The variable display of special symbols begins. Further, the second pending number U2 indicated by the LED on the second special symbol pending display 64 changes from "3" to "2". Further, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "2" and a process is performed to start the variable performance. Although the main control unit 110m also has a first holding memory based on winnings in the first winning opening 45, priority is given to the second holding memory based on winnings in the second starting opening 47, and variable effects are performed. be exposed.

At this time, the second pending number U2 indicated by the second pending number displayed in the second pending number display area 70F changes from "3" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the second pending number U2 indicated by the LED of the sub-second pending display 84 changes from "3" to "2". Furthermore, the hold icons T2 displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D are shifted and displayed as animations for 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. In addition, variable display of the first lamp pattern on the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the sub-second variable display 81 is started, but the production pattern 70a has a part of the decorative part that operates as in the present embodiment. After performing preparatory operations such as enlarging or enlarging the entire or part of the screen, scrolling is started (see FIG. 190(f)).

At the timing of P6, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "1" to "2". However, the hold icon T1 is not additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B (see FIG. 190(g)).

Furthermore, based on the winning in the first winning opening 45, in addition to the first specific notification SR1, a display such as "hit right" is displayed in the center of the first image display device 70, and the audio output device 9 Then, for example, a second specific notification SR2 is executed in which a voice output such as "Please hit right." is executed (see FIG. 190(g)).

Thereafter, at timing P7, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("913"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating motion (acting motion) (see FIG. 190(h)).

Then, at timing P8, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the second special symbol display 61. Further, processing for ending the variable performance is performed in the performance control unit 130m.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("913") (see FIG. 190(j)), and the second lamp The book stops when the symbol is in a losing state (for example, the light goes out).

In this way, in addition to the first specific notification that suggests a specific gaming state, and based on the winning of the game ball to the first winning hole 45 while executing the first specific notification, It is possible to carry out the second specific notification. By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

The second specific notification SR2 is different from the right hit notification that is notified at the start of a jackpot game, and is performed based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting hole 45 in a specific game state.

When only the first specific notification SR1 is executed, it is possible to perform predetermined effects (win suggestion effects) such as notification sound effects, light emitting effects such as a starting port, and hold icon change effects, but it is not possible to execute the second specific notification SR1. When a prize is won at the first starting port 45 in a specific gaming state, a predetermined effect such as a notification sound effect, a light emitting effect such as a starting hole, a hold icon effect, etc. (execution of a winning suggestion effect can be regulated. It can also be said that the second specific notification SR can be executed instead of executing the performance.

Further, the execution ratio of the predetermined effect (win hint effect) is smaller when both the first specific information SR1 and the second specific information SR2 are executed than when only the first specific information SR1 is executed.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Example 6 of production)
The first notification is executed at a predetermined timing (at the start of fluctuation) as a notification effect (advance notification effect) that makes people expect to play a jackpot game, and the second notification is performed at a timing different from the predetermined timing (at the time of winning the starting opening). There is. For example, in the embodiment, a first light emitting mode (see FIG. 191(a)) in which the winning opening lamp NR (starting opening 45, 47) blinks in blue when the effect pattern 70a (special symbol) starts to fluctuate; It is possible to perform the notification effect of the first notification with a second light emission mode (see FIG. 191(b)) in which the lamp NR (starting ports 45, 47) is blinked in red, for example, which is different from the first light emission mode. In addition, when a game ball enters the starting openings 45, 47, for example, a winning opening lamp NR, a lighting device for the board such as the decorative frame 41, a lighting device for the frame, etc., which is different from the first light emission mode and the second light emission mode, It is possible to execute the notification effect of the second notification using the third light emitting mode (see FIGS. 191(d) and (e)) in which the lights emit light in combination. Note that even in the second notification, the first light emission mode and/or the second light emission mode may be executed. Furthermore, as a notification effect, it has a fourth light emitting mode (see FIGS. 192(c) and (f)) that is different from the first to third light emitting modes, and does not involve the winning opening lamp NR emitting light, for example.

As shown in FIG. 192, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state is more effective than the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state. The execution rate of the light emitting mode is small (p31<p11). Further, the execution ratio of the fourth light emitting mode notification performance is higher in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state (p32>p12). That is, the first light emission mode, second light emission mode, and third light emission mode in the notification performance are more difficult to execute when the player hits the left hand in the specific game state than when the player hits the left hand in the normal game state. Further, the fourth light emitting mode in the notification performance is more likely to be executed when the player hits the left hand in the specific game state than when the player hits the left hand in the normal game state.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball in the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

As the notification effect, the first notification can be executed in the first light emission mode, the second light emission mode, and the third light emission mode, and the second notification can be executed in the first light emission mode and the second light emission mode, but the second notification can be executed in the first light emission mode and the second light emission mode. The third light emission mode may be made infeasible in the notification. Even in this case, as shown in FIG. 192, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state is more effective in the first light emitting mode in the notification effect than the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state. The execution ratio of the second light emission mode and the third light emission mode is small (p31<p11). Further, the execution ratio of the fourth light emitting mode notification performance is higher in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state (p32>p12). That is, the first light emission mode, second light emission mode, and third light emission mode in the notification performance are more difficult to execute when the player hits the left hand in the specific game state than when the player hits the left hand in the normal game state. Further, the fourth light emitting mode in the notification performance is more likely to be executed when the player hits the left hand in the specific game state than when the player hits the left hand in the normal game state.

In this way, the player is made aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning hole 45 even if he or she accidentally hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. Can be done. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

As shown in FIG. 191, a vibration effect is performed using the operation button 17 in conjunction with the above-mentioned notification effect. The vibration effect makes the user expect a jackpot game by causing the operation button 17 to vibrate, and may be performed in combination with a button light emission effect that causes the operation button 17 to emit light. In the notification effect, the winning opening lamp NR (starting opening 45, 47) blinks in blue (see FIG. 191(a)), and the winning opening lamp NR (starting opening 45, 47) flashes in the first lighting mode. It is possible to perform the notification effect of the first notification by using a second light emitting mode (see FIG. 191(b)) that is different from the mode, for example, blinking in red. In addition, a second light emitting mode that is different from the first light emission mode and the second light emission mode, for example, a combination of the prize opening lamp NR and other light emitting means such as the board lighting device 76 such as the decorative frame 41 or the frame lighting device 10, to emit light. The second notification can be performed in three light emission modes (see FIGS. 191(d) and (e)).

As shown in FIG. 193, in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state, the execution ratio of the vibration effect by the operation button 17 is higher in the second notification than in the first notification (q12>q11). That is, in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state, the vibration effect is more likely to be executed in combination with the second notification than in combination with the first notification. Further, the execution ratio of the vibration performance by the operation button 17 is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display performed in the normal gaming state (r3<r1). That is, it is more difficult for the vibration performance to be executed when the player hits the left hand in the specific game state than when the player hits the left hand in the normal game state.

The vibration performance may be selected from a plurality of vibration patterns, such as a pattern that is performed over a certain period of time, or a pattern that is performed intermittently at predetermined intervals. Further, the vibration effect may be selected from a plurality of effect patterns, such as a weak effect pattern in which the object itself vibrates without emitting light, and a strong effect pattern in which the object itself vibrates while emitting light. The special 1 variable display in the specific gaming state may require fewer total patterns of vibration effects than the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state. In addition, in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, it is possible to perform the vibration effects of the weak effect pattern and the strong effect pattern, but in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, the weak effect pattern It may be possible to restrict the execution of the vibration effects of the above, while allowing the execution of the vibration effects of the strong effect pattern.

By doing this, the player is made aware that it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first prize opening 45 even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. be able to. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

The light emitting effect is not limited to the starting gate lamp NR, but other parts such as the game board or the frame may emit light.

As shown in FIG. 191, in accordance with the timing when the effect pattern 70a starts to fluctuate, a light emitting effect by the prize opening lamp NR, an operation effect of the first movable member 73, and a vibration effect of the operation button 17 can be executed. . Here, the light emitting effect includes a mode in which only the winning slot lamp NR emits light, a specific position of the winning slot lamp NR and the other first movable members 73, the operation button 17, the game board (board lighting device), the frame, etc. It is possible to select and execute from a plurality of patterns, such as a mode of emitting light in combination. Furthermore, the light emitting effect can be performed by selecting light emitting colors such as blue, red, and rainbow colors from a plurality of patterns. Further, the operation effect of the first movable member 73 can be selected from a plurality of patterns such as weak operation and strong operation. Further, the vibration effect of the operation button 17 can be executed by selecting from a plurality of patterns having different periods, intensities, and intervals. As shown in FIG. 191, in this embodiment, in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state, the light emitting effect in the winning hole lamp NR and the operation effect of the movable accessory (movable member 73 and operation button 17) are changed. It can be executed at the start timing. Similarly, in the special 2 variation display in a specific game state, even if the light emission effect on the prize opening lamp NR and the operation effect of the movable accessory (movable member 73 and operation button 17) are made possible to be executed at the timing of the start of variation. good. On the other hand, in the special 1 variation display of a specific game state, the light emitting effect on the prize opening lamp NR and the operation effect of the movable accessory (movable member 73 and operation button 17) are not executed at the timing when the variation starts. It has become. In the special 1 variation display of a specific game state, the light emitting effect on the prize opening lamp NR and the operation effect of the movable accessory (movable member 73 and operation button 17) are not performed at the same time, but may be performed at different times. .

In this way, the total number of types of winning suggestion effects executed at the same time is smaller in the special 1 fluctuation display in a specific gaming state than in the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state. . Note that the timing for performing the performance may be at the time of winning a prize, during fluctuation, or when fluctuation is stopped.

By doing this, the player is made aware that it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first prize opening 45 even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. be able to. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Variations of production examples 1 to 6)
The production symbol 70a is displayed in the special 1 variation display executed in the normal game state, but the production symbol 70a is not displayed in the special 1 variation display carried out in the specific game state, and even if it is displayed, it is not scrolled. Good too. In addition, although the production pattern 70a is displayed in the special 2 variation display executed in a specific game state, the production pattern 70a is not displayed in the special 1 variation display carried out in a specific game state, and even if it is displayed, it does not scroll. You may also do so. By doing this, the player is made aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first prize opening 45 even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. be able to. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

In the special 1 variable display executed in a specific game state, even if the pending icon is not displayed, a related display such as a pedestal decorating the pending icon may be displayed.

The production pattern 70a used in the special 1 variation display executed in the normal game state and the production pattern 70a used in the special 1 variation display carried out in the specific game state may be used in common or may be different. Further, the performance symbol 70a used in the Toku 2 variation display executed in the specific game state and the performance symbol 70a used in the Toku 1 variation display executed in the specific game state may be used in common or may be different.

The special symbol TZ used in the special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state and the special symbol TZ used in the special 1 variation display carried out in the specific gaming state may be separate without being shared. Further, the special symbol TZ used in the special 2 variation display executed in a specific game state and the special symbol TZ used in the special 1 variation display carried out in a specific game state may be separate without being shared. The display position of the special symbol TZ may be the same or different between the special 1 variation display in the normal game state and the special 1 variation display in the specific game state. Further, the display position and/or display mode of the special symbol TZ may be the same or different between the special 2 variation display in the specific game state and the special 1 variation display in the specific game state.

The reserved numbers used in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state and the reserved numbers used in the special 1 variable display carried out in the specific gaming state may be shared without being separated. Furthermore, the reserved numbers used in the Toku 2 fluctuation display executed in the specific gaming state and the reserved numbers used in the Toku 1 fluctuation display executed in the specific gaming state may be shared without being separated.

It is possible to perform a combination of advance notice effects that are executed at different times. At the start of the variation, the degree of expectation for the jackpot game can be suggested by the action of the performance symbols themselves or the characters of the performance symbols at the time of the start of variation, the order in which the variation of the performance symbols starts, etc. Furthermore, when the variation ends (stops), the level of expectation for the jackpot game can be suggested by the action of the performance symbols themselves or the characters of the performance symbols at the time of the start of the fluctuation, the order in which the fluctuations of the performance symbols start, etc. Furthermore, in the first half of the execution period of the advance notice performance in one or more variable displays, the conversation preview, cut-in notice, development destination roulette display, Long press effect or repeated press effect of the operation button 17, pending icon change or corresponding icon change, display effect of the light guide plate, operation effect of the movable members 73, 74 (suggestion, development, decision effect), vibration effect of the operation button (suggestion/decision effect) Development/decision effects), timer effects, lamp lighting effects of the starting ports 45, 47, etc. can be executed singly or in combination. Furthermore, in the second half of the execution period of the advance notice performance using one or more variable displays, the development performance and final performance on a display means such as a liquid crystal display, and the display performance on the light guide plate (e.g., light emission according to the result of the final performance) , Vibration effects of the operation button 17 (suggestion, development, decision effects), operation effects of frame and board objects (movable members 73, 74), jackpot type suggestion effects (〇〇bonus, etc.), timer effects, pending changes It is possible to perform lamp lighting effects of the starting ports 45, 47, etc., individually or in combination.

In this case, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state has a smaller execution ratio of the advance notice effect executed in the first half of the execution period than the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state. In addition, the execution ratio of the advance notice effect executed in the first half of the execution period is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state. The special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state has a smaller execution rate of the advance notice performance executed in the latter half of the execution period than the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state. In addition, the execution ratio of the advance notice effect executed in the latter half of the execution period is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state.

If there is a first performance to be performed in the first half of the execution period and a second performance to be performed in the second half of the execution period as advance notice performances, the first performance and the second performance will be performed in the special 1 variable display that is performed in the normal gaming state. However, while the first effect can be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in a specific game state, the execution of the second effect may be restricted. In addition, the first effect and the second effect can be executed with the special 2 variable display executed in a specific game state, but the first effect can be executed with the special 1 variable display executed in a specific game state. Execution of the second performance may be regulated.

In this way, the player is made aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning hole 45 even if he or she accidentally hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. Can be done. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

The execution rate of various performances that are performed in the special 1 variable display in the aforementioned specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state or variable probability gaming state) that makes players expect to execute a jackpot game may be "0".

The various effects that make players expect to play the jackpot game described above (sometimes collectively referred to as hit suggestion effects) may have only one effect (display) pattern set, but may include multiple effects (display) patterns. You may select and execute the following. The winning suggestion effect is not limited to the fact that the execution rate is different depending on the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state, the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state, and the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state, for example, The winning suggestion effect is when the execution rate of multiple patterns that can be selected in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state (special 1 variation display in the specific game state, special 2 variation display in the specific game state) is the same. may also be different.

For example, when the winning suggestion performance is selected from a plurality of patterns in the special 1 variable display in a specific game state, the execution rate of the specific pattern different from the predetermined pattern may be smaller than that of the predetermined pattern. On the other hand, when the winning hint performance is selected from multiple patterns in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state, the predetermined pattern of the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state Even if the same or corresponding first pattern and the second pattern that is the same or corresponds to the specific pattern of special 1 fluctuation display in a specific gaming state have the same execution rate, special 1 fluctuation display in a specific gaming state The execution rate may be different. Due to the difference in the execution rate of the patterns in this way, even if you accidentally hit the ball to the left in a specific game state as in the normal game state, it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first prize opening 45. It is possible to make the player aware that this is the case. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

For example, when selecting the expectation level display by color effect from "blue", "red", and "rainbow", "red" can be selected in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. The execution rate of the "red" color effect, which can be selected in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state, may be smaller than the color effect. In this case, the execution ratios of the "blue" and "rainbow" color effects may be the same or different. It should be noted that, in addition to displaying the expectation level, the same can be applied to various effects that make players look forward to playing the jackpot game described above. In other words, when the winning suggestion performance is selected from multiple patterns, the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state is selected from the predetermined pattern that can be selected in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state. A specific pattern that is the same as or corresponds to the selectable predetermined pattern may have a lower execution rate. By doing this, the player is informed that it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first prize opening 45 even if he or she accidentally hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. It can make you notice. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

Here, the pattern selected for the winning hint performance or the winning hint performance may be based on the timing (for example, when the fluctuation starts, when the fluctuation stops, how many times in a row), the game state, or other patterns (for example, the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time, etc.). ), the execution rate may be different depending on a predetermined condition such as a combination with For example, when a variation pattern in which three performance symbols 70a stop in sequence is selected, the "red" color effect executed at the start of variation in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, The execution ratio of the "red" color effect executed at the start of variation in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state may be smaller. Similarly, when a variation pattern with a short variation time of the production symbol 70a is selected, the "Red The execution rate of the "red" color light emitting effect, which is executed at the start of the variation in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state, may be smaller than the color light emitting effect. It should be noted that, in addition to the expectation level display and the start-up light emission effect, various effects that make players look forward to playing the above-mentioned jackpot game can be similarly applied. That is, when a winning suggestion performance is executed under predetermined conditions, the winning suggestion performance (predetermined pattern of the winning suggestion performance) performed in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state, The execution rate of the win suggestion performance (predetermined pattern of the win suggestion performance) performed in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state may be smaller. By doing this, the player is informed that it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first prize opening 45 even if he or she accidentally hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. It can make you notice. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

From the execution period of the winning suggestion effect (predetermined pattern of winning suggestion effect) carried out in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state, the winning suggestion production carried out in the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state The execution period of (the predetermined pattern of the winning suggestion effect) may be shorter.

If it is possible to carry out a joint performance in which multiple types of winning hint performances are performed at the same time, the special 1 variation display in a specific gaming state is better than the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in a specific gaming state. , the execution ratio of joint performance may be small. If there is a joint performance that is a combination of multiple types of winning hint performances performed at the same time, the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state is better than the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state. However, the proportion of execution of the predetermined hit implying performance among the joint performances may be small. If there is a joint performance that is a combination of multiple types of winning hints performed at the same time, in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state, the predetermined winning suggestion performance and the specific winning suggestion will be displayed. Although the performance can be executed, in the special 1 variation display of a specific game state, it may be possible to regulate the execution of a predetermined winning suggestion performance among the joint performances, and it may also be possible to execute a specific winning suggestion performance. .

As a guaranteed performance (including a jackpot performance), at a predetermined timing, the movable members 73 and 74 operate, the operation button 17 vibrates, and a predetermined display is performed, such as a rainbow display or rainbow light emission. There are one performance and a second performance that is performed at a timing different from the first performance (for example, when the fluctuation starts, during the fluctuation, when the fluctuation stops, etc.). The second effect is, for example, a confirmation sound that is output at the start of the change, a pending change in a rainbow pattern, or a fixed change effect that makes you expect the execution of a certain change depending on the performance such as winning a battle, etc. These may be used singly or in combination. It is executable and has multiple patterns.

The confirmed performance is the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state, the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, and the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, and the execution rate of the first performance and/or the first performance of the confirmed performance is It's different. In this case, the execution ratio of the first effect of the confirmed effect may be smaller in the special 1 variable display in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state. Further, the execution ratio of the second effect of the confirmed effect may be smaller in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. Furthermore, the execution ratio of one of the first performance and the second performance of the confirmed performance is smaller in the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state. You may. At this time, the execution ratio of the first performance of the confirmed performance and the other of the second performance may be the same or different.

In the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, it is possible to execute the first performance and the second performance of the confirmed performance, but in the special 1 variable performance in the specific game state, at least the second performance It is preferable to restrict the execution of predetermined patterns. For example, in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, the first effect accompanied by the operation of the movable members 73, 74 and the operation button 17 is executed as the final effect, while the movable member 73, 74 and the second performance pattern that involves the operation of the operation button 17 is not executed.

By doing this, the player is informed that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first prize opening 45 even if he or she accidentally hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. It can make you notice. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

We have explained the hit suggestion effect in the variable display of loss judgment, but also in the variable display of hit judgment, there is a special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state, a special 2 variation display in a specific gaming state, and a special 1 variation display in a specific gaming state. The relationship may be the same as in the case of loss determination.

As explained above, a player who feels uncomfortable with the degree or type of performance (win hint performance) etc. that he/she is expecting in the special 1 variation display of a specific gaming state suspects an error in the gaming machine 1 itself. It is possible that In this case, it is assumed that the hall manager checks the control parts that control the game, such as the main control board. Therefore, in addition to the above-mentioned configuration of the performance in the special 1 variation display of the specific gaming state, the configuration of the board case described later will make it easier for the hall manager to confirm, reduce stress on the players, and improve the game. can improve the interest of

◇In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). It is possible to perform a fluctuation display, and it is possible to perform an expectation display (for example, a color effect) that makes people expect to execute the special game based on the determination, and the fluctuation is based on the first starting condition in the normal game state. The variation display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state is characterized in that the execution rate of the expectation level display (for example, color effect) is smaller than that of the display.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A special effect (for example, a zone effect) that is capable of performing a variable display and makes the user expect the execution of the special game for a predetermined period based on the above-mentioned determination, may be displayed for a predetermined variable display period based on one of the above-mentioned determinations, or for a plurality of the above-mentioned The variable display can be executed at any timing during a predetermined variable display period based on the determination, and the variable display is based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state rather than the first starting condition in the normal gaming state. The variable display is characterized in that the execution rate of the special effect (for example, zone effect) is smaller.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). It is possible to perform a variable display, and to perform a notification sound effect (for example, a notification sound when a pending icon changes) that makes people expect the special game to be executed based on the determination, and the first The execution ratio of the notification sound effect (for example, notification sound when a hold icon changes, etc.) is smaller in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state than in the variable display based on the starting condition. It is characterized by

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A fluctuating display can be executed, and linked effects (for example, color effects, notification sound effects, light emitting effects, hold icon change effects, motion effects of movable members, etc.) that are performed continuously or in conjunction with each other in the plurality of variable displays are executed. The variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state is more effective than the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal gaming state. It is characterized by a low execution rate of notification sound effects, light emission effects, hold icon change effects, movable member operation effects, etc.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A pending display in which a variable display can be executed and the display mode of the pending icon (T1, T2, TH) displayed changes from a normal mode (for example, a CD icon) to a specific mode (for example, a colored character icon) when the start condition is satisfied. An icon change effect can be executed, and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state is better than the changing display based on the first starting condition in the normal gaming state, and It is characterized by a small execution rate of change effects.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). It is possible to execute a variable display, and it is possible to execute a light emitting effect (e.g., the light emission of the winning hole lamp NR) based on a winning in the first winning means (first winning hole 45), and it is possible to execute a light emitting effect (e.g., light emission from the winning hole lamp NR), The variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state has a smaller execution rate of the light emitting effect (for example, the light emitting of the prize opening lamp NR) than the variable display based on the starting condition. shall be.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. The first display means (first image display device 70) and the second display means (different from the first display means) have a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) that is more advantageous than the game state. a second image display device 71, a light guide plate, etc.), and based on the first starting condition established by winning a game ball to the first winning means (first winning hole 45), or the second winning means. Based on a second starting condition established by the winning of a game ball into the means (second winning hole 47), the first display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (production symbol 70a) in a variable manner. is possible, and the second display means (second image display device 71, light guide plate, etc.) has a display mode including a first mode (for example, a blue effect, etc.) and a second mode (for example, a rainbow color effect, etc.). A display effect can be executed, and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state is better than the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal gaming state. It is characterized in that the execution ratio of the display effect in the first mode (for example, blue effect, etc.) by the means (second image display device 71, light guide plate, etc.) is small.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). It is possible to perform a variable display, and the movable accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74 ), and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state is better than the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal gaming state. It is characterized in that the execution rate of the first operation mode (for example, weak operation) of the operation performance by the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is small.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). It is possible to perform a fluctuation display, and it is possible to perform an expectation display (for example, a color effect) that makes people expect to execute the special game based on the determination, and the fluctuation is based on the second starting condition in the specific game state. The variation display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state is characterized in that the execution rate of the expectation level display (for example, color effect) is smaller than that of the display.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A special effect (for example, a zone effect) that is capable of performing a variable display and makes people expect the execution of the special game for a predetermined period of time based on the above-mentioned determination, may be displayed for a predetermined variable display period based on one of the above-mentioned determinations, or for a plurality of the above-mentioned The variable display can be executed at any timing during a predetermined variable display period based on the determination, and the variable display is based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state rather than the second starting condition in the specific gaming state. The variable display is characterized in that the execution rate of the special effect (for example, zone effect) is smaller.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established by winning a game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of a game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). It is possible to execute a variable display, and it is possible to execute a notification sound effect (for example, a notification sound when a pending icon changes) that makes people expect to execute the special game based on the determination, The execution rate of the notification sound effect (for example, notification sound when a hold icon changes, etc.) is smaller in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state than in the variable display based on the starting condition. It is characterized by

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A fluctuating display can be executed, and linked effects (for example, color effects, notification sound effects, light emitting effects, hold icon change effects, motion effects of movable members, etc.) that are performed continuously or in conjunction with each other in the plurality of variable displays are executed. The variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state is more effective than the variable display based on the second starting condition in the specific gaming state. It is characterized by a low execution rate of notification sound effects, light emission effects, hold icon change effects, movable member operation effects, etc.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A pending display in which a variable display can be executed and the display mode of the pending icon (T1, T2, TH) displayed changes from a normal mode (for example, a CD icon) to a specific mode (for example, a colored character icon) when the start condition is satisfied. It is possible to execute an icon change effect, and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state is better than the variable display based on the second starting condition in the specific gaming state. It is characterized by a small execution rate of change effects.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established by winning a game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of a game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). It is possible to perform a variable display, and it is possible to perform a light emitting effect (e.g., light emission of the winning hole lamp NR) based on a winning in the first winning means (first winning hole 45), and the second The variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state has a smaller execution rate of the light emitting effect (for example, the light emitting of the prize opening lamp NR) than the variable display based on the starting condition. shall be.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. The first display means (first image display device 70) and the second display means (different from the first display means) have a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) that is more advantageous than the game state. a second image display device 71, a light guide plate, etc.), and based on the first starting condition established by winning a game ball to the first winning means (first winning hole 45), or the second winning means. Based on a second starting condition established by the winning of a game ball into the means (second winning hole 47), the first display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (production symbol 70a) in a variable manner. is possible, and the second display means (second image display device 71, light guide plate, etc.) has a display mode including a first mode (for example, a blue effect, etc.) and a second mode (for example, a rainbow color effect, etc.). A display effect can be executed, and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state is better than the variable display based on the second starting condition in the specific gaming state. It is characterized in that the execution ratio of the display effect according to the first aspect (for example, blue effect, etc.) in the means (second image display device 71, light guide plate, etc.) is small.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). It is possible to perform a variable display, and the movable accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74 ), and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state is better than the variable display based on the second starting condition in the specific gaming state. It is characterized in that the execution rate of the first operation mode (for example, weak operation) of the operation performance by the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is small.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). If the variable display is executable and the first starting condition is satisfied in the specific gaming state, the specific variable display (for example, without displaying or operating the hold icon from the start to the end of the variable display, the production symbol 70a or the special effect symbol TZ), and when the first starting condition is satisfied in the normal gaming state, the specific variable display is not executed. .
In order to solve the above problems, according to another gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol is executed based on the determination. In the gaming machine (1) that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player when the variable display of the (performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state and the above-mentioned. It has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a game ball enters the first winning means (first winning hole 45). or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of a game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the above-mentioned symbol (effecting symbol 70a) is displayed on the display means (first image display device 70). When executing the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal gaming state, the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state cannot be executed. It is characterized by being able to perform predetermined presentations (for example, color effects, zone presentations, pending icon changes, notification sounds, light emission, actuation of movable members, etc.).

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). If the variable display is executable and the first starting condition is satisfied in the specific gaming state, the specific variable display (for example, without displaying or operating the hold icon from the start to the end of the variable display, the production symbol 70a or the special effect symbol TZ), and if the second start condition is satisfied in the specific game state, the specific variable display is not executed. .
In order to solve the above problems, according to another gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol is executed based on the determination. In the gaming machine (1) that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player when the variable display of the (performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state and the above-mentioned. It has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a game ball enters the first winning means (first winning hole 45). or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of a game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the above-mentioned symbol (effecting symbol 70a) is displayed on the display means (first image display device 70). When executing the variable display based on the second starting condition in the specific gaming state, the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state cannot be executed. It is characterized by being able to perform predetermined presentations (for example, color effects, zone presentations, pending icon changes, notification sounds, light emission, actuation of movable members, etc.).

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A variable display can be executed, and in the normal gaming state, a pending display can be displayed in a predetermined manner (for example, an operation such as rotation) according to an increase or decrease in the number of pending based on the first starting condition, and the specified In the gaming state, a pending display can be displayed in a specific mode (for example, not operating or not displaying) that is different from the predetermined mode according to an increase or decrease in the number of pendings based on the first starting condition.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A variable display can be executed, and in the specific gaming state, a pending display can be displayed in a predetermined manner (for example, an operation such as rotation) according to an increase or decrease in the number of pending based on the second starting condition, and the specific In the gaming state, a pending display can be displayed in a specific mode (for example, not operating or not displaying) that is different from the predetermined mode according to an increase or decrease in the number of pendings based on the first starting condition.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). It is possible to execute a variable display, and when executing the variable display of loss determination based on the first starting condition in the normal gaming state, the average variable display time and the maximum pending number at the maximum pending number (for example, 4) Based on the difference from the average variable display time at a predetermined number of holds (for example, 1) that is smaller than the number of holds, the maximum number of holds when executing the variable display of loss determination according to the first starting condition in the specific gaming state. It is characterized in that the difference between the average fluctuation display time at a predetermined number of reservations (for example, reservation 1) that is smaller than the maximum number of reservations is smaller than the average fluctuation display time at the reservation number (for example, reservation 4).

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). It is possible to execute a variable display, and when executing the variable display of loss determination based on the first starting condition in the normal gaming state, based on the number of patterns of the variable display time determined by the predetermined number of reservations, the specific game The present invention is characterized in that the number of patterns of the variable display time determined by the predetermined number of reservations is smaller when the variable display of the failure determination based on the first starting condition is executed in the state.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A variable display can be executed, and the variable display of a loss determination based on the first starting condition is executed in the specific gaming state compared to the case where the variable display of a loss determination based on the first starting condition is executed in the normal gaming state. When the variable display is executed, the rate at which the same variation pattern is executed for the first pending number (for example, 4) and the second pending number (for example, 1) is higher.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). The average variable display time and the maximum pending number at the maximum pending number (for example, 4) when the variable display can be executed and the variable display of loss determination based on the second starting condition is executed in the specific gaming state Based on the difference from the average variable display time at a predetermined number of holds (for example, 1) that is smaller than the number of holds, the maximum number of holds when executing the variable display of loss determination according to the first starting condition in the specific gaming state. It is characterized in that the difference between the average fluctuation display time in (for example, holder 4) and the average fluctuation display time in a predetermined number of reservations (for example, holder 1) that is smaller than the maximum number of reservations is smaller.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). It is possible to execute a variable display, and when executing the variable display of loss determination based on the second starting condition in the specific game state, from the number of patterns of the variable display time determined by the predetermined number of holds, the specific game The present invention is characterized in that the number of patterns of the variable display time determined by the predetermined number of reservations is smaller when the variable display of the failure determination based on the first starting condition is executed in the state.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A variable display can be executed, and the variable display of a loss determination based on the second starting condition is executed in the specific gaming state. When the variable display is executed, the rate at which the same variation pattern is executed for the first pending number (for example, 4) and the second pending number (for example, 1) is higher.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A fluctuating display can be executed, and an operation performance (for example, a preparation motion or a stop motion) of the symbol (performance symbol 70a) can be executed at the start and/or end of the fluctuating display, and the first motion in the normal gaming state can be performed. The variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state is better than the variable display based on the first starting condition because the symbol (effect pattern 70a) is performed at the start and/or end of the variable display. It is characterized by a low execution rate of motion effects (for example, preparation motions and stop motions).

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A fluctuating display can be executed, and an operation performance (for example, a preparation motion or a stop motion) of the symbol (performance symbol 70a) can be executed at the start and/or end of the fluctuating display, and the first motion in the normal gaming state can be performed. The variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state is better than the variable display based on the first starting condition because the symbol (effect pattern 70a) is performed at the start and/or end of the variable display. It is characterized by a small number of types of motion effects (for example, preparatory motions and stop motions).

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A variable display can be executed, and the variable display can be performed using the symbols in a first mode (for example, 1 to 9) and a second mode (for example, a special pattern that does not have numerical information) that is displayed at a predetermined timing of the variable display. symbol etc.), and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state is better than the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal gaming state. , is characterized in that the proportion of symbols in the second mode (for example, special symbols without numerical information) being displayed is small.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). It is possible to execute a variable display, and at the start and/or end of the variable display, it is possible to execute an action production (for example, a preparation motion or a stop motion) of the symbol (production symbol 70a), and the The variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state is better than the variable display based on the second starting condition because the symbol (effect pattern 70a) is performed at the start and/or end of the variable display. It is characterized by a low execution rate of motion effects (for example, preparation motions and stop motions).

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). It is possible to execute a variable display, and at the start and/or end of the variable display, it is possible to execute an action production (for example, a preparation motion or a stop motion) of the symbol (production symbol 70a), and the The variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state is better than the variable display based on the second starting condition because the symbol (effect pattern 70a) is performed at the start and/or end of the variable display. It is characterized by a small number of types of motion effects (for example, preparatory motions and stop motions).

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established by winning a game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of a game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A variable display can be executed, and in the variable display, the symbol can be displayed as a first symbol in a predetermined manner (for example, 1 to 9) and a second symbol in a specific manner (for example, a special symbol having no numerical information). and the rate at which the first symbol is displayed is higher in the variable presentation based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state than in the variable display based on the second starting condition in the specific gaming state. It is characterized by a large

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A stop display mode (for example, a short time to stop) in which a variable display can be executed and the symbol (effect pattern 70a) is stopped and displayed in the variable display has a first stop display mode and a stop display period. There is a different second stop display mode (for example, a long time until the stop), and from the variable display that determines a loss based on the first start condition when the number of pending games is at the maximum in the normal gaming state, The execution rate of the first stop display mode (for example, short time until stop) is smaller in the fluctuating display that results in a loss determination based on the first start condition when the maximum number of holds is reached in a specific gaming state. It is characterized by

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A stop display mode in which a variable display can be executed and the symbol (production symbol 70a) is stopped and displayed in the variable display includes a first stop display mode (in which the symbol (production symbol 70a) is stopped in a first pattern). For example, simultaneous stop), and a second stop display mode (for example, sequential stop) in which the symbols (production symbols 70a) are stopped in a second pattern different from the first stop display mode, and in the normal gaming state, From the fluctuation display that results in a loss determination based on the first starting condition when the maximum number of holds is reached, the fluctuation display results in a loss determination based on the first starting condition when the maximum number of holds is reached in the specific gaming state. The display is characterized in that the execution rate of the second stop display mode (for example, stopping in sequence) is higher.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). The variable display is capable of executing a variable display, and the variable display results in a loss determination based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state, rather than the variable display causing a loss determination based on the first starting condition in the normal gaming state. This is characterized in that the execution rate of the symbol change performance that changes the display size of the symbol (performance symbol 70a) is smaller.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established by winning a game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of a game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). The variable display is capable of executing a variable display, and the variable display results in a loss determination based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state, rather than the variable display causing a loss determination based on the first starting condition in the normal gaming state. is characterized by a smaller execution ratio of reach effects.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A stop display mode (for example, a short time to stop) in which a variable display can be executed and the symbol (effect pattern 70a) is stopped and displayed in the variable display has a first stop display mode and a stop display period. There is a different second stop display mode (for example, a long time until the stop), and from the fluctuating display that determines a loss based on the second start condition when the number of pendings is at the maximum in the specific gaming state, The execution rate of the first stop display mode (for example, short time until stop) is smaller in the fluctuating display that results in a loss determination based on the first start condition when the maximum number of holds is reached in a specific gaming state. It is characterized by

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A stop display mode in which a variable display can be executed and the symbol (production symbol 70a) is stopped and displayed in the variable display includes a first stop display mode (in which the symbol (production symbol 70a) is stopped in a first pattern). For example, simultaneous stopping), and a second stop display mode (for example, stopping sequentially) in which the symbols (production symbols 70a) are stopped in a second pattern different from the first stop display mode, and in the specific game state From the fluctuation display that results in a loss determination based on the second starting condition when the maximum number of reservations is reached, the fluctuation display results in a loss determination based on the first startup condition when the maximum number of reservations is in the specific gaming state. The display is characterized in that the execution rate of the second stop display mode (for example, stopping in sequence) is higher.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established by winning a game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of a game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). The variable display is capable of executing a variable display, and the variable display results in a loss determination based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state, rather than the variable display causing a loss determination based on the second starting condition in the specific gaming state. This is characterized in that the rate of execution of the symbol change performance that changes the display size of the symbol (performance symbol 70a) is smaller.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). The variable display is capable of executing a variable display, and the variable display results in a loss determination based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state, rather than the variable display causing a loss determination based on the second starting condition in the specific gaming state. is characterized by a smaller execution ratio of reach effects.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). It is possible to execute a variable display, and when the first specific notification (for example, right-handed game display) suggesting that the specific gaming state is in effect, and the first specific notification (right-handed game display) is being executed, the first It is characterized by being able to perform a second specific notification (display or notification different from the right-handed hitting display) in addition to the first specific notification (right-handed hitting display) based on the winning of a game ball to the winning means. shall be.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A variable display can be executed, and a light emitting effect at a predetermined position (for example, the starting port lamp NR) based on the first starting condition in the normal gaming state and a movable accessory (for example, the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74) can be executed at a predetermined timing (for example, prize winning timing, fluctuation start timing, etc.), and at the predetermined position (for example, starting port lamp NR) based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state. It is characterized by being able to regulate execution of the light emission effect and the movement effect of the movable accessories (for example, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) at predetermined timings (for example, prize winning timing, fluctuation start timing, etc.). do.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A first notification that can be executed at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of the fluctuation) and a timing different from the first notification (at the time of winning a prize in the starting slot) as a notification effect that makes it possible to perform a variable display and make people expect to execute the special game. As the first notification, a first mode (for example, the starting port lamp NR flashes blue) and a second mode different from the first mode (for example, the starting port lamp NR blinks red). is executable, and as the second notification, it is executable in a third aspect different from the first aspect and the second aspect (for example, light emission of the starting port lamp NR and the lighting device for the board and/or the frame, etc.), The variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state is better than the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal gaming state. It is characterized in that the ratio is small, and the execution ratio of the notification effect in the fourth mode (for example, the starting port lamp NR does not emit light) which is different from the first to third modes is high.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A first notification that can be executed at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of the fluctuation) and a timing different from the first notification (at the time of winning a prize in the starting slot) as a notification effect that makes it possible to perform a variable display and make people expect to execute the special game. A second notification can be executed, and the first notification includes a first aspect (for example, starting port lamp NR flashes blue) and a second aspect different from the first aspect (for example, starting port lamp NR blinking red); It is possible to implement a third aspect different from the first aspect and the second aspect (for example, light emission from the starting port lamp NR and the panel and/or frame illumination device, etc.), and as the second notification, the first aspect The specific gaming state is executable in the same manner as the first aspect and the second aspect, and is not executable in the same manner as the third aspect. In the variable display based on the first starting condition, the execution ratio of the first to third aspects in the notification effect is smaller, and the fourth aspect different from the first to third aspects (for example, the starting door lamp It is characterized in that the execution ratio of the notification effect (NR does not emit light) is high.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A first light emitting mode using the first prize winning means (starting port lamp NR), and a second light emitting mode in conjunction with the first prize winning means, as a light emitting effect that can perform a variable display and make people expect the execution of the special game. A second light emitting mode using a light emitting means (for example, a lighting device for the board and/or a frame), and in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal gaming state, the first light emitting mode The second light emitting mode has a higher execution rate of the vibration effect by the vibration means (operation button), and is more likely to be executed in the specific gaming state than the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal gaming state. The variable display based on the first starting condition is characterized in that the execution rate of the vibration effect is smaller.
[Third embodiment]
Hereinafter, the present invention will be described in detail using an embodiment (third embodiment) shown in the drawings.
<Basic configuration of gaming machine>
FIG. 194 is a front view showing an example of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, FIG. 195 is a perspective view showing an example of the back side of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 196 is a front view showing an example of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the structure of a game control device with which a game machine is equipped.

In the gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 194, an inner frame (openable/closable frame) 3 is openably and closably attached to an outer frame 2 that is attached to an island structure of a game hall, and a glass frame 4 is attached so that it can be opened and closed.
A window 4a is formed in the glass frame 4, and a transparent plate (glass plate) 4b is attached to the window 4a. A game board 10z having a board surface from which a game ball is launched is attached to the inner frame 3, and a game area 10az in which a game ball can roll and flow is formed between the board surface of the game board 10z and a transparent plate on the front side thereof. It is formed. The transparent plate 4b is, for example, a glass plate, and is detachably fixed to the glass frame 4.

The glass frame 4 is connected to the outer frame 2 via a hinge mechanism 5z at one end in the left-right direction (for example, the left side when facing the gaming machine), and the other end in the left-right direction with the hinge mechanism 5z as a fulcrum. (For example, the right side when facing the gaming machine) can be rotated in the direction of opening from the outer frame 2. The glass frame 4 covers the game board 10z together with the transparent plate, and can open the inner part of the outer frame 2 including the game board 10z by rotating like a door about the hinge mechanism part 5z. A locking mechanism for fixing the other end of the glass frame 4 to the outer frame 2 is provided at the other end of the glass frame 4 . The locking mechanism can be unlocked using a special key. Further, the glass frame 4 is provided with an open detection switch 105z that detects whether the glass frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 or not.

A tray unit 7z having a storage tray 6z (an upper tray 6az and a lower tray 6bz) for storing game balls is provided at the lower part of the glass frame 4 (lower part of the window 4a). A production button 8z (FIG. 194) that can be pressed and operated, a cross key 40z that allows the player to perform various selection operations, and a discharge button 9z that discharges the game balls stored in the lower tray 6bz to the outside of the game machine. is equipped with.
The effect button 8z becomes effective only when, for example, a message to operate the effect button 8z is displayed on the image display device 31z, which will be described later. The performance button 8z is provided with a performance button detection switch 8az (see FIG. 196), and when this performance button detection switch 8az detects an operation by the player, a further performance is executed in response to this operation.
Further, the cross key 40z is provided with cross key detection switches (an upper key detection switch, a lower key detection switch, a left key detection switch, and a right key detection switch).

An operation handle 11z is provided on the lower right side of the glass frame 4. When the player touches the operating handle 11z, the touch sensor 11az (see FIG. 196) inside the operating handle 11z detects that the player has touched the operating handle 11z, and sends a touch signal to the firing control board 75z. . When the firing control board 75z receives the touch signal from the touch sensor 11az, it allows the firing solenoid 12az to be energized. When the rotation angle of the operating handle 11z is changed, the knob of the volume 11bz is rotated. A voltage corresponding to the detected angle of the firing volume 11bz is applied to the firing solenoid 12az provided in the game ball firing mechanism. Then, when a voltage is applied to the firing solenoid 12az, the firing solenoid 12az operates according to the applied voltage, and the game ball moves into the game area of the game board 10z with a strength according to the rotation angle of the operating handle 11z. It will be launched to 10az.

An outer rail R1 and an inner rail R2 are provided around the gaming area 10az on the gaming board 10z. These outer rail R1 and inner rail R2 guide the game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the upper part of the game area 10az when the operating handle 11z is operated. The game ball guided to the upper part of the game area 10az falls within the game area 10az. At this time, the game ball will fall unpredictably due to the plurality of nails and windmills provided in the game area 10az.
A center member 12z is arranged approximately at the center of the game board 10z. The center member 12z is provided with an image display device 31z consisting of a liquid crystal display device or the like, and a presentation accessory device 32 imitating a "sword".

Furthermore, a first starting opening 13z into which a game ball can enter is provided in the game area 10az at the lower center of the center member 12z. A second starting port 14z is provided below the first starting port 13z. The second starting port 14z has an opening/closing door 14bz, and is movably controlled to have a first mode in which the opening/closing door 14bz is maintained in a closed state and a second mode in which the opening/closing door 14bz is in an open state. . Therefore, when the second starting port 14z is in the first mode, there is no chance of winning a game ball, and when it is in the second mode, the chance of winning a game ball increases.
In addition, in this embodiment, when the second starting port 14z is controlled in the first mode, the game ball is prevented from entering the second starting port 14z. However, if there are fewer opportunities for the game ball to enter when the game ball is controlled in the first manner than when it is controlled in the second manner, then when the game ball is controlled in the first manner, It does not matter if a game ball enters the starting port 14z. That is, the first aspect includes a state in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 14z.

The first starting port 13z and the second starting port 14z are provided with a first starting port detection switch 13az (see FIG. 196) and a second starting port detection switch 14az that detect the entry of a game ball, respectively. When these detection switches detect the entry of a game ball, a lottery is held to acquire the right to play a jackpot game (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot lottery"), which will be described later. Also, when the first starting port detection switch 13az and the second starting port detection switch 14az detect the entry of game balls, predetermined prize balls (for example, three game balls) are paid out.
In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 13z and the second starting port 14z, for example, three game balls are paid out. It is not always necessary to pay out the ball as it enters the ball. Further, the number of pieces to be dispensed may be different for each starting port, for example, the first starting port 13z may have three pieces, and the second starting port 14z may have one.

Gates 15z through which game balls can pass are provided in the game area 10az on both sides of the center member 12z. The gate 15z is provided with a gate detection switch 15az (see FIG. 196) that detects the passage of a game ball, and when this gate detection switch 15az detects the passage of a game ball, a lottery of normal symbols to be described later is performed. .
Further, in the game area 10az on the right side of the center member 12z, a first grand prize opening 16 and a second grand prize opening 17z into which game balls can enter are provided. For this reason, the game ball is configured so that it will not enter the first grand prize opening 16 and the second grand prize opening 17z unless the operating handle 11z is rotated greatly and the game ball is launched with a strong force.

The first big prize opening 16 is normally maintained in a closed state by an opening/closing door 16bz, making it impossible for game balls to enter. On the other hand, when a jackpot game to be described later is started, the opening/closing door 16bz is opened, and this opening/closing door 16bz functions as a tray that guides the game ball into the first big prize opening 16, so that the game ball enters the first jackpot. It becomes possible to enter the ball into the 1st prize winning slot 16. The first big winning hole 16 is provided with a first big winning hole detection switch 16az, and when this first big winning hole detection switch 16az detects the entry of a game ball, a preset prize ball (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out.

The second big prize opening 17z is normally maintained in a closed state by the movable piece 17bz, making it impossible for game balls to enter. On the other hand, when a jackpot game to be described later is started, the movable piece 17bz is activated and opened, and this movable piece 17bz functions as a guide path for guiding the game ball into the second big prize opening 17z, The game ball can enter the second grand prize opening 17z. A second big winning hole detection switch 17az is provided in the second big winning hole 17z, and when this second big winning hole detection switch 17az detects the entry of a game ball, a preset prize ball (for example, 15 game balls) are paid out.
Furthermore, a plurality of general winning holes 18z are provided in the gaming area 10az. When a game ball enters each of these general winning holes 18z, predetermined prize balls (for example, 10 game balls) are paid out.

At the bottom of the gaming area 10az, there are game balls that did not enter any of the general winning opening 18z, the first starting opening 13z, the second starting opening 14z, the first big winning opening 16, and the second big winning opening 17z. An outlet 19z is provided for discharging the water.
The image display device 31z displays an image during standby when no game is being played, or displays an image according to the progress of the game. In particular, when a game ball enters the first starting port 13z or the second starting port 14z, a performance pattern 35z for informing the player of the lottery result is displayed in a fluctuating manner.
The production pattern 35 is, for example, a scroll display of three patterns (numbers), a first pattern (left pattern), a second pattern (right pattern), and a third pattern (center pattern), and the corresponding one after a predetermined period of time has passed. It stops scrolling and displays specific symbols (numbers) in an array.

As a result, while the symbols are scrolling, the player is given the impression that a lottery is currently being held, and the lottery result is notified to the player by the symbols displayed when the scrolling is stopped. By displaying various images, characters, etc. during the variable display of the effect pattern 35z, the player is given a high expectation that he may win a jackpot.
Further, although not shown, a fourth symbol is displayed on the image display device 31z in addition to the effect symbol 35z. The fourth symbol is a symbol showing the fluctuating state of the performance symbol 35z used for notification of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery process.
Note that the fourth symbol does not necessarily need to be displayed on the image display device 31z, and may be displayed by separately providing a fourth symbol display lamp.

The upper part of the glass frame 4 is equipped with a pair of lighting devices 33 for lighting on the left and right sides. Each of the performance lighting devices 33 includes a plurality of lights, and various performances are performed by changing the direction of light emitted from each light and the emitted light color.
Each of the performance lighting devices 33 includes a plurality of lights, and various performances can be performed by changing the direction of light emitted from each light and the color of the light emitted from the lights.
Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 194, the gaming machine 1 is provided with an audio output device 34 (see FIG. 196) consisting of a speaker. It also outputs SE (sound effects) and performs sound effects.

On the lower left side of the gaming area 10az, there are a first special symbol display device 20z, a second special symbol display device 21, a normal symbol display device 22, a first special symbol reservation display 23, and a second special symbol reservation display 24, which will be described later. , a normal symbol reservation display 25z, a round number display 26z, and other display areas are provided.
The first special symbol display device 20z is for notifying the result of a jackpot lottery that was triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 13z, and is composed of a plurality of LEDs. In other words, a plurality of special symbols are provided corresponding to the jackpot lottery results, and by displaying the special symbols (lighting mode) corresponding to the jackpot lottery results on the first special symbol display device 20z, the lottery results are displayed in the game. We are trying to notify people. The special symbols displayed in this manner are not displayed immediately, but are displayed in a variable manner (blinking) for a predetermined period of time, and then are stopped and displayed.
More specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting port 13z, a jackpot lottery will be held, but the jackpot lottery result is not immediately announced to the player, but after a predetermined period of time. The player is notified when the time has elapsed. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the special symbol corresponding to the jackpot lottery result is stopped and displayed to notify the player of the lottery result.

The second special symbol display device 21 is for notifying the lottery result of a jackpot that was triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 14z, and its display mode is based on the above-mentioned first special symbol. This is the same as the display mode of special symbols on the display device 20z.
The normal symbol display device 22 is for notifying the result of a normal symbol lottery, which is triggered by the passage of a game ball through the gate 15z. As will be described in detail later, when a predetermined win is won through this normal symbol lottery, the normal symbol display device 22 lights up, and then the second starting port 14z is controlled in the second mode for a predetermined period of time. In addition, regarding this normal symbol, the lottery result is not announced immediately after the game ball passes through the gate 15z, but the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner, such as by blinking the normal symbol display device 22 until a predetermined time has elapsed. I try to do that.
In addition, if a game ball enters the first starting hole 13z or second starting hole 14z and the jackpot lottery cannot be drawn immediately during the display of a special symbol or during a special game described later, certain conditions will be met. The right to draw a jackpot is reserved. More specifically, the right to draw a jackpot that is reserved when the game ball enters the first starting port 13z is reserved as the first reservation, and the right is reserved when the game ball enters the second starting port 14z. The right to draw the jackpot will be reserved as a second reservation.

For both of these reservations, the upper limit reservation number is set to 4, and the reservation numbers are displayed on the first special symbol reservation display 23 and the second special symbol reservation display 24, respectively.
The upper limit reserved number of normal symbols is also set to 4, and the reserved number is displayed as a normal symbol reserved in the same manner as the first special symbol reserved display 23 and the second special symbol reserved display 24. displayed on the device 25z.
The round number display 26z is for notifying the number of rounds of a round game played during a special game to be described later.

As shown in FIG. 196, on the back side of the gaming machine 1, there are a main control board 50z, a production control board 55z, a payout control board 60z, a lamp control board 65z, an image control board 70z, a firing control board 75z, a power supply board 80z, and a game board 50z. An information output terminal board 27z and the like are provided. Further, the power supply board 80z is provided with a power plug 81z for supplying power to the gaming machine and a power switch (not shown).
The image control board 70z is provided with a volume changeover switch 36z for changing the volume of the audio output from the audio output device 34.

A game control device that controls the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment will be explained using FIG. 196.
In this figure 196, the main control board 50z controls the basic operations of the game. The main control board 50z includes at least a one-chip microcomputer including a main CPU 50az, a main ROM 50bz, and a main RAM 50cz, and an input port and an output port (not shown) for main control.
The main CPU 50az reads the program stored in the main ROM 50bz based on input signals from each detection switch and performs arithmetic processing, and also directly controls each device and display, or performs arithmetic processing according to the result of the arithmetic processing. Send commands to other boards. The main RAM 50cz functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing by the main CPU 50az.

On the input side of the main control board 50z, there are a first starting opening detection switch 13az, a second starting opening detection switch 14az, a gate detection switch 15az, a first big winning opening detection switch 16az, a second big winning opening detection switch 17az, A general winning a prize opening detection switch 18az is connected, and a game ball detection signal is input to the main control board 50z.
Further, on the output side of the main control board 50z, there is a starting opening opening/closing solenoid 14cz that opens and closes the opening/closing door 14bz of the second starting opening 14z, and a first big prize opening that opens and closes the opening/closing door 16bz of the first big winning opening 16z. The opening/closing solenoid 16cz is connected to the second big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 17cz that opens and closes the movable piece 17bz of the second big winning opening 17z.
Furthermore, on the output side of the main control board 50z, a first special symbol display device 20z, a second special symbol display device 21, a normal symbol display device 22, a first special symbol reservation display 23, and a second special symbol reservation display are provided. 24, a normal symbol reservation display 25z and a round number display 26z are connected, and various signals are outputted via the output port.
Further, the main control board 50z outputs external information signals necessary for managing gaming machines in a hall computer or the like of a gaming parlor to the gaming information output terminal board 27z.

The main ROM 50bz of the main control board 50z stores a game control program, which will be described later, and data and tables necessary for various games.
Further, the main RAM 50cz of the main control board 50z has a plurality of storage areas.
For example, the main RAM 50cz includes a normal symbol retention number (G) storage area, a normal symbol retention storage area, a first special symbol retention number (U1) storage area, a second special symbol retention number (U2) storage area, and a judgment storage area. , first special symbol storage area, second special symbol storage area, high probability game count (X) storage area, time-saving game count (J) storage area, round game count (R) storage area, open count (K) storage area , 1st big winning slot number of balls (C1) storage area, 2nd big winning slot number of balls (C2) storage area, gaming status storage area, gaming status buffer, stop symbol data storage area, performance transmission data storage area etc. are provided. The game state storage area includes a time-saving game flag storage area, a high probability game flag storage area, a special figure/special electric line processing data storage area, and a regular figure/general electric line processing data storage area. Note that the storage area described above is only an example, and many other storage areas are provided.

The game information output terminal board 27z is a board for outputting external information signals generated by the main control board 50z to a hall computer or the like of a game parlor. The game information output terminal board 27z is connected to the main control board 50z by wiring, and is also provided with a connector for connection to a hall computer or the like of a game parlor.
The main control board 80z converts the power supply voltage supplied from the power plug 81z into a predetermined voltage and supplies it to each control board. In addition, the main control board 80z is equipped with a backup power supply consisting of a capacitor, monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine, and sends a power failure detection signal to the main control board 50z when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value. Output. More specifically, when the power interruption detection signal becomes high level, the main CPU 50az becomes operational, and when the power interruption detection signal becomes low level, the main CPU 50az becomes inactive. The backup power source is not limited to a capacitor, but may be a battery, for example, or a combination of a capacitor and a battery may be used.

The production control board 55z mainly controls various productions during play, on standby, and the like. This production control board 55z is equipped with a sub CPU 55az, a sub ROM 55bz, and a sub RAM 55cz, and is connected to the main control board 50z so that it can communicate in one direction from the main control board 50z to the production control board 55z. .
The sub CPU 55az reads the program stored in the sub ROM 55bz and performs calculations based on the command sent from the main control board 50z or the input signal from the production button detection switch 8az input via the lamp control board 65z. While performing the processing, corresponding data is transmitted to the lamp control board 65z or the image control board 150 based on the processing. The sub RAM 55cz functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing by the sub CPU 55az.

The sub ROM 55bz of the performance control board 55z stores programs for performance control, data and tables necessary for various games.
For example, a variable effect pattern determination table (not shown) for determining a effect pattern based on a variable pattern designation command received from the main control board 50z, a effect pattern pattern determination table for determining a combination of effect patterns 35z to be stopped and displayed Tables (not shown) and the like are stored in the sub ROM 55bz. Note that the above-mentioned tables are merely listed as examples of characteristic tables among the tables in this embodiment, and many other tables and programs (not shown) may be provided in the course of the game. ing.

The sub RAM 55cz of the production control board 55z has a plurality of storage areas.
The sub RAM 55cz includes a command reception buffer, a gaming state storage area, a performance mode storage area, a performance pattern storage area, a performance symbol storage area, a judgment storage area (0th storage area), a first reservation storage area, and a second reservation storage area. etc. are provided. Note that the storage area described above is only an example, and many other storage areas are provided.
Furthermore, the production control board 55z is equipped with an RTC (real-time clock) 55d that outputs the current time. The sub CPU 55az receives a date signal indicating the current date and a time signal indicating the current time from the RTC 55d, and executes various processes based on the current date and time.
The RTC 55d normally operates using the power from the gaming machine when power is being supplied to the gaming machine, and when the gaming machine is powered off, the RTC 55d operates using the power supplied from the backup power supply mounted on the main control board 80z. Operates by. Therefore, the RTC 55d can measure the current date and time even when the gaming machine is powered off. Note that the RTC 55d may be operated by providing a battery on the production control board 55z.

The payout control board 60z controls the launch of game balls and the payout of prize balls. This payout control board 60z includes a payout CPU 60az, a payout ROM 60bz, and a payout RAM 60cz, and is connected to the main control board 50 so as to be able to communicate in both directions. The payout CPU 60az reads out a program stored in the payout ROM 60bz and performs arithmetic processing based on input signals from the payout ball counting switch 106z and the open detection switch 105z, which detect whether or not game balls have been paid out. Based on the processing, corresponding data is transmitted to the main control board 50z.

Further, a payout motor 107 of a prize ball payout device for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls from the game ball storage section to the player is connected to the output side of the payout control board 60z. The payout CPU 60az reads a predetermined program from the payout ROM 60bz and performs arithmetic processing based on the payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 50z, and also controls the payout motor 107 of the prize ball payout device to issue a predetermined prize. Dispense the ball to the player. At this time, the payout RAM 60cz functions as a data work area during calculation processing by the payout CPU 60az.
Also, check whether a game ball lending device (card unit) not shown is connected to the payout control board 60z, and if the game ball lending device (card unit) is connected, cause the shooting control board 75z to fire the game balls. Transmit launch control data to allow for launch control.
Further, a plate full detection switch 51z and a ball jam detection switch 52z are connected to the dispensing control board 60z.

When the launch control board 75z receives launch control data from the payout control board 60z, it permits launch. Then, the touch signal from the touch sensor 11az and the input signal from the firing volume 11bz are read out, and the firing solenoid 12az and the ball feed solenoid 12bz are energized and controlled to fire the game ball.
The firing solenoid 12az is composed of a rotary solenoid. A firing member (not shown) is directly connected to the firing solenoid 12az, and rotation of the firing solenoid 12az causes the firing member to rotate.
Here, the rotational speed of the firing solenoid 12az is set to approximately 99.9 times/minute based on the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control board 75z. As a result, the number of game balls fired per minute is approximately 99.9 (balls/minute) because one ball is fired every time the firing solenoid rotates once. That is, the game ball will be fired approximately every 0.6 seconds.
The ball feeding solenoid 12bz is constituted by a linear solenoid, and sends out the game balls in the upper tray 6az (see FIG. 194) one by one toward a shooting member directly connected to the shooting solenoid 12az.

The lamp control board 65z is connected to the production control board 55z for bidirectional communication, and the production button detection switch 8a provided on the production button 8z is connected to the input side of the lamp control board 65z. When a detection signal is input from 8az, it is output to the production control board 55z.
In addition, the lamp control board 65z is connected to the performance accessory device 32 and the performance lighting device 33 provided on the game board 10z, and the lamp control board 65z responds to data transmitted from the performance control board 55z. Based on this, lighting control is performed on the production lighting device 33, and drive control is performed on a motor for changing the direction of light irradiation. It also controls the energization of a drive source such as a solenoid or a motor that operates the performance accessory device 32. In this embodiment, since the performance button 8z is configured to protrude, the performance accessory device 32 includes the performance button 8z.
Furthermore, the above-described board lamp 100z and frame lamp 101z are connected to the lamp control board 65z.
The image control board 150 is connected to the production control board 55z for two-way communication, and has the image display device 31z and the audio output device 34 connected to its output side.

The main control board 50z will be further explained.
A performance display monitor 600, a setting display monitor 650, a setting key switch 660, a setting switch 670, and an RWM clear switch 680 are further connected to the main control board 50z.
The details will be described later, but the performance display monitor 600 displays the performance of the gaming machine, that is, the base value.
The base value is a numerical value that shows how much the payout is in normal conditions (low probability no time saving) excluding special states such as jackpot, variable probability gaming state, time saving gaming state etc. For example, low probability time saving If the player hits 100 game balls at no time and there are 50 prize balls, the base is 50.
A value obtained by calculating the base value of low probability time saving no time is displayed on a performance display monitor 600 for every predetermined number of shots (usually 60,000) in all game states including jackpot, variable probability game state, and time saving game state.
Furthermore, in gaming machines that have a setting function, by changing the settings, the probability of winning a jackpot can be changed.
The setting values may be displayed on a setting display monitor 650 provided separately from the performance display monitor 600, or the performance display monitor 600 may also serve as the setting display monitor 650 to display the setting values. In that case, there is no need to separately provide the setting display monitor 650.
Instead of providing the setting switch 670 for changing the settings of the gaming machine, an RWM clear switch 680 may be used instead.

The details will be described later, but the operation of changing and confirming the settings of the gaming machine using the performance display monitor 600 will be explained.
When the door of the gaming machine 1 is opened (the glass frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2), the setting key switch 660 is turned on, and the power is turned on with the RWM clear switch 680 pressed, the current information is displayed on the performance display monitor 600. The settings will be displayed and you can change them.
The setting is, for example, in six stages from "1" to "6", and each time the RWM clear switch 680 is operated, the setting value is added and displayed on the performance display monitor 600, and after "6", the setting value is added and displayed on the performance display monitor 600. Return to 1.
After selecting a setting, turning off the setting key switch 660 confirms the setting displayed on the performance display monitor 600, and a dot is displayed on the performance display monitor 600 together with the setting value.

The setting display switches to the performance display every time a certain period of time elapses, and the game becomes ready for play. Also, the RWM of the main control board is cleared.
While the settings are being changed, notifications will be provided through presentation displays and sound effects.
In addition, when the door of the gaming machine 1 is opened and the power is turned on with the setting key switch 660 turned on, the current settings and dots are displayed on the performance display monitor 600, allowing you to confirm the settings. Become.
While the settings are being confirmed, notifications will be provided through presentation displays and sound effects.

Next, the production button 8z is incorporated into the central portion of the dish unit 7z.
The production button 8z is configured to be able to move back and forth between a normal operating position (not shown), a depressed position that is retracted downward from the normal operating position, and a protruding operating position that projects upward from the normal operating position. . Further, the production button 8z is configured to be able to be pressed down from any position including the normal operation position and the protruding operation position to the pressed position.
Note that, in this specification, the detailed structure of the effect button 8z is disclosed in, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-116168, so a description thereof will be omitted.

<Configuration of the back of the game board>
Next, the configuration of the back side of the game board will be explained.
FIG. 197 is a rear view showing a state in which each unit is assembled to the base frame 130z, and FIG. 198 is a partially exploded perspective view of FIG. 197.
As shown in FIG. 195, FIG. 197, FIG. 198, etc., a base frame body (liquid crystal base frame) 130 having an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction is assembled on the back surface (rear surface) of the game board 10z. An image display unit (image display device 31z and image display cover 165) 160 is assembled on the back side (rear side) of the frame 130z so as to close the opening. A lamp relay board 166 is assembled on the back surface (rear surface) of the image display cover (liquid crystal cover) 165, and a board protection housing a main control board is installed at the bottom of the back of the image display cover 165 below the lamp relay board 166. A case (board case) 200 is attached.
The base frame (liquid crystal base) 130z is a substantially rectangular annular body having an opening passing through in the front-rear direction, and its annular front surface 131 is attached and fixed to the back surface of the game board 10z. There is space on the back side of the base frame 130z for arranging various circuit boards and components.
An effect control board 55z is arranged on the back side of the image display unit (liquid crystal unit) 160 fixed to the back side of the base frame 130z. The image display unit 160 slides from the sides (left and right), up and down, or diagonally of the base frame 130z into a gap (storage space) for storing the image display unit provided in front of the production control board. It is configured so that it can be installed freely.
Various circuit boards placed on the back surface of the base frame 130z are covered by the lid member 170 (FIGS. 197 and 198).

As shown in FIG. 197, at least the RWM clear switch 680 and the setting key switch 660 included in the main control board 50z are exposed on the back side of the board case 200z.
Further, a performance display monitor 600 and a setting display monitor 650 included in the main control board 50z are visible through the transparent board case 200z.
The staff of the game parlor opens the door of the game machine, visually checks the performance display monitor 600 and setting display monitor 650 on the back of the game machine, and operates the RWM clear switch 680 and setting key switch 660 to clear the RWM. You can perform operations such as changing settings and checking gaming performance.

The RWM clear switch 680 on the main control board 50z is not directly exposed, and an operating member 685 that can be operated by game parlor staff etc. is inserted through an opening provided in the board case 200z at a position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 680. It stands out. When a staff member or the like depresses the operating member 685, the RWM clear switch 680 is pressed by the depressed operating member 685. This causes the RWM clear switch 680 to be operated.

The setting key switch 660 has a keyhole into which a key is inserted in the end face of a cylindrical member protruding from the main control board 50z.
The end face of the setting key switch 660 provided with a keyhole is exposed through an opening provided in the board case 200z.
A staff member of the game parlor can operate the setting key switch 660 by inserting a key into the keyhole.

<Main control board>
Next, various operations executed by the main control board 50z, which is the main control board of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, will be explained.
FIG. 199 is an explanatory diagram of various random numbers obtained in the main control board 50z of the pachinko machine 1, in which (a) is a random number for special symbol determination, (b) is a random number for jackpot symbol determination, and (c) is a reach determination (d) is a diagram showing an example of random numbers for auxiliary symbol determination.
In the main control board 50z, a special symbol is determined by the special symbol determination random number shown in FIG. 199(a) and the jackpot symbol determination random number shown in FIG. 199(b). Further, the auxiliary symbol is determined by the auxiliary symbol determination random number shown in FIG. 199(d).

As the random number for special symbol determination shown in FIG. 199(a), one random value is obtained from among the random numbers from "0" to "60000", for example, when the starting opening is won.
As described above, the gaming machine of this embodiment can change the probability of winning a jackpot (determined to be a jackpot) by making settings using the setting key switch 660, setting switch 670, etc.
Note that the pachinko machine 1 may not be equipped with the above-mentioned setting key switch 660, setting switch 670, etc., and it may be impossible to change the probability of winning a jackpot.
Even if the gaming machine is equipped with the setting key switch 660 and the setting switch 670, the only setting provided is "1", and it may be virtually impossible to change the probability of winning the jackpot.

The random number for special symbol determination when the setting can be changed will be explained.
When the setting is "1", the jackpot ratio is set to 1/300 in the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state), and the jackpot is won when the obtained random value for special symbol determination is between "100" and "299". It is determined that
On the other hand, in the high probability game state, the jackpot ratio is set to 1/60, and a jackpot is determined when the obtained random number value for special symbol determination is between "100" and "1099". In addition, with the random numbers for special symbol determination shown in FIG. 199(a), a small winning lottery, which is a type of loss, is also performed. Here, the small win ratio is set to 1/300, and a small win is determined when the obtained random number value for special symbol determination is between "2000" and "2199". In cases other than these, it is determined that the game is a loss.

When the setting is "2", the jackpot ratio is set to 1/295 in the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state), and the jackpot is won when the obtained random value for special symbol determination is between "100" and "302". It is determined that
On the other hand, in the high probability game state, the jackpot ratio is set to 1/59, and a jackpot is determined when the obtained random number value for special symbol determination is between "100" and "1114". The small hit ratio is set to 1/300, and a small win is determined when the acquired random number value for special symbol determination is between "2000" and "2199". In cases other than these, it is determined that the game is a loss.

When the setting is "3", the jackpot ratio is set to 1/290 in the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state), and the jackpot is won when the obtained random number for special symbol determination is between "100" and "306". It is determined that
On the other hand, in the high probability game state, the jackpot ratio is set to 1/58, and a jackpot is determined when the obtained random number value for special symbol determination is between "100" and "1134". Further, the small win ratio is set to 1/300, and a small win is determined when the acquired random number value for special symbol determination is between "2000" and "2199". In cases other than these, it is determined that the game is a loss.

When the setting is "4", the jackpot ratio is set to 1/285 in the low probability gaming state (normal gaming state), and the jackpot is won when the obtained random value for special symbol determination is between "100" and "309". It is determined that
On the other hand, in the high probability game state, the jackpot ratio is set to 1/57, and a jackpot is determined when the obtained random number value for special symbol determination is between "100" and "1149". Further, the small hit ratio is set to 1/300, and a small hit is determined when the obtained random number value for special symbol determination is between "2000" and "2199".
In cases other than these, it is determined that the game is a loss.
Note that in the explanation of FIG. 199, four setting values from "1" to "4" are illustrated, but the setting values may be six from "1" to "6".

Next, as the random number for jackpot symbol determination shown in FIG. 199(b), one random value is obtained from among 250 random numbers from "0" to "249". Then, one jackpot is determined from among the plurality of types of jackpots based on the acquired random number value for jackpot symbol determination.
In this embodiment, a plurality of types of jackpots are prepared, such as a long win with a normal time saving, a short win with a normal time saving, a long win with a high probability time saving, a short win with a high probability time saving, and a high probability short win without a time saving.
Note that the time-saving gaming state is a gaming state in which it is easier for game balls to enter the second starting port 14z than in the normal gaming state. That is, when a predetermined condition described later is satisfied, the second starting port opening/closing door 14bz of the second starting port 14z is changed from a closed state in which it is difficult for a game ball to win a prize to an open state in which a game ball is easy to win a prize. This refers to a gaming state with opening support for the second starting port opening/closing door 14bz that increases the probability of a game ball entering the starting port 14z.

Normally, in the long winning with time saving, the opening time of the first big winning opening 16z or the second big winning opening 17z during the jackpot game is relatively long, and a relatively large amount of balls can be expected to be paid out, and after the jackpot game is over, This is a jackpot that provides a time-saving game until the special symbol changes a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).
Normally, in a short hit with time saving, the opening time of the first big winning hole 16z or the second big winning hole 17z during the jackpot game is short and you cannot expect the ball to be paid out, but after the jackpot game is over, the special symbol will be displayed a predetermined number of times (e.g. 100 times) It is a jackpot that gives you a time-saving game until it changes.

In the high probability time saving long win, the first big prize opening 16z or the second big prize opening 17z is open for a long time during the jackpot game, so you can expect the largest amount of balls to be paid out, and the probability of winning the jackpot after the jackpot game is over. This is a jackpot that offers both a high probability game and a time-saving game.
In the short winning with high probability time saving, the opening time of the first big prize opening 16z or the second big prize opening 17z during the jackpot game is short and the payout of the ball cannot be expected, but it increases the probability of winning the jackpot after the jackpot game is over. This is a jackpot that offers both high-probability games and time-saving games.
High-probability short winning without time saving means that the opening time of the first big prize opening 16z or the second big prize opening 17z during the jackpot game is short and you cannot expect the ball to be paid out, but it increases the probability of winning the jackpot after the jackpot game is over. This is a jackpot that gives you a high probability game.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, some types of jackpots cannot be selected depending on whether a game ball enters the first starting port 13z or a game ball enters the second starting port 14z. The ratio of
For example, the ratio at which the long winning with normal time saving is selected is the same at 35/250 in both cases where the game ball wins in the first starting port 13z and when the game ball wins in the second starting port 14z. . Similarly, the rate at which the short winning with normal time saving is selected is 15/250, which is the same in both the case where the game ball wins in the first starting port 13z and the case where the game ball wins in the second starting port 14z. .
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 199(b), the random number value for jackpot symbol determination acquired when the game ball enters the first starting hole 13z or the second starting hole 14z is "0" to "34". If it is, the long win with normal time saving is selected, and if it is "35" to "49", the short win with normal time saving is selected.

On the other hand, the proportion of high-probability long wins with time savings and high-probability short wins with time savings being selected differs depending on whether the game ball wins in the first starting port 13z or the game ball wins in the second starting port 14z. For example, the rate at which a long win with high probability time saving is selected is 25/250 when a game ball wins in the first starting opening 13z, and 175/250 when a gaming ball wins in the second starting opening 14z. Ru.
In addition, the rate at which a short win with high probability time saving is selected is 75/250 if the game ball wins in the first starting port 13z, and 25/250 if the game ball wins in the second starting port 14z. Ru.
Further, the ratio of selecting the high probability short winning without time saving is set to 100/250 only when the game ball wins in the first starting opening 13z.
Specifically, if the random number value for determining the jackpot symbol obtained when the game ball enters the first starting hole 13z is "50" to "74", a long hit with high probability time saving is selected, and "75" is selected. ” to “149”, a high probability short win with time saving is selected, and if “150” to “249”, a high probability short win without time saving is selected.
On the other hand, if the random number value for jackpot symbol determination obtained when the game ball enters the second starting slot is "50" to "224", a long hit with high probability time saving is selected, and "225" is selected. ~ “249”, a short hit with high probability time saving is selected.

In addition, the random number for reach determination shown in FIG. It is determined that there is a reach when the random number is between 0 and 21, and there is no reach when the obtained random number for determining the reach is between 22 and 249.

Further, as the random number for auxiliary symbol determination shown in FIG. 199(d), one random value is obtained from among 10 random numbers from "0" to "9" when passing through the gate.
Then, in a low probability gaming state in which both the time saving flag and the high accuracy flag are OFF, or in a high probability non-time saving gaming state in which the time saving flag is OFF and the high accuracy flag is ON, the acquired random number value for auxiliary symbol determination is "7". ”, it is judged as a hit.
On the other hand, in a low-probability time-saving gaming state where the time-saving flag is ON and the high-accuracy flag is OFF, or in a high-probability time-saving gaming state where both the time-saving flag and the high-accuracy flag are ON, the acquired random value for auxiliary symbol determination is A win is determined when the number is between "0" and "9".

Next, the main processing executed by the main control board 50z of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment will be explained. Note that the processing described below can be realized by the main CPU 50az of the main control board 50z executing a program stored in the main ROM 50bz. Note that a description of the random number update process will be omitted.

[Main processing of main control board]
The main processing of the main control board 50z will be explained using FIG. 200.
FIG. 200 is a flowchart showing main processing in the main control board. This main processing is performed by inputting a system reset to the main CPU 50az, which is generated by supplying the power supply voltage from the power supply board 80z.
First, the main CPU 50az performs initial setting processing in step S1. Specifically, a preparation process for starting game control, a setting change process for changing setting values based on a setting change operation, and a process for initializing a predetermined RWM area of the main RAM 50cz based on an RWM clear operation. RWM clear processing, setting confirmation processing for confirming setting values based on setting confirmation operations, etc. are performed. Note that details of the initial setting process will be described later.

In step S2, the main CPU 50az updates the random value for special symbol determination and the random value for reach determination, and in step S3, updates the initial random value for jackpot determination, the initial random value for special symbol determination, the initial random value for hit determination, Update the initial random value for determining normal symbols.
In step S4, the main CPU 50az receives a voltage drop detection signal from the power failure detection circuit of the power supply board 80z, which indicates the occurrence of a voltage drop in the power supply (for example, the power supply that was supplied at 24 volts drops to less than 18 volts). Determine whether or not is input. If the voltage drop detection signal is not input (No in step S4), the process moves to step S2, and if the voltage drop detection signal is input (No in step S4), the process moves to step S5. Move.

In step S5, the main CPU 50az determines whether the voltage drop detection signal is continuously input for a predetermined period (for example, 10 milliseconds). If the input has continued for a predetermined period of time (Yes in step S5), it is assumed that a complete power outage has occurred and the process moves to step S6, and if it has not continued for a predetermined period of time (No in step S5), Assuming that there is a possibility of a momentary power outage in which the voltage of the power supply drops momentarily, the process moves to step S4.
In step S6, the main CPU 50az sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts, and in step S7, sends a power cutoff designation command to the payout control board 60z to notify that the power cutoff process has started. Send. As a result, the remaining payout ball number designation command indicating the remaining number of game balls stored in the payout RAM 60cz is transmitted from the payout control board 60z that received the power cutoff designation command.

In step S8, the main CPU 50az determines whether a command for specifying the remaining number of balls to be paid out has been received. If the command for specifying the number of remaining balls to be paid out is not received (No in step S8), the process moves to step S9, and if the command to specify the number of remaining balls to be paid out is received (Yes in step S8), the process goes to step S10. Transfer processing.
In step S9, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not a waiting time for waiting for receiving a command specifying the remaining number of balls to be paid out has elapsed. If the standby time has not elapsed (No in step S9), the process moves to step S8, and if the standby time has elapsed (Yes in step S9), normal communication with the payout control board 60z is established. Assuming that it is not possible, the process moves to step S10.

In step S10, the main CPU 50az saves the number of balls to be paid out in a payout counter set in the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz. Specifically, if the command to specify the number of remaining balls to be paid out is received, the remaining number of balls to be put out specified by the command to specify the number of remaining balls to be paid out is saved, and if the command to specify the number of remaining balls to be paid out is not received. In this case, "0" is saved as the remaining number of balls to be paid out. The remaining number of balls to be put out saved here is referred to in the timer interrupt payout control process described later, and after the power is restored, a command to specify the number of balls to be put out according to the number of remaining balls to be put out is sent to the payout control board 60z. will be done.
The main CPU 50az clears the output port in step S11. As a result, the output state of the output port is initialized, and the operations of various indicators and various drive sources (motors, solenoids) are stopped.

In step S12, the main CPU 50az calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the main RAM 50cz and saves it in a predetermined area of the main RAM 50cz. By doing so, it becomes possible to determine whether the data in the RWM area is abnormal based on the checksum when the power is turned on next time.
In step S13, the main CPU 50az saves a backup flag indicating that the data of the main RAM 50cz is backed up (power restoration) in the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz, and in step S14, prohibits RWM access, and thereafter Wait until the power supply is completely cut off.
In this way, when the supply of operating power (18 volts or more) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine 1 starts, the initial setting process is performed, but when a momentary power outage (voltage drop to less than 18 volts) occurs, the initial setting process is performed. When the supply of operating power is resumed, the initial setting process is not performed. In other words, even if a setting change operation, setting confirmation operation, or RWM clear operation is performed for some reason when a momentary power outage occurs, the setting change process, setting confirmation process, or RWM clear process will not be executed, so the game This prevents the machine from performing unintended operations, making it possible to ensure reliability as a gaming machine.

(Initial setting processing of main control board)
The initial setting process of the main control board 50z will be explained using FIG. 201.
FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing the initial setting process of the main control board.
First, the main CPU 50az disables all interrupts in step S21, performs initial settings of the CPU such as setting of built-in registers in step S22, and performs startup wait processing for other boards in step S23. Specifically, it waits for one second for the payout control board 60z and the production control board 55z to start up so that no command is missed from the main control board 50z.

The main CPU 50az permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz in step S24, and transmits a firing permission designation command to the payout control board 60z in step S25. As a result, the payout control unit (payout CPU 60az, payout ROM 60bz, payout RAM 60cz) performs processing to permit the shooting device (shooting solenoid 12az) to shoot the game ball.
In step S26, the main CPU 50az determines whether a backup flag indicating that power has been restored is saved in the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz. If the backup flag has been saved (Yes in step S26), it is assumed that the power is restored and the process moves to step S27; if the backup flag has not been saved (No in step S26), the initial power is restored. Assuming that it is input, the process moves to step S28.

The main CPU 50az calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the main RAM 50cz in step S27, and determines whether a setting change operation has been performed in step S28. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 660, RWM clear switch 680, and open detection switch 105z are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation (Yes in step S28), the process moves to step S29 as a transition to setting change mode, and if there is no setting change operation (No in step S28), the process moves to step S30. Transfer processing.

The main CPU 50az performs a setting change process in step S29. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 680, the set value (the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery), which is the stage of the advantage level of the game, is changed (updated) and the control state of the game (set value of the RWM area) is changed (updated). A process is performed to initialize the area (other than the area) and to send a setting change designation command indicating that the setting is being changed to the production control board 55z, and the process moves to step S25. As a result, the effect control board 55z performs a process for executing a setting change notification indicating that the setting value is being changed.
"Setting change notification" refers to displaying a setting change screen to make the image display device recognize that the setting value is being changed, or displaying the frame lamp 101z and board lamp 100z in a predetermined manner during the setting change. This means turning on all the lights in a luminescent color (for example, white). Note that the audio output device 34 may output a settings change notification sound (“Settings are being changed”) indicating that settings are being changed.

The main CPU 50az determines whether the checksum is normal in step S30. Specifically, it is determined whether the checksum saved in the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz matches the checksum calculated in step S27. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the data in the RWM area) (Yes in step S30), the process moves to step S31, and if the checksum is not normal (there is an abnormality in the data in the RWM area) (No in step S30), the process moves to step S32.
Note that if the backup flag has not been saved, that is, if the power is turned on for the first time, the checksum is determined to be abnormal.

In step S31, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not there is a setting change flag in the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz, which indicates that settings are being changed. If there is no setting changing flag (No in step S31), it is assumed that the previous power outage did not occur during the setting changing process, and the process moves to step S33; if there is a setting changing flag (step S31), the process moves to step S33. (Yes), it is assumed that the previous power-off occurred during the setting change process, and the process moves to step S32. Note that the setting change flag is saved in the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz at the start of the setting change process, and is cleared from the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz at the end of the setting change process.

The main CPU 50az performs unrecoverable error processing in step S32. Specifically, after displaying error information indicating an unrecoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting an unrecoverable error specification command indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred to the production control board 55z, the timer assignment is performed. After clearing the output port, a non-recoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of a non-recoverable error is output from the security signal terminal of the gaming information output terminal board 27z, and the power is turned off. Performs a process of waiting until the supply is completely cut off. As a result, the production control board 55z performs a process to issue an unrecoverable error notification indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred. The "unrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is no longer performed (no transition to game control occurs), and is not canceled unless a setting change process is executed. Therefore, if an unrecoverable error occurs, it will not be canceled even if you turn off the power switch provided on the power supply board 80z and then turn on the power switch without changing settings, and the settings will not be reset. It is now necessary to turn on the power switch in conjunction with the change operation. Note that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

"Unrecoverable error notification" is a display of an unrecoverable error screen ("This is an unrecoverable error. Please change the settings") to make the image display device recognize that an unrecoverable error has occurred. or keep the frame lamp 101z and panel lamp 100z fully lit in a predetermined color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or emit an unrecoverable error sound from the audio output device 34 indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred (" "Unrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) until the power is turned off.

The main CPU 50az determines whether an RWM clear operation has been performed in step S33. Specifically, it is determined whether the RWM clear switch 680 and the open detection switch 105z are in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation (Yes in step S33), the process moves to step S24 as a transition to RWM clear mode, and if there is no RWM clear operation (No in step S33), the process moves to step S36. Transfer processing.
The main CPU 50az performs RWM clear processing in step S34. Specifically, based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 680, the control state of the game is initialized (initializes the RWM area other than the set value area), and the RWM clear designation indicating that RWM clearing is in preparation is executed. A process for transmitting a command to the production control board 55z is performed, and the process moves to step S25. As a result, the effect control board 55z performs a process for executing RWM clear preparation notification indicating that RWM clear preparation is in progress.

"RWM clear preparation notification" means to display a clear confirmation screen on the image display device to recognize that RWM clear will be performed by operating the RWM clear switch 680, or to confirm RWM clear for the frame lamp 101z and board lamp 100z. This means that the entire interior is lit up in a predetermined luminescent color (for example, white). Note that the audio output device 34 may output a confirmation sound indicating that RWM clear confirmation is in progress (“RWM will be cleared by operating the RWM clear switch”).
In step S35, the main CPU 50az sends a power-on designation command indicating that the gaming control state has been initialized and the current gaming state (here, the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state as the normal gaming state) to the payout control board 60z and It is transmitted to the production control board 55z, and the process moves to step S31. As a result, the performance control board 55z performs a process for executing power-on notification indicating that the control state of the game has been initialized.

"Power-on notification" refers to displaying the initial screen (background image and initial effect pattern "123") when the power is turned on to make the image display device recognize that the control state of the game has been initialized, or displaying a frame Lighting up the lamp 101z and panel lamp 100z in a predetermined color (e.g., white) for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 60 seconds), or emitting a power-on notification sound from the audio output device 34 indicating that the RWM area has been initialized. (“RWM cleared” + buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).

The main CPU 50az determines whether a setting confirmation operation has been performed in step S36. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 660 and the open detection switch 105z are in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation (Yes in step S36), the process moves to step S37 as a transition to setting confirmation mode, and if there is no setting confirmation operation (No in step S36), the game is controlled. The process moves to step S38 to restore the state to the state before the power was turned off.

The main CPU 50az performs a setting confirmation process in step S37. Specifically, the setting value saved in the setting value area of the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz is displayed on the information display 113, and a setting confirmation designation command indicating that the setting is being confirmed is sent to the production control board 55z. Perform processing to do so. As a result, the production control board 55z performs a process for executing a setting confirmation notification indicating that the setting value is being confirmed.

"Setting confirmation notification" refers to displaying a setting confirmation screen to make the image display device recognize that setting values are being confirmed, or displaying a predetermined setting confirmation screen for the frame lamp 101z and panel lamp 100z during setting confirmation. This means turning on all the lights in a luminous color (for example, white). Note that the audio output device 34 may output a setting confirmation notification sound (“Settings are being confirmed”) indicating that the settings are being confirmed.

In step S38, the main CPU 50az clears (clears to 0) the backup flag and checksum saved in the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz, and sets the RWM area when the power is restored. As a result, the progress state (control state) of the game is restored (restored) to the state before the power was turned off, so it is possible to resume the game from the state before the power was turned off.

In step S39, the main CPU 50az transmits a power recovery designation command indicating that the gaming control state has been restored and the gaming state before the power outage to the production control board 55z. As a result, the performance control board 55z performs a process to terminate the setting confirmation notification, etc., which will be described later, and execute a power recovery notification indicating that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off. .

"Power restoration notification" refers to displaying a power restoration screen (image) for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) in order to make the image display device recognize that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off. , all the frame lamps 101z and panel lamps 100z are turned on in a predetermined luminous color (for example, white) for a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds), or a power source is output from the audio output device 34 to indicate that the power has been restored (from a power outage). This means outputting a recovery notification sound (buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds).
In step S40, the main CPU 50az transmits other commands (such as a special symbol storage designation command and a normal symbol storage designation command to be described later) to the production control board 55z. As a result, the production control board 55z can grasp the number of reserved special symbols, and also performs processing for displaying the first reserved icon and the second reserved icon on the image display device.

In step S41, the main CPU 50az starts a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds), and in step S32, allows all interrupts, and ends the current initial setting process. .

In this way, for setting change operations, RWM clear operations, and setting confirmation operations, multiple conditions (operations) are set, so it is not possible to easily change settings, clear RWM, or confirm settings. , it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts and improve the security of gaming machines.

In addition, the number of conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation is greater than the conditions (operations) set for the RWM clear operation and setting confirmation operation, making it possible to avoid the most unauthorized setting change. It is possible to increase the security of events where acts are likely to be committed, and it is possible to effectively prevent fraudulent acts.

In addition, if the checksum is abnormal, unrecoverable error processing is executed and the progress of the game is stopped, causing the game machine to perform unexpected operations and causing inconvenience to the game parlor and players. This eliminates the need for overtime, making it possible to improve the reliability of the gaming machine.
In addition, if there is a flag indicating that the settings are being changed, that is, if the previous power outage occurred while the settings were being changed, an unrecoverable error process will be executed to stop the game even if the checksum is normal. This prevents the game from proceeding with setting values that are not intended by the game parlor side, making it possible to improve the reliability of the game machine.

Note that in the setting change operation, RWM clear operation, and setting confirmation operation, the ON state of the open detection switch 105z is included, but even if the ON state of the open detection switch 105z is not included. good.
Further, if it is determined that there is a backup flag (power has been restored) and it is determined that there has been no setting change operation, if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in subsequent step S40, unrecoverable error processing is executed. However, when it is determined that the checksum is abnormal, the RWM area of the main RAM 50cz is initialized (cleared to 0), the initial value "1" is saved in the set value area, and the process returns to step S25. The processing may be moved to .

In addition, the power-on designation command and the power-recovery designation command are sent including information indicating the current gaming state, but after transmitting the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command, the current gaming state A gaming state designation command indicating the game state may be transmitted.
Furthermore, by not determining the presence or absence of the setting change flag, it may be possible to prevent unrecoverable error processing from being performed even if the previous power-off occurred while the settings were being changed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU of the main control board.
The main CPU 50az performs random number update processing (S61), starting gate SW processing (S62), gate detection SW processing (S63), special symbol processing (S64), customer waiting setting processing (S65), and auxiliary symbol processing as timer interrupt processing. Processing (S66), big prize opening processing (S67), second starting opening opening processing (S68), etc. are executed.

Next, various processes executed as the timer interrupt process will be explained.
[Starting port SW processing]
FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing an example of the starting port SW process executed by the CPU of the main control board.
In this case, the main CPU 50az determines whether the first starting port detection SW 13a of the first starting port 13z is ON in step S101, and if it is determined that the first starting port detection SW 13a is ON, , In step S102, it is determined whether or not the pending number U1 of the first starting port detection SW 13a is less than "4".
Here, if it is determined that the number of reservations U1 is less than "4", "1" is added to the number of reservations U1 in step S103. After this, in step S104, a special symbol determination random value, a jackpot symbol determination random value, a reach determination random value, a fluctuation pattern random value, etc. are acquired and stored in the main RAM 50cz.
In this embodiment, it is assumed that 180 variation pattern random values (0 to 179) are prepared.

Next, in step S105, the main CPU 50az increases the number of reservations displayed on the first special symbol reservation display 23 and sets a first reservation number increase command. When the first pending number increasing command is set, the main CPU 50az transmits the first pending number increasing command to the production control board 55z. Note that if a negative result is obtained in step S102, that is, if it is determined that the pending number U1 is "4", which is the maximum possible pending number, steps S103 to S105 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S106.

Next, in step S106, the main CPU 50az determines whether the second starting port detection SW 14a of the second starting port 14z is ON, and if it is determined that the second starting port detection SW 14a is ON. , In step S107, it is determined whether or not the pending number U2 of the second starting opening detection SW 14a is less than "4".
Here, if it is determined that the number of reservations U2 is less than "4", "1" is added to the number of reservations U2 in step S108. After that, in step S109, a special symbol determination random value, a jackpot symbol determination random value, a reach determination random value, a fluctuation pattern random value, etc. are acquired and stored in the main RAM 50cz.

Next, in step S110, the main CPU 50az increases the number of reservations on the second special symbol reservation display 24 and sets a second reservation number increase command. When the second pending number increasing command is set, the main CPU 50az transmits the second pending number increasing command to the production control board 55z, and ends the starting opening SW process. Note that if a negative result is obtained in step S107, that is, if it is determined that the pending number U2 is "4", which is the maximum possible pending number, the starting port SW process is ended.

[Gate detection SW processing]
FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing an example of gate detection SW processing executed by the CPU of the main control board.
In step S121, the main CPU 50a determines whether or not the gate detection SW 15a of the gate 15z is ON. If it is determined that the gate detection SW 15a is ON, in step S122, the main CPU 50a determines whether the gate detection SW 15a passes through the gate. It is determined whether G is less than "4".

If it is determined in step S122 that the number of times G of passing through the gate is less than "4", "1" is added to the number of times G of passing through the gate in step S123, and in the subsequent step S124, a random number for auxiliary symbol determination is obtained. is stored in the main RAM 50cz, and the gate detection SW process is completed.
Note that if it is determined in step S121 that the gate detection SW 15a is not ON, or if a negative result is obtained in step S122, that is, if it is determined that the number of gate passages G is "4" which is the maximum number of items that can be held. The gate detection SW process ends.

[Special pattern processing]
FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol processing executed by the CPU of the main control board.
In step S131, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the special game flag is ON, that is, whether or not a jackpot game or a small win game is in progress, and determines that a jackpot game or a small win game is not in progress. If so, in the subsequent step S132, it is determined whether the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 20z or the second special symbol display device 21 are changing.
If it is determined in step S132 that the special symbol is not changing, then in step S133 it is determined whether or not the pending number U2 of the second starting opening detection SW 14a to be consumed preferentially is greater than "1". If it is determined in step S133 that the number of pending items U2 is greater than "1", then "1" is subtracted from the pending number U2 in step S134.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S133 that the number of held items U2 is not ≧1, that is, if the number of held items U2 is "0", then in step S135, the number of held items U1 of the first starting port detection SW 13a is set to "1". If it is determined in step S135 that the pending number U1 is greater than "1", "1" is subtracted from the pending number U1 in the subsequent step S136.

Next, in step S137, the main CPU 50az turns the customer waiting flag OFF if it is ON, and then in step S138 executes a special game determination process (FIG. 207) to be described later. After the special game determination process is executed in step S138, a variation pattern selection process (FIG. 208) to be described later is executed in step S139. After executing the variation pattern selection process in step S139, in step S140, symbol variation of the corresponding first special symbol display device 20z or second special symbol display device 21 is started, and in subsequent step S141, the effect control board 55z is Set the fluctuation start command to be sent to.
The fluctuation start command includes a fluctuation pattern command that shows the fluctuation time of the special symbol, a jackpot or small win command that shows the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, a jackpot symbol command that shows the lottery result of the jackpot symbol, and a reach that shows the lottery result of the reach lottery. This includes commands, gaming status commands related to the current gaming status, and the like.

Next, in step S142, the main CPU 50az determines whether the variation time of the first or second special symbol has passed a predetermined variation time.
If it is determined in step S142 that the predetermined variation time has elapsed, in the subsequent step S143, the variation of the first special symbol display device 20z or the second special symbol display device 21 is stopped and a predetermined special symbol is displayed.
After this, in step S144, a fluctuation stop command is set, and in subsequent step S145, a stopping process (FIG. 210), which will be described later, is executed to end the special symbol process.

In addition, if it is determined in step S131 that the special game flag is ON, or if it is determined in step S142 that the variation time of the special symbol has not reached the predetermined variation time, the special symbol process is ended.
Moreover, in step S132, when it is determined that the special symbol is changing, the process proceeds to step S142, and it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the special symbol has passed a predetermined fluctuation time.
Further, in step S135, if it is determined that the number of items on hold U1 is not ≧1, that is, if it is determined that there are no items on hold with the number of items on hold U1 or U2, then in step S146, the customer waiting setting process shown in FIG. 206 is executed. Finish special symbol processing.

[Customer waiting setting process]
FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing an example of a customer waiting setting process executed by the CPU of the main control board.
In step S151, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON. If it is determined that the customer waiting flag is ON, the main CPU 50az ends the customer waiting setting process.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S151 that the customer waiting flag is not ON, a customer waiting command is set in step S152, and in the subsequent step S153, the customer waiting flag is turned ON, and the customer waiting setting process is ended.
It should be noted that the customer waiting flag is turned from OFF to ON when the state is not a jackpot state and no special symbols are reserved for a predetermined period of time.

[Special game judgment processing]
FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing an example of special game determination processing executed by the CPU of the main control board.
In step S161, the main CPU 50az determines the random number value for special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 50cz, and in the subsequent step S162, determines whether or not the jackpot has been won.
In step S162, if it is determined that the jackpot has been won, in the subsequent step S163, the random number value for jackpot symbol determination stored in the main RAM 50c is determined, and in step S164, based on the determination result, the first special A jackpot symbol to be displayed on the symbol display device 20z or the second special symbol display device 21 is set, and the special game determination process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S162 that the jackpot has not been won, then in step S165, it is determined whether or not the small hit has been won based on the random number value for special symbol determination.
In step S165, if it is determined that the small win has been won, in the subsequent step S166, the small winning symbol to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 20z or the second special symbol display device 21 is set, and the special game determination process is performed. end.
In addition, in step S165, if it is determined that the small win has not been won, in step S167, a losing symbol to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 20z or the second special symbol display device 21 is set, and the special game determination process is performed. end.

[Variation pattern selection process]
FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern selection process executed by the CPU of the main control board.
First, in step S171, the main CPU 50az determines whether the time-saving flag indicating the time-saving gaming state is ON. If it is determined in step S171 that the time-saving flag is ON, in the subsequent step S172, a time-saving game state table is set as the fluctuation pattern table, and the process proceeds to step S174.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S171 that the time-saving flag is not ON, in step S173, a table for non-time-saving gaming states is set as the fluctuation pattern table, and the process proceeds to step S174.
Next, in step S174, the main CPU 50az determines the previously obtained fluctuation pattern random value, and in subsequent step S175, sets the fluctuation pattern based on the set fluctuation pattern table and the fluctuation pattern random value. Then, the variation pattern selection process is completed.

FIG. 209 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table, (a) is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table for a non-time-saving gaming state, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern table for a time-saving gaming state.

First, the variable pattern table for the non-time saving gaming state shown in FIG. 209(a) will be explained.
In the fluctuation pattern table for the non-time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 209(a), when the special symbol determination result is a jackpot and the fluctuation pattern random value is "0 to 89", a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time of 90 seconds is selected. 1 is selected. When variation pattern 1 is selected, a winning effect with reach A is performed.

Further, when the special symbol determination result is a jackpot and the variation pattern random number value is "90 to 179", variation pattern 2 in which the variation time is 60 seconds is selected. When variation pattern 2 is selected, a winning effect with reach B is performed.
Further, when the special symbol determination result is a small hit, the variation pattern 3 in which the variation time is 60 seconds is selected regardless of the selected variation pattern random number value "0 to 179". When variation pattern 3 is selected, a chance performance is performed.

Next, a case where the special symbol determination result is a loss and the gaming state is a non-time saving gaming state will be explained.
If the special symbol determination random value is a loss, a fluctuation pattern is determined based on the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol, the reach determination random value, the fluctuation pattern random value, etc.
Specifically, if the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "0 to 2" and the random value for reach determination is "22 to 249" and there is no reach, the selected fluctuation pattern Regardless of the random number value "0 to 179", a variation pattern 4 in which the variation time is 12 seconds is selected. When variation pattern 4 is selected, normal variation A is performed.

On the other hand, the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "0 to 2", the random number for reach determination is "0 to 21" with reach, and the fluctuation pattern random number is "0 to 29". In this case, variation pattern 5 in which the variation time is 90 seconds is selected. When variation pattern 5 is selected, a loss effect with reach A is performed.
In addition, the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "0 to 2", the random number for reach judgment is "0 to 21" with reach, and the fluctuating pattern random number is "30 to 179". In this case, variation pattern 6 in which the variation time is 30 seconds is selected. When variation pattern 6 is selected, a loss effect with reach B is performed.

Next, if the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "3" and there is no reach with the random number for reach determination being "22 to 249", the selected fluctuation pattern random number "0"˜179'', the variation pattern 7 in which the variation time is 8 seconds is selected. When variation pattern 7 is selected, normal variation B is performed.
Also, if the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "3", the random number for reach judgment is "0-21" with reach, and the variable pattern random number is "0-29", , select variation pattern 5 in which the above-described variation time is 90 seconds.
Also, if the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "3", the random number for reach judgment is "0-21" with reach, and the variable pattern random number is "30-179", , select variation pattern 6 in which the above-mentioned variation time is 30 seconds.

In addition, if the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "4 to 8" and the random number for reach determination is "22 to 249" and there is no reach, the selected fluctuation pattern random number " 0 to 179'', select variation pattern 8 in which the variation time is 4 seconds. When variation pattern 8 is selected, shortening variation A is performed.
In addition, the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "4 to 8", the random number for reach judgment is "0 to 21" with reach, and the fluctuating pattern random number is "0 to 29". In this case, variation pattern 5 in which the above-mentioned variation time is 90 seconds is selected.
In addition, the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "4 to 8", the random number for reach judgment is "0 to 21" with reach, and the fluctuation pattern random number is "30 to 179". In this case, variation pattern 6 in which the above-mentioned variation time is 30 seconds is selected.

Next, the time-saving gaming state variation pattern table shown in FIG. 209(b) will be explained. In addition, the variation pattern table for the time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. 209(b) is the same as the variation pattern table for the non-time-saving gaming state shown in FIG. Therefore, the explanation will be omitted, and only the case where the random number value for special symbol determination is a loss and the gaming state is the time-saving gaming state will be explained here.
If the random number value for special symbol determination is a loss, a fluctuation pattern is determined based on the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, the random number value for reach determination, the fluctuation pattern random value, etc.
Specifically, if the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "0 to 5" and the random value for reach determination is "22 to 249" and there is no reach, the selected fluctuation pattern Regardless of the random number value "0 to 179", a variation pattern 4 in which the variation time is 12 seconds is selected. When variation pattern 4 is selected, normal variation A is performed.

On the other hand, the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "0 to 5", the random number for reach judgment is "0 to 21" with reach, and the fluctuation pattern random number is "0 to 29". In this case, variation pattern 5 in which the variation time is 90 seconds is selected. When variation pattern 5 is selected, a loss effect with reach A is performed.
In addition, the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "0 to 5", the random number for reach determination is "0 to 21" with reach, and the fluctuating pattern random number is "30 to 179". In this case, variation pattern 6 in which the variation time is 30 seconds is selected. When variation pattern 6 is selected, a loss effect with reach B is performed.

On the other hand, if the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "6 to 8" and the random number for reach judgment is "22 to 249" and there is no reach, the selected fluctuation pattern random number " 0 to 179'', select variation pattern 9 in which the variation time is 2 seconds. When variation pattern 9 is selected, shortening variation B is performed.
In addition, the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "6 to 8", the random number for reach judgment is "0 to 21" with reach, and the fluctuating pattern random number is "0 to 29". In this case, the variation pattern 5 is selected.
In addition, the total number of reserved balls of the first and second special symbols is "6 to 8", the random number for reach determination is "0 to 21" with reach, and the fluctuating pattern random number is "30 to 179". In this case, the variation pattern 6 is selected.
In addition, in this embodiment, when winning a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the random number value for special symbol determination and the fluctuation pattern random value, but this is just an example, and the random number value for special symbol determination The variation pattern may be determined based on the random number value for jackpot symbol determination, or the variation pattern may be determined based on the random number value for special symbol determination, the random number value for jackpot symbol determination, and the fluctuation pattern random number value.

[Stopped processing]
FIG. 210 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an in-stop process executed by the CPU of the main control board.
In step S181, the main CPU 50az determines whether the time-saving flag is ON, and if it is determined that the time-saving flag is ON, in the subsequent step S182, the remaining time-saving games stored in the main RAM 50cz are Subtract "1" from the number of games J.

Next, in step S183, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the remaining number of games J is "0", and if the remaining number of games J is "0", the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the time-saving game. This means that the process has been performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), so in the subsequent step S184, the time saving flag is turned OFF.
Note that if it is determined in step S181 that the time saving flag is not ON, or if it is determined in step S183 that the number of remaining games J is not "0", the process moves to step S185.

Next, in the subsequent step S185, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the high accuracy flag is ON, and if it is determined that the high accuracy flag is ON, the main CPU 50az stores the information in the main RAM 50cz in the subsequent step S186. "1" is subtracted from the number of remaining games X of the high probability game.
Next, in step S187, the main CPU 50az determines whether the remaining number of games X is "0" or not. If the remaining number of games This means that the process has been performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10,000 times), so in the subsequent step S188, the high accuracy flag is turned OFF.
Note that if it is determined in step S185 that the high accuracy flag is not ON, or if it is determined in step S187 that the number of remaining games X is not "0", the process moves to step S189.

Next, in step S189, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not it is a jackpot based on the special symbols set in the first special symbol display device 20z or the second special symbol display device 21, and if it is determined that it is not a jackpot. Next, in step S190, it is determined whether the set special symbol is a "small hit" or not. Here, if it is determined that it is a small win, the small win game flag is turned on in step S191. Thereafter, in step S192, a jackpot opening is started, and in step S193, a jackpot opening command is set, and the stopped processing is ended.

On the other hand, in step S190, if it is determined that there is no small win, the fluctuation stopping process is ended without turning on the small win game flag.
In addition, if it is determined in step S189 that it is a jackpot, then in step S194 it is determined whether the jackpot is a long hit or not, and if it is determined that it is a long hit, in step S195, a long The winning game flag (special game flag) is turned ON, and if not, the short winning game flag (special game flag) is turned ON in step S196. After that, in step S197, the remaining number of games J of the time-saving game and the remaining number of games X of the high-probability game are set to "0", and the remaining number of games J/X is reset, and then, in step S198, the time-saving flag Then, the high accuracy flag is turned OFF and the process proceeds to step S192.

[Auxiliary pattern processing]
FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing an example of auxiliary symbol processing executed by the CPU of the main control board.
In step S201, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the auxiliary game flag is ON, and if it is determined that the auxiliary game flag is ON, it ends the auxiliary symbol processing.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S201 that the auxiliary game flag is not ON, it is determined in step S202 whether or not the auxiliary symbols are changing. If it is determined in step S202 that the auxiliary symbol is not changing, it is determined in step S203 whether or not the number of gate passages G, which stores the number of times the game ball has passed through the gate detection SW 15a, is greater than "1". , if the gate passing number G is more than "1", "1" is subtracted from the gate passing number G in the subsequent step S204, and if it is determined that the gate passing number G is not more than "1", that is, "0". In this case, the auxiliary symbol processing ends.

Next, the main CPU 50az determines the random number value for auxiliary symbol determination in step S205, sets the stop symbol to be stopped and displayed on the auxiliary symbol display device 22 in the subsequent step S206, and sets the fluctuation time in step S207. do.
Here, the variation time of the auxiliary symbol may be set to, for example, 4.0 seconds if the time saving flag is OFF, and to 1.5 seconds, for example, if the time saving flag is ON.
Next, in step S209, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the variation time of the auxiliary symbol has elapsed for a predetermined time. If it is determined that the predetermined variation time has elapsed, the main CPU 50az stops the variation in step S210. . On the other hand, if it is determined in step S209 that the variation time of the auxiliary symbol has not elapsed for a predetermined period of time, the auxiliary symbol process is ended.

Next, in step S211, the main CPU 50a determines whether or not the auxiliary symbol is a winning symbol. If the auxiliary symbol is a winning symbol, in step S212, the main CPU 50a turns on the auxiliary game flag, and Finish the process.
In addition, in step S211, if it is determined that the stop symbol is not a winning symbol, the auxiliary symbol process is ended without turning on the auxiliary game flag.
If it is determined in step S202 that the auxiliary symbol is fluctuating, the process proceeds to step S209, and it is determined whether or not the auxiliary symbol fluctuation time has passed a predetermined fluctuation time.

[Big winning opening processing]
FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing an example of the big winning opening process executed by the CPU of the main control board.
In step S221, the main CPU 50az determines whether the small win game flag or special game flag is ON, and if it is determined that the small win game flag or special game flag is ON, in step S222, It is determined whether or not the opening is in progress. If it is determined in step S222 that the jackpot opening is in progress, then in step S223 it is determined whether or not the opening time has elapsed. If it is determined in step S223 that the opening time has elapsed, in the subsequent step S224, the value of the number of rounds R is set to "0" and the number of rounds (R number)/operation pattern is set.

FIG. 213 is a diagram showing an example of setting the number of rounds/operation pattern. For example, if the special game is a long game with a normal time saving, the number of rounds (R number) is 4R, and the operation pattern in 1R is 29. .Set to open for 5 seconds x 1 time. Further, if the jackpot is a short hit with a normal time saving, the number of rounds (R number) is set to 2R, and the operation pattern during 1R is set to 0.1 seconds open x 1 time. Furthermore, if the jackpot is a long hit with a high probability of time saving, the number of rounds (R number) is set to 16R, the operation pattern during 1R is set to 29.5 seconds open x 1 time, and the jackpot is a short win with a high probability of time saving. And if it is a high probability short hit with no time saving, the number of rounds (R number) is set to 2R and the operation pattern during 1R is set to 0.1 seconds open x 1 time.
If it is a small hit, for example, the number of rounds (R number) is set to 1R, and the operation pattern during 1R is set to 0.1 seconds open x 2 times.

Next, in step S225, the main CPU 50az sets the number counter C indicating the number of winnings per round to the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17z to "0", and in the following step S226, , "1" is added to the value of the number of rounds R. Then, in the following step S227, the operation of the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17z is started. That is, either the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17z is changed from the closed state to the open state.

Next, in step S228, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the operating time of the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17z has passed a predetermined time. If it is determined that there is no one, then in the subsequent step S229, it is determined whether the value of the number counter C has reached the specified number.
In step S229, when it is determined that the value of the number counter C is the specified number C, in step S230, the operation of the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17z is ended. In other words, the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17z, which is in the open state, is brought into the closed state.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the number counter C has not reached the specified number, the big winning opening process is ended.
In addition, in step S228, if the operating time of the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17z has passed the predetermined operating time, the process of step S229 is skipped and the number of pieces in the number counter C is Without checking, in step S230, the operation of the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17z is ended.

Next, the main CPU 50az determines whether the number of jackpot rounds is the maximum number of rounds R in step S231. In other words, it is determined whether the jackpot round is the final round or not.
If it is determined in step S231 that the jackpot round is the final round, an ending is started in step S232, and an ending command is set in step S233.

Next, the main CPU 50az sets the value of the number of rounds R to "0" in step S234. After that, in step S235, it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed, and if it is determined that the ending time has elapsed, then in the subsequent step S236, a game state setting process to be described later is executed. After this, in step S237, the special game flag is turned OFF and the big winning opening process is ended.
In addition, if it is determined in step S222 that the opening of the jackpot is not in progress, it is determined in step S238 whether or not the ending is in progress. If it is determined that the ending is in progress, the process proceeds to step S235, and If it is determined not to be the case, it is determined in step S239 whether or not the big prize opening is in operation.

In step S239, if it is determined that the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17z is in operation, the process moves to step S228, and the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17z is in operation. If it is determined that this is not the case, the process moves to step S225.
In addition, in step S221, when it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed, the big winning opening process is ended. Similarly, in step S229, it is determined that the value of the number counter C has not reached the specified number, in step S231, it is determined that the jackpot round is not the final round, or in step S235, the ending time has elapsed. If it is determined that there is no such thing, the big winning opening process is also terminated.

[Game status setting process]
FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing an example of a gaming state setting process executed by the CPU of the main control board.
First, in step S241, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not it is a small win. If it is determined that it is a small win, the main CPU 50az ends the gaming state setting process.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S241 that it is not a small win, then in step S242 it is determined whether or not it is a normal win (long win with normal time saving or short win with normal time saving), and it is determined whether it is a normal win. If it is determined that, in step S243, the time saving flag is turned ON, and in step S244, the remaining number of games J of the time saving game is set to, for example, "100", and the game state setting process is ended.

In addition, if it is determined in step S242 that it is not a normal win, it is a jackpot that gives a high probability game, so in step S245 the high probability flag is turned ON, and in step S246, the number of remaining games of the high probability game is For example, set "10000" to X.

Next, in step S247, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the win is a time-saving win. If it is determined that the win is a time-saving win, in step S248, the main CPU 50az turns on the time-saving flag and executes the step In S249, the number of remaining games J of the time-saving game is set to, for example, "10000", and the game state setting process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S247 that there is no time-saving win, the time-saving flag is turned OFF in step S250, and the remaining number of games J of the time-saving game is reset in step S251, and the game state setting process is ended. .

[Second starting port opening process]
FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing an example of the second starting port opening process executed by the CPU of the main control board.
In step S261, the main CPU 50az determines whether the auxiliary game flag is ON, and if it is determined that the auxiliary game flag is ON, then in step S262, the second starting opening opening/closing door 14bz is Determine whether or not it is in operation. In step S262, if the second starting opening opening/closing door 14bz is not operating (opening), in step S263, the operation pattern of the second starting opening opening/closing door 14bz is set according to the gaming state, and in step S264, the second starting opening opening/closing door 14bz is set. 2. The operation of the starting port opening/closing door 14bz is started.
Here, the operation pattern (time) of the second starting port opening/closing door 14bz to be set is, for example, if the time saving flag is OFF, it is opened for 0.15 seconds x 1 time, and if the time saving flag is ON, it is opened for 1.80 seconds. It is conceivable to set the number of times to be opened three times.

Next, in step S265, the main CPU 50az determines whether or not the operating time of the second starting port opening/closing door 14bz has elapsed, and if it is determined that the predetermined operating time has elapsed, the main CPU 50az performs step In S266, the auxiliary game flag is turned OFF and the second starting port opening process is ended.
Note that if it is determined in step S262 that the second starting port opening/closing door 14bz is in operation, the process moves to step S265.
Further, if it is determined in step S261 that the auxiliary game flag is not ON, or if it is determined in step S265 that the operating time of the second starting port 14z has not elapsed, the second starting port opening process is ended. .

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, when the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 20z or the second special symbol display device 21 have stopped changing, the first starting port 13z is activated. When a game ball enters, this entry is used as an opportunity to obtain random numbers for special symbol determination, random number values for jackpot symbol determination, random number values for reach determination, etc. by lottery, and the first special symbol display device 20z. Display special symbols in a variable manner. Then, when it is determined that the acquired random number value for special symbol determination has won the special game, the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 20z is stopped at a specific symbol. After this, any one of the above-mentioned special games of long winning, short winning, or small winning is executed.

During the long winning game, a ball can be won by shooting a game ball aiming at the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17z which is in an open state.
On the other hand, during a short winning game, the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely short, so even if you shoot the game ball aiming at the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17z, you will hardly get any balls. It is now impossible to do so.

Similarly, for example, if a game ball enters the second starting port 14z while the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 20z or the second special symbol display device 21 have stopped changing, this entry Taking the ball as an opportunity, a random number value for special symbol determination, a random number value for jackpot symbol determination, a random number value for reach determination, etc. are obtained by lottery, and the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 21 is displayed in a variable manner.
Then, when it is determined that the acquired special symbol determination random number value has won the special game, the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 21 is stopped at a specific symbol. After this, a special game of either the above-mentioned jackpot (long win or short win) or small win is executed. During the long winning game, a ball can be won by firing a game ball aiming at the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17z that is open for a predetermined period of time. On the other hand, as above, during the short winning game, the opening time of the big winning hole is extremely short, so even if you shoot the game ball aiming at the first big winning hole 16 or the second big winning hole 17z, you will almost never get a ball. It is no longer possible to do so.

After the jackpot game ends, based on the lottery result of the random number value for jackpot symbol determination, as a bonus game, a normal time-saving game in which a time-saving game with opening support of the second starting opening opening/closing door 14bz is performed for a predetermined period, and a jackpot with the above-mentioned time-saving game Either a high-probability time-saving game where you play a high-probability game with a high probability of winning for a predetermined period (so-called variable probability game), or a high-probability non-time-saving game where you play only high-probability games for a predetermined period (so-called latent probability variable game). Shift to the game state.
The high probability game is continued until the number of variations of the special symbol reaches a preset number (for example, 10,000 times) or until the player wins the jackpot again.

On the other hand, time-saving games continue until the number of changes in the special symbol reaches a preset number (for example, 100 times for normal time-saving games, 10,000 times for high-probability time-saving games) or until you win the jackpot again. It will be done as follows.
Also, during the time-saving game, the varying time from the start of the variation of the special symbol to the stop of the variation is set to be shorter than that during the normal game, and the winning probability of the auxiliary symbol is set to a higher probability than during the normal game.
Furthermore, the opening time of the second starting opening opening/closing door 14bz at the time of winning the auxiliary symbol is set longer than during the normal game.
Therefore, during time-saving games, the winning rate of game balls into the second starting port 14z is higher than during normal games, so the player can aim at the second starting port 14z and fire the game ball to win during normal games. Compared to this, gaming efficiency can be significantly increased.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 14z, the probability of winning a jackpot is more advantageous to the player than when a game ball enters the first starting port 13z. Since this is higher, the player is more likely to win a jackpot advantageous to the player during the time-saving game than during the normal game.

Next, the processing executed by the production control board 55z will be explained.
[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the production control board. Note that the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 216 can be realized by the sub CPU 55az of the production control board 55z executing a program stored in the sub ROM 55bz.
In this case, the sub CPU 55az of the production control board 55z executes command reception processing (step S310), production button processing (step S320), command transmission processing (step S330), etc. as timer interrupt processing.

Next, an example of a main process executed by the sub CPU 55az of the production control board 55z as a timer interrupt process will be described. Note that the processing described below can also be realized by the sub CPU 55az of the production control board 55z executing a program stored in the sub ROM 55bz.

[Command reception processing]
FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing an example of command reception processing executed by the CPU of the production control board.
In step S401, the sub CPU 55az determines whether or not a command to increase the number of reservations has been received, and if it is determined that the command to increase the number of reservations has been received, in step S402, it executes a processing to receive the command to increase the number of reservations.
Next, in step S403, the sub CPU 55az determines whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received, and if it is determined that a fluctuation start command has been received, then in the subsequent step S404, the sub CPU 55az executes an effect selection process.
The performance selection process in step S404 is a process for selecting a performance to be performed while the special symbols are changing.
Note that if it is determined in step S403 that the fluctuation start command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S405 without executing the effect selection process.

Next, in step S405, the sub CPU 55az determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received, and if it is determined that a fluctuation stop command has been received, in the subsequent step S406, the sub CPU 55az executes a process during the end of fluctuation production. .
The processing during the completion of the variation performance includes analysis of the variation stop command, various processes such as changing the mode flag based on the analysis result, processing for setting the variation production end command, and the like.
In addition, in step S405, if it is determined that the fluctuation stop command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S407 without executing the fluctuation production completion process.

Next, in step S407, the sub CPU 55az determines whether or not an opening command has been received. If it is determined that an opening command has been received, the sub CPU 55az executes a special game effect selection process in the subsequent step S408.
The special game performance selection process includes analysis of an opening command, special game performance pattern selection process, and processing for setting an opening performance start command.
Note that if it is determined in step S407 that the opening command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S409 without executing the special game performance selection process.

Next, in step S409, the sub CPU 55az determines whether or not an ending command to execute the ending effect selection process has been received, and if it is determined that the ending command has been received, in the subsequent step S410, the sub CPU 55az performs the ending effect selection process. Execute processing.
Examples of the ending effect selection process include analysis of an ending command, selection of an ending effect pattern, and processing for setting an ending effect start command.
Note that if it is determined in step S409 that the ending command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S411 without executing the ending effect selection process.
Next, the sub CPU 55az executes a customer waiting command reception process in step S411, and ends the command reception process.

[Production selection process]
FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect selection process executed by the CPU of the effect control board.
In this case, the sub CPU 55az first analyzes the fluctuation start command in step S421, and subtracts the number of pending balls stored in the sub RAM 55cz in the subsequent step S422.
Next, in step S423, a variable effect pattern is selected based on the analysis result of the variable start command, and in the subsequent step S424, a variable effect start command is set, and the effect selection process is ended.

[Processing while the variable performance is ending]
FIG. 219 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the process during the end of the variable performance executed by the CPU of the performance control board.
In this case, the sub CPU 55az analyzes the fluctuation stop command in step S431, performs various processing such as changing the mode flag based on the analysis result, and then sets a fluctuation production end command in the next step S432. Then, the process during the completion of the variable performance ends.

[Opening production selection process]
FIG. 220 is a flowchart showing an example of the winning effect selection process executed by the CPU of the effect control board.
In this case, the sub CPU 55az analyzes the opening command in step S441, and performs a winning effect pattern selection process in subsequent step S442. Thereafter, in step S443, an opening performance start command is set, and the opening performance selection process is ended.

[Ending effect selection process]
FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing an example of the ending effect selection process executed by the CPU of the effect control board.
In this case, the sub CPU 55az analyzes the ending command in step S451, and selects an ending effect pattern in the subsequent step S452. After that, in step S453, an ending effect start command is set, and the ending effect selection process is ended.

<Main board protection case>
Next, the configuration of the main board protection case 200z according to this embodiment will be explained.
In addition, in this embodiment, the main board protection case 200z, the payout board protection case 400, and the production board protection case 700 have the same feature in common: the game board 10z side is forward with respect to the board case, and the side opposite to the game board 10z is The direction will be explained as the rear side.
Therefore, the left-right direction in the figure is the left-right direction when each board case is viewed from the side opposite to the game board 10z.

FIG. 222 is a diagram illustrating a main board protection case according to an example of this embodiment, in which (a) is a perspective view, (b) a side view, and (c) a front view. FIG. 223 is an exploded perspective view of the main board protection case including the pedestal. FIG. 224 is a side view showing how the main board protection case is attached to the pedestal.
225 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the main board protection case of FIG. 222 is removed from the pedestal, in which (a) is a perspective view, (b) is a side view, and (c) is a front view. FIG. 226 is a rear perspective view of the main board protection case of FIG. 225.
The main board protection case (hereinafter simply referred to as the main board case) 200 of this embodiment is a game machine such as a pachinko game machine, in which a main control board 50 equipped with electronic components such as a ROM is housed inside. It is attached to the back of the camera via a pedestal 280 (see FIGS. 222 to 224).

The main board case 200z also includes two case pieces (a lower case piece 210, an upper case piece 220) made of transparent resin, which house the main control board (printed circuit board) 50 equipped with ROM in between. ), a cutting member (hereinafter referred to as a cutting member) 230 for cutting the tamper-proof seal held between the edges of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220, and a main body to which a tamper-proof seal 250 (described later) is adhered. The cap 240 is detachably attached to the sealing base 310 of the board case 200z.
Note that the main control board 50 of this embodiment employs a single-sided mounting method in which electronic components are arranged only on one side.
By mounting important electronic components (particularly ROM) only on one side, and facing the mounting surface toward the surface that can be seen from the outside (the rear surface), fraudulent acts such as electronic component replacement can be easily detected.

The lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 constitute a substrate case body (sealing body 300).
Although the two case pieces constituting the main board case 200z are described as a lower case piece and an upper case piece, the positional relationship between the case pieces is different from the vertical direction shown in the figure.
For convenience, the case piece on the far side from the inspector's perspective is called the lower case piece, and the case piece on the near side is called the upper case piece, but if you follow the directions in the diagram, the upper case piece is called the rear case piece. The lower case piece is the front case piece.
A protective cover 229 is disposed at the lower part of the upper case piece 220 to cover a connecting portion between an internal connector and an external connector provided on the main control board 50 inside.
In this embodiment, the lower case piece 210 is fixed to the upper case piece 220 with the main control board 50 in between by a caulking member.

A caulking part 290 using a caulking member is arranged at a suitable location along the edge of the main board case 200z, and a caulking member (locking member) is inserted into a fastening hole 291 (sealing part) provided in the caulking part 290. ), the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are locked in a closed state. By removing (breaking) the caulking member driven (locked) into the fastening hole 291, the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 become openable, closable, and detachable.
In the caulking portion 290 of the main board case 200z of this embodiment, two caulking holes are provided (caulking holes 291A, 291B).
Each caulking fastening hole is configured by a lower case side fastening hole 292 provided in the lower case piece 210 and an upper case side fastening hole 293 provided in the upper case piece 220 communicating with each other.

As described later, with the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 engaged using the hook groove and the hook piece, by driving a caulking member into any of the caulking fastening holes 291, the lower case can be closed. It becomes impossible to slide the piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 relative to each other and release the engagement between them.
Therefore, it is impossible to access the main control board 50 housed inside the main board case.
Note that only one caulking hole is used for one time of fastening the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220. After removing (breaking) the crimping member and releasing the connection (after opening the main board case 200z), if you want to perform the connection again, drive the crimping member into the other remaining crimping hole. conduct. That is, the main board case of this embodiment can be opened up to two times.
In the main board case 200z of this embodiment (for example, FIG. 225), a caulking member is driven into the caulking fastening hole 291B on the lower side in the figure, for example.

The pedestal 280 is a connecting means for attaching the main board case 200z to a gaming machine side holding part (in this embodiment, the lamp relay board 166) provided on the back side of the gaming machine main body.
The main board case 200z that houses the main control board is assembled with the lower case piece 210 attached to the back of a game board such as a pachinko game machine via the pedestal 280. Electronic components mounted on the internal control board surface can be visually recognized through the case piece 220.
Furthermore, by rotating the main board case 200z upward about the shaft portion 281 located at the top of the pedestal 280, the inside of the main board case can be confirmed from the bottom surface of the transparent lower case piece 210.

A main board case assembly 200A in which a main board case 200z is attached to a pedestal 280 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 222 to 224, the main board case assembly 200A includes a pedestal 280, a main board case 200z, and a protective cover 229. The pedestal 280 is a component used to attach the main board case 200z to the rear side of the game board 10z (see FIG. 222).
As shown in FIG. 223, the pedestal 280 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape in which two sides along the left and right directions are longer than two sides along the up and down direction, and a pair of shaft portions 281 are provided near both left and right ends of the lower side. It has a plate shape in the center of the upper side in the left and right direction. The shaft portion 281 has an axial direction that coincides with the left-right direction.
The main board case 200z is provided with a pair of hook parts 249 that are engaged with each shaft part 281. A pair of hook portions 249 are provided on the lower side of upper case piece 220, which will be described later. The hook portion 249 is formed in a U-shape that is convex toward the front side.

As shown in FIG. 224, when attaching the main board case 200z to the pedestal 280, the main board case 200z is arranged so that the hook portion 249 is convex toward the back side. Then, the hook portions 249 become engageable with the shaft portions 281, so the main board case 200z is brought closer to the pedestal 280, and each hook portion 249 is engaged with each shaft portion 281.
When the hook portion 249 engages with the shaft portion 281, the main board case 200z is rotated counterclockwise in the left side view (in the direction of the arrow C in FIG. 224) around the shaft portion 281, and the main board case 200z is The case 200z is stacked on the pedestal 280. As shown in FIG. 222, at this time, the plate-shaped hook 282 provided on the upper side of the pedestal 280 is caught in the recess 3a provided on the upper side of the main board case 200z. Therefore, the main board case 200z is fixed to the pedestal 280 by the engagement between the hook part 249 and the shaft part 281 and the engagement between the plate-like hook 282 and the main board case 200z.

As shown in FIGS. 222 and 223, the protective cover 229 is then attached to the main board case 200z. The protective cover 229 covers the lower portion of the main board case 200z including the hook portion 249. In this way, the main board case assembly 200A is assembled and attached to the rear side of the game board 10z.
The main control board 50 and main board case 200z will be explained. As shown in FIG. 225, the main control board 50 that controls the game is housed in the main board case 200z. An integrated main ROM 502 is mounted on the main control board 50. Furthermore, a plurality of electronic components 595 different from the integrated main ROM 502 are mounted on the main control board 50. The plurality of electronic components 595 include various electronic components such as ICs, resistors, connectors, capacitors, and coils. Further, as shown in FIG. 225(b), a plurality of connectors 771, 772, 773, 774, 775, and 776 are mounted on the main control board 50. Note that the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are shown in FIG. 225(b), and may be omitted from illustration in other figures.

The integrated main ROM 502 stores memory contents used for game control. Further, the integrated main ROM 502 stores memory contents that affect the result of the game.
Further, the integrated main ROM 502 is a one-chip microcomputer that integrates the main CPU 50az, main ROM 50bz, and main RAM 50cz shown in FIG. 196.
The plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged in order from left to right at the bottom of main control board 50. The plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged inside six openings 779 provided at the bottom of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z.

Among the plurality of connectors 771 to 776, the plurality of connectors 774 and 775 are referred to as detection signal connectors 774 and 775. The detection signal connectors 774 and 775 include a first starting hole detection switch 13az, a second starting hole detection switch 14az, a first big winning hole detection switch 16az, and a second big winning hole detection switch that detect that a game ball has won. 17az and the general winning a prize opening detection switch 18az (see FIG. 196). In this embodiment, the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 include a first starting opening detection switch 13az, a second starting opening detection switch 14az, a first big winning opening detection switch 16az, and a second starting opening detection switch 13az, which detect that a game ball has won. It is assumed that all the signals of the big winning opening detection switch 17az and the general winning opening detection switch 18az (see FIG. 196) are input. Detection signal connectors 774, 775 have a different color from other connectors 771, 772, 773, 776. In this embodiment, the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 have a fluorescent color, and the other connectors 771, 772, 773, and 776 have a color different from the fluorescent color.

The integrated main ROM 502 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 580 extending vertically and horizontally, and a plurality of first signal pins 582. The first signal pin 582 is a signal pin that transmits a signal between the integrated main ROM 502 and the main control board 50. The first signal pin 582 is arranged so as to be visible through the main board case 200z. Specifically, the first signal pin 582 extends above and below the main body portion 580 of the integrated main ROM 502 and is electrically connected to the main control board 50 . Therefore, the first signal pin 582 is visible from the front through the main board case 200z.
A signal pin provided on each of the plurality of electronic components 595 is referred to as a second signal pin 583 (see FIG. 223). The second signal pin 583 transmits a signal between each of the plurality of electronic components 595 and the main control board 50. Note that the signal is not limited to a digital signal, but also includes an analog signal. It is arranged so as to be visible through the main board case 200z. Specifically, the second signal pin 583 extends upward, downward, left, right, or forward from each electronic component, and is electrically connected to the main control board 50. Therefore, the second signal pin 583 is visible through the main board case 200z.
As shown in FIG. 223, the main board case 200z is a box-shaped case that houses the main control board 50 and the integrated main ROM 502 in a visible and difficult-to-reach manner.

The detailed configuration of the main board case 200z and the tables provided to the main board case and the included main control board will be described with reference to FIGS. 225 to 234.
Regarding the performance display monitor 600, setting display monitor 650, setting key switch 660, and RWM clear switch 680 explained in FIGS. 196 and 197, the configuration shown in FIG. 255 and subsequent figures will be explained, and will not be explained here.
The main board case 200z encloses the main control board 50 so that the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 (see FIG. 225(b)) mounted on the main control board 50 can be visually recognized. The main board case 200z is made of a light-transmissive member such as transparent plastic, for example.
As described above, the lower case piece 210 is combined with the upper case piece 220 to form the inner encasement part 581 for enclosing the main control board 50. The upper case piece 220 is provided on the rear side of the main board case 200z, which is the integrated main ROM 502 side. The lower case piece 210 is provided on the front side of the main board case 200z, which is the opposite side to the integrated main ROM 502 side. In addition, in FIG. 225(b), only the integrated main ROM 502 is shown among the electrical components provided on the main control board 50 enclosed in the transparent main board case 200z, and other electrical components are not shown. It is omitted (the same applies to FIG. 227(a), etc.).

As shown in FIG. 226, the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 each have control board housing sections 211 and 221 that house the main control board 50 (see FIG. 223), and a sealing base section 310 (see FIG. 223), which will be described later. 227)). The control board storage parts 211 and 221 are provided with plate parts 211a and 221a each formed in a substantially rectangular shape, projecting from the peripheral edges of these plate parts 211a and 221a, and located on one side of each of the plate parts 211a and 221a. It is formed in a shape having flange portions 211b and 221b surrounding the surface.
Further, as shown in FIG. 223, a cylindrical portion 565 is provided on the left side of the plate portion 211a of the lower case piece 210 and extends toward the rear, which is the main control board 50 side. A hole 566 is formed in the cylindrical portion 565 and extends in the front-rear direction. A thread is formed inside the hole 566. In the main control board 50, a hole 567 is provided at a position facing the cylindrical portion 565.

The main control board 50 is fixed to the lower case piece 210. More specifically, the hole 567 of the main control board 50 is arranged behind the cylindrical portion 565 of the lower case piece 210. The shaft portion of a screw 769 (see FIG. 225) is inserted into the hole 566 of the cylindrical portion 565 from the rear side of the main control board 50 via the hole 567. The thread formed in the hole 567 of the cylindrical portion 565 is combined with the thread provided on the shaft of the screw 769 (see FIG. 225(b)). As a result, the main control board 50 is sandwiched between the head of the screw 769 and the rear surface of the cylindrical portion 565, and the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower case piece 210. That is, the main control board 50 is screwed to the lower case piece 210 side.

As shown in FIG. 226, a portion of the flange portion 211b of the control board storage portion 211 that protrudes from the plate portion 211a along two long sides of the plate portion 211a (hereinafter referred to as “male portion”) In each case, three L-shaped hook pieces 211c are formed.
On the other hand, a portion of the flange portion 221b of the control board storage portion 221 that protrudes from the plate portion 221a along two long sides of the plate portion 221a (hereinafter referred to as the “female portion”) has a double wall shape. An insertion groove portion 221c into which the male portion of the control board storage portion 211 can be inserted is provided between the walls forming a double wall. Furthermore, a hook piece 221d is formed in each insertion groove portion 221c.

When the lower case piece 210 to which the main control board 50 is screwed together with the upper case piece 220 is combined, the male part of the flange part 211b is inserted into the female part of the flange part 221b. The control board storage sections 211 and 221 are then slid relative to each other in the direction of arrow α in FIG. 226 along the left-right direction. Then, the hook piece 211c provided on the male part engages with the hook piece 221d, so the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are assembled together so that they will not come off unless they move in the opposite direction to the arrow α. It will be done.
When combined in this manner, the control board housing parts 211 and 221 form a box-shaped inner envelope part 581 that is shielded from the outside. The main control board 50 (see FIG. 223) is housed in the inner packaging portion 581. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, etc. are illegally replaced.

The main control board 50 is attached inside the control board storage part 221 before the control board storage parts 211 and 221 are combined. At this time, the IC and the like mounted on the main control board 50 are attached so as to face the plate part 221a of the control board storage part 221. This is because the plate portion 221a is also made of transparent plastic, so even if the main control board 50 is housed in the main board case 200z, the electronic components such as the integrated main ROM 502 mounted on the main control board 50 will be protected. This is to make it possible to check from the outside via the plate portion 221a whether or not it has been illegally replaced. As shown in FIG. 197, in this embodiment, when the main board case assembly 200A including the main board case 200z is attached to the game board 10z, the inside of the main board case 200z is inserted from the back side of the game machine 1 through the upper case piece 220. The electronic components mounted on the main control board 50 can be visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 226, sealing portions 212 and 222 are provided at the right end portions of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220. As shown in FIG. 227, the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are provided with a first screw stopper piece 91 and a second screw stopper piece 92 above the sealing parts 212 and 222.
When the control board housing parts 211 and 221 are slid and combined, a sealing base part 310 is formed by the sealing parts 212 and 222 at the longitudinal end of a sealed body 300 in which these parts are combined.
As shown in FIG. 225, when the cap 240 is attached to the sealing body 300 by covering the sealing base 310, the first screw piece 91 and the second screw piece 91 are attached to the longitudinal end of the sealing body 300. In addition to the piece 92, a third screw stopper piece 93 provided on the cap 240 overlaps to form a screw stopper part 90z for screw fastening.

As shown in FIG. 226, the sealing parts 212 and 222 protrude rightward from the right end parts of the control board storage parts 211 and 221. The sealing parts 212 and 222 are formed to have the same height in the left-right direction and the same width in the up-down direction.
In each of the sealing parts 212 and 222, elongated groove parts 212a and 222a are formed along the left-right direction. In the sealing part 222, two grooves 222a parallel to each other in the left-right direction are formed separated by a predetermined distance, and in the sealing part 212, one groove 212a is formed in the left-right direction.
As shown in FIG. 227, when the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are combined as described above, the sealing parts 212 and 222 are placed on the right side of the combined control board storage parts 211 and 221. A base portion 310 is formed.
In the sealing base part 310, the sealing parts 212 and 222 are arranged in parallel with a constant interval, and an insertion/extraction space 310a (see FIG. 227) is formed between the surfaces of the sealing parts 212 and 222 facing each other. Ru.

As shown in FIG. 226, the tamper-evident seal 250 is used as a means to seal the main board case 200z, and certifies that it is a genuine product issued by an organization with certification qualifications. .
The tamper-proof seal 250 is made of an easily cutable material such as paper with an adhesive surface provided on one side, and has a plurality of cuts in consideration of cuttability. As will be described later, the tamper-proof seal 250 has, for example, a hologram, a QR code (registered trademark) printed thereon, and the like. Further, the words "Do not tamper" are also printed on the tamper-proof seal 250.
The cutting member 230 is formed in a shape having a base portion 230a, a pair of knob portions 61z, and a cutting portion 64z. A base portion 230a, which is the basis of the cutting member 230, is formed in a substantially rectangular shape. A cut portion 64z is formed on one of the two long sides of the base portion 230a. The cutting portion 64z is a portion where the tip of the base portion 230a is formed into a blade shape. The knob portions 61z are provided at both ends of the base portion 230a in the longitudinal direction, and are formed into a shape that is bent into a dogleg shape as a whole. The left end of the knob 61z is referred to as a free end 61az.

The cap 240 is formed in a size that can be placed over the sealing base part 310 to cover the entire sealing base part 310, and is formed to be detachable from the sealing base part 310.
The cap 240 includes a bowl-shaped cap body 241 that covers the sealing base 310 and a third screw stopper 93 formed at one end of the cap body 241 in the longitudinal direction. A protrusion 82z is formed on the inner surface of the cap body 241 at a position where the free end 61az of the knob 61z of the cutting member 230 inserted into the insertion/extraction space 310a is caught when the cap 240 is attached to the sealing base 310. It is provided. Furthermore, a groove portion 86z is formed on the inner surface of the cap body 241.
The cutting member 230 is inserted into the insertion/extraction space 310a (see FIG. 227) of the sealing base 310. Thereafter, a tamper-proof sticker 250 is attached. Further, when the cap 240 is placed over the sealing base portion 310, the groove portion 86z fits into a portion of the cutting member 230 inserted into the insertion/extraction space 310a. Furthermore, the protrusion 82z engages with the free end 61az of the knob 61z of the cutting member 230.

As shown in FIG. 225, as described above, when the cap 240 is placed over the sealing base 310, the third screw piece 93 connects with the first screw piece 91 of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220. It overlaps with the combination with the second screw stopper piece 92, and constitutes a screw stop part 90z for screw fastening. When the caulking member 94 is driven into the screw fixing portion 90z, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240 are fixed to each other.
When unsealing the main board case 200z, the caulking member 94 is removed and the cap 240 is removed from the sealing base 310. The same applies when the seal on the main board case 200z is illegally broken.
The cutting member 230 and the cap 240 are integrated. Therefore, when the cap 240 is removed from the sealing base 310, the cutting member 230 is also removed from the sealing base 310 at the same time. Then, the tamper-proof seal 250 is irreparably damaged by the cut portion 64z and the like.

The identification display 520 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 223, identification marks 520 are attached to the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240.
The identification display 520 is a display that includes information regarding the gaming machine 1. In the following description, the identification display 520 provided on the main control board 50 is referred to as an identification display 521, and the identification display 520 provided on the integrated main ROM 502 is referred to as an identification display 522. The identification display 520 provided on the upper case piece 220 is referred to as an identification display 523, and the identification display 520 provided on the lower case piece 210 is referred to as an identification display 524.
The identification display 520 provided on the cap 240 is referred to as an identification display 525.

As shown in FIG. 223, the identification display 521 is displayed on the upper part of the back surface of the main control board 50 by silk printing. The identification display 521 is an information identification section for displaying specific information. The identification display 522 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502 by a stamp. The identification display 522 is an information identification section for displaying specific information.
Identification marks 523, 524, and 525 attached to the main board case 200z are information identification parts for displaying specific information. The identification mark 524 is formed on the upper right side of the front surface of the lower case piece 210 by stamping with a mold for manufacturing the lower case piece 210 (see FIG. 227).
The identification mark 525 is formed on the back surface of the cap 240 by marking with a mold for manufacturing the cap 240. The display mode of the identification display 523 will be described later.

Identification indicia 521-525 are related to each other and include at least the same identification indicia 529. In this embodiment, as an example, the identification display 521 is a character string "ABCD01", and the identification display 522 is a character string "ABCD02". The identification display 523 is a character string "ABCD03", and the identification display 524 is a character string "ABCD04". The identification display 525 is a character string "ABCD05". The same identification display 529 among the identification displays 521 to 525 is "ABCD". The identification display 529 is a display corresponding to, for example, a manufacturer name and a model name. In this embodiment, as an example, in "ABCD", "AB" represents the manufacturer name, and "CD" represents the model name.
In addition, in the identification displays 521 to 525, instead of displaying the manufacturer name as "AB" included in "ABCD", the manufacturer name itself is displayed, such as "AA Company" in identification displays 1595 and 1596 in FIG. 233. You can. Furthermore, instead of displaying the model name as "CD" included in "ABCD", the model name itself may be displayed, such as "CR AIU" in identification displays 1595 and 1596 in FIG. 233. Furthermore, the model number may be displayed in the identification displays 521 to 525, such as the model number "GH101" in the identification displays 1595 and 1596 in FIG. 233. In this case, the same identifications in the identifications 521 to 525 are the model name "CR Aiu GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company".

In the following description, the surface of the upper case piece 220 that forms the inside of the main board case 200z will be referred to as the inner surface 532. In the upper case piece 220, the surface forming the outside of the main board case 200z is referred to as an outer surface 531. As shown in FIGS. 222(c), 225(c), and 227, a position display section 541 is provided on the outer surface 531. The position display section 541 is a part that displays the position to which the identification display 523 is attached. The position display section 541 is provided in a portion of the main board case 200z that is different from a portion that overlaps with the integrated main ROM 502. More specifically, the position display section 541 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the rear side, and is provided at the lower right portion of the upper case piece 220. The integrated main ROM 502 is provided on the left side of the position display section 541 when viewed from the rear side. The position display portion 541 is a recessed portion recessed toward the front side.

As shown in FIG. 225(b), a seal portion 542 made of a light-transmitting material is attached to the position display portion 541. In this embodiment, the seal portion 542 is assumed to be transparent, for example.
In the seal portion 542, a printing portion 797 is printed on the seal body (base portion).
For all the sticker parts to be affixed to all the board cases described below, printing is done on the adhesive sticker body (base part), or the sticker body (base part) is writable. The common feature is that the base is formed.
In this embodiment, as an example, the printing section 797 is the identification display 523.
Since the identification display 523 is printed on the seal portion 542, the identification display 523 is attached to the position display portion 541. The seal portion 542 is arranged to straddle at least a portion of the plurality of electronic components 595 in the main board case 200z. In other words, the seal portion 542 is arranged to overlap the plurality of electronic components 595 in the main board case 200z when viewed from the rear. Note that FIG. 225(b) shows a part of the plurality of electronic components 595, and in reality, other electronic components (see FIG. 223) also exist. The identification display 523 on the upper case piece 220 is displayed at an angle that allows the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 to be visually recognized. In this embodiment, the visibility of the installation location of the integrated main ROM 502 is not obstructed by the identification mark 523 attached to the upper case piece 220. Note that, as in the case of the seal portion 1561 (see FIG. 234) in a modification described later, when the main board case 200z is at a predetermined angle, the identification display 523 may overlap the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502. . In this embodiment, the visibility of the installation location of the integrated main ROM 502 is not obstructed by the identification mark 523 attached to the upper case piece 220.

As described above, the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment is formed. In this embodiment, a main board case 200z containing the main control board 50 is provided. As shown in FIGS. 222, 223, 225, and 227, the main board case 200z is provided with a position display section 541 that displays the position where the identification display 523 is to be provided. Therefore, compared to the case where the position display section 541 is not provided, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 523 attached to the main board case 200. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.
Further, when manufacturing the gaming machine 1, it is easier for the manufacturer to grasp the position where the identification display 520 is to be attached, compared to a case where the position display section 541 is not provided. For this reason, for example, when the seal portion 542 is used and the identification display 523 is provided by the manufacturer, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the identification display 523 will be provided at different positions among the plurality of gaming machines 1. Therefore, compared to the case where the position display section 541 is not provided, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 523 attached to the main board case 200z. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

Further, the position display section 541 is formed on the outer surface 531 of the main board case 200z, and is a recess for positioning the identification display 520. Since the position display section 541, which is a concave portion, is provided, the inspector can easily determine the position of the position display section 541, compared to the case where the position display section 541 is displayed by printing or the like on the flat surface of the main board case 200z. Easy to understand.
Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 523 attached to the main board case 200z. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.
Additionally, the manufacturer can position the identification display 520 along the position display section 541, which is a recess. Therefore, when mass producing gaming machines 1, the manufacturer can attach the identification display 520 to the same position among a plurality of gaming machines 1. Since the identification display 520 is attached to the same position among the plurality of gaming machines 1, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 520. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

Furthermore, the position display section 541 is provided at a different location from the location overlapping the integrated main ROM 502 in the main board case 200z. In this case, the possibility that the identification display 523 attached to the position display section 541 and the integrated main ROM 502 overlap can be reduced. Therefore, the inspector can check both the identification display 523 and the integrated main ROM 502 at the same time. Therefore, for example, it can be easily discovered that the integrated main ROM 502 has been replaced by fraudulent activity. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

Further, the identification display 523 that is the information identification section attached to the main board case 200z and the identification display 522 that is the information identification section attached to the integrated main ROM 502 include at least the same identification display 529. Further, the identification display 523 attached to the upper case piece 220 is displayed at an angle that allows the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 to be visually recognized. Further, in this embodiment, the identification display 523 attached to the upper case piece 220 does not impede the visibility of the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502. The identification mark 523 attached to the upper case piece 220 is displayed at an angle that allows the installation location of the integrated main ROM 502 to be visually recognized, so the inspector can identify the integrated main ROM 502 with the same identification mark 529 and By checking the main board case 200z, it is possible to easily confirm that no fraudulent activity has been committed. Furthermore, even if the integrated main ROM 502 is replaced with another ROM due to fraudulent activity, for example, by determining whether the identification marks 529 attached to the integrated main ROM 502 and the main board case 200z are the same. , the inspector can easily confirm that fraudulent activity has occurred. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

Further, an identification display 523 that is an information identification section attached to the main board case 200z, an identification display 522 that is an information identification section attached to the integrated main ROM 502, and an information identification section displayed on the main control board 50. The identification display 521 includes at least the same identification display 529 (in this embodiment, the character string "ABCD"). Therefore, the inspector can check the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, and the main board case 200 to which the same identification display 529 has been attached, and can easily confirm that no fraudulent activity has occurred. Furthermore, even if at least one of the main control board 50 and integrated main ROM 502 is replaced by another main control board 50 and integrated main ROM 502 due to fraudulent activity, the main control board 50, integrated main ROM 502, and main board case 200z By determining whether or not the identification marks 529 attached to the two items are the same, the inspector can easily confirm that fraudulent activity has occurred. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

The main board case 200z encloses the main control board 50 so that the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 can be visually recognized. Since the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are visible, it can be easily determined whether or not, for example, a device different from the main control board 50 is connected to the connectors 771 to 776 fraudulently. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, allowing players to play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
Furthermore, since the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are fluorescent, they are easier for the inspector to visually recognize than when they are not fluorescent. Therefore, it can be easily determined whether or not, for example, a device different from the main control board 50 is connected to the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 in an unauthorized manner. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, allowing players to play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Further, a plurality of detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are provided. Therefore, compared to the case where there is only one detection signal connector, it is easier for the inspector to check the detection signal connectors 774 and 775. Therefore, it can be easily determined whether or not, for example, a device different from the main control board 50 is connected to the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 in an unauthorized manner. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, allowing players to play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
Further, the first signal pin 582 included in the integrated main ROM 502 is arranged so as to be visible through the main board case 200z. Since the first signal pin 582 is visible, it can be easily determined whether or not, for example, a device different from the main control board 50 is connected to the first signal pin 582 in an unauthorized manner. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, allowing players to play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
Further, the second signal pins 583 of the plurality of electronic components 595 are arranged so as to be visible through the main board case 200z. Since the second signal pin 583 is visible, it can be easily determined whether or not, for example, a device different from the main control board 50 is connected to the second signal pin 583 in an unauthorized manner. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, allowing players to play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Further, the main control board 50 is fixed to the lower case piece 210 side with screws 769 (see FIG. 225(b)). Therefore, it is difficult to illegally replace the main control board 50 compared to the case where it is not fastened with screws. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, allowing players to play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
Moreover, the upper case piece 220 and the lower case piece 210 are slid together and combined. Therefore, even if a person who intends to commit fraud simply tries to separate the upper case piece 220 and the lower case piece 210 in order to separate the upper case piece 220 and the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220 and the lower case piece 210 The lower case piece 210 is difficult to separate. Therefore, it is difficult to illegally replace the main control board 50. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, allowing players to play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
Note that the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications can be made. In each of the following modified examples, components corresponding to those of the above embodiment are indicated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
Although the position display portion 541 is a recessed portion, it is not limited thereto. For example, the position display portion 541 may be a convex portion as described later.

228 to 230 are diagrams showing modified examples of the position display section provided on the main board case.
FIG. 228 shows a cross-section in the arrow direction at the position of the line AA shown in FIG. 225 in the upper case piece 220 of the board case according to the modified example of the main board case 200z. As shown in FIG. 228, the position display portion 541 is a convex portion formed on the outer surface 531 of the upper case piece 220, and protrudes toward the rear side. An identification display 523 is attached to the position display section 541 by a seal section 542.
Further, although the position display section 541 was provided on the outer surface 531 of the upper case piece 220, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the position display section 541 may be provided on the inner surface 532 of the upper case piece 220.

FIG. 229 shows a cross section taken along the line AA shown in FIG. 225 in the arrow direction of the upper case piece 220 of the board case according to a modified example of the main board case 200z. As shown in FIG. 229, the position display section 541 is a recess formed in the inner surface 532 of the upper case piece 220, and is recessed toward the rear side. An identification display 523 is attached to the position display section 541 by a seal section 542. Note that the identification display 523 is printed on the rear side of the seal portion 542. Therefore, the inspector can check the identification display 523 from the rear side of the main board case 200z through the transparent upper case piece 220.

FIG. 230 shows a cross section taken along the line AA shown in FIG. 225 in the arrow direction of the upper case piece 220 of the board case according to the modified example of the main board case 200z. As shown in FIG. 230, the position display portion 541 is a convex portion formed on the inner surface 532 of the upper case piece 220, and protrudes toward the front side. An identification display 523 is attached to the position display section 541 by a seal section 542. Note that the identification display 523 is printed on the rear side of the seal portion 542. Therefore, the inspector can check the identification display 523 from the rear side of the board case through the transparent upper case piece 220.
As described above, the position display portion 541 is a convex portion or a concave portion that is formed on the inner surface 532 or the outer surface 531 of the main board case 200z and is used to position the identification display 520. Since the position display section 541, which is a convex part and a concave part, is provided, for example, compared to a case where the position display section 541 is displayed by printing or the like on the flat surface of the main board case 200z, the inspector can easily determine the position of the identification display 520. is easy to understand. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 520 attached to the main board case 200z. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

Further, the manufacturer can position the identification display 520 along the position display section 541, which is a convex portion or a concave portion. Therefore, when mass producing gaming machines 1, the manufacturer can attach the identification display 520 to the same position among a plurality of gaming machines 1. Since the identification display 520 is attached to the same position among the plurality of gaming machines 1, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 520. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.
Further, the plurality of members including the main control board 50 may not include some of the upper case piece 220, the lower case piece 210, and the cap 240. Further, the plurality of members may further include a member different from the upper case piece 220, the lower case piece 210, and the cap 240.

In addition, although the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, and the plurality of members are labeled with the identification marks 520, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, related identification marks 520 may be attached to at least two of the main control board 50 and the plurality of members. For example, the identification mark 525 may not be attached to the cap 240 included in the plurality of members. Further, the identification mark 524 may not be attached to the lower case piece 210 included in the plurality of members. Further, the identification mark 523 may not be attached to the upper case piece 220 included in the plurality of members. The inspector can check the identification marks 520 attached to at least two of the main control board 50 and the plurality of members, and can easily check whether or not fraudulent activity has been committed. For example, even if the main control board 50 is replaced with another control board due to fraudulent activity, whether the identification marks 520 attached to at least two of the main control board 50 and the plurality of members are related? By determining whether or not a fraudulent act has occurred, the inspector can easily confirm that a fraudulent act has occurred. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

Further, the identification display 520 may be attached to at least two of the main control board 50, the upper case piece 220, and the lower case piece 210. In this case, the inspector checks the identification marks 520 attached to at least two of the main control board 50, the upper case piece 220, and the lower case piece 210, and easily determines whether or not fraudulent activity has occurred. It can be confirmed. For example, even if the main control board 50 is replaced with another control board due to fraud, the identification attached to at least two of the main control board 50, the upper case piece 220, and the lower case piece 210 By determining whether the display 520 is relevant, the examiner can easily confirm that fraudulent activity has occurred. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

Further, the identification display 520 may be attached to at least the upper case piece 220 and the integrated main ROM 502. In this case, the inspector can check at least the identification display 520 attached to the upper case piece 220 and the integrated main ROM 502, and can easily confirm whether or not fraudulent activity has been committed. For example, even if the integrated main ROM 502 is replaced with another ROM due to fraudulent activity, the inspection can be performed by determining whether at least the upper case piece 220 and the identification display 520 attached to the integrated main ROM 502 are related. A person can easily confirm that a fraudulent act has taken place. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.
Moreover, the identification displays 520 only need to be related to each other. For example, the identification indications 520 may all be the same identification indication (for example, all “ABCD01”, etc.). Further, the identification displays 520 may be different from each other, and the same identification display 529 may not be included. The content of the identification display 520 is not limited as long as it can be confirmed by the inspector. Moreover, the identification display 520 does not have to be a character string. For example, identification indicia 520 may be a variety of marks. Furthermore, the manner in which the identification display 520 is attached is not limited. For example, not only the identification display 521 but also all of the identification displays 521 to 525 may be printed and provided on the seal portion. Furthermore, the seal portion does not have to be transparent. Further, all of the identification marks 523 to 525 may be engraved using a mold for manufacturing the main board case 200z.

In addition, in this embodiment, the position display part 541, which is a pasting position mark indicating the position where the seal part 542 is pasted, can take the following form.
That is, the position display section 541 includes a mark surrounding the entire circumference of the seal section 542 on the same surface or the back surface of the upper case surface to which the seal section 542 is attached, and a mark that surrounds the entire circumference of the seal section 542 on the same surface as the upper case surface or the back surface to which the seal section 542 is attached. This is the mark on the L-shaped side.
The position display section 541 is a linear convex section provided so as to surround the periphery of the seal section 542.
The position display section 541 is a linear recessed section provided so as to surround the seal section 542 on the same surface as the seal section 542 .
The position display portion 541 is a linear convex portion provided on the back surface of the seal portion 542 so as to surround the periphery of the seal portion 542.

The position display section 541 is a linear recess provided on the back surface of the seal section 542 so as to surround the periphery of the seal section 542.
The position display section 541 is an L-shaped linear protrusion provided on the same surface as the seal section 542 so as to surround a predetermined corner of the seal section 542.
The position display section 541 is an L-shaped linear recess provided on the same surface as the seal section 542 so as to surround a predetermined corner of the seal section 542.
The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear protrusion and recess provided on the back surface of the seal portion 542 so as to surround a predetermined corner.
The position display section 541 is a position mark that is provided so as to surround the seal section 542 and is neither a convex nor a recess.

Further, the identification display 520 may be formed inside the material of the main board case 200z.
231 and 232 are diagrams showing a modification example in which an identification display is formed on the main board case.
The modified example will be described below with reference to FIGS. 231 and 232. In the main board case shown in FIG. 231, the portion where the identification display 523 is displayed is referred to as an identification display section 1390. Further, a portion outside the identification display portion 1390 is referred to as an outside portion 1391. As shown in FIG. 232, the identification display portion 1390 protrudes rearward from the outer portion 1391. Therefore, the thickness L1 of the identification display portion 1390 is larger than the thickness L2 of the outer portion 1391.
The identification display 523 is formed inside a member (in this embodiment, the material of the upper case piece 220) forming the identification display section 1390. The identification display 523 is provided in the identification display section 1390 by being divided into a plurality of (four in this embodiment) layers 1381, 1382, 1383, and 1384 in the thickness direction (front-back direction).
The character “A” 1371 of the identification display 523 is formed in the layer 1381. The character “B” 1372 is formed in a layer 1382. The character “C” 1373 is formed in a layer 1383. The letter “D” 1374 is formed in the layer 1384. The character “0” 1375 is formed in the layer 1382. The character “3” 1376 is formed in the layer 1383.

Note that the method of forming the identification display 523 inside the member forming the identification display section 1390 is not limited. For example, the identification indicia 523 may be formed by 3D laser engraving. 3D laser engraving is a technology that focuses a laser beam to form fine cracks of, for example, 100 microns at intervals of, for example, 0.08 mm to 0.016 mm inside the material of the main board case 200z. By forming a plurality of cracks, an identification mark 523 is formed inside the main board case 200z.
In this embodiment, the identification display 523 is formed inside a member forming the identification display section 1390. Therefore, for example, the identification mark 523 is more difficult to remove than when the entire identification mark 523 is formed on the outer surface 531 or the inner surface 532 of the main board case 200z. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased. Further, if the identification display 523 is removed by unauthorized means, a scratch is formed on the main board case shown in FIGS. 231 and 232. Therefore, the inspector can easily discover fraudulent activities. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

Further, the identification display 523 is provided in the identification display section 1390 by being divided into a plurality of layers 1381 to 1384 in the thickness direction. Therefore, the identification mark 523 is more difficult to remove than when the identification mark 523 is formed on only one layer. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.
Further, in the main board case of FIGS. 231 and 232, the thickness L1 of the identification display portion 1390 is larger than the thickness L2 of the outer portion 1391. In this case, when an unauthorized person attempts to remove the identification display 520, it is necessary to cut the main board case 200z deeper than when L1 is less than or equal to L2. Therefore, the main board case shown in FIGS. 231 and 232 is likely to be damaged. Therefore, the inspector can easily discover fraudulent activities. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.
Note that the identification display 523 does not need to be divided into a plurality of layers 1381 to 1384 in the thickness direction in the identification display section 1390. For example, the identification mark 523 may be formed only on one layer. Further, the thickness L1 of the identification display portion 1390 may be equal to or less than the thickness L2 of the outer portion 1391. Although the identification display 523 has been described, the identification display 520 provided on the main board case in FIGS. 231 and 232, such as identification displays 524 and 525, is similarly formed inside the main board case in FIGS. 231 and 232. may be done.

Moreover, various seals other than the seal portion 542 and the like may be attached to the main board case 200z. Furthermore, the content displayed on the printing sections (for example, the printing section 797) provided on various seals such as the seal section 542 is not limited.

FIG. 233 is a diagram showing a modification of the main board case.
Regarding the performance display monitor 600, setting display monitor 650, setting key switch 660, and RWM clear switch 680 explained in FIGS. 196 and 197, the configuration shown in FIG. 255 and subsequent figures will be explained, and will not be explained here.
For example, in addition to the seal portion 542, a seal portion 1560 and a seal portion 1561 are attached to the main board case according to the modified example shown in FIG. Note that in FIG. 233, members having the same configuration as those in the above embodiment are indicated by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanations will be omitted.
The seal portion 1560 is attached to the upper part of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z at the center in the left-right direction. The seal portion 1561 is attached to the upper left portion of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z. The seal portions 1560 and 1561 are made of a light-transmitting material, and in this embodiment, as an example, it is assumed that the seal portions 1560 and 1561 are transparent. Seal portions 1560 and 1561 are each placed across a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223). Note that, in FIG. 233, illustrations of various electronic components such as a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223) located in front of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 are omitted.

A printing section 1571 is printed on the seal section 1560. The printing section 1571 includes a plurality of areas 1575. The printing portion 1571 is colored, and in this embodiment, has a white base as an example. The multiple areas 1575 include a code section 1572, an information display section 1573, and an entry area 1570. The seal section 1560 is provided so that the printing section 1571, the code section 1572, the information display section 1573, and the writing area 1570 do not overlap with the integrated main ROM 502.
The cord portion 1572 is provided at the upper left portion of the seal portion 1560. Code section 1572 includes predetermined information. The code section 1572 is a section from which information is read by another device, and for example, a QR code (registered trademark), barcode, etc. is printed in black in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area. There is. In this embodiment, as an example, the code section 1572 includes a QR code (registered trademark).

The code section 1572 is associated with, for example, information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50, which is stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as "other device"). For example, a URL (Uniform Resource Locator), which is information included in the code section 1572, is read by a camera installed in a mobile information terminal or the like. The information mobile terminal uses the URL to access other devices via the network. As a result of accessing other devices, the information displayed on the mobile information terminal includes the delivery destination of the main control board 50 (for example, the name of the store where the gaming machine 1 was delivered), and whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been disposed of. Contains information such as. This allows the inspector to easily confirm information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 and information such as whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded.

Information display section 1573 includes various information. The information display section 1573 may include the same information as the identification display 529, for example. In this embodiment, as an example, a character string "EF001" is printed in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area on the information display section 1573. The character string is, for example, the management number of the main control board 50. Using the management number, the inspector can check information such as the delivery destination of the gaming machine 1 and whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been disposed of, based on information linked to the management number held by the manufacturer. Note that the character string in the information display section 1573 may include information corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, model, etc. Further, the rectangular region of the information display section 1573 and the rectangular basin of the code section 1572 are connected in the left-right direction.

For example, a total of six entry areas 1570 are provided, three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction. The writing area 1570 is printed with a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) base. Above the entry area 1570 in the upper left, "Opener" is printed in black. Above the entry area 1570 in the upper right corner, "date opened" is printed in black. A circle 1 is printed on the left side of the upper left entry area 1570. A circle 2 is printed on the left side of the entry area 1570 at the vertical center on the left side. A circle 3 is printed on the left side of the lower left entry area 1570.
For example, when the inspector opens the main board case 200z, the inspector writes the name of the inspector in the entry area 1570 on the left, and writes the date of opening the main board case 200z in the entry area 1570 on the right. . Note that the inspector may write in the entry area 1570 the year, month, and day when it was confirmed whether or not the main control board 50 was tampered with.

The seal portion 1560 includes a viewing portion 1574 for viewing the electronic component 595. The viewing portion 1574 is provided between the plurality of regions 1575. The viewing portion 1574 has light transparency. In this embodiment, the peeking portion 1574 is formed by an unprinted portion of the seal portion 1560 and is transparent. In this embodiment, a viewing section 1574 extending in the left-right direction is provided between three rows of entry areas 1570 in the vertical direction. Furthermore, a viewing section 1574 extending in the left-right direction is provided between the code section 1572 and the information display section 1573 arranged left and right, and the two upper writing areas 1570. A viewing portion 1574 extending in the vertical direction is provided between two rows of writing areas 1570 in the left and right direction.

Further, the sticker section 1561 is an information identification section for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of a model name and a manufacturer name is printed as the specific information. In this embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR Aiu GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company" are printed. In this embodiment, the part on which this information is printed is also referred to as a printing part 1563. Further, specific information displayed on the seal portion 1561 is referred to as an identification display 1595. In this embodiment, the identification display 1595 is the model name "CR Aiu GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company".

Further, a seal portion 1562 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502. The seal portion 1562 is pasted to the left side of the identification display 523 "ABCD02" of the integrated main ROM 502. The seal portion 1562 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of a model name and a manufacturer name is printed as the specific information. In this embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR Aiu GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company" are printed on the seal portion 1562 as predetermined information. Further, specific information displayed on the seal portion 1562 is referred to as an identification display 1596. In this embodiment, the identification display 1595 is the model name "CR Aiu GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company".

Further, the seal portion 1561 and the seal portion 1562 are displayed including at least the same identification marks 1595 and 1596. In this embodiment, the species name "CR Aiu GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company" in the identification displays 1595 and 1596 are all the same, but it is only necessary that some of them are the same.
A QR code (registered trademark) indicating information specified by the identification display 1596 may be displayed on the seal portion 1562.
Although the identification marks 1595 and 1596 are attached to the main board case 200z and the integrated main ROM 502, they may be attached to other members. For example, the main control board 50 may include the same identification display as the identification displays 1595 and 1596.

As described above, in this embodiment, the seal portions 542, 1560, and 1561 are disposed straddling at least a portion of the plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223). By checking the positional relationship with the component 595, the inspector can determine whether or not the main control board 50 has been tampered with. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, allowing players to play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
Further, since an area 1575 is provided, the inspector should write the inspector's name and the date of opening the main board case 200z in the area 1575 (more specifically, the entry area 1570). Can be done. The inspector can also write in area 1575 the date on which it was confirmed whether or not fraud was committed on the main control board 50. Further, since the viewing portion 1574 is provided between the regions 1575, the region 1575 is more conspicuous than when only the region 1575 is provided. Therefore, it becomes easier for the examiner to confirm the characters written in the area 1575. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, allowing players to play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Furthermore, since the viewing section 1574 is provided, the inspector can check the electronic component 595 through the viewing section 1574. Therefore, compared to the case where the viewing section 1574 is not provided, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not fraud has been performed on the electronic component 595. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
Further, the code section 1572 is provided at a position that does not overlap with the integrated main ROM 502. Therefore, the inspector can easily check the integrated main ROM 502. Therefore, the inspector can check the integrated main ROM 502 and easily determine whether or not fraud is being committed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Further, the code section 1572 is linked with information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50, which is stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1. Thereby, the inspector can easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 using the code section 1572. Therefore, the inspector can check the information on the delivery destination and easily determine whether or not a fraud has been committed in which the main control board 50 from a different delivery destination has been installed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Further, a sticker portion 1562 is pasted on the integrated main ROM 502, and predetermined information is displayed on the sticker portion 1562. Therefore, by checking the seal portion 1562, the inspector can easily confirm whether the integrated main ROM 502 has been illegally replaced. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
Further, since at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name is printed on the seal portion 1561, the inspector can easily grasp at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name. Therefore, the inspector can confirm at least one of the model name and manufacturer name and easily determine whether or not fraud is being committed. Therefore, players can play games with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Note that the shape of the integrated main ROM 502 is not limited. As shown in FIG. 225, the integrated main ROM 502 in the above embodiment has a plate-shaped main body portion 580 extending vertically and horizontally. However, the main body portion 580 may extend in the front, rear, right and left directions. In this case, the first signal pin may extend forward and be electrically connected to the main control board 50. Furthermore, when the main body section 580 extends in the front, rear, left, and right directions, the predetermined information displayed on the seal section 1591 may be displayed on the upper surface or the lower surface of the main body section 580.
Further, the various information displayed on the seal portions 542, 1560, and 1561 may be displayed at an angle that allows the installation location of the integrated main ROM 502 to be visually recognized.
For example, FIG. 234 is a diagram of the seal portion 1561 and the integrated main ROM 502 viewed diagonally from above. In FIG. 234, illustration of members other than the seal portion 1561 and the integrated main ROM 502 is omitted. In this case, the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 overlaps with the installation location of the integrated main ROM 502. That is, FIG. 234 is a diagram viewed from an angle where the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 makes it difficult to visually recognize the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502. However, as shown in FIG. 233, when viewed from the rear side, the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502 can be visually recognized. That is, FIG. 233 is a diagram viewed from an angle that allows the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 to visually confirm the mounting location of the integrated main ROM 502. In this way, the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 is displayed at an angle that allows the installation location of the integrated main ROM 502 to be visually recognized. Although the description has been made using the seal portion 1561 as an example, it is necessary to make sure that the various information displayed on the other seal portions 542 and 1560 (for example, the information on the identification display 523) has an angle that allows the installation location of the integrated main ROM 502 to be visually recognized. It should be displayed in .

<Substrate structure of main control board>
The configuration (layout) of the main control board accommodated in the main board case of this embodiment is not limited to that described above.
FIG. 235 is a diagram for explaining another configuration of the main control board according to this embodiment, and FIG. 235(a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the component side (surface) of the main control board. (b) is a diagram showing the configuration of the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board.
Further, FIG. 236 is a diagram showing the configuration of a printed circuit board used for the main control board, FIG. 236(a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the component side (surface) of the printed circuit board, and FIG. 236(b) , is a diagram showing the configuration of the solder side (back side) of the printed circuit board.

As shown in FIGS. 236(a) and 236(b), the main control board 50 uses a printed wiring board 701 in which wiring patterns are formed on both sides of the printed circuit board.
In the printed wiring board 701, as a mounting method for mounting electronic components, a single-sided mounting method is adopted in which various electronic components and connectors are mounted only on the component side 701a of the printed wiring board 701.
Furthermore, on the printed wiring board 701, various electronic components such as an insertion-mount type (through-hole mounting type) resistor R, capacitor C, transistor Tr, IC, etc., and a connector CN are mounted in the through-holes (component insertion holes) formed on the board. An insertion mounting method is adopted.
For this reason, as shown in FIG. 236, a printed wiring board 701 is provided with through holes (component insertion holes) 702 for inserting leads of various electronic components. In this case, a connection electrode (connection land) 703 is provided around the through hole 702 on the solder surface 701b side of the printed wiring board 701.

The connection electrode 703 is an electrode for connecting the electronic component lead inserted into the through hole 702 from the component surface 701a side of the printed wiring board 701 by, for example, soldering.When the electronic component lead is connected by soldering, the electronic component The component and the wiring pattern on the board are electrically connected, and the electronic component is mechanically held.
That is, the main control board 50 is constituted by a printed wiring board 701 having a through hole 702 into which a lead of an insertion-mount type electronic component can be inserted.

237 is a diagram showing the main board case of this embodiment when the main control board shown in FIGS. 235 and 236 is housed, (a) shows a perspective view of the assembly, and (b) shows the assembly. shows a front view. Moreover, FIG. 238 is an exploded perspective view of the main board case including the pedestal.
A seal portion 1560 and a seal portion 1561 are attached to the main board case shown in FIGS. 237 and 238.
Further, as in FIGS. 222 to 234, identification marks 520 are attached to the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240.
The identification display 520 is a display that includes information regarding the gaming machine 1. The identification display 520 provided on the control board 50 is referred to as an identification display 521, and the identification display 520 provided on the integrated main ROM 502 is referred to as an identification display 522. The identification display 520 provided on the upper case piece 220 is referred to as an identification display 523, and the identification display 520 provided on the lower case piece 210 is referred to as an identification display 524. The identification display 520 provided on the cap 240 is referred to as an identification display 525.

The identification display 521 is displayed on the upper part of the back surface of the main control board 50 by silk printing. The identification display 521 is an information identification section for displaying specific information. The identification display 522 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502 by a stamp. The identification display 522 is an information identification section for displaying specific information.
Identification marks 523, 524, and 525 attached to the main board case 200z are information identification parts for displaying specific information.
The position display section 541 is, for example, a recess formed in the inner surface 532 of the upper case piece 220, and is recessed toward the rear side. An identification display 523 is attached to the position display section 541 by a seal section 542. Note that the identification display 523 is printed on the rear side of the seal portion 542.
The identification mark 524 is formed on the upper right side of the front surface of the lower case piece 210 by stamping with a mold for manufacturing the lower case piece 210 (see FIG. 227).
The identification mark 525 is formed on the back surface of the cap 240 by marking with a mold for manufacturing the cap 240.
Note that in FIGS. 237 and 238, members having the same configuration as those in the above embodiment (particularly, FIGS. 222 to 234) are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
The seal portion 1560 is attached to a position display portion 561 provided at the lower part of the left side in the left-right direction of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z. The seal portion 1561 is attached to a position display portion 561 provided at the upper right portion of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z.
The seal portions 1560 and 1561 are both made of a light-transmitting material, and in this embodiment, as an example, it is assumed that the seal portions 1560 and 1561 are transparent. Seal portions 1560 and 1561 are each placed across a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223). Note that in FIG. 237, illustrations of various electronic components such as a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223) located in front of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 are omitted.
In this example, a seal body (base portion) 1560A of the seal portion 1560 is provided with a watermark to prevent forgery.
A "watermark" is a display that looks different depending on the viewing angle, and various types of watermarks can be applied, such as those using holograms and those that look different depending on the physical shape. . In general, a seal with a watermark has lower translucency in the base portion, which is the seal main body, than one without a watermark, so visibility through the seal is lower.

A printing section 1571 is printed on the seal section 1560. The printing section 1571 includes a plurality of areas 1575. The printing portion 1571 is colored, and in this embodiment has a white base, for example. The multiple areas 1575 include a code section 1572, an information display section 1573, and an entry area 1570. The seal section 1560 is provided so that the printing section 1571, the code section 1572, the information display section 1573, and the writing area 1570 do not overlap with the integrated main ROM 502.

That is, the seal portion 1560 (opener display sticker) includes a writing area 1570 for writing the person who opened the main board case 200z and the date of opening.
Seal portion 1560 is made of a transparent material. For example, a total of six entry areas 1570, three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction, are formed in a black frame with a heading such as "Main Board Management Number." Therefore, the seal portion 1560 is a seal for managing the main board.
The writing area 1570 is a white base formed on a transparent material on which writing can be done with a pen or the like.
Above the entry area 1570, headings such as "Opened by" and "Date opened" are printed in black, and on the left side of each entry area, a circled number indicating the number of the entry area is printed.
The transparent material is exposed except for each print and writing area 1570 (white base), and the electronic components on the main control board 50 can be confirmed through the transparent material.
The seal portion 1560 is attached to a position where the seal portion 1562 attached to the integrated main ROM 502 on the main control board 50 is visible from all angles through the transparent material.
The seal portion 1560 is provided so that the three rows of writing areas 1570 do not overlap with the integrated main ROM 502 from any angle.
There are a total of six writing areas 1570 provided in the seal portion 1560, three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction, and three sets of "opener" and "opening date" can be written.

On the other hand, as described above, the main board case 200z has two crimped parts (the crimped fastening holes 291, ie, the closing parts) (the crimped fastening holes 291A and the crimped fastening holes 291B).
In other words, the number of caulking parts (closing parts) provided on the main board case 200z is less than or equal to the number of entry columns for the person who opened the package and the date of opening provided on the seal part 1560 affixed to the main board case 200z. .
By providing more entry fields than the number of openings that can actually be made, it is possible to deal with typos and other errors, and it is possible to respond more flexibly than if the number of crimped parts and the number of entry fields were the same. It is.
In the main control board 50 shown in FIGS. 237 and 238, the ROM 502 includes a plate-shaped main body 580 and a plurality of first signal pins 582, as described above.
However, the integrated main ROM 502 shown in FIGS. 237 and 238 is erected so that its main surface is orthogonal to the board surface of the main control board 50.
A seal portion 1562, which will be described later, is attached to the main surface perpendicular to the substrate surface.

The display contents of the seal portion 1560 will be explained in detail below.
The cord portion 1572 is provided at the upper left portion of the seal portion 1560. Code section 1572 includes predetermined information. The code section 1572 is a section from which information is read by another device, and for example, a QR code (registered trademark), barcode, etc. is printed in black in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area. There is. In this embodiment, as an example, the code section 1572 includes a QR code (registered trademark).

The code section 1572 is associated with, for example, information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50, which is stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as "other device"). For example, a URL (Uniform Resource Locator), which is information included in the code section 1572, is read by a camera installed in a mobile information terminal or the like. The information mobile terminal uses the URL to access other devices via the network. As a result of accessing other devices, the information displayed on the mobile information terminal includes the delivery destination of the main control board 50 (for example, the name of the store where the gaming machine 1 was delivered), and whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been disposed of. Contains information such as. This allows the inspector to easily confirm information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 and information such as whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded.

Information display section 1573 includes various information. The information display section 1573 may include the same information as the identification display 529, for example. In this embodiment, as an example, a character string "EF001" is printed in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area on the information display section 1573. The character string is, for example, the management number of the main control board 50. Using the management number, the inspector can check information such as the delivery destination of the gaming machine 1 and whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been disposed of, based on information linked to the management number held by the manufacturer. Note that the character string in the information display section 1573 may include information corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, model, etc. Further, the rectangular region of the information display section 1573 and the rectangular basin of the code section 1572 are connected in the left-right direction.

For example, a total of six entry areas 1570 are provided, three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction. The writing area 1570 is printed with a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) base. Above the entry area 1570 in the upper left, "Opener" is printed in black. Above the entry area 1570 in the upper right corner, "date opened" is printed in black. A circle 1 is printed on the left side of the upper left entry area 1570. A circle 2 is printed on the left side of the entry area 1570 at the vertical center on the left side. A circle 3 is printed on the left side of the lower left entry area 1570.
For example, when the inspector opens the main board case 200z, the inspector writes the inspector's name in the entry area 1570 on the left, and writes the date of opening the main board case 200z in the entry area 1570 on the right. . Note that the inspector may write in the entry area 1570 the year, month, and date when it was confirmed whether or not the main control board 50 was tampered with.

The seal portion 1560 includes a viewing portion 1574 for viewing the electronic components 595 on the main control board 50. The viewing portion 1574 is provided between the plurality of regions 1575. The viewing portion 1574 has light transparency. In this embodiment, the peeking portion 1574 is formed by an unprinted portion of the seal portion 1560 and is transparent. In this embodiment, a viewing section 1574 extending in the left-right direction is provided between three rows of entry areas 1570 in the vertical direction. Further, a viewing section 1574 extending in the left-right direction is provided between the code section 1572 and the information display section 1573 arranged on the left and right, and the two upper writing areas 1570. A viewing portion 1574 extending in the vertical direction is provided between two rows of writing areas 1570 in the left and right direction.

Further, the sticker section 1561 is an information identification section for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of the model name, manufacturer name, rated voltage, and total capacity is printed as the specific information. In this embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR Aiu GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company" are printed. In this embodiment, the part on which this information is printed is also referred to as a printing part 1563. Further, specific information displayed on the seal portion 1561 is referred to as an identification display 1595. In this embodiment, the identification display 1595 is the model name "CR Aiu GH101" including the model number, the manufacturer name "AA Company", the rated voltage and the total capacity (AC24V±5%, 250VA).
In addition, in the area where the model name is displayed, a base is formed on the transparent material in a conspicuous color such as red or yellow, and the model name is displayed in white letters on the base.

Further, a seal portion 1562 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502. The seal portion 1562 is pasted to the left side of the identification display 523 "ABCD02" of the integrated main ROM 502. The seal portion 1562 is an information identification portion for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of a model name and a manufacturer name is printed as the specific information. In this embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR Aiu GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company" are printed on the seal portion 1562 as predetermined information. Further, specific information displayed on the seal portion 1562 is referred to as an identification display 1596. In this embodiment, the identification display 1595 is the model name "CR Aiu GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company".
A QR code (registered trademark) indicating information specified by the identification display 1596 may be displayed on the seal portion 1562.
Further, the seal portion 1561 and the seal portion 1562 are displayed including at least the same identification marks 1595 and 1596. In this embodiment, the species name "CR Aiu", the model type "GH101", and the manufacturer name "AA Company" in the identification displays 1595 and 1596 are all the same, but it is only necessary that some of them are the same.
Although the identification marks 1595 and 1596 are attached to the main board case 200z and the integrated main ROM 502, they may be attached to other members. For example, the main control board 50 may include and display the same identification display as the identification displays 1595 and 1596.

As described above, in this embodiment, the seal portions 1560 and 1561 are arranged to straddle at least part of the plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223), so for example, the seal portions 1560 and 1561 and the electronic component 595 By checking the positional relationship, the inspector can determine whether or not the main control board 50 has been tampered with. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, allowing players to play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
In addition, since a region 1575 is provided in the seal portion 1560, the inspector can enter the name of the inspector and the date when the main board case 200z was opened in the region 1575 (more specifically, in the entry region 1570). can be filled in. The inspector can also write in area 1575 the date on which it was confirmed whether or not fraud was committed on the main control board 50. Further, since the viewing portion 1574 is provided between the regions 1575, the region 1575 is more conspicuous than when only the region 1575 is provided. Therefore, it becomes easier for the examiner to confirm the characters written in the area 1575. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Further, since the seal portion 1560 is provided with the viewing portion 1574, the inspector can check the electronic component 595 through the viewing portion 1574. Therefore, compared to the case where the viewing section 1574 is not provided, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not fraud has been performed on the electronic component 595. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
Further, the code section 1572 is provided at a position that does not overlap with the integrated main ROM 502. Therefore, the inspector can easily check the integrated main ROM 502. Therefore, the inspector can check the integrated main ROM 502 and easily determine whether or not fraud is being committed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Further, the code section 1572 is linked to information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50, which is stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1. Thereby, the inspector can easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 using the code section 1572. Therefore, the inspector can check the information on the delivery destination and easily determine whether or not a fraud has been committed in which the main control board 50 from a different delivery destination has been installed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
Further, a sticker portion 1562 is pasted on the integrated main ROM 502, and predetermined information is displayed on the sticker portion 1562. Therefore, by checking the seal portion 1562, the inspector can easily confirm whether the integrated main ROM 502 has been illegally replaced. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
Further, since at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name is printed on the seal portion 1561, the inspector can easily grasp at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name. Therefore, the inspector can confirm at least one of the model name and manufacturer name and easily determine whether or not fraud is being committed. Therefore, players can play games with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Note that the shape of the integrated main ROM 502 is not limited. The integrated main ROM 502 in the above embodiment has, as shown in FIG. 225, a plate-shaped main body portion 580 extending vertically and horizontally. However, the main body portion 580 may extend in the front, rear, right and left directions. In this case, the first signal pin may extend forward and be electrically connected to the main control board 50. Furthermore, when the main body section 580 extends in the front, rear, left, and right directions, the predetermined information displayed on the seal section 1591 may be displayed on the upper surface or the lower surface of the main body section 580.
Further, the various information displayed on the seal portions 1560 and 1561 may be displayed at an angle that allows the installation location of the integrated main ROM 502 to be visually recognized.
The main board case 200z, especially the upper case piece 220, does not have a ventilation hole.
The main board case 200z has date marks formed on a lower case piece 210 and an upper case piece 220.
A date mark is a mark for lot management that is added to a case, which is a plastic molded product, during manufacturing (molding).
A feature of this embodiment is that no component is provided near the main ROM at a height that would make the ROM identification seal (ROM seal/seal portion 1562) invisible.

FIGS. 239(a) to 239(d) are schematic diagrams showing the procedure for assembling the cutting member, tamper-proof seal, and cap to the sealing base, focusing on the protruding piece of the upper case piece, and FIG. 239(e) is FIG. 240 is an end view of the protruding piece; FIG. 240 is an exploded perspective view showing a state immediately before the cutting member, tamper-proof seal, and cap are assembled to the sealing base portion 310; FIG. FIG. 242 is a perspective view showing a state in which the seal is adhered, FIG. 242 is a perspective view showing a state in which a cap is attached to the tamper-proof seal, and FIG. 243 is a perspective view showing a state in which the cap is removed and the tamper-proof seal is broken. It is a perspective view, and FIGS. 244(a) and 244(b) are a surface view and a partially enlarged view of an example of a tamper-proof seal.
The cutting member 230 shown in FIGS. 239 to 243 has a partially different configuration from that shown in FIG. 226, but is the same in that it breaks the tamper-proof seal when the cap is removed. The same applies.

<Tampering prohibited seal>
A tamper-proof seal 250 shown in FIG. 244(a) is used as a means for sealing the main board case 200z having the above configuration. The tamper-proof sticker 250 is made of a paper material that can be cut and torn relatively easily, has security (forgery prevention) printing etc. on the front surface, and has an adhesive layer formed on the back surface. There is.
Band-shaped portions 251 arranged along each of the upper and lower sides of the surface are identification areas (fine pattern areas) 251 for authenticity identification (for counterfeit prevention) composed of minute components including random micro characters. It is. As security means other than the identification area 251, a hologram 252, a QR code (registered trademark) 253, etc. are provided.
Random micro-characters are a technique for inserting extremely small characters into lines or parts of designs. Since microtext cannot be reproduced with low-resolution copiers, it serves as a means of confirming the authenticity of copies.

FIG. 244(b) is a 10 times enlarged view of a part of the identification area (fine pattern area) provided on the tamper-proof sticker 250, and the "tamper-proof" mark is shown in the pattern consisting of minute circles or dots. Hidden text such as "Security" is written on it.
By adhering this tamper-proof seal 250 across the two case pieces constituting the main board case, the identification area 251 will definitely be broken if unauthorized opening is performed. Even if the fraudster replaces the ROM, closes the case body and cover body again, connects the broken parts of the tamper-proof seal 250, and restores the appearance to its original state, the identification area (other parts) cannot be removed. By using a magnifying glass, it is possible to reliably confirm the existence of broken parts and repaired parts.

Minute characters such as random micro characters cannot be distinguished (read, recognized, identified) with the naked eye, so they can only be distinguished by magnifying them 5 to 10 times using a magnifying glass such as a loupe. For example, if individual characters are minute in size, 1/10 to 1/5 mm, it is difficult to distinguish and decipher them with the naked eye, but by magnifying them 10 times or 5 times, normal eyesight can be improved. It is possible to enlarge the image to a size of about 1 mm that can be distinguished and read by the person who is using it.
Note that the identification area 251 of the tamper-proof seal 250 of the present invention is not limited to random micro characters, and at least a portion thereof is difficult to distinguish (read, recognize, identify) with the naked eye of an observer with normal eyesight. It suffices if it includes extremely small (fine) characters, figures, symbols, and/or patterns. By enlarging these minute characters, etc., the observer can distinguish, read, and determine authenticity.
Note that "difficult to distinguish with the naked eye" broadly includes cases where discrimination with the naked eye is difficult but not impossible, and cases where discrimination with the naked eye is impossible.
It goes without saying that the arrangement of the identification area 251 on the tamper-proof seal, its shape, etc. can be changed in various ways.

<Structure of main parts of main board case>
Next, the main structure of the main board case will be explained, focusing on the part to which the tamper-proof seal is attached.
That is, when the main board case 200z is in the closed state as shown in FIGS. 222 and 223, the main board case 200z is in a closed state as shown in FIG. By adhering the tamper-proof seal 250 to the tamper-proof seal 250, both case pieces cannot be opened without damaging the tamper-proof seal 250. That is, sealing portions 212 and 222 are provided at one longitudinal edge of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220, respectively, and both sealing portions 212 and 222 constitute a sealing base portion 310. . That is, by providing both the sealing parts 212 and 222 at substantially the same position on one longitudinal edge of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220, both the sealing parts 212 and 222 are provided when both the case pieces are closed. When aligned, a sealing base portion (tamperproof seal adhesive portion) is formed.

In this embodiment, the tamper-proof seal adhesive part (seal adhesive part) A is composed of both sealing parts 212 and 222, and the cutting member 230 is supported while being sandwiched between both protruding pieces. The cutting member 230 may be supported (temporarily locked) on the outer surface of one of the protruding pieces, or the tamper-proof seal adhesive part A may be composed of only one of the protruding pieces, and the cutting member 230 may be cut by one side of the protruding piece. The cutting member may also be supported.
In other words, the cutting member 230 may be configured to be held by at least one of the case pieces (protruding pieces) at the tamper-evident seal adhesive portion.
The substantially plate-shaped cutting member 230 is sandwiched between the sealing portions 212 and 222 (between the edges) of the two lower case pieces 210 and the upper case piece 220 in the closed state.
The tip surface of the tamper-proof seal adhesive part A (the tip surfaces of both sealing parts 212 and 222) constitutes the first adhesive surface A1, and the outer surfaces of the sealing parts 212 and 222 perpendicular to the first adhesive surface A1 constitute the first adhesive surface A1. A second adhesive surface A2 is formed (FIGS. 239 and 240).
An accommodation space S for accommodating the cutting member 230 is provided inside the first adhesive surface A1 and the second adhesive surface A2 (FIG. 240).

Further, a first opening O1 that communicates with the accommodation space S is formed on the first adhesive surface A1, and a second opening O2 (guide slit 224) that communicates with the accommodation space S is formed on the second adhesive surface A2. ing. In this embodiment, two second openings O2 are formed in the upper case piece 220, and one second opening O2 is formed in the lower case piece 210.
The tamper-proof seal 250 includes a first seal adhesive part 250A that covers all or part of the first opening O1 and is adhered to the first adhesive surface A1, and a second seal adhesive part that covers a part of the second opening O2 and is adhered to the first adhesive surface A1. and a second seal adhesive portion 250B that is adhered to surface A2 (FIG. 244).

The cap 240 is detachably attached to the outer surface of the sealing base 310 so as to surround (conceal) the tamper-proof seal 250 adhered to the outer surface of the sealing base 310 . The cap 240 is sandwiched between a cap body 241 that surrounds the outer surfaces of both protruding pieces (sealing base part 310) including a tamper-proof seal 250, and sealing parts 212 and 222 when attached to the sealing base part 310. It includes a locking part 242 (Fig. 225) that elastically engages with the cutting member 230 (locked part 236) in the closed state, so that the cutting member can be removed integrally when the cap is removed from the sealing base. By doing so, the tamper-proof seal is broken and removed.
A tubular caulking member 203A (third screw stopper 93) is provided on one side of the cap 240, and is configured to cover both sealing portions 212, 222 and the tamper-proof seal as shown in FIGS. When the cap is attached, the center hole of the caulking member 203A is in communication with the hole of the caulking member 203B ((first screw piece 91, second screw piece 92) provided at corresponding positions on the upper and lower case pieces. In this state, the cap is fixed to the upper and lower case pieces by inserting a crimping pin 94 (FIG. 225) and crimping it.
In the illustrated embodiment, an example is shown in which the cap 240 surrounds the entire sealing portions 212 and 222 including the tamper-proof seal, but the cap may be sealed so as to surround at least a portion of the tamper-proof seal. Any configuration is sufficient as long as it is attached to at least a portion of the base portion (tamperproof seal adhesive portion = cap attachment portion) 310 .

The cutting member 230 has a blade portion (first broken piece) 231 provided at the tip edge in the direction in which the cap 240 is removed from the sealing base portion 310 (B) (FIG. 226), and a blade portion (first broken piece) 231 that intersects with the direction in which the cap 240 is removed from the sealing base portion 310 (B) (FIG. 226). A broken piece (second broken piece) 233 protruding in the (orthogonal) direction. One broken piece 233 is provided on the surface of the lower case piece on the sealing part 212 side, and two pieces are provided on the surface of the upper case piece on the protrusion piece 222 side.
One second opening O2 (guide slit 224) for receiving one broken piece 233 is formed in the sealing part 212 of the lower case piece, and two broken pieces 233 are formed in the protruding piece 222 on the upper case side. Two second openings O2 (guide slits 224) are formed to respectively receive the second openings O2.
By making the cutting member 230 a separate member from each case piece, the shape of the cutting means such as the blade portion 231 can be formed and processed independently and arbitrarily, and the configuration that causes the tamper-proof seal to break significantly is avoided. It becomes possible.

<Procedure for assembling each part and procedure for breaking the tamper-proof seal>
Next, referring to FIG. 241, a procedure for assembling the cutting member 230, the tamper-proof seal 250, and the cap 240 to the sealing base 310 will be explained, focusing on the protruding piece 222 of the upper case piece.
In this embodiment, the cutting member 230 is configured to be temporarily locked to the inner surface of the protruding piece 222 of the upper case piece. A pair of locking portions (temporary locking portions) 223 are provided on the inner surface (cutting member support portion) of the protruding piece 222, and these locking portions 223 are attached in the direction of the arrow in FIG. 241(a). The cutting member 230 is configured to engage with and press the inner edges of two recesses (temporary locking portions) 232 provided at the rear end edge of the cutting member 230. Further, a broken piece 233 is protruded from the surface side of the cutting member, and a guide slit 224 is protruded to allow the broken piece 233 to pass when the cutting member is attached to the inner surface of the protruding piece 222 from the direction of the arrow. It is formed in piece 222. Therefore, when the cutting member 230 is moved in the direction of the arrow as shown in FIG. It can be installed at the same time. At this time, since the broken piece 233 moves while fitting into the guide slit 224, it does not become an obstacle during installation.

By providing the broken pieces 233 on both sides of the cutting member 230 and providing the guide slits 224 in both sealing parts 212 and 222 as in this embodiment, the cutting member together with the cap can be separated from the tamper-proof seal adhesive part A. At this time, the tamper-proof seals adhered to the outer surfaces of both sealing parts 212 and 222 can be simultaneously broken.
Although this embodiment shows a configuration example in which the cutting member support portion is provided on the protruding piece 222 on one side of the upper case, it is also possible to provide the cutting portion support portion on the inner surface of the sealing portion 212 on one side of the lower case. be.

Further, the cutting member 230 is provided with elastically deformable claw-shaped locked portions 236 on both ends in the longitudinal direction (direction perpendicular to the mounting direction). The locked portion 236 is exposed to the outside through the gap between the protruding pieces when the cutting member 230 is sandwiched between the sealing portions 212 and 222 (see FIGS. 241(b) and 241(c)). It is in. This allows engagement between the cap and the cutting member when the cap is attached to the sealing base. Since the leading edge of the cutting member is also exposed through the gap between the two protruding pieces, when the cutting member is removed from the sealing base together with the cap, it is possible to remove the cutting member smoothly and to break the tamper-proof seal.
After attaching the cutting member 230 to the protruding piece 222 in this manner, the lower case piece 210 is attached to the upper case piece 220, and the tamper-proof seal 250 is glued across both sealing parts 212 and 222. do.

Next, FIG. 241(b) shows the state in which the tamper-proof seal is adhered to the sealing base with the lower case piece 210 omitted, and FIG. 241(c) and FIG. 241 show the state in which the cap 240 is attached. It shows.
The cap 240 has a protruding locking part 242 that can engage with the locked part 236 of the cutting member 230 on the inside of the cap body 241, and the cap is attached to the sealing base as shown in FIG. 241(c). When mounted, each locking portion 242 elastically engages with the tip of each locked portion 236 and is temporarily integrated.
In this state, when the cap 240 is removed from the sealing base as shown in FIGS. 241(d) and 243, the cutting member 230 integrated with the cap also separates, so the cutting member It is pulled out from the gap between the stop parts 212 and 222. At this time, the blade portion 231 of the cutting member and the broken piece 233 break the tamper-proof seal. That is, the blade part 231 is configured to be able to be detached from the gap (first opening O1) between the two sealing parts 212 and 222 to the outside (outside), while the broken piece 233 is provided on the protruding piece 222. Since the guide slit 224 is configured to be detachable from inside the guide slit 224 to the outside (outside), each part of the tamper-proof seal located in the movement path of the blade part 231 and the broken piece 233 can be broken.
Each broken piece (second broken piece) 233 protrudes from a portion of each second opening O2 that is not covered by the tamper-proof seal.

In the configuration example of the tamper-proof seal shown in FIG. 244, when the tamper-proof seal 250 is adhered to both protruding pieces, the identification area 251 consisting of random micro characters is a broken piece (second broken piece) provided on the cutting member 230. It is on the travel route of 233. Therefore, when the cutting member is removed together with the cap, the identification area 251 is broken (destroyed) by the broken pieces 233.
When the identification area 251 is provided at a position corresponding to the blade part 231 on the tip edge of the cutting member, the identification part will be broken by the blade part 231 (FIG. 243).
In this embodiment, a tamper-proof seal 250 is adhered to the outer surface of the sealing base part 310 of the main board case so as to span the sealing parts 212 and 222 of both case pieces, and a cap is attached to the outer surface of the sealing base part. At this time, the cutting member 230 held between the sealing parts 212 and 222 and the cap 240 are engaged and integrated. Therefore, before opening the main board case, ie, in the process of separating the cap 240 from the sealing base, the cutting member 230 performs an operation of breaking the tamper-proof seal 250.

Since the cutting member 230 has a jagged blade portion 231 at its tip (the tip in the detachment direction), when the cutting member 230 protrudes to the outside from the position where the sealing portions 212 and 222 meet, the tamper-proof seal is removed. The first seal adhesive portion 250A is configured to break. Therefore, it is possible to know that the main board case has been illegally opened.
Further, the cutting member 230 includes a broken piece 233 that protrudes in a direction (toward one side of the upper case) intersecting the direction in which the cap 240 is removed from the sealing base 310, and is broken when the cutting member 230 is attached to the protruding piece 222. The fragment 233 is in a state of protruding from the guide slit 224 provided in the protruding piece 222 of the upper case piece 220 onto the surface of the protruding piece 222 . If a tamper-proof seal is adhered to the surface of the protruding piece 222 in this state, the torn piece 233 will constantly be in contact with the tamper-proof seal 250, resulting in an interference state. Therefore, when the cutting member moves in the removal direction by removing the cap 240 from the sealing base, the broken pieces move along the guide slit 224 and break the tamper-proof seal in a straight line. can. The tamper-proof seal part (second seal adhesive part 250B) that is torn by this broken piece 233 corresponds to the surface of the protruding piece 222, so it can be seen directly from the back side of the gaming machine, preventing fraudulent activity. Traces of the process can be easily found from this fracture.
When the main board case is opened by rotating it relative to the pedestal as shown in FIG. 223, it becomes possible to visually confirm the opposite side of the cap 240.

In this embodiment, assuming that the tamper-proof seal 250 is bonded across both sealing parts 212 and 222, the cutting member 230 includes a blade part 231 for cutting the identification area 251 irrecoverably; Although the broken pieces 233 are provided in order to reliably leave visible evidence of breakage, this is only an example, and only the blade portion 231 at the tip or only the broken pieces 233 on the other side may be provided. In particular, if the tamper-proof seal 250 is not glued across both sealing parts 212 and 222 but only on the outer surface of one of the protruding pieces, for example, the protruding piece 222 on the upper case side, the cutting member 230 will not break. It is sufficient to provide the fragment 233. In other words, according to the present invention, it is possible to apply the tamper-proof seal to both of the protruding pieces, and to adhere it to only one protruding piece.

In the example shown in FIG. 243, when the main board case 200z is opened, the tamper-proof seal (tamper-proof seal) 250 is broken in such a way that the QR code (registered trademark) 253 cannot be read.
However, it is desirable to configure the blade portion 231 so that the tamper-proof seal 250 is broken while the QR code (registered trademark) 253 is readable.

<Payout control board protection case>
Next, the configuration of the payout control board protective case in the gaming machine of this embodiment will be explained.
FIG. 245 is a diagram showing a component layout of the payout control board 60z in this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 245, the payout control board 60z includes a one-chip microcomputer (IC chip) 601 that integrates (integrates) a payout CPU 60az, a payout ROM 60bz, and a payout RAM 60cz, other electronic components 605 such as capacitors and ICs, and an error control board 60z. and an error indicator 610 for displaying information.
Error indicator 610 may be configured with one 7-segment liquid crystal or 7-segment LED. A 7-segment liquid crystal is a liquid crystal display device made up of seven segments that can be turned on and off individually to represent one digit.
A 7-segment LED is an LED display device made up of seven segments that can be turned on and off individually to represent one digit.
Note that the error indicator 610 may further include a segment that displays dots in addition to the seven segments that display numbers, similar to the performance display monitor 600 and setting display monitor 650 described below.
A 7-segment liquid crystal or a 7-segment LED having segments for displaying dots can be used not only for the error display 610 but also for the performance display monitor 600 and setting display monitor 650 described below.
Although a detailed explanation will be omitted, in the printed wiring board 701 of the payout control board 60z, as with the main control board 50, various electronic components and connectors are mounted only on the component side of the printed wiring board as a mounting method for mounting electronic components. A single-sided mounting method is used.

FIG. 246 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the payout control board protection case, in which (a) is a perspective view, (b) is a side view, and (c) is a front view.
247 and 248 are exploded perspective views of the payout control board case.
The payout control board protection case (hereinafter referred to as payout board case 400) is composed of an upper case piece 410 and a lower case piece 420.
As in the case of the main board case 200z described above, the upper case piece 410 and the lower case piece 420 each include control board storage parts 411 and 421 that accommodate the payout control board 60z.
Each of the control board storage parts 411 and 421 has a substantially rectangular plate part and a flange part that protrudes from the peripheral edge of these plate parts and surrounds one side of each plate part. It is formed into a shape that has.

Among the flange portions constituting the control board storage portion 411 of the upper case piece 410, a hooking piece 412 formed in an L-shape is provided on a portion protruding along two long sides of the upper case piece 410. are formed, five each.
On the other hand, of the flange portions constituting the control board storage portion 421 of the lower case piece 420, the portions that protrude along the two long sides of the lower case piece are formed in a double wall shape. An insertion groove 422 into which the hook piece 412 of the upper case piece 410 can be inserted is provided between the walls forming the double wall. Furthermore, a hook piece 423 is formed in each insertion groove portion 422 .

When the upper case piece 410 and the lower case piece 420 are combined, the hook piece 412 of the upper case piece 410 is inserted into the insertion groove 422 of the lower case piece 420.
Then, the upper case piece 410 is slid in the direction of arrow α in FIG. 247 along the left-right direction with respect to the lower case piece 420. Then, the hook piece 412 engages with the hook piece 423, so that the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are assembled together so that they will not come apart unless they move in the opposite direction to the arrow α.
When combined in this way, the upper case piece 410 and the lower case piece 420 form a box-shaped inner package part that is shielded from the outside by the control board storage parts 411 and 421, and the inner package part has a dispensing control board 60z. is in a stored state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the payout control board 60z, the integrated payout ROM 601, etc. will be illegally replaced.
Furthermore, a protective cover is disposed at the lower part of the upper case piece 410 to cover a connecting portion between an internal connector and an external connector provided on the internal dispensing control board 60z.

In this embodiment, the lower case piece 420 and the upper case 410 are fixed by a caulking member with the dispensing control board 60z sandwiched between them.
A caulking fastening section 450 using a caulking member is arranged at a suitable position along the edge of the payout board case 400, and by driving the caulking member into the caulking fastening section 450, the lower case piece 420 and the upper case piece 410 are separated. Locked in closed position. By removing (breaking) the caulking member driven into the fastening hole 451, the lower case piece 420 and the upper case piece 410 become openable, closable, and detachable.
In the payout board case 400 of this embodiment, two caulking fastening parts are provided (caulking fastening parts 450A and 450B).

An upper fastening piece 455 is provided at a suitable location along the edge of the upper case piece 410, and a through fastening hole 456 is provided in the upper fastening piece 455.
A lower fastening piece 455 is provided in a protruding manner at a location corresponding to the upper fastening piece 455 on the inner surface of the lower case piece 420 . A fastening hole 457 is formed in the lower fastening piece 455 .
When the lower case piece 420 and the upper case piece 410 are engaged using the hook pieces 412, 423 and the insertion groove 422, the through fastening hole 456 of the upper fastening piece 455 and the fastening hole 457 of the lower fastening piece are connected. communicate. By driving a caulking member into this communicating fastening hole (caulking fastening hole), it becomes impossible to release the engagement between the lower case piece 420 and the upper case piece 410.
Therefore, it is impossible to access the payout control board 60z housed inside the payout board case.
Note that only one caulking fastening portion is used for one fastening of the lower case piece 420 and the upper case piece 410. After the caulking member is removed and the fastening is performed (after opening the delivery board case 400), when the fastening is to be performed again, the caulking member is driven into the other remaining caulking hole to perform the fastening. That is, the payout board case of this embodiment can be opened up to two times.
At the lower left side and lower center of the front surface of the upper case piece 410, a position display section similar to that of the main board case 200z is provided.
A seal section (error display sticker) 1565 indicating the content of the error display is pasted on the lower left position display section, and the person who opened the payout board case and the opening date and time are written on the lower center position display section. A seal portion (opener display sticker) 1566 is attached.

As shown in FIG. 247, the position display section and seal sections 1565 and 1566 are formed and attached to the outer surface of the upper case piece 410, but these are formed and attached to the inner surface of the upper case piece 410. Good too.
This is similar to the seal portions 542, 1560, and 1561 of the main board case 200z.
The position display section may also be provided on the outer surface side of the upper case piece 410, as described with reference to FIGS. 228 to 230 for the main board case 200z, or may be provided on the inner surface side.

In addition, in this embodiment, the position display part 541, which is a pasting position mark indicating the position where the seal part is pasted, can take the following form.
In other words, the position display section 541 is a mark surrounding the entire circumference of the seal sections 1565, 1566 on the same surface as the upper case surface on which the seal sections 1565, 1566 are attached, or on the back surface, or on the upper case surface on which the seal sections 1565, 1566 are attached. This is the mark on the L-shaped side on the same side or on the back side.
The position display section 541 is a linear convex section provided so as to surround the seal sections 1565 and 1566.
The position display section 541 is a linear recess provided so as to surround the seal sections 1565, 1566 on the same surface as the seal sections 1565, 1566.
The position display portion 541 is a linear convex portion provided on the back surface of the seal portions 1565, 1566 so as to surround the seal portions 1565, 1566.
The position display portion 541 is a linear recess provided on the back surface of the seal portions 1565, 1566 so as to surround the seal portions 1565, 1566.

The position display section 541 is an L-shaped linear convex provided on the same surface as the seal sections 1565, 1566 so as to surround a predetermined corner of the seal sections 1565, 1566.
The position display section 541 is an L-shaped linear recess provided on the same surface as the seal sections 1565, 1566 so as to surround a predetermined corner of the seal sections 1565, 1566.
The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear protrusion or recess provided on the back surface of the seal portions 1565 and 1566 so as to surround a predetermined corner.
The position display portion 541 is a position mark that is provided so as to surround the seal portions 1565 and 1566 and is neither a convex portion nor a concave portion.

In FIGS. 246 to 248, the position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear convex portion provided on the same surface as the seal (on the front side of the upper case piece), but is not limited to this, and may be any of the above. It can take various forms.
The seal portion 1565 is attached near the error indicator 610 included in the payout control board 60z housed in the payout board case 400, and indicates the content of the error display displayed on the error indicator 610.
The error number indicated on the seal portion 1565 is displayed on the error indicator 610.
When a plurality of errors occur, only the most serious error among the errors occurring is displayed on an error display 610. Alternatively, all the multiple errors that have occurred are sequentially displayed on the error display 610.
Alternatively, a plurality of LEDs each corresponding to an error number may be arranged as the error indicator 610, and an error may be notified by causing the LED corresponding to the error that has occurred to emit light.
Here, for example, corresponding LEDs are arranged vertically next to a plurality of error numbers displayed on the sticker section 1565.
For example, when an "abnormal number of paid pieces error" corresponding to error number 0 occurs, the LED placed next to the error number "0" on the seal part 1565 is lit, and "main control error" corresponding to error number 1 is lit. If a "connection error" occurs, the LED placed next to the error number "1" on the seal portion 1565 is turned on.
The seal portion 1566 is made of a transparent material, and has, for example, an error display number and the content of the error indicated by it printed in white within a frame printed in white.
The transparent material is exposed except for the display of the frame, number, and error details, and the electronic components on the payout control board 60z can be confirmed through the transparent material.
That is, the error indicator 610 allows the transparent material of the seal portion 1566 to be visually recognized. Alternatively, the seal portion 1566 is affixed to the payout board case 400 so as not to overlap the error indicator 610 when viewed from the front. Therefore, the error indicator 610 is always visible.
The seal portion 1565 is attached to a position where the seal portion 1562 affixed to the integrated payout ROM 601 on the payout control board 60z is visible from all angles through the transparent material.

As shown in FIG. 246(c), the following content is written on the seal portion 1565 (error display explanation sticker) in correspondence with the error detected by the main control board and various sensors, for example.
That is,
0 Dispense quantity abnormality error 1 Main control disconnection error 2 Dispatch switch abnormality detection error 1
3 Payout switch abnormality detection error 2
4 Payout case error 5 Main control case error 6 Full tank error 7 Out of ball error 8 Game ball rental device not connected seller 9 Game ball rental device communication error.

In addition, "Plate Full Error", "Counter Case Error", "Counting Switch Error", "Excess Payout Error", "Game Ball Rental Device Not Connected Error", "Game Ball Rental Device Communication Error", "Door Open"Error,""Abnormal winning error 1,""Abnormal winning error 2,""Dischargeerror,""Magnet detection error,""Abnormal prize frequency error," and "Abnormal door opening error" is displayed. may be performed on the error display 610, and the contents of the corresponding error display may be displayed on the sticker section 1565 (error display explanation sticker).
The "plate full error" is an error that occurs when the tray becomes full due to the payout of prize balls or when the tray becomes full due to ball lending.
A "counter case error" is an error that occurs when a ball gets stuck between the tank and the dispensing mechanism.
"Counting switch error" is an error that occurs when the wiring connecting the dispensing control board and the dispensing device relay terminal board, or the wiring connecting the dispensing device relay terminal board and parts inside the dispensing mechanism section, is not connected correctly. .

``Excess payout error'' is an error that occurs when paying out more than the requested number.
"Payout command error" is an error that occurs when the signal sent from the main control board to the payout control board is not normal.
The "game ball rental device unconnected error" is an error that occurs because the game ball rental device is not connected to the gaming machine.
"Game ball lending device communication error" is an error that occurs when the payout control board detects that the signal from the game ball lending device is fraudulent.
The "door opening error" is an error that occurs because the upper decoration is opened.
The "switch disconnection error" is an error that occurs when a disconnection or poor connection of a switch on a game board such as a gate or a prize opening is detected.

"Abnormal winning error 1" occurs when five or more winnings are detected in the right starting port between the end of the operation of the normal electric accessory and the start of the next operation, or after the power is turned on and before the start of the operation of the normal electric accessory. Since one or more winnings were detected during the period, a winning in the upper right grand prize opening was detected when the upper right special electric accessory was not activated, so a winning in the lower right large prize opening was detected when the lower right special electric accessory was not activated. This is an error that occurs due to detection.
"Abnormal winning error 2" is an error that occurs because a game ball is detected in the switch in each winning hole for an extremely long time.
The "discharge error" is an error that occurs when the error between the number of game balls that passed through the switch in each winning hole and the number of game balls that passed through the out switch exceeds 49.
"Magnet detection error" is an error that occurs when a magnetic force is detected near the left windmill, near the upper left winning hole, near the middle left winning hole, near the lower left winning hole, near the middle starting hole, or at the lower right corner of the game board.
"Winning frequency abnormal error" occurs when an abnormal number of winnings is detected in any of the middle starting hole, lower left winning hole, middle left winning hole, upper left winning hole, or right winning hole when a certain number of balls have been fired. This is an error that occurs.
The "abnormal door opening error" is an error that occurs when the inner frame is opened when the upper decoration is closed.

As shown in FIG. 246(c), the seal portion 1566 (opener display sticker/dispensing board management seal) has an entry area 1567 for entering the person who opened the dispensing board case 400 and the date of opening. Be prepared.
The seal portion 1566 is made of a transparent material and is not processed with watermarks or the like. For example, three entry areas 1567 are formed in a black frame with a heading such as "Payout Control Board."
The writing area 1567 is a white base formed on a transparent material on which writing can be done with a pen or the like.
Above the entry area 1567, headings such as "Opened by" and "Date opened" are printed in black, and on the left side of each entry area, a circled number indicating the number of the entry area is printed.
The transparent material is exposed except for each print and writing area 1567 (white base), and the electronic components on the dispensing control board 60z can be confirmed through the transparent material.
The seal portion 1566 is attached to a position where the seal portion 1562 affixed to the integrated payout ROM 601 on the payout control board 60z is visible from all angles through the transparent material.
The seal portion 1566 is provided so that the three entry areas 1567 do not overlap with the integrated payout ROM 601 from any angle.

In addition, in the seal portion 1566 shown in FIG. 246(c), a writing area 1567 is integrated with columns for writing "opener" and "opening date." On the other hand, similar to the seal section 1560 of the main board case 200z shown in FIG. 233 and FIG. You may also do so. By doing so, it becomes even easier to check the electronic components on the payout control board 60z through the seal portion 1566.

As described above, like the main board case 200z, the payout board case 400 of this embodiment has a caulking part.
The delivery board case 400 has two caulking parts. In contrast, there are three writing areas 1567 provided in the seal portion 1566.
In the dispensing board case 400, the number of caulked parts does not match the number of times that an opener or the like can write on the seal part 1566 (the number of writing areas 1567).
The number of caulking parts provided in the delivery board case 400 is equal to or less than the number of entry columns for the person who opened the package and the date of opening provided on the delivery board management seal (seal part 1566). By providing more entry fields than the number of openings that can actually be made, it is possible to deal with typos and other errors, and it is possible to respond more flexibly than if the number of crimped parts and the number of entry fields were the same. It is.

Particularly, the upper case piece 410 of the payout board case 400 does not have a ventilation hole.
A seal portion 1562 is attached to the payout ROM 60bz (payout chip) 601.
As described above, the sticker section 1562 is an information identification section for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of a model name and a manufacturer name is printed as the specific information. In this embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR Aiu GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company" are printed on the seal portion 1562 as predetermined information. Further, specific information displayed on the seal portion 1562 is referred to as an identification display 1596. In this embodiment, the identification display 1595 is the model name "CR Aiu GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company".
The seal portion 1562 attached to the integrated payout ROM 601 may be the same color as the seal portion 1562 with the same content attached to the main ROM of the main control board 50, or may be a different color.

The payout board case 400 and the main board case 200z differ in the number of times information such as the person who opened the seal can be written in the seal parts 1560 and 1566. Alternatively, the sizes of the writable areas in the seal portions 1560 and 1566 are different.
In the description of FIG. 246, the seal portion 1565 and the seal portion 1566 are different seal portions, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the seal portion 1565 and the seal portion 1566 may be integrated.
That is, one sticker including the contents written on the seal portion 1565 and the seal portion 1566 may be attached.

<Production control board protection case>
Next, the configuration of the production control board protection case in this embodiment will be explained.
First, the substrate structure of the image control board will be explained using FIGS. 249 and 250.
249 is a diagram for explaining the structure of the image control board, FIG. 249(a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the component side (surface) of the image control board, and FIG. 249(b) is a diagram for explaining the structure of the image control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of the solder surface (back surface) of the board.
Further, FIG. 250 is a diagram showing the configuration of a printed circuit board used for an image control board, FIG. 250(a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the component side (surface) of the printed circuit board, and FIG. 250(b) , is a diagram showing the configuration of the solder side (back side) of the printed circuit board.

As shown in FIGS. 249 and 250, a large number of electronic components including a VDP are mounted on the image control board 70z.
The image control board 70z uses a printed wiring board 801 in which wiring patterns are formed on both sides of the printed circuit board.
In addition, in this embodiment, the image control board 70z has been described as an example in which the printed wiring board 801 is used, but this is just an example, and the image control board 70z has wiring on both sides and inner layer surface of the printed board. A multilayer printed wiring board on which a pattern is formed may also be used.
As a mounting method for mounting electronic components on the printed wiring board 801, various surface-mounted electronic components and A surface mount method is used to mount connectors, etc. In other words, the image control board 70z is configured using a surface-mounted printed wiring board 801.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control board 50 is composed of a printed wiring board 701 having through-holes into which leads of insertion-mounted electronic components (hereinafter referred to as "insertion-mounted components") can be inserted. The board other than the main control board 50 is constituted by a printed wiring board 801 having connection electrodes connectable to connection terminals of surface-mounted electronic components (hereinafter referred to as "surface-mounted components").

FIG. 251 is an enlarged view of a part of a printed wiring board used as an image control board.
As shown in FIG. 251, on the printed wiring board 801, land groups 811 and 812 are formed by lands 802 each connected to a connection terminal of one surface mount component.
For example, if the surface mount component is an IC850 shown in FIG. 242(a), a land group 811 for the IC850 is formed on the printed wiring board 801 by a plurality of lands 802 each connected to a plurality of lead terminals of the IC850. Ru. Note that in this specification, a plurality of lands 802 each connected to a plurality of lead terminals of one surface mount component is referred to as a land group.
Similarly, if the surface mount component is the connector 851 shown in FIG. A group 812 is formed.
The plurality of lands 802 constituting these land groups 811 and 812 are composed of a first land 802a and a second land 802b having a different shape from the first land 802a.
Specifically, among the lands 802 constituting each of the land groups 811 and 812, the lands 802b at the four corners are made larger (for example, about 1.5 times) than the other lands 802a.

FIG. 252 is a front view illustrating the configuration of the production control board protection case.
253 and 254 are exploded perspective views of the production control board case.
As shown in FIGS. 252 to 254, a large number of electronic components including a host CPU, VDP, and image ROM are mounted on the image control board 70z in the performance control board case (performance board case) 700.
As mentioned above, the printed wiring board of the image control board 70z uses a double-sided mounting method in which various electronic components and connectors are mounted on both the component side and the solder side of the printed wiring board as a mounting method for mounting electronic components. Ru.

The effect board case 700 includes a lower case piece 710 and an upper case piece 720.
The effect control board and the image control board 70z are housed in the inner package formed by the control board storage part 711 of the lower case piece 710 and the control board storage part 721 of the upper case piece 720.
The effect board case 700, particularly the upper case piece 720, is provided with a ventilation hole 725, unlike the main board case 200z and the payout board case 400 described above.
In addition, the seal parts 1560 and 1566 for writing the opening person and opening date that were pasted on the main board case 200z and the payout board case 400 are not pasted on the upper case piece 720 of the production board case 700. Not yet.
Therefore, the effect board case 700 is not provided with a caulking part for sealing the effect board case 700, which is provided in the main board case 200z and the payout board case 400.

On the other hand, on the upper case piece 720 of the performance board case 700, an opaque seal portion 1580 containing an explanation regarding the volume setting is pasted near the volume changeover switch 36z.
Correspondingly, a position display section 541 is provided on the rear surface of the upper case piece 720 of the effect board case 700.
As described above, the image control board 70z is a double-sided mounting board, and the electronic components mounted on the front side (game board side) cannot be directly visually inspected.
Furthermore, since the image control board 70z simply has the function of outputting performance images and sound, unlike the main control board 50 and the payout control board 60z, there is a risk that the ROM chip etc. may be illegally replaced. is low.
Therefore, since there is little need to visually check the board surface through the seal, the opaque seal portion 1580 can be attached to the effect board case 700.
Further, for the same reason, a caulking part (sealing part) for sealing the effect board case 700 is not provided.
As a result, the sticker portion 1566 provided with the entry area 1567 for writing in the person who opened the performance board case 700 and the date of opening is also not pasted.

The position display section 541 may be provided on the front side of the upper case piece 720.
In addition, in this embodiment, the position display part 541, which is a pasting position mark indicating the position where the seal part 1580 is pasted, can take the following form.
That is, the position display section 541 is a mark that surrounds the entire circumference of the seal section 1580 on the same surface or the back surface of the upper case surface to which the seal section 1580 is attached, and a mark that surrounds the entire circumference of the seal section 1580 on the same surface or the back surface of the upper case surface to which the seal section 1580 is attached. This is the mark on the L-shaped side.
The position display section 541 is a linear convex section provided so as to surround the periphery of the seal section 1580.
The position display section 541 is a linear recess provided so as to surround the seal section 1580 on the same surface as the seal section 1580.
The position display portion 541 is a linear convex portion provided on the back surface of the seal portion 1580 so as to surround the periphery of the seal portion 1580.
The position display section 541 is a linear recess provided on the back surface of the seal section 1580 so as to surround the periphery of the seal section 1580.

The position display section 541 is an L-shaped linear convex provided on the same surface as the seal section 1580 so as to surround a predetermined corner of the seal section 1580.
The position display section 541 is an L-shaped linear recess provided on the same surface as the seal section 1580 so as to surround a predetermined corner of the seal section 1580.
The position display portion 541 is an L-shaped linear protrusion or recess provided on the back surface of the seal portion 1580 so as to surround a predetermined corner.
The position display section 541 is a position mark that is provided so as to surround the seal section 1580 and is neither a convex nor a recess.

The seal part 1561 provided on the upper case piece 220 surface of the main board case 200z, the seal part 1560 as a main board management number seal, and the QR code (registered trademark) of the tamper-proof seal 250 extend the main control board 50. The distance from the virtual plane is different. The distance from the virtual surface (main control board 50) to the QR code (registered trademark) of the tamper-evident seal 250 is shorter (nearer).
This is because, as shown in FIG. 241 and the like, the QR code (registered trademark) 253 of the tamper-proof sticker 250 is located at a lower position than the upper surface of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z.

The board case of the gaming machine, including the main board case 200z, payout board case 400, and performance board case 700, has information displayed as a case seal, ROM seal, lead resistance color code, network resistance identification code, and IC. There are display information such as model number code, capacitor model number code, performance display monitor, and setting display monitor.
These pieces of information have different distances from each control board housed in the board case (main board case 200z, payout board case 400, effect board case 700). Furthermore, the distance from the top surface of the board case also differs. As explained above, the top surface of the board case is where the seal portion is attached and is also the highest point in the board case.
The seal part of the board case part is pasted on the highest point of the board case, the ROM seal is pasted on the ROM mounted on the board inside the case, and the display information of the performance display monitor, setting display monitor, etc. is on the board. displayed on the performance display monitor and setting display monitor provided in the. Naturally, the height of these pieces of information differs based on the control board.

In addition, in this embodiment, the ROM legs of the control boards (main control board 50, payout control board 60z, image control board 70z) stored in the board case are visible, and the ROM legs are not hidden by the seal. , Attach the sticker to the top of the board case. When the board case is viewed from above, the ROM legs are not hidden by the seal portion, even if only partially.
In this embodiment, although the electronic components including the ROM may be hidden when viewed from above, they can be seen from the viewing section when viewed from a different angle.
A transparent connector is installed as a connection part of the ROM to the control board (main control board 50, payout control board 60z, image control board 70z) so that it can be seen at a glance that no tampering has been done to the ROM leg.
The identification information provided on the case piece of the board case has indications that indicate different distances to the control boards (main control board 50, payout control board 60z, and image control board 70z). For example, the identification information displayed on the upper case piece, lower case piece, and cap (in the case of the main board case) is based on the distance from the control board (main control board 50, payout control board 60z, image control board 70z). They are different, and the positional relationship is also different. Furthermore, on the control boards (main control board 50, payout control board 60z, image control board 70z), the color of the area where electronic components are installed is different from the color of the area where the manufacturer's name is displayed.

<Substrate structure of main control board>
The configuration (layout) of the main control board accommodated in the main board case of this embodiment is not limited to that described above, such as in FIG. 235.
FIG. 255 is a diagram for explaining another configuration of the main control board according to this embodiment, and in particular is a diagram showing the configuration of the component side (surface) of the main control board.
The basic configuration of the main control board is the same as that shown in FIGS. 235 and 236, but in the example shown in FIG. 255(a), the main control board has a performance display monitor (performance display section) 600, and a setting display monitor (setting display section) 650. The main control board 50 also includes a setting key switch 660 and an RWM clear switch 680.

The performance display monitor 600 displays the base value of the gaming machine.
The base value is a numerical value that indicates the performance of the gaming machine, such as how much it pays out in normal conditions (low probability no time saving) excluding special conditions such as jackpot, variable probability gaming state, time saving gaming state etc. be.
For example, if there are 50 prize balls when the player shoots out 100 game balls in a low-accuracy time saving game, the base value is "50".
The number of game balls hit by the player is called the number of outs, and in the gaming machine 1, a low number is given for each total number of outs (usually 60,000) in all gaming states including jackpot, variable probability gaming state, and time-saving gaming state. A base value for accurate time saving and no time is calculated and displayed on the performance display monitor 600.
The base value of low-probability time-saving no-time is expressed as (number of payouts of low-probability time-saving no-time/number of outs of low-probability time-saving no-time).

The performance display monitor 600 will be explained. The performance display monitor 600 includes a display and a circuit section on the main control board 50. A display unit including a display section and a circuit section may be mounted on the main control board 50.
The display displays 4-digit numbers arranged horizontally. Place a dot point below the number. Of the four digits, the two digits on the left are the identification segment, and the two digits on the right are the ratio segment.

FIG. 255(b) is a diagram illustrating the display of the performance display monitor, and the performance display monitor 600 repeatedly displays the following four types of information in sequence.
As shown in (b-1) to (b-4), the identification segment displays the values of "bL.", "b1.", "b2.", and "b3." by switching them in sequence, and The corresponding base value is displayed on the segment.
The display switching time for "bL.", "b1.", "b2.", and "b3." is approximately 5.0 seconds.
For example, "bL.xx" is displayed for 5.0 seconds, "b1.yy" is displayed for 5.0 seconds, "b2.zz" is displayed for 5.0 seconds, and "b3.ww" is displayed for 5.0 seconds. 2 seconds, and then "bL.xx" is displayed again for 5.0 seconds.
"bL." shown in (b-1) indicates the base value for every 60,000 total outs, and this is a real-time value during measurement.
"b1." shown in (b-2) indicates the base value of the low probability time saving no time when the total number of outs was 60,000 in the previous time.
"b2." shown in (b-3) indicates the base value of the low probability time saving no time when the total number of outs is 60,000 two times before.
"b3." shown in (b-4) indicates the base value of the low probability time saving no time when the total number of outs was 60,000 three times before.

Here, performance display processing by the main control board 50 will be explained.
The main CPU 50az starts counting the number of outs (total number of outs) in all gaming states from the first power-on (RWM all clear).
In (b-1), the main CPU 50az flashes "bL." in the identification segment and displays "--" in the ratio segment until the total number of outs reaches an arbitrary number less than 300.
In (b-2), "b1." is made to blink in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.
In (b-3), "b2." is made to blink in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.
In (b-4), "b3." is made to blink in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.

After that, the main CPU 50az initializes the total number of out pieces, the number of payout pieces when there is no time saving with low accuracy (low probability number of payout pieces), and the number of pieces out when there is no time saving with low accuracy (number of pieces with low probability out), and starts the first measurement. .
The main CPU 50az performs the following processing until the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the first time.
That is, in (b-1), "bL." is displayed in the identification segment, and the base value of low probability time saving and zero time is calculated and displayed in real time in the ratio segment.
Note that when the number of low-probability outs is 0 to 5,999, "bL." is blinked, and when the number of low-probability outs is 6,000 or more, "bL." is lit.
In (b-2), "b1." is made to blink in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.
In (b-3), "b2." is made to blink in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.
In (b-4), "b3." is made to blink in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.
Then, the main CPU 50az stores the final value of the ratio segment of the identification segment "bL." of the first measurement as AA.

When the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the first time, the main CPU 50az initializes the total number of outs, the number of low-probability payouts, and the number of low-probability outs, and starts the second measurement.
The main CPU 50a performs the following processing until the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the second time.
That is, in (b-1), "bL." is displayed in the identification segment, and the base value of low probability time saving and zero time is calculated and displayed in real time in the ratio segment.
Note that when the number of low-probability outs is 0 to 5999, "bL." is blinked, and when the number of low-probability outs is 6000 or more, "bL." is lit.
Also, in (b-2), "b1." is turned on in the identification segment, and the saved AA is displayed in the ratio segment.
Further, in (b-3), "b2." is made to blink in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.
Further, in (b-4), "b3." is made to blink in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.
The final value of the ratio segment of the identification segment "bL." of the first measurement is saved as AA.
The final value of the ratio segment of the identification segment "bL." of the second measurement is saved as BB.

When the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the second time, the main CPU 50az initializes the total number of outs, the low probability payout number, and the low probability out number, and starts the third measurement.
The main CPU 50az performs the following processing until the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the third time.
That is, in (b-1), "bL." is displayed in the identification segment, and the base value of low probability time saving and zero time is calculated and displayed in real time in the ratio segment.
Note that when the number of low-probability outs is 0 to 5999, "bL." is blinked, and when the number of low-probability outs is 6000 or more, "bL." is lit.
Also, in (b-2), "b1." is turned on in the identification segment, and the saved BB is displayed in the ratio segment.
Also, in (b-3), "b2." is turned on in the identification segment, and the saved AA is displayed in the ratio segment.
Also, in (b-4), "b3." is made to blink in the identification segment, and "--" is displayed in the ratio segment.
The final value of the ratio segment of the identification segment "bL." of the first measurement is saved as AA.
The final value of the ratio segment of the identification segment "bL." of the second measurement is saved as BB.
The final value of the ratio segment of the identification segment "bL." of the third measurement is saved as CC.

When the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the third time, the main CPU 50az initializes the total number of outs, the number of low-probability payouts, and the number of low-probability outs, and starts the fourth measurement.
The main CPU 50az performs the following processing until the total number of outs reaches 60,000 for the fourth time.
That is, in (b-1), "bL." is displayed in the identification segment, and the base value of low probability time saving and non-time is calculated and displayed in real time in the ratio segment.
Note that when the number of low probability outs is 0 to 5999, "bL." is blinked, and when the number of low probability outs is 6000 or more, "bL." is lit.
Also, in (b-2), "b1." is turned on in the identification segment, and the saved CC is displayed in the ratio segment.
Also, in (b-3), "b2." is turned on in the identification segment, and the saved BB is displayed in the ratio segment.
Also, in (b-4), "b3." is made to blink in the identification segment, and the saved AA is displayed in the ratio segment.
When the total number of outs reaches 60,000 next time, the main CPU 50az repeats the fifth and subsequent measurements in the same manner as described above.

The board case 200z of this embodiment may be used to accommodate the main control board of a reel gaming machine (Pachi-slot machine). In that case, the game information display included in the main control board may be Displays information such as the role ratio of Pachislot machines.
The performance display monitor 600 described above is a type of gaming information display device that shows gaming information of gaming machines. It also includes information such as.
A game information display device that displays information such as the winning ratio of a pachi-slot machine is called a winning ratio monitor.
The role ratio monitor is
(1) Cumulative advantageous section ratio (2) Consecutive winning ratio for every 6,000 games (3) winning ratio for every 6,000 games (4) Cumulative consecutive winning ratio (5) Displaying the cumulative winning ratio.
Here, the advantageous section ratio is the ratio of the number of advantageous section games to the total number of games. Further, the advantageous section is a section in which it is possible to give instructions such as push order navigation.
The winning ratio and the consecutive winning ratio are the ratios of the number of coins paid out for bonuses (so-called bonuses) to the total number of coins paid out.
The role ratio is calculated for all the role objects, and the continuous role ratio is calculated for the object while the role object continuous operation device is operating.
The game information display device that shows the game information of the game machine may also include such a winning ratio monitor, but in this embodiment, the monitor for displaying the base value of the pachinko gaming machine will be explained in detail, and the winning ratio monitor will be explained in detail. A detailed explanation of the ratio monitor is omitted.

Next, the setting display monitor 650 will be explained. The setting display monitor 650 displays the setting values of the gaming machine 1.
As described above, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment can change the probability of winning a jackpot by changing the settings (FIG. 199(a)).
The setting display monitor 650 is mounted inside the main control board case 200z, and includes a one-digit display as shown in FIG. 255(c), and displays any one of the setting values shown in FIG. can display two values.
These setting values may be displayed on the performance display monitor 600, and the setting display monitor 650 may not be provided.

The setting display monitor 650 will be explained. The setting display monitor 650 is installed for the purpose of clearly indicating to the players that the setting change device is installed, clearly indicating the operating method to the game parlor staff, and preventing fraud related to the settings.
Settings can be displayed using numerical values or non-numeric symbols. When using numerical values, the setting is displayed using one of the numerical values "1", "2", "3", and "4" depending on the set value. If the setting value is from "1" to "6", select one of the numbers "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6" according to the setting value. use.

For the setting operation, for example, the setting key switch 660 and the setting switch 670 described above are used.
The setting key switch 660 is a switch that triggers a transition to a "setting change state" and a "setting confirmation state." Operate using keys.
The setting key switch 660 can take two states, OFF/ON, and can maintain each state. Further, the key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state.
Setting key switch 660 is mounted inside main control board case 200z.
The setting switch 670 is a switch that changes settings when in a setting change state, and is mounted at an arbitrary position that cannot be operated by the player.
The setting switch 670 can also be used as the RWM clear switch 680 and the like.

When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 660 turned on and the RWM clear switch 680 turned on, the gaming machine 1 shifts to a "setting change state" for changing settings.
When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 660 turned ON and the RWM clear switch 680 turned OFF, the gaming machine 1 shifts to a "setting confirmation state" for checking the settings.

Setting change processing by the main control board 50 will be explained.
(1) When the gaming machine 1 is powered off, the setting display monitor 650 is off. (2) The setting key switch 660 is turned on by an operation by a setting person such as a game parlor staff member. The setting display monitor 650 is still in the off state.
(3) When the RWM clear switch 680 is turned on by the setting person's operation and the gaming machine is powered on in this state, the main CPU 50az shifts the gaming machine 1 to the "setting change state". The main CPU 50az causes the setting display monitor 650 to display the current setting state. (4) In this state, when the setting switch 670 (or RWM clear switch 680) is pressed, the main CPU 50az sequentially changes the setting values and displays the changed (currently being set) setting values on the setting display monitor 650. Display.
(5) When the setting key switch 660 is turned off by the setting person's operation, the main CPU 50az confirms the setting value and turns off the setting display monitor 650.
When the performance display monitor 600 described above also serves as the setting display monitor 650, the main CPU 50az displays the setting value in the "setting change state" to any segment (digit) of the performance display monitor 600. conduct.
When the main CPU 50az confirms the set value by turning off the setting key switch 660 by the setting person's operation, the main CPU 50az starts displaying the performance described above on the performance display monitor 600.

The setting confirmation process by the main control board 50 will be explained.
(1) When the gaming machine 1 is in a power OFF state, the setting display monitor 650 is in an off state.
(2) The setting key switch 660 is turned on by the setting person's operation. The setting display monitor 650 is still in the off state.
(3) In this state, if the gaming machine is powered on without the RWM clear switch 680 being turned on, the main CPU 50az shifts the gaming machine 1 to a setting confirmation state. The main CPU 50az causes the setting display monitor 650 to display the current setting state.
When the setting key switch 660 is turned off by the setting person's operation, the main CPU 50az ends the setting confirmation state and turns off the setting display monitor 650.
When the performance display monitor 600 described above also serves as the setting display monitor 650, the main CPU 50az uses any segment (digit) of the performance display monitor 600 to display the setting value during the "setting confirmation state". conduct.
When the main CPU 50az ends the setting confirmation state by turning off the setting key switch 660 by the setting person's operation, the main CPU 50az starts displaying the performance described above on the performance display monitor 600.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 255, the main control board 50 is provided with connectors 771 to 776 on the component surface.
The plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged in order from left to right at the lower end of the main control board 50.
Although not shown in FIG. 256 below, the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are connected to six openings provided at the bottom of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z, similar to that shown in FIG. 233. It is arranged inside the section 779.
A performance display monitor 600 and a setting display monitor 650 provided on the component side of the main control board 50 are both provided on the upper end side of the main control board 50.
That is, the connectors 771 to 776, the performance display monitor 600, and the setting display monitor 650 are provided at opposite positions on the main control board 50.
With this arrangement, the cables and harnesses connected to the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 do not obstruct the visual recognition of the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 by the inspector.
In particular, since the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 are provided at the upper ends sufficiently apart from the connectors 771 to 776, the cables and harnesses hanging from the connectors can be removed from the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650. It does not interfere with the field of view of the inspector who is trying to visually check.

The configuration of the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 50 in FIG. 255 is the same as that in FIG. 235(b).
Further, the main control board 50 in FIG. 255 uses a printed wiring board 701 in which wiring patterns are formed on both sides of the printed board, similar to those in FIGS. 236(a) and 236(b).
In the printed wiring board 701, as a mounting method for mounting electronic components, a single-sided mounting method is adopted in which various electronic components and connectors are mounted only on the component side 701a of the printed wiring board 701. The printed wiring board 701 is the same as that shown in FIGS. 236(a) and 236(b), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

256 is a diagram showing the main board case of this embodiment when the main control board described in FIG. 255 is housed, (a) shows a perspective view of the assembly, and (b) shows a front view of the assembly. The figure shows. 257 is an exploded perspective view of the main board case shown in FIG. 255, including the pedestal.
In the description of FIGS. 256 and 257, members having the same configuration as those in the above embodiment (particularly, FIGS. 199 to 234, 237, and 238) are indicated by the same reference numerals, and detailed explanations will be omitted as appropriate.
A seal portion 1560 and a seal portion 1561 are attached to the main board case shown in FIGS. 256 and 257.
Further, as in FIGS. 199 to 234 and 237 to 238, identification marks 520 are attached to the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240.

The seal portion 1560 is attached to a position display portion 561 provided at the lower part of the left side in the left-right direction of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z. The seal portion 1561 is attached to a position display portion 561 provided at the upper right portion of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z.
The seal portions 1560 and 1561 are both made of a light-transmitting material, and in this embodiment, as an example, they are transparent (made of a transparent material).
Seal portions 1560 and 1561 are each placed across a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223). Note that, in FIG. 256, illustrations of various electronic components such as a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223) located in front of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 are omitted.

The seal portion 1560 will be explained.
The seal portion 1560 is a seal for managing the main board.
In this example, a seal body (base portion) 1560A of the seal portion 1560 is provided with a watermark to prevent forgery. That is, the seal portion 1560 (opener display sticker) is a processed seal in which a watermark is applied to the seal portion main body 1560A.
A "watermark" is a display that looks different depending on the viewing angle, and various types of watermarks can be applied, such as those using holograms and those that look different depending on the physical shape. .
However, the sealing member main body 1560A is transparent even though it has been subjected to a predetermined process (watermarking), and at least has high light transmittance to ensure a certain level of visibility.

The seal part 1560 has a blank entry area (input field) 1570, a code part 1572, and an information display part 1573 in a black frame with a heading such as "Main Board Management Number" on the seal part main body 1560A. We are prepared.
The entry area 1570, the code area 1572, the information display area 1573, and the character displays associated with these areas, which will be described later, are non-transparent with low translucency because the transparent material of the seal body 1560A is not exposed. Department.
The seal portion 1560 includes a plurality of non-transparent parts, and it is difficult to visually recognize the main control board 50 inside the main board case 200z through these non-transparent parts.
The code section 1572, information display section 1573, and writing area 1570 as non-transparent sections are provided at positions on the seal section main body 1560A that do not overlap with the integrated main ROM 502, the performance display monitor 600, and the setting display monitor 650.

On the other hand, the transparent material of the seal body 1560A is exposed and the transparent material of the seal body 1560A is exposed and the areas other than the writing area 1570, the code area 1572, the information display area 1573, and the text display area that will be described later attached to these areas are translucent. The transparent portion 1574 has a high
The light-transmitting part 1574 is the above-mentioned viewing part that allows the electronic component 595 on the main control board 50 in the main board case 200z to be seen and confirmed through the transparent material.

In the main board case 200z, the main control board 50 is visible through the seal member 1560 and the main board case 200z.
Therefore, the inspector can easily check the main control board 50. Therefore, the inspector can check the main control board 50 through the seal member 1560 and easily determine whether or not fraud is being committed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Moreover, regardless of the presence or absence of a transparent part or a non-transparent part, the seal part 1560 is attached to a position where the seal part 1562 affixed to the integrated main ROM 502 on the main control board 50 is visible from all angles. ing.
In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of a transparent part or a non-transparent part, the entire seal part 1560, including the writing area 1570, code part 1572, and information display part 1573, does not overlap with the integrated main ROM 502 from any angle. It is set up so that it is located.
Therefore, when main board case 200z is viewed from the front, integrated main ROM 502 is always visible through main board case 200z.
Therefore, the inspector can easily check the integrated main ROM 502. Therefore, the inspector can check the integrated main ROM 502 and easily determine whether or not fraud is being committed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
Regardless of the presence or absence of a transparent part or a non-transparent part, the entire seal part 1560, including the writing area 1570, the code part 1572, and the information display part 1573, can be viewed from any angle on the performance display monitor 600 or the setting display monitor. It is provided at a position that does not overlap with 650.
Therefore, when main board case 200z is viewed from the front, performance display monitor 600 and setting display monitor 650 can be visually recognized through main board case 200z.

In addition, in FIG. 256, it cannot be said that the seal part 1560 and the performance display monitor 600 are located in the vicinity, but the seal part 1560 does not overlap with the integrated main ROM 502 or the performance display monitor 600, and the performance display monitor 600 If all the conditions are satisfied, such as being at a position sufficiently apart from the connectors 771 to 776 and that the sealing part 1561 does not overlap the performance display monitor 600, the sealing part 1560 and the performance display monitor 600 are located close to each other. There may be. For example, the performance display monitor 600 may be located at the position indicated by the broken line above the seal portion 1560 in FIG. 256(b).
In this case, the inspector can check the performance display monitor 600 and the seal portion 1560 simultaneously at a glance.

The display contents of the seal portion 1560 will be explained in detail below.
The entry area 1570 is an area for entering the person who opened the main board case 200z and the date of opening.
The writing area 1570 is a white base formed on a transparent material on which writing can be done with a pen or the like.
For example, six entry areas 1570 are provided, three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction, in which three sets of "opener" and "opening date" can be entered.
The writing area 1570 is printed with a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) base.
Above the entry area 1570, headings such as "Opened by" and "Date opened" are printed in black, and on the left side of each entry area, a circled number indicating the number of the entry area is printed.
That is, above the entry area 1570 in the upper left corner, "Opener" is printed in black. Above the entry area 1570 in the upper right corner, "date opened" is printed in black. A circle 1 is printed on the left side of the upper left entry area 1570. A circle 2 is printed on the left side of the entry area 1570 at the vertical center on the left side. A circle 3 is printed on the left side of the lower left entry area 1570.
For example, when the inspector opens the main board case 200z, the inspector writes the name of the inspector in the entry area 1570 on the left, and writes the date of opening the main board case 200z in the entry area 1570 on the right. . Note that the inspector may write in the entry area 1570 the year, month, and day when it was confirmed whether or not the main control board 50 was tampered with.

The cord portion 1572 is provided at the upper left portion of the seal portion 1560. Code section 1572 includes predetermined information. The code section 1572 is a section from which information is read by another device, and for example, a QR code (registered trademark), barcode, etc. is printed in black in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area. There is. In this embodiment, as an example, the code section 1572 includes a QR code (registered trademark).

The code section 1572 is linked to, for example, information stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as "other device") and indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50.
For example, a URL (Uniform Resource Locator), which is information included in the code section 1572, is read by a camera installed in a mobile information terminal or the like. The information mobile terminal uses the URL to access other devices via the network. As a result of accessing other devices, the information displayed on the mobile information terminal includes the delivery destination of the main control board 50 (for example, the name of the store where the gaming machine 1 was delivered), and whether the gaming machine 1 has been disposed of. Contains information such as. This allows the inspector to easily confirm information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 50 and information such as whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded. Therefore, the inspector can check the information on the delivery destination and easily determine whether or not a fraud has been committed in which the main control board 50 from a different delivery destination has been installed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Information display section 1573 includes various information. The information display section 1573 may include the same information as the identification display 529, for example. In this embodiment, as an example, a character string "EF001" is printed in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area on the information display section 1573. The character string is, for example, the management number of the main control board 50. Using the management number, the inspector can check information such as the delivery destination of the gaming machine 1 and whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been disposed of, based on information linked to the management number held by the manufacturer. Note that the character string in the information display section 1573 may include information corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, model, etc. Further, the rectangular region of the information display section 1573 and the rectangular basin of the code section 1572 are connected in the left-right direction.

The light-transmitting portion (peeping portion) 1574 included in the seal portion 1560 will be described.
The transparent part 1574 includes a writing area 1570, a code part 1572, an information display part 1573, a notation of "main board management number", a frame, a notation of the person who opened the seal, a date of opening, and circles 1 to 15 in the seal main body 1560A. This is an area other than the notation 3.
The light-transmitting portion 1574 is, for example, a region extending in the left-right direction and existing between three rows of writing regions 1570 in the vertical direction.
The light-transmitting portion 1574 is also a region extending in the left-right direction and existing between the code portion 1572 and the information display portion 1573 arranged left and right, and the upper two writing areas 1570.
The light-transmitting portion 1574 is also a region extending in the vertical direction between the two rows of writing regions 1570 in the left-right direction.
The inspector can check the electronic component 595 (see FIG. 255(a)) through the light-transmitting portion 1574. Therefore, compared to the case where the transparent portion 1574 is not provided, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not tampering has been performed on the electronic component 595. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, allowing players to play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

The seal portion 1561 will be explained.
The seal portion 1561 is attached to a position where the seal portion 1562 attached to the integrated main ROM 502 on the main control board 50 is visible from all angles.
The seal portion 1561 is provided at a position that does not overlap the integrated main ROM 502 from any angle.
Therefore, when main board case 200z is viewed from the front, integrated main ROM 502 is always visible through main board case 200z.
The seal portion 1561 is provided at a position that does not overlap the performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 from any angle.
Therefore, when main board case 200z is viewed from the front, performance display monitor 600 and setting display monitor 650 can be visually recognized through main board case 200z.
Since the contents written on the seal portion 1561 are the same as those in FIG. 237, the description thereof will be omitted.
Further, a seal portion 1562 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502. Since the seal portion 1562 is the same as in FIGS. 233 and 237, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The main control board 50 shown in FIGS. 256 and 257 includes a setting key switch 660 and an RWM clear switch 680.
The RWM clear switch 680 will be explained.
As shown in FIGS. 256 and 257, the RWM clear switch 680 on the main control board 50 is not directly exposed. A recess 688 is provided in the upper case piece 220 of the board case 200z, and an opening 687 is provided in the recess 688.
As can be seen from FIGS. 256(b) and 257, the operating member 685 is provided at a position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 680, and when a staff member or the like presses the operating member 685, the pressed operating member 685 RWM clear switch 680 is pressed. This causes the RWM clear switch 680 to be operated.
A cover member 686 is provided within the recess 688 . The cover member 686 is rotatably supported within the recess 688 between a first position in which the operating member 685 is closed and cannot be operated, and a second position in which the operating member 685 is opened and operable. has been done.
By moving the operating member 685 to the second position, the RWM clear switch 680 can be operated.
By doing so, it is only necessary to provide the opening 687 in the board case 200z with a size that allows the operation member 685 to be inserted therein. Furthermore, the operation member 685 cannot be operated unless the cover member 686 is opened. Therefore, unauthorized access to the inside of the board case 200z can be prevented.
The end of the RWM clear switch 680 may be exposed through the opening 687 so that it can be directly operated without being operated using the operating member 685.

The setting key switch 660 is provided with a keyhole into which a key is inserted in the end face of a cylindrical member protruding from the main control board 50.
The end face of the setting key switch 660 provided with a keyhole is exposed through an opening 661 provided in the upper case piece 220 of the board case 200z.
A staff member or the like can operate the setting key switch 660 by inserting a key into the keyhole.
The end face of the setting key switch 660 provided with a keyhole is slightly lower than the surface of the board case 200z.

FIG. 258 is a diagram for explaining still another configuration of the main control board according to the present embodiment, and in particular is a diagram showing the configuration of the component side (surface) of the main control board.
The basic configuration of the main control board 50 is the same as that shown in FIG. 255, but in the example shown in FIG. 255(a), the main control board 50 includes a performance display monitor 600 on its component side (surface) A setting display monitor 650 is not provided.
The function of the setting display monitor 650 is shared by the performance display monitor 600, and an independent setting display monitor 650 is not provided.
Alternatively, the main control board 50 shown in FIG. 258 is a main control board of a gaming machine that does not have a setting change function.
Note that, as shown in FIG. 255, the main control board 50 is provided with connectors 771 to 776 on the component surface.
The plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged in order from left to right at the lower end of the main control board 50.

Although not shown in FIG. 256 below, the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are connected to six openings provided at the bottom of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z, similar to that shown in FIG. 233. It is arranged inside the section 779.
A performance display monitor 600, which is provided on the component side of the main control board 50 and can also be used as a setting display monitor 650, is provided on the upper end side of the main control board 50.
That is, the connectors 771 to 776 and the performance display monitor 600 are provided at opposite positions on the main control board 50.
With this arrangement, the cables and harnesses connected to the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 do not obstruct visual recognition by the inspector checking the performance display monitor 600.
In particular, since the performance display monitor 600 is provided at the upper end sufficiently far away from the connectors 771 to 776, the cables and harnesses hanging down from the connectors are in the field of view of the inspector who is trying to visually check the performance display monitor 600. No interference.

The configuration of the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 50 in FIG. 258 is the same as that in FIG. 235(b).
Further, the main control board 50 in FIG. 258 uses a printed wiring board 701 in which wiring patterns are formed on both sides of the printed board, similar to FIGS. 236(a) and 236(b).
In the printed wiring board 701, as a mounting method for mounting electronic components, a single-sided mounting method is adopted in which various electronic components and connectors are mounted only on the component side 701a of the printed wiring board 701. The printed wiring board 701 is the same as that shown in FIGS. 236(a) and 236(b), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

259 is a diagram showing the main board case of this embodiment when the main control board described in FIG. 258 is housed, (a) shows a perspective view of the assembly, and (b) shows a front view of the assembly. The figure shows. 260 is an exploded perspective view of the main board case shown in FIG. 259, including the pedestal.
In the description of FIGS. 258 and 259, members having the same configuration as those in the above embodiment (particularly, FIGS. 199 to 234, 237, and 238) are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted as appropriate.
A seal portion 1560 and a seal portion 1561 are attached to the main board case shown in FIGS. 258 and 259.
Further, as in FIGS. 199 to 234 and 237 to 238, identification marks 520 are attached to the main control board 50, the integrated main ROM 502, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240.
The seal portion 1560 is attached to a position display portion 561 provided at the lower part of the left side in the left-right direction of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z. The seal portion 1561 is attached to a position display portion 561 provided at the upper right portion of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200z.

The seal portions 1560 and 1561 are both made of a light-transmitting material, and in this embodiment, as an example, it is assumed that the seal portions 1560 and 1561 are transparent. Seal portions 1560 and 1561 are each placed across a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223). Note that, in FIG. 256, illustrations of various electronic components such as a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 223) located in front of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 are omitted.
In this example, a seal body (base portion) 1560A of the seal portion 1560 is provided with a watermark to prevent forgery.
The configuration of the seal portion 1560, which is a processed seal, is the same as that in FIGS. 237 and 256, so detailed explanation will be omitted.

The transparent material of the seal body 1560A is exposed except for the code section 1572, information display section 1573, and writing area 1570 (white base), and the electronic components on the main control board 50 can be confirmed through the transparent material. I can do it.
In the main board case 200z, the main control board 50 is visible through the seal member 1560 and the main board case 200z.
Therefore, the inspector can easily check the main control board 50. Therefore, the inspector can check the main control board 50 through the seal member 1560 and easily determine whether or not fraud is being committed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Moreover, regardless of the presence or absence of a transparent part or a non-transparent part, the seal part 1560 is attached to a position where the seal part 1562 affixed to the integrated main ROM 502 on the main control board 50 is visible from all angles. ing.
In addition, regardless of the presence or absence of a transparent part or a non-transparent part, the entire seal part 1560, including the writing area 1570, code part 1572, and information display part 1573, does not overlap with the integrated main ROM 502 from any angle. It is set up so that it is located.
Therefore, when main board case 200z is viewed from the front, integrated main ROM 502 is always visible through main board case 200z.
Therefore, the inspector can easily check the integrated main ROM 502. Therefore, the inspector can check the integrated main ROM 502 and easily determine whether or not fraud is being committed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
The seal portion 1560 is located at a position where the entire seal portion 1560, including the writing area 1570, the code portion 1572, and the information display portion 1573, does not overlap the performance display monitor 600 from any angle, regardless of whether there is a transparent portion or a non-transparent portion. It is set up so that
Therefore, when main board case 200z is viewed from the front, performance display monitor 600 can be visually recognized through main board case 200z.

In addition, in FIG. 259, it cannot be said that the seal part 1560 and the performance display monitor 600 are located in the vicinity, but the seal part 1560 does not overlap with the integrated main ROM 502 or the performance display monitor 600, and the performance display monitor 600 If all conditions are met, such as the performance display monitor 600 being located at a sufficient distance from the connectors 771 to 776 and the seal portion 1561 not overlapping, then even if the seal portion 1560 and the performance display monitor 600 are located close to each other, good. For example, the performance display monitor 600 may be located at a position indicated by a broken line above the seal portion 1560 in FIG. 259.
At this time, the inspector can check the performance display monitor 600 and the seal portion 1560 simultaneously at a glance.

The contents written on the seal portion 1561 are the same as those in FIG. 237, so the description thereof will be omitted.
Further, a seal portion 1562 is attached to the integrated main ROM 502.
The seal portion 1562 is the same as in FIGS. 233 and 237, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As explained above, the main control board 50 is equipped with an integrated main ROM 502 that controls the game, a performance display monitor 600 that displays the performance of the gaming machine, and other board components 595 that are different from these. There is. A transparent seal member 1560 is attached to the main control board 50.
Thereby, other board components 595 can be visually recognized through the transparent seal portion 1560 and the main board case 200z. Further, the integrated main ROM 502 and the performance display monitor 600 can be directly viewed through the main board case 200z.
By watermarking the transparent portion of the predetermined seal portion 1560 that has a transparent portion and a plurality of non-transparent portions and that needs to be attached to the main board case 200z, duplication of the seal portion 1560 can be prevented.
In addition, by pasting the seal part 1560 in a position that does not overlap the integrated main ROM 502 and the performance display monitor 600, the integrated main ROM 502, which is an important board component, is not affected by watermarking or multiple non-transparent parts. The visibility of the performance display monitor 600, which needs to be read accurately, can be ensured.
Regarding the board parts 595 whose importance is lower than that of the integrated main ROM 502 and the performance display monitor 600, the status can be confirmed through watermarking from the gaps between the plurality of non-transparent parts and the surrounding transparent parts (peeping parts 1574). can. Even if there are multiple non-transparent parts, visibility of the board components can be ensured by the transparent parts.
Further, predetermined information, such as necessary information such as identifying the integrated main ROM 502, can be displayed in the non-transparent portion. Different information can be displayed or written on each of the non-transparent parts.

In addition, when the main control board 50 separately includes a setting display monitor 650, by pasting the seal part 1560 in a position that does not overlap with the integrated main ROM 502, performance display monitor 600, and setting display monitor 650, it is possible to The visibility of the integrated main ROM 502, which is an important board component, the performance display monitor 600, which needs to be read accurately, and the setting display monitor 650, can be reliably ensured without being affected by a certain non-transparent part.
Regarding the board parts 595 that are less important than the integrated main ROM 502, the performance display monitor 600, and the setting display monitor 650, the status can be determined through watermarking from the gaps between multiple non-transparent parts and the surrounding transparent parts (peeping parts 1574). can be confirmed. Even if there are multiple non-transparent parts, visibility of the board components can be ensured by the transparent parts.

The performance display monitor 600 may be placed at the lower end of the main control board 50 instead of at the upper end. In that case, it is desirable that the connectors 771 to 776 be placed on the upper end side opposite to (opposite to) the performance display monitor 600.
The performance display monitor 600 may be placed on the left end side or the right end side of the main control board 50. In that case, it is desirable that the connectors 771 to 776 be arranged at the opposite (opposite) end to the performance display monitor 600.
Furthermore, as described above, the performance display monitor 600 may be placed inside the main control board 50 instead of at the end thereof. Even in that case, it must be placed in a position that does not overlap with the cables, harnesses, seal portions 1560, etc. extending from the connectors 771 to 776.
In this embodiment, the RWM clear switch 680 is described as being disposed on the main control board 50, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and it may be disposed on the payout control board 60z.
Further, in this embodiment, the setting key switch 660 is described as being disposed on the main control board 50, but the configuration is not limited thereto.
The setting key switch 660 can be placed at a separate position from the main control board 50 as long as it is electrically connected to the main control board 50.
The RWM clear switch 680 and the setting key switch 660 may be used in common.

FIG. 261 is a diagram showing the display transition of the image display device and the performance display section when RWM is cleared.
In the following description, the configurations of the performance display section and the setting display section are based on the configurations shown in FIGS. 255(b) and 255(c).
It is assumed that the open detection switch 105z is ON.
When performing RWM clear, in (1), the setting key switch 660 is turned OFF, the RMW clear switch 680 is turned ON, and the gaming machine 1 is powered on.
After the power is turned on, in (2), a display such as "POWER ON" is displayed on the image display device 31z, indicating that the power is being turned on. The performance display monitor 600 remains off.
When the RWM clearing process is completed, in (3), a message such as "RWM clearing has been completed" is displayed on the image display device 31z to notify that the RWM clearing has been completed.
Then, the performance display monitor 600 performs an initial operation. The initial operation is to repeatedly turn on all segments and then turn them off for 5 seconds.
When the initial operation for 5 seconds is completed, in (4), the performance display monitor 600 starts sequentially displaying performance values as explained in FIG. 255(b). In the image display device 31z, RWM clear notification continues.

FIG. 262 is a diagram showing the display transition of the image display device and the performance display section when changing settings in a case where the gaming machine includes a performance display section that also serves as a setting display section.
It is assumed that the open detection switch 105z is ON.
When changing the settings, in (1), turn on the setting key switch 660, turn on the RMW clear switch 680, and turn on the power of the gaming machine 1.
After the power is turned on, in (2), a display such as "POWER ON" is displayed on the image display device 31z, indicating that the power is being turned on. The performance display monitor 600 remains off.

At (3), the performance display monitor 600 displays the current setting values. If only one level of settings is available, "P" or "1" is displayed.
The set value is displayed, for example, in the leftmost segment of the four-digit segments of the performance display monitor 600, but may be displayed in other segments. Regardless of which digit it appears in, the setting value is displayed with a dot.
The image display device 31z displays a message such as "Settings are being changed" to notify that the settings are being changed. The setting value is not displayed on the image display device 31z. Furthermore, the audio output device 34 outputs a voice that notifies that settings are being changed, such as "Settings are being changed." The frame lamp 101z and the board lamp 100z may be caused to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, white) to notify that the settings are being changed.

When the setter operates the setting switch 670 or the RWM clear switch 680 that also serves as the setting switch 670, the performance display monitor 600 displays the set value for each change operation in (4). The changing operation can be performed as many times as necessary until the setting change is completed, and the setting value is changed by one step each time.
As described above, as the setting switch 670 or the RWM clear switch 680 that also serves as the setting switch 670 is operated, the setting increases one step at a time, such as from "1" to "2", and when the setting reaches "6", it reaches "1". return. During the change operation, no dots are displayed along with the setting value.
Meanwhile, the image display device 31z continues to display a message such as "Settings are being changed" to notify that the settings are being changed. The setting value is not displayed on the image display device 31z. The audio output device 34 also continues to output audio notifying that the settings are being changed. The frame lamp 101z and the board lamp 100z also continue to emit light.
During the setting change, a history of setting changes may be displayed on the image display device 31z in response to operations using the cross key 40z, the effect button 8z, etc.

When the setter turns off the setting key switch 660, in (5), the set value is determined by the value currently displayed on the performance display monitor 600. The performance display monitor 600 displays one of the setting values with dots.
At this time, the display and sound notifying that the settings are being changed may be continued, or may be ended. Instead of the display and audio notifying that the settings are being changed, the image display device 31z and the audio output device 34 display and output a message such as "Settings change completed" to notify that the settings change has been completed. You may go.

After that, in (6), a message such as "RWM clear has been completed" is displayed on the image display device 31z to notify that RWM clear has been completed.
Along with such a display, a sound such as "RWM clear has been completed" may be outputted from the audio output device 34 to notify that RWM clear has been completed.
Then, the performance display monitor 600 performs an initial operation. The initial operation is to repeatedly turn on all segments and then turn them off for 5 seconds.
When the initial operation for 5 seconds is completed, the performance display monitor 600 starts sequentially displaying performance values in (7). In the image display device 31z, RWM clear notification continues.

FIG. 263 is a diagram showing the display transition of the image display device, the performance display section, and the setting display section when changing settings in a case where the gaming machine is separately provided with a performance display section and a setting display section.
The main premise is that the open detection switch 105z is ON.
When changing the settings, in (1), turn on the setting key switch 660, turn on the RMW clear switch 680, and turn on the power of the gaming machine 1.
After the power is turned on, in (2), a display such as "POWER ON" is displayed on the image display device 31z, indicating that the power is being turned on. The performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 remain off.

At (3), the setting display monitor 650 displays the current setting values. If only one level of settings is available, "P" or "1" is displayed. Setting values are displayed with dots.
The image display device 31z displays a message such as "Settings are being changed" to notify that the settings are being changed. The frame lamp 101z and the board lamp 100z may be caused to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, white) to notify that the settings are being changed.
The setting value is not displayed on the image display device 31z. The performance display monitor 600 remains off.

When the setter operates the setting switch 670 or the RWM clear switch 680 that also serves as the setting switch 670, the setting display monitor 650 displays the set value for each change operation in (4). The changing operation can be performed any number of times until the setting change is completed, and the setting value is changed by one step each time.
As described above, as the setting switch 670 or the RWM clear switch 680 that also serves as the setting switch 670 is operated, the setting increases one step at a time, such as from "1" to "2", and when the setting reaches "6", it reaches "1". return. During the change operation, no dots are displayed along with the setting value.
Meanwhile, the image display device 31z continues to display a message such as "Settings are being changed" to notify that the settings are being changed. The setting value is not displayed on the image display device 31z. The performance display monitor 600 remains off.
During the setting change, a history of setting changes may be displayed on the image display device 31z in response to operations using the cross key 40z, the effect button 8z, etc.

When the setter turns off the setting key switch 660, the setting change is completed, and in step (5), the set value is determined with the value currently displayed on the setting display monitor 650. After that, the setting display monitor 650 turns off.
At this time, the display and sound notifying that the settings are being changed may be continued, or may be ended. Instead of the display and audio notifying that the settings are being changed, the image display device 31z and the audio output device 34 display and output a message such as "Settings change completed" to notify that the settings change has been completed. You may go.
Thereafter, in (6), a message such as "RWM clear has been completed" is displayed on the image display device 31z to notify that RWM clear has been completed.
Along with such a display, the audio output device 34 may output a voice message such as "RWM clearing has been completed" to notify that RWM clearing has been completed.
Then, the performance display monitor 600 performs an initial operation. The initial operation is to repeatedly turn on all segments and then turn them off for 5 seconds.
When the initial operation for 5 seconds is completed, the performance display monitor 600 starts sequentially displaying performance values in (7). In the image display device 31z, RWM clear notification continues.

FIG. 264 is a diagram showing the display transition of the image display device and the performance display section when confirming settings in a case where the gaming machine includes a performance display section that also serves as a setting display section.
It is assumed that the open detection switch 105z is ON.
When changing the settings, in (1), turn on the setting key switch 660, turn on the RMW clear switch 680, and turn on the power of the gaming machine 1.
After the power is turned on, in (2), a display such as "POWER ON" is displayed on the image display device 31z, indicating that the power is being turned on. The performance display monitor 600 remains off.

At (3), the performance display monitor 600 displays the current setting values. If only one level of settings is available, "P" or "1" is displayed.
The set value is displayed, for example, in the leftmost segment of the four-digit segments of the performance display monitor 600, but may be displayed in other segments. Regardless of which digit it appears in, the setting value is displayed with a dot.
The image display device 31z displays a message such as "Settings are being confirmed" to notify that the settings are being confirmed. In addition, a voice message indicating that the settings are being confirmed, such as "Settings are being confirmed", is output. The setting value is not displayed on the image display device 31z. The frame lamp 101z and the board lamp 100z may be made to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, white) to notify that the settings are being confirmed.
During setting confirmation, a history of setting changes may be displayed on the image display device 31z in response to operations using the cross key 40z, the effect button 8z, etc.

When the setter turns off the setting key switch 660, the setting confirmation ends, and the above-mentioned setting confirmation notification using audio and display ends.
At this time, the display and sound notifying that the settings are being checked may be continued, or may be ended. Instead of the display and audio notifying that the settings are being checked, a display or audio output such as "Settings confirmation has been completed" can be used on the image display device 31z and the audio output device 34 to notify that the settings confirmation has been completed. You may go.
Thereafter, in (4), a message such as "Power has been restored" is displayed on the image display device 31z to notify that the power has been restored.
Along with such a display, a voice such as "Power has been restored" may be output from the audio output device 34 to notify that the power has been restored.
Then, the performance display monitor 600 performs an initial operation. The initial operation is to repeatedly turn on all segments and then turn them off for 5 seconds.
When the initial operation for 5 seconds is completed, the performance display monitor 600 starts sequentially displaying performance values in (5). In the image display device 31z, RWM clear notification continues.

FIG. 265 is a diagram showing the display transition of the image display device, the performance display section, and the setting display section when confirming settings in a case where the gaming machine separately includes a performance display section and a setting display section.
It is assumed that the open detection switch 105z is ON.
When changing the settings, in (1), turn on the setting key switch 660, turn on the RMW clear switch 680, and turn on the power of the gaming machine 1.
After the power is turned on, in (2), a display such as "POWER ON" is displayed on the image display device 31z, indicating that the power is being turned on. The performance display monitor 600 and the setting display monitor 650 remain off.

At (3), the setting display monitor 650 displays the current setting values. If only one level of settings is available, "P" or "1" is displayed. Setting values are displayed with dots.
The image display device 31z displays a message such as "Settings are being confirmed" to notify that the settings are being confirmed. Further, the audio output device 34 outputs a voice notifying that the settings are being changed, such as "Settings are being changed."
The frame lamp 101z and the board lamp 100z may be made to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, white) to notify that the settings are being confirmed. The setting value is not displayed on the image display device 31z. The performance display monitor 600 remains off.
During setting confirmation, a history of setting changes may be displayed on the image display device 31z in response to operations using the cross key 40z, the effect button 8z, etc.

When the setter turns off the setting key switch 660, the setting confirmation ends, and the above-mentioned setting confirmation notification using audio and display ends. The setting display monitor 650 turns off.
At this time, the display and sound notifying that the settings are being checked may be continued, or may be ended. Instead of the display and audio notifying that the settings are being checked, a display or audio output such as "Settings confirmation has been completed" can be used on the image display device 31z and the audio output device 34 to notify that the settings confirmation has been completed. You may go.
Thereafter, in (4), a message such as "Power has been restored" is displayed on the image display device 31z to notify that the power has been restored.
Along with such a display, a voice such as "Power has been restored" may be output from the audio output device 34 to notify that the power has been restored.
Then, the performance display monitor 600 performs an initial operation. The initial operation is to repeatedly turn on all segments and then turn them off for 5 seconds.
When the initial operation for 5 seconds is completed, the performance display monitor 600 starts sequentially displaying performance values in (5). In the image display device 31z, RWM clear notification continues.

■This specification includes the following disclosures. A board on which a main control part that controls a game, an information display part that displays game information, and other board parts different from the main control part and the information display part are mounted, and a board that houses the board. The processed seal includes a case and a processed seal that has been subjected to watermark processing, the processed seal having a transparent part with high translucency and a plurality of non-transparent parts with low translucency, and the processed seal is attached on the board case at a position that does not overlap with the main control section and the information display section, and is attached to the other through the light-transmitting part between the plurality of non-light-transmitting parts and the board case. The game machine is characterized in that the board parts of the gaming machine are visible, the main control section is visible through the board case, and the information display section is visible through the board case.

■This specification includes the following disclosures. A board on which a main control part that controls a game, an information display part that displays game information, and other board parts different from the main control part and the information display part are mounted, and a board that houses the board. The processed seal includes a case and a processed seal that has been subjected to watermark processing, the processed seal having a transparent part with high translucency and a plurality of non-transparent parts with low translucency, and the processed seal is affixed on the board case at a position that does not overlap the information display part, and the other board component is visible through the transparent part between the plurality of non-transparent parts and the board case. , the gaming machine is characterized in that the information display section is visible through the board case.

■This specification includes the following disclosures. The processed seal includes a board on which a main control unit that controls a game and an information display unit that displays game information are mounted, a board case that accommodates the board, and a processed seal that is watermarked. has a transparent part having high light transmittance and a plurality of non-light transmitting parts having low light transmittance; The game machine is characterized in that the game machine is attached at a position that does not overlap with the board case, the main control section is visible through the board case, and the information display section is visible through the board case.

■This specification includes the following disclosures. The processed seal includes a board on which a main control unit that controls a game and an information display unit that displays game information are mounted, a board case that accommodates the board, and a processed seal that is watermarked. has a transparent part with high translucency and a plurality of non-transparent parts with low translucency, and the processed seal is pasted on the board case at a position that does not overlap the information display part. The game machine is characterized in that the information display section is visible through the board case.

■This specification includes the following disclosures. A board on which a main control part that controls a game, an information display part that displays game information, and other board parts different from the main control part and the information display part are mounted, and a board that houses the board. It includes a case and a processed seal subjected to watermark processing, the processed seal has a transparent part with high translucency and a non-transparent part with low translucency, and the processed seal has: It is attached on the board case at a position that does not overlap the main control section and the information display section, and the other board components are visible through the light-transmitting section and the board case, and the board The game machine is characterized in that the main control section is visible through the case, and the information display section is visible through the board case.

■This specification includes the following disclosures. A board on which a main control part that controls a game, an information display part that displays game information, and other board parts different from the main control part and the information display part are mounted, and a board that houses the board. It includes a case and a processed seal subjected to watermark processing, the processed seal has a transparent part with high translucency and a non-transparent part with low translucency, and the processed seal has: The information display section is attached on the board case at a position that does not overlap the information display section, and the other board components are visible through the transparent section and the board case, and the information display section is attached through the board case. It is characterized by a gaming machine that can be visually recognized.

■This specification includes the following disclosures. The processed seal includes a board on which a main control unit that controls a game and an information display unit that displays game information are mounted, a board case that accommodates the board, and a processed seal that is watermarked. has a light-transmitting part with high light-transmitting property and a non-light-transmitting part with low light-transmitting property, and the processed seal has the main control part, the information display part, on the substrate case, The game machine is characterized in that the game machine is attached at a position that does not overlap with the board case, the main control section is visible through the board case, and the information display section is visible through the board case.

■This specification includes the following disclosures. The processed seal includes a board on which a main control unit that controls a game and an information display unit that displays game information are mounted, a board case that accommodates the board, and a processed seal that is watermarked. has a light-transmitting part with high light-transmitting property and a non-light-transmitting part with low light-transmitting property, and the processed seal is affixed on the board case at a position that does not overlap with the information display part, The game machine is characterized in that the information display section is visible through the board case.

■This specification includes the following disclosures. A board on which a main control part that controls a game, an information display part that displays game information, and other board parts different from the main control part and the information display part are mounted, and a board that houses the board. a case, a seal having a transparent part with high translucency, and a plurality of entry fields that can be filled in by an administrator; The other board parts are pasted at a position that does not overlap with the information display part, the other board parts are visible through the transparent part between the plurality of entry fields and the board case, and the main control part is pasted through the board case. The gaming machine is characterized in that the information display section is visible through the board case, and the information display section is visible through the board case.

■This specification includes the following disclosures. A board on which a main control part that controls a game, an information display part that displays game information, and other board parts different from the main control part and the information display part are mounted, and a board that houses the board. A case, a seal having a transparent part with high translucency, and a plurality of entry fields that can be filled in by an administrator, the seal not overlapping the information display part on the board case. A game in which the other board parts are visible through the transparent part between the plurality of entry columns and the board case, and the information display part is visible through the board case. Features a machine.

■This specification includes the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls games and an information display unit that displays game information are mounted, a board case that houses the board, and a transparent part that has high transparency, which can be filled in by the administrator. a plurality of entry columns, and the seal is affixed on the board case at a position that does not overlap with the main control section and the information display section, and the seal is affixed on the board case at a position that does not overlap the main control section and the information display section, The game machine is characterized in that the main control section is visible through the board case, and the information display section is visible through the board case.

■This specification includes the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls games and an information display unit that displays game information are mounted, a board case that houses the board, and a transparent part that has high transparency, which can be filled in by the administrator. a plurality of entry fields, and a sticker having a plurality of entry fields, the sticker being affixed on the board case at a position that does not overlap the information display section, and the information display section being visible through the board case. It is characterized by a gaming machine.

■This specification includes the following disclosures. A board on which a main control part that controls a game, an information display part that displays game information, and other board parts different from the main control part and the information display part are mounted, and a board that houses the board. a case, a seal having a transparent part with high translucency, and an entry column in which an administrator can write; and the other board parts are visible through the transparent part and the board case, the main control part is visible through the board case, and the main control part is visible through the board case. The game machine is characterized in that the information display section is visible through the board case.

■This specification includes the following disclosures. A board on which a main control part that controls a game, an information display part that displays game information, and other board parts different from the main control part and the information display part are mounted, and a board that houses the board. a case, a seal having a transparent part with high translucency, and an entry column in which an administrator can write, and the seal is located on the board case at a position that does not overlap the information display part. The game machine is characterized in that the other board parts are visible through the transparent part and the board case, and the information display part is visible through the board case.

■This specification includes the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls games and an information display unit that displays game information are mounted, a board case that houses the board, and a transparent part that has high transparency, which can be filled in by the administrator. an entry field, and the seal is affixed on the board case at a position that does not overlap the main control section and the information display section, and the seal is affixed to the board case at a position that does not overlap the main control section and the information display section, and the seal is pasted on the board case at a position that does not overlap the main control section and the information display section. The gaming machine is characterized in that the main control section is visible and the information display section is visible through the board case.

■This specification includes the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls games and an information display unit that displays game information are mounted, a board case that houses the board, and a transparent part that has high transparency, which can be filled in by the administrator. an entry field, and the seal is affixed on the board case at a position that does not overlap the information display section, and the information display section is visible through the board case. , featuring gaming machines.

■This specification includes the following disclosures. A board on which a main control part that controls a game, an information display part that displays game information, and other board parts different from the main control part and the information display part are mounted, and a board that houses the board. A seal having a case, a transparent part with high translucency, and an information writing part in which predetermined information is written, and the seal is arranged on the board case to connect to the main control part, The information display section is attached to a position that does not overlap with the information display section, the other board components are visible through the transparent section and the board case, and the main control section is visible through the board case. The gaming machine is characterized in that the information display section is visible through the board case.

■This specification includes the following disclosures. A board on which a main control part that controls a game, an information display part that displays game information, and other board parts different from the main control part and the information display part are mounted, and a board that houses the board. a case, a seal having a transparent part with high translucency, and an information writing part in which predetermined information is written, and the seal is placed over the information display part on the board case. The gaming machine is characterized in that the other board parts are visible through the transparent part and the board case, and the information display part is visible through the board case. .

■This specification includes the following disclosures. A board on which a main control part for controlling games and an information display part for displaying game information are mounted, a board case for accommodating the board, a transparent part having high translucency, and predetermined information is recorded. an information writing section, and the seal is affixed on the board case at a position that does not overlap with the main control section and the information display section, and the seal is attached to the board case at a position that does not overlap the main control section and the information display section. The game machine is characterized in that the main control section is visible through the board case, and the information display section is visible through the board case.

■This specification includes the following disclosures. A board on which a main control part for controlling games and an information display part for displaying game information are mounted, a board case for accommodating the board, a transparent part having high translucency, and predetermined information is recorded. and a sticker having an information display area, the seal being affixed on the board case at a position that does not overlap the information display part, and the sticker having an information display part visible through the board case. It is characterized by a gaming machine that is possible.

■This specification includes the following disclosures. A board on which a main control part that controls a game, an information display part that displays game information, and other board parts different from the main control part and the information display part are mounted, and a board that houses the board. The processed seal includes a case and a processed seal that has been subjected to watermark processing, the processed seal having a transparent part with high translucency and a plurality of non-transparent parts with low translucency, and the processed seal is pasted on the board case at a position that does not overlap the main control section and the information display section, and is attached to the other through the light-transmitting part between the plurality of non-light-transmitting parts and the board case. The game machine is characterized in that the board parts of the gaming machine are visible, the main control section is visible through the board case, and the information display section is visible through the board case.

■This specification includes the following disclosures. A board on which a main control part that controls a game, an information display part that displays game information, and other board parts different from the main control part and the information display part are mounted, and a board that houses the board. The processed seal includes a case and a processed seal that has been subjected to watermark processing, the processed seal having a transparent part with high translucency and a plurality of non-transparent parts with low translucency, and the processed seal is affixed on the board case at a position that does not overlap the information display part, and the other board component is visible through the transparent part between the plurality of non-transparent parts and the board case. , the gaming machine is characterized in that the information display section is visible through the board case.

■This specification includes the following disclosures. The processed seal includes a board on which a main control unit that controls a game and an information display unit that displays game information are mounted, a board case that accommodates the board, and a processed seal that is watermarked. has a transparent part having high light transmittance and a plurality of non-light transmitting parts having low light transmittance; The game machine is characterized in that the game machine is attached at a position that does not overlap with the board case, the main control section is visible through the board case, and the information display section is visible through the board case.

■This specification includes the following disclosures. The processed seal includes a board on which a main control unit that controls a game and an information display unit that displays game information are mounted, a board case that accommodates the board, and a processed seal that is watermarked. has a transparent part with high translucency and a plurality of non-transparent parts with low translucency, and the processed seal is pasted on the board case at a position that does not overlap the information display part. The game machine is characterized in that the information display section is visible through the board case.

■This specification includes the following disclosures. A board on which a main control part that controls a game, an information display part that displays game information, and other board parts different from the main control part and the information display part are mounted, and a board that houses the board. It includes a case and a processed seal subjected to watermark processing, the processed seal has a transparent part with high translucency and a non-transparent part with low translucency, and the processed seal has: It is attached on the board case at a position that does not overlap the main control section and the information display section, and the other board components are visible through the light-transmitting section and the board case, and the board The game machine is characterized in that the main control section is visible through the case, and the information display section is visible through the board case.

■This specification includes the following disclosures. A board on which a main control part that controls a game, an information display part that displays game information, and other board parts different from the main control part and the information display part are mounted, and a board that houses the board. It includes a case and a processed seal subjected to watermark processing, the processed seal has a transparent part with high translucency and a non-transparent part with low translucency, and the processed seal has: The information display section is attached on the board case at a position that does not overlap with the information display section, and the other board components are visible through the transparent section and the board case, and the information display section is attached through the board case. It is characterized by a gaming machine that can be visually recognized.

■This specification includes the following disclosures. The processed seal includes a board on which a main control unit that controls a game and an information display unit that displays game information are mounted, a board case that accommodates the board, and a processed seal that is watermarked. has a light-transmitting part with high light-transmitting property and a non-light-transmitting part with low light-transmitting property, and the processed seal has the main control part, the information display part, on the substrate case, The game machine is characterized in that the game machine is attached at a position that does not overlap with the board case, the main control section is visible through the board case, and the information display section is visible through the board case.

■This specification includes the following disclosures. The processed seal includes a board on which a main control unit that controls a game and an information display unit that displays game information are mounted, a board case that accommodates the board, and a processed seal that is watermarked. has a light-transmitting part with high light-transmitting property and a non-light-transmitting part with low light-transmitting property, and the processed seal is affixed on the board case at a position that does not overlap with the information display part, The game machine is characterized in that the information display section is visible through the board case.

■This specification includes the following disclosures. A board on which a main control part that controls a game, an information display part that displays game information, and other board parts different from the main control part and the information display part are mounted, and a board that houses the board. a case, a seal having a transparent part with high translucency, and a plurality of entry fields that can be filled in by an administrator; The other board parts are pasted at a position that does not overlap with the information display part, the other board parts are visible through the transparent part between the plurality of entry fields and the board case, and the main control part is pasted through the board case. The game machine is characterized in that the information display section is visible through the board case, and the information display section is visible through the board case.

■This specification includes the following disclosures. A board on which a main control part that controls a game, an information display part that displays game information, and other board parts different from the main control part and the information display part are mounted, and a board that houses the board. A case, a seal having a transparent part having high translucency, and a plurality of entry columns that can be filled in by an administrator, the seal not overlapping the information display part on the board case. A game in which the other board parts are visible through the transparent part between the plurality of entry fields and the board case, and the information display part is visible through the board case. Features a machine.

■This specification includes the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls games and an information display unit that displays game information are mounted, a board case that houses the board, and a transparent part that has high transparency, which can be filled in by the administrator. a plurality of entry columns, and the seal is affixed on the board case at a position that does not overlap the main control section and the information display section, and the seal is affixed on the board case at a position that does not overlap the main control section and the information display section, The gaming machine is characterized in that the main control section is visible through the board case, and the information display section is visible through the board case.

■This specification includes the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls games and an information display unit that displays game information are mounted, a board case that houses the board, and a transparent part that has high transparency, which can be filled in by the administrator. a plurality of entry fields, and a sticker having a plurality of entry fields, the sticker being affixed on the board case at a position that does not overlap the information display section, and the information display section being visible through the board case. It is characterized by a gaming machine.

■This specification includes the following disclosures. A board on which a main control part that controls a game, an information display part that displays game information, and other board parts different from the main control part and the information display part are mounted, and a board that houses the board. a case, a seal having a transparent part with high translucency, and an entry column in which an administrator can write, and the seal is arranged on the board case to connect the main control unit and the information display. and the other board parts are visible through the transparent part and the board case, the main control part is visible through the board case, and the main control part is visible through the board case, and The game machine is characterized in that the information display section is visible through the board case.

■This specification includes the following disclosures. A board on which a main control part that controls a game, an information display part that displays game information, and other board parts different from the main control part and the information display part are mounted, and a board that houses the board. a case, a seal having a transparent part having high translucency, and an entry field in which an administrator can write, the seal being placed on the board case at a position that does not overlap the information display part. The game machine is characterized in that the other board parts are visible through the transparent part and the board case, and the information display part is visible through the board case.

■This specification includes the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls games and an information display unit that displays game information are mounted, a board case that houses the board, and a transparent part that has high transparency, which can be filled in by the administrator. an entry column, and the seal is affixed on the board case at a position that does not overlap the main control section and the information display section, and the seal is attached to the board case at a position that does not overlap the main control section and the information display section, and the seal is attached to the board case at a position that does not overlap the main control section and the information display section. The gaming machine is characterized in that the main control section is visible and the information display section is visible through the board case.

■This specification includes the following disclosures. A board on which a main control unit that controls games and an information display unit that displays game information are mounted, a board case that houses the board, and a transparent part that has high transparency, which can be filled in by the administrator. an entry field, and the seal is affixed on the board case at a position that does not overlap the information display section, and the information display section is visible through the board case. , featuring gaming machines.

■This specification includes the following disclosures. A board on which a main control part that controls a game, an information display part that displays game information, and other board parts different from the main control part and the information display part are mounted, and a board that houses the board. A seal having a case, a transparent part with high translucency, and an information writing part in which predetermined information is written, and the seal is arranged on the board case to connect to the main control part, The information display section is attached to a position that does not overlap with the information display section, the other board components are visible through the transparent section and the board case, and the main control section is visible through the board case. The gaming machine is characterized in that the information display section is visible through the board case.

■This specification includes the following disclosures. A board on which a main control part that controls a game, an information display part that displays game information, and other board parts different from the main control part and the information display part are mounted, and a board that houses the board. a case, a seal having a transparent part with high translucency, and an information writing part in which predetermined information is written, and the seal is placed over the information display part on the board case. The gaming machine is characterized in that the other board parts are visible through the transparent part and the board case, and the information display part is visible through the board case. .

■This specification includes the following disclosures. A board on which a main control part for controlling games and an information display part for displaying game information are mounted, a board case for accommodating the board, a transparent part having high translucency, and predetermined information is recorded. and a seal having an information display section, the seal being affixed on the board case at a position that does not overlap with the main control section and the information display section, The game machine is characterized in that the main control section is visible through the board case, and the information display section is visible through the board case.

■This specification includes the following disclosures. A board on which a main control part for controlling games and an information display part for displaying game information are mounted, a board case for accommodating the board, a transparent part having high translucency, and predetermined information is recorded. and a seal having a transparent information writing part, the seal being affixed on the board case at a position that does not overlap the information display part, and the seal having a transparent information writing part, the seal having It features a gaming machine that is visible.

Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, but can also be used for a reel-type gaming machine (so-called slot machine). Furthermore, it can also be used in a jankyu game machine or an arranged ball game machine.

Furthermore, the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative in all respects and should be considered not to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and range equivalent to the claims are included.

1 Gaming machine 45 First starting port 47 Second starting port 70 First image display device (display means)
70a Performance design (design)
110 Main control board (main control means)
110m Main control section (main control means)
130 Performance control board (performance control means)
130m Performance control section (performance control means)

Claims (1)

A game in which a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition, and a special game advantageous to the player can be executed when the fluctuating display of symbols executed on the first display means based on the determination results in a predetermined special result. On the machine,
The gaming state includes a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state,
Based on the establishment of the first starting condition for the first starting means or the establishment of the second starting condition for the second starting means, a plurality of It is possible to perform fluctuating production of the production design,
The stop display mode in which the plurality of production symbols are stopped and displayed in the variable production includes a first stop display mode in which the production symbols are stopped in a first pattern, and a second stop display mode different from the first stop display mode. a second stop display mode in which the production pattern is stopped by
The fluctuation performance results in a loss determination based on the first starting condition, which is performed from the maximum number of reservations in the normal gaming state, and the loss determination is based on the first starting condition, which is performed from the maximum number of reservations in the specific gaming state. The second stop display mode is more likely to be executed in the fluctuating effect,
It is possible to execute a design change performance that changes the display size of the performance design,
The variable performance that results in a loss determination based on the first starting condition in the normal gaming state is better than the variable performance that results in a loss determination based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state. There are many patterns,
It is possible to execute a special performance that changes the performance pattern to a predetermined mode when the variable performance starts and/or ends,
A gaming machine characterized by satisfying at least one of the following (i) and (ii).
(i) The variable effect based on the first starting condition in the normal gaming state is performed when the variable effect starts, rather than the variable effect based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state. There are many types of special performances mentioned above.
(ii) The variable effect based on the first starting condition in the normal gaming state is performed when the variable effect ends than the variable effect based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state. There are many types of special performances mentioned above.

Images